PORTA LINGUARUM ORIENTALIUM Neue Serie Herausgegeben von Werner Diem und Franz Rosenthal
Band 20
2000
Harrassowitz Verlag • Wiesbaden
Bentley Layton
A C O PTIC GRAMMAR With Chrestomathy and Glossary
Sahidic Dialect
2000
Harrassowitz Verlag • Wiesbaden
Contents Preface
page ix
Select Coptic Linguistic Bibliography Text Editions Consulted
xvi
Introduction: The C optic Language Abbreviations
xiii
1
5
Part 1 The Basic Components of the Sentence and Their Phrasal Syntax 1
Fundamental Components: Phonemes, M orphs, Syllables, and Alphabet 11
1.
Determinators: Articles and D eterm inator Pronouns
V
Specifiers: C ardinal N umbers and O ther Specifiers
■I.
Personal Morphs: Personal Pronouns and Affixes
s.
Nouns
54 63
75
Gendered Common Nouns i>a>MG 85 Genderless Common N ouns n o n h p o c Proper Nouns m a p ia 97 Possessed Nouns p c u - q 102 Cl.
35
90
lintity Term s, Entity Statements, and T heir Phrasal Syntax
7.
Inflected M odifiers
K.
Verbs
106
118
124
Adverbial M odifiers: Prepositions and A dverbs M)
Conjunctions and Initial Attitude M arkers
II .
hiterjections
I .V
Nexus Morphs and Negators
158
176
185 189
Hart 2 The Basic Clause Patterns and the Imperative Iy
riic Nominal Sentence
197 Vll
CON I I N I S
f'Or the Basic Scntcncc of Existence aiul Indication I'ormed with e i c —, see chapter 21 14.
The Durative Sentence
15.
Non-durative Conjugation
o
\ n - and
233 251
16.
The Imperative
291
17.
The Suffixally Conjugated Verboid na .n o y - c|
18.
Predication of Possession: ‘H ave’ o y N T e - ( m Mik.Y) 305 O ther Expressions o f Possession
297
305 312
For the Impersonal Predicate (2k.NA.rKH etc.), see chapter 22
Part 3 Complex Clause Patterning 19. The Conversions
319
Relative Conversion 324 Circumstantial Conversion 335 P reterit Conversion 347 Focalizing Conversion 352 20. The Cleft Sentence
367
21. Sentences of Existence
e ic -
and Indication Formed
w ith o y w -
and
381
22.
The Entity Statement as Subject Expansion
391
23.
The Adverbial Clause Construction: Adverbial Clauses and Infinitive Phrases 397
24.
Reported Speech and Cognition: Direct and Indirect Discourse
Part 4 Time Reference 25.
The Coptic Tense System
433
Chrestomathy 443 Glossary to the Chrestomathy 453 Signals o f the Basic Sentence Patterns and Conversions Subject Index 469 Select Coptic Index
Vlll
501
465
420
Preface
AS A N E W C E N T U R Y o f Coptic studies begins, this gram m ar is m eant lo provide a fundamental reference tool describing and documenting the clas sical dialect, Sahidic, found in literary texts of th e fourth to eighth centuries A.D. in Egypt. Of all the Coptic dialects, Sahidic conveniently shared the greatest num ber of features w ith others; it also had a prestigious association with the orthodox Christian establishment. The pow erful combination o f con venience and prestige tum ed Szihidic into a nationwide medium o f communi cation for orthodox ecclesiastical and monastic Christianity in early Coptic speaking Egypt. It is the idiom o f m ost native authors in Coptic. I’his book does not presuppose a technical knowledge o f linguistics; undefined linguistic jargon is carefully avoided. I have explained each grammatical term, even ‘noun’ and ‘verb’, where it is first discussed in the book— and specifical ly as applying to Coptic, w hich bears little structural resemblance to the famil iar Indo-European languages of Europe. Definitions can also be located through the subject index. I also call attention to the select Coptic index, w hich can help readers to identify many ambiguous o r puzzling grammatical forms. Unlike m y predecessor Ludw ig Stem,* I have draw n extensively from the writings o f Apa Shenoute {alias Sinouthios or Shanudah, A.D. ca. 350—465), now regarded as a major stylist in Szihidic and an important source of histori cal information; one of the secondary aims o f this grammar is to make Shenoute’s Coptic m ore accessible. T he vast corpus o f Shenoutean evidence was hardly available in S tem ’s day (1880), nor is m uch of it found in the more recent hand grammars.^ B u t within the last few years Shenoute’s language has been richly documented and presented to linguists through the efforts o f Ariel Shisha-Halevy and Shenoute’s literary corpus h as at last been put in order by Stephen Emmel,"* though a unified critical edition of Shenoute’s works does not yet exist. I cite works originally know n under Shenoute’s authorship with the siglum Sh (more than 800 such citations w ill be found below). A few o f ' L. Stem, Koptische Grammatik (Leipzig 1880; reprint, Osnabriick 1971). ^ In the Porta series, the present volume replaces Georg Steindorff’s brief Koptische (irammatik (Berlin 1894; 2d ed. 1904). ^ Both his “Circumstantial Sentence” and the Categories, as w ell as the valuable Chrestomathy, draw examples entirely from Shenoute. S. Emmel, “Shenoute’s Literary Corpus” (Ph.D. dissertation, Yale University, 1993).
ix
I ' K i i A< i;
these in fact belong lo other authors, bul for simplicity o f rcfcrcncc I mostly keep this siglum even where attribution to Shenoutc can no longer be accept ed; they are in any case a good sample o f standardized Szihidic. I cite the pub lished works by page and line of the edition, there being no conventional ref erence system by title and chapter. Citations from unpublished manuscripts are transcribed from microfilm copies. Naturally, I have also drawn many illustrations from the Bible. There is no reason to doubt that Biblical Sahidic Coptic is normal, idiomatic, and pol ished in character even though its wording and rhetoric are also governed by the Greek original. The Biblical version is the earliest literary monument of Sahidic Coptic, and m ust have exercised a pow erful influence on all subse quent Sahidic literature. The examples cited in this grammar thus represent three somewhat distinct linguistic layers: Bible, the Shenoute corpus, and other ecclesiastical literature. Despite m y persona] involvem ent in editing the fourth-century “ G nostic” m anuscripts discovered near Nag Hammadi, I entirely refrain from citing those works here, for they scarcely illustrate the standardized Sahidic dialect.^ At the other end of the scale I make no refer ence to the non-literary texts (personal, legal, m agical, medical, graffiti), whose linguistic character shows striking divergences from standard literaiy Sahidic and which deserve their ow n special grammars. Coptic citations are mostly quoted from m odem printed editions; within typo graphical limits, they reproduce o r om it superlinear strokes according to the practice o f their m odem editors, w hether or not this corresponds to the manu scripts. Citations are thus what a reader can expect to find in one modem edi tion o r another; for some texts, several editions are cited. Only a few published citations have been recollated against the manuscript (mostly from microfilm copy), and these are indicated. English translations of the Bible are more or less according to the Revised Standard Version (© 1952-71, Division of Christian Education o f the National Council of Churches of Christ U.S.A.), and sometimes B renton’s English in the Bagster Septuagint, both very often with alteration. Translations of other works are my own. Occasional observa tions on the English translation of Coptic, which appear w ithin parentheses or in smaller type, are n o t a part of the grammatical description; their only pur pose is practical, and they can be safely ignored by technical readers. ^ Those Nag Hammadi texts whose language resembles Sahidic display a non-Standard m ix of isoglosses, sometimes fluctuating, from all over Egypt. Their dialectal peculiarities extend beyond phonology, word formation, and lexicon into the area o f syntax. For similar if less urgent reasons 1 ignore the Bruce, Askew, and Berlin Gnostic codexes. Even the work entitled Pistis Sophia, whose language in many ways resembles standard Biblical Sahidic, shows peculiarities. In any case, the features that all these manuscripts share with standardized Sahidic are, I trust, well illus trated in this book by other texts, even as their non-Standard peculiarities are signalled by tacit omission here.
i ' R i : i A( I-
Twenticth-ccntury Coptic linguistics was established by two scholars, both ori ented to the mainstream of European descriptive structuralism; P. V, EmStedt or Jcm stcdt (1890-1966) in St. Petersburg and H. J. Polotsky (1905-1991) in Jerusalem. Em.^tedt (a student o f Baudouin de Courtenay) laid down a theo retical basis, with far-reaching implications, for investigating Coptic phrasal syntax and govemance by his analysis of C optic direct object syntax, noun determination, and referential linkage.^ At a larger analytical level, the basic ('optic clause types and m ost of the com plex clause pattem ing w ere correctly analyzed fo r the first time b y Polotsky.^ Furthermore, Polotsky’s highly inno vative studies on focalization pattem s in Coptic^ opened a new door not only lor Coptic studies but also for Egyptology in general and even for general lin guistics. The analytical outlook, comprehensive knowledge, and scrupulous tncthod o f these two linguists prepared several generations o f successors, in various countries, to undertake their own creative, ambitious, and original Studies of both special problems and th e overall structure of C optic, following in their footsteps.^ This ongoing tradition— now international in scope— is non-dogmatic; it continues to revise, innovate, and develop. T he Select Coptic I .inpuistic Bibliography below lists items, mostly from within the tradition, to u hich the present grammar is especially indebted. These are works that I con fidently recommend to the reader—above all, A . Shisha-H alevy’s Coptic Cram rm tical Categories (1986), a book that has radically transform ed the study of Coptic syntax. l iiially, a word about traditional terminology. Readers accustomed to the tra ditional terms o f Coptic gram m ar in English, French, or G erm an will find many of these included, as cross-references, in the subject index at the end of this book. But as might be expected in a new full-scale gram m ar some old lernis had to be abandoned or replaced, and some new ones created, when the overall structure of the language more precisely came into view. For these " "t)as koptische Praesens und die Ankniipfungsarten des naheren Objekts” (1927); “K deteriiiinacii v koptskom jazyke” (1949, German translation 1978). Em stedt’s influence upon the rest ••t l-ufDpean scholarship was delayed by international political circumstances. His extensive notes 111! a complete survey of Coptic grammar were edited only twenty years after his death, as Iwlfiltivanija po grammatike koptskogo jazyka, Moscow 1986; a bibliography of his publications IS UK ludcd in the preface to that vclume, pp. 51-55. The writings o f Emstedt’s successor A. I. M.inskuja for the years 1955 to 1987 are listed in Journal o f Coptic Studies 1 (1990): 1-12 I Hil>liographie A. 1. Elanskaja,” by P. Nagel). “ I’he Coptic Conjugation System” (1960), “Nominalsatz und Cleft Sentence” (1962), ■( iriind/iige des Nominalsatzes” (ca. 1972; published in his Grundlagen vol. 1, 1987). " lii'ginning with “ Les temps seconds” in his Etudes (1944). ' 1 he underlying linguistic approach o f this tradition owes a great deal to classic descriptive siiiK Uiralism in the tradition of Saussure, Bloomfield, Bally, Hjelmslev, etc.— synchronic in per•.|H»live, oriented to syntax, non-universal, and viewed from a reader’s standpoint of decipheriiu-Ht; ami based on textual philology, as befits a non-living language. It is described in more detail (t\ A .Shisha-Halevy, Coptic Grammatical Categories, pp. 5-13, and passim; and W.-P. Funk, I «)war(l a Synchronic Morphology of Coptic.”
xi
innovations I ask the readers’ indulgence, hoping they will ltK>k beyond the new names and consider, instead, the enduring structural entities that they merely serve to label.'® *** It remains fo r me to thank those whose generosity made my work possible. The greatest debt is to my revered teacher H. J. Polotsky, whose analytical brilliance, vast knowledge, absolute respect for data, cool judgement, and unstinting hospitality left a deep mark on all his students and, m ost cenainly, upon this book; and, likewise, to Ariel Shisha-Halevy— ^to both o f these schol ars I am deeply indebted for twenty years of study, discussion, and textual analysis together; and to my first instructor o f Coptic and general linguistics Thom as Lambdin. Prof. Shisha-Halevy very generously commented in detail o n several successive drafts o f this grammar; his brilliant criticism and tireless help pointed the way to improvements o f the text o n almost every page and saved me from countless errors; I gratefully acknowledge his collaboration. The project o f a new Coptic grammar was first proposed to m e by the late Prof. Roland Toumay, O.P. and Prof. (now Cardinal) Carlo Martini, S.J. then directors respectively o f the Ecole Biblique de Jerusalem and the Pontificio Istituto Biblico in Rome. The preparation of this book was made possible by a grant from the R esearch Tools Program of the National Endow m ent for the Humanities, an independent federal agency (which asks its grant recipients to state that their w ork does not necessarily represent the view of the Endowment). Its publication at an affordable price was generously subvented by the Yale Endowm ent for Egyptology, funded by the Marilyn M. Simpson Charitable Trust, through the good offices of Prof. W illiam Kelly Simpson. T o both I am extremely grateful. I am grateful also to the adm inis trators of Yale U niversity for their unwavering encouragem ent o f Coptic Studies; likew ise to my old colleagues at the E cole Biblique et Archeologique Fran9aise de Jerusalem for a scholarly environment and warm collegiality second to none; the H arvard Society o f Fellows for extremely The old second tenses are here called the ‘focalizing conversion’. Polotsky’s bipartite and tripartite conjugation patterns are here the ‘durative sentence’ and ‘non-durative conjugation’. Personal pronoun is mostly replaced by ‘personal morph’, status constructus by ‘prenominal state’, and status pronominalis by ‘prepersonal state’. The Verstarker have become ‘inflected modifiers’. Old adjective verbs are here a subclass of the ‘suffixally conjugated verboid’ (chap ters 17—18), and the term adjective is entirely avoided. In chaptCT 3 is isolated a pronoun-like word class etc.), which, for brevity’s sake, I simply call the ‘specifier’. The noun (chapter 5) is analyzed as a set of four distinct classes. ‘Initial attitude marker’ is tentatively distinguished from conjunction (chapto- 10). On the other hand, important composite categories o f ‘entity term’, ‘entity statement’, and ‘nexus morph’ had to be established for syntactic and semantic reasons (chapters 6 and 12).
xii
(O l'lK
I.IN (iU lS T l(
l U B L K X i K AIM! Y
>»cucn)us rcscarch support; the A m erican Council o f Learned Societies under a program funded by the National Endowment fo r the Humanities, for an assisting grant; so also to Stephen Emmel for com puterization of the project; David Brakke for creating an analytical database o f the Sahidic New Testament, and the Packard Foundation for the Humanities, w hich supported Inin; W olf-Peter Funk for advice on dialectology; Howard Gralla for consul tation on certain matters o f design; R obert Babcock (Beinecke Library); Anne Boud’hors (CNRS, Paris); and the A. W hitney G risw old Hum anities Research Fund of Yale University. Citations were checked by Andrew Crislip. For book design I acknowledge the m odel o f the University of ( ’hicago M anual o f Style, 12th edition. I am indebted to Franz Rosenthal for iirranging the publication o f this grammar, and to Stanley Possick for essen tial personal support. ^ iilc University, New Haven (Connecticut)
S i;i,H C T C O P T IC L IN G U IS T IC B IB L IO G R A P H Y (’ iTiiy. J. Coptic Etymological Dictionary. Cambridge 1976. ( rimi, W. E. A Coptic Dictionary. Oxford 1939. IK-puydt, L. “ On Coptic Sounds.” Orientalia 62 (1993): 338-75. I Jiiiiskaya (Jelanskaja), A. I. “ Slucai nesoglasovanija ‘podxvatyvajuScego mestoimenija’ s antecedentom opredelitel’nogo predlozenija v koptskom jazyke” IOccurrences of Disagreement between the “Resumptive Pronoun” and the Antecedent o f the Relative Clause in Coptic]. In Akademija nauk SSSR, Institut narodov Azii. Drevnij Egipet i drevnjaja Afrika (Festschrift for V. V. Struve), edited by I. S. Kacnel’son, pp. 21-29. Moscow 1967. I luiucl, S. “ Proclitic Forms of the Verb in Coptic.” In Studies Presented to Hans ./akoh Polotsky, edited by D. W. Young, pp. 131-46. East Gloucester, Massachusetts (USA) 1981. I'iiist(*dt. See Jemstedt riiiik, W.-P. “ Formen und Funktionen des interlokutiven Nominalsatzes in denkoptischen Dialekten.” Langues orientates anciennes: philologie et linguistique 3 (1991):1-75. . “ Toward a Synchronic Morphology of Coptic.” In The Future o f Coptic Studies, edited by R. McL. Wilson, pp. 104-24. Leiden 1978. “ Zur Syntax des koptischen Qualitativs.” Zeitschriftfiir agyptische Sprache und AUertumskunde 104 (1977);25-39; 105 (1978):94-114. •••laiiskaja. See Elanskaya IniistcJi (r.rn5tedt), P. “K determinacii v koptskom jazyke.” Sovetskoe vostokovedenic 6 ( 1949): 52-62. German translation by Peter Nagel, “ Zur Determination im Koptischen.” Universitat Halle-Wittenberg, Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift, ( Jcsellsch. u. sprachw. Reihe 27.3 (1978):95—106.
xiii
ACi;
Jemstedt {continued) ------ . “Das koptische Praesens und die Ankniipfungsarlen des niihcrcn Objekts.” In Akademija nauk SSSR (St. Petersburg), Doklady 1927:69-74. Layton, B. “Compound Prepositions in Sahidic Coptic.” In Studies Presented to Hans Jakob Polotsky, edited by D. W. Young, pp. 239-68. East Gloucester, Massachusetts (USA) 1981. ------ . “The Coptic Determinator Syntagm and Its Constituents. ” Journal o f Coptic Studies 1 (1990);79-97. ------ . “A Penultimate Personal Object Morph in Classical Sahidic Coptic.” In Akten des 6. internationalen Koptologenkongresses, Mimster, 20.-26. Juli 1996, edit ed by S. Emmel, M. Krause, S. G. Richter, and S. Schaten, vol. 2, pp. 347-58. Sprachen und Kulturen des christlichen Orients, vol. 6. Wiesbaden 1999. Polotsky, H. J. Collected Papers. Jerusalem 1971. Especially the following: “ The Coptic Conjugation System.” Pp. 238-68 (from Orientalia 29 [1960]:392-422). “ Etudes de syntaxe copte.” Pp. 102-207 (originally a separate monograph in: Publications de la societe d ’archeologie copte. Cairo 1944). “Modes grecs en copte?” Pp. 208-25 (from Coptic Studies in Honor o f Walter Ewing Crum, pp. 73—90. Boston 1950). “ Nominalsatz und Cleft Sentence im Koptischen.” Pp. 418—35 (from Orientalia 31 [1962]:413-30). “Zur koptischen Lautlehre II.” Pp. 358-62 (from Zeitschrift fiir dgyptische Sprache und Altertumskunde 69 [1933]: 125-29). “ Zur koptischen W ortstellung.” Pp. 398-417 (from Orientalia 30 [19611:294-313). ------ . Grundlagen des koptischen Satzbaus. 2 vols. American Studies In Papyrology, nos. 27, 28. Decatur, Georgia (USA) 1987, 1990. Quecke, H. “ [Einleitung.] ” In Das Johannesevangelium saidisch, pp. 3—67. Barcelona and Rome 1984. ------ “ [Einleitung.]” In Das Lukasevangelium saidisch, pp. 3-90. BiU'celona 1977. ------ . “ [Einleitung.]” In D as Markusevange/ium saidisch, pp. 2—59. Barcelona 1972. Satzinger, H. “ Phonologie des koptischen Verbs (sa‘idischer Dialekt).” In Festschrift Elmar Edel 12. Mdrz 1979, edited by Manfred Gorg and Edgar Pusch, pp. 343-68. Bamberg 1979. Shisha-Halevy, A. “ Achmlmoid Features in Shenoute’s Idiolect.” Le Museon 89 (1976): 353-66. ------ . “ Apodotic efs5tm.” Le Museon 86 (1973):455-66. ------ . “ The Circumstantial Present as an Antecedent-less (i.e. Substantival) Relative in Coptic.” Journal o f Egyptian Archaeology 62 (1976): 134-37. ------ . “ The Circumstantial Sentence in Shenoute’s Coptic” [in modem Hebrew, with English summary]. Ph.D. dissertation, Hebrew University (Jerusalem), 1972. (Published in a limited edition.) ------ . “ Commentary on Unpublished Shenoutiana in the British Library.” Enchoria 6 (1976):29-61. ------ . Coptic Grammatical Categories: Structural Studies in the Syntax of Shenoutean Sahidic. Analecta Orientalia, vol. 53. Rome 1986.
xiv
(O i 'l K
I IN(aM. Sri <
HI Ki.l()(;KA Pii Y
. Coptic Gramniatu al Chrestomathy: A Course for Academic and Private Study. Oricntalia Lovaniensia analecta, vol. 30. Louvain 1988. . “7'he Coptic Circumstantial Present with an Empty (Impersonal) Actor-Suffix and Adverbial Function.” Journal of Egyptian Archaeology 61 (1975):256-57. — . “ Existential Statements in the Sahidic New' Testament.” Gottinger Miszellen 77 (1984): 67-79. —. “ Grammatical Discovery Procedure and the Egyptian-Coptic Nominal Sentence.” Oricntalia 56 (1987): 147—75. —. “Notes on Some Coptic Nominal Sentence Patterns.” In Studien zur Sprache und Religion Agyptens: Zu Ehren von Wolfhart Westendorf, pp. 175-89. Gottingen 1984. — . The Proper Name: Structural Prolegomena to Its Syntax, a Case Study in Coptic. Beihefte zur Wiener Zeitschrift fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes, vol. 15. Vienna 1989. — . “ Protatic efsotm.” 43 (1974):369-81; 46 (1977): 127-28. —. “ Sahidic.” In The Coptic Encyclopedia, vol. 8, pp. 194-202. —. “ Some Reflections on the Egyptian Conjunctive.” In Divitiae Aegypti: Koptologische und verwandte Studien zu Ehren von Martin Krause, edited by Cacilia Fluck et al., pp. 300-314. Wiesbaden 1995. “ The ‘Tautological Infinitive’ in C optic.” Journal of Coptic Studies 1 (1990):99-127. —. “ Two New Shenoute-Texts from the British Library II (Commentary).” Orientalia 44 (1975):469-84. “ What’s in a Name? On Coptic ‘he of’.” Enchoria 13 (1985):97-102. Stern, L. Koptische Grammatik, Leipzig 1880. -. “ Versuch iiber eine gleichmassige Worttrennung im Koptischen.” Zeitschriftfiir dgyptische Sprache und Altertumskunde 24 (1886): 56-73. Wilson, M. Coptic Future Tenses: Syntactical Studies in Sahidic. Janua linguarum. Series practica, vol. 64. The Hague 1970. W(»rrell, W. Coptic Sounds. With an appendix by H. Shohara. Ann Arbor, Michigan [USA] 1934. Worrell’s conclusions about the probable location of Coptic dialects must now be modified in light of important new manuscript evidence for dialects of Middle Egypt. I hi- complete linguistic and philological bibliography can be located by consulting: W. K.iiiuiierer, E. M. Husselman, and L. A. Shier, A Coptic Bibliography (Ann Arbor, Michigan [USA] 1950); supplemented by Unione accademica nazionale, Corpus dei niaiioscritti copti letterari, Coptic 'Bibliography, edited by T. Orlandi (Rome 1989-); .iiul The Coptic Encyclopedia, vol. 8 (1991). Coptic literature is catalogued in: K.inuuercr et al.. Bibliography, Orlandi, Bibliography, and T. Orlandi, Elementi de lingua c letteratura Copta (Milan 1970). Articles on Coptic authors and genres can be ItMiiui in The Coptic Encyclopedia, vols. 1-7 (1991).
XV
Text Editions Consulted
Amelineau, E., ed. Monuments pour servir a I’histoire de I’Egypte chretienne aux IV^ et siecles. Mission archeologique frangaise au Caire, M6moires, vol. 4. Paris 1888. ------ , ed. CEuvres de Schenoudi. 2 vols. Paris 1907, 1911. Aranda Perez, G., ed. El evangelio de son Mateo en copto sahidico (texto de M 569, estudio preliminar y aparato critico). Madrid 1984. Bouriant, U. Fragments coptes relatifs au candle d ’Ephese. Mission archeologique fran^aise au Caire, Memoires, vol. 8. Paris 1892. Budge, E. A. Wallis, ed. Coptic Apocrypha in the Dialect o f Upper Egypt. London 1913. ------ , ed. Coptic Biblical Texts in the Dialect o f Upper Egypt. London 1912. ------ , ed. Coptic Homilies in the Dialect of Upper Egypt Edited from the Papyrus Codex Oriental 5001 in the British Museum. London 1910. ------ , ed. Coptic Martyrdoms Etc. in the Dialect of Upper Egypt. London 1914. ------ , ed. The Earliest Known Coptic Psalter: The Text, in the Dialect of Upper Egypt,
Edited from the Unique Papyrus Codex Oriental 5000 in the British Museum. London 1889. ------ , ed. Miscellaneous Coptic Texts in the Dialect o f Upper Egypt. London 1915. Bybliothecae Pierpont Morgan codices Coptici photographice expressi, edited by H. Hyvemat. 56 vols. Rome 1922. Campagnano, A., ed. Ps. Cirillo di Gerusalemme, Omelie copte sulla passione, sulla croce et sulla Vergine. MUan 1980. Chame, M., ed. Le manuscrit de la version copte en dialecte sahidique des “Apophthegmata patrum.” Institut fran 9ais d ’archeologie orientate, Bibliotheque d’etudes coptes, vol. 4. Cairo 1960. Chapman, P., ed. “Homily on the Passion and the Resurrection Attributed to Eucdius of Rome.” In Homiletica from the Pierpont Morgan Library, edited by Leo Depuydt, pp. 79-106. Corpus scriptorum Christianorum orientalium, vol. 524. Louvain 1991. Chassinat, E., ed. Le quatrieme livre des Entretiens et epitres de Shenouti. Institut frangais d ’archeologie orientale du Caire, Memoires, vol. 23. Cairo 1911. Ciasca, A., ed. Sacrorum bibliorum fragmenta copto-sahidica musei Borgiani. 2 vols. Rome 1885, 1889. Crum, W. E., ed. Catalogue o f the Coptic Manuscripts in the British Museum. London 1905. ------ , ed. Catalogue o f the Coptic Manuscripts in the Collection o f the John Rylands Library, Manchester. Manchester and London, 1909. de Lagarde. See Lagarde XV i
r i i x r i-DITIONS CONSULT I'D Drcscher, James, ed. “ Apa Claudius and the Thieves” (Constantine o f Assiut, First Encomiuin on St. Claudius of Antioch], Bulletin de la societe d ’archeologie
co p te S {m 2 ):6 3 -S l. ----- , ed. Apa Mena: A Selection of Coptic Texts Relating to St. Menas. Societe d’arch6ologie copte, Textes et documents. Cairo 1946. lUanskaya, A. L, ed. The Literary Coptic Manuscripts in the A. S. Pushkin State Fine Arts Museum in Moscow. Supplements to Vigiliae Christianae, vol. 18. Leiden 1994. (Pagination differs from the Budapest edition o f 1991.) l-oat, M. E., ed. “Encomium on SS. Peter and Paul Attributed to Severian of Gabala.” In Encomiastica from the Pierpont Morgan Library, edited by Leo Depuydt, pp. 84-130. Corpus scriptomm Christianomm orientalium, vol. 544. Louvain 1993. (laritte, G ., ed. S. Antonii vitae versio Sahidica. Corpus scriptomm Christianomm ori entalium, vol. 117. Paris 1949. (loehring, J., et al., eds. The Crosby-Sch0yen Codex M S 193 in the Sch0yen Collection. Corpus scriptorum Christianorum orientalium, vol. 521. Louvain 1990. (luerin, H., ed. “ Sermons inedits de S enouti.” Revue egyptologique 10 (1902): 148-164, 11 (1904): 15-34. Ilintze, F. and Schenke, H.-M., eds. Die berliner Handschrift der sahidischen Aposteigeschichte (P. 15926). Texte und Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der altchristlichen Literatur, vol. 109. Berlin 1970. Homer, G., ed. The Coptic Version of the New Testament in the Southern Dialect Otherwise Called Sahidic and Thebaic. 1 vols. Oxford 1911—24. Kasscr, R., ed. Papyrus Bodmer XVI: Exode I—XV,2I en sahidique. Cologny-Geneve 1961. —, ed. Papyrus Bodmer XVIII: Deuteronome I~X, 7 en sahidique. Cologny-Geneve 1962. —, ed. Papyrus Bodmer XIX: Evangile de Matthieu XfV, 28-XXVIII, 20, Epitre aux romains /, 2-II, 3 en sahidique. Cologny-Geneve 1962. ed. Papyrus Bodmer XXI: JosueVI, 16-25, VU, 6-XI, 23, XXII, 1 - 2 ,19-XXIII, 7 , 15-XXFV, 23 en sahidique. Cologny-Geneve 1962. , ed. Papyrus Bodmer XXII et Mississippi coptic codex //; Jeremie XL, 3-LII, 34, Lamentations, Epitre de Jeremie, Baruch I, I-V , 5 en sahidique. ColognyGeneve 1964. , ed. Papyrus Bodmer XXIII: Esdie LXVII, 1-LXVI, 24 en sahidique. ColognyGeneve 1965. Kuhn. K. H., ed. The Coptic (Sahidic) Version o f Kingdoms I, II (Samuel I, II). Corpus scriptorum Christianomm orientalium, vol. 313. Louvain 1970. . ed. Letters and Sermons ofSesa. Corpus scriptorum Christianomm orientalium, vol. 157. Louvain 1956. I a^jarde (Boetticher), P. de, ed. Aegyptiaca. Gottingen 1883. J rl'ori. L.-Th., ed. S. Athanase, Lettres festales et pastorales en copte. Corpus scripto mm Christianorum orientalium, vol. 150. Louvain 1955. . ed. “ Cat6ch^se christologique de Chenoute.” Zeitschriftfiir dgyptische Sprache und Altertumskunde 80 (1955):40—45. . cd. “ Le ‘De virginitate’ de S. Clement ou de S. Athanase?” Le Museon 40 (l927):249-64.
xvii
I I; X I I D I T I O N S
( O N S I I M t;t)
Lcfort {continued) ------ , ed. CEuvres de S. Pachome et de ses disciples. Corpus scriptorum Christianorum orientalium, vol. 159. Louvain 1956. ------ , ed. S. Pachomii vitae sahidice scriptae. Corpus scriptorum Christianorum orientalium, vol. 99. Paris 1933. Leipoldt, J., and Crum, W . E., eds. Sinuthii archimandritae vita et opera omnia. Vols. 3 and 4. Corpus scriptomm Christianorum orientalium, vols. 42, 73. Paris 1908, 1913. Lemm, O. von, ed. “ Sahidische Bibelfragmente I I I .” In Academie imperiale des sci ences de St.-P6tersbourg, Bulletin, 5th series, vol. 25 (1906):93-137. Maspero, G., ed. Fragments de la version thebaine de I ’ancien testament. Mission archdologique fran^aise au Caire, Memoires, vol. 6, fasc. 1. Paris 1892. MingJureUi, J. A., ed. Aegyptiorum codicum reliquiae Venetiis in bibliotheca Naniana asservatae. 2 vols. with continuous pagination. Bologna 1785. Muller, C. Detlef G., ed. DieBiicherder Einsetzung derErzengel Michael und Gabriel. Corpus scriptomm Christianomm orientalium, vol. 225. Louvain 1962. Munier, H., e d Catalogue general des antiquites egyptiennes du musee du Caire, rf^ 9201-9304: manuscrits coptes. Cairo 1916. Orlandi, T., Pearson, B., and H. Drake, eds. Eudoxia and the Holy Sepulchre, A Constantinian Legend in Coptic. Milan 1980. ------ , ed. Shenute, Contra Origenistas. Unione accademica nazionale. Corpus dei manoscritti copti letterari. Rome 1985. Perez. See Aranda Perez Pieyte, W., and Boeser, P. A. A., eds. Manuscrits coptes du musee d ’antiquites des Pays-bas a Leide. Leiden 1897. Quecke, H., ed. Das Johannesevangelium saidisch: Text der Handschrift PPalau Rib.
Inv.-Nr. 183 mit den Varianten der Handschriften 813 und 814 der Chester Beatty Library und der Handschrift M 569. Papyrologica Castroctaviana, vol. 11. Rome and Barcelona 1984. ------ , ed. Das Lukasevangelium saidisch: Text der Handschrift PPalau Rib. Inv.-Nr. 181 mit den Varianten der Handschrift M 569. Papyrologica Castroctaviana, vol. 6. Barcelona 1977. ------ , ed. Das Markusevangelium saidisch: Text der Handschrift PPalau Rib. Inv.-Nr. 182 mit den Varianten der Handschrift M 569. Papyrologica Castroctaviana, vol. 4. Barcelona 1972. ------ . Untersuchungen zum koptischen Stundengebet. Publications de I’institut orientaliste de Louvain, vol. 3. Louvain 1970. Rossi, F., ed. “Trascrizione con traduzione Italiana di due sermoni attribuiti, il primo a s. Atanasio arcivescovo di Alessandria, il secondo a s. Giovanni Grisostomo arcivescovo di Constantinopoli, dai testi copti, appartenenti alia collezione egizia del museo d ’antichita di Torino.” InMemorie della reale accademia della scienze di Torino, serie seconda, vol. 39, pp. 49-152bis. Turin 1889. (= Papiri copti del museo egizio di Torino, vol. 2, pt. 1.) ------ , ed. “Trascrizione con traduzione Italiana di un testo copto del museo Egizio di Torino.” In Memorie della reale accademia della scienze di Torino, serie sec onda, vol. 41, pp. 1-121. Turin 1889. (= Papiri copti del museo egizio di Torino,
xviii
n x r i D i n o N s c o n s d i i i;i> vol. 2, pt. 3.) — , ed. “Trascrizione di tre manoscritti copti del museo Egizio di Torino.” In Memorie della reale accademia della scienze di Torino, serie seconda, vol. 37, pp. 65-175. Turin 1886. (= Papiri copti del museo egizio di Torino, vol. 1, pt. 3.) ------ , ed. “Vita di sant’Darione e martirio di sant’Ignazio vescovo d’Antiochia.” In Memorie della reale accademia della scienze di Torino, serie seconda, vol. 38, pp. 3-103. Turin 1888. (= Papiri copti del museo egizio di Torino, vol. 1, pt. 4.) Schiissler, K., ed. Die katholischen Briefe in der koptischen (sahidischen) Version. Corpus scriptorum Christianonim orientalium, vol. 528. Louvain 1991. Sheridan, J. M., ed. Rufus o f Shotep, Homilies on the Gospels o f Matthew and Luke. Unione accademica nazionale. Corpus dei manoscritti copti letterari. Rome 1998. Shisha-Halevy, A., ed. “Two New Shenoute-texts from the British Library.” Orientalia 44 (1975): 149-85, plates 9 and 10. ------ , ed. “Unpublished Shenoutiana in the British Library.” Enchoria, Zeitschrift fiir Demotistik und Koptologie 5 (1975):53—108, plates 9—30. Shore, A. F., ed. Joshua I-IV and Other Passages in Coptic Edited from a Fourthcentury Sahidic Codex in the Chester Beatty Library, Dublin. Ehiblin 1963. Thompson, H., ed. A Coptic Palimpsest Containing Joshua, Judges, Ruth, Judith, and Esther in the Sahidic Dialect. London 1911. ----- , ed. The Coptic Version of the Acts o f the Apostles and the Pauline Epistles in the Sahidic Dialect. Cambridge 1932. Till, W., ed. Koptische Heiligen- und Martyrerlegenden: Texte, Ubersetzungen und Indices. Orientalia Christiana analecta, vol. 102. Rome 1935. Wessely, C., ed. Griechische und koptische Texte theologischen Inhalts. Vols. 1 and 5. Studien zur Palaeographie und Papyruskunde, vols. 9 and 18. Leipzig 1909, 1917. Worrell, W., ed. The Coptic Psalter in the Freer Collection. New York 1916. — , ed. The Proverbs of Solomon in Sahidic Coptic According to the Chicago Manuscript. University of Chicago, Oriental Institute Publications, vol. 12. Chicago 1931. Yoimg, D. W., ed. Coptic Manuscripts from the White Monastery: Works of Shenute. Mitteilungen aus der Papyrussammlung der osterreichischen Nationalbibliothek (Papyrus Erzherzog Rainer), neue Serie, vol. 22. Vienna 1993. ed. “ A Monastic Invective against Egyptian Hieroglyphs.” In Studies Presented to Hans Jakob Polotsky, edited by Dwight W. Young, pp. 348-60. East Gloucester, Massachusetts (U.S.A.) 1981. /oi-ga, G., ed. Catalogus codicum Copticorum manu scriptorum qui in museo
Borgiano Velitris advervantur: Avec une introduction historique et des notes hibliographiques par Joseph-Marie Sauget. Hildesheim 1973 (Rome 1810). HiWlical texts published before 1959 are indexed in A. Vaschalde, “ Ce qui a 6te public lies versions copies de la bible,” Revue biblique n.s. 16 [28] (1919):220-43, 513-31; (I920):91-I06, 241-58; 30 (1921):237^6; 31 (1922):81-88, 234-58; supplemi iiicil by W. Till, “Coptic Biblical Texts Published after Vaschalde’s Lists,” Bulletin <>lthe John Rylands Library A \ (1959); 220-40.
xix
Introduction The Coptic language I C 'O P T IC is the last phase o f the Egyptian language, from about A .D. 200 to 1000. Egyptian, th e indigenous language o f Egypt, h ad been expressed in w rit ing since before 3000 B.C.; it constituted a language group unto itself but also had affinities with Semitic and various A frican languages, being classified as a sibling of the Berber, Cushitic, and Sem itic language groups. The written attestation o f standardized Coptic Egyptian begins with B iblical manuscripts iJating to about A.D. 300, shortly after the translation o f the C hristian Bible into Coptic; and continues w ell beyond the extinction o f Coptic as a spoken daily language (perhaps about A.D. 1000), dow n to the last faltering letters written by leam ed Copts in Egypt at the beginning o f the nineteenth century.^ Native literature originally com posed in Coptic dates alm ost exclusively to the fjirly Byzantine period, roughly A.D. 325-800.^ A fter the A rab conquest of l--gypt (A.D. 642) there began a period of Arabization and Islam ization in which Coptic was gradually replaced by Arabic for most practical purposes. I'ivcntually, the Coptic language was reduced to the status of a m ere religious and ethnic relic, cultivated only by leam ed members o f a C hristian minority in l-jiypt. In the thirteenth century w e see a burst o f interest o n the part of I •gyptian Christian scholars in the philology o f their ancient tongue, but now in the form o f Coptic grammars, vocabularies, and textual editions written in Arabic and taking account o f Arabic gram matical tradition,^ thus signalling ihc disappearance o f spoken Coptic as a language o f fluent com m unication rvcn among the leamed. Such works belong to the Arabic Christian literature ol ihc Copts."* This is the only recorded elaboration of gram m atical theory .itnong the ancient Copts. The Coptic Orthodox Church in Egypt today retains a liiurgy chanted in Medieval Coptic (Bohairic dialect) w ith certain passages 111 ( ircek; Biblical lections are read in both Coptic and Arabic. B ut Arabic has ' I . Orlandi, “ Literature, Coptic,” in The Coptic Encyclopedia (New York 1991) vol. 5, i'p I ISO-60; Coptic letter by Athanasius o f AbutTg written in the Bohairic dialect o f Coptic ..» A I). I K(K). ed. and trans. W. E. Crum in Catalogue o f the Coptic Manuscripts in the Collection
.’(M 6. ' S Kiibciison, “Translating the Tradition: Some Remarks on the Arabization of the Patristic llriii;i^>r in lipypi.” \n Medieval Encounters 2 (1996);4-14; G .G rsi, Geschichte der christlichen ■II,ihiM hrn Literature {VaUcan City 1944-53).
1
IN TR O D IH
I ION
long been the practical language of the Egyptian church and its members. Occasional neports of the continuous survival of spoken Coptic into modem times are unsubstantiated and unlikely. A movement to revive the Coptic lan guage existed in Egypt throughout the twentieth century, but with almost no permanent results. T h e m odem word C opt m eans a Christian native of E gypt as opposed to a M oslem or Jew. It deriives from neo-Latin coptus < M iddle Arabic qibtl, qubtl < Greek AiyCTtxioc; ‘E gyptian’/ ^ AiyunToq ‘E gypt’. Ancient Coptic speakers called them selves n ^ n KHMe ‘the people o f Egypt’ ; their language, TMNrpMNKHMe ‘the abstract category associated with people of E gypt’; and their land, khm g.
Coptic comprised a family o f regional dialects spoken and written from the Mediterranean coast and the Delta all the w ay south up the Nile Valley into the Sudan (aincient Nubia), and also in the oases of the W estern Desert of Egypt. M ore than a dozen dialects are distinctly represented in ancient literary manuscripts, and Biblical texts are attested in no less than eight of these.^ The natural homes of these dialects are a m atter o f abstract scholarly calculation, in the absence o f objective geographical evidence.^ A basic contrast probably existed between those of the Delta on the one hand, and those of the extreme southern end of the N ile Valley on the other. At their greatest extremes, the dialects are sufficiently different to have been mutually incomprehensible to their native speakers, while those in closer proximity would have had more features in common. The leading dialect in the pre-Islamic period was Sahidic (from Arabic S a ‘ld ‘Southern Egypt’); it is thought^ to have begun as a regional dialect o f the southern Nile Valley, emanating from Smun/Hermopolis (m odem Ashmunein) or possibly somewhat south of that town. Sahidic is the dialect that has the most features in common w ith the other dialects o f Coptic, and it has a very small number of peculiarities unto itself. Such a level profile would have made Sahidic easy to understand and use as a nationwide medium o f commu nication; in fact, it came to be w ritten and understood up and down the Nile Valley and (at least later) to some degree in the North. It w as roughly about A.D. 300, under historical circumstances now unknown, that Sahidic began to be written in literary form. From the beginning, literary Sahidic was remark ably standardized in alphabet, morphology, syntax, vocabulary, phraseology, and translation technique: this is Standard Sahidic, the subject of the present ^ The number o f dialects that must be reckoned with has increased since the publication of W. E. Crum’s authoritative Coptic Dictionary; the ongoing discovery of ancient manuscripts in the Nile Valley causes these numbers to rise from time to time. ® W.-P. FunK, “ Dialects Wanting Homes: A Numerical Approach to the Early Varieties of Coptic,” in Historical Dialectology, Regional and Social (ed. Jacek Fisiak; Berlin 1988) pp. 149-92. ’ Funk, “ Dialects.”
n i l ; (o
P iK '
i.A N Cii)A (ii;
grammar. (The curliest manuscripts show variation in spelling and a slight admixture of other dialect forms. A fully standardized spelling was attained perhaps about the sixth c e n tu ry .S a h id ic was an influential language o f both Egyptian monasticism and the orthodox Christian power structure more or less throughout Egypt in the early Byzantine period. Alm ost all native authors in Coptic write in this dialect; their dates range from the fourth to eighth cen turies A.D. Sahidic literature continued to be recopied and used in Egypt until somewhat beyond the extinction of Coptic as a living daily language; for example, important Sahidic literary m anuscripts were still being copied and collected from the ninth to early eleventh centuries in the Faiyum Oasis, Sohag, Esna, and Edfu. (Late, post-Standard spelling systems are strikingly evident in some of these manuscripts.) B ut in the end it was the Bohairic dialect, originally centered in the W estem Delta and the great monasteries o f Ihe Wadi Natrun, that outlived Sahidic and the others £is the liturgical language of the Coptic Orthodox Church. Dnlike the earlier phases of Egyptian, Coptic is written in an alphabet o f ( Ireek letters supplemented by additional signs taken from th e Egyptian Demotic script 8. There are six additional letters in the Sahidic alphabet: qp q e X 6 t . Many of the dialects and sub-dialects are written in a special variety ()l the Coptic alphabet, some having more or few er additional letters than Sahidic. At present, fourteen Coptic alphabet system s have been recorded. I'here is no record, even legendary, o f the circum stances in w hich the Coptic alphabet was invented. From the M acedonian capture of Egypt under Alexander the Great in 332 B.C. dow n to the A rab conquest of A.D. 642, the Creek language was an ever-present fact o f daily life in Egypt, used increas ingly in administrative, religious, literary, and scientific affairs. Greek was iviained as the chief administrative language under Roman rule, and to some i-xicnt it remained in administrative use even until A.D. 1000. Egypt o f the Mcllenistic and Roman periods was bilingual, w ith Alexandria (an influential (ircek metropolis) as the main diffusion point o f Hellenistic culture, which iiavclled along a Greek-speaking administrative and cultural network spread ihroitghout the country. In this period, Hellenism had a deep influence on the li’xtcon o f the Egyptian language. A considerable portion o f Coptic vocabul.iry comes from Greek 7, including words from all aspects o f life and belongiMf; to most word classes; the Greek word stock seems to occur as frequently III native Coptic authors as in literature translated from Greek and so m ust be I Miisi(Icred a real part of the Coptic literary lexicon.^ On the other hand, Coptic shows little influence of Greek syntax. ' ( ruin's intention in the Dictionary is to give in first place the principal standardized spelling III Siittuliird Sahidic. as far as it was known at his time. ’ I I h. Ix'fort. “ Clreco-copte,” in Coptic Studies in H onor o f Walter Ewing Crum (Boston I'^'ii) pp. (vS 71.
I N T R O D IJC TION
6 Coptic ^// dialects),^^^ a good part of which survives in fragmen tary form,
‘0 Orlandi, “Literature” ; W . Kammerer e t al., A Coptic Bibliography (Ann Arbor, Michigan [USA] 1950); supplemented a t intervals by Unione accademica nazionale. Corpus dei manoscntti copti letteravi^ Coptic Bibliography, ed. T. Orlandi (Rome 1989-); T. Orlandi, Elementi de lin gua e letteratu^^ (Milan 1970). Special articles on Coptic authors and literary genres can be found in The Coptic Encyclopedia, vols. 1-7.
Abbreviations For full bibliographic entries, see also Text E ditions Consulted, p. xvi.
a = column a
Deut = Deuteronomy
alt., alts. = altemant(s) ApophPatr = Apophthegmata Patrum Aegyptiorum
(e) = optional occurrence of e within a written morph ed. = edited by e.g. = exempli gratia, for example Ep Jer = Epistle o f Jeremiah Eph = Ephesians Esth = Esther Exod = Exodus Ezek = Ezekiel
h = column b BAp = Budge, Coptic Apocrypha BM = Crum, Catalogue . . . British Museum [now British Library (London), Oriental and India Office Collections (formerly Department of Oriental Manuscripts and Printed Books)], accor ding to entry number, page, and line BMar = Budge, Coptic Martyrdoms HMis = Budge, Miscellaneous Coptic
Texts lUitLib = manuscripts of the British Library, London (formerly British Museum), Oriental and India Office Collections (formerly Department of Oriental Manuscripts and Printed Books), according to manuscript num ber < = column c ( airoHamuli = manuscripts of the ( optic Museum (Cairo), Hamuli col lection, according to letter designation (see Dep., page Ixxxiii) etc. ( ;iii = Canticles t t)l = Colossians ( 'nini Diet. = W. E. Crum, A Coptic Dictionary. Oxford 1939, according to p;ige and column
Gal = Galatians Gen = Genesis Heb = Hebrews i.e. = id est, that is to say Isa = Isaiah Jjis = James Jdt = Judith Jer = Jeremiah Josh = Joshua Judg = Judges K = manuscripts (K series) in the Osterreichische Nationalbibliothek (Vienna), Papyrussammlung, accord ing to manuscript number etc. Layt. = Layton, Catalogue . . . British Library (London 1987), according to entry number Lefort CEuvres = Lefort, CEuvres de S.
Pachome
I ).iti = D aniel
I )rp. = L. Depuydt, Catalogue o f Coptic
Manuscripts in the Pierpont Morgan l.ihrary. Corpus van verluchte handschriflcn, vol. 4. Louvain :Kci>rtling to entry number
fem. = grammatically feminine frag. = fragment
1993,
Lev = Leviticus Leyd = manuscripts of the Rijksmuseum van Oudheden (Leiden), as edited by Pleyte and Boeser, Manuscrits coptes, according to page, column, eind line
ABBRI- V I A TIO N S
masc. = grammatically masculine Matt = Matthew Miss4 = Am6lineau, Monuments Miss8 = Bouriant, Fragments coptes
relates au concile d ’Ephese Morgan = manuscripts (M series) of the Pierpont Morgan Libraiy (New York), according to manuscript number etc. Morgan Facs. = Bybliothecae Pierpont
Morgan codices Coptici photographice expressi (N -) = optional occurrence (in formal patterns) of the moiph n Num = Numbers Phil = Philippians Phlm = Philemon pi. = plural Prov = Proverbs Ps = Psalm, according to Septuagint numbering (with MT numbering in parentheses) r = recto reflex. = with reflexive construction 176 Rev = Revelation Rom = Romans Rossi = Rossi, editions o f Coptic texts in
Memorie . . . Torino, serie seconda, according to volume, fascicule, page, and line. Where pagination o f the sep arate edition (Papiri copti del museo egizio di Torino, designated by the siglum R in Crum’s Coptic Dictionary) differs, it is given in parentheses. Sh = works attributed, whether rightly or wrongly, to Shenoute, as follows ShAm61 = Amelineau, (Euvres de
Schenoudi ShBesa = Sh published in Kuhn, Letters
and Sermons o f Besa ShBM = Sh published in BM ShChass = Chassinat, Le quatrieme livre
des Entretiens et epitres de Shenouti ShEnch = Shisha-Halevy, “Unpublished Shenoutiana in the British Library”
ShGu6 = Gu6rin, “Sermons inedits de Senouti” ShIF2 = manuscrit copte 2 in the Institut frangais d’archeologie orientale du Caire (Cairo) Shlnvect = Young, “A Monastic Invec tive against Egyptian Hieroglyphs” ShLef = Lefort, “ Catechese christologique de Chenoute” ShLeyd = Pleyte and Boeser, Manuscrits
coptes ShMing = Mingarelli, Aegyptiorum cod-
icum reliquiae ShMiss4 = Sh as edited by Am61ineau in Miss4 ShMun = Munier, Catalogue generate ShOr = Shisha-Halevy, “Two New She noute-Texts from the British Libraiy” ShOrig = Orlandi, Shenute, Contra Origenistas, according to paragraph number, page, and line ShOxford = manuscripts in the Univer sity of Oxford, Bodleian Library, Department of O riental Books, according to manuscript number etc. ShP = manuscripts in the Bibliotheque nationale de France (Paris), Departement des manuscrits. Division des manuscrits orientaux, according to manuscript number etc. ShRossi = Sh as edited in Rossi ShRyl = Crum, Catalogue . . . John Rylands Library according to entry number, page, and line ShWess9 = Wessely, Griechische und koptische Texte, vol. 1 (= Studien, vol. 9), according to page, column, and line ShWesslS = same, vol. 5 (= Studien, vol. 18) ShYoung = Young, Coptic Manuscripts
from the White Monastery = Zoega, Catalogus codicum Copticorum S hlll = Leipoldt and Crum, Sinuthii archimandritae vita et opera omnia.
ShZ
vol. 3
ABBRI-VIATIONS
Shiv = same, vol. 4 sing. = singular Sir = Sirach (Ecclesiasticus), according to Septuagint numbering where applicable TillHML = Till, Koptische Heiligen- und
Mdrtyrerlegenden V= verso var., vars. = variant, variants Vienna = manuscripts (K series) in the Osterreichische Nationalbibliothek (Vienna), Papyrussammlung, accord ing to manuscript number etc. Wess9 = Wessely, Griechische und kop tische Texte, vol. \ (= Studien, vol. 9), according to page, column, and line WesslS = same, vol. 5 (= Studien, vol. 18) Wis = Wisdom Z = Zoega, Catalogus codicwn copticorum, according to page and line I C o r= 1 Corinthians I Pet = 1 Peter I Sam = 1 Samuel 1 Thess = 1 Thessalonians I Tim = 1 Timothy I St = first person
1 Cor = 2 Corinthians
2 Pet = 2 Peter 2 Sam = 2 Samuel 2 Thess = 2 Thessalonians 2 Tim = 2 Timothy 2d = second person 3 Kgdms = 3 Kingdoms (1 Kings) 3d = third person 4 Kgdms = 4 Kingdoms (2 Kings) ® significant absence of moiph within a paradigm, namely (i) zero article 47; (ii) personal morph expressing 1st sing, and 2d sing. fem. 89; (Hi) bare ness o f the relative mutable converter € t4 0 5 — a relationship of adjacent dependency (boundness) follow ing a morph (except with personal suffix) 2 7 ; marks the prenominal state (e.g. 2N—, C€TTT-)
ss the set of eight, interchangeable per sonal suffixes in a relationship o f adja cent dependency (boundness); marks the prepersonal state (e.g. n ^ h t s , COTTTs) 30 ^ stative actualization of the verb lexeme 162 > is manifested as (in moiphology struc ture) 189,190 / / phoneme or phonemes, e.g. /e / 9
Part 1
The Basic Components of the Sentence and Their Phrasal Syntax
Fundamental Components: Phonemes, Morphs, Syllables, and Alphabet Sources of the Coptic W ord Stock
7
W riting, Sounds, and Phonem es 8 Alphabet 8 Phonemes 9 Circumflex 11 Trema 12 Monograms 5 x ^ ® /k s kh ps p h ty th / r, and t 14 Digrams ei, o y Notating /y/, /w / 15 The W eakness of / h / 17 Morph and Syllable
13
18
Alternants and Variants 20 Allophones and Allom orphs 20 /o/ = cu, o y 20 Assimilation o f Syllabic /n / ( n- ) (Alternants and Variants) /k / = K, ic, r, ? 23 Simplification o f a a a , e e , o y o y , e i e i 24 /e-/ before Morph-initial b , a , m , n , p 25 /m t/ expressed as m n t 26 Soundness (Adjacent Dependency) as a Feature of M orphs Bound Groups of M orphs 27 Soundness Classes and A utonom y 28 Adjacent Dependency Analysis o f Bound G roups 29 Mutable M orphs: the Three States 3 0 Absolute Spelling o f the Prenominal State 31 Stress Accent G roups 32 Sentence Intonation Contours
21
27
33
Nucleus and Expansion in Syntactic Patterns
34
Syllable Formation 35 Syllabic and Non-syllabic M anifestation o f Phonemes Expressions o f the Glottal Stop Phonem e 36
35
11
FU NDA M ENTAL
CO M PO N EN TS
Articulatory Classification o f Sounds 37 The Superlinear Stroke Indicating Syllabic Function Superlinear Stroke Representing Line-final n 38 The Notation o f Greco-Coptic M orphs 39 The Spelling o f Greek M orphs 39 2 in Place o f Both Rough and Smooth Breathing The Superlinear Stroke in Greco-Coptic Morphs
38
40 41
SO U R C E S O F T H E C O P T IC W O R D S T O C K
Coptic word stock mainly comes from Egyptian 1 and Greek 5. These two com ponents— 'Egyptian Coptic’ and ‘Greco-Coptic’— ^belong to very different lan guage structures and to some extent m ust be described separately. Some 3,308 Egyptian Coptic vocabulaiy entries are recorded in W. E. C rum ’s authoritative Coptic Dictionary (Oxford 1939), along with many derived forms. Two-thirds of Crum’s Egyptian Coptic entry words can be traced back to an earlier stage of Egyptian; cf. J. Cem^, Coptic Etymological Dictionary (Cambridge 1976). The remainder have no attested Egyptian etymology, including some of the most common vocabulary in Sahidic.
The sizeable Greco-Coptic vocabulaiy 5 is not recorded in our modem Coptic dictionaries; the lexica of classical and Byzantine Greek m ust be consulted. Not all meanings of these Greek items came into Coptic nor did all Greek words of the period enter Coptic. Greco-Coptic items are not inflected (formally marked in para digms) as they are in Greek; for example, Greek substantives and adjectives come into Greco-Coptic in an invariable form, recognizable as the Greek nominative singular. Despite the large amount of Greek vocabulary in Coptic, little influence of Greek syntax is evident.
M ost Coptic items expressing general grammatical categories (conjugation bases, auxiliaries, converters, articles, affixes, personal morphs, and adverbial modifiers) are Egyptian in origin. W R IT IN G , S O U N D S , A N D PH O N EM ES
8 Alphabet. Since Sahidic Coptic ceased to be a spoken language many centuries ago 1, what now remains is written text, expressed in a system o f thirty alpha betic letters (table 1) and associated signs. The other expression o f the lan guage consisted o f spoken sounds; these are now lost. Text is written from left to right in an alphabet consisting o f the twenty-four Greek capital letters (in lunate i.e. rounded form, thus e c cu instead o f E £ n ) supplemented by six additional letters t ^ e n from the Egyptian Demotic script and stylized to resemble lunate G reek capitals: oj q ? jc 6 -f-.
12
W R IT IN G , S O U N D S , A N D
PH ONEM ES
TABLE 1 T h e e S a h id ic A l p h a b e t w i t h E g y p tia n C o p tic V a lu e s
(For illustrations, cf. 10) Broad Pronunciation Syllabic Non-syllabic
Modern Name
X
a
B r
^8
b 8
beta gamm a
—
(d)
delta epsilon
e
alpha
e
z
z
zeta
Underlying Phonemes and Allophones 9, 20 /a/; also syllabic / ’/ (or /y/) Also as allophone o f /y / and /o / /b / Egyptian Coptic allophone o f /k / O ccurs mainly in G reco-Coptic m orphs O ccurs only in Greco-Coptic m orphs /e/; under many conditions, non-phonem ic A lso as allophone o f /a/, /y/, and / ’/ Egyptian Coptic allophone o f /s/, only in
^NZHBe H e 1 or e i
e —
i
K A M
N 5 o n P c
—
T Y or o y
U u
—
X
—
t cu
th^ y k I m n ks
ksi omicron
P r s t w
pi
o
^ps d
ph^ kh^ ps S
f
Z X 6 t
ti
eta theta iota kappa lambda mu nu
h (!> ts ky ty
rho sigma tau upsilon phi khi psi omega Sai fai hore(h) djandja kyim a
ti
O ccurs mainly in Greco-Coptic m orphs /e/ /t/ + /h / (tw o distinct phonemes) /y/
lij m /nV
M N on-phonem ic in the syllable m NT /m t/ / k / + /s/ (tw o distinct phonemes) /o /
/P/ /r/
Isl N /w / A lso as allophone o f /o / /p / + jhj (tw o distinct phonemes) /k / + /h / (tw o distinct phonemes /p / + /s / (tw o distinct phonemes)
lol N Itl Ih/ /£/ Also /t/ + /5/ (tw o distinct phonem es)’ /kV N + /y / (two distinct phonemes)
N ote : Broad spoken correspondents in the table follow W. Worrell, Coptic Sounds (Ann Arbor, Michigan [USA] 1934). 't/i Two sounds, cf. Engl. “Hit /lim! ” ^ph Two sounds, cf. Engl. "Slap /lim! ” ^kh Two sounds, cf. English “ThinJt/iard!” ^Cf. Engl. ‘c W c h ’ ’Infinitive ‘cut’, stative q;eT q;cuT /5ot5t, SetSot/, consonantal skeleton t g - T - t g - T
13
The C optic A lphabet in a S tandard Sahidic (4) L iterary M anuscript . Fragment of Shenoute (6), Discourses, book 8. The author lived until A.D. 465; this manuscript is a later copy, made in the 7th or 8th centuiy (?) in Shenoute’s m mastery near Sohag (White Monastery codex ZD). Note the use of con nective supetlinear strokes c cu t m (38), circumflexes
W RiriN (;,
SOUNDS,
AND
l> 11 () N I - M I-S
f ’honcmcs. Underlying both written and spoken Sahidic is a system of tw en ty iwt) minimal (smallest), distinctive elem ents o f structure, which are poten tial and latent in nature and whose m ain function is to be distinct from one another. T hese tw enty-tw o fundam ental elem ents, called the prim ary Itluniemes' of Sahidic Coptic /aeeoobyklmnprstwsfhck^V actualized and manifested in two ways: speaking (sounds) and writing.* phonemes speaking
w riting
( iiMicrally in languages, the relationship of phonem es, sounds, and letters is •n)i«)riously inconsistent, arbitrary, and hard to predict; so it should be no sur|)i ISC that in Coptic (a non-living language), the sounds and their Eirticulation 1 an only be vaguely reconstructed from w ritten texts alone. Table 1 gives conM'lilional (broad) spoken correspondents o f the alphabet as it expresses I j*yptian Coptic phonemes in the Sahidic dialect. W hether the phonem es of
' I’huiii-Dics will be notated between slant lines / /, hypothetical spoken sounds in italic type, .mil wriiii-n expression in Coptic type. E.g. /e/ was written e and spoken as e.
15
I t l N D A M I i N I A I. C O M P O N I - , N I S
10
lllustratiom toaccomiwny table !:
Bu;e/Bu>, N -r-/coY tO N -r, ege, ANZHse/— ,
H n e , — /oooyr, n im a n d eiM e/TA Y o, c o e i^ K a ig . 8AA,e/AO, 2 M 2 a a /m a , n o ^ o t /n o C , ON, — ^/5oyp, 6 c u A n /n e , e p p e / p o , tu M c /c o , 2 0 t 2 t / t 0 , M oyp and Moyre/
N e y z o o p (N e~Y 2 0 o p ), —/4>o ( n ~ 2o), — /x o ii.x , k .a ^ /'J 'ic , pcu, n t u p ^ / q j o , o y t u c q / q o , o y a jN ^ g O ’ n tupS /jcco, 2 coa6 (Acts 2 0 :1 0 )/6 e ,'t'M e /c 'f'tb g e (ShChass 9 9 :4 4 ). Cf. also t o b t b , C TO i/c-t— , 20 K2 K, c o a c a , 6 om6 m, t o n t n , c o n c r f , q ^ o p c p , KOCKC, n o T n r , cooyT N /coyT C O N , 6 o o q q jq , TA.2T2, 6 0 x 6 ^ Syllabic 5 ^ks occurs only in Greco-Coptic m orphs, e.g. ApS ‘bear’ and ca.p5 ‘flesh’.
11
Circumflex is w ritten (rarely) in some m anuscripts over single letters or linking pairs o f letters; its function is obscure. E.g. o y i ,, ? e . A, e o H e c iA ,
d)JCN, ^ 1, ^pHNH, e ^ e - , 2i^B , h ^ a a t o c , tg ^ i- ,
oJ m m o , o j , cucu,
oy^,
djN ^.
no^,
K o y ^ , Nxk, T&k, d y , MNT-epb, p - , c o t t , c w tu c o q , ^ u p e . T he form or posi tion o f circum flex is m isrepresented in som e printed editions. Cf. figure follow ing table 1 .
Trema C) is w ritten (rarely) in som e m anuscripts over the letter 1 o r (m ore rarely) over y. Its function is obscure. E.g. n c c o - i , 'foyAa.T, nAi, e \e ~ , 2 'f~, n Tm , T- (for 21- ) , Tpe, T (for ev), e f r e (elxe), m coY chc. C f figure follow ing table 1.
12
13 Monograms. The alphabet of thirty letters contains six ‘m onogram s’, 5 x 'J' <|> t e , i.e. single letters that always express a combined pair o f phonemes instead o f a single phoneme. For purposes of grammatical analysis, a mono gram is always understood to express two phonemes. /k / /k / Ipf /p/ /t/ /t/
followed by followed by followed by followed by followed by followed by
/s/ /h / /s/ /h / /y/ /h /
5, equivalent to x, equivalent to equivalent to 4>, equivalent to f , equivalent to e , equivalent to
kc kz
nc nz ti
rz
Rarely, /t/ + /s / = jc, equivalent to (table 1); mostly ji; = /c/, a single phoneme. Each of these phoneme pairs is also susceptible to being written with two simple letters (k c , k^, rrc, t i , t^ ); the use of monograms was a matter o f spelling conventicm in particular words. The phonemes expressed by a monogram can belong either to the same morph ( e iB io ‘humiliate’) or to different m orphs that are grammatically united ( e e for rl^ e “The manner”). In standard spelling fi) 5 x 'J' 4> occur m ostly in G reco-Coptic morphs; (ii) f in Egyptian Coptic m orphs; (Hi) e in both. Exam ples in standard spelling (Egyptian/Gr(Mk): (i) 3o y p (only th is ? ) /c A ^ , cyNaLSic, 5eN H ; XOIA2X (= k o i a 2k, standard?)/xpiC T 0 C, A pxei, xa.pi2;e , m o n a x o c ;
^^iT6 (only?)/'|'yxH,
eA i'j'ic; <})ooyT (= n20oyr, standard?)/rpa.<})H,
c o 4 > o c , 4 > o p ei; (ii) -f, f~, i ’BC, "fM e, -f-ee, e 'f'- ( e r * + 1), 't'o y A x T A (rlio y A A fa.)/— ; (iii) e i e i o , eA B , e M o , e A o , e e (= t I2 c ), ex A A C ca. (= t I2J^a a c c a ), e e N e e r e (= T l2 eN eeT e), e e o o y (= e T l2 o o y )/A r3 k .e o c , e M p io N , e A i e e
14 r. A, and z. In Egyptian Coptic morphs, r and /s/ when associated with preceding /n/
16
z express altem ants 2Qof /k / and
WRITINC;,
SOUNDS,
AND
l» H () N I; M li S
r = allophone o f /k / z - allophone o f /s/ .ukI
does not properly occur.
S tan d ard sp ellin g p refers r f o r /k / w h e n fo rm in g sy lla b le w ith p re c e d in g /n / ( n p - in ste a d o f N K -. N r - in stead o f nic—, e - N —r . . . a n in stea d o f e - N ~ K - . . . a n ) ; and ^ in the w u rd ANZHBe ‘sc h o o l’, var. ANCHBe.
However, r A 2 occur in the classical G reek spelling o f Grw;o-Coptic morphs (e.g. rAp, jve, nAiAA.ro)roc, zh th m a ., n eip A ^e). W hether they expressed liisiiiict phonemes in such m orphs is unknow n; cf. 39(b). 19 hi^ram s. In Egyptian-Coptic morphs, the phonem es /y/ and /w / are expressed iMlher by a simple letter i, y or b y a ‘d ig ra m *— that is, a pair of letters combiiiecl lo express a single phonem e: ei and o y expressing /y/ and / w / 16. Thus /y/ is written as i, i, e i, or e \ /w/ is written as y, y , oy, o r d y /n7 also occurs in the m onogram -f' /ty/. In standard spelling digrams occur only in l-gyptian Coptic moiphs. lA Oiih(tf>raphy o f the phonem es /y / and /w/. In the formation o f spoken syllahk-s, the consonants /y / and /w / each had two potential functions 3 5 : syllabic and non-syllabic. /y / = syllabic i and non-syUabic y (cf. English big, jo u ) /w / = syllabic u and non-syllabic w (cf. E nglish pwsh, wish) I Ilf spelling of these two phonem es (and corresponding four sounds) fluctu ates. even in good, early manuscripts. (Because the letters i and y are not inatked by a superlinear stroke 38, syllabic/non-syllabic functions cannot be iliiis iiistinguished in w riting.) /y / (both i and y) is written i, ei, o r ^ /w / (both u and w ) is w ritten y , o y , or o y IlDvvever, the tendency of standard orthography can be described in terms of Ihi- letter sequences listed below, where iV means ‘non-syllabic manifestation «)( any con.sonant phoneme’, V means ‘vowel (/a e e o 5/, allophone 2 0 m)’, and w means ‘beginning or end o f a m orph’. .1. I hi'phonem e lyl I. w riilen as jf o r e i o r ^ o r i N + V + /y / # : e.g. nA i, nAT, n A e i, ( ‘th is o n e ’) # V + /y/ # : e.g. e i , e'f, e e i , e ^ , e i ( ‘c o m e ’ or p re se n t te n s e c o n ju g a tio n b a s e + T ) ; Ai, A'f, A ei, A ^ (m ark o f past tense + ‘I ’) li. w ritten as sim p le letter i N (+ N ) /y /; e.g. q i ( ‘ta k e ’), j c i c e ( ‘ lift u p ’)
17
I It N l >A Ml N I A I
( D M I’ O N I N I S
# N + N + /y/: e.g. c ^ m e (‘woman'), Jcnio ('.sliainc') # N + /y/ + V; e.g. ^ ih (‘road’), ^lOMe (‘women’) # N + /y/ + N: e.g. n im (‘who?’), 6 i j c (‘hand’), q i T - q (“Take it away” ) iii. written as the digram e i
# /y /. . .
e.g. e in e (‘bring’), eicupS (‘be astonished’)
Other spellings also occur. Nouns in the pattern #N + /y/ + V take the long definite arti cle ( n € - , T E -, N €-), implying that i is here non-syllabic 52(a): t€ 2 I h tehye “The road,” N e^ioM e nehyome “ The women.”
(b) The phonem e Iwl i. Simple letter y is normal after a, e , h , a - , and e - . E.g. n a y ‘hour’, m aay ‘moth er’, N e y - ‘their’. M eeye ‘think’, c n h y ‘brothers’, e i eeoA “A decree came forth,” A - Y ^ e A e e r q^cune “A wedding occurred,” e-YMexANoiA “For for giveness,” e-YN-jeNM AToT 2 AFAT-* “ Having soldiers in my charge,” NelYZoop “The dogs.” ii. After the double vowel o o manifesting /o ’/ 36, simple letter y is normal: /jo’w/
x o o y i.e. x o o - y “ Say them.” Iii. Elsewhere the digram o y is normal. E.g. m o o y ‘water’, e o o Y ‘glory’, ^ c d -o y ‘they too’, eiepcuoY ‘rivers’, o y ^ h ‘night’, tyo yo ‘flow’, o ;o y u ;o y ‘pride oneself’, o y n ta - T “I have,” o y Io y 2 0 )P “A dog.” iv. Nouns beginning wifh the following two sequences # OY + N . . .
N + OY . . . optionally take the long definite article ( n e - ) , implying that ( o )y has non-syllabic func-~ tion 52(a): n e lY o e ) ^ (but sometimes n IoY oeiq;) “The se:ison,” p Ioy -xaT (rarely nelY-XAT) “Salvation,” t c Iy ^ h “The night,” NelY^oop “The dogs.”
(c) Accordingly e i expresses either /y / or /ey/ OY expresses either /w / or /ow / E.g. N e i-c c u T n /neysotp/ “ 1 was choosing,” N c e i - c t u r n /neysotp/ “ I was choosing,” j c c o - y /jo ’w / “ Say them ” (jccc= + y)> x c - c y /jow / “ Sow them” + oy)(d) In standardized spelling, wherever word division would cause simple i or y to occur as the first letter o f a manuscript line, ei or o y is written instead. E.g. n ^ le i, t h Ic y t n . 17
The weakness o f/h /. The phoneme /h / {h z ) is sometimes not written and also sometimes
written in the wrong place, suggesting that the phoneme was expressed weakly or not at all and thus open to misrepresentjition. E.g. Ape? instead of 2 Ape2 John 2:10 ‘keep’; T-naT instead of ^ i-n aT Mark 15:39 ‘thus’; p k a instead of p k a ? Prov 1:11 (ed. Worrell) “The earth” ; oycd instead of o ycd? Prov 9:18 ‘add’; rJ^ApA-q instead of NNA2 pA -q Prov 24:36 “In his ovwi opinion” ; ^cIm c instesid of c ^ m e Acts 24:24 (ed. Hintze-Schenke) ‘woman’; n - often occurs where 2 n - is expected.
18
MORPH AND SYLLABLE M O R P H A N D S YL L ABL E
18 Although one can conceive o f the primary phonemes 9 individually, as the smallest elements o f linguistic structure, in reality they always occur in units (o f one, two, three, or more phonemes) called ‘m orphs’. M orphs are the m in imal (smallest) units o f grammatical or lexical meaning. E.g. /m pe/ /n / /k / /rom e/ /b o k / /nhet/
(mark o f negatived past tense) (m ark o f general relationship 147) ‘y ou’ (singular, masculine) ‘person’ ‘g o ’ ‘in’
In other words, phonemes always occur as constituents o f morphs and/or strings o f morphs (some morphs consist o f a single phoneme). /nhet-k/ “ In you (sing, m asc.),” two morphs (5 phonemes) But when phonemes were realized and manifested in spoken form, the sounds were uttered in units o f one, two, three, or more sounds to form 'syllables ’— the minimal (smallest) units o f articulated speech that Occur. ‘n\he\t^k “ In you,” probably three syllables (5 sounds) Sounds always occurred as constituents o f syllables as well as expressing morphs. These two natural systems o f division, morph and syllable, did not necessari ly coincide; e.g. morphs: syllables:
/nhet-k/ N2 h t - k ( IJ z h t ‘in ’ k ‘you’) *^n\he\fk (probable division in speech)
‘In y o u ’
As this example shows, a single morph could underlie more than one syllable o r part o f a syllable (as the morph /nhet-/ underlies the syllables ‘n \h e \t. . .) , and one syllable could cut across several morphs or parts o f morphs (the syl lable f k cuts across two morphs /nhet-k/l. The exact syllable articulation o f a non-living language such as Coptic is uncertain and beyond the em pirical reach o f linguistics. But the isolation and identification o f morphs is sure, pro vided that grammatical analysis has been carried out correctly, fully, and effi ciently. Subsequent chapters o f this book are concerned with the relationships and configurations o f morphs as known in w ritten form, without paying fur ther attention to syllables and pronunciation. By definition it is the morphs that convey meaning. 19 A ncient Sahidic writing generally has no word division. It does not regularly mark the boundaries o f syllables, morphs, or bound groups 27: they are neither set apart by spaces nor tied together by ligatured writing in literary
19
F U N DA M I N I A I, ( () M I* () N I. N I S oY O yEieN lN Acts 1 6 :1 “ A G reek"; N e y ep K T e instecul ol' N eyO Y erH TK Rev 11:11 “Their feet” ; NTepoYcu instead o f N T epoy-O Y ^u Mark l.‘i:2() “ W hen they liail ceased” ; eM noycuM instead o f e -M n o y -O Y ^ u M Mark 8:3 “ W ithout their having eaten” ; c o y a . instead o f c o y - o y i . ‘first day o f the nionlli/week’. (c) The sequence e i - e i (witliiu a bound group) is sometimes simplified. E.g. N T -a.ei and a.'f instead of N T - a . ^ - e i and a .I - e i John 16:28 “ 1 have com e” ; a .U - iastead o f a .i-ia .- John 13:14 “ 1 have w ashed"; e e l p e inslead of e l - e i p e Mark 11:29 “ I do."
25 /e -/ before morph-inilial b , a , m , n , p. W hen a m orph-initial syllabic .sonorant ( b , a , m , n , or p ) , especially the nasals m and n , is preceded by the m oiph /e-/ e-M n q -ccu T T T e - N - C e - C C U T T T A.N
tw o variants com m only occur: I. the sonorant is non-syllabic (has no superlinear stroke), e.g.
e-M nq-ccuTTT e - N —C e-C C U TTT A.N
ii. o r else, /e/- is not m anifested, e.g. M nq-C C U T T T = e - M n c j - c c u T T T N -c e -c c u T n
a .n
= e -N -c e -c c u rn
a .n
In som e m anuscripts, one o r the other o f these variants occurs rather persis tently. 26 The sequence Imil, form ing a unit, norm ally occurs as n fn i m n t w ith nonphonem ic ‘n n; abnorm ally, as m‘'l m t. E.g. oyom = ‘e a l’ + - t ‘m e’ = OYOMNT “ E at m e” (John 6:57), textual var. o y o m t. L ikew ise, /som t/
BOU ND NE S S ( A DJ AC E NT U E P E N U H N C Y ) AS A t HATURE OF MORPHS
27 B ound groups o f morphs. C(»ptic m orphs— the butkling blocks o f patterns and constructions— lypically occur in strings, w hich are united by relationships o f adjacent dependency o r ‘b oundness’. Such m orph strings will be called 'bound groups'. (M orphs sim ultaneously enter into other kinds o f dependency, cf. 3 4 .) In the follow ing exam ple, all the m orphs united in bound group.s are linked by hyphens; seven bound groups occu r (one consists o f a single m orph,
AYtu); j N - T e - j o y e i T e N e - q - u p o o n N 6 i-n -u p a.J(.e a.yco n-upa.J(.e N e - q - u p o o n N N i2 f> N -n-N O yT e “ In the beginning I was I the Word, I and I the W ord I was I willi G o d ” (John 1:1)
T h e constituents, sequence, and boundaries o f a bound group are regulated by the basic dependency properties o f each m orph that happens to occur w ithin it,
22
M O 11 N n N I S S
( A n
I Al
I N I
I) I !•!
M l I N(
^
I
as w ell as by other laciois. lUnuiil iiuiipli };ieq-p-'’NOBe “ A sinner,” T e T c jm e “TTiis woman,” T K ecjiM e “ TTie other woman,” n eq H i “ His house,” nefupoMNT “These three,” OYna.r>a.-TeYYc'c “An unnatural Ihing,” KecBco “ A different teaching,” "npotJiHTHc “Prophet|s]” ), except that n / r / N i.s hyphenated when antecedent of the articulated relative construction 411 (n^eNT-a.q-na.f>a.Ji.lJi.OY MMO-q “The one who betrayed Him”); (h) mulahle coiwerlers and iion-duralive conjugation bases are written solid with Ihe personal intermediate ( w e q - , a.q-); (c) com ponents o f the inflected nw difiei
a .N O = / f lT o = (a.NOK. J I t o k
etc.) 153;
(d) com ponents o f the possessive article (n a .-. n e K -, etc.); (e) initial iJ form ing adverb is not set off by hyphen, even in aiialyzable foniis (iJjoYO . n t g y n o y - M n M e j-c e n cNa.Y. N e e); (/) combinative adverbs 206 (eBOA, upa.20YN, etc.); (g} iion-coinhinative adverbs o f spatial orientation 223 (n b oa. 2 iOYNa.M. eBOA jN T n e); (h) hoiind elements within a com pound preposition 208 (enMa. f i - , fica.BOA
n- ,
elc.).
The.se convention.^ are typographical and aesthetic, and have no grammatical signifi cance. They are not a recoinmeiulation for editorial practice in text editions.
28 Bonndness classes and autonomy. R elationships o f adjacent depen d en cy , w hich unite (and disunite) m orphs into bound groups, am ount to co m p atib ili ties and incom patibilities in tem is o f i. w hich clas.scs o f m orph m ust, can, or cannot com bine with w hich others in general: they are by their very nature 'bound’, ‘bound!unbound’ (occurring bolh bound and free), or ‘unbound’ respectively ii. w hich positions, if any, the m em bers o f a m orph class can or m ust o c c u py w ithin a bound group; they are by their very nature ‘initiar, ‘non-tenninal’ (occurring in both initial and m edial position), ‘m edial’, or ‘term inal’ W ith these term s in m ind, every m orph in the C optic language can be c la ssi fied in one o f six classes, as follow s. ( I ) Initial hound morphs e.g. n 6 i- ; iJ- in allributive construction of the noun wbicli only occur in initial position within any bound group. These cannot tx; pieccdcd even by j c e - marking reported discourse. This is a very small class nolahly conlaining
23
F U N D A M K N T A I, C () M I* () N li N T S N - the mark o f relationship 203, N T e - 204, n 6 i - 87(b), and the inllcctcd modifiers 152. E.g. oy-p^U M e N -ca.B e “A wise person,” N e - q - u p o o n N 6 i- n-tpa.Ji.e “The Word existed.”
(2) Non-term inal hound morphs e.g. n - , c e r n - , cOTn=, a.Nr-, "t'-, N T e p e -, Ka.Ta.-, Na.NOY-, Na.NOY= which can occur in either initial or medial position, but not in terminal position. This is large class containing articles, infinitives in the prenominal and prepersonal states 30, conjugation bases, prepositions, suffixally conjugated verboids, etc. E.g. n - N o y T e ccoT n, a .-n N o y T e c c o r n ; a .-n J (.o e ic c e T n - 0YA a.0c. a .q - c e T n - 0YAa.0c: a .-n N o y T e c o T n - ci. A q - c o T n - q: A N r-o y p p o . e - A N r -o y p p o : + -c c u T n . N -j:r C ‘UTn a.N; N T e p e -q -c u )T n . A e - N T e p e -q -c c u r n : n a n o y - c . N e - Na.NOY-c (3) M edial hound m orphs {infixes) e.g. - T -, - c which only occur in medial position (and not in terminal position). This is a small class consisting mainly of the personal intermediates 80. E.g. a i-c c u T n . N e c -c c u T n . (4) Term inal hound morphs e.g. ra.AiAa.Ya., - q which only occur in terminal position, always preceded by at least one other bound morph. This class contains non-selfactualizing proper nouns, personal suffixes, etc. E.g. TlraAiAa i.a, c o r n ^ , o y N T a - y - c e . (5) Term inal bound!unbound morphs which can occur either bound in terminal position (preceded by at least one other bound morph) or free o f bound relationship. These are of two distinct types, 5a and 5b. (5a) E.g. ccOTn, n i c r e y e , c o r n , n a i, oyH p, c jiM e . Mapia, aNOK This is a very large subclass containing infinitives in the absolute stale 30. slalives, deter minator pronouns, specifier pronouns, common nouns, self-actualizing proper nouns, personal independents, etc. E.g. a q - c c u r n a - n N o y T e c c o r n ; q - c o r n . n A a o c c o r n : t e t n - x e k - q x h e , oyH p h e ; ^ n - u jo m n t f i - j o o y , pcoME c N a y h cuoMfiT: TElc9 iM e. C9IME. NiM; t I n o 6 M -nO A ic, TnOAic n o 6 : a - M apia CMOy, M a p ia cM aM aaT .
(5b) E.g. ayco,
h,
EniAH.
e ic j h h t e
These morphs usually occur free o f bound relationship. They occur bound in terminal position only if preceded by x e - . This subclas.s contain.s most fir.st-po.sition conjunc tions 235 and initial attitude markers 239 and some interjections. E.g. nE X E -njA A O N a -q j t E - aycu E K -p -o y N -N E ijN a a y T H p -o y ApophPatr 181 (Chaine 43:28) “The senior monk said lo him. And what are you doing with all these vessels?” ; Eq-Ji.co M M o-c j ( E - Eir.?HHTE "t -M -n E iM a Athanasius, Life o f St. Anthony 9 (Oaritte 14:2-3) “ Saying, Look! Here 1 am.” (6) U nbound m orphs (enclitics) e.g. a N ,
Jle, n E ,. , ,
n im
(article)
which never occur in bound relationship (they cannot even be preceded by jce- ) . This is a small miscellaneous class containing morphs that by nature cannot occur first in their
24
H O U N D N l - S S
( A D J A C I i N T
I J i ; 1> I - N I ) K N ( ’ Y )
clause (cnclitics). (Inasm uch as they musi follow some other moipli or m orph group, enclitics are not free.)
Autonomy. W ithin a particular text, any morph (whatever its class may be) that actually happens to occur free o f bound relationship can be called ‘autonom ous’. Autonomous morphs belong to classes 5 and 6; class 5 morphs sometimes occur autonomously; class 6 morphs, always. E.g. a .-T e c 2 iMe c c u T n “The woman chose” (class 5a), c?im c n i m “ Every woman (5a + 6), a.c-ccu T n “ And she chose” (5b), a.c-ccu T n ^ “ But she chose” (6), OYMee T€ “ It is ju st” (6). In close textual analysis, an autonomous m orph makes up a bound group consisting o f one morph. At a broader level o f analysis a single unit, corresponding in speech to a single colon under one primary stress accent, was probably formed by the combination o f any enclitic (class 6 morph) together with the preceding bound group; e.g. IcjiM e nimI or la .c -c c o T n Jtei. The cohesiveness of such units sometimes seems to be reflected in the spelling o f the morph preceding ihe enclitic, either (1) without vowel or with substitution o f e , e.g. p M n e C N T e = p o M n e C N T e “ Two years,” c e n c N a . Y = c o n c n a y “ Tw ice, T w o tim es’’: (2) with final vowel doubled o y M e e r e = o yM e r e “ It is ju st” 252.
29 Adjacent dependency analysis o f bound groups. Every bound group begins with an Initial or a Non terminal and ends with a Terminal. Between these two boundaries, various Non-terminals and/or M edials can occur. Enclitics (unbound morphs) do not join into bound groups, but float between or after them; each enclitic can be thoughi o f as a bound group consisting o f a single morph. In the example analyzed below, class numbers are designated in paren theses, e.g. (2), (4), (6), etc. I(nitial), class / M(edial), class 3 N(on-terminal), class 2
T(erminal), classes 4, 5a, 5b U(nbound, enclitic), class 6
n - u ) o p r r M€N
n - aotoc
N -T
I - T N - M - N -
(2)
(5a)
U (6)
(I)
i-T i.M io - q
(5a) (2) (3)
(2)
uJ eeo<})iAe €TBe-2tuB nim
X T
T
(4) (5a)
N - T U
(5b)
(2) (5a) (6)
“ I wrote Book One, O Theophilus, about all the things N T - a .- ic
a.pxei
N- N- T
T
N -N -N - T
n - " a.a.-Y
(2) (2) (5a)
(5a)
(2 )(2 )(2 )(4 )
n -* T
cbcu
N -N -N -N - T
(5b) (2 )(2 )(2 )(2 )(5 a )
n 2 H t- o y N -T (2)
(4)
that Jesus began to do and to teach w ith” (Acts 1:1) 30 M utable morphs: the three states. Some morphs occur as a set o f allomorphs c c u T n , c e T n - , c o T n = ‘c h o o s e ’ € T B e - , eTBHHT= ‘b e c a u se o f ’ tra d itio n a lly c a lle d ‘states', n a m e ly
25
FUNDAMENTAL COMPONENTS
i. 'absolute sta te’, a term inal bound/unbound m orph 28(5a) (e.g. c c u rrr ‘ch o p se’) ii. ‘prenominal state a non-lerm inal bound m orph 28(2) that m ust be com pleted by a non-personal entity term , i.e. determ inator pronoun 44, specifier pronoun 63, article phrase 43, specifier phrase 64, proper noun 126, or any prenom inal + possessed n oun 138 (after som e prenom inal states, also the 2d pi. alternant personal suffix - t h y t n table 6, p. 69) (prenom inal states are m arked w ith a single hyphen in m odem dictionaries, e.g. c e r n - ‘ch o o se’, e t b e - ‘because o f ) iii. ‘pi epersonal state a non-term inal bound m orph that m ust be com plet ed by a personal entity term , i.e. any prepersonal +
personal interm ediate 80, 82 o r suffix 85 (with som e further allom orphic alternations)
(prepersonal states are m arked w ith a ditto sym bol in m o d em dictionaries, e.g. €T B H H T = ‘because o f’, c o T n = ‘ch o o se’). Stales are thus altem ate form s whose selection relates to w hat kind o f m orph, if any, is suffixed to them . Traditionally, the three states are status absolulus, siat44s cpnstnictus, and status pronom inatis.
M utable transitive infinitives 167 occu r in all three states, e.g. cc u ttt, c e T r r - , coTTT= ‘ch o o se’. O ccurring only in prenom inal and prepersonal states are: (i) prepositions, e.g. e - / e p o = ‘to w ard s’, k a t a - / k a t a p o = ‘according to ’ K axa, 2 N - / n 2 H t= ‘in ’ ; (ii) co n ju g atio n b ases and m u ta b le co n v erters, e.g.
31 Absolute spelling o f the prenominal state som etim es occurs as a variant, in w hich the prenom inal is spelled like the absolute (oy^um - for o Y e n - ‘e a t’). E.g. el-N A -o Y ti> N 2 -rT 2 u;B eB oA ShC hass 6 5 :1 9 -2 0 (w here o y i u n ^ - is for oY eN 2 ~) “ I shall dem onstrate this assertion,” eq-TAYo-®KApiTOc S h lll 175:24 (w ith textual var. e c |- T J i Y e - ) “ Bearing fru it,” AN0 K - 0 Y p e c |p-®NOBe A pophP atr 160 (C haine 3 6 :3 ) ( a n o k - fo r a n ? - , very com m on variant) “ I am a sinner.”
32 Stress accent groups: the hypothetical spoken correlate o f houndness. N orm ally in E gyptian C optic m orphs e . o. and p ( h. o . and cu) seem to occur ooJy in the lasi or pe\.t to last syllable o f a bo u n d group, and no m ore than one
:6
NDCLEDS
AND
E X P A N S IO N
IN
S Y N T A C T IC
PA TTERN S
of these sounds/letters occurs within any bound group (with a few exceptions such as eroT-THYTN /e t’ttewtn/ “To you” ). (It must also be noted that there are many bound groups in which none of these three sounds/letters occurs.) This and other factors have led to the following hypothesis: the m ajor stress accent in each spoken bound group fell upon the last or next to last syllable; and, furthermore, it coincided with e, o, or 6 if one of these sounds happened to occur; furthermore, a doubled letter coincides with a stressed syllabic sound in most cases, 36(a). A y ti’ 2 M—r r - M e 2 - a j o M N T N - 2 0 0 Y A - Y - a j e A . e e T upcurre
awo h’’mpmehs6m‘’nt ‘’nho’w aw sele’t sope “ On the third day there was a marriage” (John 2:1) This hypothesis implies that in speech, a bound group (optionally followed by an enclitic unbound morph 28[6]) correlated to a complete spoken phrase (stress group, breath group, prosodic colon). But the pronunciation o f GrecoCoptic morphs is not accounted for by this hypothesis, since their presence often causes several letters of the h o cu set to occur in a single bound group. S E N T E N C E I N T O N A T IO N C O N T O U R S : Q U E S T IO N S , F O C A L P O IN T S , E T C .
33 Completely lost, because not represented in writing, are the contours o f sen tence intonation that would have distinguished e.g. questions from assertions. This causes ambiguity especially since Coptic writing does not employ a ques tion mark nor is there a distinctive interrogative word order. Some written interrogative sentences can be identified in other ways 511, but many cannot. Also unrecorded are the distinctive intonation contours that would have marked focal points 445 in the flow o f information; their absence leads to ambiguity in interpreting sentences marked by the focalizing conversion. Indeed, it must be supposed that all individual patterns as such would have been characterized by distinct intonation contours. This information would have resolved many of the ambiguities o f the text as represented only in writ ing. N U C L E U S A N D E X P A N S IO N IN S Y N T A C T IC P A T T E R N S
34 The strictly sequential analysis o f bound groups 29 by no means exhausts the dependent relationships among morphs. At the next level of analysis we find syntactic patterns that contain hierarchies o f elem ents in grammatical rela tionships, which are in fact the main topic of this book. E.g. oYpeqpNOBe rre “ He is a sinner” = ([0 Y - ( p e q - [ p - ( ® N 0 Be)])] [ n e ] )
27
1 U N I J A M l i N
1AI,
C O M l ’ O N I i N
I S
111 this exam ple, oypecipN O B e “ A sin n e r” and iie “ H e (is)” are both essen tial (co-dependent) elem ents in a nom inal sentence pattern 267 ; furtherm ore, oYpecjpNOBe is an article phrase 43 that contains an indef. article o y - + pecjpNOBe, w hich is a com posite agential com m on noun 121 that contains an agential prefix p e c j- -t- pNOBe, w hich is a com pound verb 180 that contains an infinitive p - ‘d o ' + ®NOse, w hich is an article phrase that contains a zero article ® -t- a gendered com m on noun n o B e ‘sin ’. In adjacent dependency analysis 28, 0 Y-pecj-p-® N 0 Be is sim ply a bound group consisting o f five m orphs o f classes 2-2 2-2-4 (N -N -N -N -T ). B ut at the subsequent level o f analysis, even the exclusively unbound m orphs (enclitics) o f bound group analysis, such as rre , w ill stand in a dependent relationship w ith som e other elem ent o f the syntactic pattern to w hich they belong. W ithin such a hierarchy, each non term inal bound m orph ( o y - , p e c j-, p - , ®) functions as a ‘nucleus’ (syntactic base o f departure) that is ‘expanded’ (added to) by a gram m atically com patible elem ent. M any expansion elem ents are them selves com plex, containing w ithin them selves on e or m ore nucleii with their ow n expansion elem ents. T hus in the previous exam ple o y - is expanded by pecjpN O se p e c j- is expanded by p n o B e p - is expanded by ®NOBe ®is expanded by, and actualizes 92, the lexem e n o Be ‘E xpansion’ also occurs on a scale larg er than the single bound group, as w hen a determ inator pronoun o r personal m orph is expanded by an entity term : e.g. oY M ene I nN O X ce John 3 :3 3 “ G od is tru e” (true is-H e I G od) 275; rreJCA-g jv.e I n 6 i - 7 c L uke 9 :6 2 “ Jesus sa id ” (said-H e I Jesus) 375; o r a verb, by its adverbial expansions 181.
S YLLABLE F O R MAT I O N
35 Syllabic and non-syllabic manifestation o f phonemes. B roadly, Sahidic C optic sounds fall into tw o physiological classes; ‘vowels’ (those sounded w ithout obstructing the flow o f air through m outh, nose, or throat)
a eeod and ‘consonants ’ (those m ade w ith som e kind o f constriction o f m outh, nose, or throat)
b y k l m n p r s t w s f h c k>' ' In som e languages, e.g. classical G reek, every syllable necessarily contains a vowel, w hich functions as the apex (resonant peak) o f the syllable. B ut this is not so in E gyptian C optic morphs. It is a rem arkable property o f Egyptian
28
SYl. l.AHLi;
F O R M A T I O N
Coptic syllable formation that not only every vowel but also every consonant can have syllabic function, that is, can function as the apex (resonant peak) of a syllable. The discrepancy beiw een G reek and Egyptian Coptic syllable form ation m ay accouni for Itie use o f a special written sym bol in Satiidic C optic (ttie superlinear stroke 38) to m ark ihose syllables w hose apex does not contain a G reek vowel letter ( ^ a - , - r n , B - in 2 AA.O. c c u T n , these are syllables of a character that could not occur in Greek.
Egyptian Coptic vowels always have syllabic function, i.e. always function as the apex (resonant peak) of their syllable. Such, for example, is the sound 6 in the following one-syllable morphs. (apex, i.e. resonant peak)
\ b
o
k
o s
o
BtUK
Egyptian Coptic consonants each can have both syllabic and non-syllabic function, depending on the particular syllable to w hich they happen to belong: i. a 'syllabic’ function (as the apex of a syllable), e.g. the phoneme /n/ as sounded in the following examples
h
n-
f
2N -
n
t
cjiTt
n f-
n-
ncj-
iJ -
In the hypothetical spoken form o f such examples, a non-phonemic resonance occurs ju st before the syllabic phoneme is articulated: ‘’n, 'n. en. h^n-
f^nt
"nf-
"n-
The non-phonemic resonance (') o f the syllabic sounds 'h U 'm 'n 'r is som etim es writ ten as e : e b ea. em e n Ep. E.g. BE ‘forgetfulness’, b a - and b e a ‘loosen’, OYM- and o y e m - ‘eat’, and ^ e n - ‘in ’, n n p - and n n E p — ‘do n o t’. This is non-standard orthography, and it also occurs w ith other syllabic consonants; e.g. M nK - and m h e k - , n n q - and n n E q - (negative past lense), ^^ u b c and ^ ^ o b e c ‘cover’, toN ? and c o n e ^ ; sim ilarly non-phonemic i, (before 2), o y c o n ? and o y c o n a.^ ‘reveal’, tc o b ^ and tco b a.^ ‘pray’.
ii. a ‘non-syllabic’ function, e.g. the phoneme /n / as sounded in the follow ing examples
h
o
n
e
n
e
euez
h
n
f
a n
NOYCJ
u
AN
29
1 II N l>A M I-, N I A I. < <>M I’ ON I, N I S
Thus all the consonants had tw o potential functions in the syllable. Ft>r ex am ple, the consonant phonem e /b / had both syllabic function and pronunciation ‘'h, as in
^bse ( i t y e ‘forgetfuln ess’) f b t ( t b t ‘fish ’) w o fb (oytuT B ‘change p la ce’) and non-syllabic function and pronunciation b, as in
bo ( b c u ‘b u sh ’) hok ( b o k ‘g o ’) kob (kcub ‘d o u b le’ [verb]) C onsequently, m anifestations o f the phonem e /h i are transcribed as both ^b and b, depending on its function in particular syllables. T he sam e is true fo r all seventeen consonants:
b y k I ni n p r s t w s f h c k' ’ ‘’b i ‘'k < ‘1 ‘ni < ’n "p ’’r ''s ’’t u ‘’/ ‘‘h ‘"c •’k' ale N ote that the sounds i, u, a, and e o ccur in this series as syllabic counterparts of y, w, and non-syllabic / ’/. 36 Expressions o f the glottal stop I ’I. T he phonem e / ’/ (glottal stop) does not have a corresponding letter in the Sahidic alphabet. G enerally, a ‘glottal stop' is a sound produced by closing the vocal chords and then releasing a burst o f air. (This sound is heard in the second syllable o f E nglish “ w ater” as pronounced in L ondon C ockney dialect or “ gotten ” as in som e A m erican N ew England dialects; w a -’‘’r, g o -’eii', also in deliberately spoken G erm an at the onset o f any accented syllable beginning with a vow el; “ d er £ rs te .” )W hatever its p ro nunciation may have been, the C optic glottal stop is a consonant, and it had tw o functions in C optic syllable fo n n atio n : syllabic function and non-syllab ic function. E xpressed in writing, the glottal stop phoneine has four m anifes tations: (a) doubHng of a preceding vow el letter, (b) x, (c) e, and (d) nothing (non-representation, zero). T he occurrence o f these m anifestations, in alterna tion 20, is determ ined by the conditions and environm ent in w hich / ' / occurs. (a) Non-syllahic expression. Doubling of the letter i., e , h, o , or to, or (as allophone of /o/) o y , where tlie letter that is doubled manifests the stressed syllabic phonem e of a bound group 32. E.g. /so’t/ ‘cut’, c e e n e /sa’pV o r/s a ’py/ ‘rem ain’, T H H n /te’p/ ‘be accustom ed’, c o o q /so ’f/ ‘be polluied’, m ji NOYo y * /m ’no’/ ‘feed ’ (where o y is the allophone of /o/), cpcucuT ‘cut’ /so ’t/. (h) Syllabic expression. Unstressed syllabic Ji. preceding the stressed 32 syllable. E.g. TA.N2 0 /t’nho/ ‘make alive’, ta ,k o / t ’ko/ ‘destroy’, Mi,NOYOY= /m ’n o ’/ ‘feed’, i,pocy I 'w i / ‘become co ld ’. (c) Both non-syllahic and sytiahic expression, two simultaneous a n d discontinuous m an ifestations within the same morph. Relevant m orphs have the follow ing forms (where N = ‘non-syllabic phonem e’):
30
SYI.I.AULI;
1- O R M A T I O N
/ N o N ' /, e.g. /ponV ncucuN e / N o N ’ /, e.g. /ponV n o o N e /V is m anifested both as doubling of the preceding stressed cu or o and sim ultaneously (provided it is the lasi phonem e in its bound group) as unstressed e. B ut if/V is follow ed by another phoneme in its bound group, only ihe doubling feature is manifested. E.g. /w o t’, w ot’-, w oi’/ o y c u tu T e , o y o o t = , o y o o T e ‘separate’; /h o k ’, hok’-, hok’/ gcucuKe, 2 0 0 K«, 2 0 0 KE ‘shave’ ; /pon’, pon’-, p e n ’/ ncucuN e, n o o N s , n o o N e ‘tu rn ’. (d) N on-syttahic: nothing, zero. The phoneme / ’/ is not m anifested if ii (a) imm ediately precedes a stressed syllabic phonem e ( /’oip/ cuttt ‘load’; /w ’op/ O Y o n ‘becom e p u re ’); or (P) imm ediately follows a stressed syllabic phonem e and is the last phonem e in its bound group (/yo’/ e icu , but /y o ’-/ ‘w ash’; /so ’/ ccu, but /so ’-/ c o o = ‘drink’; /n o ’/ NOY ‘g o ’; /h a ’/ g e ‘fall’); or (y) is non-syllabic and unstressed (/et’ttew tn/ e t o t - t h y t TT “ T o you,” b u t/e to ’is/ e t o o t - c “To her” ).
37 Articulatory classification o f sounds. A hypothetical reconstruction o f th e spo ken articulation o f sounds in Sahidic has yielded the results in table 2. TABLE 2 A r t i c u l a t o r y C l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f E g y p ti a n C o p t i c S o u n d s IN THE S a h i d i c D i a l e c t V o w els (5 )
C o nso na nts
(H aving O nly Syllabic Function)
(17)
(E ach H aving B oth S yllabic and N o n -sy llab ic Funciion)
S o n o ran ts (7) b y t m n r w ‘■h i n 'm '•/[ V u F ricativ es
S tops
s s f h k p t ky ■ •■s <’s ' / ’’h ‘k ‘p '( ' k ' a le
Voiced A dapted
fr o m :
A ffricate c ‘’c
Unvoiced
L. Depuydt, “ On Coptic Sounds,” Orientalia 62 (I993):346
38 The superlinear stroke as an optional indicator o f syllabic fitnction. M any sy l lables in Egyptian C optic m orphs do not contain a vow el. A s stated above 35, the apex or resonant peak o f these syllables was form ed by a consonant with syllabic function; ‘’b, ‘‘k, ‘’I ^p, ‘"s, etc. In w ritten Sahidic Coptic, such sy lla bles— a type that does not occur in G reek, w here every syllable contains a vow el— w ere m arked w ith a special sym bol, the ‘superlinear stroke’: t b , t i c , B \, Tfr, etc. (except that notation o f syllabic /y /, /w /, and /V, i. u, and ale, are not m arked w ith the superlinear stroke.) T he superlinear stroke w as an optional sign; it was w ritten m ost often when the consonant belonged to the
31
FUNDAMENTAL COMPONI-NTS
sonorant class b I m n i b \ h Ti p. Thus the stroke is a signal related to sylla ble formation; il is not the expression of a phoneme. Very few Greco-Coptic morphs occur wilh a superlinear stroke m arking syllabic func tion, notably Ci,p5 ‘flesh’, i,p5 ‘bear’, and M i,cTir5 ‘w hip’. In non-standard orthogra phy, the Greco-Coptic syllables e e , e a ., e m , e n , and e p are som etim es replaced by b , X. M, N, and p (thus 2 BJLO)Mi,c £p5opa(;, £>-7ii^Eiv, ni.pMBOA.H 7iapE|iPo>.ii, NTOA.H £vTO>-li, C n p M i. OTiepiJa).
Position o f the stroke. Some scribes wrote the superlinear stroke precisely above the letter whose sound had syllabic function (and was the apex o f its syl lable) or shifted slightly to the right. zFi. 2n7 epATq, upopn, TMhiTCABe h'^n, e ra ff, sol'll?, tnfntsahe Others wrote it above all or most letters of such a syllable, without indicating where the syllabic consonant (and syllable apex) was located. Such strokes often went from the middle o f one letter to the middle o f another. 2 N,
6pATc|, ty o p n , m o o y c , M N TCN O O yC
B A A e,
M NTCN
n tc n o o y c , m n tc n o o y c ,
Thus, rwo systems o f superlineation are employed in standard spelling; a sin gle-stroke system and a connective stroke system. In both systems the stroke is able to occur over any consonant letter except i and y, with which (for obscure reasons) the superlinear stroke is incompatible; cf. 35. Cf. figure fol lowing table 1. Modern printed editions often misrepresent the length and position o f superlinear strokes because o f the technical difficulty of printing a connective stroke. Nevertheless, citations in this book reproduce the printed editions even when these misrepresent the manuscript, thus giving what readers may expect to find in one modern edition or another. For exam ple, the Barcelona m anuscript o f M ark 16:6, ed. Quecke (plate 3), actually has i.qTa)OYNq N qzM neiM i. A.N (written solid), which, for typographical reasons, was rep resented in the sam e edition as: i,qTO)OYNq NqzMneTMJi a.n . Some m odem editors om it Ihe superlinear stroke altogether, especially when editing a work whose manuscript witnesses employ more than one system o f superlineation.
In Sahidic manuscripts copied after the eighth century A.D. superlineation usually does not correspond to the standard system (its function has not yet been systematically studied). In this period the stroke is written very narrow, virtually resembling a dot; this form is interpreted in the present book as a short superlinear stroke. Superlinear stroke representing line-final n . In manuscripts, non-syllabic n that would occur at the end o f a line is optionally replaced and represented by a superlinear stroke over the preceding vowel. E.g. ec|
32
T HI i N O T A T I O N O F G R E C O - C O P T I C
MORPHS
T HE N OT AT I ON OF G R E C O - C O P T I C MO R P H S
39 The spelling o f Greek morphs. The Greek and Coptic phoneme systems were entirely different in structure. As a result, two different norms o f spelling are followed in Coptic literary manuscripts, one for Greco-Coptic vocabulary items and one for Egyptian Coptic. In the Hellenistic and Roman periods the living Greek language underwent major changes, especially a reduction in the num ber o f Greek vowel phonemes that were significantly distinguished in actual speech. These changes are evident in spellings that occur in non-literary Greek documents o f the period. But Greek literature continued to be w ritten and copied in the older, classical Greek spelling. Accordingly in early Sahidic lit erary manuscripts Greco-Coptic morphs are normally written in classical Greek spelling. However, in later Sahidic manuscripts (and to some extent in the early ones) the copyists write non-classical spellings o f Greco-Coptic morphs. Some o f these probably reflect late Greek pronunciation (especially ei = h = i = y x \ = e), while others seem to be influenced by Egyptian-Coptic (r = k . a = t , Z = c). Historically, they coincide with increasing isolation from Greek learn ing, especially after the separation o f Coptic Orthodoxy from the G reek-speak ing Chalcedonian church of Constantinople (after A.D. 451) and, a few cen turies later, the gradual replacement o f Coptic by Arabic 1. (a) The following sets o f Greek vow el letiers are sometimes exchanged for one anoiher. To some degree eventually there was general confusion in the spelling o f Greek vowel phonemes. i. e i = H = I = Y (rarely = o i ) . E.g. A .H nei >_i)7iEiv, e n e i e v M e i i . £7ii0i)|jia, A y n H
xcKiTHc iScKriTii(;, KYpHcce KTipuooEiv, ntpxcMOC JiEipaono(;, Boteet PoiiOeiv,
=
e. E.g.
A.ITI ETi,
£7ii6i)|jia, K i.T oirtu pei KUTr]-
g e p e c i c al'pEOK;.
iii. 0 = 0 ). E.g. j l i k e o c SiKoioK;, Miuric )j6yi(;. iv. Other occasional vowel exchanges:
=
o , i.i =
o i , i.i =
y. ^ =
i. e =
Y. k =
o '
= e, OY = o (h) The following pairs o f Greek consonant letters are sometimes exchanged for one another. i. r = K. E.g. r i,p n o c Kup7i6(; ‘fruit’, Kpi,.ov ‘stumbling block’; o y A e and o y T e are interchangeable in Coptic (cf. oi)5E, oCte). iii. z = c . E.g. e n iT i.z e ^TiiTaaoEiv ‘command’ (vetb), (verb). \
oi)^r)TEiv ‘debate’
(c) Ki (or Kei) is sometimes replaced by <5i (or <5ei). E.g. <5iei.pi. KiGcipa. eNrKi,(5i and eNrKi.(5ei iyKUKEiv. (d) Doubled consonants are sometimes simplified and single consonants doubled. E.g. e i.p e i BappEiv, PHNHMi, yEvvri|ia, n i.ppoiM ii, Tiapoifjia, ei.A.A.i,cci. 0a>_aooa.
33
FUNDAMENTAL COMPONENTS
40 2 ill place o f both rough and smooth breathing. G reek initial /h / (spiritus asper, rough breathing) regularly o ccurs in G reco-C optic inorphs as 2 ; e.g. 2 A rio c ayioq, 2 eBJnuM Ac ^pSona^, 2 0 M0 itu c 6noicoq, 2 Y M Neye uhvevjeiv, 2 0 CTe coCTTE, 2 ptuMH Tcbnr|. B ut also in the norm al spelling o f som e G recoC optic m orphs, initial 2 occurs w here G reek has a sm ooth (lenis) breathing (no /h /); e.g. 2 eeN O C for E0voq, 2 eA .m ze fiXni^Eiv, 2 Ikcun eIkcov. 41 The superlinear stroke irt Greco-Coptic morphs has three purely graphic fu n c tions:
(a) (N orm al) T o m ark abbreviated w ritings o f som e B iblical nam es and w ords o f sacred im portance to C hristianity (nomina sacra). Such abbreviations, m ade by om ission o f letters from the m iddle o f a m orph, are called ‘compendia' (or 'suspensions'). T he follow ing com pendia persistently occur in C optic literary texts, instead o f the unabbreviated form : (AAyeiJk.) David (in Old T estam ent books) eiHM etc. (Tl2iepoYCAAHM) Jerusalem I HA (icpAHA) Israel Tc o r iH c (iH c o y c ) (i) Jesus, (ii) Joshua TTNA (rTNeyMA) spirit; and derivatives, e.g. h n i k o n (nNeyMATiKON) spiritual, rjNATO(})opoc (TTNeyMATO(})opoc) inspired eiAHM,
c f d c (cT A y p o c)
cross
c f d y (cT A y p o y ) crucify ^ o r x p c (i) x p ic T o c Christ, (ii) x p H c x o c excellent E.g. NA-TTej^ J lG 7c A y - c f o y n - t c a p 5 G al 5 :2 4 (ed. T hom pson) “ T hose w ho belong to C hrist Jesus have crucified the fle sh .”
(b) (Rare) T o m ark, occasionally, non-G reek nam es; e.g. A xJp Josh 7 :2 0 (ed. K asser), p S I a Josh 22:32. NAZ^ppA Josh 7 :1 7 , 2 poyBHN Josh 2 2 :3 0 (c) To represent
34
n
at the end o f a line in a m anuscript. Cf. 38.
Determinators: Articles and Determinator Pronouns The Nature o f Coptic Determinators 42 Definition and List of Determinators 42 Articles and the Article Phrase 43 Determinator Pronouns 44 Determination 45 Gender 46 The Zero Article ®(Suppression of Article) Concord of Number and Gender 48 Motivation o f Gender Expression 49
47
Survey of Determinators 50 Indefinite Article and Pronoun o y - , o y x 50 ‘Another’ (Article and Pronoun) K e - , 6 e 51 Simple Definite Article n - 52 The Nexus Pronoun n e 53 Possessive Article and Possessed Pronoun tt= and h a - , TTtu= ‘The O ther’ (Article and Pronoun) n K e -. nK e 55 Nearer Demonstrative n e f - , ttaI 56 Farther Demonstrative i t - . . . eTMMAy. TreTMMAy 57 Affective Demonstrative t t i - , h h 58 Zero Article and Pronoun ®, oyoN 59 ‘Any, Every, A ll’ (Article and P ro n o u n ). . . n i m , oyoN NIM 60 Additional Com binations of These Grammatical Categories Reiteration of the Article FTirase irptuM e irptuM e
54
61
62
THE n a t u r e o f COP T I C DETERMI NATORS
42 Definition and list o f determinators. 'D etenninators', comprising articles and pronouns, are morphs that express the following grammatical categories Determination {definite versus indefinite and/or non-definite 45) Number {singular versus plural) Grammatical gender {masculine versus fem inine 46)
35
I Jin
I ' R M I N A T O R S
in the following intersections: Def. Articles and Pronouns Def. sing. masc. Def. sing. fern. Def. pi.
e.g. n e T T e i-
TJkl
this/these
N e i-
Indef. Articles Indef. sing. Indef. pi.
e.g. O Y 2EN -
a (some
. .
.)
Indef. Pronouns Indef. sing. masc. Indef. sing. fern. Indef. pi.
e.g. o y x oyei 2 0 iN e
someone/some
The zero determinator 47 expresses a suppression o f these categories. (Gender is not expressed in the plural forms, nor in the indef. sing, articles. With some gaps determination, number, and gender are also expressed by the cardinal numbers 66.) Most determinators also express an additional grammatical category: relative distinctness (otherldifferent), nexus (is), relative distance from the speaker fr/i 1.9, that), totality (each/every), or relation to a following element (related to . . .); c f also 61. Articles and determinator pronouns mostly occur in corresponding pairs. Article
Pronoun
OYK err-
OYJ^ 6e —
rr='
rre nw=^
__ 3
T IX -
rtK er r e in - . . . eTMMAY n i-
riK e
—
rreTMMAY nH OYON
0-' . .
nx\
. NIM^
OYON NIM
a; someone/-thing 50 another; another one 51 the 52 he/it is . . . 53 my (your, etc.); mine (yours, etc.) 54 the one related to . . . 54 also the; the other; the other one 55 this; this one 56 that; that one 57 the/that; this one/that one 58 Cf. 47, 59 any/every/all; any one/every one/a}^ 60
'•The . . . related to . . . n - i . - , n-EK - etc. (po.ssessive article); e.g. ni,cyi,jce “Wy word ^‘The one related to . . . ’ . n c u - (, ncu-K . etc. (possessed pronoun) “Mine, yours, (etc.)” ’Cf. the construction of general relationship the . . related to . . . 147, e.g. ohY m—n x o e r c “The hoy^e of the Lnrd' 'Zero anicle: expressed by significani absence of any morph in a position •Ahere an anicle could be e\pecied. e.g. “'Vords/An> v.ord/An> \\ords/A v.ord (elc.).“ The * i' a T7*ociern convention u^ed cnl> for grammatical anaKsis. -Enclitic: e.g. cL?x_xG MiM ■Ar> ■ ‘•ord.
T in; N A i u Ri ; o i
(o n ic
i) i: r !■k m i n a i ok s
43 The article phrase ‘A rticles’, e.g. o y - a , TT- th e , r r e i - th is . . . , . . . n im a n y l e v e i y l a l l . . . are determ inators that m ust be expanded 34 by a com m on noun, p rep o sitio n o f relationship, specifier, or relative clause, thus form ing an ‘article p h r a s e F or com patibilities, cf. table 3. T he article phrase consists o f any article + its expansion. A rticle phrases play the role o f entity term 141. E.g. o y I t t o a i c “ A c ity ,” ir ljc o e ic “ T he L o rd ,” up^Jce nim “ E very w ord,” nleBOA p e e “ T he O ne from N azareth ,” TreiltyoMNT “ T hese th ree,” TrleNT-Ac|-TTApAAiAoY m m o-c| “ T he one w ho betrayed H im .” T he article is the nucleus, expressing gram m atical categories and som etim es referentially linking the article phrase to other points in the text; the expansion elem ent expresses content (usually lexical 9 1 -9 2 ). F or exam ple. A rticle I N oun T I rro A ic (“ T he c ity ” ) nucleus I expansion (gram m atical (lexical and referential inform ation) inform ation) A rticles actualize com m on noun lexem es in the article phrase, cf. 92. A single article can actualize several coordinated nouns (rare): e.g. a,q-CMOY e p o -® e - ‘*TM-Tpe®-cycucuT M - n q e iK g i - ^ o i x e ( n - + o e iK ^ i - ^ o i x e ) S h lll 2 0 5 :2 3 -2 4 “ He has blessed you so that you do not run short o f bread and c lothing"; i ,N r - 0 YM0 Ni,x0 c A.N JciN- MneINA.Y H OYHHB S h lll 2 5 :1 -2 “ From this lim e on, I am a m onk no longer, nor priest” ( o y - + m o n a .x o c h o y h h b ) 257. All the articles are prefixes (non terminal bound m orphs 28[2]) e x c e p t. . . nim , which is an enclitic 28(6). Thus article phrases have Iwo form s: (1) Article + E xpansion Element; (2) E xpansion Elem ent + nim . TABLE 3 C o m p a t ib il it y
of
In E x p a n s io n E l e m e n t
A ny co m m o n noun 9 2 P rep o siiio n s o f rela iio n sh ip ' 1 2 4 S pecifiers (cf. table 4 , p. 57): C ardinal num bers 6 6 OY, ‘w hai? w h ic h ? ’
w it h
411
A r t ic l e s
C o m p a t ib l e A r t ic l e s
A ll articles n - , T -, N -, OY~, 2 6
n
-
All def. sin g , a rtic le s ; K e oY “ , z e N K e —, O Y ~ , 2 6
A A J iY ‘ a “ y ’
R elativ e clause
E x p a n s io n E l e m e n t s t h e A r t ic l e P h r a s e
n
—. . . . N I M
TT-, T - , N - as an teced en t 4 0 8 , 4 1 1
'E.g. EBOA. ? N -
37
i j i: T i ; r m I N A r o R S
? e N -, n - , T -, N - are also formaiive eleiiienis in complex articles (e.g. ? e N K e -. n K E - , n e T - . n - . . . etm m ay- n i - , n= ). n - and t - occur as a compoiieiil of eerlalii proper nouns, 126, 127, e.g. TrAA.iA.Aii “Galilee." n e i - , n - , . , etm m a y , ami n K e can occur wiih proper nouns 128, e.g. neeiM eAXiceJLEK “This Melchizedek.”
44 ‘Determinator pronouns' are determinators that are actualized entity temis 141 by their very nature. As pronouns they present an object o f thought by
speaking of it in grammatical categories (as would the corresponding article), but without denoting, naming, or describing it by any lexical (non-grammatical) content. E.g. o \ x someone, n ^ i this one, oyoN nim any one!every one/all, ttcutn yours ( c f the articles o y - , r r e i- , . . . n i m , and rreTN-). ? e N - , n - , T -. N - , . , . NIM are fomialive elements in complex deierminalor pronouns: ^eNKooYC, n k e(T ), nAT, neTMMAy, n n , ncu=, o y o N n im ,
45 ‘D eterm ination’ (def. versus indef. and/or non-definite) is a complex gram
matical category, which cannot be described simply. Its minimal expression is the contrast o f simple indef. article and simple def. article, which (according to context) can convey, for example: (a) Exieni o f presupposed knowledge + absencc or presencx’ o f referenlial linkage (crossreference) Indef. (o y -)'. Known lo speaker bul nol lo listener and now being introduced as a topic o f discourse, e.g. at the beginning of a story. No referential linkage. E.g. N e-Y N -oyK piT H C ^ N -o y n o A ic e - N - q - p - ® 2 0 T e a n ? H T - c j M -nN O Y fe Luke 18:2 “In a certain city there was a judge who did not fear God.” Def. ( n - ) : Known to or anticipated by both speaker and listener because tlie entity term is either mentioned in the preceding text (retrospective referential linkage) or her alded as coming in what follows (prospective referential linkage). E.g. (retrospective) A-YK^AOOA.e a ;cu n e , , . A-ycM H JlG a ;cu n e e b o a ^ N -x e K A o o A e Luke 9;.34-5 “A cloud came . . , And a voice came out o f the cloud” ; (prospective) le p o M n e n t - a - o c T a c n p p o m oy n ? h t - c Isa 6:1 “The year in which King Ozias died” ; npAN M -n jc o e ic Mark I 1:9 “Ttje name o f the Lord.” (h) Particularity versus generality Indef. ( o y - ) : One particular instance o f a class, o f limited extern, o y r o ^ n e “One person, A person” ; o y m o o y “ Some water. Water” ; o y e o o y “Glory (in one particu lar situation)” ; o y n o y b “A piece o f gold” ; o y o e i k “A loaf o f bread, Some bread. Bread” ; oyM e “A truth. The truth (about one matter)” ; oyk-Ake “ Darkness (on one occasion)” ; ^ entcom n ? h t 2eNM NT-co<5 ^ et^ n N T -A T -cooY N ^^NnopNiA ^eNM itye ?eNNO<5 m - m n t - a c e b h c Shlll 2 06:1-2 “Acts o f hardhearledness, acts o f folly, acts o f ignorance, acts o f illicit sexuality, acts o f strife, and acts of great impi ety.” Def. ( n - ) : (i) The general name o f a class, tm e “Truth"; o m o o y “ Water (the sub stance)” ; npcuME “The human species. Humankind, The human being, A person (gen erally),” (it) A type p a r excellence. n c 0
38
iiii;
NAruRi-.
( >i
( o r i H
di
i i -.r m i n a i o r s
(c) Degree o f typicalness /ndef. (oY ~): An ordinary instance or instances o f a class. N e e N -O Y2^tA.HT e - 0 )3 iq -c c u 0 Y 2 e ^ o y N N -N e q M i.c M all 23:37 “ L ik e o (lypical) bird lhal gathers ils young” ; N e e N-oYBpH(5e Luke lO; |8 “ Like o stroke o f lightning” (but with def. arti cle N e e PAp N-TeB pH (5e Luke 17:24 “ Like lightening [in its essence]” ). So also ? N -O Y - . -. forming adverbs o f manner, ?N-OY M e “ T ruly.” (i) The most typical or essential instance o f a class. n N O Y T e “ G o d ” 136 always takes n - when referring to the God o f the Bible); n N O M o c “ The L aw ” [i.e. o f Israel]; n e p n e “The T em ple” [i.e. o f God in Jerusalem ], (ii) The nam e o f a unique item or .set o f items. TeY
(n -):
(N O Y T e
(d) Direct address (vocative) A ll Com m on nouns in direct address require a def, article 137(ii); x e c ^ iM e John 2 :4 “ W o m an !” ; n e N e i c u T e T ® - ? N - M n H Y e Matt 6:9 “ O ur Father who art in h e av e n !"; o5 n p c u M e o y o n n i m e x K - K p i N e Rom 2:1 “ O fellow, whoever you are, you who judge another! ” No contrast with the indefinite is possible, hence the def. m arks only the direct address status, not determ ination. A fuller accqunt o f the contrast between sem antic classification o f lexemes.
n -
and
oy
~
would also require an elaborate
In some patterns a syntactic distinction between definite versus ‘m n -d efin ite’ (i.e. indef. together with zero 47 article phrases and determinators) is m ani fested: cf. 322, 323, 404, 408, 430, 476, 477, 479, 480, 482. For indef. versus zero, cf. 48, 145, 171. 46 ‘G ender’ (grammatical gender) is a grammatical category permanently asso ciated with certain classes o f noun lexemes 105, 126, whether denoting inan imates or denoting items with biological gender: thus sky (r ln e “The sky” ), mother (tIm aay “The mot her ” ) , ( 2 P
39
iJi; I i : r m I N A l O R s
corcijgionisi (also Ihc bnilhcr)." (Bui Ihc converse is iioi Irue: T l
47 The zero article ®(suppression o f article). Where a def. or indef. article might normally precede a common noun, the article is often suppressed. This signifi cant absence o f Jirticle, where an article could normally occur, is the ‘zero arti cle in modem grammatical analysis, it can be notated ®. Zero article signals the actualization 92(a) of a common noun as entity term, just as the manifest jirticles do, but it conveys no information about determination, number, and gender. (English has no one single equivalent o f the Coptic zero article. “ Any . . . followed by sing, or pi., or the bare English sing, or pi. sometimes corre sponds; several English translations may appear to be equally correct. E.g. M irp -B tu K e 2 0 yN e-®TTOAic n - ® c a m a p i t h c Matt 1 0 :5 “ Do not enter cities of Samaritans, any city of Samaritans, any cities o f the Samaritans, etc.” el? TioXiv Lanapixwv.) Typically, ihe zero article occurs (a) To actualize a noun lexeme as having general m eaning, forming compound verbs 180: p-^^O T e “ Fear [vb.]. Be afraid” (Do-®fear); 5oi)>-e()E1v “ Serve, Funclion as servani” (Do-*'servanl); t-®B^riTicMA “ B apiize” (Give-^baplism ); JCi-®CBcu “ L earn” (Gel-®leaching); n p e q -N K O x ic mn-®2 0 o y t “ Male hom osexual” (The gram m alically ma.sculine enliiy who lies down with ®male); <5 m - ® ( 5 o m “ Be able (lo)” (Find ®power) (b) In verbal construclions expressing predication o f a general characlerislic 179, such as cpcune N-® . . . , o Fi-® . . . , p-® . . . “ be . . . e i p e MMO-q N-®, AA -q N-® . , “ Make him be . . . ” E.g. aa - k n -® pm m a 6 ShChass 8.5:34 “ Make yourself rich” (c) In genetalizalions and gnom ic conlexi: e cp A p e -n p c u M e N -A P A eoc T A y e "A rAeoN eBOA. Luke 6:45 “ A good person brings forih good ihings” ; o y o n nim eN T -A q-K A -® H i
N c cu -q
H ® coN
H "ccu N e
H ® eic U T H ®MAAY H ® c ? i M e H ® < y H p e
H ®ccuJ'yxh aycu ®>J'YXh ajcn -*’ccuma ShOrig 335 (O rlandi 26:4 3 -4 4 ) “ Do bodies come inlo being without souls and souls without bodies?” ; mm“n -®<5om N-®jLAiMcuN e-*'Tpe-® pcuM e p-**NOBe ShChass 7 7 :2 5 f2 9 “ Dem ons cannol make people sin, A demon cannol make anyone sin. N o demon c^n m ake someone sin” (d) In negative expressions, especially o f non-exislence or deprivation: ^ e N n n rH . , . e-MN-®MOOY N?HT-OY 2 Pel 2:17 “ W aterless springs' (Springs without w ater in them )” ; AJCN-®2 0 T e Phil 1:14 ficpopto^ “Fearlessly, WithoUl fear” ; n p - t m - j c i t - n egOYN e-® neipA CM O c Mail 6:13 “ And lead us not into tem ptation” ; M nN -
40
t in
;
na i u k i
:
oi
c o i
'I
ic
h i
:
i i;k m i n a i d k s
48 Concord o f number and gender. In ilie text when one eiilily tcnn 141 cross-
refers to another, grammatical 'concord' (agreeinent) in number and gender is obligatory to the extent that these categories can be expressed. Determinators and personal morphs 75 are the main expressions of number and gender, and they are important signals of what refers to what, in the network o f cross-references and agreements within textual discourse (the ‘referential linkage’ of terms in discourse). E.g. rrezMOM a c | - a o Mark 1 :31 “The fever ceased,” lit erally, The ( r r e - masc.) fever it ( - c |- masc.) ceased; TCAre e -M e c -Jte N A Mark 9:44 “ The unquenchable fire,” literally. The ( t - fem.) fire that ( - c fem.) does not die out; ijik w b A e A c|-Jtn o n -h u ch ({ ) tt2Ai m -m ap ia t a i eNT-AY“ -^TT^~^ eBOA N2 HT-C TTAi e-< yA Y ~ ^oyT e e p o -c | J t e - r r e j ^ Matt 1 : 1 6 “ And Jacob begot Joseph the husband of Mary, o f whom ( t a i . . . - c ) Jesus was bom, who (ttai . . . - q ) is called C hrist.” Considered in isolation almost no nouns show any mark of number or gender. (The pi. or fem. formal marking o f nouns is limited or optional 107, 108[b], 117, and therefore these marked forms play a very secondary role in the crossreference system.) W ithin an article phrase, the syntactic target o f cross-reference is the article. The zero article, however, is an ambiguous target o f cross-reference, since it is a negation of num ber and gender 47. A personal morph cross-referring to a zero article phrase can be arbitrarily sing, or pi.; if singular, it can either express the grammatical gender o f the noun o r arbitrarily be masc. (the gener al gender 46); and it can fluctuate among these possibilities within one single passage. Examples; m n -® cb oyi o n - ® n o <5 e - n e q c A ? Mall 10:24 “ A (®) disciple is nol greater lhan his ( - e q - ) leacher” ; ej(.e-O YN-®c2 iMe e c - n o p N e y e e t B e - 2 H T ^ OYN-®c?iMe o n o y m o n o n na~y aaaa N K e g ic e ON M -nec^A T n -e T ® -6 N-® N oeiK e p o - c e- they assem ble”
41
Ill
I I K M I N A I O R S
49 Motivarioii o f i^ender expression. Tlie selecitoii ordeiem iination, number, iincl gender wilhin the set of articles or deteriniiuitor pronouns is according to what the speaker wishes to communicate. But in articles, the selection of gender is also motivated by the grammatical class and function of the expansion ele ment. In form, m ost articles do not signal gender ( n - , o y - , z g n - , k g - , 2 6 N K 6 - . ®, . . . N 1m), yet even these assume a potential gender, which is real ized and manifested when gendered cross-reference to them occurs. Motivation o f gender expressed in articles (a) Expanded by a gendered common noun i. noun with denoting function 93(a): the article signals the gender of the noun ii. noun with descriptive function 93(b): the article signals a gender appro priate to the sense o f the passage, e.g. with cross-reference to another item E.g. (i) x l M e “ The truth” ; o y l M e T e - f - - J C c u m m o - c Rom 9:1 “ I am speaking ihe iruth” literally It is (T e) a truth that ( - c ) 1 speak” ; (o)Y lM i.em e q - o y o N ? eeoA . Acts 4 :16 “ A notable ( - q - ) sign” ; NelnAHPH N -? iH Rev 21:9 “The lasi fein.) plagues” ; (ii) n i n e Rev 1 9 :11 fiXri0iv6(; “ The ( n - ) True, the true one (of masc. gram matical gender, 9 3 )” ; T lnA 6e Luke 5 :36 tk) TiaXaitp “ The tattered one (of fein. gender, scil.
(b) Expanded by a gendered cardinal number 66: article and cardinal number both signal the gender that is appropriate to the sense of the passage, e.g. with cross-reference to another item E.g. nilo y A Luke 15:4 “ Thai ( n i - ) one [i.e. e c o o y ‘sheep’, m asc.j” ; T lo v e i T loY ei John 2:6 “ Each (t - ) one [i.e. ‘stone ja r’, fem .J"; n eeilcp o M N x 1 C or |3 : |3 “ Tliese ( n e e i - ) three [masc., the general gender 46]” ; T eilcpoM Te M -nA yrH Rev 9:18 “ These ( T e i - ) three plagues [nAHPH. fem .]”
(c) Expanded by a genderless common noun: the article signals a gender appro priate to the sense of the passage o f text, e.g. with cross-reference to another item E.g. n jjM e p iT M ark 1 :1 1 “ My (n A -) beloved [i.e. cpH pe ]” ; T lM ep ix R o m 16:12 “ My beloved [in apposition to fem. personal name n e p c i c ) ”
(d) In an inverted attributive construction of the noun 102 whose initial term is genderless, the article signals the gender of the modified noun. E.g. n N o 6 N -a jc u c Heb 13:20 “ The greai shepherd” ; great power”
t n o
6
n
- 6
om
Acts 8 :10 “ The
In cross-reference, K e -, and nim sometimes signal their assumed potential gender and sometimes arbitrarily signal masc. or pi. 48, 51, 60.
42
s u r v i :y
o f
i J i n i; r
m in a i ors
Determiiiaior pronouns signal a gender appropriate to the sense o f the p as sage, e.g. w ith cross-reference to another item. T he general gender, w hich is used to express generalizations, etc., is form ally the m asculine 46. SU R V E Y O F D E T E R M IN A T O R S
50 The indefinite article and pronoun Article
Pronoun
sing,
o y - , var. - y -
pi.
z e N -( a b n o r m a l var. 2 N -)
sing. m asc. oyA sing. fem . o y e i pi. 2 0 'fNe, var. z o e iN e
- Y - o c c u rs o ften (in som e n ianuscrlpis, reg u larly ) a fier a - , e - . and a fter som e m o n o sy llab ic n o n -lerm in al b ou n d m o rp h s ending in i o r e (e.g. N e -).
A rticle (cf. 43, 45): A; one specimen o f the le.xical class o f ; one specimen having the quality o f the lexical class o f . . . ; and pi. (The sing, o y - can also express the cardinal num ber ‘o n e ’, 70.) ? e N - is ofien translated in English by the absence o f article before a plural or singular fonn o f the English noun: A C - 6 o o A - e q N -^ e N T O e ic Luke 2:7 “ She wrapped Him in .sivaddliit)’ clolhs. ”
Pronoun: Someone!-thing, anyonel-thing, a certain person/thing; one o f those (aforementioned), such, so\ and pi. (some). (The sing, o y ji/o y e i can also express the cardinal num ber ‘o n e ’, 70; as such, it can expand k g - o r any def. sing, article.) Exam ples: a n - n a y e - o \ x eq-Nejc-®JLAiMONiON e e o A M ark 9 :38 “ W e saw ■someone casting out dem ons"; o y a m bn . . . K eY i Jte . . . (textual var. ^ o m e MeN . . . ? eN K o o Y e j t e . . . ) M ark 4:4—5 “ One . . Another . . . (var. Som e o f them . . . Others . . , OYei N -M n o A ic Luke 5:12 “ One o f the cities” ; pcuMe c n a y N e N x a y - b c u k e^pAT e - n e p n e e-**ApicAioc n e nK eO Y ^ Jte OYTCAtUNHC n e Luke 18; 10 “ There were two m en w ho w ent up inio the tem ple to pray, onp being a Pharisee and the other a tax collector” ; ^ e N ^ e e p A io c Ne I a n ? - o y a 2 C or 11:22 "A re ihey Hebrews? So am I ” ; x e c ^ m e eT®-jccu m JC e-A N r-O Y nA peeN O C e - o y e i a n r e ShAmel II 6 2 :3 -4 “ The wom an who says I am a virgin, even though she isn’t o n e"; n a i eT®-JCcu m m o -c jc e -A N O N ^eNiOYJk^Ai e - N - ^ o 'N e a n Ne Rev 3:9 “ W ho say that they are Jews and are no t.’’ The def. correspondeni to indef. o y a n e “ He is one o f those, such” is N T o q n e “T hat’s what he is” (nominal senience Pattern 10, cf, 282).
51 ‘Another’ (cf. 55) Article
sing.
pi.
K e - (var. 6 e ~)
Pronoun
sing. m asc. 6 e (var. Ke); vars. k 6 t , k g g t fem. 6 e (var. Ke); vars. K e r e , k h t g (var. 2 e N K e y -) plzeN K O o y e 4J
m o-c
IJi: 1 l i K M I N A T O K S I he sing, pronoun is nomially 6 e (or K e), wliich does not distinguish gender. Sing, niasc. K e(e)T and fern, k g t g (or k h t g ) are rare.
A rticle: Another (contrasting) . . , , a n alien . . . ,a dijf'erent . . . ; another (sec an a d d itio n a l. . . ; and pi.
ond)
P ronoun: Same m eanings (one that is different, another one, etc.)
52
T he s im p le d e fin ite a rtic le n - , alt. n e - ; v ar. n T - , alt. r e - ; v ar.
t-
N -, alts. N e - , M -; v a rs . n - , n n - . b - , K - , p T -
normally combines with a following /i/, e.g. -f-pHNH (t + “Judaea.”
(t
+ eipHNH) “ The peace”;
n - or N - sometimes combines with a following /i/ ( e i) as ni or n i ; e.g. nicuT “The father ( gicdt)” ; n ie p o “The river ( e i e p o ) ”; N ie p c u o y “The rivers ( e ie p c u o y ) ”; but normally the longer spelling occurs; neicuT, n e i e p o . n - sometimes combines with a following /h / as (J>: e.g. <}>cub A cts 25:14 Tho. (same a.s n ^ c u B ); T - o f t e n combines with a following ^ a s e : e.g. e e “The m anner” (regularly, sam easT ^e); e e A n i c “ The hope” Acts 16: l9Tho. (sa m e as T^eA-nic); handmaid" Luke 1:38Q ue. (but masc. usually Luke 12:43 Que. “The manser vant” ).
M eanings (cf. 43 , 4 5 ): The; the item belonging to the lexical class o item having the quality o f the lexical class o f . . . ; and pi.
f ; the
Alternants and variants o f n —, t - , n (a) The lo n g form n e - , r e - , N e - is norm ally required before a m orph beginning with a consonant cluster in w hich th e second phonem e is n o t syllabic (could not b ea r a superlinear stroke in that particular w ritten m orph): n e l c B o y T “ The student” ; relnAANH “T he d e c e it” ; N eb p o o y “ T he cries.” Alternant. A special case occurs if the first of these consonants Is basically syllabic (would bear a superlinear stroke). Normally the first consonant loses its superlinear stroke (and syllabicity): nelMTO e b o a “The presence” (m to c b o a ); NelNKai^ “The things” (nkji); n e lp n e “The temple” (p n e ). But in some manuscripts, the short form n - , t - , n occurs and the .superlinear stroke is maintained: hImka.^, textual var. nelMKjk.^ Acts 7:34 “ The suffering” ; t I m n o o t g , textual var. xelMNOOTe John 18:16 “The maid”; n Im k oo2, textual var. NelMK0 0 2 2C or 1:7 “The sufferings.”
W hen the initial cluster co n tain s j or (o )y , both th e long an d short form s o f the article can occur (some nouns elicit m o re fluctuation than others): nely-XAi and nloyjcA .1 “ T he salvation” ; n e l 2 o y o “ T h e ab u n d an ce” ; Tel 2 iH “ The w ay.” N ote that th e letters e <}) x f each represent tw o nonsyllabic consonant phonem es 13. T hus n e l e i B i o /p eth b b y o / “T he lo w lin ess” ; re lx A p ic “ The
44
S U K V I
Y
()l
1) 1
I I KM I N A I O K S
gi l t ” ; nel< l)iA o co < l)o c “ 'F hc p h ilo s o p h e r” ; r el ^ ' YXM " r h c s o u l.” H o w ev er, w hen o c c u rrin g b e fo re i th e le tte r x o fte n function.s as th o u g h it e x p re s s e d a sin g le p h o n e m e : n lx iA iA .p x o c A cts 2 1 :3 I “T h e c h ilia rc h .”
Limitations: (i) r p e - , r p e * the causative infinitive 359 as a verbal n o u n does not take the long fo rm ( n lrp e q - c c D T n “ The ac t o f him choosing. H is act of ch o o sin g ” ), (ii) p p o ‘king, em peror’ norm ally has sing, n lp p o “T h e k in g ,” rarely n e p o ; but pi. both N elppcuoy an d N lppcuoy- (Hi) W ith m o rp h s in w hich the first o f th e consonants is c , both th e lo n g and sh o rt form s occur: N e l c p e q p i q e and N lc p e q p iq e M ark 7 :2 8 “T he cru m b s.”
(b) n e - , r e - , n 6 - is norm ally required b efo re three w ords d en o tin g tim e: 2 0 o y ‘d a y ’ ( n e l e o o y ) ; o y o e i c ^ ‘tim e’ ( n e ly o e ic ^ ) ; a n d p o M n e ‘y e a r’ (T e lp o M n e ). (oyqpH ‘n ig h t’ an d o y N o y ‘hour’, w hich also m ight b e classi fied here, can be explained by [a], above.) Alternant. (c)
n e - , T e - , N e - optionally occurs before noun phrases formed from e s c A ^ n - 124 (e.g. T ele e o A Jas 3 :1 7 “ The one from above” ; ic n e lee cA . (textual var. n le e o M Matt 21:11 “ Jesus, the One from N azareth” ). Variant.
(d)
n - , T - , for n - , t - , optionally occurs before nouns beginning with n , t . if conditions (a) and (h) are not m et: Mark 14:12, T lrjinpo Luke 1:70. Variant.
(e)
N - (article), without superlinear stroke, often (but optionally) occurs before w ords of E gyptian or Greek origin that begin with an unstressed vow el. Nie ph t “The p ro m ises” ; N U n o cT O A o c “ The apostles.” Variant.
(f)
N N -, for hj- and n —, optionally occurs before a vow el: NNla^pxH (for N U pxH and NUpXH) Luke 1 2 :1 1 “ The ru lers.” Variant.
(g) M - fo r N -. Before non-syllabic /m / o r /p / (i.e. m o r n w ith o u t su p erlin ear stroke) m - norm ally occurs as an assim ilated form o f n - , provided th at co n ditions (a) anA(h) are not m e t: mImapoc “ The M a g i” ; n ln H y e “ T h e h eav ens.” Alternant. (h)
Sim ilarly, in some early m anuscripts i - , X -, p - o ccur as assim ilated form s o f n before non-syllabic m anifestation o f the /b /, /I/, /r/ respectively (i.e. b, a , p without superlinear strokes): bIbaag Luke 4:18 “ T he blind (p i.)” ; AlAai^KM Mark 8 :8 “ The pieces” ; plpcune M a r lt^ ^ 8 “ Humankind (pi ). ” Variant.
O therw ise, the basic form n - , t - , n - occurs: n l c i s e “T h e circ u m cisio n ” ; rlM N T -e p o “ The k in g d o m ” ; fil 2 p
53 The nexus pronoun (a) V ariable n e /r e /N e sing. m asc. n e sing. fem . re pi. Ne
45
D K T r; R M 1 N A T () R S
expresses determination, number, gender, and nexus 248 of subject and pred icate. (b) Invariable n e expresses determination and nexus but not number or gender. In term s o f adjacent dependency n e in all its form s is an enclitic 28(6), a class of morphs that by nature cannot occur first in their clause.
n e (both variable and invariable) is a nexus morph in nominal sentence Patterns 3-11, where it is an essential pattern component 252; and in the cleft sentence (chapter 20). In nominal sentence Patterns 3-9, it has subject func tion (‘he is . . . ’ etc.); in Pattern 10, anaphoric predicate function (‘is he, is such’ etc. 282). Variable n e is also an element in existential cleft sentences 462, in which n e there is asserts existence and introduces some person or thing into the actual line of discourse. Invariable n e also occurs in some other types of sentence 285, especially those in preterit conversion, but not as an essential pattern constituent. Its function is such sentences is unknown. 54 T he possessive article an d th e possessed pronoun Possessive Article n=,
Possessed Pronoun nA -,
T=. N=
T A -, N A -
20 the one related to . . = (N N )’s, mine, yours, etc. n o ) * , TO)=, N o y =
the-related-to-{me, you etc.) = my, your. etc.
M eaning: Both article and pronoun express a general, logically ambiguous relationship (related to, helonging to), exactly like the mark o f relation.ship ig ~ 147. The pronoun occurs only in prenominal and prepersonal states. The pos sessive article consists of the simple def. article followed by personal inter mediates 84: n - A - , n - e K - , n - o y - - etc. Possessive Article nA.“ ncK T io y neqnecncN neTN ney-
n*, t= ,
TA-
NA-
TCK-
NCKN oy-
T oy-
Teq-
Ncq-
re c-
N ec-
TBN-
NCN-
TCTN-
NGTN-
TBY-
N ey-
my . your your h is . h e r. o u r. your their
Examples with h i house: n A H i My house, n c N H i O ur house. N e N H i ' Our houses. n e cH 'i Her house. O r with maay mother: ta m a a y My mother, TeNMAAy O ur mother, NeNMAiY O ur m others, TeqMAAy His m other, t e c m x a y Her m other
46
S U R V I . Y
( >l
l)i; I I - . R M I N M
Possessed I’roiloilll
O R S
IIA -, T A -, N A -
iiA -iip cu M e
T A -n p o iM e
nA-Tec^iMe nA-NecNHY
TA-TCC^iMe Ti-NeCNHY
N A -upa>M e
N i-rec^iM c Ni-NecNHy
(the) one(s) relating to the man/the man's (the) one(s) relating to the woman/the woman’s (the) one(s) relating to the brethren/the brethren’s For invariable (?) n i - forming composite common nouns, cf. 111.
Thus nApcoMe means “ My m an” ( n - A - possessive article), while nAnpcoMe means “The one relating to the man. The m an’s ” (n A - possessed pronoun). Examples; n x -O Y M e e y e n e e - N A N o y -q Prov 24:28 “It is the part of a sound under standing” ; Ni-^eNeKKAHCiA Constantine of Assiut, First Encomium on St. Claudius of Antioch (Drescher 7 3/;;3 l-7 4 a ; I) “Church property” ; nM ecixH C A e M - n i - o y A AN n e n N o y T e A e oyA n e Gal 3:20 “Now, an intermediary is not just related to one individual; whereas. God is one” ; T A -^ ofN e rxp N-reTM iN e r e TM N T-epo M -n N o y r e Mark 10:14 “For to such belongs the kingdom o f God” ; N A -^ eN K o o y e Celestine I of Rome, Encomium on St. Victor the General (BMar 77:3) “The property of other people” ; nepH T M -ncuNz nA -neiM A M N -n A -n K eoyA 1 Tim 4:8 “Promise for life— that which belongs to this place and also that which belongs to the other one” ; T ey M N T -A T -co o y N . . . T A -N iK o o y e 2 Tim 3:9 “Their folly . . . that of those other people” ; t a - n a i pap N - r e iM iN e r e TM N T-epo N -M nH ye Matt 19:14 “For to such belongs the kingdom of the heavens” ; n e q e o o y N M -n A -n e q T o iT N M -n A -N eq ArreAOC eT®-oyAAB Luke 9:26 “ His glory and that of His father and that of His holy angels” ; n e q B io c e iN e an M -n A -o y o N nim Wis 2:15 “His manner of life is unlike that o f everyone (else)” ; a n o k m cn A N r - n A -n A y A o c 1 Cor 1:12 “ I belong to Paul” ; e c -N A -p -T A -N iM John 19:24 “Whose shall it be?” Possessed Pronoun ntu=, nw i no)K n to-*’ n o jq n o )c nCDN
t o )Y TO)K
nO JTN
TU>TN
noJO Y
t
tcu=.
Noyi NOyK N oy-®
T O )q
N o y q
TO )C
N oyc NOyN
U
NOyTN N oyoy
jo y
N oy* mine yours yours his hers ours yours theirs
Examples; n c u -K n e n N o y 6 I n c u -K n e n?AT I t c u - k x e T oiK O yneN H M N-N-eT®- N^H T-c T H p - o y S h lll 90 :1 9 -2 0 “Yours is the gold. Yours is the silver. Yours is the inhabited world and all who are in it” ; N o y -N N M M A - q Ne ShChass 6 3 :6 -7 “They belong to us and to him ’’
55 ‘T he o th e r’ (cf. 51)
sing, niasc. sing. fern. pl.
Article
Pronoun
nK e-
nK e, var. h k e t TK6T, var. TKeTe N K ooye
t k e
-
N K e-
47
D C T I i K M I N A T O R S
Article: Also the . . . . the other (second): the other (contrasting) .. ., the alien . . . . the d ijfe re n t. . . ; even the . . . Pronoun: Same meanings (the other one, etc.). 56 T h e n e a re r dem on strativ e
sing. masc. sing. fem .
pi.
Article
Pronoun
r r e i - , var. r r e e i TeV-, var. r e e l N e i-, var. n e e i -
rrAi. var. iTAei t a i , var. t a c i n a i. var. n a e i
N otes; (a) In m anuscripts that have the longer spelling variant n e e i - etc., the form n e i - (without iota trema) is the affective article 58 (otherwi.se spelled n i - ) . {hj 3n some norm alized m odem works (H om er’s New Te.stament, C rum ’s dictionary) trem as are typographically om itted, leading to confusion o f n e r - arri n e i - .
Article: T h is . . . (nearer to me); the just-previously-m entioned. . . , th a t. . . ; the just-about-to-be-m entioned. , , , the following . . . ; and pi. Pronoun: Same meanings (this one, etc.). riAi refers to either a preceding or a following referent, e.g. H 3 .p e-n n i 6 e n e e y e b - t t a Y x e - . . . 2 Cor 10:11 “ Let that person understand the follow ing thing, namely that . . . ” It also forms the articulated attributive 411 and appositive attributive 408 clause con structions. 57 T he fa rth e r d em o n strativ e
sing. masc. sing. fetn. pi.
A rticle
Pronoun
n - . . . eT^-MMAy t - .. , eT**-MMAy N- . . . eT**-MMAy
neTMMAy reTMMAy NETNiMAY
n - etc. is the simple def. article with alts, and vars. 52 and eT**-MMAy is a rel ative clause 405. The pronoun n-eT®-i^MAy is an articulated attributive con struction 411. Article; That (over there, farther fro m me}; the previously mentioned . and pi. Pronoun; Same meanings {that one, etc.). 58 T he affective d em o n strativ e Article
sing, masc. - sing. fem. pi. 48
n i - , var. n e i "J"-, var. r e i H i-, var. n e i -
Pronoun
nH th hh
S U R V | ; Y
()I-
D i r i H R M I N
a i o r s
Notes; (a) lit manuscripts that have the longer spelling variant n r .i - etc. (witlnnit iota trenia), the nearer tlem onstrativc article 'th is' 56 is iionnally spcflet! n e e i - . (h j In sonic norm alized m odem works (H om er’s New T estainent, C rum ’s dictionary) treiiias are typographically om itted, leading to confusion o f n e i - and n e T -.
Article: The . . . . th a t. . . . this . . . . and pi., exptessmg emotional apprecia tion or involvement; or, tn a few adverbial expressions, literal remoteness from the speaker, in time or place. (а) Expressing deprecation, awe. foreboding, adm iration, etc.; o \ \ fT-N iK O Y ei Malt 25:45 “ One of these little ones” ; ■f'l'YXH c i ^ - o e i eMATe ShChass 9 5 :5 8 -9 6 :1 “T his soul, which is so valuable"; n i n o 6 fJ-u ^ T o p -i^ e T ® - ^ - N in o A ic mn —Ni-f-Me M N -N iT ou; ShChass 9 6 :2 9 -3 3 “ The great troubles in the cities and the villages and the nom es” ; niu^bu) A e n - z a a c u eT*-BHT 3 Tim 4 :7 “ Abom inable old w om en's tales” (xoiig pepi^Xoug Kui Tpaw8eii; jsiiOoug); c i N o v e i o c nieAAxiCTOC n e x ^ -c z A i M -n e q M e p iT n - i c u t n -e eo < IjiA e C T A T o c S h lll 13:19-20 “The most hum ble Shenoute. writing to his dear father who is beloved o f G od” (б ) Untranslatable, in generalizations S e e n - n i . . . “ L ike . . . ” (iT e e N -M ie c o o Y M att 9 :3 6 raaei jip o p a ta “ Like sheep” ) (c) Insisting upon id entification ( n i . . . n —o y i o t ) : 2 M - n i2 HT n —o y tO T MN--fTNa)MH N -oY cuT I C or 1:10 “ In the sam e m ind and the same judgem ent” (d) In adverbial phrases o f rem ote past: M nioY oei
Pronoun; This one, that one, he, she, it, and pi., often with contrast between two entities or groups (ol jiEv . . . ol 5e . . . ): n h m c n . . . n^T jv.e . . . Heb 7 ;2 0 -2 J “ Those . . . This one . . . n t - a y - t a a - c n h - t n . . . n h Ae hTnoy-TA A -c n a - y Matt 13:11 “ To you it has been given . . . To them it has not been given.” 59 T he z e ro article a n d p ro n o u n Article
®
Pronoun
oyoN
Article: For typical uses, cf. 47; for cross-reference to
cf. 48.
Proiumii: Untranslatable and empty o f any sem antic content. Like the zero article, oyoN does not express determitiation, number, or gender. Like the other pronouns, it does not express any lexical content. It fills positions in which a tenninal bound/unbound morph 28(5) is syntactically compatible.
49
D E T E R M I N A T O R S
E.g.
‘find’, i.e. perform the act of finding (versu.s 2 e ‘fall’), u j a a t ‘suffer lack’ (versus u j a a t ‘be cut short, be cut off’); o y t J - o y o N e p o - tj M att 23; 16 “ He must. He is bound by his oath” 6(pe!Xei {Uterally He owes. There exists against him); M N - n - e T * * - e i p e N - o y M N T - x p H C T O c M N-oyoN u»A2 PVi e - o y ji Rom 3; 12 “ N o one does good, not even one” litera/ly “The one doing good does not exist; does not exist (m n -), even to the extent of one.” See also 60, o y o N n i m ‘any one’. 26 e -o y o N
N -oyoN
60 ‘Any, every, a ll’ Article . . . NlM
Pronoun O y O N NlM
NIM forms an article phrase by following the noun that it determinates. It is antonomous (c^iM e A e nim 1 Cor 11:5).
Article; (i) any . . . , eveiy . . . (discontinuous, distributive totality; quantifi cation); (ii) a l l . . . (universal totality). Although logically distinct, these two meanings are not consistently distinguished by differences of syntax. A ll (of) the . t h p
. ,
.
. all (integral totality) is expressed by the inflected modifier
= 152.
Pronoun; Same meanings {any one, etc.). Syntactically, . . . n i m and oyoN n i m display an unstable mixture of features associated with the indef., def., and zero article; (a) In cross-reference, these determinators are both sing, and pi. indiscriminately. A simple attributive clause 403 modifying an article phrase of . . . n i m can be in either circumstantial or relative conversion, but the pronoun o y o N n i m takes the relative. Examples; nim e q - ^ o o y (textual var. ^cub nim e e o o y ) Matt 5:11 “All kinds o f e v il” ; gtuB nim e T o y -N A -A iT e i M M o-oy Matt 18:19 “Anything they ask": u^HN 6 e NIM E T e - N - q - N i - e i p e an N -o y K A p n o c e - N i N o y - q Matt 3:10 “Every tree therefore lhal does not bear good fruit” ; ^ n aj ^y nim e - j .- N e K e i o T e K ii-y e z p i i g i - N E N T p i n e Z i ShlV 5 5 :9 -1 0 “ Every dish that our fathers put upon our tables” ; o y o N nim e N T - iq - K i- ^ H i fTccu-q h "c o n Matt 19:29 “ Everyone who has left houses or brothers” ; o y o N r ip nim c e -N i-J C O K p -o y ^ N - T c ix e Mark 9:49 “Everyone will be salted with fire” (b )
A fem. noun + nim is treated as sing, fem., sing, ma.sc., or pi. indiscriminately. Examples: m n t—e p o nim e c u ^ iN -n tu u ; e^F^' e jc c u -c Matt 12:25 “Every king dom divided ( - C - ) against it s e lf ; cyM eiA H C ic nim e - N j .N o y - q Acts 23:1 “All good ( - q ) conscience” ; ^yxH nim e T e - N - c e - N i - c c u T M a n Acts 3:23 “ Every soul that ( c e - ) does not listen”
50
C O M I M N A T I O N S
O F
T H E S E
G R A M M A T I C A L
(c) As subject, in the durative sentence, . . . Pattern 1 317 and Pattern 3 322.
n im
C A T E G O R I E S
and oyoN
n im
occur in both
Exam ples;
n k a n i m c ir c u T M att 22:4 “ Everything is ready” ; o y o N n i m John 3 :2 6 "A ll are going to him ” ; but M N - o y o N n i m N i - u Z i - n e i u ^ i J t e Matt 19:11 “N o t a ll can bear this saying” ou tovxeq X“ POi)tnv
c p iT -q
nhy
;-q i
(d) As direct object in the durative sentence, . . . nim and oyoN nim are mostly introduced by n - 171(b). Exam ples: e y - o y c u N ? e b o a M - n i c T i c n i m e - N A N o y - q Titus 2 :10 “ Show ing all true fidelity” ; ■f'-cun 6 e n - 2 0 j b n i m J t e - z e N o c e N e Phil 3:8 “ So [ consider all things to be a loss” ; n e q - c o o y N N - o y o N n i m John 2:24 “ He knew all people” ; e T E T N - c o o y N - N K i NIM Jude 5 “ Although you are fully informed (know all things)”
(e) Coordination ( ‘and’) before . . . NiM andoyoN ni m is sometimes expressed by 21- and sometimes by m n-. Exam ples: e q - p - ^ n i ^ p e e - ty c u N e n im nim M all 9 :3 5 “ H ealing every disease and every in fin n ity ” ; r e q c e m e M N -N e q ^ H p e m n - n k a nim c T '*-^)oon N j . - q Matt 18:25 “ H is wife and his children and all that he h a d ” ; n o b e nim 2 i - o y A NIM Matt 12:31 “ Every sin and every blasphem y” ; t e k k a h c i a T n p - c M N -o y o N NIM eT®-co)TM e -N iV Acts 5 : 11 “ The whole church and all w ho heard o f these th in g s” ; k ^ k i a nim ? i - K p o q nim e i - e y n o K p i c i c nim m n - a a nim M N -K iT iA iA ii NIM (textual var. mTj- . . . m n - . . . m n - . . . ) 1 Pet 2:1 “ All m alice and all guile and all insincerity and all envy and all slander”
a d d i t i o n a l c o m b in a t io n s o f t h e s e g r a m m a t ic a l
CATEGORIES 61
(a) ludefiniteness com bined with the follow ing: Restrictive relationship 146: e e N K i r i - ^ c i p s N T i - y ShIV 61:11 “ R elatives of theirs. Some o f their relatives” ; oyKiN CU N . . . e - M - n c u - N a n iie 2 Cor 10; 16 “ A field that is not ours” ‘(A n)other' + restricti\>e relationship 146; 2eNKeKJ>Tj.-®cj.p5 MTj>-y ShIV 81:5 "Som e other relatives of theirs” ; KeJtoicuM e e - n j i - n c u N ^ n e Rev 20:12 “ A nother book, which is the book ofllife” literally A nother book, which is the one related to life ‘Another’; K e o y ji M att'21:35 “ Another” N earer dem onstration: i N - e e w T e e i M i N e o n 2 C or 10;1[ “ TTiat is how we a re"; c - N H y N6 i - o y o y N o y e r e - T i r r e John 4:23 “ TTie hour is coming, and now is” lit erally “ An hour is coming, nam ely this one” ‘A ny’ + restrictive expansion 146: o y e o o y r nim male o f him ” a 6xoO t o v dpcreviKov
N T ooT -q
Exod 12:48 “ E very
(h) D efiniteness com bined with the following: N earer demonstration + ‘another’: M neT K eco n Judg 16:18 “ Y et this o nce” ; netK G T ApophPatr 181 (ChaTne 43:30) “ This other one” ; N e lK o o y e 2 T im 3:8 “ These others”
51
1)1 I t.R MI N A rOK S Nearer dem onstration + nearer dem onstration: T e N o y ^ N - r e i p o M n e 219:4 “ Now, in this very year”
tai
Shill
Nearer dem onstration + farther dem onstration: n i l eT^-MMiy S h ill 121:19 (and often) “TTiat person” Nearer dem onstration + restrictive expansion 146: T e l e s o y c i i N T e-T H yT N 1 Cor 8:9 “This liberty of yours” Affective dem onstration + nearer dem onstration; ^ - n i K i i p o c 4 4 :2 9 -3 0 “ In precisely this (awesome) time, m oreover”
on
n i l ShChass
Possessive (general 147) relationship + ‘another’: NeYK.eci.p5 S h lll 115:15 “ Also their flesh"; N iK e cc u T n Matt 24:24 “ E ven m y elect” Possessive relationship + nearer dem onstration; N i u ^ i x e e T e - N i i Ne M att 7 :24 “ TTiese words of M ine” Possessive relationship + possessive relationship: T ieipH N H e r e - T a i - e i r e John I4 :2 7 “ My peace (M y own peace, M y peace that belongs to m e)” {c) Zero com bined with the follow ing: General 147/Appurtenant 148 relationship: "e p o o Y N T i- q S h lll 203;20 “ A ny voice from H im ” ; ®cm h N T i - q John 5:37 “ His voice” . . . NiM com bined with the follow ing: General 147/Appurtenant 148 relationship: N ici n im eT®-NTji-q Matt 13:44 “ All that he has” ; M i nim N T i - y n m m a - n 1 Cor l;2 “ Every place of theirs and of ours (sic)”
Sttll other combinations contain two expressions of determtnation, often with an additional grammatical category or categories, e.g. (e) Particularity (an element o f determ ination 45[b]) com bined with the follow ing: Indefiniteness: n o y i Matt 20:9 “ Each one o f them " ‘A nother’ + indefiniteness: n k e o y i M att 6 :2 4 “ The other one” Nearer dem onstration + ‘other’ + indefm iteness: p - n i i this or that"
h
n e i K e o y i Jas 4 :15 “ Do
Affective dem onstration + indefiniteness: n i o y i Luke 15:4 “The one (sheep what was previously mentioned) ' Affective dem onstration + ‘another’ + indefm iteness; n i K e o y i Luke 20:11 “ That other one" Possessive (general 147) relationship + ‘another’ + indefm iteness; T e K K e o y e i Luke 6 :29 “ Y our other one also” ; cf. also 54, n i - ‘(the) one belonging to . . ’
REITERATION OF THE ARTICLE PHRASE 62 ia) Def. article phrase reiterated; “ Each . . . , Every . . . , Each and every . . . ” E.g. nptU M e npcuM e eT*’-2 M -nH i 2 iT H -N T o y e i T o y e i e-r'’-2 M -nH i 2 iTN-THYTN S h iv 7 3 :1 9 -2 0 “ Every man in the house am ong us, and eveiy female in the house am ong you” ; ^cu e - n e ^ o o y n e ^ o o y e - r e q K i K i i Matt 6 :34 “ Sufficient
52
Ri;i r i ; R A I I O N
oi-
a r t u
i . i;
im irasi
;
for each and every day is its (ow n) evil” ; M -iiM e p o c riM epoc; Hph 4 ; Ift “ A ccording to the measure of every individual piirt"; e-u^3iY~<^oYN-nu;MN r* p no;H N e e o A 2 M - n e q K i p n o c Luke 6 :44 “ For by its fruit each tree is know n” ; n o y * noY^i “ Each one”
(b) Zero article phrase reiterated: “ O ne . . . after another, . . . by
”
i. after n - o f incidental predication 179; e.g. ay - nojc - oy e y - o n -®a y h t ®aYHt Mark 6:40 “They sat down in groups” literally They sat down being group by group; oyJcoi e q - o n-®6 u j t 2 ShIV 172:10 “ A ship that is full of holes” ii. in compound verb form ed by p-® 180, e.g. NKa^TAneTACMA c n t ®n;\6 e ShAmel I 108:11-12 “ The curtains that have grown old or those that will grow old or ragged"-, poiMe j ^ Y - p - ® A C H N - e T ® - N A - p - ‘*AC H
N tM
N -A T -N o y re
n t-a -n c c u b ^
M - n e y e K J ^ T n A iA B O A .o c p -* * o y A n e
® o\A ne 21CD-OY ShAmel II 26; 12-13 “ Every godless person on whom the leprosy o f their father the devil has turned spotty" iii. forming an adverb expressing successive distribution 228, e.g. ®2 o o y ®2o o y “ One day after another, day by day, daily” ; “ One place after another” ; **u; hm ®u; hm “ Little by little” iv. after a distributive preposition, KATA-®?ooy ®2 o o y ShAmel T 150:3 “Day by day” (c)
[ndef. article phrase reiterated (rare, m eaning uncertain): o y p c u M e o y p c u M e e c u ^ i N - n i p i B i N fii-T e q c ^ i'M e Num 5:12 ed. M aspero dvSpo^ dv6p6? ^av napaP fi I'l yuvi'i m’lToC “ W hosesoever wife shall transgress” ; e y -T A A o e 2 p i i n z ji? a n n - c o h MMATe M -7 eN 9 o o y 9f.m7 o o y e y - T 3iAo egp^ii m m h n e m m h n c N o y o c iu ; NiM Shiv 6 6 :1 3 -1 6 “ Not only celebrating the eucharist frequently, on various days {?), but celebrating absolutely every day 198 for all tim e”
{(j)
Reiterated pair o f nouns or pronouns expanding a single article (rare, meaning uncer tain); N io y N o y o y N o y ShChass 156:48-9 “ Those various hours” (? [trans. ShishaH alevyl); 2 eN N o y M ec N o y w e c ShChass 157:2-4 “ Various (A few) num m us c o in s" {?); z e N o y a o y i ShAmel II 26:7 “ Various people” (? ); 2 e N c o n c o n ShY oung N o.8 ciT a:36 “ Various tim es” (?) Reiteration of noun in an attributive construction, 97(iii).
53
3
Specifiers: Cardinal Numbers and Other Specifiers The Nature of Coptic Specifiers 63 Definition and List of Specifiers The Specifier Phrase 64 Determination Status 65
63
Cardinal Numbers 66 Expression o f Determination, Number, and Gender Formation 67 ‘Approxim ately’ 68 Simple Fractions 69 Constructions of ‘O ne’ and ‘T w o’ 70 The Numerical Affixes 71
66
Non-numerical Specifiers 72 oyHp, NIM, AU;, oy, 72 Generic, Non-interrogative Meanings of au;, nim, oy, and oyHp 73 Expanding an Article 74
THE NATURE OP COPTIC SPECITIERS 63 Definition and list o f specifiers. The ‘specifier’ is a class comprising i. cardinal numbers (except tba ‘ten thousand’) 67(e), which express quantity ii. six non-numerical specifiers 72, mostly interrogative, which express quantity (oyH p ‘how m any? how m u ch ?’;
‘many, m uch’)
selection particular ( nim ‘who? which?’) generic ( o y ‘what? what kind o f? ’) within a group (A
54
THI;
NATURI-:
O I-
C O P T I C
S I M ^ C l M n R S
64 T he specifier p h rase Specifiers can be expanded by lexical content in a 'specifier phrase’ Specifier n - Common Noun ujoMNT N-ptUMe “ Three m en” (Acts 10:19) lyoM Te N-CK.HNH “ Three booths’ (M alt 17:4) NiM N—C2 IM6 “ W hat w om an?” (Luke 15:8) 2^2 N-AAiMONiON “ Many dem ons” (M ark 6:13) 2^2 A e N -
OY--aJiiMONiON " A dem on” 2^2 n - a a i m o n i o n “ Many dem ons” Specifier I n - Com m on Noun
Zi-Z I N- A2.1M0N10N nucleus I expansion (gram m atical information) 1 (lexical content)
The lexical expansion of the specifier is mediated by the morph n - 203 and follows the specifier; two bound grtxips are formed, which can be separated by an autonomous morph (o y r^ p M - n e e o o y M att 27:23 “W hy, what ev il? ” ). Plural forms o f the common ncwn apparently do n rt occur as the lexical expansion. If the specifier has formal marking for gender, it expresses the gender o f the common noun that it actualizes ( < ^ o m n t , . . p tu n e , upoM re . . . CKHN h). (The numerical specifiers ‘one’ and ‘tw o’ normally occur in a dif ferent construction 70.) T o a limited extent, specifier pronouns and specifier phrases are compatible with articles, cf. 65. Further examples', m n t - c n o o y c m n - c e N - ^ o o y Rev ] l ; 3 “ Twelve hun dred and sixty days"; M N T -A qre N -r C N e iM a tt 1:17 “ Fourteen generations” ; CAU^q n - g; o N -pcuM e Rom l l ; 4 “ Seven thousand people” ; N - e ^ o y c iA M att 21:23 “ W hich authority?” ; m m n - axay n - a t -<3om M att 19:26 “ There is n « any im possi ble th in g "; x x x y N-x.rx.©ON R om 7 :1 8 “ Any good thing” ; o y n - ^ iub h n - t id o j S h iv 9 4 :1 0 “ W hat kind of deed or ordinance?” ; o Y u p H-JCAT-®BeKe L uke 15:17 “ How many hired servants”
Elaborations of the specifier phrase: nTiTpe c n a y h u ;o m n t Matt 18:16 “ Two or three w itnesses” ; a - x o y t h n - c t a a i o n h maab John 6:19 “ About twenty-five or thirty stadia” ; a -u ^ m o y n a b h m h t ig-2ooY Acts 25:6 “ About eight or ten days.” 65 Determination status o f specifiers as expressed in syntax, (a) The syntax o f ‘bare’ specifier pronouns and .specifier phrases (i.e. those withixit article) is in most ways like a zero article phrase or an indefinite.
55
S l> K C I I- 11: R s
t. In the durative senience, the bare specifier as direct object o f a mutable infinitive is suffixed to the infinitive 171(a), a ^ a tu r e shared with the zero arti cle phrase. E.g. t n - j c k - ^ a ^ Mark 5 :9 “ We are m any” ; N--f--xe-A.AAY a n (i.e. e -N --f—Jce-AAAY a n ) Acts 26:22 “ W ithout me saying anything"; a n a y J c e - e Y - p - o Y 2 n - n c a b b a t o n Mark 2:24 “ Look what they are doing on the sabbath” ; Nev-Me^-MNT-CNOOYC N-pcuMe Acts 19:7 “They amounted to twelve people.” An exception is the expression e i p e n - ‘am ount to’ ( e y - e i p e N--f-OY Acts 19:19 “ A m ounting to 50,000 silver pieces” ).
n - tba
N -e ^ T
ii. The coordinating preposition ( ‘and’) is m n - before all bare specifiers except 2^Z ^nd a a a y - which take 21- . (Interrogative specifiers are typically linked by h ‘o r’.) Examples: u j o m n t J J - ^ o o y MM-u^OMTe fi-OYu^H Matt 12:40 “ Three days and three nights” ; nim m n -n im “So-and-so” and o y M w -o y “ This and th at” 73; T N - N i - p - i u ; (T n-Jiu; n - 2 0 )B A thanasius, On the Blessed Virgin Mary Mottier of God (Rossi 11 1 93[47]a.-11-13) “ W e shall do .such-and-such things” ; m n n c a - o y h p M N -oyH p N -p o M n e ShAm61 1 190:6 “ A fter so-and-so many years” ; z ^ Z N-NOYTe Z '-Z ^ Z N --X o e ic 1 Cor 8:5 “ M any gods and many lords” ; " z o i r e z i - a a a y n - n k a e - n T H p - q N r e - n K i ? ShlJJ 205:24 “ Clothing and any thing whatsoever from the earth”
iii. In the durative sentence, a hare specifier as subject is preceded by o y n or M N - , a feature shared with both the zero article phrase and indefinites 322. E.g. OYN-CNAY N A -u;a)ne ^N-TCcuu^e Matt 24:40 “ Two (people) will be in the field” ; g - m n - a a a y n - j c c u 2 m n 2 h t - E h t c u a . F i h a a a y n - ^ i u b N -T e e i^ e Eph 5:27 “ W ithout any spot (literally There not being any uncleanness in it) or stain or any .such thing.” iv. Simple attributive clauses 403 modifying a bare specifier are mostly cir cumstantial and sometimes relative. Examples: if-T C iB c u -T N n - 2
(b) With severe limitations, specifiers are compatible with articles, as shown in table 4.
56
CA RD IN A L
NUMBERS
TABLE 4 COMPATIBILrXY OF SPECtFfERS WITH ARTICLES C o m p a t ib l e A r t ic l e s S p e c if ie r
C a rd in a l n u m b e rs
Article Expanded by a Specifier Phrase
K e - ‘another’
Article Expanded by a Specifier Pronoun
A n y d e f. sin g , a rtic le 6 6
K e - ‘another’ A ny def. sing. 66
O Y -Z zenO Y -/2£N -
o y -/z ^ n o \-/z e u -
K e - , . . . NlM
O Y - / 2 E N - , . . . NIM
Other specifiers
OYHP NIM
OY
Acy AAAY
c a r d i n a l
n u m b e r s
66 Expression (rf determination, number, and gender. Cardinal numbers occur either ‘h a re ’ (without article), or with the article k e - ‘another’, or with any of the def. singular articles. They are incompatible with plural articles. E.g. c n a y H ujoMNT M att V8;20 “ Tw o or three (people)" ; KecAcyq n -n N A M att 12:45 “ Seven other spirits” ; neqMNT-CNOOYC ?i-MAeHTHC Matt 10:1 “ His twelve disciples.” They can express (with some gaps) determination, number. and gender 42. (a) Determination. With the sing. def. article a cardinal number functions as def inite; with K e - , as indefinite; and bare (without article), as non-definite, hav ing a mixture of zero and indef. features 65. (b) Number— sing, versus pi.— is expressed by the meaning of the cardinal number. Those from “ tw o” up function as plurals, even when they expand the sing. def. article. E.g. ^ t u c r e 6 e n - c n a y a n N e Matt 19:6 “ So they are not two” ; nei
(c) Grammatical gender—masc. versus feni. (in a poUir opposition)— is foniially expressed in numbers 1 to 10; in 20 and 30; and in those above ten whose last digit is 1 ,2 , 8, or 9 (cf. 67). It is also expressed by the def. stiig. article, w hen 57
S P E C I F I E R S
present. The gendered forms are selected so as to express the gender of the noun that they actualize or to which they refer. Further exam ples: ■f’OY N -o e iK m n—t b t c n a y • ■■n-f-oy N -o e iK M N -nxBT c N iy Matl 14:17-19 “ Five loaves and two fish . . . the five loaves and the two fish [retro spective cross-reference]” ; nM NT-CHOOYc “ The T w elve” [i.e. M -M ieH T H c ‘disci ples’]; T n ic T ic B G A n ic T i r i n H n eeiq ^o M N T I Cor l,^:I3 “ Faith, hope, love— these three"; n K e ^ i c Luke 17:17 “ T he nine, as w ell” ; iceqTOOY n - c b o t John 4:35 “ Another four months. Four more m onths” ; e ic -iy o M N T N -pcuM e c e - c y iN e N c tu -K Acts 10; 19 "‘Behold, three m en are looking for you” ; n e i-M N T -c N O O Y c iq - J C O o Y - c c n 6 i - i c Matt 10:5 “ A s for these twelve, Jesus sent them out” ; u ^ o m n t N -2 0 0 Y M N -cyoM Te M -oYfyH Matt 12:40 “ Three days and three nights” ; n c i f y q N - x r r e ^ o c . . . N - T c 2. t y q e N-eKKA-HciJ. Rev I ;2() “ TTre seven angels of the seven churches” ; u ^ o M T e n - c k h n h o y e i n a - k j . Y ‘ 1’ o y e i m - m c d Y c h c a y ^ i ^ o y e i N -H A e iic M ark 9:5 “ Three booths, one for you and one for Moses and one for Elijah” ; ?Me n - 2 0 0 Y MN~ 2 Me n - o y « j ; h Matt 4:2 “ Forty days and forty nights"
67 Formation In page num bering, tabulation, etc. the numbers are expressed by alphabetic figures (listed below), usually with a superlinear stroke; e.g. p q e , ‘ 195’. C f figure following table 1. In literary texts the num bers are written out as full words.
Units ‘one’ to ‘nine’ I B r
A e S z H e (b )
one two three four five six seven eight nine
Masc. oyx cnxy U^OMNT q ro o y to y cooy
Fern. oyei CNTe
u;oMTe q T O , var. q T O e
-f-, var. -f-e CO, var. c o e
ca.cyq U^MOyN
< i )M o y N e
'J'tC
'J'lTe
Decades ‘ten’ to ‘ninety’ Independent masc. M H T , fem. m h t c ten J c o y t U T . fem. J c o y t u r e K twenty thirty fem. MjijiBe A 2 Me Ti forty ig fifty T 3i e 1 o y sixty Ce 5 o seventy c y q e 2 M e_N e rr eighty ninety n C T Jiio y 1
58
Frefixal component m TJt
-
jc o y rM 3l B 2 M e - (2m e t -
before
j^ q re / jiC e )
T jie io y c e - (C ET -
before
cyqe2 M eN e- (^M ew eT n C T jiio y -
before j i q T e / i C e )
c a r d i n a l
n u m
lu;
r s
R o u nd num bers ‘te n ’, ‘tw en ty ’, etc. are ex pressed by the independent form s. T h e intervening num bers (11, 12 . . . , 21, 22 . . . , etc.) are expressed by a prefixal com ponent o f the d ecade ( m n t - , j c o y t - , m a b - etc.) plus on e o f the fol low ing term inal com ponents:
Term inal Components .
. .
£
. .
.
. .
B
.
.
r
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
. .
.
.
.
. .
.
A e s
. . .
z
.
.
.
. .
H
.
.
.
.
e
.
.
.
-one -tw o -three -four -five -six -seven -eight -nine
m asc. - o y e , fern, - o y e t m asc. - C N o o y c , fern. - C N o o y c e -q^O M Te
-A q re -T H (but sim ply -
h
after
m nt-
and x o y T - )
-A C e
m asc. fem. m asc. - + I C , fem.
(Term inal com ponents in this list also produce ‘eleven ’ to ‘nineteen’, despite the translations given above.) E.g. M N T - o y e M att 28:16 ‘eleven’, m n t h John 11:18 ‘fifteen’, jc o y r - jiq T e R e v 4 :4 ‘tw enty-four’, 2M eN eT-3ic|Te L uke 2 :3 7 ‘eighty-four’. V ariant spellings of the prefixes and term inal com ponents occur.
(c) H undreds p
100
c
200
T 300 u;M N T -u ;e Y 4 00 t|TOOY N -u p e . t|T e Y -< y e Etc. (q 500, X 600, ^ 700, u3 800, V 900) H igher m ultiples o f u ;e also occur, e.g. N -c y e “ 1,200.”
m ht
N - u ;e ‘ 1,000,’ M N T -C N o o y c
M u ltip les o f JCOYCOT ‘sco re, tw enty’ also occur; q T o o y N-JCoytDT 2 Sam 19:32 “ Four sco re. E ighty” SyBofiKovxa.
(d) T housands T he highest num ber expressed by a single specifier is 1,000 (cyo). 5 B r Etc.
1,000 o 2,000 u ;o CN3iY 3,000 u;oMNT N u;o,
(e) T en thousands, t b a ‘ten thousand, m y riad ’ is a m asc. gendered co m m o n noun (collective 108[a]) and not a specifier at all.
10.000 20.000
oytbs . TB31 CN3lY
Etc.
59
S P E C I F I E R S
Combinations o f these numbers proceed from highest to lowest, with or with out M N - ‘and’ before the last number, e.g. q T o o Y - u j e “ 430” (Gal 3:17); m nt - c n o o y c N -u je m n - c c “ 1,260” (Rev 11:3). 68 A ‘ pproxim ately’. The prefix (var. N i - ) (bcTEi, ibq, before a cardinal num ber express es approxim ation; a - -|- o y N - iy o Acts 4 :4 “ Approxim ately five thousand,” n j . - m n t h fT-CTijLioN John 11:18 “ Approxim ately fifteen stades."
69
Simple fractions are formed with the gendered nominal bases 109 for ‘part’ plus a masc. num ber; o y N - ( o Y n - n - , o y c u n - n - . o y e u - e - . cf. o y o in masc.), (cf- po m asc.), etc.; rroYN -u^oM N T i i - e i A i c c i Rev 8 :8 “ A third o f the sea” ; ®pe-MHT Heb 7 :4 "T ithe(s).” 'H a lf is n j.u ;e (fem .) or 6 o c (masc.); ‘h a lf a . . . ' is n i u ; - or 6 i c - ; ■ . . . and a h a l f is M M -O Y naiije or (without ‘and’) sim ply o y 6 o c .
70 Constructions o f ‘o n e’ and ‘tn’o ’ (a) ‘One . . . ’ is normally expressed by the prefix o y ~ (cf. oyj^, o y b i). E.g. e - Y C 3i T e e p e i M - n e ^ o o Y Matt 20:2 “ For a denarius a day” ; oY <5A niJce N - c o Y o 2^ ^ - Y c a iT e e p e iY
Rev 6:6 “ A quart of wheat for a denarius, and three quarts of barley for a denarius.” The very rare specifier phrase o y x i i - insists upon precise num ber, e.g. n o y ji N -^ ie iB Num 15:5 (M organ M 566 f.67v a: 1-2; Dep. 1) t S djivra iv i “ The one lam b.” Note also: (i) o y - . . . n - o y i o t 'a single . . . ’ (‘precisely one . . . , no m ore than one . . . , even one . . . ’): oY C ipS n - o y ^ o t M att 19:6 “ One single flesh” ; (ii) n i - . . . H -o Y tu T ‘one and the sam e . . . . the very same . . . ’ : a q -u ;A H A e q - T iO Y o M - n i i y ji x e n - o y u j t M ark 14:39 “ He prayed, saying the sam e w ords.”
(b) ‘Two . . . ’ CN31Y. CNTe normally is enclitic and follows the noun that it quan tifies. men another two men n p c u M e cNa^Y Ihe two men p tu M e cN3iY
K e p tU M e cN3iY
E.g. Jco eiccN jiY Luke 16:13 “Two m asters” ; o jth n c rJ re Luke 3:11 “Two coats.” So with articles: k e n o 6 cN xe n -c z im c ShIV 108:3 “ Two other female leaders” or “Two other leading women” ; n 6 iN 6 cDp c n ^ y Matt 25:22 “The two talents” ; n N o 6 c n a y N - p e q - p - ® O Y o e i N ShOrtg 305 (Orlandt 20:37) “ The two great lights.” The rare specifier construction cmj^y *•“ insists upon a unit o f tw o A pair o f . . . ” ), e.g. 2 N-TMHTe M -n e c N iY N -X iipO Y BiN Num 7:89 (M organ M 566 f.56v a ; 23-25: Dep. 1) dvajiEoov tmv 5 0 o XEpoupin “ Betw een the pair o f cherubs” ; n iC N iY r i p M-2 CUB N-Ke
60
N O N - N U M E R I C A L
71
S P E C I F I I - R S
The numerical affixes are suffixed or prefixed to a noun, and the gender o f the com pound is m otivated by the noun. (E.g. q; p n - c o o y N is m asc. because based on c o o y n m asc.) Cardinals: - c n ^ y ‘set o f tw o . . . , double . . . ’ ^ M T - or u^MNT- ‘set o f three . . . , triple . . . ’ q T o Y - or q r e Y - ‘set o f four . . . , quadruple . . . ’ O rdinal: fir s t. . .
u ; p n - or u ^ p n ti- (expanded by ifiTinitive as verbal noun 183) ‘o rig in a l. . . , npoTO-, npo-
Exam ples: N - c e n - c w i Y “ Twice, For tw o tim es” ; ii-u ^ M T -c c u c u n “ T hrice, For three tim es” ; M - n n e z - c e n - C N i Y “ For a second tim e” John 21:16: n e q T o y - T n Y “ The four w inds” ; n u ^ e p n - c o o Y N 1 Pet 1:2 “ Foreknow ledge” Kpoyvcooiq
n o n
-
n u m e r i c a l
sp e c if ie r s
72 The six non-numerical specifiers o y H p ‘how m an y ? how m u c h ? ’
11^1 ‘many,
m uch’
quantity
NiM ‘who? which . . . ? ’ (proper name or class name) ‘w h ic h ? ’ (o f Several people/things) o y ‘w hat? w hat kind o f . . . ? ’
selection
X2i.2^y ‘any at all’, ‘any . . . at all’ are genderless and numberless, being both sing, and pi. in cross-reference. is constructed both in the specifier phrase 64 and as an enclitic (follow ing the noun that it selects). The enclitic construction expresses rhetorical affect: e.g. k a io c A i i y M iT-oY^ 3 :10 “ N one is righteous, no, not one [There is not any righteous person, there is not one such].” Rare.
73
The four interrogatives also have generic, non-interrogative meanings', io ; ‘one-oranother’; a iy M N -iiy ‘such-and-such’; mim 6 Seiva ‘so-and-so’, also mim m n —nim ; OY ‘som ething-or-other’, o y M N -o y ‘this and that’ (i.e. various unspecified things); o y n p (as expansion o f n e e - 123 and c o y - 134) ‘such-and-such’; o y u p M N -o y u p ‘so-and-so m any’, o y n p also has an exclam atory non-interrogative m eaning ‘how m u ch !’, e.g. riKj>Ke o y H p n e M att 6:23 “ How great is the darkness!”
74 Expanding an article (cf. table 4, p. 57) (a) o y - Z z e N - is compatible with the specifier phrases M-MiNe, N -^ e , o y M -M iN e “ What so rt? ” ; a o j t i - 3ie iH C , n - 6 o t “ W hat m agnitude?” mostly occurring as nominal sentence predicates o f similarity 301 (“ O f what sort is . . . ? How is . . . ? ” ; very often as an admirative exclamation “ How great is . . . ! ” ). E xam ples: m -m in € n e n i l M att 8:27 “W hat sort Man is th is ? ” ; i N i y e -N eV u iN e x e - z e N A u ; N - ^ e Ne Mark 13:1 “ Look, what wonderful stones! (Look how these stone a re !)" ; i j c i - c e p o - i J c e - N T - i K - N j,y e p o - o y e ^ - o y i o ; M -M iN e n-**u;hn e y - ^ i j c e M N -N e y ep H y John Chrysostom . Hom ily on Susanna (B H om 5 6 :2 -3 ) “Tell me what kind o f tree you saw them under when they w ere talking to one another”
61
SPECIFIERS
(b) OYoy, pi. 2eN oy, occurs as a nominal sentence predicate requesting class name (“What is . . . ? ”, often derogatory), cf. 299. Exam ples: n t k - o y o y A2 p o -K K -2 H n S h III 38:17—18 “W hat are you? Why are you h id d en ? ” ; i.N O N -2eN O Y A e ■ ■ ■ - x e - T N - o N-i.T-ccJDTM ShLeyd (Ephrem ?) 362fc;12-2! “ And who, then, are we . . . to be disobedient?” ; 2 eNOY NH-TN Ne N efcuN e €T®-KH e 2 pAi Josh 4:6 (ed. Thom pson) “ W hat are these stones to y o u ? ”
(c) KeAAAY N - . . . (sing.) “Any other . . . ” ( ke - expanded by specifier phrase N -) occurs freely as a specifier phrase. Exam ples: 2 N - 6 eAi.AY m - m a ShIV 120:10 “ In any other place. Anywhere else” ; 6 eAAi.Y N-pcuMC 2 0 AUJC e q -A iA ic o N e i 2 N -2cjdb n i m ShAmel I 141:14—142:1 “ Any other person at all w ho serves in any jo b ”
(d) oyp^xxy, pi. eeNAak-Ay, expresses insignificance (“is something trivial, is nothing,” literally an instance o f any at all). It occurs mostly as a nominal sen tence predicate of insignificance, cf. 294. E xam ples: a n f - o y a a a y I C o r 13:2 “ I am n o th in g ” ; A q - 6 cuqpT e p o - o y e q - M e e y e o ce-eq -N A -Jci-O Y A A A y N T o o T - o y Acts 3:5 “ H e fixed his attention upon them , expecting to receive some little thing from them ” (e)
The enclitic article . . . nim 60 is compatible w ith AAa.y both as pronoun and forming a specifier phrase: AAi.y nim “All, no m atter which o n e” and AA^y n - . . . nim “ A l l .. . n o m atter which o n e ” (both rare). E.g. n - e N T - A . q - t - ‘’paiN e . - \ x x y nim Aycu e T ® - c o o y N N - 2tUB nim N Toq er®- co o y N n - n € N P 3ln Paphnoute Cephalas, Life o f Onnophrius th e Anchorite (BM ar 219:7-9) “ H e who named all without exception and who is acquainted w ith all tilings— it is He w ho knows our nam es” ; \ x x y N -pcuM e NIM eT®-NA—p-®2 0 T e 2 HT-IC N c e -'t'-® 3iri.nH 2'f-M N T -N 3L2M - n e K p 3iN Tim othy II (Aelurus) o f Alexandria, On Abbaton Angel of Death (BM ar 2 4 3 :4 -5 ) “ All people without exception w hosoever fear you and give alms and oblations in your nam e”
62
Personal Morphs: Personal Pronouns and Affixes Definition and L ist of Personal Morphs
75
Personal Independents (Personal Pronouns) ak.NOK
77
Personal Dependents (Personal Affixes) 78 Personal Prefixes o f the Durative Sentence f - 78 Personal Prefixes o f the Nominal Sentence a n t - 79 Personal Intermediates (Infixes) 80 Primary set - i - 80 Penultimate personal object morph - e - etc. 82 Suffixes to conjunctive base - t x - , - r - , etc. 83 Component of possessive article - x - , - e k - , etc. 84 Personal Suffixes -T 85 Expansion o f the Personal Dependent 87 a. M ediated by n - 87 b. M ediated by n 6 i- 87 c. Apposition 87 Personal Second Suffixes ( - c q , - c e etc.) 88 Zero (®) as an Expression of Person Personal Reciprocity
89
90
D E F IN IT IO N A N D L IS T O F P E R S O N A L M O R P H S 75 ‘Personal morphs" comprise six sets of morphs that express the following grammatical categories Person
1st person (speaker) 2d person (addressee, dialogue partner) 3d person (other, not speaker or addressee: living or inanimate)
Number {sing, versus pi.) Gender {masc. versus/em ., 46) in the following intersections:
63
P E R S O N A L
1st sing. 2d sing. masc. 2d sing. fern. 3d sing. masc. 3d sing. fern.
1st pi. 2d pi. 3d pi.
M O R P H S
Hme you you he/him /it shelherlit
we/us you they/themlpeople in general
(Gender is not expressed in the 1st persons and in the plural.) The category of nexus 248 is also expressed by two of the sets 78, 79. Personal morphs are entity terms 141. They play a central role in referential linkage (cross-reference) 48 b y referring to other entity terms with formal agreement of person/number/(gender). Their target o f reference either precedes them in anticipation 313 o r follows them as an expansion o f information 319, 486. This cross-referential function helps to weave together individual sentences and also to fit them into a large-scale coherent fabric of textual discourse. Anom alously, the penultimate personal object m orph 82 expresses only undifferentiated 3d person. The general person (rhetorical person) is usually 3d sing. m asc. (‘o n e ’) o r 2d sing, m asc. (‘y o u ’), and can fluctuate; e.g. o y m n t - m a k a p i o c r r e ®'t' M -n 2 HKe n c jTM -JC I
N T O O T —q
H
e-AJC —JCI O N
N £ —2 0 )
C pO -K
e-T O ^B G IC U
N -N -G N T -
A K -TA A -y N A -q S hlll 6 5 :2 7 -6 6 :2 “ It is a blessed thing to give to the poor, and for one to not get anything back from that person; or alternatively, for y o u to have gotten something back and to be satisfied w ith the reciprocation for w hat y o u have given to that person.” The generic 3d pi. functions as (i) a general, pro form a actor expressing passive meaning in progress (a n entity undergoing some action 175), e.g. o y o N nim eT*-Jcice MMo—q c e —N A - e i e i o —q L uke 18:14 “ Every one who exalts them self will be hum bled” TaneivcoGiiaeTui; ( ii)a generic object o f a preposition or direct object of a verb, e.g. a - m o j y c h c ' f - e e n a .- n e -^ 't'-o y jc c u c u M e n a ~ y n -® to y T o Ayo) e-**NOJ(.-oY e e o A Mark 10:4 “ M oses allowed u s to give a certificate of divorce (to one’s wife) and dism iss (h e r)” d n o cT aaio v ypaif/ai Kai d.noXvam; N Toq r a p n e -< jJ3iq -M 0 K?- 0 Y a.YO) N c q -T A ^ o - o y e - n e y M i . Job 5:18 a v ib q y a p dXyeiv Ttotei, Kai naXiv dnoKoGioTrjoiv “ F o r it is He who causes pain and who restored again.” Cf. also 5 9 (o y o N ). F o r m asc. as th e general gender, cf. 46.
76 Personal morphs are of two kinds: i. independent morphs (also called personal pronouns), which can occur either in a bound group 27 or autonomously 28 ANOK (etc.) 77 Personal independents ii. dependent m orphs (also called personal ajfixes), which always occur united with another morph or morphs in a bound group t - (etc.) 78 Personal prefixes o f the durative sentence A.NP- (etc.) 79 Personal prefixes of the nominal sentence - T - (etc.) 80 Personal intermediates (and three affiliated sets 82-84) - r (etc.) 85 Persoiial suffixes - c q (etc.) 88 Personal second suffixes
64
P E R S O N A L
D E P E N D E N T S
P E R S O N A L I N D E P E N D E N T S (P E R S O N A L P R O N O U N S ) 77 Personal independents (personal pronouns) sing.
pi.
1st
ANOK
2d
NTOK (masc.)
n tc o tn
3d
NTo (fem.) NToq (masc.) NToc (fem.)
n to o y
3k.NON
T hese morphs occur: (a) as an extraposited topic (subject) at the head of a sentence; (b) as subject or predicate of a nom inal sentence containing n e ; (c) as the focal point of a cleft sentence 4 6 4 , 4 6 8 , 4 7 0 , 2 8 4 ; (d) introducing a proper noun in extraposition before a 1st or 2d person subject, 8 7 ( c ) , 1 2 9 ( d ) ; ie) m ediating a proper noun in apposition 1 2 9 ( d ) ; (f) standing fo r a dependent personal morph in ellipsis; (g) in certain exclam a tory phrases 2 4 2 . E xam ples: (a) n t o o y c e - N j . — g b o a n t o k A.e k —q j o o n Heb 1:11 “ As fo r them, they will perish; but Thou, Thou rem ainest” ; n t o k N T K - O Y n p o < t > H T H c John 4; 19 “ As for You, Y ou are a prophet” ; (h ) n t o k n e n p p o n - n i o y a a i John 18:33 “ Are Y ou the king o f the Je w s? ” ; T e n e n i c T O A H n t c d t n n e 2 C o r 3:2 “ O ur letter is y o u ” ; a . N O K r e e p o y e Ruth 3 :1 6 “I am R uth” ; a n o n n e N T o q S hlll 22:16 “ W e and he are as o n e ” ; (c) NToq r^ p rreT®-Ni.-TOYJCO M - n e q A 3iOc Matt 1 :21 “ F o r it is He who will save H is people” ; (d ) a n o k n ^ y A o c a.T-c23^T N - T a . 6 i j c Phlm 19 “ I, Paul, have written this with m y h a n d ” ; ' t ' - < i ) i N e e p t u - T N 2 M - n J c o e i c ANOK r e p T i o c Rom 16:22 “I Tertius greet you in the L o rd ” ; (e) k - n a - o y j c ^ T NTOK i.YO) neKH'f A cts 16:31 “ You w ill be saved, you an d your household” ; koj eBOA NA.- T A N O K n i p e q - p - * n o b g Luke 18:13 “ B e merciful to me a sinner! ” ; (f) q - N A - 6 tu 2 pa.Y n ^ h t - ^ a y c u a n o k 2
P E R S O N A L D E P E N D E N T S (P E R S O N A L A F F IX E S ) 78 P E R S O N A L P R E F I X E S O F T H E D U R A T I V E S E N T E N C E sing. 1st 2d 3d
talt. r - (masc.) T e —, var. r p - (fem.) q - (masc.) c - (fem.) K -,
pi. TNte tn -
ce-
are nexus m oqjhs 248 that occur only in the durative sentence. Pattern 2 (318). E.g. 't'-c c u T n “ I am choosing.”
65
P E R S O N A L
M O R P H S
The alternant r - (2d sing, masc.) occurs only after negative r i - (e.g. f i - r - c c u T n N - r - c c u T n iN “ You do not choose” ).
an
or
Conjugation o f future auxiliary N i 2d sing. fem. 2d plur.
t e n j i - , varr. x e p N J i- and T e p ji- , “ You (sing, fem.) are going to . . . T e T N i- , var, T e T N N i-, “ You (pi.) are going to . . . ”
79 P E R S O N A L P R E F I X E S O F T H E N O M I N A L S E N T E N C E (252) sing. 1st AN?-, var. jiNOK2d NTK-, var. n t o k - (masc.) N T e - , var. n t o - (fem.)
pi. jiN -, var. jiN O N -(rarely jiNN-) n t c t n - , var. ntcutn -
are nexus morphs 248 that express 1st and 2d person subject. They occur only in the nominal sentence. Patterns 1 and 2 (259). E.g. j.N r-TeqccD N e “ I am his sister.” T he 3d person nexus morph in the nom inal sentence is variable and invariable n e 252. Only one instance o f a 3d person nexal prefix ( N T t j - sing, masc., 2 Cor 10:7) is on record; it is a unique occurrence.
PER S O N A L IN T E R M E D IA T ES (IN F IX E S )
80 The prim ary set o f personal intermediates (cf. table 5J sing. 1st - T - , -3^-, - 1 2d - K - , - i c - , - € K - (masc.)
pi. -N -, -N -, -€N - tctn- , - tn - , - €
tn-
-®-, - P - , - p e - , - 6 - . - e e - .
- e p e - , - p - (fem.) 3d -CJ-, -CJ-, - e q - (masc.) - C - , - C - , - e c - (fem.)
-y -. -o y -
These morphs are suffixed to; (a) non-durative conjugation bases 325, as subject ilr-c c U T n “ I chose” ; (b) m utable conveners 396, as subject N e li-c c u x n “ I was choosing” ; (c) oyN T i^s, MNTi* ‘have/not have’ 383, as subject when follow ed by a personal second suffix o Y N T i ^ ^ - c j " / have it” 390(e); (d) the reduced prepersonal state o f double-object causative verbs (e.g. t t o ‘make . . . to give . . . ’) 172, as first direct object A i - T o - i c - c e “ I m ade you give it back” ; (e) the double-object infinitive -f-Ni= 173, as first object q -N A --j-N A -K -c c “ He will give them to you." (Table 5 shows the conditions under which the allom orphs occur.) O ther personal intermediates are: the penultim ate personal object morph 82, personal interm ediates of the conjunctive base 83, and those contained in the possessive article 84.
66
PH RSO N AL
IJ liP liN D K N T S
TABLE 5 C o n d it io n in g o f t h e P e r s o n a l I n t e r m e d ia t e A l l o m o r p h s : P r i m a r y S e t
(For paradigms, cf. 81) B ase
i=, P erson
Me=
Tpe*, NNes
e su jiN , e * e
Mnprpe*^
es, Ne*‘
325
Mns, M niTs UJiNTs, eT* oyN T s, MNTs 325,386,396
325,396
Singular 1st 2d masc. 2dfem. 3d masc. 3d fem. Plural 1st 2d 3d
T K
(T)
_
\J U ^
K (K, €K)_
Y
325
I
€K
c
e eg ec
N
u or €N
T N (t € T N ^ )
€TN
€TN
Y
OY
OY
N T0TN
NTeps
e, ee (epe, p)* g (g. eg) c (c, ec)
*, P , p e ’
c
M ip*, T ip s
'Also the double-object infinitive -fNA* 173 -Also the reduced prepersonal states of tm m o . T c o , (t )t o , and ( x o ) , viz. TMMe«, T c e» , (t )t € 3', and 172 M n p T p A - with loss of final e of the base (rare vars. Tpe-Y- and n n € - Y - ) ; but T c e - I “Make me drink . . . ” 172 but e t - , o y N 'f'-. M N'f(var. A p e -), a^A pe-, M e p e -, epq^AN- (var. epeu^A N -), e p e - (optative, circumstantial, or focalizing), n e p e ^ o y N T -e e - q “You (sing, fem.) have it ( - q ) ” ; e r e p e - and e T p - (2d sing, fem.) as vars. of e r e - , the relative ’Non-standard variant T p e r e T N -
81
Paradigms Illustrating Table 5
Al-co)Tn
TpA-co)Tn
AK-CO)Tn
T p eK “ CO)Tn
A-co)Tn, Ap-co)Tn, Tpe-ccuxn Ape-co)Tn Aq-co)Tn T peq-co)T n AC-CO)Tn Tpec-co)Tn AN-CO)Tn ATeTN-CO)Tn
AY-co)Tn
Mni-cojTn & MnA.'J'-ccuTn NTepi-ccuxn
Mnic-ccDTn, MnK-co)Tn
NTepeK-co)Tn
Mne-co)Tn
~NTepe-ccDTn
M n q -co )T n , M nq-ccD xn
N T epeq-co)T n
Mnc-co)Tn, Mnc-co)Tn
NTepec-co)Tn
TpeN“ CO)Tn MnN-co)Tn TpeTN-co)Tn, MneTN-coJTn TpeTCTN-CCDTn Tpey-ccDTn MnoY-ccurn
N T epN -C O )T n NT epC TN c o )T n
NTepoy-ccDTn
82 The penultim ate personal object morph seems to express undifferentiated 3d person. This set contains only one morph, which occurs however in m any vari ant forms. (Very rare.) 3d - e - , vars. - e c - , - c - . - c q - , - q - . - q c -
Despite their partial resemblance to the primary set of personal intermediates, the variant forms in this set are apparently equivalent, expressing no distinc tion o f gender and number and occurring interchangeably with one another. 67
P E R S O N A L
M O R P H S
This m orph functions (a) as a direct object (thing possessed) suffixed immediately to the verboid base oY N T(i)=, MNT(i)= ‘have/not have’ and follow ed by a suffixed subject; e.g. MK.i NiM e T e -Y N T z e c -n ie io )T (textual vars. o y f i T - c - , y n t - e - , o y N T i - q - , o y N T i - q c - ) John 16:15 (collated) Jiavra b a a £xei f> n a riip “ All that my Father h a s"; f i e e g c u c u T -e M -noY O)u> e T e -o y N T iz it- ® e g o v N e p o - q (collated) ShZ 387:14—15 = ShAmel I 4 1:2 “ Just like the desire that you ( - e sing, fem.) too have for him ” (such occurrences are in relative conversions or cleft sentences with the personal intermediate functioning as the resum ptive morph 3 90[b]); (6) as a first direct object after the prepersonal state of a double-object causative verb (e.g. t t o ‘cause . . . to give . . . ’), where the first suffixed object (the thing given) is a personal morph and the sec ond suffixed object (the one caused to give) is not: N ? -T M -T e -c -rre T q i n - n e x e N o Y K . N e Luke 6 :3 0 “ D o not cause the one who lakes away ( r r - e T ^ - q i ) your goods ( N - e x e - N O Y - K N e) to give them ( - C - ) back.”
83 Personal intermediates sujfixed to the conjunctive base n= (vars. n= and Ne=) 351, mostly resembling the personal prefixes of the durative sentence 78 sing. 1st 2d 3d
pi.
-T A - '
-T N -
-r - ,- f - ,- K -( m a s c .) - r e - (fem.) - q - , - c j - (masc.) - C - , - c - (fem.)
-r e r N -
■
-c e -
- k after n 6 = * N T i-. but also sim ply T i - (with absence o f the preceding base
N ote: - r - , - q - , - c - occur after the base n=;
n =)
84 Personal intermediates as components o f the possessive article 54 sing. 1st - 2.2d - € K -o y 3d - e q -e c -
pi.
(masc.) (fem.) (masc.) (fem.)
-€ N -€T N -
-ey -
Thus: TTi-, n e i c - . n o Y - , rr e q - e tc . ‘my, your (sing, m asc.), your (sing, fern.), h is’ etc. expanded by m asc. nouns; T i - , t e k . - , t o y - , T e q - etc. expanded by fem inines; N i - , N 6 K . - , NOY-, N e q - etc. expanded by masculines and by fem inines
85 P E R S O N A L S U F F I X E S ( C F . T A B L E 6 ) sing. 1st 2d 3d
68
-r , -e r ,-® ,
-T , -N T . -T
- K , - € K , - i c , - r (masc.) -®, - e , -T € (fem.) -q , - e q , -q_(masc.) - c , - e c , - c (fem.)
pi. -N , -N , -€ N - t n ,
- t h y t n
-y , -o y
P E R S O N A L
D E P E N D E N T S
These morphs are suffixed to: (a) prepositions 200. n 2 h t - k “ W ithin y o u "; (M m uta ble transitive inflnitives 167 as direct object, c e x n -T H Y T N "‘Choose y o u "; (c) inflect ed m odifiers 152, g c u c u - N “ W e too” ; (d) sufflxally conjugated verboids as subject. N iT iT - q “ Blessed is h e !" 373, o y N T i - c “ She h a s” 3 83; (e) possessed nouns 138, T o o T - q “ His hand(s)” ; (f) the possessed pronoun 54, n o )-T “ M ine” ; (g) the inflect e d interjections i g p o a 242. (Table 6 shows the conditions under which the allom orphs occur.)
TABLE 6 C o n d it io n in g
of the
P e r s o n a l S u f f ix A l l o m o r p h s
(F o r p aradigm s, cf. 86 ) T ermination P erson
( 1) Vowel (Not Doubled)
of
P receding B ase (P repersonal S tate )
(2) Consonant + B M N or p '
(3) Final
t
2oTB», 6ooas
6TBHHTS
TTOUJN=. T i 2 M =
qoT s
(4) Other Consonant
(5) Doubled Vowel
c o rn s 210)0)=
oyozr= Sing. 1st 2d m asc. 2 d fem . 3d m asc. 3d fem . PI. 1st 2d 3d
r K 0^
er
CK e
eq c N
(OTN^or t h y t n '” ( o )y "
€C
N o r €N thytn®
OY
®or T K or K e q orq c or c
T , T , o r NT^
T
K, K, or F e
q o rq
K Te q
c or c
c
thytn^
thytn'
thytn’
OY
OY
( o )y '^
N
N o t e : The paradigm of the inflected modifiers 152 is slightly irregular.
'Final B, k , m, n, or p of the personal state forms a syllable with the personal suffix: tah-met. Here - e - is produced by union of base and suffix and is non-phonemic. Abnormally spelled manuscripts show the forms - t , -ic , - e , etc. ^Poorly spelled manuscripts show the forms - e x , eic -, - e , etc. m= + t forming syllable normally occurs as ImntI (where n is formed by union of base and suffix and is non-phonemic 26). ’Forming syllable with preceding n=; e.g. c o Y U )N -f sw6->fg John 17:25 “ Know You” “Final /a/ i normally is manifested as e before 0 (e.g. Nis, Ne-® “ To you” ; yet, NB;\;\i-®) ^(;) indicates that final i and o of the ba.se normally become h and o) respectively ‘Suffixed to the prenominal state, TegM-THYTN ’Suffixed to either the prenominal state (eT B e-T H yT N , qex-THYTN, M e p e - T H y T N , t e - t h y t n , t n - t h y t n ) or the prepersonal state (TooT-THyTN, t o t - t h y t n ) . depending on selection o f lexeme. Rare variation occurs in some instances ( n 2 H T - t h y t n , v a r gN -TH yTN ). Some mutable morphs only manifest a prepersonal state, p iT -T H y T N . 'Suffixed to the prenominal state c e x n -T H Y T N ’Suffixed to the prenominal state ( g i0 )0 )= shows anomalies: g ito o jT , giojojK., g io jo jT e , 2 i0 )0 )q, 2 iO)U)c, 210)0 )n , 2 i o ) t - t h y t n , z io jo y ) ’”(:) t n suffixed to the preperson al state or sometimes t h y t n suffixed to the prenominal state: neX A =, neJC H -T N or neJce-THYTN; TCiBo=. t c a b o j - t n or TCABe-THYTri; m6 Cto)s, M e c T to -T rJ or MecTe-THYTN; fic u j* , n c c u - t n . NCi-THYTN "Sim ple letter y after i . e . h '^Simple letter y after i i =
69
PERSONAL
86
M O RPHS
Paradigm s illustrating table 6
xw xw q xw c xw u
(2) TA2M€T TA2MGK TA2M€ TAgMeq TA2M€C TA2MN
XWTU
xw oy
(1) epoY
naT
NAK epoK N€ epo NAC/ epoc/ MAC epoc NAN epoN NHTN epcuTN NAY epooY (4) COTTTT
XWK
(3) eXBHHT, e T B H H T T eTBHHTK eTBHHTe eTBHHTCj eTBHHTC
TOOT TOOTK TOOTe TOOTcj TOOTC TOOTN
Te^MTHyTN
eTBHHTN eTB€THYTN
TA^MOY
eTBHHTOY
TOOTOY
t o
( o )t t h y t n
(5)
iAT
COTOK
coTne COTTiq
coT nc COTON
cernTHYTN coTnoY
iAC iiN
pthytn
iiY
E X P A N S IO N O F T H E P E R S O N A L D E P E N D E N T
87 A personal dependent m oiph can be expanded (provided w ith explicit lexical content) by an entity term g A p o -c N - r n e “ U nder h eav en ” (S h lll 9 6 :2 1 ) e T o o T - o y N - N e r t N A N - A K A e A p r o N “ Into the clutches o f the unclean spirits” (S h lll 4 8 :3 -4 ) neJC A -q A e N 6 i-T c “ A nd Jesus sa id ” (L uke 9 :6 2 ) KcD eBoA. njl-T JlNok n 1p e g - p - *^No b c “ Be m erciful to m e a sin n e r!” (L uke 18:13) q - j c c D p j l p m m o - c N T o t ) n j c o e i c “ F o r the L ord say s” (S h lll 6 0:4—5) w ith the m ediation o f n - or n 6 i - , o r in apposition. In these constructions, the personal dependent m orph (c , o y ,
P E R S O N A L
D E P E N D E N T S
(a) M ediated by N -. Third person suffixes on a preposition or possessed noun are expanded by the mediation o f the preposition n - 203. 2ApjLT-q N -oY 2 Pqpipe “ At the feet o f a young m an” (Acts 7:58) 2 HT-C N-TcqMAAY “ His m other’s w om b” (Luke 1:15) p c u -o y N -N €2TCDcDp “ (The) mouth(s) o f horses” (Jas 3:3) i. sim ple prepositions, e.g. e p o - t ) fi-N c u g e G en 7 :16 “ Upon N oah” ; e p o - q N - r e N o c NiM N -® x p ic T iiN o c ShChass 102:9-11 “ Incumbent on all classes of Christian” (cf. 310[i]) ii. possessed nouns 138, com pound prepositions, and verbs based upon them , e.g. p o ) - q M -n M o Y t2 Tim 4 :17 “ The lion’s m outh” ; Z T H -q M -n e q x H H B e L uke 16:24 “ The end o f his finger” ; NTooT-q M -nK eN TvpitU N M ark 15:45 “ From the centuri o n ” ; o y x p H C T iiN o c e q - N i - B u ) K e p i T - q N -o Y p e q -M o Y x e N q - e N - (i.e. fiq - N - ) 2H T-C N -oYCgiM e eneCH T o y o i i;\H e cu c M - n ii N -TeiM iN e Athanasius, Homily on M urder and G reed, and on St. M ichael Archangel (M organ M 602 f.I0 6 v 6 ,-3 I-f.l0 7 r a,-4; Dep. 116) “ Any Christian who consults (goes-to-feet-of) an enchanter so as to cause an abortion (bring-dow n-w om b-of a woman)— woe indeed to this kind o f person! ” Periphrastic prenoininals are also form ed with invariable - q . E.g. g H T -q N -N e g io M e ShEnch 6 6 a ;3 0 -3 2 “ (The) belly o f the w om en” ; KOYN-q N -T e c g iM e John the Archim andrite, Exegesis (Canon) (BritLib Or.8811 f.l7 v b :4 - 5 ; Layt. 85) “ (The) womb o f the w om an.” A personal second suffix 88 as subject, follow ing a penultim ate person al o b ject m orph 82, is expanded by the m ediation o f M -; e.g. N K i nVm e x e - o Y N T i - c q - a M -n p o iM e Job 2 :4 “ All that a man has” ; c f 390(c).
First and 2d person suffixes are incompatible with such expansion; for suppletions, cf. (c) below. (b) M ediated by n 6 i - . Third person morphs with subject function, in all nexus patterns where they occur, are expanded by m ediation o f the preposition n 6 i - , which is compatible with all non-personal entity terms. Nec-MMAY n 6 i - mjlpijl TMArAjLAHNh m N-TKeMa.piA. “ M ary M agdalene and the other Mary were there” (M att 27:61) 2iq-TcDOYN A e n6i-iu)ch<}) “Joseph got up” (M att 1:24) gM -nrpeY -N K oT K j lc N6i-NpcuM e “W hile people were sleeping” (M att 13:25) XW 3, NAopcD-oY ON N ^i-N A p ro c “ But the lazy, too, are num erous” (S h lll 115:1-2) oYNT-cJ-®e3 oYciJL mmjlY N 6i-nqpH pe M -nptuM e “The Son of Man has authority” (Mark 2:10) n 6 i - can also resume the actor expression ( - e q - ) in form ations like T e q 6 iN -c c u T n n 6 i - . . . : e.g. n T tu u j M - n e io Y o e iu j M N -T e q 6 iN -K tu 6 b o ;\ N -N eN N O B e N g H T -q N6 i-n N o Y T e ShAmel 190:4—5 “ The situation o f this present age and, within it. Cod's activity of forgiving our sins.”
“His activity o f choosing” 109(H) as a synonym n o f n x p e q - c c u T n
71
P K R S O N A L
M O R P H S
First and 2d person subjects are incompatible with such expansion (for suppletions, cf. [c]); except that the phrase Ndi-noyJ^ noyj^ mmo= “Each of (us, you)” can expand a 1st or 2d person pi. subject, e.g. bcuk n t c t n k t € - t h y t n n 6 i - t o y ' ( Toyei m m o 3 - t n e - n n l N - T e c M a ^ a ^ Y Ruth 1:8 “Go now, each of you return to the house of her mother. ” (For lexical expansion of the subject pronoun n e in nominal sentence Pattern 6 , cf. 275.) Further examples: A y - e i j l e N6 i-N i-J cn -M N T O Y e Matt 20:9 “Those hired about (literally, related to) the eleventh hour cam e” ; iq - o Y a ) U j i j l e fi6 i-n H John 9:25 “ He answered” ; t o t e ce-NA-CKANJi^iiM^e r i6 i - 2 i 2 Matt 24:10 “ And then many w ill fall away” ; 2 N -T e 2 o Y eiT e n e q - u p o o n N6 i - n t y i j c e John I; I “ In the begin ning was the Word” ; c e-N i-< i)a )T r e fi6 i - 2 eNMirN Luke 21:25 “There will be signs” ; N e v -< i)o o n j l e ZigTH -N n e r iO i-C im q n - c o n Matt 22:25 “Now there were seven brothers among us” ; c e - 6 o p 5 r ip e p o - q n 6 i-® 2 o y o e - g n e N -p cu n e Acts 23:21 “For more than forty men lie in ambush for him” ; i q - c i y j e n 6 i - 2 h t-® Rev 10:10 “ My stomach was made bitter” ; n 6 i - o y o n nim Luke 21:15, N6 i-n M H f Matt 20:24, N6 i-N J L iic iio c Matt 25:37, ri6 i-N C iB H Matt 25:9, ri6 i-N iceM ieH T H C John 20:25, N6 i-N q ir -® m iN e Luke 7:24, n 6 i - n 6 bo;\ 2 N -eiTA ;\iA Heb 13:24, N6 i-oY pcuM e N -p M M io Mati 27:57, fi6 i-T < i)ee p e yjMM Matt 9:24, n 6 i - o y n o 6 N-JciMH Matt 8:26, fi6 i-KeoYH H B Heb 7:11, fi6 i-C N o q NiM N -jL iK .iio c Matt 23:35, N6 i - i - ^ M T - ^ o m -«('yxh Acts 2:41, N6 i-n e V K e c o o Y n - c o n Acts 11:12, f i e i - g o e i N e N -N e r p iM M iT e v c Matt 12:38, N6 i - N i i eT®-MMiY Shill 133:11-12, N ei-N -er^ -M M iY Shill 160:22
(c) Apposition. First and 2d person morphs (which are incompatible with expan sion through N - and n 6 i-> are expanded by apposition 149; a proper noun in apposition must mediated by jin ok etc. 129(d). TN-Nji-BcuK rjip egoYN e-n eq M ji n-Jh ton N -eN T -A y -n iC T ey e “For we, who have believed, will enter Hts place of rest” (Heb 4:3) ^qpe A e e p o - N jiNon N -e T C -o v N -^ fioM M M o-oy e-® T peN -qi 2Jk-MMNT-6 cuB “It is right for us, who are strong, to bear with the fail ings" (Rom 15:1) neyjirreA.ioN . . . m l eN T -jii-qpcune NJi-q anok njiYA.oc n -®khpy 3 Jiycu N -® A iiK 0 N0 C “The gospel . . . of which 1, Paul, became a herald and minister” (Col 1:23) Third person morphs are optionally expanded by apposition, to form a syntac tically and rhetorically distinct element (and contrasting with expansion through N - and n 6 i-). q -jco rjip MMo-c NToq njcrieic “For the Lord says (For He. the Lord, says)” (Shlll 6 0 :4 -5 ) All three persons (1 st, 2d, 3d) can be expanded by the appositive attributive construction 408. 3,\\3, €TBHHT-N gcucu-N ON NJif F .T o y -N A -o n -c e p o - o y “But also for the sake of ourselves, to whom it will be reckoned” (Rom 4:24)
72
Z H R O
AS
A N
K X P R E S S I O N
O F
I’ l - R S O N
8 8 P E R S O N A L S E C O N D S U F F IX E S
sing.
pi.
1st - T 2d -K ,-C K ,-T K (masc.) [?] (fern.) 3d - q o r - c q (masc.) - c (fem.)
[?], - C N - thytn -c e o r-c o y
(a) express the direct object after personal conjugation o f o y n tji= , ‘have/not have’, and thus jire suffixed to a personal intermediate 390(e); e.g. nK€ eT e-oY N T A -c|-cq M att 13:12 “ Even what he has” (b) express the direct object after ‘write’, tn n o o y ® ‘send (hither)’, to o y = ‘buy’, JcooY= ‘send (thither)’, and 6 o o y = ‘make narrow ’; after the double object infinitive ‘give . . . unto’ 173; and after transitive special affir mative imperatives ending in i= (jini= ‘bring’, j^pi= ‘m ake’, iY6i= ‘bring’, and ‘say’) 366(b) Exam ples; q - N i - T N N o o y - c e Matt 21:3 “ He will send them ” ; i N i - c o y e - n e l M i Luke 19:27 “ Bring them here” ; i y e i - c q N i - i e - n e i M i M att 17; 17 “ Bring him here to m e” ; J c e - e te - T N N o o y - T K y j i p o - o y Theodosius o f Alexandria, Encom ium on Si. John Baptist (M organ M 583 f.44r a ; 3 1 ^ ; 1; Dep. 164) “ So that I m ight send you to them ” ; J c e ic ic e N - N i - J c i - n o y c u N - N - e N T - iy - T N N o o y - C N y j i p o - i c ibid. f. 45r a ; 7 -1 0 “ So that we might bring the news to those who sent us to y o u ” ; a n o n o y M T i-M -C K MMiy g tu c - ^ e itu T Prochonis. Acts o f St. John Evangelist (M organ M 576 f.2v b: 13-15; Dep. 102) “ As for us, we think o f you as a father" (We have you as a father)
(c) are required as the second suffixed personal object after a double-object causative verb ( t m m o , t c o , t t o , tjc o ) 172; e.g. w q - T o - ic - c e wpjiCTe Sir 20:15 (20:14 Lagarde) “ And tomorrow he will make you give ( t t o =) them back” (d) express the subject when suffixed to a penultimate personal object morph that is attached to oYNTai^=/MNTai= ‘have/not h av e’ 390(c); e.g. nkji n'(m C T e -o Y N T ji-c q -q M -npcuM e Job 2:4 “ All that a man has” (Every thing such that he [ - q ] has it, namely the man)
Z E R O (®) A S A N E X P R E S S I O N O F P E R S O N 89 The absence of any overt morph after a prepersonal state (table 7) expresses i. 1st sing. (var. of
-
t
),
after morphs ending in
t
=
ii. 2d sing. fem. (alt. of - e ) , after morphs ending in a vowel
73
P liR S O N A L
M O RPHS
TABLE 7 Z e r o M o r ph
as a
S ig n a l
a fter
P erson E xpressed
P repersonal S tate
M utable infinitive e n dings in Prepositions ending in t =
t
P r eper so n a l S ta tes by
1st Sing.
Z ero M orph
2d Sing. Fem.
-0
=
-0
A ny prepersonal state ending in ' h =, o =, o r cu= C onjugation base C onjugation bases T p e = , NNe=, M n p x p e s
-0 -02
-0
qoT-® ‘Obliterate me” ; figHT-® “ In me” ; e p o - ® “ Against you (sing, fern.)"; “ Teach you (sing, fem.)” ; i ® - c o ) T n “ You (sing, fem.) chose” ; T pe® -ccuT n “ (To) make you (sing, fem.) choose” 'The phoneme /a/ is normally manifesled as e before -0; e.g. N e - ® ‘to you’ ^Varies with - p - and - p e - (giving i * - / i p - / i p e - >
E x a m p le s : T C iB O - ®
P E R S O N A L R E C IP R O C IT Y 90 Personal reciprocity (‘one another’) is expressed by the common noun e p n y expanding a possessive article. NM-NeyepHOY “They said to one another” (Luke 4:36) The personal element within the possessive article— e.g. N eyepH y— always refers back to an entity term (usually plural) previously expressed or implied in the sentence. The possessive person agrees in person/number/(gender) with this antecedent; thus 3 ,y- . . . N e y e p H y . Further exam ples: i N o N - M M e ; \ o c N - N e N e p H y R o m 12:5 “ We are the m em bers o f another” ; i p i - * ' 2 M 2 i ; \ N - N e T N e p H y Gal 5:13 “ Be servants o f one another” ( N G T N - resolves the plurality o f persons addressed in the im perative); c e -
one
N i- C K iN J L i; \ iZ e N eyepHy
e r” ;
n il
N
6 i- g i2
N c e - n ip iJ L iJ L o y
N -N e y e p n y
N C e -n e c T -
Matl 24:10 “ M any will stumble, and betray one another, and hate one anoth JL6
ne
e - * ’T p e N - c S c K - N e N e p H y
N2h t - t h y t n
g iT N - T t iiC T ic
ex® -
1:12 “ And this m eans for us to encourage one another by each other’s faith” ; e p < i ) i N - o y M N T - e p o n c u p J C e - N e c e p H y Mark 3:24 “ If a kingdom (collective noun lOSIal) are divided against one another” ; n i p i K i ; \ e i r i - N e T N e p H y i y o ) N T e T i 7 - K O ) T n o y i n o y i M - n e q e p H y I Thess 5:11 “ Encourage o n e another and build one another up” g N -N G N e p H y R o m
74
Nouns Definition and Classification o f Coptic Nouns
91
(1) Common Nouns (Gendered and Genderless) 92 Actualizations o f the Lexeme: Entity Term Construction and Attributive Construction 92 Denotation and Description: Interpretations of the Entity Term 93 Greek Substantives and Adjectives in Coptic 94 Degrees of Descriptive Meaning 95 Attributive Constructions of the Comm on Noun 96 Survey o f patterns 96 One attributive elaborating another 97 Specific negation of the attributive noun 98 The three attributive patterns 99 Pattern 1: M ediated attributive 99 Amplification o f a descriptive entity term 100 Pattern 2: Unmediated attributive 101 Pattern 3: Inverted attributive 102 M odification of the Entity Term Construction 103 Gendered Common Nouns 104 Grammatical Gender 105 Associated gender 105 Anomalies 106 Special formal marking for gender 107 Number 108 Derived and Composite Forms 109 Gendered bases ( m n t - etc.) 109 Invariable n e r - 110 Invariable n ai- 111 Formed with genderless affix 112 Genderless Common Nouns 113 Types of Genderless Noun 114 a. Borrowed Greek adjectives n o N h p o c etc. 114 b. Non-Greek morphs eBiHN etc. 114 c. Limited non-Greek morphs 3,c etc. 114 d. Derived and composite nouns 3,t - etc. 114
75
N O U N S
Lack of Associated Gender l l 5 Genderless Common Nouns as Attributive 116 Special Formal M arking for Gender, Number, or Animateness 117 Derived and Composite Forms 118 AT- 119 pM- or pMN- 120 peq121 Construct participles ( m j i i - ) 122 M€2- 123 Prepositions expressing relationship eBOA. 2 n - etc. K o y -N - 125
124
(2) Proper Nouns 126 Definition and Formation 126 Actualization 127 The Referential Definite Article ( n e e m e A . x i c e A e x ) 128 Syntactic Peculiarities 129 Naming Constructions 130 Telling Time 131 Hours of the day 131 Periods of the day; yesterday— today— tomorrow 132 The week 133 Days of the month 134 Months of the Egyptian calendar 135 Commonized Proper Noun and Properized Common Noun 136 Direct Address 137 (3) Possessed Nouns 138 Definition and List of Possessed Nouns 138 The Periphrastic Prenominal State ( p t u - c j N - ) Meaning and Usage 140
139
D E F IN IT IO N A N D C L A S S IF IC A T IO N O F N O U N S 91 The ‘noun ’ is a set of word classes (1) Common noun Gendered, pcuMe ‘person/hum an’ 104 Genderless, n o 6 ‘great (one)’ 113 (2) Proper noun, Mjipiji ‘M ary’ 126 (3) Possessed noun, pcu= ‘mouth o f . . . ’ 138 76
C O M M O N
N O U N S
whose distinguishing features are i. that they are ‘lexem es’, i.e. basic units o f Coptic vocabulary whose mean ings are particular rather than general (as distinct from the general terms that express grammatical categories, such as determinators, specifiers, personal morphs, etc.), and also ii. that they can occur as entity terms 141, which present or refer to an object of thought (as distinct from predicating a process or action, or expressing a relationship) Com mon and proper nouns are very numerous classes; the possessed noun is a small and closed class. The common noun comprises two sets, gendered 104 and genderless 113; their characteristics are individually described later in this chapter.
C O M M O N N O U N S (G E N D E R E D A N D G E N D E R L E S S ) A C T U A L I Z A T I O N S O F T H E LEX EM E: E N T I T Y T E R M A N D A T T R I B U T I V E
92 W hen considered abstractly, apart from actual sentetjceS, Coptic common noun lexemes are just virtual possibilities stored in memofy for eventual utterance (terms in an abstract, potential linguistic repertory). The occurrence of a lexeme in an actual written or spoken text is its ‘actualization’. There are two basic syntactic constructions by which any common noun lexeme can be actualized: (a) It can be actualized in an ‘entity term construction’, i.e. an article phrase 43 or specifier phrase 64. Entity terms (discussed in chapter 6) are, by definition, syn tactically interchangeable items that present or refer to an object of thought (as distinct from predicating a process or action or expressing relationship) 141. E.g. n^LiKJiioc “The righteous (person),” n e rN p p o “ Your king,” o y n o 6 “ A big one,” ®npo<})HTHc “ Prophet(s),” t y o M N T N - 2 o o y “Three days.” (b) It can be actualized in an ‘attributive construction ’ 96. Attributive terms ‘m od ify ’ (i.e. descriptively expand) another noun. There are three syntactic patterns that express an attributive term; e.g. T e g ^ ic c u N - p p o Acts 12:21 “ His royal rob e,” gcNopHpe ujhm M att 11:16 “ Som e little children,” o y Nofi M - M H H t u e John 6:5 “ A great m ultitude.” D E N O T A T I O N A N D D E S C R I P T I O N : I N T E R P R E T A T I O N S OF T H E E N T I T Y TERM
93 Entity term constructions 92(a) can present/refer to an object of thought in two alternative ‘semantic fu n ctio n s' (resulting in two kinds of meaning): denota tion o r description.
77
N O U N S
(a) In ‘denoting’, an entity term construction names, as a particular instance o f a class or as a unique individual, some entity or entities; e.g. re ic g iM e “ This woman” (particular instance), tm c “The truth” (unique/generic entity), z^Z n - ajlI m o n i o n “ Many dem ons” (particular instances). The denotative func tion is also present in all proper nouns 126 and in possessed nouns 138, e.g. MApiA “ M ary,” ptu-T “ My m outh.” (b) In ‘describing’, an entity term construction speaks o f an entity by its quality, oyN o6 “ A big one” ; activity, neTpeq-p-® N O Be “ This sinner” ; relation ship, T e e e o A . z N rn e “The one from above” 302; or selection within a group, n M e z - q r o o y “ The fourth o n e”— but without explicitly naming (denoting) the particular entity to which it refers. (The function of description is also per formed by attributive constructions 96; e.g. . . . m -m c “ True” ; - n o 6 n - . . . “Large.” ) For the am plified descriptive entity term , o f the form n .^ iK iio C I “ The one who is ju st and holy,” cf. 100.
N -iP ie o c
According to these two functions, an article or specifier can express two alter native kinds o f meaning in relation to its noun; (i) ‘one specimen (the one, two, many, etc.) belonging to the lexical class o f . . . ’ (denotation); and (ii) ‘one specimen (the one, two, many, etc.) having the quality o f the lexical class o f . . . ’ (description). Lexemes in the class o f genderless common noun 113 can only describe: n o N H p o c ‘wicked’, ‘last’, upHM ‘small, few ’. Those in the class of gen dered common noun 104 can both denote and describe: oypcuM e ‘a person’/ ‘a hum an entity, human’ ; o y o y o e iN ‘a lam p’/ ‘a luminous entity, lum i nous’; o y p p o ‘a king’/ ‘a royal entity, royal’. Cf. table 8. TABLE 8 D i s t r i b u t i o n o f P o s s i b l e S e m a n t i c F u n c t io n s o f t h e N o u n a s E N T r r v T e r m
N oun
as
„ E ntity T erm
Genderless common noun Gendered common noun Proper noun Possessed noun
D enotative F unction
D escrifiive F unction
always X
always always'
'Meaning usually merges with another element in a compound verb or preposilion
Ambiguity o f the gendered common noun. The distinction between denotation and description in the gendered common noun (table 8) is ambiguous since, with one exception, it is not signalled by the form of actualization. Rather, the reader or listener interprets in accordance with signals in the larger textual
78
C O M M O N
N O U N S
argument, sentence pattern, selection of article, semantic character of the noun lexeme, and other contextual factors. How ever, in a def. sing, article phrase i f the article ti - I t - disagrees with the g ram m at ical gender 105 f / the noun lexeme, this disagreem ent unambiguously signals a descrip tive entity term. E.g. Me fern, noun ( t m e “ T ru th ” )
n - M 6 (6) 6XT]0iv6g “ T h e True, The entity o f masc. grammatical gender having the quality o f Me “ (Rev | 9 ; 11, | John 5:20); descriptive entity term nK 6 e masc. noun ( n n ^ 6 e “ The rag” ) T - n ^ 6 e “The tattered one (i.e.
u j t h n ‘garm ent’ fem.). The entity o f fem. gram m at ical gender having the quality of n ^ 6 e “ (Luke 5:36); descriptive entity term
ujnHpe fem. noun (Teujnnpe “ The wonder. The am azem ent” ) n e - u jn H p e “ The terrible one. The entity o f masc. gramm atical gender having the quality o f y jn H p e “ (Dan 9 :4); descriptive entity term Such constructions are rare. Overall, gendered com m on nouns are usually denotative except w hen they have the role o f predicate in the nom ina\ sentence 292, w here descrip tive function often occurs, typically formed with o y - or j e n - ; e.g. zeN M e n e “ They are true. They are ones having the quality o f M e.”
G R E E K SU B S T A N T IV E S A N D A D JE C T IV E S IN C O P T IC
94 Greek substantives occur in Greco-Coptic as gendered common nouns (A rreA.OC masc. ‘angel’) and Greek adjectives, as genderless common nouns (jln o m o c ‘lawless person’).
D E G R EES OF D E S C R IP T IV E M EA N IN G (C O M PA R A TIV E, S U P E R L A T IV E )
95 Degrees o f descriptive meaning (cf. English comparative and superlative) are expressed by addition of a preposition of inclusion or exclusion, or by some other element of the context. E.g. nK oyi e p o - q nN o6 e p o - q n e Matt 11:11 “ He who is least is greater than he” (The small one compared to him is the great one compared to him ); ney N o fi Acts 8 :10 “The greatest o f them ” ; Aop TAP n e n N o 6 I n N o y s n e I J C N - n e p n e n e eT ® -T B B o i ^ - n N o y B Matt 23:17 “ For which is greater, the gold or the temple that makes the gold sacred? ”
A T T R IB U T IV E C O N S T R U C T IO N S OF THE C O M M O N N O U N
96 Sitrvey o f patterns. Only coiiinion nouns (gendered and genderless) can be actualized as an aItributi^e tenn. Attributive lenns perfonn tlie funciioii of description 93(b). Common nouns occur in attributive’ position in one or more o f the follow ing constructions, accorxling to their conipaiibilii)
NOUNS
N ote that an attributive can only m odify a gendered com m on noun (or its equivalent, the com m onized proper noun 136). In StiYoung No.28 n : 13-22 the indef. pronouns g o tN e and je N K o o Y e , in anaphoric parallel to geN pajne, are m odified by an attributive noun: geNpcuMe M-npo<})HTHC g o l n e N -in o C T O A o c g e N K o o y e N -icplT H c m -m 6 M -n ip e e N o c gen-
K ooye N-NiHT N-peq--)- golNe
S - n e Y c to c i y - o y i g - o y N c i-
n j c o e i c “ Som e who were [attributive expressing occupation 99J prophets, some who Were apostles, others who were jusi judges, some w ho were virgins, others who were generous com passionate people— som e, al leasi, took up their cross and followed the Lord.”
(a) M ain patterns (w here n - stands fo r any article except . . . includes alt.
m-
nim ;
and n -
21 and vars. 22)
(1) n - G endered C om m on N oun n - Attrihutive Noun 99 n o e iK M-M€ “ The true bread ” (2) n - G endered C om m on N oun Attributive Noun 101 T cy eep e ojhm “ The little girl”
(3) n - Attributive Noun n - G endered C om m on N oun 102 t n o 6 n - 6 om “ The great p o w er” ib)
W hen the article is . . . nim , these construclions have the follow ing alternant forms: (1) G endered Com mon Noun nim n - Attrihutive Noun n N i NIM N -iK A e ip T o N “ All the unclean spirits” (2) G endered Com m on N oun Attributive Noun nim q^H pe q^HM nim “ All the male children” (3) Attributive Noun nim n - G endered Com mon Noun n o N H p o c NIM N -po)M e “ Every vile person”
TABLE 9 C o M P A T iB iL rrY OF C o m m o n N o u n s
wrrn
th e
T h r e e A t t r i b u t i v e C o n s t r u c t io n s
C ompatibility according to T ype o f A ttributive C onstruction C lass of C ommon N oun
(1)
(2)
(3)
Mediated 99
Unmediaied
Inverled
101
102
O nly K o y i
All^
G endered
All
G enderless
A ll’
n o 6,
qpHM
'Excep\ cyHM and composites based on invariable n e r - 110. The syniax of composites based on n i - H I is obscure. ^E.xcept iC, Bppe, kame, and c i i e 114(c)
80
COMMON
NOUNS
As lable 9 displays, only genderless common nouns (e.g. noNHpoc ‘w icked’) occur in more than one construction, e.g. n o N H p o c ‘wicked’ occurs in both ( l) a n d ( 3 ) . 97
One anributive term elaborating another i. by coordination or disjunction, e.g. NegBH ye N-.a.iK3iioN iy o J n - t b b o g i - w e S h ill 34; 17 “ D eeds that are just and pure and true"; o y N o 6 h 2 e n n o 6 M-MHcTHpioN ShAmcl I 281:9 “ One or more great mysteries” ; 2 eN N o 6 N -p c u n e ON N6 g i - N o 6 N -c g iM e ShAmel I 6 5 :11-12 “They are also adult men and adult wom en” ii. by expansion, e.g. ^ . i i y N-gtUB n - n o b e m -m o y Sh lll 156:19 “Any m ortally sinful deed” ; neVpne m-moynp n-6ij(. Mark 14:58 “This lemple that is made with hands" (This hartd made temple) iii. by reiteration (cf. 62), e.g. N K oA iC ic m - m in e m in e ShChass 183:45-47 “The diverse punishments” (The punishments o f one kind after another)
98 Specific negation o f the attributive noun. The grammatical relationship of ihe attributive, as an individual component o f the text, can be negatived by the enclitic which usually comes after the target of negation. E.g. t n o 6 N-CKHNH €T®-JCHK 6BOA M -M oyNr N-6iJC AN CTe-nAT n e N -T A -n e e iccuNT 21.N Heb 9:11 Ti'i^ netf^ovo^ Kat TeXeioTepa? aKiivfi^ oi) xeipoTton'iTOU, toOt’ ecTTiv oi> tautii? KTiaeco^ “The greater and more perfect tent, not made with hands, that is, not of this creation.” The three attributive constructions o f the common noun 99 P a tte rn 1: th e m ed iated a ttrib u tiv e con stru ctio n Below, n - stands for any article e x c e p t. . .
n im .
n - Gendered Common Noun n - Attributive Noun n o e iK M-ME “The true bread” (John 6:32) TecKHNH M-MC “Thc tme tent” (Heb 8:2) oyptuM e N -A iK A inc “ A righteous m an” (Mark 6:20) Attribulives in this construction include: all gendered common nouns; and all genderless common nouns (except 0 )h h ‘small’). Cf. table 9, above.
The most frequent attributive constm ction of the noun. The attributive noun ( m €, AiKAioc) is mediated by the morph n - 203 and follows the term that it modifies. Two bound groups are formed, which can be separated by an autonomous morph such as Ae. This is the only construction in which a gendered common noun can be actu alized as an attributive. (Such atiribuiives usually require an adjeclive transla tion in English: e.g. the lexeme ppo ‘king’ actualized as an attributive n - ppo means “ royal" poatXiKo; .Acts 12:21.^ For n - o ^ c i't. cf. I5S.
N O U N S
W hen the article is .. . nim , the pattern assumes the following form; Gendered Common Noun
nim
n
-
Attributive Noun
ecjDB NIM N-3iraceoN “ Every good w ork” (2 Cor 9:8) Further exam ples of gendered common nouns ariiialized as anrihutive nouns: pcuMe ‘human being’, N -p c u n e 1 C o r2 ; 13 “H um an" (dtvBpconivq); c o jm a ‘body’, n - c c u m jl Luke 3 :2 2 “B odily" (otonatiKoq); k a k g ‘darkness’, N-KA.Ke Luke 11:36 ''D ark" (CTKOTEtvoq); u jN e ‘stone’, N -c u N e John 2:6 “Sum e [adjective]” (XiOivoc;); o y o e iN ‘lig h t’, N - o y o e iN M att 17:5 “B right" ((poxetvoq); qpnH pe ‘amazem ent’. N-nHpe 1 Pet 2 :9 “M arvelous" (O aunaotoq); 6 o a ‘falsehood’. n - 6 o a 2 Pet 2 :3 “False" inXamoq)-, M N T -pM rj-2 HT ‘intelligence’, m - m n t - ^ n - 2 h t ShChass 10 4 :3 -4 ''Intelligent": m n t - ^ h k c ‘poverty’, M -M N T -2 HKe ShIV 162:20 “Cheap, poor"; N iq e N T e -n N o y T e “ Breath of G o d ,” i5 -N iq e N T e -n N o y T e 2 Tim 3 :1 6 "Inspired by G od" (6e6 nveu0 T0 (;); X N o y q ‘to b u m ’, Bpep ‘to boil’, o y n A y rH N -X N oycj N -B p e p Shlll 50:5 “ A burning, boiling plague” ; n i e e (jreiOeiv) ‘to persuade’, oynAp^LjUKTMA M -n ie e S hlll 4 2 :8 “ A convincing exam ple.” Exam ples with genderless com m on nouns: ^ e N p c u n e M -n o N H p o c ShlV 206:12 “ W icked people” ; 2 eNCBUJ n -u ;m m o H eb 13:9 “Strange teachings” ; t a i a s h k h N -B p p e Matt 26:28 “ The new covenant” ; d) T re n e A N-A T-N A 2T e Mark 9:19 "O faithless generation” ; o y p cu M e p -p e q -p -® N O B e Luke 5:8 “ A sinful m an ” ; n n o y M -M €2 -C N 2Ly Rev 2:11 “T he second death” T h e mediated attributive also expresses occupation, type, a n d citizenship. E.g. (o )y pcoMe N -e q p u jT M att 13:45 “ A m erchant (A person who is a m erchant)” ; ^ 2^ ^ N -M N o re Proclus o f Constantinople, Homily on St. John Bapti.st (Rossi I 3 1 18[561 6 .1 -2 ) “ The doorkeeper (The servant girl who is the doorkeeper)” ; o y pcuM e N—oyH H B Lev 21:9 “ A m an w ho is a priest” ; n t o k n e nAocc (i.e. n A X o e ic ) N—CON Life and Martyrdom o f Eustathius, Theopista, and T heir Children (BM ar 121:1) “ You are my lord brother” (noble title o f respect for elder brother); ic nN A X tupA ioc ni.T e N T -A q - c y c u n e n —o y p c u n e M -npo<})H TH C N-A yNATOC 2M “ 4 > ^ b N M -nu;i.Jce Luke 24:19 “ Jesus o f Nazareth, w ho became a man who was a prophet, mighty in deed and w ord” (fiyevcto dvrjp 7rpo(pfiTr|<; 5vvaxbq £pytp Kai Xoyco); o y pCUMe N-e6cUCy N - C io y p Fi-JiLyNACTHC N T €-K A N A i.K H Tppcu N -N e 6 o o < i) Acts 8:27 “A m an w ho was an Ethiopian, a eunuch, and a minister o f Candace the queen o f the E thiopians.” At a level of analysis broader than the bound group, in the spoken language the m odi fied and the attributive seem to have formed a single unit (colon) under one prim ary stress accent. T he cohesiveness of such units sometimes appears to b e reflected in writ ten expression, by loss of vowel (or substitution o f e) in the m odified, e.g. u ;p N -o y c u T = c y n p e N -o y cu T “ Only son.” N ot to b e confused with Pattern 1 is the gendered common noun denoting a container o r quantity am plified by the partitive preposition i J - , mmo » ‘o f 203: o y A n o T M-®Mooy M a rt Q :-'. A cup of -.vater": o y A re \H _i.e T i-^pip e —HA O jcu-oy Matt 8 :3 0 “ A herd 7 :’ “ 1“ ;- '- .." x " Acts I.-iO “Many other vvcrds”
'jrxtior 131
COMMON
NOUNS
D escriptive Entity Term 1(Aycu) n — Common Noun n A iK A io c I Aycu N-^LfAeOC N -2 0 p ^ -® 2 H T “T he one who is just I and holy and patient” (ShGue 166.-10) Further exam ple: n c y A N -^ T H -q N -^ A p ty -^ ^ H T e T e -N a .ty e -n € < (N J i S hill 1 23:13-14 “T he One W ho is compassionate and patient and W hose m crcy is great”
101 P a tte rn 2: the u n m e d ia te d a ttrib u tiv e construction Below , n - stands for any article except . . .
n i m.
n - Gendered Common Noun ru p eep e
o^hm
Attributive Noun
“ T he little girl” (M att 9 :2 4 )
Attributives occurring in this construction include only: the genderless conrmon nouns Koy* ‘sm a ir, n o 6 ‘large’, a n d cyHM ‘sm all’. T his is the usual construction o f c^hm ; but for Koyi and n o 6 it is unusual and presumably expresses a special nuance. Cf. table 9, p. 80.
The attributive noun (o)hm) is not mediated by the morph n - and is autonomous 28; it follows the term that it modifies. E.g. ^eNopHpe Koyi Mark 10:13 “(Some) little children” ; NexacpicMai n o 6 1 C or 12:31 “ The greatspiritual gifts.” (Two bound groups are formed, which can be separated by an autonomous morph such as A e; e.g. nqpHpe A e qpHM Aq-i.y5aiN e Luke 1:80 “ And the child grew .” ) W hen the article is . . . nim , the pattern assumes the following form (with nim after the unmediated attributive noun): Gendered Common Noun qpHpe qpHM
nim
Attributive Noun n i m
“ A ll the m ale c h ild re n ” (M att 2 : 16)
102 P a tte rn 3: the in v e rte d attrib u tiv e co n stru ction Below, n - stands fo r any article except . . .
nim.
n - Attributive Genderless Noun n - Gendered Com m on Noun n N o 6 N - N o y r e “The great G o d ” (Titus 2:13) n - 6 o m “ The great pow er” (Acts 8:10)
tn o 6
The framework o f this pattern is like Pattern 1 ( n - . . . n - . . . ) 99, but the posi tions o f attributive and modified term are reversed, so that the attributive com es first. Compared to Pattern 1, this inversion expresses rhetorical affect or a special nuance in the attributive: e.g. oyrroN h p o c tJ-pcu Me “ A vile per son” (Pattern 3, affective) versus oypcuM e m -n o w h p o c “ A w icked person” (Pattern 1, normal); cf. 116. The article expresses the gender o f the gendered common noun that it actual izes ( r r - .. . N o y r e , t - . . . 6 o m ), despite being separated from it. Only gen derless common nouns 113 and com posite nouns based on invariable n e r -
83
NOUNS
110 occur as attributive term in Pattern 3. E.g. 2 eNco«J>oc N-rpiM M ATeYC Matt 23:34 “ W ise scribes” ; x e iA eH T N -c g iM e ShAmel I 76:12 “This foolish w om an” ; ®no6 N-
W hen the article is enclitic . . .
nim ,
the pattern assumes the following form:
Attributive Genderless Noun nim i5- Gendered Common Noun nONHpoc NiM N -pojM e “Every vile person’’ (ShRossi II 3 75fo.-34-c. l) (Similarly with the enclitic qpHM: zeNKOyi tyHM M -neT -N A N oy-tJ John the Archimandrite, Exegesis [Canon] [Vienna K 9028ra. 28-fc. 2; cf. Layt. 851 “ A few trivial good deeds.” ) M O D IF IC A T IO N OF THE EN T ITY TERM C O N ST R U C T T O N
103
M odification (descriptive expansion) o f the entity ten n construclion 92(a) has the fol lowing forms: (a) an attributive construction o f the noun 96; (b) a following adverbial modifier 19S(ii) (e.g. o y i r r e ; \ o c e B o ;\ g N -T n e S h lll 194:22 “ An angel from heav e n ” ; o y ^ i J c e e - ^ J t o o - q N i-K Luke 7 :40 “ Som ething to say to you” ; n o y o e n y n e e - * T p e N -K A -p a )-N S h lll 224:19 “ Is it lime for us to keep silent?” ; ncuN? < y i- e N e g M ark 10:17 “ Eternal life. Living forever” ; r e x H p i .^ e N i n e 1 Tim 5:5 “ She who is really a w idow” ); (c) a following phrase introduced by J t e - under certain conditions 129(b) (e.g. oYnpoHTic J c e - i N n i Luke 2:36 (M organ M569) “A prophetess, A nna” ); (d) a following attributive clause 404, 408; {e) other types of clausal expansion 146 (e.g. o y K i i p o c N T e-n N O B e 6 h - ^ 6 o m egpAi eJCN -N -e-r*oy H 2 2 M -neiM A ShIV 121:22-23 “ A tim e when sin will prevail over those living in this p lacc” ); (f) an inflected m odifier 152 before o r after the entity term consiructioii (e.g. n c i T i N i c g c u cu -q Luke 11:18 “ Satan also” ); ^g) another entity term in linkage, restrictive expansion, or apposition 144. Several m odifiers, including those o f different kinds, can m odify the same entity term construction, wiih o r without linkage 145. E.g. (o )y p a )M e N -iO Y .^ il M-Miroc fi-npo
84
G E N D E R E D
C O M M O N
N O U N S
o Y p tU M e e - n e q p i N n e To )c h <|) e - Y B O Y ^ e Y T H c n e p - p o ) M e N - i r ^ e o c N - A i K i i o c n iV e - N - q - q i x n N M - n e Y u ; o J c N e i Y ^ u n e Y 2 0 ) B e - Y 6 B O ; \ n e 2N-ipiMAeJiiJi TnoA ic N -Io Y -iil n i l e - N e q - 6 c u ( y T e b o a . gHT-c N - T M N T - e p o M - n N O Y T e L uke 2 3 :5 0 -5 2 “ A m an nam ed Joseph, who was a m em ber o f the council, a good and righteous man, who had not consented to their purpose and deed, from the Jew ish tow n o f A rim athea, who was looking for the kingdom o f G o d ”
G EN D ERED COM M ON NOUNS 104 'Gendered common nou n s’ are a veiy large cJass of nouns, which have the semantic functions o f denotation and description 93. They occur as both enti ty term s 141 noY oeiN “ The light,” r n e “ T ruth,” oYM NT-ppo “ A kingdom ,” 2eNcuNe “ Slones,” O Y P to M e “ A person,” ® n p o < } )H T H c “ Prophets,” n n e “ The true one” (S^tietvo? (Rev 19:11) and attributive terms (only in the mediated attributive construction 99) “ B rig h t,” N -p p o “ R oyal,” N-pcuM e “ Human (adjective)”
N - o y o e iN
N -tu N e
“ Stone (ad jec tiv e),”
They can occur as target o f modification in all attributive constructions o f the noun 96.
G R A M M A TIC A L G E N D ER
05 (a) Associated gender. Nouns in this class have an associated (inherent) gram matical gender 46, either masc. or fem.; for those denoting an entity with bio logical sex, gender coincides with sex. A noun’s gender is expressed not by its form (rare exceptions, 107), but rather by the articles (n /r), pronouns (OYA/oyei, nAT/TAi), personal morphs (q/c), and gendered cardinal numbers (cNAv/cNTe), whose selection is motivated by it within the text; cf. 48, 49. Gender is motivated only when the gendered noun has the semantic function of denotation 93. (b) Greek nouns of masc. and fem. gender have these same genders in GrecoCoptic; Greek neuters are masc. in Greco-Coptic. E.g. 6 ayyzXoc; niirreA O c “The angel” ; fi n6Xi<; t h o a i c “ The city” ; to nveO^a n e n N e y M A or n e m i A “The spirit.” (c) The infinitive as acwrless verbal noun is masculine. Potentially, all infinitives 160 can occur as a masc. com mon noun (nomen actionis), denoting either (i) a type o f action, event, or process n e q jc n o Luke 1:14 “ His birth; or (ii) the result or object o f action, etc. geNocno Prov 23:18 “ O ffspring.” Transitive
85
N O U N S
When the article is . . .
n im
,
the pattern assumes the following form:
Gendered Common Noun 2 0 )B NIM N -A T A e o N
n im
tJ- Attributive Noun
“ Every good work” ( 2 Cor 9 : 8 )
Further exam ples o f gendered common nouns actualized as atlrihulive nouns: pcuM® ‘hum anbeing’, N-pcuM® 1 C o r 2 :\3 “H um an'' (dvOpuJiivti); c c u M i‘body’, n -c c u m a Luke 3 :22 “B odily" (aunaTiKoq); K iK e ‘darkness’, N -K iK e Luke 11:36 “D ark" (oKOTEivoq); cuNe ‘stone’, n -c u n ® John 2 :6 “Stone (adjective]” (?aOiv6q); o y o e m ‘light’, N - o y o e iN Matt 17:5 “B right" (ipuTEivoq); u j n n p e ‘am azem ent’, N - u jn H p e 1 Pet 2 :9 “M arvelous” (GaonaoToc): 6 o \ ‘falsehood’. n - 6 oa . 2 Pet 2:3 “F alse" (jiA^oTOq); M N T-PM N-2 HT ‘intelligence’, m - m n t - p m n - 2 HT ShChass 104:3-4 “Intelligent"-, m n t - z h k e ‘poverty’, m - m n t - 2 HK€ ShlV 162:20 “Cheap, poor"-, N iq e N T e -n N o y T e “ Breath o f G od,” N -N iq e N r e - n N o y T e 2 Tim 3:16 “Inspired by G od" (OEOJivEixjtog); JCNoyq ‘to b urn’, B psp ‘to boil", o y n x y P H N-JCNoycj N -B p e p S hlll 50:5 “ A burning, boiling plague” ; n i e e (jieiGeiv) ‘to persuade', oynipjL A iK P M i M - n i e e S h lll 4 2:8 “ A convincing exam ple." Exam ples with genderless common nouns: 2 ENpcuMe M -n o N H p o c ShlV 206:12 “W icked people"; 2 eNCBcu N -ujM M o Heb 13:9 “Strange teachings” ; T A iieH K H N -B p p e M att 26:28 "T he new covenant” ; u) T reN eA N-A T-N A 2T e M ark 9 :19 “O faithless generation"; oypcuM e p -p e q -p -® N O B e Luke 5 :8 “ A sinfni m an "; n M o y M -M e2-c N A y Rev 2:11 "T he second death” The m ediated attributive also expresses occupation, type, and cilizenship. E.g. (o )y pcuMe N -e u jc u T Mait 13:45 “ A m erchant (A person who is a m erchant)” ; N-M N O Te Proclus o f Con.stantinople, Homily on Si. John Baptist (Rossi 1 3 118[,56] b : \ - 2 ) “ The doorkeeper (The servant girl who is the doorkeeper)” ; oypcuM e N -oyH H B Lev 21:9 “ A m an who is a priest” ; n t o k n e nAJcc (i.e. n A Jco e ic) N -c o N Life and Martyrdom o f Eustathius, Theopisia, and Their Children (BM ar 121:1) “ You are m y lord brother” (noble title o f respect for elder brother); ic nNAEcupAioc nA'f e N T - A q - u jc u n e N - o y p c u M e M-npo«J>HTHC N -A yN A T O c 2 M-<}>tuB N M -nujA Jce Luke 24:19 “ Jesus o f Nazareth, who became a m an who was a prophet, mighty in deed and w ord” (^yeveto dvi’ip Jipoipiitti? SuvaToq Epytp Kai Xo-ywY, o y pcuMe N - e 6 cuuj N - c i o y p N-AyNACTHC NTe-KANAAKH Tppcu N -N e 6 o o u j Acts 8:27 “ A m an who was an Ethiopian, a eunuch, and a m inister of Candace the queen of the Ethiopians.” At a level o f analysis broader than the bound group, in the spoken language the m odi fied and the attributive seem to have formed a single unit (colon) under one primar>' stress accent. The cohesiveness o f such units som etim es appears to be reflected in writ ten expression, by loss o f vowel (or substitution of e ) in the m odified, e.g. a ip N -o y c u T = u jH p e N -o y c u T “ Only son.” Not to be confused with Pattern 1 i.s the gendered comm on noun denoting a container or quantity amplified by the partitive preposition N -, m m o = ‘o f 203: o y A n o T M-®Mooy M ark 9:41 “ A cup o f w ater” ; oyA reA H A e N-®pi p e - N A u jc u -o y M att 8 :30 “ A herd o f m any sw in e” ; z eN K en H H U je N-*ujA Jce A cts 2 :4 0 "M any other w o rd s” (Additional m ultitudes o f words).
100
Am plification o f a descriptive entity term by a m ediated atiributive construction (“The one who is . . . and who is . . . ” ) has the follow ing form; linkage by a conjunction 231 such as Aycu is optional.
82
C O M M O N
N O U N S
Descriptive Entity Term I
n - Com m on Noun
n A iK iio c I N - i r i e o c N - 2 o p ^ - ® 2 HT “ The one who is just I and holy and patient" (ShGue 16fc: 10) Further exam ple: n < y i N - 2 T H -q N - 2 ip u j- ® 2 HT e r e - N A u j e - n e q N i S h lll 123:13-14 “The One W ho is compassionate and patient and W hose m ercy is great”
101 P a tte rn 2: th e u n m ed iated a ttrib u tiv e con struction B elow , n - stands for any article e x c e p t. . . n -
ni m.
G endered Common Noun
Attributive Noun
T cy eep e c^ hm “ The little g irl” (Matt 9:24) A ttributives occurring in this construction include only: the genderless com m on nouns K oyi ‘sm all’, n o 6 ‘large’, and ujhm ‘sm all’. This is the usual construction of u jh m : but for K oyi and n o 6 it is unusual and presum ably expresses a special nuance. Cf. table 9, p. 80.
The attributive noun (u^hm) is not mediated by the morph n - and is autonomous 28; it follows the term that it modifies. E.g. eew cyH pe KoyT Mark 10:13 “ (Some) little children” ; n e x a p ic m a n o 6 1 C or 12:31 “ The great spiritual gifts.” (Two bound groups are formed, which can be separated by an autonomous m orph such as a s ; e.g. n cy n p e a s u^hm Luke 1:80 “ And the child grew .”) W hen the article is . . . n im , the pattern assumes the following form (with nim after the unmediated attributive noun): Gendered Common Noun
Attributive Noun nim
cyHpe cyHM nim “ All the male children” (Matt 2:16) 102 P a tte rn 3 : th e in v erted a ttrib u tiv e constru ction Below , n - stands for any article e x c e p t. . . n-
nim .
Attributive Genderless Noun n - Gendered Common Noun
n N o 6 N - N o y r e “The great G od” (Titus 2:13) t n o 6 n -6 o m “The great pow er” (Acts 8:10)
The framework of this pattern is like Pattern 1 ( n - . . . tJ- . . . ) 99, but the posi tions of attributive and modified term are reversed, so that the attributive comes first. Compared to Pattern 1, this inversion expresses rhetorical affect o ra special nuance in the attributive: e.g. o y n o N H p o c N-pcoMe “ A vile per son” (Pattern 3, affective) versus oypcoM e M - n o N H p o c “ A wicked person” (Pattern 1, normal); cf. 116. The article expresses the gender of the gendered common noun that it actual izes ( n - . . . N o y r e , r - . . . 6om), despite being separated from it. Only gen derless common nouns 113 and composite nouns based on invariable n e r -
83
N O U N S
infinitival nouns occur in all three states and also with ingressive meaning; they are non-durative 328. Examples: neTN-t- M att 6:1 “ Your charity” ; n e i e e o A M - n m A ?N -K H M e Ps 113(114):! “ The going forth o f Israel from Egypt” ; n e 'f n i e e Gal 5 :8 “T his persua sion” (jtciOeiv, but the Greek original has fj neianovii); o Y -x n e -^ A ? Prov 8:18 “ Abundant possessions (Acquisition o f m any things)” ; o k o o c - t M att 26:12 “ My burial (T he burying-M e)” ; e-N A N O Y —o y Matt 7:11 “ Good g ifts ” ; AJCN-^icpMpM 2 i-®MOKMeK Phil 2 :1 4 “ W ithout grumbling or questioning.” The infinitive can occur in an attributive construction of the noun 99: oyTiAYrH N -X N o y q N-BpBp S h lll 50:5 “A boiling hot plague” ( c f e p e p ‘to boil’).
The lexical content of the infinitive as verbal noun can be negatived by the negator t m - ‘not’ 251. The combination t m - Infinitive enters into article phrases with n - and with the zero article (after e - ) : nTM-'t'-®6cuNT Ae NA-q ShAmel II 233:13 “ Not making him angry” ; n T M -o n -ic ApophPat 105 (C haine 2 5 :2 = Z 2 9 8 :7 ) “N ot to think highly o f o n e se lf” ; N A N o y - ® T M —o y e M - ^ A q o Y - A . e e — ®*t m — ce-^H pfr Rom 14:21 “ It is right not to eat meat o r drink w ine.” 106
Anomalies. A small num ber of nouns can, while denoting, m otivate both masc. and fem. gender, but otherwise have the characteristics of the gendered com m on noun, e.g. i. (masc., fem.) ‘manservant, m aidservant’, jc o e i c (m asc., fem.) ‘lord, lady’, 2 p (y ip e (masc., fem.) ‘young man, young w om an’ ii. some species names of animals, which are constructed as both masc. and fem . in order to distinguish the biological sexes: KAAcunoY (masc., fem .) ‘small dog’, BAAMne (masc.. fem .) ‘go at’. Som e other species names form ally distinguish the male and the female, 107. Such nouns are also formally marked for gender b y suffixation o f ( n - ) 2o o y t ‘m ale’ and ( N - ) c 2 iMe ‘fem ale’: oY BA AM n-^ooYT, oYBAAMne N - c 2 iMe Lev 4 :2 3 , 28 (Morgan M 566 4v 6.-23-24, 5 r a.-2 5 -2 6 ; Dep. 1) “ He-goat, she-goat” ; n a 2 M2AA N -^ o o y T N -c ^ iM c Acts 2:18 “ My m enservants and my m aidser vants.”
107 Special fo rm a l marking fo r gender. A few nouns (fewer than twenty) occur in formally related gender pairs distinguishing male and female biological sex, e.g. ppo/ppcu ‘king, queen’. Cf. 106(11). Formation, (a) Fem. distinguished by final e accompanied by alteration or doubling of an internal vowel: MNOYT/M No(o)Te ‘m ale/female doorkeeper’, co N /ccu N e ‘brother, sister’, upBHp/u^Beepe ‘m ale/female friend’, u ^H p e/u ^e e p e ‘son, daughter’; (b) fem. distinguished by final long vowel: BAAe/BAAH ‘blind m an/w om an’, ‘m ale/fem ale serpent’.
NUMBER
108 (a) Collective nouns are those which can occur in a sing, entity term construction to denote a collection of individuals ( h m h H i y e “The crow d”) and can receive
86
G E N D E R E D
C O M M O N
N O U N S
cross-reference in the plural; cf. also 66(b). E.g. oyMMHupe ey-M O K j N-®cycjL>Ne Mark 1 ;34 “ A crowd who were afflicted with illnesses” ; t h o a ic T H p -c AY“ CcuoY2 Acts 13:44 “ As for the whole city, they gathered” ; nKec e e n e A y M o y Rev 19:21 “ As for the rest, they died.” (b) Form al marking f o r individual concrete plural. The main form of any com mon noun can be constructed with the plural articles: Tjpcune “ The people,” NCON “ The brothers.” However, about one hundred nouns also have a dis tinctly plural form that is sometimes used (for some, alm ost persistently used) when th e article phrase is plural; e.g. n c c jc n h y Luke 8:19 “ H is brothers” ; 2€N2ioM e M ark 15:40 “ W omen.” . Selection of this plural form seems to express the category of individual concrete plurality. If this is so, then N e CNHY (the plural form) would mean “The brothers” as a set o f individuals, whereas n c o n (the main form) “ Brothers, the brothers” would not formally convey (be marked for) this category. (Nouns that have no plural form could not express such a distinction.) The plural form is found almost exclusively in the role of entity term and only very rarely as an attributive. It is extrem ely rare after N e e N-Nr . . . “Like . . . ” or the zero article, and apparently does not occur in the specifier phrase. Formation, (i) Plur. endings containing y o r o y , viz. -A y . - e e y , - H y , - H y e , - e i o o y e , - o o y , - o o y e , —o y i, and - c u o y ; e.g. c o N /c N H y ‘b ro th e r(s)’, M o o y /M o y e io o y e ‘w ater(s)’, T BN H /TBN ooYe ‘anim al(s)’. (ii) Plur. ending - a t e or - o r e ; e.g. e B O T / e s x T e ‘month(s), e ic u r /e io T e ‘father(s)’. (Hi) The broken plural, in which a vowel within the basic form is doubled, som etim es also being replaced by a d if ferent vowel; e.g. OY2 o p /o Y 2 o o p ‘d o g (s )\ u^BHp/u^Beep ‘friend(s)’, 6a?M /6ooM ‘properly (properties)’, (iv) M iscellaneous other plur. form ations entailing alteration, addition, and/or deletion of vowels in the basic form; e.g. *|'Me/TMe ‘village(s)’, T o o y /r o y e iH ‘m ountain(s)’, 2 'M e /2 io M e ‘wife, w ives’, JtNA2/-^Naiy2 ‘forearm (s)’. Some nouns o f C reek origin form a Greco-Coptic plural in - o o y e ; 'j^ y x H /'J'y x o o y e ‘soul(s)’.
D E R IV E D AND C O M P O S IT E FORMS
109 G endered bases. T he following are examples of gendered bases that form comm on nouns; some are extended by the m orph Ti- 203. These bases do not combine freely but rather occur in a limited number o f composite nouns. The gender o f the composite noun is motivated by the base: thus T M N T - p p o “Kingdom, K ingship" is fem. (because based on m n t - fem.). i. MNT-, fem., denotes abstractions. Com bines, rather widely, with com m on nouns, some specifiers, and other nom inal bases. M N T -N o y re ‘divinity’, m n t - n o 6 ‘great ness’, M N T - o y i ‘unity’, M N T - 2 p a ) M A i o c ‘Latin language’, m n t - a . t [ 1 1 9 ] - 6 o m ‘pow erlessness’, m n t - p m i N [ 1 2 0 ] - K H M e ‘Coptic language’. ii. 6 i n - , fem., denotes kinds o f action. Combines w ith some infinitives. 6 i n - o y c u m , 61N-CCU ‘eating, drinking/foodstuff, drink’; 6 iN -Ta.A e-® 6 iJt A cts of the Council o f
87
NOUNS
Ephesus (M iss8 3 8 :8 -9 ) “ L aying on of hands” (action o f ordination). M eaning similar to the inflnitive as verbal noun 105(c). iii. M i - N - , masc., ‘place o f ' Com bines with som e gendered com m on nouns. M i-N -e A .o o A .e ‘vineyard’, M i - N - u j t u n e ‘residence, dw elling place, inonastic cell’, M i-1 5 -u jeA .e eT ‘wedding hall’. iv. Btu—N -, fem., denotes species o f tree or vine. Com bines with some names of fruits. B tu-N -eA .ooA .e ‘grapevine’, B tu - N - jc o e iT 'olive tree.' V. 2i M - or 2 i M - N - , m asc., types o f anisans. Com bines with some nam es o f artisanal m aterials. 2 i M - u j e ‘carpenter’. vi. e i e n - fem., denotes artifacts o f crafts and other occupatioas. Com bines with some names o f artisanal m aterials. eien-NOYO ‘gold work, g ilt’, e i e n - y / e ‘wooden an ifact’. But also e i e n - u j t u T ‘m erchandise’ (based on ujtu T ‘m erchant’). vii. 2 0 Y e - or ^ o y o - , m asc., ‘excess of, excessive, greater . . . ’ Com bines, rather widely, with comm on nouns and other nominal bases. 20Y e-K ipnoc ‘greater har vest’; ‘excessive learning’; n e 20Ye-MNT-pMMi0 “ The immeasurable riches.” viii. UJOY-, m asc. (only?), ‘worthy o f . . . ’ Com bines with som e infinitives (negative
ujoY-Ti?-). ujoY-MepiT-q ( - c , -o y ) “ W orthy o f being loved"; neiujoY T M - T x Y e -n e q p iN 2 M -neiM X ShAmel 1440:10 “ This man who deserves to have his name not uttered here.” ix. O Y N -. O Y N -N - and p e - , m asc., form arithm etical fractions. Com bine with masc. cardinal numbers, 69. noY N -qjO M N T M - n K i2 Rev 8:7 “ A third o f the earth.” X. 6 i - N - , masc., ‘m aker of. dealer in’. Com bines with som e names o f artisanal prod ucts (mostly in non-literary texts) and o f vices. 6 i-N -J C H 6 e ‘seller o f purple goods’, 6 i - M - n e e o o Y ‘evildoer’.
110 Invariable n e r - , masc., ‘one who is . . . foirn.s descriptive nouns of quali ty, describing persons and things. E.g. n n e r - 2ooY “The evil one," 2eN neT-N A N O Y -q “ Good things. Good deeds.” The base n e r - combines with some statives 162, n a n o v = 376 ‘is good’, and ecycye 488 ‘is right, fit ting, necessary’ (e.g. neT-oyj^J^B ‘saint’, n e r - 2 Hn ‘hidden thing, secrecy’, n e T -c y o y e iT ‘empty thing, vanity’, n e r - e c y ty e ‘necessary thing, necessi ty’). Plurals based on n3^noy= have either a formally sing, subject ( n jin o y - ^ ) o r a pi. subject ( n a n o y - o y ) , indifferently; 2 6 N neT -N A N oy-q and also 2eN neT-N A N O Y -oY “ Good things.” Despite its masc. gender the noun based on n e r - has two characteristics of a genderless common noun: as an attributive it can occur (indeed, usually occurs) in the inverted attributive construction 102; its meaning is only descriptive (never denotative) 93.
I
Invariable n e r - must be carefully distinguished from the articulated attributive clause construction 4 H consisting o f (i) the simple def. article ( n - , T - , N -) as antecedent, expanding (ii) any relative converter (er®-, e r e p e - , e r= , e r e - , £NT-, e-), and (iii) any type o f sentence pattern or predicate, affirm ative or negative, that is com patible with rel ative conversion. Before an articulated attributive n-C T *- (etc.), no article can occur since an article is already present (the plural o f n-eT® - is N -e r * - , while the def. plural
88
G E N F ) E R E F )
C O M M O N
N O U N S
of com posites based on invariable n e r - is M n e r - ) . TTius an isolated form ation such as n e ro Y iJ^ B has tw o inteqjretations: either (i) n -eT ® -O Y iiB (articulated attributive construction) “The holy one. The one who is holy. H e w ho (or That which) is holy, W hoever is holy"; or alternatively (ii) * n e T - o y i i B (zero article + com posite formed by invariable n e r - ) “ Saint(s).” The articulated attributive (n -e -r* -) is m uch m ore com m on than com posites based on invariable n e r - . E xam ples: o y n e T - o Y i i B r e S h lll 57:26 “ She is a saint” ; ^ e N n e r - u j o Y e i T Shlll 41:11 “ Vain things” ; N e r n e T - u j o v e i T A cts 14:15 "T hese vain things” : e i T e * i r i eoN e iT e * n e e o o Y 2 C o r 5 :1 0 “ G ood o r e v il” ; f^ -n e eo o y N - N e K n e T - o y i i B A cts 9 :1 3 “ He has done m uch evil to thy saints” ; n e K e i t u r £T®-2 M - n n e e H n M att 6 :6 fiv Kpunxm “ Y our F ather who is in secret” ; N e c K e n e e n n T H p -o y S h lll 57:21 “ All her o ther hidden aspects"; N - e N T - i y - ^ 'p e N -M neT -N X .N O Y -t) (textual vai. N -^eN n eT -N X N O 'y -O Y ) John 5 .29 “ T hose who have done good (good things)"; n e N n e r - O Y i i B N - e itu T eT*-TiiHO Y K i T i CMOT NiM i n i - e e o A t u c i o c Theodosius o f A lexandria, On St. M ichael Archangel, title (BM is 3 2 1 :1 -3 ) “ O ur holy and in all ways glorious father Apa T heodosius” ; ^eN K oyi M - n e T -N iN O Y - o y e - i * - i i - y S h lll 206:21 “ Som e trivial good deeds that you (fem , sing.) have done” ; ic e n e T - N i N o y - t j ShChass 88 :1 6 -1 7 “ Any other good d eed” ; o y n e r - e u j u j e n e e-*ujA.HA iJCN-*o)JCN Athanasius, Life o f St. Anthony 3 (Garitte 6 :4 -5 ) “ It is fitting to pray constantly” ; o y n e r - e u j a j e iN n e N T - i f - i i - q ShChass 4 3 :6 -8 “ W hat I did was not a n ecessity"; x w x 2 N - o y n e T - e u j u j e N T - i I - u ; n - N i T I N -e T * -M M iy r i p N e y - e r K p i r e y e M M iy n e 2ln o k e - N e i - u j o o n jN - o y s tu A . eBOA. ShP I3(y88r fc.-11-17 “ But I suffered this out of necessity; for they used to abstain, whereas I used to live in dissolution” A s predicate in a nom inal sentence, these com posite nouns predicate identification with an entity term o f quality ( o y n e x - u j o y e i T r e ShA m el II 436:5 “ It is a vain thing. It is fu tile") and are nearly synonym ous with predicating the quality itself in a durative sentence ( c e - u j o y e iT 1 C or 3 :20 “ They are fu tile” ).
111 Invariable n j i - forms a composite common noun nATAiAKONiA ‘one who belongs to the AtJiKoNiA (service division of a m onastery)’. Its syntax is uncertain. E.g. o Y n A T A iA K O N iA ShIV 4 6 :9 “ One who works in the a i a k o NiA .similarly oypcuM e ^N-nnjiTAtJiKONiJi ShIV 45:3 “ A person among those who work in the A.tj.KoNij..” 112 Composites form ed with a genderless ajfix. W hen affixed to a gendered morph, the following have no effect upon its usual associated gender; i. The genderless prefix cy ep -, var. cyeH p- ‘fellow . . . , co- . . . Greek oi)v- (cf. cyBHp/cyBeepe ‘male/female friend’); e.g. na^tyBp-MaiToT Phil 2:25 “ My fellow soldier” ( mato T is masc.): T oytyB p-cyeA eeT Ruth 1:15 cuvvun
89
N O U N S
ii. The genderless prefix m e ? - forms gendered masc. and fem. ordinalnum ber nouns only when com bining with the following cardinal numbers: numbers from ‘tw o’ to ‘ten’ ; ‘tw enty’; ‘thirty’; and numbers above ten whose last digit is 1, 2, 8, or 9. E.g. m s z - c n jiy ‘second person/thing’ (masc.), M62~cN Te ‘second person/thing’ (fem.). For the other ordinals, cf. 123. Exam ples: nM ee-ujM OYN 2 Pel 2:5 “The eighlh” ; n M e e -C N iy N -Z tuoN Rev 4:7 “The second beasl” ; T M ee-cN Te N-enicTOA.H 2 Pet 3:1 “ The second letter” ; nM oy M -M e 2 ~ c N iY 2:11 “T he second d eath ” ; 2 N~TM e2 -JCOYT—c i u j q e A e N -pO M ne 4 Kgdms 15:1 “ Bui in the iwenty-seventh year” Expressing ‘second’, is also com palible wiih a gendered com m on noun followed by CNiY or c J J r e in enclitic consiruclion: j N - T M e j- p o M n c C N re 2 M -nM €2 eBOT CNiY. i-e. T M e 2 ~ (p o M n e c n t g ) and n M e 2 - ( e s o f CNiY) Num 10:11 "In the second year. In the second m onth."
iii. The genderless suffixes (which are affixed to gendered common nouns and proper nouns) -AC or -aiAc ‘old, well aged’ -BcocoN ‘bad’ - M e ‘high-quality, genuine’ - noytm ‘sw eet’ (opposite o f -z o o y T ) -N o y q e ‘pleasant, enjoyable’ - o or -c u ‘great, venerable’ -2 0 0 Y T ‘undomesticated, uncultivated, w ild’ The principal (stressed?) vowel o f the first element is sometimes replaced by e or by no vowel (as though unstressed: e p n - o r p n - for n p n - ‘wine’); the second element is sometimes mediated by - R - . E.g. e p n - j i c or pn -3 ic or H p n -A c or H p n -N -A c ‘vintage wine’; e w e - M - M e or cuw e-M -M e ‘precious stone’; x i t - 2o o y t , j c i t - n o y t m ‘wild olive, sweet olive’; ha2COM- 0 “ Pachomius the G reat.” iv. For the numerical affixes (e.g. q r o y - ‘fourfold’), cf. 71.
GEN D ERLESS COM M ON NOUNS 113 'Genderless common nouns’ are a very large class o f nouns, whose only semantic function is description 93. They occur both as entity terms 141 o y n o N H p o c “ A wicked (person)” ; N A M e p A r e “ My beloved (pi.)” ; eewcyHM S h lll 109:5 “ A few (things)” ; ®peq-p-®NOBe “ Sinner(s)” ; 2^Z ji.e N-
and as attributive terms 96
90
GF-NDF-RLF-SS
C O M M O N
N O U N S
oYptuM e N -cjiB e “ A wise person” ; o y ty H p e c^hm “ A little child” ; n c y o p n N-pcoMe “ The fir s t human being” ; weiAceBHc N -A p x iep e v c S h ill 37:17-18 “The godless high priests” W hat distinguishes this class most clearly from the gendered com m on noun is their syntax; each genderless common noun is freely compatible with both n and T - ; and each occurs in two or even three different attributive construc tions o f the noun 116 (with a small number of exceptions, table 9, p. 80). Also, genderless common nouns cannot occur as target of modification in an attribu tive construction of the noun. TYPF-S O F G E N D E R L E S S C O M M O N N O U N
114 The genderless common noun comprises: (a) A large stock (perhaps open-ended) o f borrowed Greek adjectives, many of them occurring in Greco-Coptic pairs that end in - o c and - o n , cf. 117(c). They have the form of Greek nominative singular. E.g. a n o m o c , an o m o n ‘lawless person/thing’; jiceB H c ‘impious person/thing’; a ik j i i o c , - o n ‘righteous personAhing’; s a a x i c t o c , - o n ‘least personAhing’; e y reN H c ‘high-bornpersonA hing’; n o N H p o c ,- o n ‘wicked person/thing’ ; c jlP k ik o c , -ON ‘carnal personAhing’; c s m n o c , c s m n h , - o n ‘worthy person/thing’. (h) A small group of non-Greek morphs, including eeiHN ‘wretched person/thing’ Koyi ‘small personAhing’ M epiT(p/. MepATe) ‘beloved personAhing’ n o 6 ‘big, great personAhing’ CAB6 {fern. pi. cA B eey) ‘wise person/thing’ c c o r n ‘excellent, chosen personAhing’ cyHM {fern. cyHne) ‘small personAhing, few ’ cyMMo {fern. cyMMco) ‘foreign person/thing’ cy o p n {fern, cy o p n e) ‘first personAhing’ 2^6 (fern. z ^ » ,p l- Z ^ e e y ) ‘last personAhing’ eaiK ‘sober, prudent person/thing’ 2 HK6 ‘poor personAhing’ 2AAO {fern. ^ a a o i) ‘old person/thing’ Z oye.\T {fern. 2 0 Y eiTe, p/. 2 0 YJ^Te) ‘first person/thing’ Jtcocupe ‘strong person/thing’ JCAOte (pi. Jtio teev , J tiJ te e y e ) ‘hostile person/thing’ (c) Limited non-Greek morphs (very few in number), which unlike the preceding type are not attested in the inverted attributive construction of the noun 102. AC ‘old person/thing’ Bppe ‘new personAhing’
91
N O U N S
KAME ‘black person/thing’ cA ie ‘beautiful person/thing’ (For o y w T , fern. o y tu T e ‘single, sam e’, cf. 158.) When actualized as an attributive, these nouns occur in the mediated attribu tive construction of the noun 99; e.g. o y c b c o e - e p p e M ark 1:27 “ A new teaching.” (d) Derived and composite genderless nouns based on a t - (privative) 119, pM -(tJ-) (‘person related to , . . ’) 1 2 0 , p e q - (agential) 1 2 1 , the construct participle (e.g. o c a c i - ) 1 2 2 , n e ? - (forming ordinal numbers, some gendered and some genderless) 123, and prepositions o f relationship (e.g. eeoA 2n-> 124.
L A C K O F A S S O C IA T F -D GF-NDF-R
115 Nouns in the class of genderless common noun have no associated (inherent) grammatical gender: n n o N H p o c / r n o N H p o c “ The wicked person,” n n e p i t / t m s p i t “ The beloved one.” An article (or specifier) that is expanded by such a noun assumes a gender appropriate to the sense o f the passage of text 49, e.g. referring to another item. Although some o f these nouns have a dis tinctly fem. variant form 117(a), the basic form is indifferent to gender. Also show ing both masc. and fem. gender are a small group o f denoting nouns, e.g. 2 M2iA. (m asc.. fem.) ‘m anservant, m aidservant’, which for other reasons are classified with the gendered comm on noun 106.
G E N D F-R L F-SS C O M M O N N O U N S AS A T T R IB U T IV E S
116 Genderless common nouns as attributives. As attributive terms, genderless common nouns are distributed over the three attributive constructions of the noun, cf. table 10. Most genderless common nouns occur in two roughly syn onymous attributive constructions: the mediated attributive 99 n p c u n e M - n o N H p o c and the inverted attributive 102 n n o N H p o c N - p c o n e . For any given noun, these two constructions have slightly different meanings, and the kind of difference varies from one to another: for some it is lexical, and for others it lies in the presence or absence of marked emotion. The usual, em o tionally neutral one is the mediated attributive, n p c o n e M - n o w H p o c “ The w icked person” (versus the em otionally affected phrase n n o w H p o c Fi- p c o M e “ The vile person” ); except that for cyHM the usual construction is the unmediated attributive 101, e e N c y n p e c u h m “ Little children” (versus 2 6 NKe«yHM A e n - t b t Mark 8:7 “ Also a veiy small amount o f fish”).
92
G F -N D E R L E S S C O M M O N
NOUNS
TABLE 10 T h e G e n d e r l e s s C o m m o n N o u n a s a n A t t r ib u t iv e
C ompatible A ttributive C onstructions N oun T ype
Mediated Attributive'
Unmediated Attributive^
Inverted Attributive’
99
101
102
X X
X X
All, except as noted below
X
K oyi. N o6
X
cyHM Limited genderless nouns 114(c) Compounds based on
n e r - 110 ‘nptUM e M -n O N H p o c
s p e c ia l
form al
^ n u jH p e u ;H M
m a r k in g
for
^ nnO N H p o c N -p tu M e
g e n d e r
,
n u m b er
,
OR A N IM A T E N U SS
117 The main form of a genderless common noun is compatible with both masc. and fem., both sing, and pi. articles (e.g. ncyopfi Rev 1:17 “The first” ; rc y o p n Heb 9:1 “ The first” ; TAi^eHKH w -cyopn Heb 9:15 “The first covenant” ; Tcyopfi N-CKHNH Heb 9 :6 “ The outer [first] tent” ; nacnhy M - n e p tr 1 Cor 15:58 “ My beloved brethren”). Some also have an optional variant that for mally marks feminine or plural, or have both. If a fem. or pi. form occurs, it expresses the gender and/or number of the item that it modifies or refers to. (a) Form al marking fo r fem inine. For Greco-Coptic fem. forms, cf. (c) below; non-Greek items that have an optional fem. form are listed in 114(b). E.g. Tcyopne Acts 16:12 “ The leading one” (i.e. n o A i c ‘city’); w e n A H r H N - e a i H Rev 21:9 “ The last plagues” ; e j i H m - h a a n h Matt 27:64 “The last fraud” ; eeN cynpe cyHM MN-2eN cy eep e u^Hne ShW ess9 93fc:27—9 4 a:2 “ Boys and girls” ; Ne2 ioM e o n NreT26 (M A poy-^ytune) tJ-ceMNH 1 Tim 3:11 “ The women likewise (m ust be) serious.” Formation, (i) Fem. with added final e ; u j o p n / u j o p n e ‘first’; (ii) fem. with different final vowel: c 2L B e / c 2iBH ‘wise ’, u j m m o / u j m m o ) ‘foreign’.
(b) Formal marking fo r plural. Items which have a optional pi. form are listed in 114(b). E.g. NAMepjiTe 1 Cor 10:14 “ My beloved” ; NeKeBHye N -2J.ev Rev 2:19 “ Your latter works” ; weaieoY N -e o o y ShChass 161:1-2 “The last days.” Formation, (i) Plur. ending - e e y or - e e y e : c iB e / c iB e e y ‘wise’; (ii) plur. ending - i r e : M e p i r / M e p i T e ‘beloved’.
(c) Form al marking fo r animate versus inanimate ( - o c versus - o n J . Many bor rowed Greek adjectives occur in Greco-Coptic in pairs with the endings - o c
93
N O U N S
and -O N (114[b]); these express a contrast betw een anim ate (hum an) in - o c and inanim ate (non-hum an) in - o n . (A nim ateness is also expressed by the co n stru c t p a rtic ip le 122.) E .g. N - j ir A e o c M ark 1 0:17 “ G ood T eacher” ; N e g io n e € t ®-o y ^ ^ b N -A px A io c ShIV 2 8 :2 0 “ T he ancient holy w om en” ; ^ cub nim N -A P ^eoN 2 C or 9 :8 “ E very good w o rk ” ; t c n t o a h . . . J.YUJ oYJ^rj^eoN r e R o m 7 :1 2 “ T he com m andm ent is holy . . . and g o o d ” ; o y 'J'Y ^ i '^o c A e N - p i u n e 1 C o r 2; 14 “ T h e natural p erso n ” ; ®ccoma M -')'YxiKoN 1 C o r 15:44 “ A natural b o d y .” A lthough form s in - o c are co m patible w ith both m ale and fem ale, G reek sing. fern, adjectives in final - h or -A are also borrow ed to describe the hum an fem ale, e.g. o Y c e in e n - io y -^J^I M -niCTH A cts 16:1 “ A Jew ish w om an w ho w as a b eliev er” ; o Y c e iw e N-xANANAiA M att 15:22 “ A Cemaanite w o m an .” Greek adjeclives with the sing. fem. ending - h also m odify non-Uuman items in a few lexically fixed expressions taken from or based upon Greek syntax: T K ii n h kh ShChass 175:32-33 and T A iiO H K H N -B p p e Matt 26:28 “ The new covenant"; o y K ie o A .iK H e K K A H c ii Shin 6 1 :1 -2 “ A universal church.”
D E R IV E D A N D C O M P O S IT E F O R M S
118 The follow ing are exam ples o f bases (non-term inal bound m orphs 28[2]> that form com posite nouns in the class o f genderless com m on noun.
119 A T-, the privative base (‘not having . . . , unable to . . . ’, cf. G reek d- priva tive), com bines w ith any gendered com m on noun (including infinitives), e.g. A T -eicu T ‘fa th e rle s s ’, jiT - N o e e ‘s in le s s ’, a t - c b b s ‘u n c irc u m c ise d ’, AT-TAKO ‘im perishable’, a o h t ( a t - 2 H t) ‘fo o lish ’, a t - 6 o m ‘pow erless, unable’; niAT-NOYTe n - a i a b o a o c ShIV 128:3 “ T he godless d ev il” ; eeN pcoM e N -A T -cB B e A cts 11:3 “ U ncircum cised m e n ” ; 'f'-occu m m o -c N6-® t1 a t- c b u > (collated) ShA m el II 3 0 9 :9 “ I tell you, O ignorant w o m an ” ; TeiiASHT N -C 2 IM6 SliAmcl I 7 6 :1 2 “ This foolish w om an.” To express what has not been done o r cannot be done, x t - is expanded by the infinitive with a personal direct object agreeing in num ber/(gender) with the item that is modified; iT - c O N T - q (-C , -O Y ) ‘uncreated, uncreatable’; i T - n o u j - q ( - c , - o y ) ‘undivided, indivisible’; a t - n a y e p o - q ( - c . - o y ) ‘unseen, invisible’.
120 pM - or pMN- ‘person related to . . . ’ com bines w ith som e gendered com m on nouns (including infinitives), m any place-nam es, and t c o n ‘from w h e re ? ’. In certain com binations the base ends in an extension elem ent n w hile in others it does not, as a m atter o f fixed phraseology ( p m n - k h m s ‘E g y p tian ’ but p M -T A p co c ‘person from T arsu s’). E.g. pPi-pAYH ‘n eig h b o r’; p m n - 2 H t ‘intelligent perso n ’; p m - t a p a b i a ‘A rab ian ’; n t k - o y p m - t c u n M artyrdom o f St. V ictor the G eneral (B M ar 31 ;5) “ W here do you com e fro m ? ” ; rpo(J)iM oc n p M N -e (J)e c o c A cts 2 1 :2 9 “ T rophim us the E ph esian ” ; t p m n - k h m g
94
G E N D E R L E S S
C O M M O N
N O U N S
“ The Egyptian woman” Theodosius of Alexandria, On St. Michael Archangel (BMis 408:16, 32); t p m n - hi ShIV 6 1 :2 “ The mother superior” (of monastery); oym ato T n - pm n - n o y te Acts 10:7 “ A devout soldier” ; eewpM N-eHT N-pcoMe Shiv 5 9 :7 -8 “ Intelligent people.” 121 p e q - , the agential base (‘ . . . -ing; d o in g . . . ’), is completed by verb form s, either infinitive (in any state) or stative; both transitive and intransitive verbs are compatible. E.g. p e q - e c o A ‘interpreter’; peq-u^Mcye-®eiAa)AON ‘idol atrous, idolater’; peq-p-® N O B e ‘sinful, sinner’; N T ic -n a ip e q -c y o n -T e p o - q Ps 90(91):2 dvTi^fjnxop (io\> e! “ Thou art my Helper (One who takes me unto Him self)” ; p e q -M o o y T (stative) ‘dead, deadly’; p e q - c c u r n ‘attentive, hearer’; MJipiJi T p e q -o c n e -n w o Y T e e tJ-o v M e Cyril o f Alexandria, On the Virgin M ary, title (BMis 139:6-7) “Mary who is truly the bearer of G od” ; Tpeq--}--®cyine Sir 22:4 “ The one (i.e. cyeep e) that brings sham e” ; ®matoy N -p e q -M o y o Y T Jas 3:8 “ Deadly poison” ; oypcuM e N -peq-p-® N O B e John 9 :1 6 “ A man who is a sinner.” 122 The ‘construct participles’ (traditionally called participium coniunctum or p.c.) mat- ‘loving . . . ’ acAci- ‘elevating . . . ’
are descriptive nouns expressing tenseless, generic verbal action, process, etc. (similar in meaning to the English present participle). Their only function is the formation of compound genderless com m on nouns, e.g. mjiV-®noyt6 ‘devout’ (loving-®god, God-loving), qjiV-®NA2 B ‘beast of burden’ (bearing®yoke, yoke-bearer). They are only compatible with reference to animate beings, i.e. express the category o f animateness 117(c). Each construct participle corresponds formally to the phonemic verbal skele ton o f an infinitive, having the vowel x after the first consonant o f the verbal skeleton 187. Infinitive Me oytuM cycuNe or cyoow e qi Z ^o6 J tic e
Construct participle maT-
oyJ^McyjiK-, ty w 2A a6a ta.ci-
The num ber of construct participles is very limited, being very m uch smaller than the num ber o f verbs in the lexicon. M ost o f the corresponding infinitives are mutable transitives. In dictionaries, the ‘p.c.’ is listed with the correspond ing verb.
95
NOUNS
The conslrucl participle is always completed by an article phrase (usually formed on ®), which expresses a general reference point. After transitives this may be perceived as a direct object, MAT-®pcoMe ‘philanthropic’ (loving with respect to people, loving-people); after intransitives, as an adverb o f manner, 2AA<5-®cy2iac6 ‘eloquent’ (sweet with respect to words, sweet verbally). In meaning, the construct participle and the term that completes it blend to express a single idea: jcjici-®2 h t ‘arrogant’ (lifting-®heart), MAi-®cyMMO ‘hospitable’ (loving-®stranger), JcM-®B€Ke ‘wage earning’ (taking-®wage); M3iT-N6Yopnp6 Titus 1'A (piXotEKvoQ ‘loving, fond of one’s children’; MACT-neNi5TON, MAT-newijTON ShM ing 92o.‘ 19-23 ‘diligent, lazy’; u ; a h a eacM -neN M Jir-® N O Y T e K - e ( i ) c o T
M -nakN A peT oy a h a - n i m
Collecte, grec-copte (Leyd 131:25-26) “ Pray for our devout and virtuous father, Apa so-and-so” ; o Y oyepH T e n -jc a c i-® 2 H t P s 35(36): II “ A haughty foot.” 123 M62- , base form ing ordinal numbers (‘second’, ‘third’, etc.), produces both gendered and genderless common nouns. It is completed by any cardinal num ber 67 from 2 up or by oyH p 73 (n n e e -o Y H p ‘the how -m any-eth?’). (Cf. verb MOY2 ‘fill up’.) Cardinal numbers from 2 to 10 and higher numbers whose final digit is 1,2, 8, or 9 occur in gendered pairs (masc. and fem. in an either/or opposition); the ordinals based on these have gender accordingly. The other ordinals are genderless. (‘First’ is cyopn, fem. var. cy o p n e 113.) 124 Prepositions expressing relationship can be actualized as a genderless entity term in the article phrase; and as an attributive term in attributive construc tions of the noun. As such, they are analogous to genderless common nouns. To a large degree they occur in lexically fixed expressions. Both prenominal and prepersonal states 30 o f prepositions occur. Cf. 298, 302. Examples of such prepositions are eeoA 2 N - ‘from in, from’ 302 e e o A 2 ITN- ‘through, by, from ’ KATA- ‘according to, like, by (distributive)’ njipA - ‘contrary to, in comparison with, beyond, more than’ n p o c - ‘in accordance with, for, than’ cyA- ‘to, tow ard’ 21- ‘on, at, in’ 21 pM- ‘beside (door)’ 2 iT n e N - ‘a b o v e ’
2JieH N - ‘in front of, before’ :kin - ‘since’ Exam ples; (i) entity terms Tc n e B o A Acls 10:38 “ Jesu.s of N azareth” ; T co (J)ii A e T eeB O A 2 N T ne Jas 3 :17 “The wi.sdom from above” ; M np0 c-® 0 Y0 e i( ^ ShChass 9 7 :3 5 -3 6 “ Tem poral affairs” ; O Y n ip i-T e y (J> Y c ic ShChass 21 :2 6 -2 7 “ An
96
P R O P F - R
N O U N S
unnatural one” ; X M r-o Y K iT x p io -T N x n S h lll 116'. 17-18 “ I am not like y o u "; 2 e N K i T i - ® c i p 5 N T i - q S hlV 122:24-25 “ Blood relations o f h is” ; ® z i p M - n p o M ark 2 :2 TO Ttpoq xriv 0i)pav “ The place(s) about the d oor” ; M - n c iB B iT O N M ark 15:42 "B efore the sabbath” ; (ii) attributives o y M N T -e p o N - u ji- ® e N £2 ShChass 9 8 :3 6 -3 8 “ An eternal kingdom ’’; n e y ir r e ? .io N m - k x tx - i c u ^ x m n h c S h lll 58;29 “ The gospel according to Jo h n ” ; nztu B N - K iT i - * 'c i p 5 ShIV 159:13 “ Bodily activi
ty” But when playing the role o f attributive, the prepositions of this class are usu ally constructed as a bare adnominal preposition 103(b), that is, without the mediation o f n - ( o Y J i r r e A . o c e e o A 2 w -T n e S h lll 194:22 “ An angel from heaven” ). 125 K o y -N - ‘sm all’; cf. the attributive construction Koyi n - 102. E.g. N -oyK O Y -M -M epoc eeo A N2Ht - oy Celestine I of Rome, Encomium on St. V ictor the General (BM ar 6 2 :1 0 -1 1) “ I shall not be able to recount even a small part o f them .” Poorly attested in Sahidic.
(2) P R O P E R N O U N S D E F IN IT IO N AN D FO R M A T IO N
126 ‘Proper nouns ’ are a very large class, w hich are typically used to call one par ticular person, nation, place, topographical feature, time of day, month, deity, etc. by a distinguishing name. More precise identification o f the individual is sometimes expressed by a construction o f general relationship 147, apposition 129(a), expansion by x e - 129(b), etc. Proper nouns play only the role o f enti ty term 92 and have only a denoting 93 function— that is, they present a unique object of thought to the reader or listener by nam ing it. Proper nouns have an associated (inherent) gender, masc. or fem. For names of human beings, this coincides with biological sex. Personal names are of many and various forms, being partly taken over from pre-Coptic Egyptian and from Greek, Arabic, etc.; and partly created out of current Coptic word stock. Compounds often contain the pre-Coptic com po nents masc. n ji- ‘he belonging to . . . ’, n jiT C - ‘he given by . . . ’, n u ;e N ‘the son o f . . . with corresponding feminines in initial t (and jc € n - for TcyeN -); some other kinds o f name contain a component resembling the def. sing, article as their first component: nepH T “ Peret” male (epHT masc. ‘prom ise’); TiLrj^nH “ Tagape” female (i.ri.nH fem. ‘love’). O f the GrecoCoptic personal names, those of the Greek second declension (-oq) occur not only with final - o c (m ^p k o c “ M ark” ) but also with final - o y (m ^ p k o y “ M arkou” ) and - e (re c o p re ‘Georgeh’). Some occur in a shortened fo rm as well as a full one: x a h a “ K hael,” cf. mix2ih a “ M ikhael” ; PABpt “ G abri,” cf. PABpiHA “ G abriel.”
97
N O U N S
A C T U A L F Z A T I O N
127 Proper noun lexemes occur in an actual written or spoken text (are actualized 92) in three ways. (a) Most names of persons, and many other proper nouns, normally enter into syn tax without uniting with an article: they are self-actualizing (like determinator pronouns). E.g. q ^ e N o y r e masc. “ Shenoute,” iH C ovcm asc. “Jesus,” MApiA fem. “ M ary,” k h m e masc. “ Egypt,” pA K o re “ Alexandria (Egypt),” p o y z e masc. “ Evening.” (b) Many (though not all) topographical names and a few other proper nouns are always actualized by either n - or t - , expressing grammatical gender. E.g. nicpAHA “ Israel” ; t p a a i a a i a “ G alilee” ; eiepoYCAAHM, i.e. r ^ ie p oycAAHM “ Jerusalem ” ; niopAANHC “The Jordan (name of river).” Com parable to subclass (b) are def. article phrases o f the gendered com m on noun lhat name particular, unique items such as n K i 2 “ E arth,” r n e “ H eaven,” n e i e B T “ Easl," nN O YTe “ G od” 136 (the G od o f the Bible, invariably with n ), o m o o y “ W ater” (name o f elemental substance), T eyujH “ N ighttim e.”
(c) Greco-Coptic names of pagan deities and a few place names fluctuate between actualization by and self-actualization: n:teY c and z e y c “Zeus,” T6(J)ecoc and 6 (J)eco c “ Ephesus.”
T H E R E F E R E N T IA L D E F IN IT E A R T IC L E
128 A referential complex d e f article— e.g. n e T - ‘this very’; n K e - ‘also, even’— can unite with a proper noun of actualization type (a) or stand in place of n or T - in types (b) and (c), expressing referential information: n e e m e A x ic e A e x Heb 7;1 “ This M elchizedek” ; nKeMCD-ycHC Heb 3:5 “ Moses too” ; TKe^ptoMH Acts 19:21 “ Also Rom e” ; 2 M-nKeTcpAHA Luke 7:9 “ Even in Israel.” The referential article n - . . . eTMMAy ‘the aforesaid’ is manifested as . . . stm m jiy with type (a); e.g. zp ^xab a s eT®-MMAY Cyril of Jerusalem, Homily I on the Passion (Campagnano 40:16) “ The aforesaid Rahab.”
SY N TA C TFC P E C U L IA R IT IE S
129 Syntactically all proper nouns, whether self-actualizing or actualized by n - / T - , have definite determination status. Thus, generally, cyewoYTe functions e.g. like nM, n p c o n e functions e.g. like haV, h a a o c TrAAiAAiA functions e.g. like ta V, rexcopji, etc. TTicpAHA
98
P R O P E R
N O U N S
However, certain peculiarities of syntax set the proper noun apart from the definite pronoun or article phrase; (a) An accompanying modifier i.e. descriptive expansion of a proper noun is nor mally expressed by apposition 149 and not by a simple attributive of the noun, construction. E.g. nA iK A ioc Tcob ShChass 3 8 : 1 0 - 1 1 “ Job, the ju st” ; j^eeA nAiKA ioc Shlll 1 7 3 : 1 0 “ Abel, the ju st” ; ic n -e -c y a k y M o y T e e p o - q a c e - n e x c Matt 2 7 : 1 7 “Jesus who is called C hrist” ; M^piA t a - i c o c h c M ark 1 5 : 4 7 “ M ary, the female relative of Joses.” (Rarely, it is expressed by an attributive construction: n w o 6 m -m coY chc ShChass 7 6 : 3 - 4 “ The great M oses” ; tb a b y a c d n n o <5 Rev 1 6 :1 9 “ Great Babylon.” ) (b) In apposition to an indefinite or demonstrative entity term ( o y - ‘a . . . ’, ‘som eone’, njii ‘this one’, etc.), a proper noun must be introduced by a t e - . E.g. ovnpo(J)H Tic -a.e jce-ANNA Luke 2:36 (M organ M569) “ A prophetess, A nna” ; jcg -cim co n Acts 10:6 “ A certain person (named) Sim on” ; njiT Jce-n jiY '^ o c Acts 19:26 “ This Paul.” (c) A j predicate o f the first or second person (I am, you are) a proper noun is expressed in a naming construction 130, 278 and not by interlocutive nominal sentence predication. (d) As a term in extraposition/apposition, i.e. lexically expanding 149 a first or second-person subject, the proper noun is preceded/mediated by an personal independent (a n o k , etc.); cf. 87(c). E.g. extraposition: j^nok aT-C2aT n - t a 6 i j c Phlm 19 “ I, Paul, have written this with my hand” ; a n o k jlg T i3 .y\o c -J—naipAKAAei m m co -tn 2 Cor 10:1 “ I, Paul, entreat y o u ” ; apposition: neyj^rreA ioN . . . nM eN T -^T -cycone w ji-q a n o k N-®KHpY3 N-®AiAK0 N0 C Col 1:23 “ The gospel . . . of which I, Paul, became a herald and m inister.” (e) Proper nouns do not occur in the construction of distributive reiteration 62. A repeated proper noun is emotive, calling for attention to the speaker: ABpji2^M Gen 22:11 “ Abraham, Abraham! ”
N A M IN G C O N S T R U C T I O N S
130 Typical naming constructions include the following. (a) Telling som eone's name: n p i N N - T o y e i M M O - O y n e c e i J x J x D p i i y t u n p i N N - T M e ^ - C N T e n e < j> o Y i Exod 1 : 1 5 ‘‘The nam e o f the one was Sepphora; and ihe nam e o f the second, Phua” ; ( o ) y n o A ic N T e - r r i A i A i i i e - n e c p i N n e N i Z i p e e Luke 1:26 “ A city o f Galilee named N azareth” ; N O B e n e n e n p iN p t u M e iN I o a a in ON O Y M T i - K - N - e T e - N o y - K ^ M e T H p ^ e-xrreA O C |m 5 t-o y N N i2p i - K i y t u a i k 2l I O c i N M M iT e 2 i - n i c T o c 2i - n e T - o y i i B S hG ue 16 1fc.- 2 8 - 3 1 “ O ur name is Sin, not Hum an Being. M oreover, You have Y our own beings
99
NOUNS
throughout all the world, called Angel and not merely Just o r Faithful o r H oly" {proper name + pNT=, w ithout n e , a special nam ing constriiction; cf. (dj); iNOK r e z p o y e Ruth 3:16 “ 1 am R uth” ; n t o k n e n e r p o c Matt 16:18 “ You are Peter” ; NToq n e n e x c Mat! 16:20 "H e (was) the C hrist.” Cf. 278. (h) Assigning a name to someone: iy -M O Y T e e - B 2ipNXB2LC j c e - n z e y c n i y ^ o c A e ; x e - n 2 pMHC Acts 14:12 “ Barnabas they called Zeus, and Paul. H erm es” ; o y i M-nM NT—c N O o y c n - e T e - u ; i . y - M o y T e e p o - q j c e - i o y j i i c Matt 26:14 “ One o f the Twelve, w ho was called Ju d as” ; i y - M O y r e e - n e c p i N j c e - n jc t o tu p e eBOA Gen 11:9 “ Its nam e was called D ispersion” (c) Giving an allernale name: K p o N o c e r e - n e T B e n e ShAmel 1 383:15-384:1 “ Kronos, i.e. Petbe” ; cm tU N n - e N T - i y - - t - - p m - q e - n e r p o c Luke 6:14 “ Simon, who was named P eter” : iiceA .A iM iX e r e - n i t n e nbtuM M -n e c N o q Acls 1:19 “ Akeldama, that is. Field o f B lood” ; ic n -e -u jiy -M O y T e e p o - q jc e -n e 5 c c Matt 27:17 “ Jesus who is called C hrist” ; kh(]>2l n - e - u j i y - o y i Z M - e q j c e - n e r p o c John 1:42 “ Cephas, which is translated Peter” (d) In identity dialogue: n i m n e n e K p iN Luke 8:30 "W hat is your nam e?” ; n im e - p N T - K . . . A e ritu N n e n p iN Mark 5 :9 “ W hat is your nam e? . . . The nam e is Legion” (nim + e -p N T = or nim + p n t= , w ithout n e , a special naming construction; cf. [a]); NIM 2 t u - o y Ne N e K e io r e I n e j c i - q j c e - c i p r t u N n e M N -eB ituN Cyril of Jerusalem , Hom ily on the Virgin Mary 27 (Campagni 170:18-19) "A nd who are your forebears? They are Sarton and Ebion, he said"; N xe-N iM T i u j e e p e I n e j c i - c N i - c :x e -iN O K T e 2 p o y e Ruth 3:16 “ W ho are you, my daughter? She said to her, 1 am R uth” (e) Confirming identity: e ie -N T O K n e iZiHA. e K -n H T N c tu - i I n e j c i - q j c e iNOK n e 2 Sam 2 :2 0 “ Is that you, follow ing m e, Azael? He said, It’.s m e"; e y A O S ii e y A 0 5 i c i i . . . n e j t i - c .x e -e ic ^ H H T e x n o k n x j t o e i c Eudoxia and the Holy Sepulchre 35 (Orlandi 50:16-18 = Rossi 1 3 94[32]tv 19-25) “ Eudoxia! Eudoxisia! . . She said, Here 1 am, m y L o rd !” ; N - T i i iN r e B e p c iB e e 2 Sam 11:3 “ Is this not B athsheba?”
T E L L IN G T IM E
(218)
131
The twelve hours o f the day M - n e z o o y , running from dawn to dusk (roughly 0600 to 1800), and o f the night N - r e y t y h are formed with the self-actualizing fem. proper noun base j c n - expanded by a fem. cardinal num ber 66, 67: jc n -u jo M T e M att 2 0:3 “Tlie third hour” (m idm om ing).
132
Periods o f the day; yesterday—today—tomorrow
2T o o y e m asc. ‘daw n’
c x q , c x q N - 2 0 0 y m asc. ‘yesterday’
u j t u p n ‘m orning’
n o o y , n o o y N - 2 0 0 y masc. ‘today’
M eepe ‘m idday’ p o y g e m asc. ‘evening’
p i c r e , p i c r e N~2 0 o y masc. ‘tom onow ’
R elative reckoning by days, (i) P ast: 2 i e H N - c i q ‘day before yesterd ay ’; q > M N T-e -n o o y , M n q > M N T -e -n o o y ‘three days ago’; q r o y - e - n o o y ‘four days ago’, (ii) Future: N c i - p i c r e , c i - p i c r e ‘day after tom orrow ’. (Hi) Counting days hence: Adverbs formed with the m asc. sing, possessive article, reckoning with reference to the situation o f the speaker o r som e other person represented in the text (but 100
P R O P F - R
N O U N S
possessive elem ent untranslated in English): M n x (n e K -, n o y - , etc.)cNXY ( u io m n t , qTOOY, etc.) ‘on the second (third, fourth, etc.) d a y ’; e —n e q c jT o o y n e ‘on the fourth day’ (etc.). E.g. m n n c a - o y z o o y N T e p e - o y T o y - p H c Nicje i N - e i M neN CN iY e - n o N T i o x o c Acts 28; 13 “ And after one day a south wind sprang up, and on the sec ond day (on-the-with-reference-to-us-two) we came to Puteoli.” Similarly (but 3d per son as fixed expression) M n e q p ic T e ‘on the next d a y ’.
133
The w eek (ncxBBXTOM, n c x b b J lT o n , T ^eB A O M ic), com m on nouns 1. Sunday T K ypiiK H or n o Y i 2. M onday n e c N iY or n u j o p n n - 2 0 0 Y n - o y i u u J [‘vacant’ or ordinary day, not fast day] 3. T uesday nujOMNT or n M e 2 ~ c N iY N - 2 0 0 Y n —OYtuu; 4. W ednesday n e q r o o Y or t k o y T ?5-N H C T ii or T N H c T i i u jh m 5. Thursday n-t-oY or n o Y tu u ; or n o Y tu y ; n - t m h t £ (the intermediate ordinary day] 6. Friday n c o o Y or T n ip ic K e Y H orxN O fi N -N H C T ii o r T N H c T ii- tu 7. Saturday n ciB B iT O N
134
D ays o f the month are formed with the self-actualizing m asc. proper noun base c o y (cf. CHY, m asc.) expanded by a m asc. cardinal num ber 66, 67, c o y - + o y “ The fifth.” The first (day) of the m onth o r w eek is c o Y i (com bining c o y - and O Y i); the last (30th) o f the month is a proper noun, iX K e “ The last day o f the m onth.’’
135
M onths o f the Egyptian calendar eooY T n io n e 2 i .e u ) p K oiiZ K TtUBe M u;ip n ip M 2 0 T n nipM O Y T e n iu ;o N c n itU N e
enHn M ecopH
begins near the begins near the begias near the begias near the begins near the begins near the begins near the begins near the begins near the begins near the begins near the begins near the
end end e ad end end end end end end end end end
o f August (in m odem reckoning) o f Septem ber o f October o f Novem ber o f Decem ber o f January o f February o f March o f April o f May o f June of July
The Egyptian year, consisting o f tw elve thirty-day m onths, concludes with five (in leap years, six) intercalary days a\ £7ta>'onEvai, each intercalary day being referred to as an e n iro M e N O N . enxrO M eM H , xnxrO M eN O N , etc. T he beginning and ending dates of each m onth are not fixed in relation to m odem reckoning A.D., but vary slightly from year to year. Accurate conversion tables are provided in M arius Chaine, La chronologie des tem ps chreliens de I ’Egypte et de I ’Ethiopie (Paris 1925).
THF- C O M M O N I Z F - D P R O P E R N O U N A N D THF- P R O P F - R I Z E D COMMON NOUN
136 Sometimes the idea to be expressed in a passage requires a proper noun to have the function of a common noun, as though it denoted a type of entity and not just one particular individual. In such a case, the commonized proper noun has the syntax o f a gendered common noun. E.g. TTKoyi n -ia k c o b o c Mark
101
N O U N S
15:40 “James the younger” (The sm aller James), as opposed to some other James; t n o 6 n - c ia c o n Josh 11:2 “The great Sidon” as opposed to another place o f the same name; n 2Ae A e n - jia a m 1 Cor 15:45 “ The last Adam ” ; K eic 2 Cor 11:4 “ Another Jesus” ; tm a p a a a h n h MW-TKeMApiA Matt 27:61 “ Mary Magdalene and the other M ary " The opposite also occurs, namely, a common noun is properized, when it is used in a naming construction 130 as though it were a proper noun. E.g. A q - 'f '- p j i N e p o - q o c e - A o r o c A y t o c y n p e ShOrig 327 (Orlandi 26:10) “ He named Him Word and Son” ; n o b s n e n e w p j i N pcone a n ShGue I6 I/7; 28-29 “Our name is Sin. not Human B eing.” Cf. 290. “G od” (the unique God, known from the Bible) is always named by the def. article phrase nN oyTe.
D IR E C T A D D R t-SS
137 Direct address can be signalled by i. a proper noun in direct address, e.g. c i m c o n e K - N K O T K Mark 14:37 “ Simon, are you asleep?” ; i j i k c u b o c m n - i o ) 2 a n n h c p o e ic Cyril o f Jerusalem, Homily on the Virgin Mary 47 (Campagni 186:21-22) “James and John! O bserve!” In direct address. Greco-Coplic personal nam es ending in - o c or - i c sometimes occur wiih final - e o r - i as ihe Greek vocative form; e.g. tu T m o e e e 1 Tim 6:20 " O T im othy!” (cf. T i M o e e o c ) ; 2lN2l n i 2l Acts 9 : 1 0 “ A nanias!” (cf. 2l n a n i 2lc).
ii. a common noun in direct address. This always has the simple def. or pos sessive article. E.g. ncA2 a n a y e-NeVcowe Mark 13:1 “Teacher, look at these stones” ; Npcone w re -n iH A N-eT®-p-®2 0 Te 2H T -q M-nNoYT6 ccoTM Acts 13:16 “ People o f Israel and you that fear God, listen!” ; N p c o n e NECKHY Acts 2:29 “ Men! B rothers!” ; tcuk m m o -® T A cy e ep e Matt 9:22 “Take heed, my daughter” ; n A N o y r e n A w o y T e e r e e - o y a k - k a j i - t NCco-K Mark 15:34 “ My God, My God, why hast Thou forsaken M e?” Direct address can be accompanied by d) 238 for rhetorical affect: d) rreK eA N-AT-NJi2Te u ^ A - T N A y ef-N A -u ^cone n m m h - t n Mark 9:19 “ O faithless generation, how long am I to be with y o u ? ”
(3) P O S S E S S E D N O U N S D F - F l N I T t O N A N D L I S T O F PO SSKSSIMJ N O U N S
138 'Possessed nouns’ are a closed class o f twenty lexemes that occur in a prepersonal state. H alf o f them occur also in a prenominal state (prenominal states are also formed periphrastically 139). 10 2
P O S S E S S E D
Prenominal State
N O U N S
Pre personal State
Etymological Meaning (Reference to Crum ’s Diet.
ANAS
2.pHx(N)= B A -, B A N -
(e ie p -, ei3M ~)
e iX T s k o y n ( t )=, k o y o Y n =
A IK T s
PN-
pCOs pNT= etc. PAT=
p eN -
coynt=
T N -,
T e -
toyn-
TOOT» T O Y tU = 0 )i.N T =
2H t =
2P N -, 2N epoY N (e )T e -, (2)t n -
2TH = 2TH =
acN-
acco=
pleasure, will (1 lo) end (16b) outside ( b o a 33b) eye(s) (ei3i73b) bosom (11 Ifc) covering (140a) mouth (po 288fl) name (pjiw 297b) foot, feet (302fc) value ( c o y g n 369b) hand(s) (rco p e 425o) bosom (444fc) nose (u^A 543fc) fore part (^ h 640fc) belly, womb (en 642fc) face (e o 646fc; voice (epooY 1 0 4 h ) heart ( 2 h t 7 1 4 o ) tip ( 2 H T 718a) head (756a)
The suffixed item expresses the possessor; e.g. pcu-K Luke 19:22 “ Your own m outh,” 2 HT-C Luke 1:41 “ H er w om b,” k o y n -< ( Luke 16:22 “ Abraham ’s bosom .” Cf. 141. Possessed nouns are not compatible with descriptive expansions such as attributive constructions o f the noun, attribu tive clauses, prepositional phrases, etc. Their function is denotation 93, not description. Most possessed nouns refer, at least etymologically, to a part o f the body. Their meaning usually merges with another term in a compound expression ( e r o o T - q “ To h im ” [to-hand/hands-of-him ], A q - K r e - e iA T -q “ He looked” [He tumed-e>'e/ejei-o/-himself]). They do not express or motivate the expression o f any particular determination status, number, or gender (Jiq K A -T ooT -q ^jiE0tiKEv Toi; XEipd? Mark 8:25 “ He laid His hands’’).
T H E P E R I P H R A S T I C P R E N O M I N A L STATE
139 Most prenominal states end in the morph n - 203 (alt. m- 21, vars. 22) as an extension element. Selection o f suffixes after the prepersonal state follows the pattern o f personal suffixation described in table 6 (p. 69). E.g. 103
N O U N S
T - N - (var. T B -), TOOTS [hand of] JC -N -, [head of] Prenom inal states are also form ed periphrastically, by th e expansion m orph N - 87(a) after an appropriate 3d person suffix - q , - c , - y on the prepersonal state; e.g. p t u - q n - and p t u - o v n - ‘m outh o f’ in p c u -q M -n M o y f “ T he lio n ’s m o u th ” (2 T im 4 :1 7 ) p cu -o Y N -N egTcucup “ T he m outh(s) o f h o rses” (Jas 3 :3 ) o r on invariable (and thus genderless) - q 2 H T -q N -N egiO M e “ (The) belly o f the w om en” (ShE nch 66a.-3 0 -3 2 )
K o y w -q N -T e c g iM e “ (The) w om b o f the w o m an ” (John the A rchim an drite, E xegesis [Canon] [BritLib O r.8 8 1 1 f.l7 v fc.4 -5 ]; Layt. 85) T he periphrastic construction supplies the m issing form for those w hich have no prenom inal state; e.g. gJ^pi-T-q m - h t o o y M ark 5:11 “ O n the h illsid e” ; 2 Jk^pak^T-q N-OY ZPopipe A cts 7 :5 8 “ A t the feet o f a young m an .”
M E A N IN G AN D USAGE
140 M ost possessed nouns are etym ologically related and form ally sim ilar to som e gendered com m on noun, w ith w hich they are listed in m odem dictionaries. E.g. p o m asc. ‘door, opening, m o u th ’ and p - N - , pcu= ‘m o u th ’; T cupe fem. ‘handle, oar, h an d ’ and t - n - , t o o t = ‘h a n d ’; g o m asc. and ‘face’. M ostly, possessed nouns (and also som e o f their related com m on nouns) occur as com ponents o f com pound prepositions 209 and com pound verbs 180(a), e.g. e jc N -, e x iv = ‘upon, on to ’ (tow ards head [jc - , Jccu=] o f . . . ), T3.ye-piN=‘ ‘to m en tio n ’ (to put forth nam e [piN=] o f . . . ), qpri-^T cupe mmo= ‘to be a guarantor fo r’ (to take hand o f . . . ). In this, they contribute an abstract, rela tional meaning as a com ponent. A few also can have a literal m eaning as an entity term 141, e.g. pcu= ‘m outh o f . . . ’, t o o t = ‘hand o f . . . ’, 2 h t= ‘belly o f . . . ’. In this role they are self-actualizing; and unlike other selfactualizing entity term s, do not express any gram m atical categories. T o denote literally the parts o f the body as entity term s, an o th er set o f ordinary gendered com m on nouns is norm ally in use. C o m m o n N oun (In entity term co n stru ctio n ) ‘e y e ’ ‘f o o t/le g ’ ‘h a n d ’ ‘h e a d ’ ‘m o u th ’
104
P o ssessed N oun (A s com ponent)
baa
eiA T-q N-, gia t *
oyepH T e 6 ijc
t
A ne
TA npo
p A T -q f i - , pATs - n- , t o o t * jc -n -, p - N - , pto=
P O S S E S S E D
N O U N S
As direct object after a mutable infinitive (forming compound verbs 180[a]), possessed nouns vary as to whether they (i) are always suffixed (e.g. qpN-2TH= reflex, ‘have pity’); (ii) have the syntax o f a non-zero article phrase (Stem -Jem stedt rule I7 l[a ][b ]) (e.g. kio H -pio«/K ji-ptu= reflex, ‘be silent’); or (Hi) fluctuate in this regard (e.g. e ip e n ~ 2t h = / p - 2t h = reflex, ‘regret’ 2 C o r7 :8 /P ro v 13:12).
105
Entity Terms, Entity Statements, and Their Phrasal Syntax The Nature o f the Coptic Entity Term 141 Definition and Classification 141 Hypostasis 142 Specific Negation of the Entity Term 143 Phrasal Constructions of One Entity Term with Another 144 Linkage: Coordination and Disjunction 145 Restrictive Expansion 146 The general relationship (possessive) construction n 147 The appurtenance construction n tg 148 Apposition 149 The Entity Statement 150 The Nature o f Coptic Entity Statements Formal Classification 151
150
T H E N A T U R E OF T H E C O P T I C E N T I T Y T E R M
141 Definition and classification o f entity terms. ‘Entity term', e.g. i. nVi “ This one (m asc.)” ii. qjoMNT “ Three” iii. A N O K ( a n F - , t - , - f -,-U -T, or -0) “ I, m e” iv. n.a.iKak^ioc “The righteous” ; n e p n e “ The temple” ; 2 g n n o 6 i^-Ma^eiN “ Great signs” ; ®ptuMe “People, A nyone” ; n-eNT-Aq-nak^pa^.a.i.a.oY M M o - q “The one who betrayed H im ” ; r e e a o A Z N r n e “ The one from above” 302, etc. V. qpoMNT N -2 0 0 Y “ Three days” vi. MApij. “ M ary” vii. pjk^T-q “ His foot/feet” refers to a set of morphs and constructions, from several word classes, that are united both in syntax and in the kind of content that they express. Syntactically they occur in the same,set of syntactic positions, so that (with some important lim itations) where one entity term can occur, the others can occur. (Typical syntactic
106
N A T U R E
O F
T H E
E N T I T Y
T E R M
positions— in addition to the patterns described in the present chapter—include: subject in all sentence types, predicate in the nominal sentence, direct object suf fixed to the infinitive, object of preposition, term suffixed to o y n - / m n - or e tc - .) Semantically an entity term presents or refers to an object of thought (as distinct from predicating a process or action, or expressing a relationship), cf. 92. Seven kinds of item, illustrated above, play the role of entity term: i. determ inator pronoun 44 ii. specifier pronoun 63 iii. personal morphs 75
expressing only grammatical content
iv. article phrase 43 specifier phrase 64 vi. proper noun 126 vii. possessed noun 138
expressing both grammatical and lexical (non-grammatical) content
V.
The main types of entity term (i-vi) express an intersection o f basic gram m at ical categories: (1) either Determination or Person + (2) Number, + (3) in some morphs also Gender. In some morphs additional grammatical categories are expressed. In types (i)-(iii) the entity term only expresses grammatical categories: e.g. ‘the d e f sing, entity of masc. grammatical gender near to me, which I now indi cate’, NTOK ‘you, sing. masc. personal entity with whom I now communicate’. In types (iv)-(vi) a nucleus expressing grammatical categories (e.g. n - ) is expanded by lexical (non-grammatical) content: e.g. n - . i - i K a . i o c ‘the typical, indicated def. sing, grammatically masc. entity belonging to the lexical class Righteous Person’; q p o M r e N - p o M n e ‘three grammatically fem. specimens belonging to the lexical class Year’; ‘the unique, def., biologically and grammatically fem. person who is distinguished by the name Mary’. In types (iv) and (v) the grammatical nucleus and its lexical expansion are expressed by dis tinct morphs ( n - + .a-i K i i o c ) ; in type (vi)a single morph expresses both (M atpiJk^). Type (vii), pji.T-q ‘foot/feet of him ’, expresses lexical content (‘Foot’), gen eral (possessive) syntactic relationship (‘of’) 147, and an expression o f Person (but not Determination, Number, or Gender). Its main function is to contribute to the formation of compound verbs and prepositions; e.g. i.q -K i.-p a .T -q eBoA. N 6 i - n p p o m -h ih X e-^ K c u re NCJk.-TJk'l'YXH 1 Sam 26:20 “ The king of Israel has come out fi^eXf|Xu0ev to seek my life” (Has set-foot/feet-of him outwards); eYqpJ^N-NaiY e p o - q qpaiY-rfak.2T-oY ZJ^pJ^r-q Mark 3:11 “ W henever they beheld Him they fell down before H im ” jtpoaem jtT ov a it m (They bent-themselves at-foot/feet-of-Him). In this function it is a component. Personal entity term s (iii) 7. you, he, she. e tc .’ differ from the others inasm uch as ihey occur in several alternant sets o f m orphs 76, which are selected according to syntactic function and/or preceding m orph o r phoneme. E.g. 3^nok n e “ It is 1,” A N r-o y p p o “ I 107
E N T I T Y
T E R M S
A N D
E N T I T Y
S T A T E M E N T S
arn a king” ; -^--cu^Tn “ 1 choose,” N T e p in c tu r n “ W hen I chose,” o y N T i J f “ 1 have,” c o T n - T “ Choose m e,” M ooyT “ Kill m e.”
A mutable morph 30 (e.g. 2 n - / n 2 h t= ‘in’) preceding an entity term occurs in the prepersonal state before a personal entity term (iii), and in the prenominal state before all other types. 1. ii. iv.
2M -
V.
2 ^ - qpoM NT N - 2 o o y
qpoMNT 2 M- n e p n e
vi. 2 ^ vii. 2M~ p o j-q iii. 142
Types i, ii, and iv-vii must be preceded by the prenominal state (e.g. 2N -) o f a mutable morph. Type iii ( - q ) must be preceded by the prepersonal state (e.g. n2 h t= ) o f a mutable morph.
N2HT-q
Hypostasis: other kinds of element functioning as entity term. Any kind o f lexlual ele m ent (word, phrase, clause, sentence, fragm ent, letter o f the alphabet) can be treated as an entity term (the rhetorical term for this function is ‘hypostasis’). E.g. e -cb M n p T p e -d ) JCUJ e p o - K St. Pachom ius quoted in ShChass 111:42-43 “ Sing to (the letter) Omega; do not let Omega sing to you” ; N O B e n e n e N p A N p t u M e a n ShGufi l6lfc.-28-29 “ O ur name is Sin, not Human Being"\ T c t u u ; e n e n K O c M o c M att 13:38 “ (The phrase) ‘the field’ is (stands for) the w orld” ; T u ;o p n r e c c u t m n ic p A H A . n j t o e i c n e N N o y T e n j t o e i c o y A n e Mark 12:29 “ The first (com m andm ent) i.s.
Hear, O Israel: the Lord our God, the Lord, is one"; neMujAJte eN T -A q-noj^ u ;A p tu - T N
N -o y c e
a n n e M N -o y M M O N
2 C or 1:18 “ O ur word to you has not been
Yes and No (a Yes and a N o).” 143 Specific negation o f the entity term. The grammatical relationship o f an entity term, as an individual elem ent of a text, can be negatived by the enclitic ^ N O K A.N
“ Not
r
which usually comes after the target o f negation. Optionally, negative n - is also prefixed (with a n following the negatived term), e.g. M -nJC oeic “ Not the Lord.” Exam ples: A e m m o - c M - n K e c e e n e a n o k M - n J to e i c an 1 C or 7 ; 12 “ To the rest, I m yself (and not the Lord) say . . . ” ; 't—'J u y upAptu-TN . . . N T A -e m e AN e - n a iA .x e N -N -e T ® -Jto c e n ^ h t a a a a re y 6 o M I C o r 4 : 19 “ But 1 will com e to you . . . and I will find out not the talk o f the arrogant people but their pow er” ; e re T N -o M - n j t o e i c N-®ptuMe a n Eph 6 :7 “ Rendering service to the Lord, noi human beings"; oyTBA M -^ n A iA A rtu ro c ^ F i - n e x c aa.a.a n - ^ a ^ N - e itu T AN I C o r 4 : 15 “ Countless guides in Chri.st but not many fathers"; mh Ki-nAT AN n e - e N T - A q - J tt u t u p e esoA . ^N -eiA H M N -N -eT ^-en iK A A ei M -neTpAN Acts 9:21 “ Is not this the man who m ade havoc in Jerusalem of those who called on this n am e?’’; .o y o N rAp nim a n e N T -A y - e i eeoA. ^M -nicpA H A . naT Ne nicpAHA. Rom 9 :6 “ For not all who are descended from Israel are Israel” ; n e K o y tu u ; . . .
108
P H R A S A L
C O N S T R U C T I O N S
O F
E N T I T Y
T E R M S
A N Luke 22:4 2 “N ot M y w ill but T h in e” ; a n o k a n a a . a . a n j t o e i c I Cor 7 :10 “N ot I but the L ord” ; n e J t A - y n e x A - H a n ShP 130’1 lOv b :'i-A “ T hey, and not we ourselves, said . . . ”
PHRASAL
CO N STR U C TIO N S
OF ONE
EN TITY
TERM
W ITH
ANOTHER
144 Entity terms enter into three kinds of phrasal construction with one another: linkage (coordination and disjunction) 145, restrictive expansion (possession and appurtenance) 146, apposition 149. 145 Linkage: coordination and disjunction. The relationship o f ‘linkage' (coordi nation or disjunction) enables two or more entity terms to function as a single unit in syntax. (a) Coordination (‘and’) can be expressed by various prepositions, selected according to the term that follows: Preposition ( ‘a n d ’) 21MN-
Coordinated Entity Term Personal suffix Zero article phrase or term with zero determination (var. NM-) All other terms
(For the selection o f prepositions before specifiers, cf. 65[a][ii].) It is also expressed by 231 before all kinds o f entity term m n - (rare), conditions as for mn - ‘and’ Exam ples: n A Y A . o c n m m a - n Acts 1 6 : 1 7 “ Paul and u s” ; e c j - J t H K e B o A . N - ® X A p iC Acts 6 : 8 “ Full o f grace and pow er” ; N e c o o y n m - n g ^ o o y John 2 : 1 5 “The sheep and oxen” ; n t o k M N - n e K e i o j T n A i A B o A - o c ShChass 3 9 : 3 - 5 “ Y ou and your father, the devil” ; ^ c n m a c i n M N - ^ e N U p n H p e Acts 4 : 3 0 “ Signs and w onders” ; N p t u M e A y t u N e ^ i o M e Acts 8 : 1 2 “ M en and w om en” : 2 ^ n n p 6 m - m a g i n A y t u ^e N U jn H p e Acts 6 :8 “ G reat wonders and signs" 2 i- ® 6 o m
Coordinated article phrases som etim es refer to two different aspects o f the same refer ent: n - e T ® - O Y A A B A y t u n A i K A i o C A T e T N - A f N A M M o-q Acts 3 : 1 4 “ You denied the Holy and R ighteous O ne” ; n A p x H r o c N - r n i C T i c M N - n p e q - J t o J K e a o A . i c H eb 1 2 : 2 “ The pioneer o f the faith and the perfecter, Jesus” (i.e. the pioneer and perfecter); n - e r ^ - u j o o n A y t u n - e r e - N e q - u j o o n A y t u n - e T ® - H H y Rev 4 : 8 “The One who is and was and is to com e” (cf. 412[d]).
Linked items are also listed in sequence w ithout linking term, in a rhetorical figured called ‘a sy n d e to n ’. E.g. zeNrcuM N2 h t 2 eN M N T -co 6 2 GnM N T -aiT -C O O Y N
2 E N n o p N lJk .
2 ENNo6
M -M N T -Jk .C e B H C
S h lll 206:1—3 “ As for acts o f hardheart edness, of folly, of ignorance, of illicit sexuality, o f strife, and o f great impi ety— God delivered you from them .” jk .-n N o Y T e N T - e
gboa. n2 h t
-
oy
109
E N T I T Y
(b) Disjunction
(h, e ire ,
T E R M S
A N D
E N T I T Y
S T A T E M E N T S
x n - , o yT e, o y ^ e )
i. non-restrictive (and, or, and/or, or perhaps, or likewise); h; correlative pairs (either . . . or . . . , whether . . . or . . . ) e i r e . . . e i r e . . . ii. restrictive (or else): jc n - , vars. j c e - , jc g n iii. resumptive (nor, not even): oy-a^e (var. oyT e); correlative pairs (nei ther . . . nor . . . ) o y T e . . . o y r e .. . iv. '(N o t). . . but rather' is expressed by (negation) . . . ak.A.A.ak.. . . Examples: nNOMOCH NenpoHTHC Matt 5:17 “The law and the prophets” ; jc o y th N-CTAAioN H MAAB Johii 6:19 “Twenty-five or thirty stadia’’; n A B ioc TH p-q , , , e iT e " a c k h c ic e iT e " m n t-n a ApophPatr 248 (ChaTne 77 :1 3 -1 4 = Z 349:29-30) “My entire way o f life . . . whether asceticism or acts o f charity” ; bap ab b ac j c n - i c Matt 27:17 “ Barabbas or Jesus” ; M nq-'t'-'’KA.Hp0 N0 MiA NA -q 2 pAi N2 H T-q o\J^e. oy T A b ce N -o y e p H T e Acts 7:5 “ He gave him no inheritance in it, not even a foot’s length” ; o y N o y B o y A e o y 2AT o y A e 2 N-NeTNMOJC2 o y A e "nHpA e - T e 2 iH o y A e u ; th n c n t g o y A e o y r o o y e o y A e oyfieptU B Matt 10:9-10 “No gold, nor silver, nor copper in your belts, no bag for your journey, nor two tunics, nor sandals, nor a staff” (c)
Patterning. In a group o f three or more linked terms the placement or variation o f link ing term(s) varies according to rhetorical choice: it is sometimes consistently repeated. epu;AN—neKBAA. h TeK6 iJc h T e K o y e p H r e CKANA.AA.ize m m o -k Shlll 193:5-6 “ If your eye or your hand or your foot impedes you” ; x t u p ic - '’6 eiK 2 i-*H |m 2i-'*6 iN-oy-'’tHTHC 2 eN eyA rreA ioN 2 eN A n o cT o A o c 2 eNrpAH e - N A u ; a ) -o y 2 eN K A eH rH cic NTe-N-eT®-oyAAB 2 eNu;AJce MN~2 eNCB0 0 y e e - N A u ; a ) -o y S h lll 20 7 :8 -1 0 “Prophets, gospels, apostles, numer ous scriptures, sermons by the saints, orations, and numerous teachings” ; and sometimes arranged to create subgroups, Aytu ANApeAC NM-iAinnoc NM -BApeoAOM Aioc MN-MAeeAIOC NM—etUMAC Ayco i'iKCOBOC rrcyHpe N-iAAIOC MN-eAAAAIOC Aytu ciMtuN nKANANAioc N M -ioyA A c niCKApitUTHC Mark 3:18 “Andrew, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, and Thomas; James the son o f Alphaeus and Thaddaeus; Simon the Cananaean and Judas Iscariot.”
(d) When the linked item is an infinitive with zero determination, it is expressed either i. as a verbal noun 105(c) (jk^JCN-®KpMpM 2 i-®MoKMeKPhil 2:14 “ Without grumbling or questioning” ), or ii. as an entity statement 150 in the form o f e - + “infinitive (oyMNT-zHKe jk^yoj e-®TM -p-® M aiT-® 2 0 MT ShChass 98:45-48 “ Poverty and not being greedy”) Further examples: n u ;in e a a a a e -^ u p in e 2 h t ^ N -o y p tu M e eq -o y A A B Aytu e-^ u p in e a n 2 h t ^ N -o y p tu M e N -A K A eA proc SIiWess9 9 8 o ;6 -I3 “Shame, but specifically, feeling shame before a holy person rather than feeling shame before an impure person” ; " e^ oyciA N-^oytuM 2 i - c t u Aytu e -® T M -p -‘’2<^B Shlll 94:12 “The authorization o f eating and drinking and o f not doing work” ; o y . . . g im h ti
no
P H R A S A L
C O N S T R U C T I O N S
O F
E N T I T Y
T E R M S
e-**oY ^M N-TeTpoH ShAmfil I I 33 3 :1 1 -1 2 (= Z 5 89:29-30) “ W hat else but eating their fo o d ? ”
146 ‘Restrictive expansion' (i.e. general relationship 147 and appurtenance 148) is a construction o f two entity terms such that one restricts the meaning o f the other by limiting the number o f referents to which it applies: e.g. T M N T -epo
i^ -n N o yT f?
“The kingdom o f G od” restrictive expansion element
“ A servant
o f his" restrictive expansion elem ent
T e c jM N T -e p o
“ His kingdom ” (the-ielated-to-Him-king6otn) restrictive personal infix
The restrictive element is mediated by prepositions and preposition-like marks, which occur in prenominal and prepersonal states; and is also expressed in the possessive article 54. Personal morphs cannot be expanded by a restrictive expansion. ; 147 T he g en eral relatio n sh ip (possessive) construction The construction of ‘general’ (or 'possessive') relationship (table 11, below ) neicDT N-KiMNT-qpaiN-2T H -q “ The Father o f mercies” (2 Cor 1:3) neqpjk^N “ His nam e” (M att 1:21) is the broadest and most frequent kind o f restrictive expansion. It expresses a general, logically ambiguous restrictive relationship ( ‘related to, o f ) between nucleus (the Father, name) and expansion element (mercies, His). Its form depends on the choice of expansion element. (a) Non-personal expansion element: mediated by n - ‘o f’ the maik of relation ship 147 (alt. M- 21, vars. 22) nH t Ki-njcoeTc “The house o f the L ord” (Ps 22[23]:6) (The-house related-to-the-lord) n ^ c o e ic M -nHi “The lord o f the house” (Matt 24:43) (The-loid related-to-the-hoiise) (b) Personal expansion element (his. etc.) i. when the nucleus has simple definite determination ( ‘the . . . ’), the pos sessive article n= 54 ( ‘the . . . o f . . . ’) occurs instead o f the simple def. article 111
E N T I T Y
T E R M S
A N D
l i N T I T Y
S T A T E M E N T S
necjHf “ His house” (the house + lelated-to-him) n e q -x o e ic “ Its m aster” (the master + related-to-it) ii. otherwise, the personal expansion is mediated by
cf. 148
oyH t NTJk^-q “ A house of his” (a house related to him) ®Hf NTJk^-q “ House(s) o f his” (house[s] related to him) neiH i N Tx-q “ This house of his” (this house related to him) etc. Comparable is the determinator pronoun nak^-, ncu= ‘the one related to/belong ing to . . . cf. 54. Further exam ples, (a) n o y t u N ? eeoA. M - n c o o y N M - n e o o y M - n N o y r e 2 C or 4 .6 “The m anifestation o f the knowledge o f the gloiy o f G od” ; n p A N N - o y n p o c ) ) H T H c Matt 10:41 “The name o f a prophet” ; n n o 6 N-TrAA.iA.AiA Mark 6:21 “ The leading men o f G alilee” ; T M N T - c A B e N - N C A B e e y 1 C or 1:19 "T he cleverness o f the clever” ; n c A u ; q N - A r r e A o c . • • M ^ T C A u ; q e N - e K K A H c i A Rev 1:20 “ The seven angels o /th e seven churches” ; 2 e N 2 B H o y e i J - e e N p t u M e e p e - n e y 2 H T T A K H y r e p o - o y 1 Tim 6:5 “ Projects o f people who.se minds are corrupted” ; M n A p e M B O A H N - 2 e N K O o y e Heb 11:34 “ Foreign arm ies” (The encam pm ents o f others); k a n a N - r r A A i A A i A John 2:1 “ Cana o f G alilee” ; a o a - z h a i a c n - u ; i h t ApophPatr 270 (Chaine 83:13 = Z 354:7) “ Apa Elijah o f Scetis” ; o y B A n r i c M A M - ® M e T A N O i A Mark 1:4 P a n n a n a HEravoiai; “ A baptism o f repentance(s)’’; *oytu2E N-®ptuMe M att 4 :19 “ Fishers o f human beings” ; 2 tuc-® A nocT O A O c M - n e ^ 1 Thess 2:7 (2 :6 ) “ As apo.stles o f C hrist” ; e-® 2 m N-®2 e e N o c Matt 10:5 “ Among the G entiles” (Into w aylsl of G entilels]); z o iN e N -T e iM m e John 4 :23 “ Such" (Some o f this sort); r n i c T i c N - 2 o i n e 2 Tim 2:18 “ The faith o f som e” ; MMNTpe N -N eiu;A Jce Acts 5:32 ‘‘The witnesses o f these w ords” ; p t u - q M -n M o y i'2 Tim 4; 17 “ The lio n 's m outh” 139; n a i N - T e m m e Matt 19:14 “ Such” (These o f this sort); n e m e n - n a T ShChass 21:52 “ The likeness o f these things” ; t a i o n r e e e N - N A - n N o y r e 1 C or 2:11 “ So also, those belonging to G od” (This too is the manner o f those belonging to God); J i n e - o y o N N - T e i 2 e o y t U N ? g b o a e N e 2 2 M - n i H A Matt 9:33 “ Never was any thing like this (any o f this sort) seen in Israel” ; coc))Ia nim N -iJpM N -K H M e Acts 7:22 “ Every sort o f the wisdom o f the E gyptians” ; T A n e N-A pxH n i m 2 i - e 5 o y c i A n i m Col 2 :10 “ The head o f all rule and authority” ; 2 J ^ e H N - c o o y N - 2 o o y e - n n A C X A John 12:1 “ Six days before the Passover” (At the front o f six days to the Passover); N - c t u M A N - N - e T ® - o y A A B M att 27:52 “ Many bodies ( > / the saints” ; e - y 2 e m n o y T t u o y N N - 2 A 2 Luke 2:34 “ For the fall and rising o f m any” ; o y M N T - J c c u t u p e ii-A u ; N - A e i H C Ne Ne+yXH ii—fiptuM e e T ® - 6 ri-® nA peeN O C ShO r 163o.'4—7 “ W hat a great re.source (A strength o f w hat magnitude) are the souls o f people who are virgins! ” ; 2 i-xTj - t m h t g ii - J c tu - k ShChass 4 1 :4 9 -5 0 “ On the crown o f your h e a d " ; e q e - T p e r i i - p - ® 2 o y o 2 ii-T A rA n H e 2 o y N
e - N e r i i e p H y . . . K A T A -e e ii-A N O N
e 2 oyN e p t u - r i i (elliptical) 1 Thess 3 :12 “ May He make you abound in love to one another . . . as we (do) to you” (in the m anner o f us to you) (h) (i) Possessive article: n e q H i Mall 24:43 “ His house” {the-related-to-hini-home); ANOK n e n e y u ;o p f i 1 Tim 1:15 “ 1 am Ihe foremost o f them " (1 am the-related-tofirst); N e y u ;o y u ;T . . . N e y p o ShAmel 11 26:6 “ Their windows . . . their doors” (ihe-related-to-them-windowa . . . the-related-to-theni-doom): (ii) iiTA=form ing expan sion element: 2 g n kJiTA—^CAps NTA-y ShlV 61:11 “ Relatives o f iheirs. Some o f their relatives” ; o y 2 o o y T nim iiT O O T -q (collated) Exod 12:48 (rare con.slruciioii) aijroC 112
P H R A S A L
C O N S T R U C T I O N S
O F
E N T I T Y
T E R M S
Ttav dpoEviKov “ Every male o f him ” ; o y b a a . n t g - o y ^ Z a a . ijT A -q ShChass 131:55-56 “The eye o f one o f his slaves” ; ®cmh NTA-q John 5:37 “ His v o ice"; N-eT®-2 Hn NTA-Y Jer 29(49): 10 (quoted in ShAmel II 92; 12) ra Kpunra a trio v “Their secret places”
More restrictive, unidirectional kinds of relationship are optionally expressed by various prepositional phrases 195(i«), and by the appurtenance construction 148 (whose prepersonal form overlaps with the construction of general relationship). 148 The ap p u rte n a n c e co n stru ctio n The construction of ‘appurtenance’ (table 11) MMGA.OC NTe-nccuMjk^ “ The parts of the body” (1 Cor 12:22) expresses the subsumed natural relationship of part to whole, component to system, offshoot to source, etc.— the first term being the part and the second being the whole. It is more restrictive in meaning than general relationship. It is mediated by the maik of appurtenance NTe-/NTjk^= (204). oYnoA.ic NTe-Trak.A.iA.ak.iak. “ A city of G alilee” oynoA .ic NTjk^-c “ A city belonging to it, O ne o f its cities” NTe-/NTA= does not meet the definition o f a preposition 194 in as much as its only functions are as a restrictive expansion o f entity term s and as predicate in the lexically fixed expression g t ^-n t a - (q) “ W hich belongs to (him ).”
The prepersonal state u t 3.= is formally indistinguishable from the expression of general relationship under certain conditions (cf. table 11). Further exam ples; t a i a b h k h N - s p p e n t g —n e c 2 A i ' a n M - n e n N A 2 C or 3:6 “ The new covenant, not in a w ritten code but o f the S pirit” (The new covenant not belonging to writing but related to the Spirit); n jc tu N T e-N iJctu Cant subscript title “ The Song o f Songs” ; neiOYJCAi' N T e-nN O Y T e Acts 28:28 “ This salvation o f G o d ” ; N A pxtuN N T e -n e lA itU N 1 C or 2 :8 "T h e rulers o f this a g e ” ; N A ^ A p e r N T e - T r A A i A A i A Mark 1:9 “ Nazareth o f G alilee” ; o Y M H H u ; e A e N T e - T n o A . e i c Luke 7 : 1 2 “ And a crowd from the city” ; j e N o i K O A O M H N T e - 2 e N u j H p e u j h m e Y -J c i-2 p A -Y 2 N -O Y u;a) ShA m el II 433:13 “ Constructions made by little children playing in the sand” ; k o i n c u n i a n i m N T e - n e n N A Phil 2:1 “ Any participation in the Spirit” ; 2 c u c - ® a i a k o n o c N T e - n N O Y T e 2 C or 6:4 “ As servant(s) o f G o d ” ; m h t N - 2 M2 AA. N T A - q (textual var. N T o o T - q ) Luke 19:13 “ Ten o f his servants” (Ten ser vants belonging to him ); ®2pooY n T A - q S h lll 203:20 “ Any voice from H im ” ; r e t e 5 0 Y C I A N T e - T H Y T N 1 C or 8:9 “ This liberty o f yours” ; o y c m o t M N - o Y 2 A i B e c i J r e - N A - T n e Heb 8:5 “ A copy and shadow o f the things o f heaven"; N c e H n N T e - n N O Y T e 1 Cor 2 :1 0 “ The depths (hidden parts) o f G o d ” ; o y H P N - J t A i - B e K e N T e - n A i c u T Luke 1 5 : 1 7 “ How m any hired servanis belonging to my father"; n 2 A e N - 2 0 0 Y N o 6 N T e - n u j A John 7 :37 "T he last day o f the feast, tlie great day” ; n c A O j q M - n f j A N T e - n N O Y T e Rev 3:1 “ The seven spirits o f G o d ” ; ® p e q - j c i - ® c B t u N T M - n N O Y T e (textual var. N T e - ) John 6:45 “ People taught by G od”
113
ENTITY
TERMS AN D
ENTITY
M arks
G e n e r a l R e l a t io n s h ip
STATEMENTS
TABLE 11 of
and of
M ark
C onstruction T ype
of
A ppu r ten a n c e
R estrictive Expan.sion
Prepersonal
Prenominal G eneral relationship R estricting a sim ple def. entity term ( 'th e ') O therw ise 147(b) A ppurtenance 'Same as appurtenance entity term
N-
P ossessive article in place o f def. article
N-
NTa^=‘
N T e-
NT2i= ^
^Same as general relaiionship except when restricting a simple def.
149 A p p o s itio n . The relationship o f apposition enables one entity term to amplify, describe, identify, name, explicate, etc. another or several others by being placed after it, more or less immediately. Items in apposition speak, in differ ent ways, of the same referent and thus are equatable. a^q-Na^Y e-ta^KcuBoc nqpHpe N-ZeBe.a.ai.ioc “ He saw James the son o f Zebedee" (Mark 1:19) A term in apposition (the son o f Zebedee) has the same syntactic status as the one that it amplifies (James), as though replacing it. Appositional items need not agree in gender, number, determination, or person. For proper nouns in apposition, cf. 129. Exam ples; n N o y r e n e i t u T n A T e N T - j i q - T O Y H o c - t j g b o a . 2 N - N - e T ® - M o o Y T G al 1:1 “ God, the Father, who raised Him from the dead” ; Ic ne5
THE E N T I T Y ST AT E M E NT ( S Y N T A C T I C E Q U I V A L E N T OF THE ENTITY TERM )
150 The nature o f Coptic entity statements. 'Entity statem ents' (clauses and phras es in lieu o f an entity term; substantive clauses; that clauses) are constructions
114
E N T I T Y
S T A T E M E N T
that express action, the content of a proposition, or reported discourse, as an entity and/or target of cross-reference e - ® r p e q - c c u T n for him to choose e-® ccuTn to choose (verbal actor not expressed) JC e-ereTN -czJk^i-cO Y for you to write them Jce-a^q-TcuoyN gboa. 2N -N -e T ® -M o o y T that H e has arisen from the dgad e e NT-3kq-NJkY e - n j c o e i c z N - r e z m how (or that) on the road he had seen the Lord ccuTM nicpaiHA ‘Hear, O Israel’ (hypostasis 142)
such that the construction has in some way the syntax of an entity term. The entity statement as subject expansion of a clause is surveyed in chapter 22, reported discourse in chapter 24. Many entity statements can occur as subject or predicate in nominal sentence patterns nail ji.e n e e-® T peN -cA C A -N eN epH y “ And this m eans/of us to encour age one another" (Rom 1:12) Most are capable of receiving cross-reference, both retrospective (anaphora) and prospective (cataphora) 270, at least in certain constructions. e ^ ® 2 M o o c J k.e N c a ^ o y N a iM
m m o - 1 h c a ^ z B o Y P m m o - ' i M - n i u i a^N n e
e-
“ But sitting on My right or on My left is not Mine to bestow ” (Mark 10:40) [ n e and - q refer back to e - ® Z M o o c , 272] ci^oYON2 EBOA J c e -F p e -n A iic A io c n3l-cun9 eB oA ?N -T niC T ic "That the righteous shall live by faith, is evident (It is evident that the righteous etc.) (Gal 3; 11) [ q - is heralds and anticipates the j c e - clause 486] MiuYCHC ra^p a ^ q -.x o o -c j c e - T M a ^ i e - n e K e i c u r MN-reKMAa^y “ For Moses said, Honor your father and your m other” (Mark 7:10) [ - c her alds and anticipates the j c e - clause] Most can stand in apposition to a dem onstrative pronoun or article phrase n e J c e - o y . a . t u p O N n e “ Corban, which means the fol lowing, that it is an offering ” (Mark 7:11)
K opB a^N e r e - n y f
e - n c o e i T M - n e N e i c u r eT®-oyaLjLB aL naL -^aL pcjN x e —e q — n o A y r e y e ^ - o y M a ^ e y - M o y r e e p o - q j c e - n e i a ^ “ I heard about the
a ii-c c u T M
reputation o f our holy father Apa Haron, namely the fa ct that he was con ducting his career in a place called Peia” (Paphnoute Cephalas, Stories of the Monks of the Desert [BMis 472:24-26]) To a very limited extent, some can be suffixed to a transitive verb or preposi tion as its object; rare.
115
E N T I T Y
T E R M S
A N D
E N T I T Y
S T A T E M E N T S
oypiuM e N-6jk^A.e JC iN -eq-N Z H T -c N-TeqMak^3k.Y “ A man lame since he was in his m other’s womb (from his being in his m other’s womb) (Acts 3:2) 151 Formal classification o f entity statements i. Jc e - and JceKA(jk^)c expanded by a clause Jce-jk^q-ccuTn he chose (directly quoted discourse); that he chose; the fact or idea or statement or possibility that he chose jceK2k^(ak^)c e q e -c c u T n for him to choose, that he might choose ii. def. sing. masc. article or zero article, expanded by r p e - 362 n r p e q - c c u T n the fact of his choosing ® Tpeq-ccuTn his choosing
iii. the preposition e - or n - expanded by
® T pe-
or ^infinitive
e - '’T p e q -c c u T n for him to choose (verbal actor expressed) or N - ® c c u T n to choose (no verbal actor expressed)
e -® ccu T n
iv. clauses expressing i/a n d since (epqpJkN-, e q p x e - , e - N e - ) r e eY y P ^N -fien -o y Jt e q —JCioye “ It is not to be wondered at i f one should be taken stealing” (Prov 6:30) Njk^NOY-c AG eqpJte-ak^TeTN-p-®ppo “ And it would be better if you had reigned” (1 Cor 4 :8)
N - o y o p n H p e jk.N
N jk .N O Y -c
N jk .-q
N 2oyo
e -N e -Y N -o y c u N e
n
-
c ik e
3k.qpe
e-neqMjk.K2 “ It would be much better for him if a millstone were hung round his neck" (M aik 9:42) V. ‘w here’ or e e ‘how, that’ expanded by a relative clause, introduc ing indirect discourse 522
NT-ak^q-Njk^Y e - n j c o e i c 2 N - T e 2 iH “ He declared to them how on the road he had seen the Lord" (Acts 9:27)
jk ^ q -T ik ^ M o -o Y e - e e
vi. clauses in conjunctive conjugation 354 MNNCjk.-NTe-nJCoeic -t--®MToN M-nicpjk.HA “ After the Lord had given Israel rest” (Josh 23:1) vii. reported discourse without x e - (hypostasis 142) T o p o p n TG c c u T M
n i c p i .H A . n J C o G i c n e N N o Y T e
n J C o e ic
OY^t r r e
“The first (commandment) is. Hear, O Israel: the Lord our God. the Lord, is o n e ” (Mark 12:29) viii. clauses in circumstantial conversion, expanding - c in N jk ^ N o Y -c it is a good thing, 6 n t - c find out, and e p o - c find out 426; and expanding 2a^Mor ‘how good it would be if’ 116
E N T IT Y
STA TEM EN T
ix. unconverted nominal sentence after 6 n - 516 M n eq -eN -a^N r-N m Isa 1:3 “ My people has not regard ed who I am " (Isa 1:3) X . c l a u s e s in f o c a l i z i n g c o n v e r s i o n , u n d e r v e r y l i m i t e d s y n t a c t ic c o n d i t io n s
457, 493(34)(66)(67)(68) M noY -6N N -eY -N 3L -p-oY njl-ci “ They did not find out what to do (what they might do) to H im ” (Luke 19:48)
117 Hiraim nui wiiiinaiu"
7
Inflected Modifiers Definition and List of Inflected Modifiers Jk,NO=/NTO= 153 Placement and Word Order
154
Specific Negation o f tlie Inflected Modifier MMa^Te
D EFIN ITIO N
and N - o y c u T
AND
LIST
152
157
158
OF
IN FLEC TED
M O D IFIER S
152 'The s\x 'inflected m odifiers’ a n o = /n to = (my)self mminmmo® . . . (my)self . • • alone o y 2^a(t)= only . . . THp= . . . all 2 tuuj= . . , too only occur in a prepersonal state 30 and are inflected by the personal suffixes 85. jk.No=/NTos (m y)seIf (yourself, himself, etc.), fo r (my) part, personally, (I) fo r one 153 F or the invariable enclitic N Toq, cf. 156
MMINMMOC (varS. MMINGMMOs, MMINOYMMOs, MOYNMMO=, MU)NMMO=) (m y)self own (often reflex.) (var. alone, only, mere, (m y)self (yourself, himself, etc.), own (sometimes reflex.) . . . mayaa(t)s an AAA.Anot only . . . but a ls o ____ For the absolute state mate, cf. 158. oyaa(t )=
only, alone
For the absolute state
oytuT. cf. 158
THp= . . all, entirely, a l l . . . , utter; also utterly (as though adverb, relat ing to an adjacent verb) n - ... thp» the whole . . . ; o y - ■• THp»a whole .. .; gen - ... th p -o y all sorts o f. . . ; ... (cNiY) ■'■Hp-OY (two) whole .. . ; cf. nTH p-c| (invariable article phrase) the entirety, the universe to nav; e-UTHp-q wholly, at all
775
I N F L E C T E D
M O D I F I E R S
2 cucL)« too, fo r (my) pari e T e - 2tutu= n e (which is) real, genuine, natural (Luke 1 6 :11. Rom 11:21). F or the invariable enclitic j t u t u q , cf. 156.
They express categories o f distinctive confrontation (exclusive oyAA®, M M i N M M o ® ; inclusive z c u c u ® , a n q s / n t o :*) o r integral totality ( t h p * ) . M odifier is linked to its target o f modification by agreeing with it in person/number/(gender), and occurs in the same textual environment though not necessarily adjacent (for placem ent and word order, cf. 154). The target o f modification is either a personal morph of any kind A i^^coyuJN -e ANOK “ I have known you personally” (Shlll 21:9) NToic mayaa- k “ Thou (sing, masc.) alone” (Rev 15:4) N A N o y - ® T H p - e T A u p s e e p e “ Thou (sing, fern.) art all fair, my com pan ion” (Cant 4:7) TecjnoA.ic PiMiNKiMo-ci “ His own city” (M att 9:1) n jc o e ic oyAA-ci “ The only L ord” (Jude 4) M N - o y M H H c y e a^ycu n m m a - I z c u - ® “W ith many and with m yself as w ell” (Rom 16:2) - } - A a ) p e A N - o y c u T N © e 2 c u c u - i i N T - ^ q - t n a - n Acts 1 1 : 1 7 “The same gift as He gave to us too” NTcuTN THp-TN “ All o f you (pi.)” (SHIII 139:21) na T “These too, for their part” (M aik 4; 16) or the addressee o f an imperative (2d person) 6e N c to -i T H p-TN I T 6 A e io - e i 6e g ' - o y c o n N ecN H y “ So, despise me, all of you (pi.); condemn m e, all (of you) together, brethren” (ShAmel I 7 0 :4 -5 ) TGNoy 6 e (textual var, ccu tg m N cA -ne^pooy N-TGK2 M2AA “ And now h eaik en ,/o r thy (sing, m asc.)part, to the voice of thine handm aid” (1 Sam 18:22) BiUK ?cu T -THyTN 6 -n A M A -N -e ^ o o A e “ You [pi.] go into my vineyard too” (Matt 20:4) KATAA.AA.ei
or a non-personal entity term (which motivates a 3d person suffix). neicuT M A Y A A - q Matt 24:36 “ The Father only,” t p a a i a a i a T H p - c M att 4:23 “ All Galilee,” 2 e N 6 u ) B e M A y A A - y Matt 21:19 “ Leaves only,” ® o e i K M A y A A - q Matt 4 :4 “ Bread alone,” n e T p o c 2 U ) c u - q o n John 18:18 “ Peter also,” n a T 2 c u - o y Rom 11:31 “They (These) also,” m n n c a - o v g b o t h c N A y H q p o M T T H p - o y S hiv 7 1 :4— 5 “ After one month, o r two or three at m ost,” z o e i N e t h p - o y n g ShAmel II 16:8 “They are all o f such a kind” Inflections: (i) a n o k , n t o k , n t o , N T o q , n t o c , a n o n , n t c u t n , N ro o y 153; (ii) i^MiNMMOs like the preposition epo=; (Hi) m a y a a t , m a y a a k (var.
119
I N F L E C
Ma^Y^kJkTK),
T E U
M O D I F I E R S
(Ma^yaiaiTc)),
(Ma^Y^^J^TN), Ma^YJkTTHYTN (Ma^YJ^J^TTHYTN),
(Ma^Y^kJ^Tc), Ma^YJ^JkN Ma^Y^^Y (Ma^Y^^J^ToY);
(iv)
o y x x T , o y x x K . o y x x r e , oYJ^J^q (var. OYa^a^TCj), oYa^a^c (oy^^J^tc), oy^^J^n. OY^iTTHYTN
(oY^kJkTTHYTN), OY^kJ^TOY;
(vi) 2CUCUC, 2CUCUN, 2CUTTHYTN, 2CUOY
THpC, T H p N . T H p T N , T H p o Y :
(v) THpT, T H p K , TH p e ,
(vET. 2CU),
THpC),
ZIOIUTG, 2CUCUq,
Further examples: u;A N T e-N eip iK e T H p -o y uptune S h lll 215:24-25 “Until all these turning motions occur” ; oyu;A Jce N -c tu B e n e nAl N -N io y jtA l 2 < ^ -o y ShLefort 4 1 :5 -6 “This is a laughing matter to the Jews also"; NTe-N-eT®-MMAy 2t u - o y ON N o jt-q e - 2eN 2 NAAy ey-M n u ;A MMO-q ShAmfil 1 77:10 “And they too will put it into vessels that are worthy o f it” ; A y-N A y j c e - . . . P in e - i c a a g e-nJCOl NM-NeqMAeHTHC AAAA NCqMAeHTHC MMAyAA-y N e-N T -A y-B tU K John 6:22 “They saw that. . . Jesus had not entered the boat with His disciples, but that it was His disciples alone who had gone away” ; ^ - 2 eNNHCTiA m n -z g n u p a h a M N-2 eN K e2 BHye T H p -o y e -N A u p tu -o y ShWess9 172t/;4-9 “In fasting, prayer, and many other things of all kinds”; N K O oye 2 ‘'^ ~ o y e y u ;A N -T M -6 a) 2 N—TeyM NT-AT-NA2TE c e - N A - T o 6 - o y Rom 11:23 “And even the others, if they do not persist in their unbelief, will be grafted in” ; Aytu n-eT ® -N A -oyoM -N T n-eT®-MMAy 2 tu tu -t| o n n a - o ) n 2 g t b h h t - ® John 6:57 “ And also the one who eats Me will live because o f Me"; n -e T ® -n ic T e y e e p o - ^ N e2 BHye e -f'-e ip e MMO-Oy nH 2^040-^1 o n N A -A A -y John 14:12 “The one who believes in Me will also do the works that I do” ; N A -eiep ocoA .yM A T H p -o y Mark 1:5 “ All the people o f Jerusalem” ; Aytu N oy-T T H p -o y N o y -K n e John 17:10 “ And all M ine are Thine” ; nim 2 fJ -N -e T ® -o y e u ;-J c e -® n e e o o y e p o - o y n g t ^ - n a - j c o o - c an J c e - 2o e iN e t h p - o y Ne ShAmel II 16:7-8 “ Among those who would say evil things about them, who would not claim that they are all o f such a kind?” ; MN~2eN K O oye T H p -o y N Tei2 e ShIV 14:21-22 “ And other things of all kinds like this” ; M n o y -K T o -o y gb oa. M -n eK w e n-eT® -2oX S T H p ^ ShGue 161/7;43-162o; 1 “They did not turn away from Your truth, O You who are utterly sw eet” ; o y ne't--N A -'t--® 2 Hy M M o-q eiu ;A N -p -® N O B e NCA-®TpA--t--®oce m m o -i MAyAA-T ShChass 7 1 :3-8 “If 1 sin, what shall I gain if not only to lose my own s e l f ; N e q - 2 M-nMA eT®-MMAy MAyAA-q Matt 14:23 “ He was thereotonc” ; A q - j t iT - o y MMAyAA-y E JC N -oyT ooy e q - J c o c e Mark 9:2 “ He led them up a high mouniain apart by themselves"; mh n t k - o y g b o a 2 cua)-K o n n - t p a a ia a i a John 1:52 “ Are you from Galilee too?" ; m h o o t e 2 t u - o y N c e-T A 2 M -eK N T e - o y T o y lo uptune NA-K Luke 14:12 “Lest they also invite you in return, and you be repaid” ; N -G N T -A N -ctuT M e p o - o y j t e - A y - u p t u n e 2 N-KAc))ApNAoyM A p i - c o y 2 t u - o y 2 M -nelM A 2 M-neK't'Me Luke 4:23 “What we have heard happened in Capernaum, do here also in your own village” ; pAKOTe an o y A A T ^ A e c ))e c o c ShChass 129:36-38 “ Notyui/Alexandria or Ephesus”
153 a^No=/NTo= ‘(my)self, for (my) part, personally, (I) for one’ differs formally from the others in having a distinct 1st person stem xuo= and in its unusual 1st sing, termination - k (in a^NoK). In this book the suffixes are written solid with the base, so that the inflected modifier is homonymous with the personal independent 77: a^NoK, n to k , n t o , NToq, n t o c , a^NoN, n tcu tn , n to o y The two homonyms are distinguished as follows: 120
I N F L E C T E D
M O D I F I E R S
(a) The personal independent can occur as the very first item in a clause; the inflected m odifier cannot 154.
NToq A e neJCA-q ApophPatr 146 (Chaine 32:22) “ But as for him, he said” [per sonal independent]
e-f—n i c T e y e e p o - q ApophPatr 146 (ed. C haine 32:22) “‘My C hrist in W hom 1 personally believe” [inflected modifier] n A x p c ANOK
(b) The personal independent occurs as an essential elem ent in several sentence patterns and phrasal syntagm s 77; the inflected m odifier does not. N A M e N T O K n e n u ; H p e M - n N o y T e Matt 14:33 “ Truly it is You who are the Son o f G od” ( n t ok [personal independent] as predicate in nominal sentence Pattern 6a [276])
PLACEM ENT AND W O R D O R D ER
154 Lilce enclitic conjunctions 235(b) and initial attitude markers 239, inflected modifiers cannot occur in first position within their clause. Three can eit/ier precede or fo llo w the modified item: 3i N o = / n t o = , t h p =, and ntooy
“ And how will they, for their part,
e Y ~ N a i-p -® B o A .
“ How will they, for their part,
H Na^qp N - g e e Y -N a ^ -p -® B o A .
escape?” (S hlll 75:12) Na^qp N - 2 e
n to o y
escap e?” (S hlll 75:12, textual var.) t g t n
- c o o y n T H p-T N
“ You all know ” (1 John 2:20) “ Behold, ye all know ” (Job 27:12)
e iczH iH T e T H p - T N T E T N - c o o Y N t
3i T T e T e T N z e z c u t - t h o y t n
T Jit
“ So you also” (Luke 17:10)
2 C U T -T H Y T N T e T E T N Z e “ So you also” (M att 23:28)
Further exarnple.s; A y t u o m a a n o k e ' [ ' - N A —b c u k e p o —q n t c u t n m n - u ; 6 o m MMtu-TN e -® ^ i EMMAy John 8:21 “ And where I personally am going, for your part you cannot com e” ; j t e K A C T H p - o y e y e - u p t u n e N - o y A John 17:21 “ T hat they may o //b e o n e "; j c g k a c 2 t u T - T H y T N e r e T N e - n i c r e y e John 19:35 “ T hat you o t o may believe” ; n -e r^ - N A - J c p o -[■-NA--f- N A - q e - * T p e q - 2 M o o c 2 i T o y t u - i 2 i-n a iepoN oc N ee N T - A i- J tp o A y t u a i - j m o o c 2 ' " ' ' o y N - n A e i t u T 2 ' n e q e p o N o c Rev 3:21 “ He who conquers, I will gram him to sit with Me on M y throne, as I conquered and sat down with My Father on His throne”
The other three only fo llo w the modified item: m3iY2^^(t)=. o y 2^j^(t)=, and MMiNMMo^ (for examples, cf. above 152). 155 An inflected m odifier and an enclitic conjunction 235(b)/initial attitude m ark er 239, or two inflected modifiers, can occur side by side. Such combinations are subject to limitations in com patibility and word order, depending on the selection o f modifier. Exam ples: e T B e -n A i NKenpocJ)HTHC 2 t u - o y o n e y - n p o r p e n e i N - o y o N nim S h lll 6 6 :8 -9 ‘‘On this subject, m oreover, also the prophets too exhort every o n e"; nai A e T H p - o y N T -A y -o y o )N 2 e b o a M N -N e y e p n y Athanasius, Life o f St. Anthony 9 (Garitte 15:1) “A n d all o f these things appeared one after the other” ; a g i - jcit -® 121
I N F L E C T E D
M O D I F I E R S
n6 onc m m in m m o - i 2 P ^ ' S h lll 146:24—25 “ 1 alone have done violence to my own self with every so n o f iniquity” ; peTi k o c 2 U ) -o y T H p - o Y ShAinel 1 3 7 3 :9 -1 0 "A ll the heretics, w o "
Com paiibilities, word order, frequency, syntax, and m eanings of ihe inflected modifiers are further described in Shisha-Halevy, Coptic G ram m atical Categories (chapter 6).
156
The invariable enclitics S ro q ‘m oreover’, etc. and 2
SP EC IFIC
N EG A TIO N
OF
THE
IN FLEC T E D
M O D IFIER
157 T he gram m atical relationship o f an inflected m odifier, as an individual ele m ent o f the text, can be negatived by the enclitic xn TH p-TN jiN “ N ot every one o f . . . ” (John 13: JO) w hich usually com es after the m odifier; optionally, negative n - is also pre fixed to the m odifier- E.g. n t c u t n 2 c u t - t h y t n t £ t n - t b b h y N - T H p - T N a^N (textual var. t h p - t n a n ) John 13:10 “ A nd you are clean, but not every one o /y o u .”
M M a ^ re A N D N - o y i u T
158 A kin to the inflected m odifier are tw o non-inflected m odifiers, i^Ma^re and N - o y c u T (var. o y c u T , optional fem. N - o y c n T e ) . T hey are related in origin, form , and m eaning to (M)Ma>.yaiai(T)= and oya^a^(T)=, respectively.
(a) MMATe ‘o n ly ’ is an adverbial m odifier 194. It m ostly m odifies a preceding verbal clause nexus but can also m odify other individual elem ents o f the text. (C orrelative pairs: . . . a^N MMa^re x w x . . . “ N o t only . . . but also aiN x w x . . . KiMJiTe “ N o t . . . but only . . . g im h t i e - . . . MMa^Te o r Nca^. . . M M a ^ T G “ E xcept for . . . alo n e.” ) Examples; x e K i c e y e - x w z MMATe e - n T o n N - N e q 2 o e iT e M att 14:36 “ T hat they might only touch the fringe o f His garm ent” ; AXAp NT-AY -M M O oYT-q (i.e. - A y M ooY T -q) AN E T B e-N eqN O B e m m a tg ShAmSI II 18:9 “ Achar was slain not only because o f his sins” ; a n o k T A n p ic ic o y w e e r e Jte-N -A N O K a n m m a te n e a a a a ANOK N M -n itu T e N T -A q - T A o y o - e i John 8:16 “ As for Me, My judgm ent is true, for it is not a matter o f Me alone, but o f Me and the Father who sent M e” ; nAi m m a tg -[■ -o Y e u p -e m e e p o - q NTe-THyTN Gal 3:2 “ 1 wish to know only this from you”
(b) N -oycuT , rare fem . N - o y c u r e 'sin g le, sam e’ (var. w ithout n - ) is an attribu
I
tive phrase. It m odifies indef. and def. article phrases, proper nouns, oya^, and n io y X , and follow s the target o f m odification (neg. . . . xm M -o y iu T “ n o t . . . alone . . . . ” ). N -o y c u T is com parable to the m odifier in the m ediated attribu tive construction o f the noun 99. 122
I N F L E C T E D
M O D I F I E R S
Examples; o y o e iK N - o y t u T (var. o y o e iK o y tu T ) Marie 8:14 “ A single loaf of bread” ; k a n e i- o y H 2 2f^~2 E fJ"''onoc N - o y t u T M N - 2 eN ptuM e ShAmel I 7:7—8 “Even if I live in locations shared in common with other people"; nujHpe N -oytuT (textual var. c y p - N - o y t u T ) John 1:18 “The only Son” ; n e q u ;H p e r i- o y t u T John 3:16 “His only Son” ; A - r e q o y e p H T e N - o y t u r e eye e 2 PAi M n e -T M o y A ic a o e c - n H T NMMA-q e q - A u ;e Martyrdom and Miracles of St. Mercurius the General (BMis 257;8-IO) “One cfhh feet (?) tangled in the saddle cloth, and the mule continued to run with him hanging” ; H e i'e M + ic N - o y u )T ShChass 47:37-38 "These several oppressions” ; -f-AoupeA N - o y t u r Acts 11:17 “The same gift” ; e i c A K AN N - o y < D T n e N T - A q - T o y j c o - q Interpretation de la resurrection (Leyd 423 middle:3-4) “It is not Isaac alone that He saved’’; M e e y e e - o y A N - o y t u r 2 M—n x o e i c Phil 4:2 “ Agree (Think one single thing) in the Lord” ; n e o o y n e so A . 2 iT M - n io y A i i - o y t u T John 5:44 “The glory that comes from ihe One who is Unique” TT)V So^av TTiv n a p a toC hovod
123
8
Verbs Definition o f the Coptic Verb
159
Actualizations o f the Verb Lexeme 160 Infinitive 160 Specific negation o f lexical content Stative 162 Imperative 163 Construct Participle 164 Conjugation
161
165
Transitivity: Direct Object Syntax o f the Infinitive 166 Transitive and Intransitive 166 M utable Transitives 167 Contrast o f Infinitive and Stative 168 Objectless Transitive Infinitives 169 Direct Object o f the Immutable Infinitive 170 D irect Object Constructions after the Mutable Infinitive 171 Double-object Causative Verbs t m m o 172 D o u b l e - o b j e c t 173 Ingressive Meaning o f the Transitive Infinitive 174 Dynamic Passive ‘Is Being B uilt’ c 6 - k.u j t M o-q 175 Reflexive Meaning 176 Reciprocity 177 Predicative Expansion o f the Direct Object 178 N - o f Incidental Predication 179 Compound Verbs 180 Expansions o f the Verb: Adverbial, Combinative, and Rectional W ord Order: Expansion Elements after the Verb 182 Verbal Preextensions (p rrice-, p q ppn-, p2 0 Y6~) Verbal Auxiliaries
(n a-,
o)-, etc.)
Verbs o f Incomplete Predication
184 185
The M orphology of the Verb 186 Formal Classes o f the Egyptian Coptic Verb The consonantal skeleton o f the infinitive The distinctive vowel 188
124
183
186 187
181
A C T U A L I Z A T I O N S
Allomorphs o f the absolute infinitive: prenominal and prepersonal states 189 The stative 190 The Form o f Greco-Coptic Verbs 191 Appendix: Illustration o f the Seven Main Formal Classes o f the Egyptian Coptic Verb 193
D E F IN IT IO N O F T H E C O P T IC V E R B For verbal morphology, cf. 186-93. For the tense system, cf. chapter 25.
159 ‘V erbs’ are a very numerous word class whose distinguishing features are i. that they are ‘lexemes i.e. basic units o f Coptic vocabulary whose m ean ings are particular rather than general (as distinct from the general terms that express grammatical categories, such as determinators, specifiers, personal morphs, etc. 91), and also ii. that their basic form, the ‘infinitive’, expresses action, process, and/or entry into a state and can be conjugated 165; e.g. c t u r n ‘choose’, n iC T e y e ‘believe’, m o y ‘d ie ’, o y b jiu ; ‘turn w hite’; j^ c -c tu T n “ She chose,” T t J - n i CT6Y6 “ We believe,” etc.
A C T U A L IZ A T IO N S O F T H E V E R B L E X E M E IN F IN IT IV E
160 Considered abstractly, apart from actual sentences, Coptic verb lexemes are just virtual possibilities stored in memory for eventual utterance (terms in an abstract, potential linguistic repertory). The occunence o f a lexeme in an actu al written or spoken text is its ‘actualization’. The main actualization form o f the verb is called the ‘infinitive’. (Syntactically, the infinitive can be identified as that class o f morphs which occurs as the third essential constituent o f nondurative conjugation 325.) In m odem dictionaries, verbs are filed under their infinitive form. The formation o f the infinitive is described in 187-89. V erb lexemes are actualized as infinitives in several different syntactic functions: (i) durative conjugation (the ‘durative infinitive’ 308); (ii) non-durative con jugation (the ‘non-durative infinitive’ 32&); (Hi) masc. verbal noun 105(c) (in the word class o f gendered com m on noun 104); (iv) lexical completion after the future auxiliary n a - ‘is going to ’ 311 or other auxiliaries 184 such as o y e u ) - ‘want to ’. Furthermore (v), the ordinary affirmative imperative (chap ter 16) has the same form(s) as the infinitive.
125
VERBS 161
Specific negation o f the lexical content (as such) o f an infinitive is expressed by the negator t m - 1 0 5 ( c ) . E.g. n T M - - t - - ® 6 t u N T a 6 N A - q ShAmel II 233:13 “ Not making Him angry” ; n r M - o n - i c ApophPatr 105 (Chalne 25:2 = Z 298:7) “ Not to think highly o f oneself” 1 8 1 ( f ) ; NAN0Y-®TM-0 Y6 M-®Aq OYA6 6 -® T M -c 6 -® H p n Rom 14:21 “ It is right not to eat meat or drink w ine” ; NaNOY-nTM -u;iNe n 2o y o e-® q;iN e ShAmel I 38:1 “ Not seeking is better than seeking.” For the compatibility o f t m - and r p e - , cf. 3 5 9 .
S T A T IV E
162 Some Egyptian Coptic verbs are also actualized in a ‘stative’ form, also called ‘qualitative’, which expresses being-in-a-state. The stative describes the enduring state o f a subject in a condition that is associated with verbal action or verbally expressed acquisition o f a quality. E.g. c o r n ‘is chosen’ (is in the enduring state o f having been chosen), is exquisite’; m o o y t ‘is dead’ (is in the state o f having died); o y o b u ; ‘is w hite’. In modem dictionary entries, the stative form is identified by a raised dagger: cottt^, MOoyT*, etc. All statives, except the five listed in 168(c), can contrast in meaning one way or another with the corresponding infinitive; cf. 168(a)(b). E.g. 't’-coTTf^: 't’-c c u T n 't’-M ooyT^: 't’-MOY 't’-OYOBup^: 't’-OYBAty
I am exquisite^, chosen^: I choose I am dead^: I die I am white^: I become white
The formation o f the stative is described in 190. The only syntactic function o f the stative is predicate in the durative sentence; its presence signals nexus 248. For a few statives, no corresponding infiniiive is attested in Sahidic, e.g.
‘is bad’.
IM P E R A T IV E
163 Most affirmative imperatives are identical in form to the infinitive, and all negatives are marked by prefixed n n p - or M n c u p 6 - (chapter 16). Ten Egyptian Coptic verbs occur in a special form expressing affirmative impera tive 366; e.g. a n a y “ Look” corresponding to the infinitive n a y ‘see’.
C O N S T R U C T P A R T IC IP L E
164 A fourth actualization of the verb is a descriptive noun called the ‘construct participle’ (participium coniunctum, ‘p .c .’); it is a nominal component form ing composite genderless com m on nouns 122. Only a small number of Egyptian Coptic verBs occur in this form. 126
t r a n s i t i v i t y
:
d i r e c t
o b j e c t
s y n t a x
C O N JU G A T IO N 165 ‘Conjugation ’ (the formal marking of verbs to indicate and express the actor [subject]) is accomplished not by vaiying the form o f the verb itself 186, but rather (i) by suffixation of the subject to a conjugation base or mutable con verter, or (ii) union o f the verb with the personal subject prefixes o f the durative sentence 78, or (Hi) by occurrence o f the subject in the appropriate posi tion of a conjugation pattern that contains no base 317. E.g. (i) ^ - c c u r n he chose, A-Tec?LMe c c u r n the woman chose (where a is the past tense conju gation base); (ii) q - c t u r n he chooses; (Hi) T6c?iM e c c u rn the woman chooses. The conjugation patterns are described in chapters 14 and 15. Two or more infinitive lexemes as such can be linked by conjunction (Aytu. h , etc.) within the conjugation pattern. E.g. e - M N - o y A . n — o y t U T Jce-Miuj— t U M C Aytu qtUTG EBOA ShWess9 87<7.-30-33 “Without there being a single one who did not sink and perish” ; e Y q ^ J ^ N - J C N O Y - K h j c n o y - t n ShAmel II 528:7 “If they ask you or ask us” ; i H T i - * T p e Y - c u p J i . h t c u m e p o - O Y ShAmdl II 505:5 “Instead of strengthening and closing them.”
T R A N S IT IV IT Y : D IR E C T O B JE C T S Y N T A X O F T H E IN F IN IT IV E TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE
166 Every infinitive by its very nature belongs to one or the other of two syntactic classes, transitives and iniransitives, according to the following definition. (a) ‘Transitive’ infinitives are those which at the speaker’s choice can be con structed so as to express action directed at a ‘direct object’, i.e. at a receiver or goal o f action. A direct object follows the infinitive. E.g. a y - n a y e -n q p H p e u;h M . . . AY-oyuJN n - n g y a z u ju jp Matt 2:11 ’’They saw the c h ild . . . They opened their treasures"; 2 HpcuAHC r^p n a - u ; i n 6 N CA-nqjHpe qpHM Matt 2:13 “ Herod is about to search fo r the ch ild ” ; a y - c c u t t t n - c t6 < |) a n o c Acts 6:5 “They chose Stephen.” By this definition, n ay , oy^un, qpiNs, and c c u rn (‘see, open, search, choose’) are classed as transitives, even though they can also occur without direct object. The direct objects in these Coptic examples (the child, their treasures, etc.) are marked as such by an appropri ate preposition ( e - , n - , n c a - ) ; each transitive infinitive has its own particu lar preposition(s) that mark objects. Furthermore, with mutable infinitives 167, under certain conditions a direct object can or must be immediately suf fixed to the infinitive instead o f being mediated by a preposition; cf. 171. E.g. A q -C e rn -M N T -C N O O Y C Luke 6:13 “He chose twelve”; n 6 y - 1 '- ® cbcu Acts 5:21 “They taught {gave teachings)”; 6-®TAico-q Matt 2:13 “ To 127
VERBS
destroy H im ." (Transitivity is also a property of the suffixally conjugated verboid oY N Te- 383.) By the definition used here, transitivity or intransitivity does not just refer to the construction in which a verb happens to occur in one sentence or another; but rather, to the verb’s potential compatibility with the direct object con struction— its ability to take a direct object— as a permanent feature o f its lex ical character. In other words, transitivity is here defined as the essential prop erty of a lexical subclass of verbs, not an incidental feature of usage in one par ticular sentence or another. (b)
‘Intransitives' are those whose infinitive cannot, under any circumstances, be constructed so as to express action directed at a direct object (receiver or goal of action). E.g. oyBAup ‘turn w hite’, ‘rise’. Crum, Coptic Dictionary (p.vii) uses ‘transitive’ and ‘intransitive’ in quite different
m u t a b l e
t r a n s it iv e s
167 ‘M utable’ transitive infinitives are those which occur as a set of allomorphs called 'states’ 30: (i) ‘absolute’ state, (ii) ‘prenom inal’ state, and (Hi) ‘preper son a l’ state. (Traditionally these are called status absolutus, status constructus, and status pronominalis.) The Three States of the Mutable Transitive Infinitive (Examples) (i)
(ii)
c c u rn KCUT
c e rn -
TAMO
KGTTAM e-
jc ic e
JcecT -
COACA
c Kc a -
e ip e
P-
(iii) corns KOT* TAMOs JCA.CT* c K ccuas
choose build inform raise console make, do
Direct objects after the absolute state (c c u rn ) must be mediated by the prepo sition n - / m m o » (e.g. A q - i p e n - o y c c u t 6 Luke 1:68 “ He has wrought redemption” ; 't’-T A M o mmcu - t n 1 Cor 12:3 “ I tell you.” ) Direct objects after the prenom inal state ( c e r n - ) and prepersonal state (c o rn = ) must be suffixed, as follows:
prenominal
determinator pronoun 44, specifier pronoun 63, article phrase 43, specifier phrase 64, proper noun 126, or possessed noun 138 (after some prenominal states, also the 2d pi. alternant personal suffix - th y tn 85)
prepersonal
personal intermediate 80, 82 or suffix 85 (with some further allomorphic alternations)
128
t r a n s i t i v i t y
:
d i r e c t
o b j e c t
s y n t a x
Examples: (prenominals) Aq-ceTM-NA'f Luke 18:23 “He heard this” ; M noyTAMe-AAAY Luke 9:36 “They lold no one” ; A q-T e 2 M-OYMHHq;e Luke 14:16 “He invited many (a crowd)” ; M n q - p - A A A Y n - 6 o m Mark 6:5 “He did no mighty work” : Aq-KA-BApABBAC NA-y gb oa Mark 15:15 “He released for them Barabbas” ; iq -K A -T O O T -q eijcN-NcqBAA. Mark 8:25 “He laid His hands upon his eyes” ; A f - c e T n - T H Y T N John 15:19 “I chose you” ; (prepersonals) n t o k A K -coT T f^ Wis 9:7 “Thou hast chosen me” ; iY - c e n c c u n - q Matt 8:34 “They entreated him” ; n o p K - q Matt 18:9 “Pluck it out”
The occurrence of these three states with a direct object is regulated in accord with the Stem-Jemstedt rule 171. All other infinitives are classified as ‘im m utable’. i.e. occurring only in the absolute state. These include the remaining transitives and all the intransitives.
CONTRAST
OF
IN FIN IT IV E
AND
STA TIVE
168 The contrast between infinitive and stative (for verbs that occur in both forms) is clearest in the durative sentence, which is the only environment where both forms can, according to the speaker’s choice, occur and replace one another. The contrastive meanings of infinitive and stative fall into three patterns, as follows. (a) Transitives. The infinitive expresses action; and the stative expresses a descriptive, static passive meaning— i.e. the enduring state of a subject after it has finished undergoing or receiving some action. They choose They are chosen (state), are exquisite
c 6 - c c u T n (in fin .)
c 6 - c o r n ^ (stat.) C 6 -M O Y 2 (in fin .)
C6 -M 62^ (stat.) C 6 - KCOT (in fin .)
C6-KHT^ (stat.)
They fill They are fu ll They build They are built (state), are situated, are established
c e - C M o y (infin.)
c6-cM3i3iT^ or c6-cMAM3i3iT^ (stat.)
They praise They are praiseworthy, are blessed
The stative of transitive verbs expresses a static passive meaning as distinct from the dynamic (process-oriented) passive meaning of the 3d pi. construction described in 175: q-KHT^ “ It is built/situated” (static passive) versus C 6 - K c u T M M o -q “ It is being built/established” (dynamic passive, in process). (b) Ordinary intransitives. The infinitive expresses process or entiy into a state; and the stative describes the enduring state of the subject after the process has come to an end or the quality has been acquired. c e - q j o o y e (infin.) c e - q p o y c u o y ^ (stat.)
They become dry, dry out They are d iy 129
VERBS
ce-oYBAup (infin.) c e - o y o B iy ^ (stat.)
They turn white, whiten They are white
C6-MOY (infin.) c 6 - m o o y t^ (stal.)
They die They are dead
C6 - 2 CUN (infin.) C6 - 2 HN^ (stat.)
They approach They are near
Descriptive predication (corresponding to adjectives in Western Indo-European lan guages) is also expressed by three oiher means: suffixally conjugated verboids of qual ity 376, NANOY-q “He/It is good” ; the stative construction o n - with incidental pred icate 179, q - o n - * n o 6 “He/It is great” ; and the nominal sentence predicate of descrip tion 292(b), OYN06 n e “He/It is great.” In some instances these constructions come very close in meaning, forming synonyms: oy Jtrieo N ne/NANOY-q “It is good” ; OYKOY'f n e / q - c o B K “It is small” : N A q ;u )-q /q -o q ; “ It is much” ; NAAA-q/q-o n - * n o 6 “It is great.”
(c) Intransitives with a stative o f ongoing motion. O f the intransitive verbs that signify motion, a group of five verbs stands apart: BcUK, BHic^ go 61, NHY^ come ncuT, nHT^ run 2 6, fa ll (also ?6 6 - , 2 hy^ e -fi nd) 2 CUA, fly W hen any o f these five is the predicate of a durative sentence only the stative occurs, and it expresses ongoing (durative) motion. The infinitives of this group only occur in non-durative construction 328. Thus Durative Non-durative
stative only infinitive only
q-BHic^ ^q-Bcuic
E.g. -t--nHT^ “ 1 run” ; N6Y-BHict “ They went, were going” ; c - n h y ^ “ It is coming, will com e” ; and A i-n c u r “ I ran” ; ay~b^'<^ “They w ent” ; a c - 6 i “ It came.” There are no sentences in which these infinitives and statives could, by the speaker’s choice, replace one another and contrast in meaning. (But the other verbs signifying motion are ordinary intransitives 168[b] and do not belong to this group, e.g. q - 2 cuN “He approaches’, q - 2 HNt near.” ) Yet, the infinitives of this group occur in durative conjugation after OYti) e q - ‘finish’ 185(a) and after a verbal preextension 183 (e.g. q - p z o y e - n to x 2 U)to-q Nfiei-nMATOi ShAmel I 276:10 “Even more so, the soldier will generally flee”).
O BJECTLESS
T R A N S ITIV E
IN FIN ITIV ES
169 The objectless transitive infinitive 3L-nNOYT6 ccuTM “God heard” (Ps 77[78]:59) 130
t r a n s i t i v i t y
:
d i r e c t
o b j e c t
s y n t a x
expresses transitive action directed at an unmentioned receiver or goal. Cf. also 181(b)(ii). E.g. A e a y ~ c i M ark 8:8 “They ate (some unspec ified food) and were satisfied” ; c e -J tc u r^ p N - c e - e i p e a n M atl 23:3 “They say and they do not d o " (i.e. perform the action of saying things but not of doing things); m h N T - a ^ - o Y a ^ ^ n 6 N A - q e - ® o Y c u M John 4:33 “ Has any one brought (anything) to Him to e a t? ” An infinitive of the transitive class without direct object construction is ambiguous, for it can be understood either as an objectless transitive or as an ingressive 174; e.g. Aq-MOY2 “ He filled (something unnamed)” and “ He became full.” These two interpretations are distinguished only by context. (Crum, Coptic Dictionary p. vii, mislabels both of these meanings intransitive.) For the attributive circumstantial clause modifying an unexpressed object (NNeTN-oycuM eBOA N2HT-OY eq-oycuTExod 12:9 “You shall not eat from ihem anything lhal is raw”), cf. 431. A semantically empty direct object is also expressed by (i) the pronoun oyoN 59, e.g. n -e x * - u ;iN e q-NA~ 2 e e - o y O N Matt 7:8 “The one who seeks will find” ; (it) a 3d pi. personal morph, e.g. NToq r ip n e-q;A q-M 0K 2-0 y Ayu) N eq-T A 20-0y e-neyM A Job 5:18 auTO^ yap dXyelv noiel, Koi naXiv dnoKaBicTrjciv “For it is He who causes pain and v/horesioredagam ”-, KATA-nccuNT N-NioyAAi e - * K 0 0 c - 0 y
John 19:40 KaBwi; £6o? ic riv xoi? ’Iou6aioi? ivxacpia^eiv “ As is the burial custom of the Jews (According to the Jews’ custom to bury)."
D IR EC T
O BJECT
OF
TH E
IM M U TA BLE
IN FIN IT IV E
170 Direct objects after an immutable infinitive are always marked and mediated by a preposition that marks direct object function for that particular verb; co occurrence with a particular direct object preposition is a characteristic of the verb’s phraseology, 166. E.g. c 6 - q p i N 6 e p c u - T N 1 Cor 16:19 “ They greet (qpiN6 6 - ) you” ; 6TB6-OY T6^ir6N 6A KCUT6 nca-oym 3i6IN M ark 8:12 “ Why does this generation seek (iccure Nca^-) a sig n ?” D IR EC T
O BJECT
i n f i n i t i v e
: t h e
C O N STR U C T IO N S s t e r n
AFTER
-je r n s t e d t
TH E
M UTABLE
r u l e
171 When the mutable infinitive 167 is expanded by a direct object, it has two pos sible constructions: (i) object mediated by the preposition n-/m m o= 203 after the absolute state; (ii) object directly suffixed to the prenominal or preperson al state. Thus with NOYJte ( 6 b o a) ‘cast (out), divorce’ the options are: Before a Non-personal Object (i) (ii)
Absolute state Bound states
NOYJte n N 6 Jt-
Before a Personal Object NOYJte mmo = nojc =
131
VERBS
T he choice betw een the absolute and bound states is regulated as follow s.
{a) Suffixation o f objects having zero determination. If the direct object is a zero article phrase, it norm ally m ust be suffixed to the dependent (prenom inal) state, no m atter w hat the construction; fixed 65.
n 6.x -®.
B are specifiers are also su f
Examples: eq-NeJC.-®j\,AiMONiON eBOA ^N-BeeAZeBOyA Luke 11:15 “He casts out demons by Beelzebul” ; Mepe-AAAy NeJC-® Hpn i-B p p e e -* 2 U)T ii-AC Mark 2:22 “No one puts new wine into old wineskins” ; e-N -ce-^en-A A A Y Titus 2:10 “Not hiding anything.” (Exceptionally, n-eT*-M e N - * e i u ) T h e z o y e p o -i Matt 10:37 “Any one who loves father or mother more than Me.”)
Possessed nouns forming compound verbs 180(a), 181(e) vary from one fixed lexical expression to another as to whether ihey (i) are always suffixed (e.g. o jn -^ th * reflex. ‘have pity’); (ii) have the syntax of a non-zero article phrase, described in points (h) and (c)below (e.g. k U ) N - p u ) = / K A - p u ) = refle.\. ‘be silent’); orCm) fluctuate in this regard (e.g. e ip e N-^THs/p-^THs reflex, ‘regret’ 2 Cor 7:8 versus Prov 13:12). (b) Prepositional mediation in durative conjugation. O ther kinds o f direct object, w hen occurring in a durative sentence pattern, m ust be m ediated by n - / m m o = after the absolute state; thus q -N O Y Jte
n- ,
kimo =.
Examples: Neq-NOyJCe A e eBOA n - oy a a im o n io n Luke 11:14 “Now He was casting out a demon” ; e
nim
and the pronoun o y o N
nim
are inostly m ediat
(c) Fluctuation elsewhere. W hen occurring in other kinds o f synta.x, non-zero direct objects fluctuate (by speaker’s stylistic choice) betw een the tw o co n structions: N 6 Jt- var. NOY-X.6 n - , n o .x = var. N o y Jte m m o =. Examples: NTepeq-NeJC-oyNOfi N -zp o o y Mark 15:37 “Aixl when He had uttered a loud cry” and i q - N o y J t e bboa n - n e h n a N-AKi©ipTON Matt 8:16 “He cast out the unclean spirits” ; N e e o o y aY“ Nojc- oy e ao A Matt 13:48 “They threw away the bad” and Aq-NOYJCe Ae H H O -q Luke 4:35 “He threw him down” ; e-*Nej(.-TeqC2iMe eBOA Mark 10:2 “To divorce his wife” and e-*NOYJ(.e eBOA N-NCTN^iOMe Matt 19:8 “To divorce your wives” ; e-*NOJc-OY eBOA Maik 10:4 "To get divorces (To divorce them)” and e-®NOYJCe MMO-q N -N e y z o o p Matt 15:26 “To throw it to the dogs” ; nMepe-NeTNepHY Rom 13:8 “To love one anoth er (The practice of loving one another)” and n N o y x e N -o y c o T e Gen 21:16 “An arrow-shot (The distance of shooting an arrow)” ; h k o o c - t Mark 14:8 “My burial (The act of burying me)” and n jc ic e mmo - i ApophPatr 136 (Chaine 30:20 = Z 304:4) “My advancement (The act of elevating me)”
(d) Limitations: i. O Y e q j-, ‘w ant, desire, lo v e’ alw ays has its direct object suffixed, even in durative conjugation.
11
132
t r a n s i t i v i t y
;
d i r e c t
o b j e c t
s y n t a x
Examples; ei-O Y e
ii. Jtcu M M o-c J t e - ‘s a y ’ + reported discourse alw ays has direct o b ject - c suffixed in non-durative conjugation J t o o - c j t e - (for the untranslatable object - c , cf. 5 1 4[a]): q - J t t u m m o -c J t e - . . . “ He says, . . . ^ q -^ o o -c J t 6 - . . . “ H e s a id ,. . . 6 - ® ,x o o - c x .e - . . . “ T o say . . . iii. T he com pound verb p - n M e e y e n - ‘rem em b er’ [m ake-the-thought-of] (but not the construction p - n s q M e e y e ) escapes special regulation in durative conjugation, so that both object constructions occur. E.g. e e i - e i pe m - h m e 6Y 6 N -N eK pM eiH 2 T im 1:4 “ A s I rem em ber your te ars” ; but also N -T e T N -p -n M 6 6 Y e a n M-n-f-oY n - 0 6 iic M att 16:9 “ D o you n ot rem em ber the five loaves? ”
D O UBLE-O BJECT
172
C A U SA TIV E
VERBS
The four double-objeci causative verbs (belonging to Class V, 193) TMMo ‘cause . . . to e a t t mmh y ^ (cf. oyujm ) T c o ‘cause . . . to drink , . . t c h y ' (cf. ccu) TTO ‘cause . . . to give . . . ’ (cf. -f-) T x o ‘cause . . . to take . . . ’ (cf. x i ) are mutable transitives whose infinitive can be constructed with two direct objects TCO M -neY efu )T N-OYHpn “Cause llieirfa th er lo drink w ine" (Gen 19:33) (make-drink + their father + some wine) expressing person caused to eat, drink (etc.) + thing lo be eaten, drunk (etc.). These verbs show three peculiarities as regards their direct objects, (i) Personal morphs are always suffixed to the innhltive and cannot be mediated by a preposition, (ii) Two direct objects can be suffixed to the infinitive in a string, one after another. TM M e-q -^ o e iK “ Cause him to eat bread” (S h lll 106:18) (make-eat + him + bread) When these consist o f a personal morph followed by an article phrase, the inTinitive occurs in a reduced prepersonal state (e.g. TMMe= for tm m o = in the preceding example). abs.
TMMO TCO [t t o ] [ t JCO]
prenom.
prepers.
TMMeTMMO* T ceTCO* (T )T e(t )t O= .........................................
reduced prepersonal state TMMes TC(e)= (T)Te* (T)jce*
(III) The second direct object, if not a personal morph, can be mediated by the preposi tion N - except that a zero article phrase stands alone as a separate group without being
133
VERBS
mediated by a preposition (e.g. TTe-aBpaziM ®peMHT Heb 7:6 “Make Abraham give tithes”). The resulting patterns are illustrated in table 12, using the model verb t c o ‘cause . . . to drink . .. ’. TABLE 12 D o u b l e D ir e c t O b je c t P a t t e r n s
a fter t c o
‘C a u s e . . .
to
D r in k . . . ’
THING TO BE DRUNK PERSON CAUSED TO DRINK
Personal Morph
Entity Term (Not Personal Morph)
( 1) _ TOO M -n p c u M e
Entity Term (Not Personal Morph)
T ce-n p cu M e
n
m- o y m o o y
-
o y m o o y
“
'’
“Cause the man to drink some water”
( 2) T c e - c - n p c u M e •’
“Cause the man to drink it ( - C - ) ’’
T c e - n p c u M e ^M ooy"^
“ Cause the man to drink water” Person + Thing = absolute state Tce = prenominal state TCO
Thing + Person T c e = reduced prepersonal state c = penultimate personal object morph 82
(3) T c o -q
n- oymooy'
Tce-q-OYMOoy*^ Personal Morph
“Cause him to drink some water” Person + Thing TCO = prepersonal state T c e = reduced prepersoiial state - q = personal suffix - q - = personal intermediate
T c o -q -c q * “Cause him ( - q - ) drink it ( - c q )
to
Person + Thing T C O = prepersonal state - q - = personal intermediate - c q = personal second suffix 88
N ote: The order of direct objects is reversed in combination (2). " a y - T C O A e M - n e y e Y t U T N - o y H p r i Gen 19:33 “ So ihey made their fiather drink wine" ' ' o y j v . e M n e K - T C e - N e T O B e N - o y M O o y Job 22.1 “ Neither hast thou given water to ihe thirsty ( N - e T ® - o s e ) to drink” ' 3 k q - T T e - 3 k B p j k 2 J ^ M ® p e M H T Heb 7:6 “ He made Abraham give lithes"; M n p - T e -A a a y ® oce Luke 3:14 “ Rob no one by violence” (Do not cause any to give forfeit) “' N r - T M - T e - c - n e T q i N - N e T e N o y K N e Luke 6:30 “Do not cause the one who lakes away your goods ( n - e T ® - q i N - N - e T e - N O y - K N e) to give them ( - C - ) back (O f the person who takes away your goods, do not ask them back)” ' a q - T M M O - K M-nM3kNN3k Deut 8:3 “ He fed thee manna” ' a y - T c e - Y - o y z M i Ps 68(69):2I “They made me drink vinegar": a y - J C - q - (i.e. J t e - q - ) z e N c a q ; Luke 10:30 “They beat him (caused him to lake blows)” ; e - ® T p e y - T M M e - q - ® o e i K N - e A i + i c M - n e n p o < t ) H T H c a y t u N c e - T c e - q - ® M o o y N - e A in 'f 'ic Shlll 106:18 19 "So that he was made (they made him) to eai bread of affliction of ihe prophei and was made lo drink waier of affliction” (c f 3 Kgdms 22:27); M a-T c-i-oy K O y Y M - ® M 0 0 y Judg 4:19 ed. Thompson “Give me a little water to drink” ; M a - T - q - (i.e. T e - q - ) e e M-®ntuAS n m m j i - k Luke 12:58 “Lei him provide ihe opportunity to settle with you" « N q - T O - K - c e NpA CTe Sir 20:15 (20:14 Lagarde) “ And tomorrow he will make you give them back”
134
t r a n s i t i v i t y
:
d i r e c t
o b j e c t
s y n t a x
D O U B L E -O B JE C T - ^ - ^ 3 .= 173
The double-object infinitive "t-Ni* (vars. t n n a s , t a n a s ) ‘give . . . unto’ takes two objects always immediately suffixed in a string, one after another, expressing personal recipient + thing given. The first object is alw ays a personal interm ediate. E.g. NNey-'t'N3k-c-®M3keiN (textual var. t a n a - c - ) Luke 11:29 “They shall not give her signs (N o sign shall be given to it)” ; q -N 3 k --t-N a -K -c e M n o o y Sir 20:15 (20:14 Lagarde) “ Today he will bestow them upon you.” Etym ologically this verb is a fusion o f the infinitive -f- ‘give’ and the prepersonal preposition n a * ‘unto’ in a single unit. (It is synonym ous with the m uch more usual phrase f n-/mmo= n-Znas consisting of three separate groups.) The affirm ative imperative is m a - n a s 366; e.g. M a - N i - i - q MMJkTe 2 Sam 20:21 “ Just give him to m e.”
IN G R E S S IV E M E A N IN G O F T H E T R A N S IT IV E I N F I N I T I V E
174 The absolute state of a transitive infinitive, when constructed without direct object, can express the process o f entering into a state (incipient action): this is the ‘ingressive’ meaning of the transitive infinitive, oytUN become open, MOY2 fill (become fiill), gel baptized, etc. N d i- n e p n e m - n o y t c “ G od’s tem ple opened (became open, was opened)” (Rev 11:19)
A q -o y tu N
Exam ples: a g - M o y e Matt 2 2 :1 0 “ It became f u ll” ; N T e p e q - s a n T iz e A e n 6 i- T c NTeYNOY a q - e i e 2 Pai e M -n M o o y Matt 3:16 “ And w hen Jesus had gotten baptized. He w ent up immediately from the w ater” ; q - N a - n t u p i c Matt 15:13 “ It will become uprooted"', e q - o y tU N e N a - y eBOA. Acts 1:3 "Appearing (Becom ing apparent) to them ” ; iice-M T O N M ark 16:18 “ And they will recover (becom e rested)” ; 'f '- e A iB e Ps 3 0 n i ) : 9 OXiPojiai “ I am (becoming) a fflic te d "; Tc n e x c a y - T o f i - q eBOA. e q - c t o y Gal 3:1 ’IrjcoCi; XpiCTOi; TtpoEypacpr) icTauptonEvoi; “ Jesus C hrist was pub licly portrayed as (getting) crucified"; N-eT®-B3knTize 2J^-N-eT*-M ooyT I Cor 15:29 ol PoTtTi^onEvoi fcnEp xmv VEKpSv “ People w ho are baptized on behalf o f the dead” ; NKeyj\.JkiM0 Ni0 N c e - z y n O T i c c e n a - n Luke 10:17 Kai t o 8ain 6 v ia fcTtoxacCTETQi fjniv “ Even the dem ons are subject to u s” ; n z h k b c e - e y a r r e A U e Luke 7:22 jitcoxoi EtoyyEW^ovTai “ The poor hare good news preached to them ” (thus m ost m anuscripts; textual var. adds N a -y ) In som e verbs o f the transitive class, ingressive m eaning occurs frequently; in others it is unattested. Thus in the absence o f a direct object construction, an infinitive of this class is ambiguous, for it can be understood either as an ingressive or as an objectless transitive 169. These two interpretations are distinguished only by context. (Crum , Coptic D ictionary p.vii, m islabels both o f hese m eanings intransitive.)
D Y N A M IC
p a s s iv e
; ‘ IS B E IN G B U I L T ’
175 Dynamic passive meaning (an entity undergoing some action) is only expressed by 3d pi. conjugation o f a transitive verb + direct object: They-are-building-it = It is being built, c e - K t u r MMO-q They-built-it = It hws built (dynamic), wM O-q
135
VERBS
The forms illustrated above are ambiguous since their 3d pi. personal subject (c e , Y) can either (i) be non-referential (express passive meaning) or (ii) refer to a plurality of actors. Thus ce-K cuT MMo-q = (i) It is being built, (ii) They are building it Dynamic passive is also expressed with an objectless transitive inrinilive 169: n-eT®TCU2 M ce-N A -O Y U )N NA -q Luke 11:10 “ For the one who knocks, opening will occur (they will open).”
More elaborate constructions can resolve this ambiguity in either direction. (a) Passive meaning (is being built) is unambiguous when the agent of action is expressed by an agential preposition such as 2 i t n - and c b o a 2 i t n - ‘by’: c e - K c u T M M o - q e B O A 2 iT N -T a .M A a .Y
or e b o a
2 ito o t-c
It is being built by my mother or by her (b) Active meaning (they are building) is unambiguous when the 3d pi. subject is anticipated or expanded by a plural entity term or 3d plural inflected modifier. These women are building it These are building it M M O -q They themselves are building it N 6 i-N e i2 io M e These women are building it 2CU-OY They too are building it
N e i2 iO M e c e - ic c u T M M O -q NA i c e - K c u T M M o - q NTOOY c e - K c u T c e -K c u T M M o -q
ce-K cuT
M M O -q
Sim ilar lo the dynam ic passive is the ingressive m eaning o f the transitive inrmitive 174, which is also ambiguous: q -N A -n c u p K = It will tiecome uprooted/Il will uproot som e thing. Dynamic passive contrasts with static passive as expressed by the stative 168(a); e.g. q-K H T ’ “ It is built” (static) versus c e - K U ) T MMO-q “ It is being built” (dynamic); Neq-KHT* “ It was built” (static) versus a y - ^ u jt MMO-q “ It was built" (dynamic) or Ney-KCUT MMO-q “ It was being built” (dynamic). Examples: (i) w ithout agential preposition (ambiguous), c e - N A - e i B i o - q Luke 18:14 “ He will t>e hum bled” xanEivtoOfjcreTai; a y - c u ) t m e - n e K c o n c Luke 1:13 “ Your prayer has been heard” Elcr|Koi)crOr| f| 6Er|crii; cod; T eN O y A e Ce-COACA M M O - q Luke 16:25 “ Now he is com forted"; o y c M H a y ~ c u ) t m e p o - c 2 N - p a m a M att 2 :1 8 “ A voice w as heard in R am ah” ; Tc j\,e N T e p o y - J c n o - q 2 pAi 2 N -B H eA eeM M att 2:1 “ Now when Jesus was born in Bethlehem ” ; c e - N A - 6 iN e M - n u j H N eT®-MMAY e - A Y ~ n o p K - q S h ill 141:15-16 “ They will find that tree to have been uprooted”-, A i- u jc u n e ey-M A CTirO Y mmo -T Ps 72(73): 14 “ I was plagued” ; c e - N A - M O Y r e e p o - q J c e - n u j H p e M -n - e T * -J c o c e Luke 1:32 “ He will be called the Son o f the M ost H ig h "; A 2 p o - f 6 e c e - K p m e m m o - i 2 U ) c - * p e q - p - ® N O B e Rom 3:7 “ W hy am I still being condem ned as a sinner?” ; J C iN - e N e e M n O Y -cc u T M J c e - A Y -O Y '^ N
e-N S A A N -o y ^i e -A Y - J C n o - q
eq -o
John 9 :3 2 “ Never has it been heard that the eyes o f a person bom blind have been opened” ; (ii) with agential preposition (iinambigiioiis), n-eN T -A Y ~-*-0 0 - q 2iTM -nenpo
136
t r a n s i t i v i t y
;
d i r e c t
o b j e c t
s y n t a x
(i.e. n e f l c ) c e - T A u j e - ^ o e i a j n h - t n M - n K U ) e B O A N - N e T N N O B e Acts 13:38 “ Through this Jesus forgiveness o f your sins is proclaim ed lo you” ; A Y - T A U j e - ^ o e i u ) 2 N - B e p o i A M - n u j A j c e M - n N O y T e c b o a 2 i T M - n A Y ^ o c Acts 17:13 “ The word o f God was proclaim ed by Paul at B eroea"; c e - o y A u i ^ 2 i T N - N 2 H K e c e - M e M M O - q 2 i f N - N K e p p u ) o y M - M A f - ® N O Y T e S hC hass 1 06:47-50 "H e is desired by the poor and loved even by the devout em perors” 2 iT M -n e Ic
R EFLE X IV E
M EA N IN G
176 ‘Reflexive ’ meaning (actor directing action at itself) is expressed by any direct object personal suffix agreeing in person/nuinber/(gender) with the verbal actor. a -T c oYON?-tj e-N eqM A eH TH c “Jesus revealed H im self \o His disciple.s” (John 21:1) W ith a 3d person subject, taken out of context such sentences are ambiguous; e.g. a - 7 c OYON2 - q means both f/j Jesus revealed some other person and (ii) Jesus revealed himself. The reflexive construction is also an essential com bi native con.stituent of some verbal constructions 181(e). Further exam ples: M A p e q - A p N A M M O-q M ark 8 :34 “ Let him deny him self” : kan ANOK eeiu)A N -p-® M N T pe 2i p o —e i John 8:14 “ Even if I do bear w itness to M yself” ; n c A e m A pi-*nA 2 p e e p o - K Luke 4:23 “ Physician, heal yourself” If the direct object is accom panied by mmin mmo * ‘(m y)self’ 152, this m arks it as explicitly reflexive: i y - T A A - Y m m i n m m o - o y Eph 4 :1 9 “They gave them selves up.” H ow ever, mminmmo = rarely occurs; very few reflexive objects are marked in this way.
R E C IP R O C IT Y
177 Reciprocity (actors directing action at ‘one another’) a.Y-qpAjte N M -N evepH oy “They said to one another” (Luke 4:36) is expressed by constructions of e p n y 90.
P R ED IC A T IV E ( a c t o r
EXPA N SIO N
c a u s i n g
o b j e c t
OF TH E t o
b e
D IR EC T o r
O BJECT
b e c o m e
s o m e t h i n g
)
178 Some transitive verbs, such as e ip e ‘m ake’, jt o o y ‘send’, cun ‘consider', KAeicTA ‘m ake’, iccu ‘set or appoint’, m o y te ‘call’ etc., can take a direct object followed by a predicative expansion' “ God sent him as ruler and deliverer” (Acts 7:35) n e 3 ^ Aq-AA-N N-®pM2e “ Christ has set us fr e e " (Gal 5:1)
A - n N O Y T e J C O O Y -q N -® a .p x o ) N A y c u N - ® p e q - c c u T e
137
V E R B S
i.e. by an element that conveys new information about the direct object and is united with it in a grammatical relationship, as o f a predicate with a subject 2 4 7 . (Such, in the examples above, are the elements N-®Apxa)N Aycu N -® p6q-ccuT6 and N-®pM2 6.) Predicative expansions or complements are marked in several ways, depending on the lexically fixed phrasing associated with the verb: (a) By N - of incidental predication 1 7 9 . E.g. in the examples above n-®apxcun N -® p6q-ccuT6 “ As ruler and deliverer,” K-®pM2e “ Free.” (b) By other prepositions or conjunctions. E.g. N e y -Jti M M O - q n e 2cuc-® npo< |)H T H c M att 14:5 “ They held him to be a p rophet” ; o y n o A i c e-qjAY-MOYTe e p o - c Jte-M a.XApee Matt 2:23 “ A city called Nazareth” (for jc e - , cf. 513[b]). (c) By the completive circumstantial 32:10-11 “ He left him alive.”
N 179
OF
IN C ID EN TA L
426.
E.g.
^ q -iC A A -q
eq -oN ?
ShChass
PR ED IC A T IO N
Predicative n - 2 0 3 , usually expanded by a zero article phrase, occurs after the direct object of e ip e when it has the sense of ‘make . . . into, cause . . . to be’ and after its stative o with the sense of ‘is . . . ’ (exists in the state o f having been made into . . . ); and similarly after other verbs of being and causing to be. AA-K N-®pMM3i6 “ Make yourself rich” (ShChass 85:34) n-eT® -Na.-2 0 )TB A e q - o N -® eN oxoc e - r e i c p i c i c “ W hoever kills is liable to judgm ent” (Matt 5:21) N-eT®-o N-®AAiM0 Ni0 N “ Denioniacs (Those who are demon-like)” (Matt 4:24) A Y - q iT - o Y N-®aiixMAAcuToc “They were taken captive (They took them captive)” (ShAmel II 252:2) TA2 0 -K epAT-K N-oYccuTTT M-HNOYTe “ Present yourself to God as one approved” (2 Tim 2:15) ■f--N3i-qpopujp-Na.ainoeHiCH n t a - k o t - o y N ~ 2eN N o 6 “ I will pull down my bam s and build them larger” (Luke 12:18) In this function, the preposition n - expresses ‘incidental’ (non-essential) predicative expansion 1 7 8 of a direct object or a stative: ‘is’ for the present moment, circumstantially, accidentally, non-essentially. This is opposed to ‘inherent’ (essential) predication, as expressed by the nominal sentence pred icate 2 9 2 ( ‘is’ unchangeably, permanently, unconditionally, essentially, or without marked distinction). Predicative n - is compatible with article phras es, specifier phrases, determinator pronouns, and specifier pronouns. A
138
t r a n s i t i v i t y
:
d i r e c t
o b j e c t
s y n t a x
gendered common noun after predicative n - either denotes (“ make . . . into . . . ” ) or describes (“ cause . . . to be . . . ” ) 93: no formal distinction between denotation and description is expressed. Since there is no preterit conversion o f the 1st and 2d person nominal sentence express ing prior time 256, the preterit Ne(Y) - o N-® . . . supplies the missing persons. Descriptive predication (corresponding to adjectives in Western Indo-European lan guages) is also expressed by three other means: the stative o f intransitive verbs whose inflnitive expresses process or entry into a state 168(b), q - o y o B o ; “H e/It is white” ; suffixally conjugated verboids o f quality 376, N A N oy-q “He/It is good” ; and the nom inal sentence predicate o f description 292, oypcoM e n e “He/It is human.” In some instances these constructions come veo< close in meaning, forming synonyms: o y i r ^ eo N n e /N A N o y -q “ II is good” ; oyKoyY n e /q -c o B K “ It is sm all” ; N A q ;u )-q /q -o q ; “ It is much” ; N A A A -q /q -o n - * n o 6 “ It is great.” Further examples: •J '-e ip e M M O - q 1 Cor 9:27 “ I subdue it (make it a slave)” ; TA-p-TH yTN N -^ oycu^ e N-*pu)M e Matt 4:19 “ I will make you fishers of human beings” ; eq-N A -T C U oyN an e q —q ; o y u ) o y h e q - o n —®ku)U)C a a a a q - N i - T U ) o y N n -* cu )m jl M -nN eyM iT iK O N e q - p o o y T e - N - q - q ; i i T iN N-AAAy ShAm61 II 4 0 1 :2 -4 “ He will not arise dried up or as a corpse, but he w ill arise as a spiritual body, flourishing and not lacking anything” ; jceKAc e T e T N e -u ;u )n e N -*q;H pe M -neTN eiU )T Matt 5:45 “So that you may be children o f your Father” ; q ;u )n e fie N-*CABe N e e ii-N i^ o q Ayu) N -*A K epA ioc N e e N -N i6 p o o M n e Matt 10:16 “ So be wise as serpents and innocent as doves” ; c e - q ; o o n N A -y n -* n o m o c MAyAA—y Rom 2:14 “ They live as a law to themselves” ; N e i - o N-*q;MMO n e Matt 25:35 “ I was a stranger” ; A l - o n - T m -* m a k a p io c e Y -N A -in o A o n X e gicucu-K Acts 26:2 “ 1 think m yself fortunate th at. . . I am to make my defence” ; n -F -o AN p -® p ooyq ; Jce-T N -N jk -M oy Maik 4:38 “Teacher, do You not care that we are about to perish?” ; n - e N T - A - n N o y r e fie i i - q N - o y i N -o y u )T Mark 10:9 “What therefore God has joined together (made one single thing)” ; n iJ q - N i.- q ; u ) n e N - o y N o 6 Ayu) c e -N A -M o y T e e p o - q J c e-n q ;H p e M -n -eT ® -Jcoce Luke 1:32 “He will be great, and will be called the Son o f the Most High"; A K -e ip e m m o-n N -o y M N T -e p o M -n e N N o y T e Ayu) N-®oyHHB Rev 5:10 “Thou hast made us a kingdom and priests to our God” ; •J--NeTNNKA eBOA I TAA-y m -^ m n t -n I Luke 12:33 “ Sell your possessions; give them away as alm s” ; N ep p cu oy N -N ^ ee N O c c e - o M -n eyjcoT c Luke 22:25 “The kings o f the Gentiles exercise lordship over them (are their lords)” ; mh a n o k an A Y -ceTn-TH yTN M -n M N T -c N o o y c John 6:70 “Did I not choose you lo be the tw elve?” ; e K - ^ ip e m m o -k n -n im John 8:53 “ Who do You claim to be (make Yourself out to be)?” ; i y - J c i - n e q z o l T e Ayu) A y -A A -q ii-q T o o y N -oycu N John 19:23 “ They took His garment and made it into four parts.” Similarly after the direct object o f eniKAAei ‘call . . . by the name o f’ (Heb 11:16), K ie ic T A ‘m ake. . . into’ (Acts 7:27), kcu ‘set or appoint. . . to be, m ake. . . into' (Acts 13:47, 20:28; Rom 4:17), tc u o ; ‘appoint. . . as’ (Acts 26:16), jc ic e ‘e x a lt .. . as’ (Acts 5 :3 1), j c o o y ‘send . . . as’ (Acts 7:35), etc.
C O M P O U N D VERBS
180 ‘Compound verbs' are closely joined com binations of verb and noun to form a lexically fixed expression, in which the nominal component often has promi nence (denominal verbs). 139
VERBS
(a) The usual type p-®NOBe to sin [make-sin(s)] T3iqp6-®o6iqj to proclaim [increase-call(s)] jci-®BAnTicMA to be baptized [get-baptism(s)] -f-- pNT= to name [give-name of] 6 m - ® 6 o m to be able (to) [find-ability] consists o f prenominal infinitive 167 + zero article phrase, fusing into a single unit in boundness, syntax, and meaning; possessed nouns also occur in this role 171(a). Compounds of ‘give’ and ‘take’ express active meaning versus dynamic passive meaning (-t--®BAnTicMA ‘baptize’, Jti-®BainTicMai ‘be baptized’). E.g. Ai-p-®MOBe Matt 27:4 “ I have sinned” (f|napTov); AY-Jti-®BAnTicMA N T ooT -q 2 M-niopjiLaiNHC n ie p o Mark 1:5 “They were baptized by him in the river Jordan” (gparcTi^ovto vn avtov). T he nom inal com ponent can be elaborated by one o r more other, linked bare noun lex em es 1 4 5 so ihal all are expansions of the same article; e.g. N -e N T -iL Y -p -‘*lj(.Aie Ayw) S h lll 214:13 “ Those w ho have becom e abandoned and devastated” ; J C e - e T e T N A - j( .i- ® |T A e i6 N i.M e ^ - T e f N A p x H A y u ) e o o y 71-cMOV ShChass 101:44-48 “ So that you m ight be truly honored, and glorified and praised, in your adminisi ration.”
Some compound verbs are transitive, i.e. can be further expanded by a direct object Nq--t--® oce n - t k h 4'YXh “ And forfeit his life” (Mark 8:36) i. If the nominal component is a common noun, the direct object is mediat ed prepositionally (the preposition varies from one verb to another as a matter o f lexically fixed phrasing). E.g. -t--®cBcu n - / n 3is e - teach (someone) about (something) .xi-®cBcu e - learn (something) p-®xpeiai n - / mmo = need (something) TAqpe-®oeiup n - / mmo = proclaim (something) -t--®oce N-/MMO* lose (something) ®CBU) NA-Y M att 5:2 “ He taught them ” ; ce-N A -T A 0je-® 0 ity Luke 12:3 “ It shall be proclaim ed/They shall proclaim i t ” (KtipuxGiioexat).
E.g.
M M O-q
ii. If the nominal component o f the compound is a possessed noun 138, the direct object is suffixed to the possessed noun. E.g. N-pATs discern, track down N -2 HT= induce abortion in (2 h t= belly, womb) "t-- pNT= name, call
140
tr a n s it i v it y :
d i r e c t
o b je c t
s y n ta x
■ f-T O O T S h e lp
Tca.B6-6ia.T= 6BOA OF TOYN-6ia.Ts 6BOA instruct q p e n - 2 pA= receive, accept (2 pai= face) E.g. A q-aipxi N-®T0YN-eiAT-0Y eeo A Mark 8:31 “ He began to teach them ” ; a.-xa.AeB J ti- p c u - q M -nAAoc nNa.2 PM-McuYCHc Num 13:31 “Chaleb stayed the people from speaking before M oses.” For regulation and fluctuation of these com pound verbs according to the Stem-Jemstedt rule, cf. 171. For compound verbs in which the possessed noun has a reflexive con struction, cf. 181(e). (b )
Compound verbs meaning ‘have/perform the function of, have the character istic o f’ are based on o i i - in the durative sentence, but on p - in non-durative conjugation. Because o f their complementaiy distribution in this construction, o N - and p - have the same meaning. Durative
Non-durative
o o N-®ppo o N-® jcoeic o N-®pM2e
p-®2 M2AA P-®PP0 p-® jcoeic p-®pM26
‘serve’ (6ou>.eueiv) ‘reign’ (Paoi^-eueiv) ‘be m aster’ (Kupieueiv) ‘be free’ (£>.eu0epoCa0ai)
Those based on p - in non-durative conjugation can also have ingressive meaning, expressing entry iiito a state; in other words, the distinction between being and becoming is cancelled. E.g. h a h ATeTN-p-®pMMAO 1 Cor 4:8 “ A lready you have b ecom e/been rich ” ; c e - N A - p - ^ M A O ShChass 116:36-37 “They will becom e/be rich.” W hereas situational prepositions enter into the durative sentence as predicate 310, in non-durative sentences they must be preceded by the non-durative infinitive p - 312. E.g. AY-p-23^ptu-if M -n e 2 o o Y M -n3iM ici2Ps 17(18): 18 “They were before me in the day of my affliction.” (c) Elliptic al resumption. W hen a compound verb is repeated within a passage of text, its second occurrence is often elliptically represented by the absolute state of the infinitive alone. eiqpAN-p-®NOBe H eV qjA N -fM -eipe “ W hether I sin (p-®NOBe) or whether I d o n ’t ( r R - e i p e + 0 )” (ShChass 71:31) Further exam ples; g M -n T p e -n A A O c T H p - q Jci-*BAnTicMA Ayu) N T e p e - i c jci Luke 3:21 “ Now when all the people were being baptized, and after Jesus had heen” \ n -e T ^ -o y c u q ; e-* cu )T M M A peq-ccuT M . . 3.\w n - e T ® - O Y U ) u ; e - * p ®AT-cu)TM M A p e q -eip e S h lll 165:15-17 “ W hoever wishes to obey, let them obey . . . A nd whoever wishes to disobey, let them do so ." Inversion. Sim ilarly, the nom inal component o f the com pound can be uttered before the verbal seiiience pattern, in extraposition, as a fragm entan' topic for consideration. E.g.
141
V E R B S M E N M n O Y - e i p e S h l l l 18:15-16 “ As forsw earing (i.e. did not d o ” (A s for ®oath, they did not m ake + 0).
p -® i.N i.u i)—
this they
(d) Some compound verbs contain a definite article phrase as a formal character istic of their construction. The two components fuse info a single unit in mean ing, and their syntactic relationship ( e i p e n - versus p - ) is regulated in accord with the Stem -Jem stedt rule 171. An essential element of many such com pounds is the construction of general relationship 147, e.g. p-ncuBup n - / p - n e { q ) c u B u p ‘forget’ [make the unconsciousness of]; p - n M e e y e n - / p - n e ( q ) M e e y e ‘remember’ [make the thought of]; 6 M - n q p i N e n - / 6 m n e ( q ) q p i N e ‘visit’ [discover the news of]. Examples; rini-p-ncuBuj r i p M -n-eNT-A-neuiBHp acoo-q ShChass 102:42-45 “ 1 have not forgotten what the friend said” ; tm n t- m a T - 'u im m o M n p -p -n e cc u B ^ Heb 13:2 “ D o not neglect to show hospitality to strangers (As for hospitality to strangers, do not m ake its forgetting)” ; K - 6 i N e M - n e q u j i N e Heb 2 :6 “ Thou visiteth him ” ; A T e T N -fiM -n iu iiN e Matt 25:36 “ You visited M e” ; e - ' j c e - n i n e e o o y Mark 9 :39 “ To speak evil o f M e” The com pound p - n M e e y e n - (but not p - n e q M e e y e ) escapes regulation according to the Stem -Jem stedt rule in durative conjugation, so that the two object constructions of the verb, e i p e n - and p - , fluctuate in durative conjugation. E.g. e e i - e i p e M - n n e e y e n - n e k p m e i h 2 Tim 1:4 “A s I rem em ber your tears"; but also n - t e t n p - n M E e y e an M -n-J-oy i J - o e iK Matt 16:9 “ Do you not rem em ber the five lo av e s? ”
E X P A N S IO N S O F T H E V E R B ; A D V E R B IA L , C O M B IN A T IV E , A N D R E C T IO N A L 181 The verb is usually followed by one or more expansion elements consisting of prepositional phrases or adverbs 194; or adverbial clauses or infinitive phras es (chapter 23). nim “ Obey your parents in every thing” (Col 3:20) Ma.peq-^ 1 e n e c H T r e N o y 2i J t N - n e c f o c “ Let Him come down now from the cross” (Mark 15:32)
ccuTM N cai-N eT N eiO T e icArai-cMOT
(a) Adverbial complements. Some expansion elements merely provide compleinentaiy adverbial information about the verbal statement; for example, as indepen dent expressions of time, place, manner, circumstance, degree, or attitude. These are semantically independent, co n trib u to r elements, whose absence or replace ment would not cause a different meaning of the verb lexeme to be expressed. Thus in the previous examples katji - c m o t nim “ In eveiything” and r e N o y “ Now” are semantically independent adverbial complements. (b) Combinative constituents. Other elements, however, are so essentially tied in meaning to the verb, that verb and expansion element must both be present in
142
E X P A N S I O N S
O F
T H E
V E R B
order to express the intended verbal idea. Such, in the previous example, is e n e c H T (in e i e n e c H T ‘descend, come dow n’). The absence or replacement of these constituents would cause a different verbal meaning to be expressed (e.g. e l alone means ‘com e’, ei‘ e n e c H T means ‘descend’). Combinative con stituents o f the verb always follow the verb. In meaning, the dividing line between adverbial complement and combinative con stituent is not a clear two-fold distinction, but rather a spectrum ranging over various degrees of closeness and independence.
i. Typical combinative constituents of the verb are the twelve combinative adverbs 206, such as e e o A and e e o y N , whose function is to combine with verbs (also with prepositions and adverbs), and thus to form lexically fixed expressions. They are com posed of a preposition ( e - to, n - in, qpai- up to) expanded by a nominal component (b o a outside, jo y N inside, n ecH T bot tom, e p V i top/bottom , O H front, n ^ e o Y rear, 2 H t mind), and mostly help to express spatial orientation (in, out, up, down, ahead, back) though they merge in meaning with the verb. Cf. table 16 (p. 165). In some combinations the meaning is clear and calculatable; e.g. e i alone ‘com e’, e i e e o A ‘leave’ (come + outwards), e'i e z o y N ‘enter’ (come + inwards), etc. But in others it is less so; e.g. kcu ‘place, appoint’, iccu eeoyN ‘admit, bring into port’. ii. Constituents that are both combinative and rectional. If the combinative constituent o f a transitive verb is a preposition, it brings the infinitive into both semantic and syntactic relationship (rection) with an entity term, which is the prepositional object. E.g. iccuxe ficai- ‘seek’. Ney-K tU Te KcjL-oyMMT-MNTpe e^oyN e - T c “They sought testimony against Jesus” (M ark 14:55) Such prepositions thus serve two functions: lexically, to contribute to the expression o f a particular verbal idea; and syntactically, to mark direct objects of the verb. They are both combinative and rectional. E.g. u^iNe e - ‘visit’, qpiNe e jtN - ‘ask concerning’; -j- n-/m m o= + n-/n3i= ‘give (something) to (som eone)’; -f- n-/FTmo= + z ' - ‘clothe (someone) with (som ething)’; -f o y B e - ‘fight against’; etc. The semantically objectless transitive construction 169 of such a verb either (i) omits the preposition or (ii) has the semantically empty pronoun oyoN 59 as its object. E.g. (i) iy-NAY N6i-MMHHUie AY-p-*ZOTe Matt 9:8 “When the crowds saw, they were afraid” ; (ii) Ti-eT®-uiiNe q-NA-2e e-oyON Matt 7:8 "The one who seeks will find.”
iii. Purely rectional constituents. A few infinitives co-occur with a preposi tion that only serves to m ark the direct object o f the verb and does not alter nate with other combinative prepositions. E.g. c c u r n n - ‘choose', M o y o y r N - ‘kill’, c M o y e - ‘bless’. Such prepositions are purely rectional (required in direct objeci relationship). ^ v i i n n a III m i E n ID
I-lJ ;
o v w n D
lu
i
i . --------------
■
V E R B S
(c) Thus, any given preposition has more than one possible relationship to verbs. In some sentences it forms an adverbial complement, while in others it is a combinative/rectional constituent. As a matter of lexically fixed phrasing, most verbs are compatible with their own particular repertory o f combina tive/rectional expansion elements. In this way, from a small number of lex emes an elaborate system of verbal meanings is distinctly expressed. (d) The lexically fixed phrasing o f many verbs includes combinations that contain m ore than one preposition. E.g. tca^bo mmo= person epo= thing ‘tell (some one) (som ething)’: q-Tca^BO MMO-q e - 2cuB NiM John 5:20 “ He shows Him all.” Some combinations include the same preposition twice, each with a dif ferent function depending on its position in sequence. E.g. A irei mmos ‘ask (someone) for (som ething)’; n - e T N - N J t - A i T e i m m o - k M M o - q Mark 10:35 “ W hatever we ask of Y ou” literally That which we shall ask + You + it. (e) The reflexive construction as a combinative constituent. In many verbal con structions, reflexivity 176 is an essential combinative constituent, e.g. Kcure reflex, ‘return’ [turn oneself], cubo; mmo« reflex, e - ‘overlook, neglect’ [forget oneself as regards . . . ], ep^T s (var. reflex. ‘stand’ [stand on one’s feet]. ay - k o t - oy
A e N 6 i-N o p o o c “ And the shepherds returned (turned them selves)” (Luke 2:20)
Both verb and reflexive direct object must be present in order to express the verbal idea. E.g. a y - n o j c - o y “ They sat dow n” [threw -them selvesj; 3iY-nA^2T-OY “ They bowed dow n” [bent-themselves]. The presence of a par ticular combinative preposition is also essential in some constructions; e.g. o y tu ? N - reflex, n c a - ‘follow ’; a y - o y ^ 2 ~ o y N c w - q “They followed him ” \piit-themselves after him]. Many such constructions are compound verbs in which the nominal element is a possessed noun 138 and whose personal suffix reflexively agrees in person/number/(gender) with the subject o f the verb. (cf. K T o ‘turn’) look [turn one’s eye] (cf. 2. i o \ e ‘lay’) begin [lay one’s hand(s)]
K T e -e iA T s 2 1-T O O T *
Cf. 171(a). E.g. N T ep eq -K T e-fA T -q neJC i.-q Mark 10:23 “ W hen He had looked around He said” ; A q - ^ i- T o o T - q A q-piM e M ark 14:72 “ He began to weep [He began and w ept].” Exam ples: KTe-ei3kT= look around, M C g-eiA T s i i - look intently at, CMN-ei3kT= € X N - fix one’s gaze upon, t|i-e iA T = fall silent, w e ^ - p i u s bite, N e T q -p c u = display facial em otion; K3k-(>AT* c b o a . go forth, o v e g - p ^ T s set foot (in); e l i - T o o T = Nc3k- despair of, renounce, K i - T o o r = e b o a . despair, N -T o o T s reflex. e p o = reflex, desist, 1 5 - t o o t= e J c ii- seize. M eg-TOOT* lay hold of,
144
EXPANSIONS
OF
THE
VERB
p-3k-TOOT= (vars. p-N3k-TOOT=, p-3kn3kTooT=) endeavor, c m n - t o o t = agree (with), -t--T ooT = e - seize, -t--T o o T s m n - and -f--TooT= i i - help, u ; e n - T o o T s betrothe, promise, 2 i - t o o t = undertake, begin; N3ku;n-u;3kNT= blow o n e ’s nose, eA.K-ui3kNT= sneer; (2p3k= fa ce ) j£.i-2P3i= am use or occupy oneself; voice) N jiupT-2 pji= (construct participle 122) impudent, t ji - g p j is raise o n e ’s voice, oci-gpA * cry; (2TH= hearf) K3k-eTH= put one’s Irusl (in), p-gT H * repent, regret, -t--2THs pay heed, observe, u ; n - 2T h= have pity; c m n -jc c u = undertake
(f) W hen the reflexively constructed infinitive functions as a common noun (unconjugated), reflexive meaning can be expressed by a generic 2d person sing, masc. direct object - k (‘yourself i.e. oneself). E.g. n r h i- o n - K ApophPatr 105 (Chaine 25:2 = Z 298:7) “ Not to think highly o f oneself” ; n a n o y -o y ^ ^ Z -k N C A -njcoeic Sir 46:10(16) “ It is good to follow [put yourself after] the L ord” ; o y m n t - c i a - t o o t - k n c c o - k m m i n i ^ m o - k Ephrem Syrus, Asceticon (BMar 169:2-3) “ Self-despair” [Washing your hands of yourself]. (g) Nxa as an expansion elem ent (traditionally called dativiis ethiciis) 2 MOOC NA-K “Just sit dow n” expresses an attitude o f subjective insistence on the speaker’s or actor’s part. It occurs after intransitives, especially o f movement or posture, or after transi tives (mainly im peratives?) without direct object. If the verb is an infinitive, n a s is a reflexive construction; e.g. A Y -o ytuo; a c Nbi-NpSiN-KHMe e-®BcuK NA^-Y ApophPatr 69 (ChaTne 15:21) “ And the Egyptians wanted to be gone.” If the verb is an imperative, the object o f n a s manifests the person/nuniber/(gender) o f the 2d person addressee(s); e.g. JCe-ANAxcupei NH-TN M att 9:24 “ He said. D epart” dvaxtopeiTe; gM ooc NA.-K ^ - n e iM A . TA.-BCUK Paphnoute Cephalas, Stories o f the M onks o f the D esert (BM is 4 7 3 :3 4 -4 7 4 :1 ) “Ju st sit down here and I w ill g o ” ; eq p J C e-e -2 N e -®
an
e -® 2 tU T n e-T O Y C C U N e . . . e i e - N T O H
ntoc
C A g cu -
TN eBOA H ANA^xcupei NH-TN ShAmdl I 7 3 :2 -7 “ If indeed you are unw ill ing to reconcile with your sister . . . then you and she must leave, that is, get out”', Mooqpe N3L-K egP'^' Z'-N TCuprp M -n n i c n t- jl- N e iO T e n - n c k e io T e KOT-q n a ~ y S h lll 192; 1-2 “M ake your way up the steps o f the house that your ancestors built for themselves” ; oyium n a - k Noptupn A pophPatr 100 (Chaine 22:34 = Z 295:10) “Eat your m eal in the m orning.” (h) The only detailed source o f lexical information about verbs and their com bi native constituents is W. E. Crum, A Coptic Dictionary (1939).
W O R D O R D E R : T H E O R D E R O F E X P A N S IO N E L E M E N T S A F T E R THE VERB
182 As stated above 181, a verb is often followed by several expansion elements, which can include not only a direct object 166 or an indirect object (the
145
V E R B S
person for whom an action or process is accomplished), but also preposition al phrases and adverbs that express time, place, manner, circumstance, degree, and attitude, or that cooperate with the verb lexeme to express a verbal idea. Generally, the order o f these expansion elements can be understood by invok ing several principles. These abstract principles often conflict with one anoth er; among them are the following, (i) Direct and indirect objects tend to pre cede other elements, (ii) M odifier and modified, nucleus and expansion, tend to occur close to one another. (Hi) Enclitic morphs such as a n ‘not’ or o n ‘again’, and the preposition na« ‘to, for’, tend to precede non-enclitics, and to occur in a predictable order when they occur together, (iv) The rhetorical par allelism o f linked clauses or sentences can account for items out o f basic order. (v) Deliberate rhetorical effects can be expressed by unusual word order. In fact, the order of expansion elements is not rigidly determined. In actual texts it varies quite a lot, reflecting small semantically related groups within the sentence structure and expressing the author’s free rhetorical choices and overall textual arrangement. Euphony (choices of rhythm or phrasing) may also have played a part.
V E R B A L P R E E X T E N S IO N S 183 The three ‘verbal preextensions' also, additionally, moreover, even (vars. p q ; p n N - , p q ; o p n N - . q ; p n - , and hand, previously p g o y e - (var. p g o y o - ) more, even more, greatly
pnK e-
p q ;p n -
q ;p n N -)
first, before
are modifying prefixes that are affixed to both infinitives (durative and nondurative in all three states) and statives. e
146
V E R B A L
A U X I L I A R I E S
previously ratified” ; N C B g H v e eTepe-NJi.3kiM tuN p u ; p n N - e ip e m m o - o y ShIV 1 94:1-2 “ The deeds which the demons did before”', e - j k Y - u ^ P n - c o Y t u N - q m c n gjkeH N-TK3kT3kBOA.H M - n K o c M o c 1 Pet 1:20 “ Having been destined (literally Ihey having /o ;p k n o w n H im ) before the foundation o f the w orld” ; K 3 k T JL -n u ;p n c o Y N - n N O Y T C n i t u T 1 Pet 1:2 “ According to the/o/-eknowledge o f G od the Father”
Preextension and verb combine into a single syntactic, semantic, bound group, with the preextension subsum ed by the verb: thus the syntax of an infinitive or a stative is not affected by the presence o f a preextension. For example, the regulation of direct objects o f the mutable infinitive according to the StemJem stedt rule 171 is the same with or without a verbal preextension. m m o - c 2 Cor 13:2 “ 1 state in advance” A i-ty p n -J c o o -Y Matt 24:25 “ 1 have told you before hand”
i '- q ; p n - j c c u
How ever, after a verbal preextension an intransitive verb with stative o f ongoing m otion 168(c) occurs in the infinitive; e.g. q - p g O Y e - n tu T g t u t u - q N fiei-nM jkTO i ShAmel I 276:10 “ Even more so, the soldier will generally flee.”
Several preextensions can combine: f T j- p n K e - p 20Y e-'f'-® 6 cuNT NA-q 2 N-NeNMTTT-3iceB H c ShChass 105:3-6 “ W e also make Him extremely angry with our impious acts” (also greatly give ^ g e r to Him).
V E R B A L A U X IL IA R IE S 184 The eight ‘verbal auxiliaries’, e.g. q ; - ‘be able to’ M n o y - u j - BcuK NA-q egoyN “ They could not get near Him ” (Mark 2:4) are directly followed, and semantically completed, by a non-durative infinitive (such as o j - BcuK in the preceding example). They are love to NA- future auxiliary 311, (be) going to, will n g N - (do) fo r once, succeed in (doing), ju st (do) T X i y e - frequently, greatly (do something) o y e a ; - w ant to o y eg M - again (do something) q ; - , var. e q ; - be able to, can jc n i- , var. jc n e - have to, must M epe-
Most of these are identical with prenominal infinitives; cf. mb, Noy, ncug. TAo;o, oycuq;, oycugM. Syntactically the auxiliaries are the main verb in their conjugation pattem , except when expanding n a - the future auxiliary, thus dif fering from the verbal preextensions 183. The placement of
147
V E R B S
(a) NA- (the future auxiliary 311) is going to, will is one o f four predicate types that interchange in the durative sentence (chapter 14). F or non-durative coun terparts, cf. 312. E.g. -f—N A -T N N o o y -t) u ; a p c u - t n John 16:7 “ 1 will send Him to y o u ” ; n e n p o c H A y T o c eT®-NeM3i-K q -N 3 i-p -2 i-X tu —k eM A re eMATe D eut 2 8 :4 3 “ T he stranger that is with thee shall com e to b e o ver thee very greatly (dvaPfiaE tai avto fivto).” n 3 i- can b e follow ed by an o th er verbal auxiliary (e.g. MN-AA.A.y n a .- u ;- b c u k e g o y n e - n n e i M -nJCcucupe M ark 3 :2 7 “ N o one can enter a strong m a n ’s h o u se” ).
(b) o y e c y - is synonym ous with oycucy e - and has the sam e distribution; cf. 171(d).
(c) l y - (var. e u ; - ) be able to, can. (i) C onstructed with a conjugation base, u )or e u ; - com es before a non-personal subject but after a personal one. E.g. N N e-u ;-A A A y N -pcuM e 2 a t h - n Aycu 2^TN -TH yTN bcuk e - n c c u o y ? S h iv 6 0 :1 3 -1 4 “ L et no person in our com m unity or yours go to the assem b ly ” ; NAu; N - 2 e e p e - u ;- N A i N A -upcune John 3 :9 “ H ow can this b e ? ” ; N e e J te N -o y 6 A A e . , . e p e - N e q o y e p H T e m en M M o -q e - r i ^ - e u p M oocye J te a n ShC hass 8 7 :2 2 -2 9 “ L ike a lam e person . . . w ho has legs but cannol w alk ” ; N N e y - e u ;- p - A N 3 i- q M - n N o y r e Rom 8 :8 “ T hey cannot please G o d .” (ii) T he present tense is m ostly expressed in com bination w ith future N A -, w ith o u t d istin g u ish in g p resen t an d fu tu re : nim neT**NA-u;-KA-®NOBe e e o A N C A -n N o y re M A oy^A -q M ark 2 :7 Tig 6i)vatai dtpiEvm finapTiag “ W ho can {or w ill be able to) forgive sins but G od a lo n e ? ” (Hi) Synonyms include
(d) o c n i- (var. J c n e - ) occurs only in the sem antic context o f a future, either expanding auxiliary n j^ - or in aorist conjugation; e.g. gHAeiAC q - N A j c n i - e i N u ;o p n M ark 9:11 ’HXiav 6eT 6X,6eTv nptbtov “ First E lijah m ust (will have to) co m e” ; n e i e p o eT®-MMAy u p ^ p e - o y o N n i m j c n e - n e p ^ M M o-q P am bo o f S cetis, L ife o f A pa C yrus (B M ar 1 3 5 :3 ^ ) “ E veryone m ust (has to) cross that riv er.” F urther exam ples: o a h n N e q - M e p e - 6 c u g i - n r o o Y N 6 i-n n e T -o Y J ^ J iB njip3k-2aiB NIM Athanasius, Life o f St. Anthony 84 (Garitte 9 1 :5 -6 ) “ But the saint liked above all to remain on the m ountain” ; n -e N T -jk q -n g iT -c A jk jk T e Ji.e M ip e q - 6 e n H N q -T cu o y N John Chrysostom (Jejunator), On Repentance (BHom 2 2 :2 3 -2 4 ) “ W hoever has already stum bled and fallen, let them hasten to a rise!” ; equpjkN -ngN -T cuoY N N 6 i - n J c o e i c Luke 13:25 “ W hen once the house holder has risen u p "; q-N 3k-T3kU ;e-K To c b o a M -n e q 6 cu N T Ps 77(78):38 “ He will (N3k-) frequently (rjk c y e -) turn away His w rath” ; M n q -o y e u p -q i-N e q B jk A egpjkl € - T n € Luke 18:13 “ He w ould not even lift up hi.s eyes to h e av e n ” ; C K -oY ecy-TpeN -B C U K c - tcun Mark 14:12 “ W here will You have us g o ? ” ; iJjkU;
148
V E R B S
O F
I N C O M P L E T E
P R E D I C A T I O N
N - e e K - o Y e u ; - c c u e e o A g i T o o T - ® John 4 :9 “ How is it that You want a drink from
m e?”
‘
The auxiliaries fall into three groups according to their attestation (i.e. eligi bility?) in durative and non-durative conjugation, as displayed in table 13. T A B L E 13 A t t e s t a t io n
V e r b a l A u x il ia r ie s in D u r a t iv e N o n - d u r a t iv e C o n ju g a t io n
o f the
M e p e - like lo
(i)
o y e i y - w a n t to ( y —, var. e c y - b e a b le to
(ii)
C onjugated I n D urative C onjugation
C onjugated in N on - durative C onjugation
X X X
X X X
n g N - (do) f o r once, su c c e e d in (doing). ju s t(d o )
X X X X
T X i y e - fr e q u e n tly , g r e a tly o y e g M - a g a in
J C n i- , var. Jc n e — h a v e to (= nnist) (Hi)
N 3 i- be going to. w ill 311
and
X
312
N ote: Morphs in group (ii) are poorly attested and their compatibilities with durative conjugalion
are uncertain.
V E R B S O F IN C O M P L E T E P R E D IC A T IO N 185 ‘Verbs o f incomplete predication ’ are those which (at least in certain mean ings) can be, tend to be, or even must be completed by additional information (a 'predicative com plem ent’). a y - A o e y -M o o u p e if MMA-q “They ceased going about with H im ” (John
6 :66) These verbs or verbal constructions express wishing, commanding, beseech ing, forbidding, beginning, ending, possibility, necessity, desirability, difficul ty, m aking into, causing to be, etc. (The verbal auxiliaries 184 are sim ilar in meaning but have a different syntax.) The predicative complement follows the verb, and it occurs in one or more of the following forms. (a) Completive circumstantial clause, cf. 426 Further exam ples; ^ k q - o y c u e q - p - ® N o e i K e p o - c g M - n e q j H T M att 5 :28 “ He lias already com m itted adultery (he-has-finished he-com m itting-adultery) with her in his heart” ; jceKJkC N N eK -oycuN g eeoA . N—fipcuM e e K -N H C T e v e Matt 6 :18 “ That you m ay not be seen lo be fasting” (be seen you-fasting)
149
V E R B S
The verb o \ w 'finish’ is com pleted by the circumstantial durative conjugation o f an infinitive ( e q - c c u r n ) . (i) In past affirm ative conjugation, e q - m eans ‘he has already (done som ething)’, the counterpart o f MnJkTq- ‘he has not yet (done some thing)’. (ii) Otherwise, o y cu e q - means ‘to fin ish (doing som etliing)’. (Hi) A direct object o f the infinitive after e q - . . . is regulated according to the Stem-Jemfitedt rule 171 in the Bible and Shenoute, but not always so in other texts; e.g ji-K eo Y Ji oycu eq-JcN O Y MMO-OY Shill 20:26 “ Som eone else has already interrogated them ” ; 3k^-O Y cu e l-J c c u M M o-c n h - t n John 9 :2 7 “ I have told you already” ; but 3ki-oYcu e i - j c o o - c e p o - K Theodore o f Antioch, Encom ium on St. Theodore the Eastern (BMis 25:30) “ 1 have already told you.” (iv) An intransitive verb with stative o f ongo ing motion 168(c) occurs in the infinitive when expanding o y c u e q - ; e.g. A-2HA.i3kC OYCU e q - e i Matt 17:12 “ Elijah has already com e.”
(b) Predicative n - expanding the stative o ‘is’; cf. 179 Examples: q -o er® -o
n-®u;mmo n e Matt 25:35 “ I was a stranger” ; n-eT®-N3k-2CUTB Ji.e Matt 5:21 “ W hoever kills is liable to judgm ent” ; n ii-®Ji.AiM0 Ni0 N Matt 4 :24 “ Demoniacs (Tliose who are dem on-like)” ; e q N e i-o
N -* eN o x o c e -re K p ic ic
N3 k-TCUOYN AN e q - c y O Y C U O Y H e q - O N-®KCUCUC JkXAJk q - N 3 k - T C U O Y N N-®CCUM3k
N-A.3k3kY ShAmel II 4 0 1 :2 -4 “ He will not arise dried up or as a corpse, but he will arise as a spiritual body, flourishing and not lacking anything” M - n N e Y M 3 k T i K O N e q - p o o Y T e - N - q - c y j k j k T 3kN
Semantic completion o f a verb o f incomplete predication is also expressed by the following constructions. (c) Preposition -i- "'infinitive or ®Tpe-, cf. 363, 502. Mostly e - and n - / m m o « occur (sometimes as textual variants o f one another), depending on choice of verb. The infinitive is negatived by prefixed t m - 161. Examples: jk q -ep H T e-®T3kJk-q N3k-q Acts 7:5 “ He promised to give it to him ” ; T eT N -co o Y N N-®-t-(textual var. e - ® t) N-geN-f- e-N3kNOY-OY Matt 7 : 11 “ You know how to give good gifts” ; n h - t n R - n e i p e jkN JiAAJk nK eoY cuu; JkTeTN-Jkpxei MMO-q JciN-CNOYq 2 Cor 8:10 “To you, who began a year ago not only acting but desiring (to act)” ; NToq Ji.e 3kq-nApjkrreiA.e N3k-Y e -* T ri-J < .e -n -e N T -3 k q -c y a !n e A-A.3k3kY Luke 8:56 “ He charged them not to tell anyone what had happened” ; 3kY~TOYN-ei3kT-OY Ji.e eeoA . 2N-OYpJkCOY e-® T M -K 0 T -0 Y cy3k-2HpcujLHc Matt 2:12 “ And they were warned in a dream not to retuni to H erod” ; mh o y n - u ; 6 o m e-®Tpeq-BCUK egOYN e - 2 H T - c N-reqMjkJkY N K ec o n John 3:4 “Can he enter a sec ond time into his m other’s w om b?” ; N e Y -u ^ m e NC3k-®MooYT-q Luke 19:47 “They sought to destroy Him ” ; J^pHY M -n c o N t h t NgHT 3kN e-*u;3kJce nm m j^-n ApophPatr 238 (Chaine 70:21 = Z 343:19) “ Perhaps the brother is not willing to talk to us” ; NTepeq-NOY Ji.e fi6i-3krpmn3kc e-* N T -q e e o A Acts 12:6 “ W hen Agrippa was about to bring him out” (d)
j c e - or JteK i(3k)c
optative, cf. 338(b)
E.g. jiq-eniT iM 3k N3k-Y JteKjkC N N eY -oY O N g-q eeoA . Matt 12:16 “ He ordered them not to m ake him known”
(e) Somewhat similarly, A c -u ;c u n e “ It happened th a t. . . ” marks the beginning o f a new unit o f narration (it is often left untranslated in English), and is com patible with the following completions:
150
M O R P H O L O G Y
i. a com plete sentence in the past tense or the preterit durative, or E xam ples: 3kc-u;cune er^-MM^kY n 6 i -T c gboa . 2N-N3kX3kpeT Mark 1 : 9 “ In those days Jesus cam e from N azareth” ; A c - ty c u n e Ji.e N T e p e -N J k P re A o c b c u k 2 iT o o T -o y e - r n e N e p e -iiu jo o c N M -N evepH Y Luke 2:15 “ W hen the angels went away from them into heaven, the shepherds said to one another” ; i c - t y c u n e a g j M - n r p e Y - n c u p x gboa . MMO-q n e J c e - n e r p o c Luke 9 : 3 3 “ A nd as they were parting from Him, Peter said”
ii. a conjunctive clause, cf. 354(c) E.g. 3kY*^ 2 ^ M O i N T e - T M - n e i u ; 3 k J c e t c u m n t e .- z ^ Z n 2 h - t n ShAmel I “ And 1 hope and pray that this saying does not apply to m any o f us”
iii.
e-® T p e« ,
2 3 1 :1 -2
cf. 502
E.g. 3kC—(ycune J lc N-NeigooY e - ® T p e q -e i eeoA. e - n r o o Y e-®u;A.HA. Luke 6:12 “ In those days He went out to the m ountain to pray”
(f) T Jipe-, cf. 358
THE M O R PH O LO G Y O F TH E VERB FORM AL
186
CLASSES OF T H E
E G Y P T IA N
C O PTIC
(N O N -G R EEK )
VERB
The history o f the E gyptian verb (and o f Egyptian gram m ar in general) can be traced for three m illennia dow n to the Coptic period. During this long history, sound patterns and individual phonem es evolved in regular but diverse ways, and individual verbs and m orph classes cam e under the sway o f other morphs or classes by force of analogy, and changed. For this reason, a com plete form al classification o f the Sahidic C optic verb would require a large num ber o f subclasses and special explanations, w hich could be fully understood only in reference to etym ology and the long historical devel opm ent o f Egyptian including its typological evolution. In the course o f this history a m ajor typological change occurred, so that by the C optic stage o f Egyptian the verbal lexem e was itself no longer conjugated— as a verbal stem or base— as in the older lan guage. Instead, conjugational inflection for person, num ber, and gender was now applied to an array o f isolated conjugation auxiliaries (the conjugation bases, prefixes, and m utable converters of C optic) preceding and m ostly expanded by the verb lexem e, in which tense, m ood, etc. were to some extent now vested. To these, the C optic verbal lexem e (infinitive) m erely served as a com pletion or expansion, expressing lexical con tent.
If the Coptic verb is exam ined synchronically, as a single system apart from its historical antecedents, m ost o f its striking formal regularities can be sum marized in seven broad morph classes.
151
V E R B S
infinitive I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII.
stative
ccuT n
(c e rn - coT n«) KCUT (KBT- KOT«)
co rn ^
KHT^
ncucuN B ( n e N B - n o o N B s )
nooN e^
COACA (CACA- CACCUAs) TAKO (TAKB- TAKOs)
CACCUA^ Or CACOAT^ TAKHy^ Of TAKHyT^
2ao6 jc ic e (JcecT-JCA CTs)
2 o a 6^ Jcoce^
In m odem dictionary entries, as in the preceding list, the absolute state is listed first, then the prenominal (m arked by a single hyphen - ) , the prepersonal (m arked by a slanted ditto sym bol *), and the stative (m arked by an elevated dagger *), giving four principal forms o f the m utable transitive verb: e.g. kcut k c t - k o t = k h t + ‘build’, c c u r n c e r n - c o r n * c o r n * ‘choose’, etc. For verbs that have a construct participle (participium coniunctum or p.c. 122, 164), dictionaries add a fifth form; e.g. Jc ic e J t e c T jtJkCTs Jto c e * , p.c. JtJkCi-.
187 The consonantal skeleton. The most constant and distinctive feature of Egyptian Coptic verbs is their "consonantal skeleton The skeleton is a series o f written consonants 35 (from one to five in number) that occurs to greater or lesser extent in all forms o f the verb— ^infinitive, imperative, stative, and construct participle, including all states o f a mutable infinitive. E.g. c - T - n occurs in ccurn c e r n - coTn= corn^ ‘choose’; c - a - c - a occurs in c o a c a CACA- CACCUAS CACCUA^ ‘comfort’; B-K occurs in bcuk bhk^ ‘go’; oy-M occurs in oycum o y e M - oyom «, p.c. oy^^m- ‘eat’. M odem dictionaries of Coptic contain only Egyptian Coptic words, excluding those taken from Greek. They are alphabetized primarily by consonantal skeleton, and secon darily by vowel. Verbs are entered under the infinitive (in absolute state). (a) A doubled vowel, in writing, expresses one vowel followed by a glottal stop conso nant 36 (a); e.g. u^cucut expresses /So’t/. (b) A few verbs are classified as having one of their skeletal consonants realized as zero (unwritten). E.g. cuNg belongs to Class I n c u e r, c c u r n , c c u o y e . etc.; kcu and cun to Class II k c u t, ncuT, ecu n , etc.; e i e e to Class V II piKC, e i c e , J t i c e . etc. Cf. 36(d).
188 The distinctive vowel o f the infinitive. With the exception o f final e, doubled vowel 187, non-phonemic e (as in n o 6 n b 6 ) and x (as in oycuNAg) 35, and x expressing / ’/ 36, /i/, or /y/, each absolute state of the infinitive 167 contains only one vowel, which is its ‘distinctive vow el’ (all seven vowels occur in this role); or in the absence o f a distinctive vowel, contains a distinctive consonant with syllabic function 38 ( c b b b ‘circumcise’ with distinctive i ) . Hypothe tically, the spoken stress accent fell upon this vowel or this syllabic consonant 32. E.g. KACKC ‘whisper’, Meeye ‘think’, cyAHA ‘pray’, jcice ‘exalt’, u;opu;p ‘upset’, moyk? ‘afflict’, jccuk ‘complete’, c b b b ‘circumcise’. This vowel, or this syllabicity o f a consonant, is often a distinctive mark o f the
152
M O R P H O L O G Y
infinitive’s identity, along w ith its consonantal skeleton: mb ‘lo v e’, M o y ‘d ie ’; jci ‘receive’, x o ‘s o w ’, jccu ‘sa y ’; k a c k c ‘w h isp er’, k o c k c ‘b e n d ’; KpMpM ‘m urm ur’, KpoMpM ‘becom e d ark ’; m a t s ‘reach ’, m o y tb ‘sp e ak ’; u ;iN e ‘seek ’, u;cuN e ‘becom e sic k ’. (a) Before g, or sometimes before glottal stop, 3k expresses /o/, and (sometimes) e expresses /e/. Thus ncugT n e g T - nJk?'*’* belongs to Class I c c u r n c e r n - c o r n * ; and MOYZ M egto Class II kcut kc t - k o t = kht ^. (b) Forming syllable with a preceding n or m, to Class II KCUT, ncuT, gtun , etc.
o\
expresses /o / 20. Thus m oy2 belongs
189 Allomorphs o f the absolute infinitive: prenom inal and prepersonal states (a) The ‘prenominal state ’ o f the infinitive is an allom orph o f the absolute state (167), w hose distinctive vow el is rendered either as e o r as syllabicity o f a consonant ( c e r n - corresponding to c c u r n , c a c a - to c o a c a , u ; e T - /s ’tj to upcucuT /s o ’t/ 36). H ypothetically, the prenom inal and its suffixed direct object form ed a single stress group (prosodic unit) o f speech, w ith stress falling upon the direct object, e.g. c e T n -M N T C N o o y c set^pm^ntsnows “ C hoose tw elv e.” In verbs o f C lass 111 (193), the doubled distinctive vow el o f the prenom inal is undoubled. In verbs o f C lass V II, final t - occurs in place o f final e o f the absolute state. I. II. III. IV . V. VI. VII.
cc u T n : c e r n kcut: k b t
-
ncucuN e: n e n e c o a c a : cacata a o : taabT h is class (2 a o 6 ) is im m utable. jc ic e : J c e c T -
Further examples: K e T - o y n Y p r o c “ B uild a to w er,” n e N e -® T o o y b b o a “ R em ove m o u n ta in s,” cA C A -N S N e p H y “ E n co u rag e on e a n o th e r” ; T A .A e-N eq 6 iJc egpA.! “ L ay H is h an d s” ; J c e c T - n c y n p e M-pcuMe “ L ift up the Son o f m a n ” The prenominal stale is sometimes written like the absolute 31 (e.g. o y c u n ? - for OYeN2~): q-Njk-OYCUNg-ZCUB nim epcu—t n Eph 6:21 “ He will tell you every thing” ; o y n o b c n e ®OYCUM-noeiK ii-oY pcuM e ShChass 104:39-41 (o y c u m - for oygm - ) “ It is a sin to eat som eone’s food” ; jkY-cgjki-gjkg eY -p-*B ooN e S h iv 72:19 (cgJki- for c e g - ) “They have written many harmful words.”
(b) In all but C lass V, the 'prepersonal sta te’ 167 contrasts w ith the absolute in one o r m ore o f the follow ing features: different location o f syllable boundary, different distinctive (stressed) vow el, vow el in a different position, occurrence o f T« in place o f final e. Cf. table 14.
153 ’
cr ?r ?— fffi I r wi
rm tn v f
VERBS
TABLE 14 D is t in g u is h in g F e a t u r e s
of
i
he
P reperso n al S ta te
(Major Verb Classes)
L
c c u lT n ; c o T n «
IL
kcut
III .
n cu c u lN e: n o o N e *
IV. V. VI. VII.
c o a
;
Ic
k o t s
a
:
ca ccu a s
New L o c a tio n OF S y l l a b l e B o u n d a ry
D ifferent D istinctive V owel
c o T ln -q
cu > o
K O lT -q
U3 > O CU > o
C A lc c u lA -tj
o > cu
J C A C lT -q
1> X
t)IFFERENT P osition OF VOWEL
Ts INSTEAD OF F inal e
Later
T J J A O ; T A .A O S
2 ' ^ o 6 is im m u ta b le . j c i l c e : JCA CTs
e > T=
For additional examples, cf. Appendix 193
190 The stative. In each o f the seven major verb classes, the stative form 162 reg ularly contrasts with the infinitive in one or more of the following formal fea tures: different distinctive vowel, vowel in a different position, added conso nantal ending. Cf. table 15. TABLE 15 D is t in g u is h in g F e a t u r e s
of the
S t a t iv e F o r m
(Major Verb Classes) D ifferent D istinctive V owel
1. II. 111. IV.
ccuT n: co T n ^ kcut: k h t
^
D ifferent P osrrioN OF V owel
A dded E nding
cu > o ’ cu
>
h
’
ncucuN e: nooNe*^ c o a c a ; caccu a * coaca: cacoat’
cu > o ’ o > cu’
V.
TAAO: T A A H Y ^
O> O>
VI. VII.
TAKo: t 3ik. h y t ' 2A o 6; 2 0 a 6* jc ic e : Jcoce*
Later Later -Y -Y T
Earlier 1> o’
For additional examples, cf. Appendix 193
Verbs not falling into one of the major classes are classified as ‘irregular’, i.e. belonging to a very small or unique pattern: e.g. ‘grasp’; e ip e p o* ‘make, do’; cza i c e z c »2* ‘write’; i- i - - t x x = to^ ‘give’.
/5 J
a p p e n d i x
THE
FORM
:
s e v e n
OF G R E C O - C O P T IC
m a i n
f o r m a l
c l a s s e s
VERBS
191 Many Coptic verbs come from Greek 5. All of these Greco-Coptic verbs are immutable, occurring only as an absolute state o f the Coptic infinitive. They have no stative form. Direct objects are mediated by a preposition. 192 From the standpoint of Greek morphology these Greco-Coptic infinitives resemble the Greek active imperative singular, sometimes in a Koine Greek form; this is very close to the Greek verbal stem. E.g. ANACTpe<()e ‘act, behave’, ^ n o T A c c e ‘take leave’, ApecKe ‘please’, ^ p x e i (var. A p x e c e ^ i) ‘begin’, a p n a ‘deny, B ^ n riz e ‘baptize’, ryMNAZe ‘train’, jlia k o n c i ‘m inis ter’, 2eA niZ e gX,7ii^eiv ‘hope’, ey^trreA iZe ‘preach good news’, e e p A n o y ‘heal’, KCUAye (var. kcuay) ‘prevent’, MeTANoei ‘repent’, nApAAiAOY ‘deliver, betray’, n iC T ey e ‘believe’, h a a n a ‘lead astray’, n o A iT ey e ‘live, conduct oneself’, CK^NAAAiZe ‘cause to fall’, c t a y r o y ‘crucify’ (often w rit ten c fo Y ), xpcu ‘make use o f’. E.g. ce-NA-nApAJLiJtoY r^p m m cu-tn Mark 13:9 “ They will deliver you up” ; A Y -n ic T e y e e-TerpA.
193 A P P E N D IX Il l u s t r a t io n E g y p t ia n
o f
C o p tic
t h e
Class 1. Three consonants, M oyoYT ncu^T CCUTM ccuT n ccuoYZ TCU^M oycoN 2 CUN2
S e v e n
M a in
F o r m a l
C la s s es
o f
t h e
V er b
ccuT n:
corrr^. Vowel /6/ cu.
(M e y r(n c 2 T -
MOOyTs)
(CCTM -
COTM=)
(c ern (c e y e (TC2M(o y e N 2 --
co T n = ) c o o y 2 =)
c o rn ’ cooy^’
oyoN 2= )
oyoN 2* 0 N2'
kill (mu\v\^t) bend hear choose gather summon show live
A final obstruent 37 consonant o f the Class I absolute and prenominal states and statives often bears a superlinear stroke, e.g. c c u r n c e r n - c o T n ^ or o y c u n ? o y e N g - o y o N ? ’.
"lass 11. Tw o consonants, BCUK BCUA KCU KCUT
kcut ; KHT^.
(BGA(K J.( kgt-
BOA=) KAAs) KOT=)
(MP(MC2-
Mops) Mi.e=)
MOyN M oyp Moy2
bhk’ BHA* kh’ kht’
MHN* MHp’
Vowel /o / cu. go loosen place build remain bind fill
155
V E R B S
ncuT ncu^l oycuN oycug cun u^cun qcuTe 2CUN 2cun JCCUK
(necy(oyfJ(oyee(en((iien(qer-
oyi.2»:) on*)
(Zen-
2on=)
(J te K -
JtOK=)
no(y=)
.......... ) iy o n s )
nHT* nHcy* oyHN* oyH2* Hn* tynn*
qoTs) 2HN* 2Hn*
run divide open put count receive wipe aiiproach hide complete
Class III. Glottal stop as the second of three consonants (notated by doubling the distinctive vowel 36), ntotUNe: nooN e*. Vowel /o/ to. ncu tu N e TCUCUBC TCUlUMe U^CUCUT
(n e n e (tc b c -
nOON€=) TOOBs)
(q^C T -
u;eeT=)
turn repay TOOMe* join cut nooN e
Class IV. Reduplicated pair o f consonants, c o a c a ; c a c c o a ^ or c a c o a t * . Vowel /o/ o.
COACA
(CACA-
Ne6NOY<5=) .............................................. CKpKtUps) CKpKCUp* o r CKpKOpT* CACCUAs) CACCUA^ Or CACOAT*
u^TopTp
(c y rp rp -
cyrpTtups)
no6nc6
(N e 6 N e 6 -
CKopKp
(cKpKp-
Final added CACOAT.
t
u^TpTCup*
reproach roll disturb
c o n fo rt
o f the slatives in Class IV somelimes bears a superlinear stroke, e.g.
Class V. Transitives in initial t and final o with basic meaning ‘cause . . . to . . . ’ (mostly corresponding to another, non-causative verb), t a k o : t 3i k HY(T)^ Vowel /o/ o. KTO
(K T e -
KTOs)
TBBO (tbbc TBBO=) TJkCIO (TJkGie- T3kelO=) TAKO (TlkKe- T3lKO=) TJkAO (TJkAC- T3kAO=) TJiMO (TJlMe- T iM o s) TMMO (TM M e- TMMO=) TCJkBO ( t c a b c - TC3kBo=) T o y jt o ( T o y j t e - T o y .xo = )
TJkJtpo (T jk jip e - T jkjtpes)
X.O Jtn o
(J te -
J to s )
(jtn e-
jtno=)
make . . . to turn [ k t o for t k t o J ( k c u tc turn) TBBHyt make pure ( o y o n become pure) T A em yt honor {3.13.1 increase in size) TAKHyt, takhyt* destroy lift (cuA take) TJiAHY* ....................................... inform ( ei Me tell) TMMHY* feed (o\o}M eat) 172 TCJiBHY*, TcjkBHYT* make wise wise) T o y jtH yt make whole ( o y J t A T become whole) TaLjtpHY*, TJkjtpHyT* nmke strong (tu p jc confirm, be firm ) JtHY^ io w [ j;o for Tcyo] (eye go) ...................................... acquire [ j tn o for T u;no] (cy tu n e come lo exist)
KTHY*
Affirmative imperatives of Class V verbs opiionally take the prefix M3k- 367.
156
a p p e n d i x
;
s e v e n
m a i n
f o r m a l
c l a s s e s
Class VI. Three consonants (intransitives), 2^ 0 6 ; 2o a 6^. Vowel /o/ o. M KJ k g
M O Kg*
MTON
MOTN*
NU^oT 2A.06
2 0 ^6*
com e to be painful come to be a t rest becom e hard becom e sweet
A final obslruenl consonani o f Ihe slatives in Class V I often bears a superlinear stroke, e.g. MOK2*, 2 0 '^6 '.
Class V ll. Three consonants (including unstable final t , which is realized as e in the absolute state and the stative), Jcice; Jcoce^. Vowel role played by syl labic manifestation 35 of /y / 1. CIBC
OBe*
piKe
(peK T -,
peKTs)
poKe*
2i c e
(2a^CT-, (jte cT -,
2i.CT=) JtJkCT*)
20ce’
x ic e
J toce*
becom e thirsty bend trouble exalt
157
Adverbial Modifiers: Prepositions and Adverbs The Nature o f Coptic Adverbial Modifiers 194 The Basic Function o f Adverbial Modifiers 194 Additional Functions 195 Linkage, Asyndeton, Apposition, and Repetition o f Adverbial Modifiers 197 Specific Negation o f the Adverbial Modifier 199 Prepositions and Prepositional Phrases 200 The Tw o States o f the Preposition 200 Linkage o f Prepositional Objects 201 Simple Prepositions 202 Catalogue 202 n - / m m o = 203 NTe-/iMTA« 204 Inflection of prepositions 205 Combinative adverbs ( g b o a ) 206 Compound Prepositions 208 Simple preposition + possessed noun 209 Simple preposition + n - noun + general relationship 210 Simple preposition + ®noun (or n i - noun) + n-/m m o= 211 NCA- + ®noun + n -/m m o » 212 Miscellaneous other formations 213 Periphrastic Prenominal States 214 Adverbs 215 Simple Adverbs 215 Compound Adverbs 216 Formed with initial n - 217 W ithout i n i t i a l s - 220 Formed with ^ n - o y and ajcn-** 221 O ther formations 222 Non-combinative adverbs of spatial orientation ( n b o a ) Preposition + adverb 224 Combinative adverb + adverb 225 Combinative adverb + preposition + adverb 226 Preposition + preposition + adverb 227
158
223
NATURE
OF
C O PTIC
ADVERBIAL
MODIFIERS
Reiterated Entity Term s 228 Interrogative Adverbs 229
T H E N A T U R E O F C O P T I C A D V E R B I A L M O D IF I E R S THE BASIC FUNCTION OF ADVERBIAL MODIFIERS 194 The ‘adverbial m odifier’, comprising prepositions and adverbs, is a numerous class o f terms whose defining feature is their ability to descriptively expand, modify, or complete a preceding verb, verbal clause, or imperative. Cf. 181. -f--Me MMcu-TN eMATe “ I love you veiy m u ch ” (2 Cor 12:15) nupAjce N e q - u ;o o n NNAgpN-nNoyTe “ The W ord was (dwelled) wif/t G od" (John 1:1) q - c o T r i n2o y o “ That is fa r better” (Phil 1:23) ncuN2 u ;A -eN e2 “ Eternal life” (The process of living-forever) (M ark 10:17) A jci-c MMATe 2M-ncyAJce “ Just say it, with a w ord” (Matt 8:8) In this function, adverbial modifiers express circumstance or relationship o f time, place, manner, degree, or attitude; or express an object of the verb (sometimes also contributing to the expression o f a particular verbal idea 181[b]). They fall into two groups; i. 'prepositions’ 200, which are dependent morphs (or constructions) that occur in prenominal and prepersonal states 30 and so always combine with another element, to make up a prepositional phrase (gN -T egoY eiT e “ In the beginning,” NgHT-q “ In H im ” ) ii. ‘adverbs’ 215, which are either unitary, unanalyzable terminal morphs ( t g n o y now) or prepositional phrases that are lexically fixed expressions (2 N -oyM e truly, e - n e g o y o too much) For the use and non-use o f hyphens to divide com ponents o f the adverbial m odifier in this book, cf. 27.
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS 195 The term ‘adverbial’ conveys far too limited a picture o f these m odifiers, for they are not limited to postmodification of the infinitive, stative, im perative, or verbal clause. Very many o f them can also perform one or more o f the fol lowing functions or occur in the following positions: i. m odifier within or at the end of a non-verbal sentence pattern, e.g. o y r e -j-pHNH N-gewpcuM e NNA.2l ^ - n N o y T e ShChass 168:56-169:1 “ W hat does the peace o f human beings amount to in the eyes o f G o d ? ” ; oyA T -6oM
159
ADVF.RBIAL
MODIFIERS
NNAgpN-NpcuMe n e n ^ i Matt 19:26 “ This is impossible with human beings” ; oyN -K eK o cM o c M -n ^i ShOrig 303 (Orlandi 20:28-29) “ There is another world beneath this o n e ” ; u - i y i y e a n e - n r H p - q e ShOrig 303 (Orlandi 20:26) “ One absolutely ought not to . . . MNTe-®npo<})HTHC ®ta.To 2 M-neq-f-Me MMiNMMo-q John 4:44 “ A prophet does not have honor in his own co u n try"; n a u ;c u -c k a t a - c m o t nim Rom 3:2 “ It is much in every way" ii. modifier of a preceding entity term 103(b), e.g. T evniC T ic egoyN e - n e 5 ^ S hlll 87:15 “Their faith in Christ”', o y x e B o \ gM -nM NT-CNooYc Matt 26:47 “ One o f the twelve”\ a a a y n 2 h t - t h y t n ShIV 63:1 “ Anyone among yo u ” iii. modifier o f a preceding adverbial modifier, e.g. n 2^2 N - c o n eM ^re ShAmel 11317:1 often” iv. actualized by an article, like a genderless common noun 124, e.g. 2eNKATA-®CAp5 S hiv 122:24 “ Relatives (blood relations)” V. predicate in a nominal sentence with n e , e.g. e-njciNJCH NA-y r e TeY2y n 0 M0 NH ShIV 46:18 “ For them, their endurance is in vain" 196
vi. predicate in a durative sentence 305, e.g. -f—NMM^-q Ps 90(91): 15 “ I am with him ” vii. premodifier before a sentence pattern, to lay down a circumstance or relationship of time, place, manner, degree, or attitude in which the sentence is being asserted (i.e. under which the nexus occurs); e.g. 2 N -T e 20Y e ire N e q -c y o o n N6i-ncyAJce John 1:1 “ In the beginning was the W ord” ; NN3i2PM-nNOYTe A e mmn—a a a y n —a t —6om Matt 19:26 ‘‘With God there is no impossible thing” ; n a - n A e N-eT®-NA-oYJC^tK o y <5om N re-nN O Y Te n e 1 Cor 1:18 “ But to us who are being saved it is the power of G od” ; e-® JC oo-c J c e -n -e T K -N A -u ;-A A -q oyn-® 6om e~2tuB nim M-n-eT®n ic r e Y e M ark 9:23 “ As for saying the words W hatever You can do, all things are possible to the one who believes” ; cf. 2 5 8 ,3 1 4 ,3 3 3 ,4 0 9 ,4 2 0 ,4 4 2 , 456, 473 The boundary line is not entirely clear between adverbial modifler with premodifying function, conjunction 231, and initial attitude marker 238; e.g. jki-gMOOc m n o y c g iM e 1 CTBC—nJki mn-®6om m m o-i e —®ei Luke 14:20 “ I have married a wife, and therefore 1 cannot com e” and n-eT®-3kN3kKpiNe Ji.e m m o-I n e n j c o e ic I g c u c r e M np-K piNe M -n e o Y o e iu ; u^jkNTC-nJCoeic e i 1 Cor 4 :4 -5 “ It is the Lord who judges me. Therefore do not pronounce judgement before the time, before the Lord com es.”
viii. between non-personal subject and verbal predicate (rhetorical arrange ment, rare); e.g. e -A .-2 HpcuAHC 2M -n e q 20 YMice e ip e N-OYAinNON Mark 6:21 “ When Herod on his birthday gave a banquet” ; mh M ep e -n o Y ^
160
N A TL'Ri;
O F
C O P T I C
A D V E R B I A L
M O D I F I E R S
noY.3t mmcu- t n gM-ncABBATON B A -neqM A ce g b o a L uke 13:15 “ D oes not each o f you on the sabbath untie their o x ? ” ; M A p e -n e rN u ;A ^ e N O Y oeiu; nim u ;c u n e g N -o y x A p ic Col 4 :6 “ Let your speech alw ays be g ra cio u s” ix. focal point in a focalizing conversion pattern 4 4 4 ; e.g. e p e - n A i K ^ i o c n 3 i-u )n 2 eBOA 2 N -T n iC T ic Rom 1:17 “ T he righteous w ill live by fijith" X. com binative adverb (e.g. xi. the prepositions ty term s; cf. 145.
m n-
g b o a ),
cf. 206
and g i - ‘an d ’ also play a m ajor role in linking en ti
By definition, adverbial m odifiers are term s that can m odify a preceding verb or verbal clause. A dditionally, functions (i) to (x) are each perform ed by a restricted num ber o f the m odifiers, but with considerable overlap am ong these subgroups. S ubgroups (iv) and (v) are alm ost identical; on the other hand, su b groups (v) and (v i)a ie m utually exclusive. T hus any given adverbial m odifier perform s only som e o f the possible functions. C ertain kinds o f subordinate clause (e.g. the circum stantial) also perform som e o f these syntactic functions, including m odification o f a preceding verb and prem odification, and are sy n tactically com parable to the adverbial m odifier (chapter 23).
196
Prepositions expressing relationship can be actualized as a genderless entity term (in the article phrase) or as an attributive, and can function as predicate in the nominal sentence 124, 298. Those expressing situation can be predicate in the durative sentence 310. E.g. n c q p o o y u ; n e C T B e-iigH K e John 12:6 “ His care is f o r the poor’’ (relationship); -t--NMM3k-q Ps 90(91): 15 “ I am with him ” (situation). LIN K A G E,
ASYNDETON,
A D V ER B IA L
A P PO S ITIO N ,
AND
R EPETITIO N
OF
M O D IFIER S
197 Tw o or more adverbial m odifiers can be linked to form a single unit by Aycu and, H (and H N T o q ) or, j c n - or else, ( o y a b ) . . . o y A e (neither . . . ) nor, or ( e i r e ) . . . e iT e (either . . . ) or. E.g. T eN o y a.ycu N o v o e iu ; nim ShIV 197:9 “ Now and forever” ; g N -o v M N T -p eq -JC i n 6 o n c h NToq 2 n - o y a i k a i o n S h lll 129:24 “ C rim inally or legally” ; e jc c u -i (i.e. a jc c u -i) o Y ^ e g^^po-K m ^ y a a - k ShAm el II 5 1 9 :9 -1 0 “ W ithout m e or on your ow n” ; o y a g 2 M -neiA icuN o Y ^ e 2M-n-eT®-NHY M att 12:32 “ Either in this age or in the one to co m e” ; e i r e g N - r n e e iT e giJCM-nKa.? I Cor 8 :5 “ In heaven or on earth.”
(a) A dverbial m odifiers also occur in asyndeton, i.e. in succession w ithout any linking term ; e.g. n - e r ® -u ;o B e a n e - n e q e t c u T 2 N -6 o m nim ^ - e o o Y NI M 2 ' - T A e i 6
NIM ^
- m TTt - N A H T
n im
2 '- M ffr - U ;3 L N - 2 T H - q
NI M
M N T -A rA eoc nim 2 1 - m n t - x p h c t o c nim S hC hass 1 1 8 :6 -1 6 “ H e w ho is not different from H is F ather in any pow er, in any glory o r honor, in any co m passion o r m ercy, in any benevolence or kindness.”
161
a d v e r b i a l
m o d i f i e r s
{b) They can occur in apposition 149: e-KeM A e-NKeTMMo eT®-2 HN ezoyN Mark 1:38 “ Elsewhere, to the other nearby towns.” 198 Repetition o f an entire adverbial modifier expresses intensification: eM ^re eMATe ShAmel II 8 7 :9 “ Very, very” ; mmh n c mmh n € ShlV 66:15 “ Absolutely every day.”
SPEC IFIC
N EG A TIO N
OF
THE
A D V E R B IA L
M O D IFIER
199 The grammatical relationship o f an adverbial modifier, as an individual ele ment o f a text, can be negatived by the enclitic an KAAcuc AN “For no good purpose” (Gal 4:17) which usually comes after the target of negation. E.g. z n -o y tT n a z n - o y c z a i AN Rom 2:29 “ Spiritually and not literally” ; . . . a n g b o a z f i - N p c u M e a a a a eBOA 2 iTM-nNOYTe Rom 2:29 “ Not from human beings but from G od” ; e n A 2 0 Y e e n a n Shlll 212:4 “ Backwards, not forwards.”
P R E P O S IT IO N S A N D P R E P O S IT IO N A L P H R A S E S THE
TW O
STATES
OF
THE
PR EPO SITIO N
200 Prepositions are dependent morphs: they are completed by another element (the ‘o b ject’ o f the preposition) to form a 'prepositional p h ra se’. They are either sim ple 202 or compound 208. Most prepositions occur in two states (allomorphs) 30, e.g. e - , e p o « against; c jc n - , ejccu« upon; e r s e - , eTBHHTs because of. (A few are defective, lacking one or the other o f these, cf. 214). (a) The prenom inal state is com pleted by a non-personal entity term.
prenominal state +
determinator pronoun 44, specifier pronoun 63, article phrase 43, specifier phrase 64, proper noun 126, or possessed noun 138 (after some prenominal states, also the 2d pi. alternant personal suffix - t h y t n 85)
(b) The prepersonal state is inflected by the personal suffixes 85; e.g. e p o ^ “To it,” e jc c u ^ “Upon m e,” e t b h h t - o y “ Because o f them .” In m odem dictionary entries the prenominal state is marked by a single hyphen ( - ) and the prepersonal, by a slanted ditto symbol (=). O f the prepositions taken from G reek, only three have a Coptic prepersonal state: K3kT3k-, K3kT3kpo= [Koxa]; nJkpJk-, njkpjkpo* [n ap a]; n p o c - , n p o c p o * [jcpoq] (rare:
162
PREPOSITIONS
A q -e e c u A .o ri n p o c p o - o y Cyril o f A lexandria, Encomium on R evelation 7-12 (M organ M 59I f.l2 r / j:30 -3 1 ; Dep. 157] “ He speculated about them ").
l i n k a g e
o f
t h e
p r e p o s i t i o n a l
o b j e c t s
201 Pi^positional objects can be linked by m n-/nm m a« ‘and’, perm itting either or both o f the objects to be a personal suffix; e.g. n e q c N o q z i J c t u - N MN-NeNu;Hpe Matt 27:25 “ His blood be on us and (on) our children]” 2A p o -i NK1MA-K M att 17:27 “ For M e a nd (for) y o u rself'; e - n j c o e i c n m m a - c ShChass 1 4 7:14-15 “ A bout the L ord and (about) it” ; ZN-TBKMHTe MN-TeczTMe Gen 3:15 “ Between (in the midst of) you and the wom an.” s i m p l e
p r e p o s i t i o n s
202 Catalogue. The simple prepositions (which cannot be analyzed completely into smaller recognizable Coptic morphs) are ANTI- (dvTi) instead of jkJCN-, AJCNTs (often erroneously spelled bjcn - ) without e - , e p o s to, for, against, in comparison to e r s e - , g t b h h t s because of, concerning [ e i c - prefixed to an entity term of tim e or measure, cf. 485] KA^TA-, KATApos ( koto ) according to, like, by iHMAz- in the presence o f (a god) [rare] M N - (var. N M - ) , NKiMAtf with, and MNNCA.-, MNNccua after (of time) N - (alt. M - 21, vars. 22), k i m o s 203: of, out of, from, related to; marks direct object o f mutable infinitives. For n - the mark o f relationship, cf. 203. to, for N - (alt. M - 21, vars. 22), N M - , cf. M N [ n t b - , n t a « o f (m ark o f appurtenance, not definitionally a preposition _ 204)] n 6 i - , m ediator o f postponed subject 87 (untranslatable in English) NA2 PN-, NA2 pjt« (var. n n a z p n - , n n a z p ^ s ) in the presence of, before, in relation to na^pA-, na^pa^po* (napa) contrary to, in comparison with, beyond, more than n p o c - , n p o c p o s 200 (npcx;) in accordance with, for; than (in compar isons) o y s e - , oYBHs opposite, towards, against o y r e - , oytcus between, among x c u p ic - (xwptg) without, apart from
163
A D V E R B I A L
M O D I F I E R S
q;ak-, qpApo* to, toward 2jL -,2aipo» under, from 2 I-, on, at, in 2 N -, N2 HT* in, at, on, from; cf. also 209 (zh) and (20 ) e ep N - var. z n eApiZApos apart, on (my, your, etc.) own 2 CUC- (6q) like, as if JciN- since (time, place); for x i n e - and jcinn- , cf. 213 203 N-/MMQS marks (i) the direct object o f mutable infinitives 171, f») incidental predicative expansion 179, (Hi) partitive relationship (the relationship o f indi vidual to class, discrete object or quantity to constituent stuff, container to stuff contained— ^the first term being the individual etc. and the second [medi ated by n - / m m o ] being the class etc.). Exam ples; (ii) i i - K ShChass 85:34 “ M ake yourself rich ” ; e e e - w e q - o M M o - c Jas 1;24 “ How he was (Whai he was like. T he m anner such that he was it)” 6noiogT)v; (in ) o y ^ t N -N c y N irc u rH Luke 13; 10 “ One o f the synagogues” ; g e e N o c NiM N-*pcuM e Acts 17;26 “ Every nation o f human beings” ; o y i M -n e fc N iY Acts I ;24 “ One of these tw o” ; nim M -n c i< y q M att 22;28 “ W hich o f the sev en ?” ; N - N - e N T - i r e T N - x o o - Y Acts 8:24 “ Anything o f what you have said” ; noYa. n o Y i N-MnYAcuN Rev 21:21 “ Each o f the gates” ; z o e i N e n - t k o y c t c u a i a M att 28:11 “ Some o f the guard” ; oYM HHtye A e n-®2 0 0 y Acts 9 :23 “ M any days” (A m ultitude o f days); Ti.reA.H p-® pip M ark 5 :13 “ The herd o f sw ine” ; noYM-
The mark o f relationship n - (but not mmo») also forms attributive construc tions o f the noun 96 and the general relationship (possessive) construction 147, extends personal suffixes in periphrastic constructions 87, and is an extension element in gendered nominal bases 109 and prenominal states o f the possessed noun 139. It is a formative element in cotnpound adverbs, e.g. NoyMak somewhere 217-19. 204 hiTe-/NTA» ‘o f , the mark o f appurtenance, does not meet the definition o f a preposition since it never modifies a preceding verb or verbal clause (nor does it premodify). Its only functions are restrictive expansion o f a preceding noun 147,148, and predicate in the lexically fixed expression eT®-NTA-(cj) “Which belongs to (him).” 205 Inflection o f prepositions. Selection of personal suffixes after the prepersonal state follows the pattern 85 described in table 6 (p. 69). T he 2d pi. is expressed variously, depending on which preposition is selected; i. prepersonal state + - t n (e.g. n h - t n , e p cu -T N , K a ra p c u -T N ,
n t e - t h y t n . o y b e - t h y t n . e t b e —t h y t n )
iii. prepersonal state + t h y t n (e.g. n 2 h t - t h y t n , 2 h t - t h y t n )
164
mmcu - t n
,
P R E P O S I T I O N S
206 'Combinative adverbs', such as c b o a . or eeo y N , are those whose function is to combine in meaning with prepositions, adverbs, o r verbs, and thus to form lexically fixed expressions. M ostly they help to express spatial orientation (in, out, up, down, ahead, back), though they merge in meaning with the other ele ment o f the expression. In their combinative function, they come before a combining preposition or adverb 2 N - in; e b o a . 2 n - from MMAY there; e b o a . mmay thence but after a combining verb 181 Kcu place, appoint; kuj e^oyN admit, bring into port In the preceding examples the presence or absence o f a combinative adverb causes obviously different meanings to be expressed by the preposition, adverb, or verb. But in other instances, the adverb seems to be present because o f the context or in the interests o f more precise phraseology (and here a English translation may not express any distinction; 2 n - in, epAi 2 n - in.) Combinative adverbs enable a larger num ber of meanings and nuances to be expressed from a limited lexical stock of prepositions and verbs. TABLE 16 C onstructions o f t h e C o m bin ativ e A d v e r b s w ith O t h e r M orphs C ombines C
ombinative
A
dverb
Verb
Simple Preposition
with
Compound Preposilion (Types i. ii)
Adverb
208
Spatial Orientation: Inside (20Y N )
ezoyN
X
N20YN
X X
X
Outside (BOA.) eBO A
X
X
Top, botlom (2pJk'0 eepAi
X
X
X
X X
2PAI Botlom
X (n ecH T)
enecHT
X
Front ( 0 H)
eeH
X
Rear (n A ^ o y ) X
e n A ^ O Y
Emotional orientation: Mind
(
2H t )
207
N2HT
165
A D V E R B I A L
M O D I F I E R S
(a) The eleven combinative adverbs o f spatial orientation (table 16) are formed by union of one o f three prepositions e - to, toward N - in, at q;A- up to with one o f the following nominal components in a zero article phrase: BOA. outside 20YN inside necHT bottom (syntax as if unitary noun lexeme tionaries under e c h t ) 2 PAI top (also bottom) BH front nA2 0 Y rear
necHT,
but filed in dic
(2 PaT also occurs without preposition, 217.) Like most other adverbs, they have the form o f a prepositional phrase (e-®BOA., etc.) and are lexically fixed expressions 216. A single preposition can be expanded by two nominal com ponents, e.g. ei e 2 pAi h boa. ( e - + 2 pAi h boa.) Shlll 200; 17 “ Come up from or out of.” Two combinative adverbs can combine with a single verb, e.g. ®KcuTE ezoyN EBOA. ShIV 81:11-12 “Comings and goings.” In modem dic tionaries, combinative adverbs are filed under their nominal component. (b) Those which combine with verbs 181(b) include: eboa., eeoyN , e n e c H T , e2PAf, €BH, eniL2,oy. (c) Those which combine with simple prepositions 202 include the following. i. eBOA.; eB. n-/mmos from; eB, oYTe-/oYTCu= from among, between; eB. 2I-/2ICUCU* from off, from; ea. 2n - /n 2h t* from in, from ii. enecHT: en. e-/epo= down lo; en. 21- /2ICUCU* down from off iii. e20YN: e2- e -/e p o s lo, for, over against; e2- 2^~/2^po* in benealh; e221- / 211UIU* in toward; for e2- 2^ - (= ^2- ^2” -). cf. 209 (20) iv. e2pil: ez- e-/ep o * up to, up against, down lo, lo; ez- eJcN- (like eJcN- upon, etc.); e2- 0YBe-/0YBH* up lo, up against; e 2- 2^~/2^Po= under, up to, up benealh; e2down from, up from, upon V. N20yn : N2. e-/ep o * upon; N2- 2^-/2^po= in benealh; N2- 2 '- /2 '‘^ ‘^® in; 2N- (or n -)/n 2Ht= within vi. N2piT; N2- 2N -/n2HT= in vii.
e-/epo= unlil, up to, even lo
viii.
e-/epo= up lo, even lo
ix.
2PJtT: 2 P- O Y Te- 7oYTCU» Crum D id .
2IJCN-) upon, etc.
166
495o;
2 P. 2N - / n 2h t *
in;
2P- Z i x i i -
(like
P R E P O S I T I O N S
(d) Those which combine with a compound preposition o f type (i) or (ii) are list ed with those prepositions below 209, 210. They include eboa., e 20 YN, ezpAi, apA20YN, 2PAi. (e) Two compound adverbs contain e b o a , namely eboa. mmay thence and eboa. TUJN whence?. (f) Some combinative adverbs can occur as part of the predicate o f a durative sen tence, cf. 310. (g) s B o \, enecHT, e2pAi, and eeH, in the temporal sense o f onwards, occur as non-combinative adverbial complements after prepositional phrases express ing time since; e.g. m n n c a - . . . e b o a . , j c i n - . . . enecHT, j c i n - . . . eepjiT, JciNN- . . . eeH , JciN e- . . . e e n . (h) For non-combinative adverbs o f spatial orientation (nboa. outside, 2 I20 yn within, etc.), cf. 223. 207 The non-spatial combinative adverb n 2 h t (cf. 2 h t heart, mind) combines with verbs 181(b) and helps to express emotional processes and states. E.g. MKA2 N2 HT ‘be(come) disturbed’; niu q ;c iJe- ‘be(come) astonished’; tu jk N2 - ‘be(come) courageous’; tujkm n?. ‘be(come) troubled’; jc ic e n?. ‘be(come) arrogant’; etc.
COMPOUND
PREPO SITIO N S
The compound prepositions are lexically fixed expressions, which are formed in five ways; 1. simple preposition + possessed noun 209: n c a - / n c u j s behind, i.e. n - + CA-/CUJS [ n - + the side of] ii. simple preposition + n - noun + construction o f general relationship 210: enMA N -/e n e (q )M A instead of; i.e. e - + h m a N -/n e (q )M A [ e - + the place
of/(his) place] iii. simple preposition + ®noun (or n i - noun) + n - / m m o = s 211: 2 inA20 Y N-/MMQS behind, i.e. g i - + ®nA20Y n-/m m qs [21- + the rear of] iv. NCA.- ®noun + n - / m m q s 212: n c a b o a . n - / m m q s outside of, i.e. n c a . + ®BOA. N-/MMQS f NcA- + the outside of] V.
miscellaneous other formations 213
In a few o f these no initial preposition is expressed; (i)
(ii)
nBOA. N - , neOYN N - ;
(iii) n i c x
n - , OY 6
(= eepi^-), 2 ht*; n -;
(iv)
cA Tne
N - , CA.OYNA.M N - , CA.20YN N - .
167
A D V E R B I A L
M O U l F l K R S
209 (i) Simple preposition + possessed noun 138. Although most possessed nouns refer, at least etymologically, to a part o f the body, tn compound prepositions they have a general, relational meaning rather than a particular, anatomical one; epA.T-q “ To h im ” [etym ologically, tow ard the fo o t o f him]; eJCM-nTOOY John 6:3 “ Up on the m ountain” [toward the head o f the moun tain]. Nevertheless, they often occur after verbs or in phrases or contexts where the action or state described relates at least metaphorically to an anatomical part; this factor helps to account for selection o f preposition in Coptic usage. Thus one way o f saying “ to him ” is e T O O T -q [towards the hand of him], another is e p c u -q [towards the mouth o f him]; the first is used if handing an object ‘to ’ someone, the second if striking a blow ‘to’ som eone’s face. However, prepositions are selected primarily to express an abstract rela tionship, regardless o f etymology and context: ejcN -N eyoY PH H Te Rev 11:11 “ On their feet” [etymologically toward the head(s) o f their feet], (Literal, particular reference to parts of the body is expressed by a different set o f nouns 140.) (boa.) B A -/B A N -/B A A .N -, BAA.i= N BA -, N B A A is beyond, except
[ o U ls id e o f j
e ii T s l e y e ( s ) o f ] \ for prenominal state cf. 214 2i e i i T = before A iK T s [ c o v e r i n g o f] ', for prenominal state cf. 214 NAiKT* over, covering (p o ) p f i- . pcus (m om h of] e p i i - . epcu s to, upon < y i 2 0 YN ep. until 2ip c u = beneath, before 21 p N -, 21 pcus at, upon p iT = [fool/feel o fj: for prenominal state cf. 214 e p iT = to (person) < y i 2 0 YN ep. until 2 i p i T * beneath 2 ip iT = toward ( c i ) c i - , ccus [ s id e o f] i i c i - , iic c u = behind, after, from, except Cf. also the simple preposition m n f i c i-
(Tcupe) T (4 -. TOOTS
lh a tid (s ) o f l
e T N -, eTOOTs to N T N - (var. N T e -), n t o o t = in, by, with, beside, from eBOA NT. from 2 i T N - (var. 2^ 2t n - ) . 2^ t o o t = beside, with 2 IT N -, 2ITOOTS through, by, from eBOA z i ’’’- Same a.s preceding TOYN-, T O \ w s Ihosont c fl e T O Y N -. e T o y c u s beside, at, with 2 IT O Y N - (vars. 2 >TO Y e-, 2 'T o y e N - ).
168
z
>t o \ w ^
beside, next to
P R E P O S I T I O N S
(2 h) 2 h t * IfronI o fj\ for prenom inal state cf. 214 ezH T * before (of place) 2 HT= Sam e as previous
(2H) 2HT= [helly of] Cf. the sim ple preposition 2 N -, N2 H ts
(20 ) 2 PN-/2 N-, 2P^= ifoce of] e 2 P N - (vars. E2 N -, 2 n - ) , e g p i s lo, among e 2 0 YN e2- in toward, before e 2 pi'( e2- to, at 2 N -, e 2 P i= . Same as e 2 p i i - 208 2i2P^= on the face of; for prenom inal state cf. 214 Cf. also the simple preposition n a 2 PN -
(2Ht ) (2)Te-/(2)TN-, 2TH= [heart of] 2i2"''N ~ (vars. 2^ 2'r e - , 2^ t n - , 2 ^ T e - ) . 2^2'''n= (''S*'- 2 ^ th = ) with, beside, from beside J c ii-, Jccus [head of] i J c i i - . See e x i i - ; also sim ple preposition a j c n - 202 e J t i i - (viir. e Jccu -). eJccu= upon, over; for, on account of; against; to; in addition to, after (also erroneously expressed as a x n - ) e e o A e x . out from egOYN e x . into the presence of e 2 pJiT e jt. Sam e as e J c ii2 i x iu = before (of time, place); for prenom inal stale cf. 214 2 IJCN- (var. 2 IXCU-), 2 ix c u s upon, over, in, on, at, beside, for, through, from upon eBOA 2iJt. from upon 2 piT 2 '^ - upon
210 (ii) Simple preposition + n - nonn + construction o f general relationship 147. Each preposttton has both a prenominal and a prepersonal state, e.g. m - h b o a . N - ‘outside o f’, M - n e ( q ) B O A . ‘outside o f (him)’. niBOA. i i - , ne(q)BOA (vars. ba and bha) [the outside of] MnBOA N - outside o f (place, rarely time); independent o f
nBOA i i - Sam e as preceding nlexne i i - , ne(q)exne [the top of] (syntax as if masc. noun exne i.e. xne, but filed in dictionaries under ne) J i n e x n e i i - above, over (Cf. also n e x n e and x n e 211) niKCUxe i i - . n e(q )K C U x e [the inquiry of] hinK cuxe i i - aboui, concerning ghinKCUxe i i - Same as preceding n iM i i i - , ne(q)M A [the i>lace of] enMA i i - in place of, instead o f
xlMHxe ii-, xe(q)MHxe [the midst of] exMHxe ii- lo. into the midst of, between iixM H xe i i - in the midst of, betw een, from the m idst of;
eBOA ii. from the m idst of
2 ixMHxe i i - in, through the m idst of
2iixMHxe ii- in the m idst of, between; eBOA z- from out o f the m idst of
169
A D V E R B I A L
M O D I F I E R S
nelMTO e B o x m -, n e (q )M T o e B o x [ t h e p r e s e n c e M n e w n T o e b o a . n - in Ihe presence of. before
o f]
n i c i N -, n e ( q ) c i l i h e s i d e o f ] e n c i N - lo e JC M n ci N - loward 2 i n c i N - in ihe vicin ily of, near lo n i c i N-BOA. N -, n e ( q ) c i n - b o a [ t h e o u t e r e n c i N BOA f i - oul of, lo Ihe oulside of n i c i N - 2 0 YN N -, n e ( q ) c i n - ^ o y n [ t h e e n c i N2 0 YN n - inlo, lo Ihe inside of 2 M n c i N2 0 YN i J - in Ihe midst of
s id e o f]
in n e r s id e o f]
( n i - c i N -, cf. 211) tIoyn^im N - , x e (q )o Y N iM [ t h e 2 ITOYNJIM N - al ihe righi of
r ig h t h a n d o f]
t I 2 E n - (spelled e e f i- ) , x e (q ) 2 e [ t h e m a n n e r o f ] N e e N - in ihe manner of, even as, like ( c f 506) t I j h m - (spelled e H m->, T e (q ) 2 H [ t h e f r o n t o f ] 2 i e H N - in froni of, before (of lime, place) [bul adverb 2 I6 H N - Sam e as preceding
= 2 Ji-**®h
223]
n l 2 0 YN i i - , n e (q ) 2 0 YN [ t h e i n s i d e o f ] Mn2 0 YN N - inside, wilhin (of place, lime) n 2 0 YN N - Sam e as preceding n l2 0 T eBOA f i - , n e (q )2 0 x e b o a (vars. 2 ‘ iJT, 2 0 x e , and 2 U>'re) Mn2 0 T eBOA i i - in Ihe presence of, opposite
[ t h e p r e s e n c e o f]
211 (Hi) Simple preposition + ^noun (o r n i - noun) + n - /m m o s 203. Each prepo sition has both a prenom inal and a prepersonal state, e.g. opa-®boa. n - o ut of, upA-^BOA. MMO-(q) out o f (it). BOA N-/mmO;s [ o u t s i d e v f ] [eBOA N - from, cf. 206(c)] cyABOA N - lo Ihe oulside of, oul of 2 ABOA i i - from, away from 21 BOA i i - oulside of; beyond, excepting n i c i ii- / J iM o s [ t h e f a r t h e r 58(e) e n i c i i i - lo beyond J i n i c i i i - beyond n i c i i i - beyond 2 i n i C i i i - on Ihe olher side of 2 M n iC i i i - beyond
®necHT ii-/M M o* ecHT)
[ b o tto m o f]
s id e o f]
(syntax as if noun necHT, bul filed in diclionaries under
M ne cH T i i - al Ihe bollom of, below c y in e c H T i i - as far as, down lo 2 i n e c H T i i - undemealh
170
P R E P O S I T I O N S
® n e x n e n -/m m o = [top of] (synlax as if noun n e x n e , bu! filed in dictionaries under ne) M n e x n e f i - above, over Z M n e r n e f i - Sam e as preceding (Cf. also x n e infra, e r n e 210) ® ni2 0 Y n - /J im o * [rear of] e n i20Y behind 2 i n i 2 0 Y N - behind (place); before (lime) ®xne N-/MMOS Itop of] ( x n e m asc. common noun, bul filed in diclionaries under n e ) M xne N - above 2 i x n e i i - Sam e as preceding 2 N x n e i i - Same as preceding (Cf. also n e x n e supra, e x n e 210) ®eH N-/MMOS [prow of] (e H m asc. common noun, Acis 27:41) 2 I6 H N - before, in from o f
®oYNiM N-/MMO* [right hand of] 2 IOYNAM i i - al Ihe righi o f "oY iuty i<- [gap of] iio Y e c y i i - wilhoul, in ihe absence of o Y e ty i i - Same as preceding ®tycucux i i - [need of] t y i i x i i - (vars. t y i x i i - , t y i x e - ) short of, excepting, m inus ®2H i i - / M M o * [from of]
2 P2 H i i - before ®2BoyP ii-/M M O= [left hand of] 212 b o y P 'h e left of ®20 y n i i - / M M o = [inside of]
ii2 0 YN i i - wilhin 2 I2 0 YN i i - Same as preceding
212 (iv) N C A - ^noun + n - / m m o = 203. E ach preposition has both a p renom inal and a prepersonal state, e.g. n c a - ® b o a . n - outside of, n c a - ® b o a . M M O -(q) o ut side o f (him ). ®BOA. i i - / M M o = [oMside of]
iiciB o A . i i - outside of, beyond, away from ® necH x ii-/M M o= [bottom of] (syntax as if a noun lexem e n e c H x , bul filed in dictio naries under eCHx) i ic i n e C H x i i - a l Ihe bottom of, below ®xne ii-/M M o= [top of] ( x n e masc. comm on noun, but filed in dictionaries under n e ) i i c i x n e i i - over C i x n e i i - Same as preceding ®OYNiM i i - / M M o = [right hand of]
iic iO Y N iM i i - al the riglil of c a o y n jim i i - Same as preceding ®2»OYP u - I m h o ^ [left hand of] i i c i 2 B‘^YP i i - al ihe left of 171
A D V E R B I A L
M O D I F I E R S
®2 0 YN N-/MMO* [inside of] CA2 0 YN i i - within, from within
213 (v) Miscellaneous other form ations eiMHTi e - except NCABHA. (cf. BOA.) Nc. e - , Nc. E T B e - , Nc. N - , n c a b Ka.a s except, tf it were not for
JciN e- since JciNN- Same as preceding
P E R I P H R A S T I C P R E N O M IN A L ST A T E S
214 Most defective prepositions with only a prepersonal state (epA r*, 6 2 h ts , n a .i k t » , 2 H t », have aperiphrastic prenominal state^ formed by the extension element n - after an appropriate 3d person suffix ( - q , - c , - y ) on the prepersonal state; e.g. 2 J ^ p J ^ T - q n - in 2J^pj^T-q M-rTTOoy Mark 5:11 “ On the hillside” ; 2 ^ P ^ t - o y NNMnerpji (i.e. N -M nerpA ) Theodore o f Antioch, Eleventh Encomium on St. Theodore Stratelates (M organ M608 f.lv b:2 -A \ Dep. 142) “ On the rocky cliffs." This construction optionally occurs with non-defective prepositions; e.g. 2^po-O Y N - in 2 ^ P 0 - 0 Y N - N E T N Q Y e p H T e Mark 6:11 “ On your feet” (but also, 2 A - N e q o Y 6 p H T e Matt 15:30 “ At His feet” )' e t o o t - o y N-NerrTTk N-AKABApTON Shlll 4 8 :3 -4 “ Into the clutches o f the unclean spirits” ; A .-nJcoeic n N O Y T E q j r A M M -n p o n - t k i b u j t o c e p o - q n - n i u 2 6 Gen 7:16 “The Lord God shut the door of the ark upon N oah.” Cf. 87(a). To express indebtedness in the durative sentence, the prenom inal state is always expressed by the periphrastic construction e p o ( - q ) f i - , cf. 310(i).
ADVERBS S IM P L E A D V E R B S
215 Simple adverbs, which cannot be analyzed completely into smaller recogniz able Coptic morphs, include eMAxe greatly EMAY thither; cf. mmay ENe2 forever, eternally, ever A.iA.Y at all, cf. 220 MMHNE daily mmate only, exclusively 158 MMAY there; cf. cmay 172
A D V E R B S
NJcoqTN headlong ON again taT ‘here’ occurs only in the relative construction eT®-TAT “ Which is here” and so does not meet the definition o f adverbial m odifier used in this book 194 TiuN where? w hence? how? TENGY now TUJNOY (var. t u jn e ) very, greatly, certainly TNAY (var. tn n a y ) when? T e p o M n e (vars. TNpoMne, r p p o M n e ) each year, annually 6 e any more Some Greek adverbs occur as Greco-Copttc simple adverbs, e.g. jslI k a iw c with justice, noAA.AKic often, cujm atikujc in bodily form.
C O M PO U N D ADVERBS
216 Compound adverbs have the structure of a prepositional phrase, but do not result from the free (optional) combination o f a preposition and some other element, each with its own meaning. Rather, they are lexically fixed expres sions, whose meaning cannot always be calculated by adding up the con stituents. Combinative adverbs (eboa., e z o y n , etc.) have already been described in 206. 217 Many adverbs are fo rm ed with im tial n - 203 (alt. m- 21, vars. 22) expanded by a non-personal entity term. E.g. i. i i - + indef. sing, article phrase: n o y k o y T a little (to a sm all degree, for a short time), NOYMi somewhere, NoyM M Htye f i - * c o n often, N K e c o n again, N O Y oeity NiM always ii. N - + def. sing, aiiicle phrase: M nK cure round about, M n e y o e ity e t^ -m m a y 3* that time, then, NxeYtyH by night, M ne200Y M N -xeY tyH by day and by night, NTMHxe in the midst, f i e e n - as . . . , Jin e T K e c o n ye! once more, h inioY oei< y once, form erly, M n e q p i c x e on the next day thereafter, iiTeT2 e thus iii. i i - + specifier pronoun: NA.iiY
all; NOYHphow m uch?
iv. N - + zero article phrase: N i p x i i o c (i.e. f i - ® ip x i i o c ) in ancient lim es, of old, finally, N go 2i-® 20 face to face, n ^ o y o greatly, T ity o p n at first, form erly, N2 cun secretly, n n o y x falsely, fijciO Y eb y stealth N B p p e recently,
V. N - + specifier phrase: n - 2 e how ?, N c e n - c t a a i o n (by a distance of) sixty stades, n - 2 0 0 y for seven days, N2A2 i i - c o n often, iity M T -c c u c u n thrice, for three times 71 vi. f i - + proper noun: M nooY today, N c^q yesterday, N tycupn early 132
218 Time o f day, day of the week or month, etc., are expressed with initial n - 2 1 7 ; e.g. MnoYA n - n c a b b a t o n ‘on the First day of the w eek’, n c o y - - x o y th ‘on 173
A D V E R B I A L
M O D I F I E R S
the twenty-fifth o f the month’, ntkyrij^ky ‘on Sundays’, njch- mhtg ‘at the tenth hour’. 219 Quantified adverbs formed with initial n - 217 include: MnecNAy ‘both (as a group o f two)’, MnapoMNT ‘together (as a group o f three)’, MneciTooY ‘together (as a group o f four)’, etc.; MnapMNT-enooY ‘three days ago’, M neqT eY -enooY ‘four days ago’, etc.; MnMe2 - c e n c n a y ‘for a second time’, MnMe2 -upoMNT N - c o n ‘for a third time’, etc. 220 A few adverbs are fo rm ed without initial preposition, mostly as a v£iriant of initial n - ; e.g. kgma elsewhere, at all, nBOA. outside, caboa. (also NCABOA., etc.) outside, ®con sometimes, OY-a.e n e 2 0 0 Y OY-^^e tgyuph ApophPatr 231 (Chame 68:21 = Z 341:23-24) “Neither by day nor by night,” OYoeiup nim always, q;M NT-enooY three days ago, 2^2 N - c o n often. 221 2 N-OY and ajcn-®. Adverbs of manner are formed in two productive pat terns: (i) affirmative 2 n - o y - ___ e.g. 2 N-OYMe truly, 2 N-OYP^oje joyfully> 2N-OYKOYI briefly (Eph 3:3); (ii) negative xxn-** . . . , e.g. jucN-®20 Te fearlessly, a.jcn-®cujcn ceaselessly, without ceasing. F u rth er ex am p les; (i) ^M -O Y A iK JkiocY N H j^istly, j n - o y m n t - j k T - c o o Y U A c ls 3 :1 7 in ig n o ran ce (ig n o ran lly ), 2 N - 0 Y2 0 t e m n - o y n o 6 N - p i < ii e M att 2 8 :8 “ W ith fear and g reat j o y ,” j n - o y x o j k e b o a . 1 P et 1:13 fully, 2 N - o Y 6 e n H q u ick ly , g N - t u p x NIM A c ls 5 :2 3 se cu re ly (v ery firm ly); (ii) a j c n - ® n o m o c law lessly (w ithout the law ). iJC N -® pooY
222 Other prepositional form ations include e.g. e - n r n p - q wholly, at all, e - n e 20 YO too much, e -p o Y g e in the evening, b - t mht b into the midst, for ward, MNNCCU-C afterward, NCA.-pA.CTe on the day after tomorrow, NCA.TOOTS reflex, forthwith, n c a -o y c a . apart, npoc-OYKOYi' for a (short) while, a;A-neiMA thus far, up to now, 2 I-naV thus, 21-OYCon together, at one time, 2 N-K 6 MA Acts 13:35 elsewhere, 2n -a .a a y m-ma anywhere (Apostolic Canons 19 [Lagarde 216:9-10]), and many other lexically fixed combinations. 223 Non-comhinative adverbs o f spatial orientation are formed like the combina tive adverbs 206 but never combine in meaning with adjacent verbs, preposi tions, or adverbs. i. O u tsid e ( b o a .): n b o a outside, the p rev ailin g con d itio n (w eaih er, etc.); (y^B O A to the en d , utterly; j i b o a on Ihe o u tsid e, from w ithout ii. In sid e ( 2 0 YN); 2120 YN w ithin iii. B o tlo m ( n e c H x ; synlax as if noun lex em e n e c H x . but filed in d iclio n arie s u n d er e c H x ; cf. e c H T ): M n e c H x belo w ; 2 > n e c H x o n the g round, from o f f the g ro u n d ; jc /n n e c H x from belo w , iv. T o p ( 2 P ^()! 2 '2 P ^ '( upw ard, above
174
A D V E R B S
V. Top (Tne m asc. comm on noun, but filed in dictionaries under ne); e b o a .^ N r n e from above; N x n e in a superior place, above; 2 >Tne above; Jc iN x n e from above 4
vi. Front (eH masc. com m on noun. Acts 27:41);
[but
ncabh
henceforth;
before
M- = 23klTl2H M - 210]; j i e H forward form erly, 2 i n i 2 0 Y same
vii. R ear (n i2 0 Y );
viii. Right (oy N iM ): e o y N iM to the right; 2 /o y n a m on the right ix. Left (2 BOYP): e 2 B o \ p to the left; 2' 2 BOYp on the lefl
224 Preposition + adverb e-TO )N w hither?; e - x e N o Y now; e - r e p o M n e each year, annually; n tu jm w here? whence? how ?; N x e p o M n e each year, annually; c ^ i - e N e 2 for ever, eternally; (^)i-TO)N w hither?; < i)i-T eN O Y till now; 2 n - t o ) n w here?; x i N - e N e 2 for ever, ever; JtiN -x tu N from w hence?; x i n - t e n o y from now
225 Combinative adverb + adverb: b b o \ mmay thence, g b o a . t c o n whence? 226 Combinative adverb + preposition + adverb: upA2 0 YN e -T e N o y till now 227 Preposition + preposition + adverb: N x iN -T eN o y at present
R E ITE R A TED
EN TITY
TERMS
228 Adverbial modifiers expressing successive distribution (one .. . after another; . . . by . . . ) are formed by reiteration o f any zero article phrase 62 or bare car dinal number, without initial preposition. E.g. ®20oy ®2 0 o y one day after another, day by day, daily; one place after another; ®(yHM ®upHM lit tle by little; oyA oyA one by one; cn a y cNA.y two by two.
1
IN TER R O G A TIV E
ADVERBS
229 Examples o f interrogative adverbs: (a) simple, n tu c how ?, tc u n w here?, whence? how ?, T N Jiy w hen?; (b) compound, g b o a t c u n whence?, e -T cu N whither?, NAup N~2e how ?, N oyH p N - c o n how m any tim es?, e T B e - o y why?, j c e - o y why?
175
10
Conjunctions and Initial Attitude Markers The Similarity of Conjunction and Initial Attitude Marker Conjunctions 231 Function 231 Form ation 232 Correlative Conjunctions 233 Linkage o f Clauses 234 a. Extension 234 b. Adverbial modification (subordination) Position; Initial and Enclitic 235 Specific Negation o f Conjunctions 236 Asyndetic Linkage o f the Past Tense 237 Initial Attitude M arkers Function 238 Position 239
230
234
238
T HE S I M I L A R I T Y OF C O N J U N C T I O N
AND
INITIAL
ATTITUDH
MARKER
230 In this chapter two more or less distinct word classes are described: conjunc tions (Aytu, H, t o t e etc.) and initial altitude markers ( a p a , m h , o n t c u c etc.). These share a feature o f position, namely, that they only occur at the head of a clause— in first position or enclitic position (and in some instances both), according to the property o f each particular morph 235, 239. Initial position can also be occupied by adverbial modifiers functioning as premodifier 195(vii), and so as regards the feature o f position there is some overlap of adverbial modifier, conjunction, and initial attitude marker. [ndeed, so m e m orphs o c c u r (as h o m o n y m s) in m ore th an one o f these classes, being d is ting u ished by sen ten ce position, acco m p an y in g e n v iro n m en t, an d m ean in g : e.g. t e n o y non-, ar present (postveibal, ad v erb , Jo h n 13:7)/TeNOY A e o r t e n o y 6 e iicm’ then (ini tial, altitu d e m ark er A cts 3:17); k a n at least (initial, attitu d e m ark er S h C h ass 87:49)/ KiN e
176
C O N JU N C T IO N S Such items are described in Shisha-Halevy, C optic Grtwnmirical Categories, 42-60. C O N JU N C T IO N S
Function. By definition, ‘conjunctions’ are morphs that signal 'linkage’ (con231 nection or disconnection) o f one element to another; they also express a par ticular circumstance or relationship o f the linked items. The prepositions mn and 21- ‘and’ also play an im portant role in entity term linkage 145, 201. BApABBAc JCN-IC “ Barabbas or Jesus” (M att 27:17) ic AyuJ NsqMABHTHc “ Jesus and His d i^ ip le s ” (Matt 9; 10) ?OTAN epapAN-OYJ^ TA2 M -eK Mnp-NOJc-K N rn e “When someone invites you, do not sit down in a place o f honor” (Luke 14:8) EN^OCON -}'-2 M-nKQcMQc A N r-noyoeiN M -nKocM Oc "As long as I am in the world, I am the light o f the w orld” (John 9:5) Linkage occurs at all levels o f structure ranging from lexemes as such, to large units of text: i. connecting noun lexemes: n l o e i K ? i - 9 0 i T e S h lll 2 0 5 : 2 3 - 2 4 “ Bread and clothing” ; nelMKA .2 n ? h t ?i-A y n H 9i-A .ai-A .90M 9 i-N o 6 N e 6 7 i - o y c u a c N?HT ShAmel 1 7 7 : 6 - 7 “ Grief, pain, sighing, reproach, disillusionm ent” ; ei elzpA i H b o a . 206(a) S hlll 2 0 0 : 1 7 “ Come up from or out c f” ; a n p - o y I m o n A xoc AN JciNM -neiNAy H OYHHB S hlll 2 5 : 1 - 2 “ From this time on, I am a m onk no longer, nor p rie st" 2 5 7 ; 2 e n I n o 6 N -u p o N re o y T e n o 6 N-KAATOc oyTE No6 N -cu e ShIV 7 3 : 1 5 - 1 6 “ (Not) any large bushes or large branches or large pieces o f wood” ii. connecting infinitive lexemes: M rrpTpeN -iJK ofk Aycu AyuJ 6cu ^ - n K A K e ShChass 165:30-33 “ Let us not sleep and be intoxicated and remain in the darkness” ; MN-oyA N -oyiU T Jce-M rrq-iUMC Ayuj qcuTe EBOA ShW ess9 87a.‘30-33 “There is not a single one that did not sink and get obliterated” iii. connecting entity term s o f all kinds (extremely com m on): r n e Luke 16:17 “ Heaven and earth” ; c N A y h c u o m n t M att 18:20 “Two or three” ; n A y A O c n m m a - n Acts 16:17 “ Paul and us” 145 N M -n K A 7
Linked entity terms also occur listed in sequence without conjunction, in a rhetorical fig ure called asyndeton 1 45; e.g. 2 e n tc u m NgHT 2 e N M N T -c o 6 2 e n m n t A T -co o y N
2 e N n o p N i i 2 e N M i( if e 2 e n n o 6
M - M N T - ic e B H C
i- n N o y r e
N T -e
EBOA N2 H T -o y S h lll 2 0 6 :1 -3 "A s for acts o f hardheartedness, foolishness, ignorarKe, prom iscuity, strife, (and) great impiety— God delivered you from them ."
iv. connecting adverbial modifiers (extremely common): e - n c i u o y z m e -rrM A N-oycuM PachcMiilus, Praecepta I(X) (Lefort (Euvres 3 1 :24-25) “ To
the assembly or to the refectory” ; e r B H H T - q “ About him self or about some one else”
JC N -eT R R -K eoyA
Acts 8:34
177
C O N J U N C T I O N S
A N D
I N I T I A L
A T T I T U D E
M A R K E R S
V. connecting clauses 234, al^o converted clauses accompanied by their converters (extremely common): e N -T ezo y ^ iT e N e
Expressions o f clause linkage without conjunction include: asyndeton, i.e. absence o f conjunction 2 3 7 ,3 3 5 ,3 4 5 ,3 4 7 ,4 1 2 ,4 2 9 ,4 4 3 ; nte- conjunctive conjugation 3 1 5,335, 341, 345, 347, 349, 352, 353, 357, 372, 391; e - i - sequential circum stantial 335, 412, 433. 443, 458; e - ® x p e - + infinitive 341. They are selected according to type o f clause that is extended.
Lexemes and entity terms (i-iit) are linked by Ayiu, mn - , 2 i - and; h or; jc n orelse; e i t e or, either/or; oyAE (var. oyrE ) nor, neither/nor; adverbial mod ifiers (iv) by Ayio, h, jc n -, e i t e , oyjslE. ‘N o t. . . hut rather . . . ’ is expressed by (negation) . . . x w x . . . (For the selection of preposition/conjunction link ing entity terms, cf. 145.) 232
F onnation. Conjunctions are either simple o r compound. E.g. (a) sim ple form ation, (i) terminal morph 28(b), unanalyzable in C optic: and, r i p because, eiMHTi unless, 2CUCTE and so 5 03; (it) prefixal (bound): e t y j c e - since, J c e - because, j c n - o r else; (b) com pound form ation, (i) complete bound group 27, analyzable: m n n c c u - c after wards, fi-T e rl2 e thus, 2 E N lco n som etim es; (it) two separate bound groups 27: eiMHTi xeKAAC (var. jc e k a c ) unless, k a n e (^ c u n e even if; (iit) bound group + bound m orph: e b o a . j c e - because, k a n ec^jJce- even if, n c a b h a . J c e - i f . . . were not . . . ; (iv) bound m orph + bound group: Jce-eneiJSLH because; (v) bound morph + bound morph: e x B e - J c e - because; (vi) com plete clause: x i f x e e e so 507.
233 Correlative conjunctions. Some conjunctions occur in correlative pairs and express coordination or disjunction, i.e. signal that two or more elements func tion, in parallel, as a single unit: h . . . h . . . (either). . . or . . . ; e i t e . . . e i t e . . . either . . . or . . . ; whether . . . or . . . ; men . . . . . . (with first ele ment negatived) n o t . . . but rather . . . ; men . . . a e . . . , . . . but (with men left untranslated in English); o y m o n o n . . . . . . not only . . . but also . . . ; N6E . . . taT t e 6 e . . .just as . . . so also . . . 506; ®con . . . ®con . . . or o y c o n . . . o y c o n . . . or z e n c o h . . . z e n c o h . . . sometimes . . . at other times . . . ; o y T E . . . oyTE . . . (var. o yA E . . . oyjsle . . . ) or oyTE . . . h . . . (with negatived clauses) (neither) . . . nor . . . ; ®q;opn m e n . . . x w x . . . first o f a l l . . . b u t . . . ; ®2 o o y . . . ®2 o o y . . . one day . . . and another day . . . Exam ples: e i x e ®2 o o y x e i x e ®C2 im e S h lll 16:13 “ N o m atter w hether male or fem ale” ; o y x e n x o k o y x e 6 e Besa, Frag. 2 8 (Kuhn 9 2 : 4 ) "N eith er you nor anyone else” ; o y x e e-®xiUK R h e b o a . k a k c u c Pachomius, Praecepia 9 2 (Lefort (Euvres 31:5) “ N either to bathe nor to wash oneself in a bad w ay” ; ® con M N x - c i(^ q
178
C O N JU N C TIO N S
N -p x [o ]B MMHNe ® con M N T - i c e N - [ p ] T O B ® con EN2 0 Y0 S hIU 7 0 :5 -7 “ Som elim es sevenleen artabes daily, al olher limes sixleen artabes, som elim es m ore” ; H rip q-Ni-MECTE-oYJi Ntj-Mepe-oYJi h N<}-6oA.JC-q N -o y i Nq-Kixi<|)poNei M-nKEOYJi M att 6 :2 4 “ For either he will hate the one and love the other, o r he will be devoted to the one and despise the other” ; n e n i i i m en p o o y T x c i p S JlE o y ic e e N H C x e M alt 26:41 “ The spirit indeed is willing, but the flesh is w eak” ; oY A e M n o y - K i i - q o y J t e M n e - x e q c i p S N iy e - n x i K O Acts 2:31 “ He was not abandoned in H ades, nor did His flesh see corruption” Unlike its use in classical Greek, Greco-Coplic m en often has no correlate; e.g. e x e x N - o i i e e N -N ix i< |)o c ex®-JcH2 e x - N e c c u - o y men M-neyBOA. e p e — n e y c i f i - e o y N me ? n - ® k a c n - k c u c u c g i - i K i e i p c i i n i m Matt 23:27 “You are like whitewashed tombs, which appear beautiful (M eN)on theiroutside, with theirinside being full o f dead people’s bones and all uncleanness.”
234 Linkage o f clauses. Linked clauses occur in two kinds of syntactic function, according to the which conjunction ts selected: extension and adverbial mod ification. (a) Extension continues the line o f discourse expressed in the preceding clause. If main tense is being expressed, the extension expresses a new step in the nar rative or exposition. neJCA.-cj NA.-q jce- na.! T H p -oy I ' - na. - ta.a. - y na. - k eKapA.N-nA.2T-ic Nr-oytuop^ NA-i I to te nej<.A -q MA-q m6 i -T c jce- bujk, en A eoy MMo-i rrcATANAc Matt 4:9—10 “He said to Him, All these I will give You, if You will fall down and worship me. Then Jesus said to him. Begone, Satan!” Extension is signalled by conjunctions that express coordination/disjunction, e.g. Ayuj and, mn ncuj- c and then, tote and next, zujcte and so 503, tat TE eE likewise 507, h, eite or, jcn- (vars. jce- , jcen- ) or else, oyAE nor, but rather, a e and/but, on again. (h) ‘Adverbial modification ’ (subordination) is descriptive expansion or circum stantial qualification of another clause. N N E -o y i N 2H T-oy Eap-A.nA.NTi E-A.A.iy n - c 2 ime xcupic—Ey-MMAy MN-NEyepHy “N o man among them shall be permitted to meet with any woman, except when they are there all together” (ShIV 108:7-8) o y N -o y o y N o y NHy ZQxe N-ET-NA-g}AJ<.E 6 e an nm m h -tn 2 n ?ENnAp9oiMiA “The hour is coming when I shall no longer speak to you in figures” (John 16:25) EOUUJnE AE rrEKBAA. oyrrONHpoc rrE hekciuma T H p - q NA-qpiunE e q - o N-®KiKE “But i/y o u r eye is not sound, your whole body will be full o f darkness” (Matt 6:23) This is the role of adverbial clause (more fully surveyed in chapter 23). An adverbial clause can precede or follow the modified clause.
179
C O N J U N C T I O N S
A N D
I N I T I A L
A T T I T U D E
M A R K H R S
At the head of an adverbial clause a conjunction can play two roles, according to the type of clause that it heads. Premodifying conjunctions. Before an adverbial clause (namely e p e - cir cumstantial, e p q ;A .N - conditional, or h i r e - conjunctive), the conjunction expresses a particular kind of circumstance or relationship; this is the function o f premodification 195(vii). The exact boundary between premodifying con junction and initial attitude marker is not clear in every instance. (Two prepo sitions here function as conjunctions, m n n c a . - and x i u p i c - . ) Such ‘prem od ifying conjunctions’ include: e p e - Though, But, Rather e p e - And. And indeed. Too, Furthermore e - n w i N T e - Instead o f . . . -ing eiMHTi e p e - / e p < i ii N - / N T e - / J c e K i ( i) c (+ optative) Unless, E xcept for . . . -ing E N zocoN e p e - As long as. W hile e
Suhordinative conjunctions. Before one o f the main-clause patterns, an adver bially modifying conjunction signals adverbial role (subordination) as well as expressing a circumstance or relationship. Such 'suhordinative conjunctions ’ include; eBOA. J c e - Because
180
C O N J U N C T I O N S
e T e - (+ past negalive basic clause) Unless, W ilhoul , . . having (very fiire) eiM HTi J c e - Unless, ExcepI for . . . -ing EN2 0 C0 N As long as e n e i or eneiA-H or e n e iJL H n e p Since (causal) e<|)ocoN As long as. Inasm uch as E T B E -Jc e- Because e< iicune If (ever) E ty X E - , var. e< i)Jcn e- G iven lhal. Supposing lhal. If (as is or seems to be Ihe case). If indeed. Since (causal). Even though KAN e
Tense in the adverbial clause expresses relative time 529 in relation to the clause that it modifies; e.g. i y i u 6BOA. Jce-MN-®NOYNE M M o-oy iY “ ypooY6 “And since they had no root they withered aw ay” (Matt 13:6) A TeTN -iN e N i- i M -n eip u jM e e q -u p T o p T p M-nA.A.oc “ You brought me this Man as (one who was) perverting the people” (Luke 23:14) 235 Position: initial and enclitic. Conjunctions occur at the head o f a linked clause. (a) Most are first-position conjunctions, which precede or are the first element of the clause that they head. Examples: but rather, nevertheless; 3, \ w and; e b o a . x e - , e t b e ~ x e ~, and J c e because; e x i still; h or; k a n even though; MAA.A.ON rather; m o n o n but: nA.HN yet; TOTE then, next; o y k e t i not any longer; o y T e (var. oy-A-e) and, nor (before negatived clause); goM cuc nevertheless; g c u c x e (+ conjunctive) so thal; g o x e when; J c e - and J c e -E N E -, var. j c e n e - (introducing reported discourse, cf. chapter 24; in some contexts translated that o r whether, otherwise untranslatable); Jc fi- (viirs. J c e -. j c e n - ) or else
Enclitic conjunctions (sentence particles) are those which cannot occur first in their clause. Their earliest possible occurrence is in second position, i.e. imme diately after the first autonomous morph or first bound group of morphs. E.g.
181
C O N J U N C T I O N S
A N D
I N I T I A L
A T T I T U D E
M A R K E R S
n e r p o c A e neJCA.-q Acts 2:38 “A nd Peter said” ; N e -z e N o y iu z e pap n e Mark 1:16 “For they were fisherm en.” All conjunctions in this group are unbound morphs (enclitics) 28(6). (/> In second position; r ip for; jslE and, but. on the other hand; men now, on the one hand; (ii) in second position or slightly laler; N xoq or N x o o y rather, but, on the other hand, again; o n again, also, still; 2 U)cu<) but, on the other hand; 6 e then, therefore, any more. A few conjunctions occur as homonyms, both in first position and as enclitics; e.g. NTEfze thus, TiXY immediately.
Conjunctions vary in their compatibility and incompatibility with one anoth er; within these restrictions some of them occur side by side. If two or more enclitics co-occur in the same clause, their sequence is more or less deter mined according to an elaborate hierarchy of precedence, with rjip. a e , and MEN taking the lead. Examples; i . \ w j M -n e iiic u N o n q - N i- X ip iZ e n a - n n - n e c m o y n - n - e t ® oY^AB THp-oY Shiv 151:2-4 “And in the present age as well. He will grant us the blessings o f all the saints’"; 2 0 t a n 6 e E K ty iN -e ip e n - o y m n t - n a Matt 6:2 “Thus when you give alm s” ; oyjSte r ip m n -k e p a n g in e c H x N - x n e Acts 4; 12 “For there is no other name under heaven” : iy c u o n N e y - N i y e -n p c u w e N x -iy -T iA ^ C o -q Acts 4:14 “And also they saw the man that had been healed” ; Ayu) e t i o n TCNoy Mrfh4-ncuM5 eboa^ N2 H x -o y ShChass 91:20-23 “ And slill even now, we have not escaped from them” ; n J ci-® o y i JV.e fix o q P i- n e n N i N - c e - N i - K i i - q an eboa^ Matt 12:31 “But the blasphemy against the Spirit will not be forgiven” ; A i y e iA men r ip 2 N - x e q r e N e i iq-< yM < ye M -noycu
236 Specific negation o f conjunctions. In the syntactic function of adverbial mod ification 234(b), the grammatical relationship o f some conjunctions (as an individual element of the sentence) can be negatived by the enclitic a n JCEKAic AN “Not (in order) to . . . ” (1 Cor 7:35) which usually comes after the conjunction; optionally, negative prefixed to the conjunction.
n
-
is also
Further examples; jcekaac an N-oyeA^tu e gH x-xH yxN aa.a.a n p o c oyxcA N O 1 Cor 7:35 “Not to lay any restraint upon you, but to promote good order” ; Jce-A xexN -A ^yni a n aa^aa x e - A x e x N - x y n i e-yM exA N O iA 2 Cor 7:9 “Not because you were grieved, but because you were grieved into repenting"; n - e b o a an .x e-A N r-o y w A K A p io c w neM xo e b o a M -n N o y x e Shlll 116:18-19 “Not on the assumption that I am blessed in the eyes o f G od” ; 2 iu c e i - o a n n -® jc o e ic e p u )-x N AAAA exBE-xATAnH M -n N o y x e S h lll 2 1 :16-17 “Not as if 1 am your masler but because o f God’s love”
237 Asyndetic linkage o f the p a st tense. The minimal form o f clause linkage— and one o f the m ost frequent forms— is ‘asyndeton’, in which two or more main
182
i n i t i a l
a t t i t u d e
m a r k e r s
clauses in the past tense (a.-, F in e -, Mn*) and/or nejce-/neJCA.= ‘said’ occur in succession without any linking term. E.g. A Y -nA ZT-oy iy -o y iu y P T NA-q “ They bent down and worshiped Him ” ; A q - o y iu q ;! n e x A - q “ He answered and said.” Cf. also 185(e). Further exam ples: i q - c c u x M jslE n 6 i - 2 HpcujslHC n p p o I i q - t y x o p x p e M ix e M N -eiepoY COA ^Y” ^ x H p - c N M M i-q I i q - c c u o y z e z o y N N - N i p x i e p e y c x H p - o y M N -N erpiM M ixeY C M -nA ^ioc I A q -c ^ iN e eboa^ 2 '" ''o o x - o y M att 2 :3 -4 “ T hen (jslE) Herod the king heard this, was troubled greatly as was all Jerusalem with him, assem bled all the chief priests and scribes o f the people, and inquired o f them ” (dKO UCTaq 5 e 6 Paai^Eix; . . . fixapaxGii . . . k o I CTUvaYaYOJv . . . finuveavExo); i - N j i L i i MCUNioN c o Y N -n J C o e ic M - n e i o y o e i t y I i Y ~ r i i 2 'r-O Y I iY ~O Y iu
Asyndeton expresses closer linkage than A y i u , a e , m n n c u j - c , or the other conjunctions. E.g. A.yo) N x e p o y - e i e2pA.i e - n H i A.y-NA.y e - n a p H p e ojhm M N - M A .p iA . T 6 q M A .A .y I A . y - n A . 2 T - o y I i y - o y c u q j T N A .- q I A . y - o y a ) N n N e y A 2 iu iu p I A y - e i N e N A - q N - e e N A iu p o N o y N o y B M N - o y A .iB A N o c m n oyq;AA. I A y -T o y N -e iA T -o y A e e b o a . 2 N -o y p A co y e-®TM-K0 T - 0 y q j A - 2 H p u j A . H C M att 2 :1 1 -1 2 “ And ( j i y c u ) , when they had come into the house, they saw the child with M ary Hts mother, fell down, worshiped Him, opened their treasures, and offered Him gifts, gold and frankincense and myrrh. Then (a e ), they were warned in a dream not to return to H erod.” (Consequently, English translations can freely subordinate any clause or clauses to one of the others, or else express linkage by the English conjunction and: e.g. A y-nA 2T - o y I A y -oycuujT NA-q “ Falling down, they worshiped Him . . . ” or “ They fell down, worshiping Him . . . ” or “ They fell down and worshiped H im ” or “ When they had fallen down and worshiped Him . . . .” ) Further exam ples: A Y - t - n e y o Y o r e p o - q I A q - p - ' n ^ g p e e p o - o y Acts 2 8 : 9 “T hey cam e and he cured them ” ; A N - g e e - g e N C N H y m m a y • A y - c e n c c u n - N e - ® 6 c u 2 A X H - Y Acts 2 8 : 1 4 “ T here we found brethren and were invited to stay with them ” ; i - n i r r e A ^ o c jslE o y c u t y i n e j c i - q N i - q Luke 1 : 1 9 “ And the angel answered and said to him ” (Kai dnoKpiGeig 6 Syye^og elnev auxm); iN -< y e n -® 2 i c e 2 N - x e y < y H x H p - c I M n N - 6 e n - A ^ i i y Luke 5 :5 “ W e toiled all night and took noth ing” ( 5 i ’ vuKxoq Konia
i n i t i a l
a t t i t u d e
m a r k e r s
238 Function. 'Initial attitude m arkers' are morphs that mark (but do not link) their clause in relation to the line o f discourse by expressing the speaker’s atti tude in which the following utterance will be asserted. They belong to the
183
C O N J U N C T I O N S
A N D
I N I T I A L
A T T I T U D E
M A R K E R S
realms of direct discourse and didactic exposition. The exact boundary between initial attitude marker and premodifying conjunctive is not clear in every instance. neJCA-q M -n e c io y p x e - a £ a k-noY N -N -er ic -tu q ; M M o-oy “He asked the eunuch. So do you understand what you are reading?” (Acts 8:30) E x am p les: jiA H e c u c truly; jip ji (in itial, m ark in g interro g atio n d p a ) so . . . ?; (en clitic, e x p ressin g inference a p a ) th en ; p erh ap s; e l e - an d e u j j t n e (ex p re ss ing in ference) th en , w ell th en ; e N e - , var. n € - (m ark in g in te n o g a tio n ); h (b efo re iro n ic rh eto rical q u estio n s) so . . . ? ; k j^ a c u c fittin g ly ; A o m o N w ell th en : h h is it th e case t h a t . . . ? ; H H (+ neg ativ ed clau se) is it n ot th e case t h a t . . . ? , su rely . . . ; M o r ic h ard ly; MONON at all e v en ts; M e u ;A -K perhap.s 3 8 1 ; n a h c (en clitic) truly; o n t c u c var. O N T o c in fact, actu ally ; nJiNTCuc no d o u b t; pcu indeed, but. even, at all; p e r haps; 0) 0 . . . (d irect ad d ress m ark er, ca llin g attention to th e sp e ak er an d im p ly in g a b o n d w ith th e d ia lo g u e p artn er); u j o p n m e n first o f all; at all, actu ally ; 2 J^ n ^ 3 2 ^ n A c u c in short
Some initial attitude markers can be expanded by the conjunctive conjugation 354(b) (ApA NTe-oYoyJCAY untune ShChass 168:8-9 = Shlll 78:18-19 “ And so— will salvation come to many?”). 239 Position. Like conjunctions, initial attitude markers occur at the head of a marked clause. They are mostly (i) first-posit ion markers, which precede or are the first element of the clause that they head (e.g. aipA, Apny, e l e - , e n e var. N e -. eq^jcne, h, kaacuc, a o ih o n , mh, n o n e , m onon, Me
184
11
Interjections The Nature of Coptic Interjections Yes and No 241
240
Inflected Interjections 242 A2po= 243 o y o Y n -/n a = 244 Non-inflected Interjections
245
Clausal Interjections (Lexically Fixed Expressions)
246
T H E N A T U R E O F C O P T I C I N T E R J E C T IO N S
240 The term ‘interjection’ can be used broadly to describe miscellaneous short utterances of exclamatory content and other discourse signals (Yes, No, Behold, Hello, D o n ’t!), which belong exclusively to the realm of direct discourse 523. Their length ranges from single unitary morphs ( c e Yes) to short clauses com prising several morphs (N N e c -q ;tu n e By no m eans!, literally “ It shall not be”). They are generally capable of standing alone as a complete statement, at least in immediate analysis. They cannot be negatived, and most are restricted in their ability to be converted and to express past, present, and future time. Formally, they are of three types: (a) inflected 242, which contain an expression of person, such as ai2 p o - q What! (What-is-the-matter-with him !); (b) non inflected 245, which contain no personal morph ( m m o n N o ) ; and (c) clausal, i.e. that are lexically fixed expressions 246 ( e q e - q ; tu n e So be it! Amen!). Because the items described in this chapter overlap with other word classes and sentence types, the exact limits of this group are blurred. For example, expressions of the speaker’s attitude such as ai2 p o - i W hat!, e i c z h h t e B ehold!, and 2tu Enough! are usually followed by a clause, and so m ight nat urally be classed as initial attitude markers (chapter 10) like a p h y Perhaps, KAAcuc Fittingly, and nam e Truly. Likewise those of type (c) resemble established sentence types: thus those on the pattern o f re x a ip ic n h - t n Grace be unto you! and oyoY n a - i W oe is me! are formally comparable to the durative sentence with situational predi cate 310; e q e - q ; t u n e So be it! and N N e c -q ;tu n e By no means! are opta tive clauses 338; ? M -n jc o e ic xAipe Greetings in the name of the Lord! (an
185
I N T E R J E C T I O N S
epistolary salutation), oyjcaii Hello/Goodbye, and perhaps 2tu Enough! are imperatives; NVrair® Blessed is . . . !^(great-are n jia a - ItheJ-eyelsJ-of eiaiT=) is based on the suffixally conjugated verboid 378. 241 Yes and no. In form and syntax, words for yes and no are associated with nexus morphs of the major sentence patterns, and their usage is conditioned more or less accordingly. Thus Yes! oyoN
He (etc.) exists (Jer 44:17)
o y N -
e e e
(?) He (etc.) does
7
(?)
7
He (etc.) does not exist He (etc.) hasn’t He (etc.) shall not
MMN-
q ;o c e
322
337
N o! MMON M ne
NNO
322 334 N N E = 338 M n*
(M ntup D on’t! is associated with M np-, the negator of the imperative 368.) MApo-K W on’t you go and naipo-N L et’s go! might be thought to presup pose an unexpressed verb b c u k ‘g o ’. IN FLEC TED
IN TERJEC TIO N S
242 ‘Inflected interjections' are those which are formally marked ( ‘inflected’) to express person/number/(gender) 75; some also can incorporate a non-personal entity term (re x a ip ic n->. ji2 po* W hat is the matter with . . . ?; cf. 243. Not subject to conversion. e i c 2 HHTe jiNoK etc. Here (I etc.) am! Acts 9:10 (for eiC 2 HHre, cf. 245). Not subject to conversion. Mio= Greetings to . . . (sometimes in a context of thankfulness); e.g. micu- tn THp-TN S hlll 2 5 :5 -6 (near end of a controversial epistle) “ Greetings to all o f you.” Not subject to conversion. M ^po-K W on’t you go, naipo-N L et’s go n V(at = Blessed is . . . !, cf. 378. Subject to conversion. Cf. o y o f n - Woe is . . . ! W oe unto . . . ! re x a ip ic n - / na * Grace be unto . . . ! and similar constructions. Not subject to conversion; can be modified by adverbial premodifier or by expansion elements. oyoT n - / na * W oe is . . . ! Woe unto . . . !; cf. 244. Subject to conversion and compatible with distinctions o f time; can be modified by adverbial premodifier or by expansion elements. Cf. NaiiaiT* Blessed is . . . ! 243 A2 po* What! W hat is the matter with . . . ? expresses astonishment or puzzled regret. Cf. also 246.
186
I N T E R J E C T I O N S
(a) Directly followed by a main clause that picks up the suffix of ai2 po=: What! Why . . . ! (W hat is the matter with . . . so that . . . ? )’. E.g. TepiM e John 20:13 “Why are you (sing, fem.) w eeping?” (What! You are w eeping!). Further exam ples: a.2 p o - K a.K -Ta.M io-1 NTeT2 e Rom 9 :2 0 “ W hy have You m ade me th u s? ” ; <5e c e - K p i N e mmo-T 2‘u c-® p eq p N O B e Rom 3:7 “ W hy am I still being condem ned as a sin n er?” ; NToq h e T s e - o y N - q -N 3 i-q i-n p o o Y U > N -N -eT ® -2[e A ]n iz e e p o - [ q ] ShlV 4 2 :1 6 -1 7 “ But why, and for what reason, would He not care for those who put their hope in Him ? ”
(b) A2 po= . . . MN-/NMMai=: W hat does . . . have to do with . . . ? Exam ples: a.2 p o - K n MMA.-N ic nNa.2 cupa.ioc M ark 1:24 “ W hat have You to do with us, Jesus of N azareth?” ; h a 2 p o - i MN-*pcuMe j te - e y - o Y ^ u M N auj N ~2e ShIV 156:27-28 “ Indeed, what do 1 have to do with any people, as to ( J t e - ) how they e a t? ” ; a 2 p o - q ®2 0 o y T m n-® c2 im € ShlV 107:5 “ W hat business does male have with fe m a le ? ’’
244 o y o i n - /n a = Woe is . . . ! Woe unto . . . I is subject to conversion (including preterit past), and a fuller range of tenses, etc. can be expressed by periphrastic conjugation of untune completed by a circumstantial conversion 427 of oyoT N - (see example below). E.g. o y o e i M -n a ii er®-MMaiY Shlll 121:19 “ W oe to that person” ; oyoT n h - t n ppM M aio Luke 6:24 “ Woe to you, O you who are rich.” Conversions: (i) relative ( e r e - ) , (ii) circumstantial ( e - ) , (Hi) preterit ( n e - ) , (iv) focalizing ( e - ) Exam ples: (i) n K a ip o c e r e - o Y o i n a .- y N2 H T -q ShlV 9 4 :2 5 -2 6 “The tim e that is woeful for them ” (The time in which woe is them ); (ii) c e - N 3 i- u jc u n e e - o y o i n j i - y MMJiy ShlV 4 :1 2 -1 3 “ It shall be woeful for them there” (They will be such that woe unto them there 427); (Hi) N e - o y o e i n j i - I J te -3 iY - J trT o -e i pd) M n i-M o y 2 N -B H ShW ess9 142rf;9-12 “ It would be woeful for me (woe is me) that 1 had been bom at all and had not died in the w om b” ; (iv) n jiu j N - 2 e t e n o y e - o y o i jin N -N -€T® -ccuK N -N ey e p H Y e2PJii e - N e i 2 i e i T eT®-MM3iy N-K3iKe 2'-< 5 o c m ShA m el 11 155:4-5 “Surely it is (H ow is it not) w oeful for those who draw one another down into those dark and tem pestuous pits.” o y o ( also occurs in negative questions (where negatives the interrogative and o y o i N - is affirm ative): e T B e - o y N T o o y o y o i N31-Y N e e e r e - o y o i e - N E K o o y e ShA m el II 1 1 : 3 ^ “ W hy not woe is them , too, just as it is w oeful unto the others?”
N O N -IN FLEC TED
IN T ER JEC T IO N S
245 ‘Non-inflected interjections ’ are unitary morphs. They are not subject to con version, except for m m o n . For expression and usage of words for Yes and No, cf. 241.
187
INTERJECTIONS
e z e Yes! eiC 2 HHTe (vars. e ic z H x e , e iczH H n e, eiczH H N e, eiCN e S hlll 39:11, e i c r e ) Lo! Behold! Listen! calls attention to the statement that follows and sometimes marks an important new moment in narrative exposition. Cf. also 242, e i c 2 HHTe 2k.NOK. For e ic z H H re e i c - , cf. 476. Exam ples: c c u tm I e i c 2 HHTe e b o a N (5i-n-€T ® -Jto e -® Jto Marie 4 :3 “ Listen! A sow er went out to sow ” (beginning o f a parable); e i c 2 HHT€ •f-Jtc u NH-TN N -oyM Y CTH pioN 1 Cor 15:51 “ Lo! I tell you a m ystery” ; e ic jH H T e h i - n j t o e i c Luke 1:38 “ Behold, I am the handmaid of the L ord” ; e i c 2 HHT€ 31NOK ne T E T N -u p iN e N c c u -f Acts 10:21 “ Behold, it is I whom you are looking for”
MHreNoiTo (var. M ereN o iro ) By no means! God forbid! ht) yevoito (Shlll 77 :1 5 ,4 7:2 4 ) MMON No! There isn’t! Mne No! Mncup No! Don’t! N N O No! c e Yes!, c e rtU N oy Yes indeed! oy JtO h , woe! (Mark 15:29) oyoN Yes! There is! oyjcJk^T Hello, Goodbye, Greetings, Farewell (can be modified by an adverbial premodifier or by expansion elements) X3k.ipe (more formally, X3k.ipere) (xaipErs) Greetings. Can be modified by an adverbial premodifier or by expansion elements. 0 )0 Yes! 2w Enough! _ 23k^eioTruly! Indeed! Amen! M ay it be! Conversion: m m o n can occur in circumstantial conversion, forming the adverbial m odifier e -m m o n ‘Otherwise, Else, For then’ 424. 246
CLAUSAL
IN TERJEC TIO N S
(LEX IC A LLY
FIX ED
EX P R ESSIO N S)
3k^2po-q (invariable) W hat!, directly followed by a clause. E.g. 3k^2po-q 6 e I T3k^pN-p-®NOBe Rom 6:15 “ W hat then! Are we to sin ?” 243 e q e - q ;t u n e So be it! Amen! (optative 338); cf. N N e c - q ;tu n e N N e c -q ;tu n e By no means! God forbid! (optative 338); cf. e q e - q ; t u n e
188
12
Nexus Morphs and Negators Nexus Morphs 247 Subject and Predicate 247 Nexus, Clause, and Nexus Morph
248
Negators 250 a. Negative Conjugation Bases 250 b. TM- 250 c. MN- 250 d. Meq;3i= 250 e. Meq;
NEXUS
251
MORPHS
247 Subject and predicate. In term s o f communicating information, almost all complete utterances contain two basic information units, which are gram m at ically united; a subject (logical subject, theme) and a predicate (logical predi cate, rheme). The ‘subject ’ represents, or gives a reminder of, the topic under discussion and conveys information that is relatively more familiar, presup posed, or given. The ‘predicate’ conveys new information about the topic/sub ject. For example. They Topic under discussion (Presupposed information) SUBJECT
I I I I
spat in His fa c e Statement about the topic (New information) PREDICATE
(3k.Y-NeJC-®n3k.6ce ezoyN 2 M -n e q 2o M att 26:67). The order, arrangement, and word class of subject and predicate vary according to Coptic sentence pat tern. Many Coptic subjects and predicates can be formally identified by not ing the constituents and arrangement of the sentence pattern in which they occur. In the absence of other signals, the focus o f attention is, by definition, on the predicate.
189
N E X U S
M O R P H S
A N D
N E G A T O R S
Special versions o f sentence patterns also occur in which the center o f attention, as of a predicate, is refocussed on some unusual item. These "focalizing ’ versions o f the basic sentences are signalled either syntactically, by the focalizing conversion 444 or cleft sen tence (chapter 20); o r rhetorically, by the overall structure o f the passage within which the sentence occurs. In addition, the spoken perform ance o f a basic sentence presumably allowed it to be com m unicated in focalized form through the speaker’s intonation pat tern and other prosodic features.
248 Nexus, clause, and nexus morph. The grammatical union of subject and pred icate can be called ‘nexus’. Nexus is the mutual dependence o f subject and predicate such as to compose a whole statement. Such a whole statement is a 'clause'. E.g. NeVptuMe 2eNVoYA3k.r n e “These men are Jew s” ; ANr-oynpocJjHTHC “ I am a prophetess” ; 't'- c c u r n “ I choose” ; N3k.N0Y-0Y “ They are good” ; 3k^-Tec2iMe c t u r n , N T e p e c - c tu r n “ The woman chose. When she had chosen” ; e y -p -^ z iU T “ As they sailed” In immediate analysis, clauses can be classified as either main and subordi nate. A ‘main clause ’ is one that in immediate analysis is self-sufficient, i.e. could occur without the presence of a subordinate clause. A 'subordinate for dependent) clause ’ is one that is not self-sufficient and which cannot occur without the presence o f a main clause to which it belongs as one o f its parts or complements. (O f course, every so-called ‘main’ clause in a text is actually part of a larger textual structure and, at that level o f description, is a subordi nate member of that larger structure.) Thus in A s they sailed H e fe ll asleep (e Y -p -® 2 cuT A e 3 i< j-cu b ^ Luke 8:23), H e fe ll asleep (3 iq -c u B ^ ) is a main (self-sufficient) clause, and as they sailed (e Y -p -® 2 ‘UT> is a subordin^e (dependent) clause that is not self-sufficient and which belongs to the main clause. In m eaning, the degree o f self-sufficiency that distinguishes main and sub ordinate clauses varies, for some form ally main clauses strongly anticipate a com ple m ent and in this im m ediate sense are not obviously self sufficient (jiy-A O e y - M o o u j e NMM3i-q John 6 :6 6 "They ceased going about with H im ” 426); whereas som e form al ly subordinate clauses simply add an additional statem ent to a main clause and thus have an unusual m easure o f self-sufficiency (3iq-N O Jt-< i e - n e u j r e K O e r o O T - o y M-M NT3ice Acts 12:4 “ He put him in prison, and he handed him over to sixteen soldiers” e 6 e t o e Iq
Coptic ‘nexus m orphs' are morphs which occur only where nexus is present, and which thus (at least incidentally) signal or imply or are associated with the pres ence o f nexus, even if their main function is to express other grammatical cate gories. (In the examples above, the following are nexus nrorphs: ne ‘they [are]’, ANf - ‘I [am]’, f - ‘I [am]’, NJk^NOY= ‘[is] good’, x - past tense conjugation base, NTepe= precursive conjugation base, e= circumstantial mutable converter.) A Coptic nexus m orph is therefore not the sarrie thing as the English ‘copula’, which is a verb (such as is) whose function is to signal the union o f subject and predicate. Most Coptic nexus m orphs primarily signal some other gramm atical category and/or lexical
190
N E X U S
M O R P H S
content and only secondarily or incidentally imply and signal the presence o f nexus, in association with clause pattern; and m ost are not verbs. For ne/re/Ne with exclusively copular function, cf. 277.
When nexus is present, its presence can always be detected by the occurrence o f one or more of the following nexus morphs as an element of a particular sentence pattern. (A partial exception is unconverted Pattern 1 of the durative sentence 317 which does not contain a nexus m orph, e.g. n jc o e ic 2M -n e q p n e Ps 10:5[11:4][10:4 Budge] “The Lord is in His holy tem ple.” ) T h e
N e x u s
M o rph s
i. ii.
Personal prefixes o f the nominal sentence 7 9 ,2 5 2 etc. Nexus pronouns o f the nominal sentence 5 3 ,2 5 2 n e /re /N e and invari able n e iii. Personal prefixes o f the durative sentence 78, 318 f - , etc. iv. The class o f statives 162, 309 c o r n , etc. V. Verbal auxiliaries 184 na - , q ; - , etc. vi. Non-durative conjugation bases (chapter 15) N T e p e -/N T e p = , T p e - / T p e = , etc. vii. Suffixally conjugated verboids (chapter 17) N3k.NOY-/N3k.NOY=, n e jc e /neacJis, etc. viii. OYNTe-/OYNT3k.= ‘have’ (chapter 18) ix. OYN- ‘there is/exists’ (chapter 21) X. Impersonal predicates 487 ecu, e s e c n , q ;u ;e , etc. xi. M utable converters 396 (eTepe-/er=, e p e - /e = , Nepe-/Ne=) xii. Immutable sentence converters 396 ( e r e - , e r - , e n t - , n t - , e - , K e -) W ith three exceptions, each type o f nexus morph occurs in only one basic sen tence type and thus signals the identity o f the sentence type in which it occurs. Exceptions are: invariable n e , which also occurs outside o f the nominal sen tence ( c f 285); verbal auxiliaries 184, which (except for occur in both durative and non-durative conjugation; and immutable sentence converters 396, some o f which occur before all convertible basic sentence patterns. 3iN r-, etc. Nom inal sentence (chapter 13) ne/re/Ne. Nom inal sentence (chapter 13) • f - , etc. Durative sentence (chapter 14) c o r n , etc. Durative sentence (chapter 14) N3i- (future auxiliary). Durative sentence (chapter 14) X - , etc. Non-durative conjugation (chapter 15) N31NOY-, n e j t e - , etc. Suffixally conjugated verboids (chapter 17) o y N T e -. ‘H ave’ (chapter 18) o y N - . ‘T here is/exists’ (chapter 21; Pattern 3 o f the durative sentence 322) 2 CU, etc. Im personal predicate, usually expanded by an entity statem ent 487 e r e p e - , etc. Durative sentence (chapter 14)
191
N E X U S
M O R P H S
A N D
N E G A T O R S
Since by definition the presence o f a nexus morph entails the presence o f a whole clause of one particular type, the nexus morphs will be treated mainly in part 2, as each o f the basic sentence types is described, ( n e is also treated with the determinators 53, and - f and 3iNr- with the personal morphs 78, 79; verbal auxiliaries [ nji- etc.] are treated in 184.)
249 The imperative (chapter 16) and the non-inflected interjection 245 can be thought o f as containing only one main information unit, and thus do not express nexus or contain a nexus morph. E.g. bcuk “ G o ” ; “ Oh, w o e!” For interjections based on nexus morphs ( o y o N , q ; o Yes! m m o n . Fine, n n o . N o!), cf. 241. NEGATORS
250 'N egators’ are morphs that express negation o f a nexus (‘not’). (a) Negative alternants. Five negative, main-clause, non-durative conjugation bases alternate (in polar opposition) with affirmatives; cf. chapter 15. Affirmative
Negative Alternant
A-
M ne-
Aq—o y tu e q u ja ip e epe-
M n ^ re M epeN N e-
M aipe-
M n p rp e -
E.g. M n o y -c tu T M “They did not listen” versus
j iy
- c u j t m “ They listened.”
Three negative impersonal predicates 487 alternate with affirmatives. Affirmative
Negative Alternant
r e N o iT o esecTi
M H re N o iT o o YK esecTi
q ;q ;e
M eq;q;e 488
(b) TM- negatives four of the subordinate-clause non-durative conjugations (N T e p e - , < yA N Te-, e p q ;A K - / e p e - , n t e - ) and the causative infinitive r p e - (chapter 15). E.g. eYq^ AN -ctuTM “ If they listen” versus e y ty A N TM-ctuTM “ If they do not listen.” (i) When t m - negatives a subordinate clause conjugation 342, il conies before (rarely, after) a non-personal subject but after a personal one. E.g. epe-T M -T B A B iA e n -® c o y o 26 e zp jil €JCM-nK3i2 n c - m o y John 12:24 “ Unless a grain o f wlieat falls into the earth and dies” : e q jc u n e eqqjJiN-TM-ccUTM n c c u -k jci n -k e o y j^ NMM21-K H CN31Y Matt 18:16 "But if he does not listen, take one or two others along with you” ; . . . N Te-reK O Y epH T e TM-Jci-®Jcpon Prov 2:5, 3 :6 “ And your feet will not stumble.” (ii) When t i 5 - negatives the causative infinitive, e -^ T p e q -c c u T n has the form o f e -® T M -T p eq -cc u T n ; but Z M -n r p e q -c c u T n has Z M - n r p e q -
192
N E G A T O R S
T M -ccu T n ; cf. 359. (Hi) O utside o f conjugation, t m - is expanded by a non-durative infinitive, e.g. € - ® t m - k o t - o y uj3i-2Hpcu.a^HC Matt 2 :12 “ Not to return to H erod” ; n jip ji-n e K O Y tu q ; rjip n e e-®TM -Tpe-A3i3iY m - 'I'y x h m oy ShGu6 I61o.-16-17 “Since, for no soul to die is contrary to Y our w ill.” t m - is also compatible with a ver bal auxiliary, e.g. o y n - 2 ^ 2 N J^-qjiN e nc3i-®bcuk € 2 0 Y n N ce-TM -eqj-<5M -® (5oM Luke 13:24 “ M any will seek to enter and will not be able.”
(c) The negator mn - alternates (in polar opposition) with o y N - in existential sen tences (chapter 21), including Pattern 3 of the durative sentence 322; e.g. o y n -®6 om iMMo-q “He can”/MN-®6oM MMo-q “ He cannot.” Likewise negative m nte - replaces affirmative o y n t e - ‘have’ (chapter 18); e.g. oYNTA-q “ He has”/MNTA-q “ He does not have.” (d) Heu)xs ‘not know’, the suffixally conjugated verboid 381, is by its very nature negative. (e)
and (N -)q;q;e aiN. The impersonal predicate u;u;e ‘it is right, fit ting’ is negatived in two ways: by the negator ( n - ) . . . an mostly in main clauses; and by being replaced by its negative alternant Meu;q;e in relative and circumstantial conversion; cf. 488.
(f) ( N - ) .. • All O ther kinds o f nexus are negatived by the enclitic negator a n or by N - . . . AN. Optionally, negative n - is prefixed to the first essential ele ment o f its sentence pattern (after any extrapositions); negative n - only occurs ill tandem with an. Negatived by ( n - ) . . . an are: the nominal sentence (chapter 13); durative sentence Patterns 1 and 2 (chapter 14); the suffixally conjugated verboids formed in initial na 376; 2 n e - 379; some impersonal predicates 487. The possible positions of an (and of n - , if present) vary from one sentence pattern to another; they are treated in parts 2 and 3, where the basic clause patterns and complex clause patterning are described. Exam ples: N T K -neqjB H p M - n p p o John 19:12 “ You are not C aesar’s friend” ; N -q -M -n eT M 3 i Luke 2 4:6 “ He is not here” : N -N JiN O Y -neT N qjoY ojoY 1 C or 5 :6 “ Y our boasting is not good” ; e p o - q Jce-3iq-p-® N O B e ShM iss4 822 :1 4 ” For him merely to have sinned was not enough” ; e c -2 M -n e iM 3 i jin h nA i ShAmdl I I 462:10-11 “ It is not here or there” ; TStcutn rjip jin neT®-qj3iJce M ark 13:4 “ For it is not you who speak”
MH . . . AN “Pray tell. . . not . . . ? ” expresses a negative rhetorical question whose expected answer is yes. mh is an initial attitude marker 238 and also signals inter rogation; the indispensable negator is an. E.g. mh m -hai an n e nq^Hpe M-n 2AM-q;e Matt 13:55 “Is it not this one who is the carpenter’s son?” (g) Incapable o f being negatived are: (i) the suffixally conjugated verboids n a Ta t - ‘blessed is . . . ’ 378, n e j c e - ‘said’ 380, N e q p - ‘is pleasant’ and o y e r - ‘is distinct’ 382; (ii) T A p e - the future conjunctive base 357; (Hi) the impersonal predicate 2amoV 487; (iv) the existential-indicating base e i c ‘behold’ 477.
193
N EXU S SPEC IFIC
N EG A TIO N
OF
M ORPHS AN
AND
N EG A TO RS
IN D IV ID U A L
ELEM ENT
OF
THE
TKXT
251 The following morphs can express negation where nexus is not present. (a) The prefix t m - negatives the lexical content o f the infinitive as verbal noun, and the combination r'H -Infinitive enters into article phrases; cf. 105(c). (b )
can specifically negative the grammatical relationship of an indi vidual element o f the text (attributive term 98, entity term 143, inflected mod ifier 157, adverbial modifier 199, conjunction 236). (n -) ... an
Exam ples; jin o k jin jia a a n j c o e i c I C or 7 :1 0 “ Not I but the L ord” ; j in o k M -n jco e ic 1 C or 7 : 1 2 “ 1 m yself and not the L ord” ; t n o < 5 n - c k h n h € t ® - j c h k EBOA M -M O Y N r n-< 5ijc E T e -n jif n e N -T 3 i-n ee icc u N T Heb 9 ; 11 “ The greater and more perfect tent, not made with hands, that is, not o f this creation": 2 N - O Y n N X 2 N ~ O Y C 23i( Rom 2 : 2 9 “ Spiritually and not literally” ; e l e - - t - N - o y e A c u e 2 h t - t h y t n 1 Cor 7 :35 “ Not to lay any restraint upon you” ; TETN-TBBHY x w x N -THp-T?5 John 13:10 “ You are clean, but not every one o f you/not all o f you”
(c) The negative imperative 368 is formed by the prefix F in p - (or n n tu p e - ) Hinfinitive. E.g. M np-tuplc “ Do not sw ear.”
194
Part 2 The Basic Clause Patterns and the Imperative
13
The Nominal Sentence The Structure of the Nominal Sentence 252 Components and Patterns 252 Extraposited topic as a pattern com ponent Negation o f Nexus 254 Tense and ‘Inherent Predication’ 255 Conversions 256 Elaboration o f Subject or Predicate 257 Adverbial Prem odifier 258 The Nominal Sentence Patterns
253
259
A. Patterns Containing the a n ? - Paradigm 259 Pattern Recognition 259 Predicate Suppletions 260 AN O K - versus j i n o k 262 Pattern 1 ANf-oYnpoHTHc 263 Pattern 2 NTOK NTK-oYnpo
279
197
N O M I N A L
Pattern Extension Pattern Ne
S E N T E N C E
11 jl^nok n e / a/?i someone im poifant 283 of Cleft Sentence Pattern 1 284 12: Tc 3k.N ne-N eq-B 3k.nTize I x w x NeqM3k.eHTHC 284
Invariable n e in Other Types o f Sentence
285
Types o f Nominal Sentence Predicate 286 Formal Classification of Predicates 286 Semantic Classification of Predicates 287 Action as an entity 288 Anaphoric reference 289 Class name 290 Demonstration 291 Denotation and description 292 Explanatory or evaluative comment 293 Insignificance 294 Personal identification 295 Possessedness 296 Quantity and other categories of the specifiers Relationship of time, place, and manner 298 Request for class name 299 Self-importance 300 Similarity and admiration 301 Source 302 Unchanging identity 303 O ther Semantic Functions of the Predicate 304
297
T H E S T R U C T U R E O F T H E N O M IN A L S E N T E N C E COM PONENTS
AND
PATTERNS
OF
THE
N O M IN A L
SENTENCE
252 The ‘nominal sentence ’ is a set of sentence patterns whose predicates (under lined in the examples below) are entity terms; entity statements; and/or prepo sitional phrases that express relationship. Many patterns have restricted pred icate compatibility. (English translation of the nominal sentence requires addi tion of the verb to be as copula, whereas these Coptic patterns are non-verbal in the sense that the verb has no formal association with their structure.) 2>.Nr-oYnpot})HTHC “ 1 am a prophet” (I-a prophet) ncN N oyT e n e “ He is our G od” (our God he) e-nA.iNJCH N2t.-Y Te TeyzynoMONH ShIV 46:18 “ For them, their endurance is-in vain (unto vanity)”
198
S T R U C T U R E
O F
T H E
N O M I N A L
S E N T E N C E
®26 MEN NC3k^-®n3i20Y n c N - c o n 2>^c-c2t^9tu-c EBOA ShChass 122:18-22 “ Now, ‘fall on its hiiid-quarters’ means that she often with drew ” Nexus Morphs A nominal sentence contains and is signalled by one or another of the follow ing nexus morphs 248. (a) The paradigm: subject-function personal prefixes 79; ‘interlocutive’, i.e. 1St and 2d person only var. Jk^NOKvar. N T O K n t e - var. isjto var. jk^NON-, rarely 3 ln n NTETN- var. NTtuTNN T ic -
‘I (am )’ ‘you (are)’ sing. masc. ‘you (are)’ sing. fern. ‘we (are)’ ‘you (are)’ pi.
interlocutive
Only one instance of a 3d person nexus prefix (NTq- sing, masc., 2 Cor 10:7) is on record; it is a unique occurrence.
(b) The variable n e /re /N e paradigm, enclitic determinators (nexus pronouns) 5 3 ; 'delocutive i.e. 3d person only . - ne .. Te .. NE
‘he/it (is)’ ‘she/it (is)’ ‘they (are)’
delocutive
(c) Invariable n e . enclitic ... ne
‘it (is)’ (cf. impersonal it, not expressing number/gender)
Invariable n e also occurs as a predicate pronoun (‘is he, is such’), in Pattern 10. As a variant, the concluding vowel of a monosyllabic morph immediately before n e / r e / N e is (rarely) doubled 28: Ne-nNj^Y N - J c n - c o o n e John 4:6 = N e - n N A y N - J c n - c o n e “It was the sixth hour” ; o y M e e r e John 5:30= o y M e r e “It is just” ; n a I 2 NpcuMe N-NAA N e Sir 44:10 (44:11 Lagarde) = n a I 2e N p c u M e n - n a ne “These are merciful men” ; nHH n e - T j r - A q - J c o o - c (cleft sentence 4 64 ) John 19:21 “It is this man who said” ; etc. Doubling also occurs before invariable n e in verbal sen tences 285: T N - N A - M o y o y n e Deut 5:25 = T N - N A - M o y n e “We shall die.”
Members of the 3k.N?- paradigm are personal morphs (chapter 4), those of the n e paradigm are determinator pronouns (chapter 2). In the nominal sentence these paradigms complement one another to cover the full range of eight per sons:
199
NOMINAL
sing. (i)
1st 2d
(ii)
SENTENCE
pi.
aiN fNTK- (masc.) N T e- (fem.)
aiNntetn-
[3d] . .. n e (masc.) . . . n e . . . r e (fem.)
or
(c)
invariable . . , n e
The elements o f a nominal sentence are; one of these nexus morphs together with one, two, or three free entity terms (or other compatible items), arranged in one of the patterns listed below. (A ‘f r e e ' term here means one that is nei ther linked with nor an expansion o f nor in apposition to a preceding term.) Elaborations or modifiers can also be present 257, 258. T he
N o m in a l
S e n t e n c e
P a t ter n s
(Predicates are underlined) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (5a) (5b) (6) (6a) (7) (7a) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
a .N r-OYnpo(}>HTHc, 263 I am a prophel. 21NOK A N r-oY npo())H TH c. 264 As for me, I am a prophel. ncuujM n e , 266 Il’s summer. neN N O Y Te n e , 267 He is our God. N elpcuM e 2£MlQLyAM Ne, 272 These men are Jews. nicATANAc nicATANAc o n n e . 273 Satan is alw ays the same. iJcoB T .a^e TJt o o y TIt o o y o n n e , 274 Walls are always the same. oYM e n e n n o Y T e , 275 God is true. 31NOK n e no Y o fN M -nK O cM oc, 276 It is I who am the light of the world. n e ia .n o T n e TAia.eHKH M -e p p e . 277 This cup is the new covenant. ANOK n e rABPtHA. 278 I am Gabriel. nKOYl N2HT-THYTN T H p-T N n3if n e n N o 6 . 279 The one who is least among all of you is the great one. a.NQK n e , 281 It is I/It’s me. A.NOK n s , 282 I am he/I am such. 21NOK n e , 283 I am .someone important. x w x NegM a-eHTHc Ne, 284 Rather, it wa,s His disciples (who were doing so).
The nominal sentence is also a form ative elem ent in the cleft .scntcncc (chapter 20, Patterns 1, la, 3, and 3a).
200
S T R U C T U R E
O F
T H E
N O M I N A L
S E N T E N C E
P r e d ic a t e s
Each pattern is compatible with a particular set o f predicates from among enti ty terms 141, entity statements 150, and prepositional phrases expressing rela tionship 298. Generally, the range o f compatible predicates varies according to which nexus morph the pattern is built upon. i. subject, ANT- paradigm: very restricted 259 ii. subject, n e / r e / N e and invariable n e ; very wide (Patterns 3 and 4 are perhaps somewhat restricted 265 and by definition Patterns 5a, 5b, 6a, 7a, 9, 10, and 11 have very restricted predicates) For a more detailed classification of predicates, cf. 286-304. Entity terms in predicate function either denote (name an instance of a class or a unique indi vidual), oynpocjjHTHC n e He is a prophet; or describe (speak of an entity by its quality), o y w e n e nN oyT e God is true. Cf. 141. Furlher exam ples: n t k - n i m John 1:19 “Who are y o u ? ” ; n e y N O Y T e ne 2 h t - o y Phil 3:19 “ T heir god is their b e lly "; jinok n e John 6:20 “ It is /’■; njil Ji.e ne e-®TpeN - c A c A - N e N e p H Y Rom 1:12 "A nd ihis m eans f o r us to encourage one a n o th er” ; t3i2P® J^nok re JceKJic e ^ i e - ^ i p e M -noYtuu> M - n - e N T -3 iq T3iOYO-^i John 4:34 “ My own food is to do the will o f H im who sent M e ” : Tujopn Te ccuTM nicpJiHA (etc.) M ark 12:29 “The first (comm andm eni) is. Hear, O Israel . . . ; n e q p o o Y u j n e e T B e - N 2 H K e John 12:6 “ His care i s / o r the p oor"
253 Extraposited topic as a pattern component. Some patterns have only two members— a subject morph (a n F -, n e ) and a predicate. But a more complex structure occurs in Patterns 2, 5, 5a, 5b, and 8. These begin with an extraposited topic NeTptuMe I 2eNToyAaiV Ne “ These men are Jews (these men, I Jews they)” i.e. with an item placed at the front of the clause (‘extraposited’) and thus set off as the topic of the sentence (NeVptuMe in the preceding example) 313. These five patterns can be analyzed as an extraposited topic expanded by a two-mem ber nominal sentence (the 'kernel statem ent’), which contains the predicate and within which the topic is represented and referred to by the sub ject a n F - or n e etc., agreeing with it in (person)/number/(gender) NefptuMe I eeNToyAVf Ne “These men are Jew s” Topic + Tw o-m em ber kernel statem ent (subject Ne represents and refers back to NefpcuM e)
or, in 5b and 8, expanded by a three-member structure. Such sentences consist o f two units: topic I statement. Kernel (Pattern 1) Pattern 2
aiNr-oynpocljHTHC I aiNr-oYnpo(|)HTHC
jinok
201
N O M I N A L
S E N T E N C E
Kernel (Pattern 4) ne Pattern 5 NeVptuMe I 2 eN'foYAAV n e Kernel (Pattern 4) niC3k.T3k.N2k.c n e Pattern 5a nicjkXJkNJkC I nic^TJkNJkC o n n e Kernel (Pattern 5a) n t o o y n t o o y o n n e Pattern 5b n c o b t 1 N T o o y n t o o y on n e Kernel (Pattern 7) n v r n e nN o6 Pattern 8 nK o y i n z h t - th y tn In v r n e nN o6 Patterns 7 and 7a cannot be analyzed into two units.
n e g a t io n
of
nexus
254 Negation of nexus is always expressed by the enclitic negator jk^N 250. It fol lows the predicate in all patterns but Pattern 7/7a; it always precedes n e /re /N e and invariable n e . Optionally, negative n - is also prefixed to the first essential elem ent of the pattern. E.g. jk^Nr-oYJ^NOMoc jk^N 1 Cor 9:21 “ I am not without law ” ; n - c n a y jin Ne M att 19:6 “They are not tw o” ; n t i u t n A e NTe'ree r e Luke 22:26 “ But you are not thus” ; mh N - 2 e N r 3k^A.iA3k^ioc jk^N Ne NJk^i THpoY er® -u;3k^j(.e Acts 2:7 “ Pray tell, are not all those who are speaking G alileans?” Negative f J - is often absent in Patterns I and 2, som etim es absent in the other patterns, and norm ally absent in the preterit conversion o f the nominal sentence.
TEN SE A N D ‘ IN H E R E N T P R E D IC A T IO N ’
255 The basic serftence patterns express present tense. (For the overall Coptic tense system, cf. chapter 25.) A fuller range o f tenses, etc. can be expressed by periphrastic conjugation of uju>ne completed by a circumstantial conversion of the nominal sentence 427. E.g. M xp e q -u p tu n e e - o Y JtJt n e Sirach 5:12 “ Let it be one thing” ; a y o ) n e q e i e s o A e q - N 2k - q ;a )n e e - r e e ji A J i c c j i r e Josh 17:9 Koi fiaxai auxoC f) 8tE^o8o(; GaXaaaa “ And the sea shall be its termination.” In the nominal sentence, the category o f inherent, or essential, predication 179, 292 is co-expressed along with tense; cf. 526. The combination of pre sent time and essential predication is a typical component (‘timelessness’) of the general, unconditional discourse perspective of ‘timeless truth’ 527, e.g. in description of the nature of God, moral truths, or other unchangeables. C O N V E R S IO N S
256 Conversions of the nominal sentence are marked by immutable sentence con verters (relative, circumstantial, and preterit only):
202
S T R U C T U R E
O F
T H E
N O M I N A L
S E N T E N C E
e r e - relative ecircumstantial N epreterit (Some patterns are further restricted, as noted below; those based on the jk^Nrparadigm have no relative conversion, and their preterit is restricted to contrary-to-fact conditionals 498 and regret 499.) Focalization. An initial adverbial modifier of the nominal sentence is made the focal point by selection of the circumstantial focalization pattern 459; e.g. N-Jiu; N~2e e~Y N o6 n e nptUMe eq-TJk^iHY eMJk^re ShAmel I 305:4-6 “ And surely (And how can it not be that) the human being is great and very glorious.” A personal element of the nominal sentence is made the focal point by selection o f Pattern 6a (276); e.g. Jk^NOK n e noyoTN M -nK ocM oc John 8:12 “ It is I who am the light of the world.” Otherwise, there is no focalizing conversion o f the nominal sentence.
ELA BO RA TIO N
OF SU BJEC T
OR
PR ED IC A TE
257 An entity term functioning as subject or predicate can be elaborated by ('/) link age 145, (ii) restrictive expansion 146, (Hi) apposition 149, (iv) attributive con struction o f the noun 96, or (v) other modifying construction 103. In patterns containing etc. subject and predicate are bound, and any enclitic conjunction such as A e 235(b) or an elaborating element (or both) appears after the predicate: jk^Nr-oyziAituTHc A e 2 Cor 11:5 “ I am unskilled.” But in patterns containing n e etc., subject and predicate are not bound; consequently, an enclitic can interrupt the sequence o f Predicate I Subject: 2eN2iC3krreAOC rjk^p ng Luke 20:36 “ For, they are equal to angels.” Exam ples: (i) e u jJc e -N T K -o Y T fN i h o y ^ r r e A o c S h lll 3 8 :1 8 -1 9 “ If indeed you are a spirit o r aii angel” ; N eK «yxxe M N-NeKTtuu> T H p - o y 2 eNM e n g S h lll 141:14 “ All Y our words and Your com m antlm ents are true” ; r e z p e M -npcuM e n e o y o e iK m n - o y m o o y MN-NK€TpoH ShRossi I I 3 90/7:6-9 “ T he food of the hum an being is bread and w ater and the other foodstuffs” ; 2eNNo<5 j^y^u 2 e N u jn H p e Ne N€K2BHYe n j c o e i c Rev 15:3 “ G reat and w onderful are T hy deeds, O L o rd !” ; (ii) NTeTN -oY K cuT NTe-nNOYT® 1 C or 3 :9 "Y ou are a building of (i.e. built by) G o d ” ; n j c o e i c rjip M-nc3kBB3iTON n e n u j H p e M -n p tu M e M att 12:8 “ For the Son o f M an is Lord o f the sabbath” ; (Hi) iN O N -N €K A H poN oM oc N € k a h p o N o m o c m gn M -nN OYT€ N ujB p-K A H poN O M oc M - n € ^ Rom 8:17 “ We are the heirs— the heirs of G od and the fellow heirs o f C hrist” ; nJki n e n j i n o c r o A o c ShIV 198:6 “T his is Paul, the apostle” ; K€2tUB . . . c r e - n j i f n e e -® T p e N -p -® 2 0 T e 2 H T ^ ShChass 160:11-16 “ O ne m ore thing . . . , nam ely this: for us to fear H im "; (iv) i N f - o y c 2 'M e N-c3iM3ipiTHc John 4 :9 “ I am a Sam aritan w om an’’; 2 6 NBOTe hineM To eBOA M - n jc o e ic Ne 2e N u ji N -K p o q Prov 11:1 “ False balances are abom inations before the Lord” ; 3iNr-oY2iK3kNoc x n e-®n3k2T-® M ark 1:7 “ I am not
203
N O M I N A L
S E N T E N C E
worthy to bend dow n"; 2cuc e u jJ te -z e N e iJic u A O N 68:14-15 “ As though they were idols that do not speak”
Ne e - M e y - s y ^ J te ShIV
In a predicate, the noun lexeme (as such) of an article phrase can be elaborat ed either by either simple linkage or by conjunction + n - , e.g. n -Exam ples: ^ e N M o e i ? e e j c N - M o e i ^ e N e N e t i j B H y e T H p - o y ShLefort 43:2 9 “ His works are all one set o f wonderful things after another (i.e. m anifold and w onderful)” ; N T eT N -?eN ^UMMo AN 6 e ^ i-p M N -6 o T A e Eph 2 :1 9 “ Thus, you are no longer strangers and sojourners” 231; h a k o i n c u n o c n e A y c u N - c u B p - p - * ? c u B 2 C or 8:23 “ He is my partner and fellow w orker” ; o v n o p N o c n e h N - p e q - c u M O i e - ^ e i J L tuAON 1 Cor 5:11 “ He is an adulterer or idolater”
A D V E R B IA L
PR EM O D IFIER
258 An adverb or prepositional phrase (chapter 9) preceding the sentence pattern lays down a circumstance or relationship o f time, place, manner, degree, or attitude in which the sentence is being asserted (i.e. under which the predica tion is made). Premodifier I Sentence Pattern K A . T A . - O Y O I K O N O M I A . M e N I TeqMA.A.Y T e “ As to divine dispensation, I she is His m other” (ShLefort 42:21-22)
Adverbial modifiers also occur within and after nominal sentence patterns. E.g. o y Te "f-pH NH N -2 eNptUMe n NA.2 PN ~nN oyTe ShChass 168:56—169:1 “ W hat does the peace o f human beings amount to in the eyes o f G o d ? ” Conjunctions and initial attitude markers (chapter 10) also occur in premodi fier position. ■
T H E N O M IN A L S E N T E N C E P A T T E R N S A.
P attern s
PATTERN
C o n ta in in g
R EC O G N ITIO N
t h e
AND
a n ? -P a r a d ig m CO M PA TIBLE
(P a ttern s
1
a n d
2)
PR ED IC A TES
259 Patterns 1 and 2 can be recognized from the presence o f the a n F - (var. A.NOK-) paradigm, which occurs only in these patterns, a n t - is the subject. The predicate immediately follows this prefix, e.g. A .N r-o y p p o John 18:37 “ 1 am a king.” (For the ambiguity of a n o k - versus a n o k , cf. 262.) The logical inversion o f Patterns 1 and 2 is provided by Pattern 6a in which a personal independent is in predicate focus 276. E.g. A N r-n o y o lN M -nK ocM O C John 9:5 “ 1 am the light o f the w orld” (Pattern 1) has as its inversion JiNOk n e noyofN M-nKOCMOC John 8:12 “ It is / who am the light o f the w orld” (Pattern 6a).
204
P A T T E R N S
C O N T A I N I N G
A. N P -
Range o f predicates. Very restricted: (i) def. article phrases o f either the sim ple def. article n - ‘the’ or the possessive article n « ‘my, your, his (etc.)’; (H) the possessed pronoun 54 nA.-/ntu= ‘(the) one related to . . . (Hi) indef. arti cle phrases; (iv) o y x /o Y c i (not g o e i n e ? ) ‘one, such a one, such’; fv) n i m ‘w h o ?’. Strikingly absent are zero article phrases, proper names, and dem on strative articles/pronouns.
P R E D IC A T E S U P P L E T I O N S
260
Some excluded predicates can be predicated o f the 1st and 2d persons by other m eans: (i) zero article phrase can be predicated in the verbal constructions o N - . . . or p - . . . 179, 180(b); e.g. e k - o n -* u jm m o e -eiepoY C A A H M Luke 24:18 “ Are you foreign to Jerusalem ?” ; (I'O the retrospeclive demonstrative pronoun nAT is conveyed by n e in Pattern 10. a n o k n e “ I am he. S o I am ” ; (Hi) the personal independent ( a n o k etc.) is predicated in Pattern 7a, e.g. a n o n n e NToq S h lll 22:1 6 “ W e and he are as one” ; (iv) the proper noun is predicated in Pattern 7a, e.g. a n o k r e 2 p o y e Ruth 3 :16 “ I am R uth” : (v) cardinal numbers from ‘tw o’ up, o y H p ‘how m uch/m any?’, and z a ^ ‘m uch/m any’ are predicated in the verbal construction J t e K - ( n e z - , e i p e N -) ‘amount to . . . . ’ e.g. T N -A K -2A2 M ark 5 :9 “ We are m any” ; ® no6 n - t b t e y - ^ i p e N - u je T A l o Y s y o M T e John 21:11 “ Large fish, a hundred and fifty three o f them ” ; (vi) a a a y , A u j , and O Y ‘w hat?’ 299 (the first tw o in lexically fixed expressions 2 9 4 ,3 0 1 ) are pred icated as an expansion o f O Y -Z zeN - in Patterns I and 2, e.g. ANON-zeNOY 2 CUCU-N . . . J t e - T N - o N - ® A T - c c u T M ShLeyd (E phrem ?) 362fc; 12-21 “ And who, then, are we . . . to be disobedient?” ; (vii) prepositional phrases expressing relationship 298 are predicated as an expansion o f O Y - / 2 e N - in Patterns I and 2, e.g. A A n e c u c N T K - O Y e e o A m m o - o y M ark 14:70 “Truly, you are one o f them .”
261
W hen the predicate acclaim s or questions the personal identity o f a person (“ You are . . . ! ” “ Are you . . . ? ” ) Pattern 7a, Subject ne.P redicate, is often em ployed. E.g. n t o k n e n p p o N -(N )ioY JtA i John 18:33 “ Are You ihe Jew ish k in g ? " This pattern is also norm al w hen the predicate is a proper noun (cf. 260[iv]).
S U B JE C T P R E F IX A N O K - V E R S U S P E R S O N A L IN D E P E N D E N T A. N O K
262
The personal prefix a n F - , n t k - , etc. often occurs in a variant spelling containing the vowel o or cu, i.e. a n o k - , n t o k - , n t c u t n - 252, etc. In written C optic these vari ant spellings m ight be confused with the independent personal morphs a n o k , n t o k , etc. The distinguishing features o f a n o k - versus a n o k are give in table 17 . Cf. also 153.
205
N O M I N A L
S E N T E N C E
TABLE 17 D istinguishing F ea tu r es o f a n o k - versu s a n o k JiNOK-
(V a R . of
JiN?-)
jiN O K ( P e r s o n a l I n d e p e n d e n t 7 7 )
Prefix (bound m orph) Im m ediately follow ed only by an elig ib le predicate o f P atterns 1 or 2 (cf. 259) 1st and 2 d persons only S ub ject only
C an be autonom ous Im m ediately follow ed by any class o f m orph
A lw ays present in P atterns 1 and 2
E x cluded in P attern 1 A lw ays present in P attern 2, along with the prefix a n ? - (var. j i n o k - ) : 1st and 2 d persons only O ptional in P atterns 3 - 7 , 8, and 12 A lw ays present (by d e finition) in P atterns 7a, 9 -1 1
1st, 2d, and 3d persons S u b ject or predicate or ex trap o sited topic H om onym o f the inflected m odifier J iN o = /n to = 152
E xcluded in P atterns 3 -1 2
263 P a tte rn 1: th e sim ple interlocutive n om inal sentence A.Nf- Predicate ANr-oYnpo(|)HTHc “I am a prophetess” (Rev 2:20) Negation: (N-)A.N?-oYnpo(|)HTHC an Conversion: Converter- a n ? - Predicate. Attested are preterit (forming contrary-to-fact clauses 498, 499[b]) and circumstantial. Further exam ples: jiN i^-eM 2J'A M - n j t o e i c Luke 1:38 “ I am the handmaid o f the Lord” ; N Tic-O Y u;H pe J ie Gal 4 :7 “ You are a son” ; N T K -o y o y S h lll 38:17 “ W hat (sort o f thing) are y o u ? "; N re T N -ze N C N H y Acts 7 :26 “ You are brethren” N T ic-n eq ;B H p JiN M - n p p o John 19:12 “ You are not C a e sa r’s frien d ” iJT e rii-z e N e B O A j i e JiN 2 M -nK ocM O c John 15:19 “ And you are not o f the w orld” jiN -2 eN T eeiM iN e o n 2 Cor 1 0 :1 1 “T hat is how we are (We are also like this)” xoioCToi (fianev); JiN O N -n c u -q 2 C or 10:7 “ W e too are H is” ; N -JiN O N -N q;H pe i i - T 2 M2JiA JiN Gal 4:31 “ We are not the children o f the female servant” ; jiN r-OYJi NH-TN 1 Cor 9 :2 “ I am one (i.e. an apostle) for y ou” ; N T ic-N in Jo h n 1:19 “ W ho are Y o u ? " Conversions: e - jiN O N - n r e N o c 6 e M -nN O Y Te Acts 17:29 “ Since, then, we are G od’s offspring” ; e-JiNi^-OYJiNOMOc JiN M -nN O Y Te 1 C or 9:21 “ (Me) not being without law toward G od” ; 22^moi n e - J i N o n - o y J ' m m o - o y SIilV 92:18 “ If only we were one o f them! ”
264 P a tte rn 2: ex trap o sited topic w ith P a tte rn 1 ANOK I ANT- Predicate NTOK I N TK -O Yn p O (|)H TH C ‘‘As for You, You are a prophet” (John 4:19)
206
P A T T E R N S
C O N T A I N I N G
n e
Structure: personal independent + Pattern 1. I.e. extraposited topic 253 + ker nel statement, forming two rhetorical units. The personal subject morph a .n ? (etc.) represents and refers back to the extraposited topic, agreeing with it in person/ number/ (gender). Negation:
n t o k
(N - )N T K - o Y n p o (|)H T H c
an
Conversion: ? Further exam ples: j ^n o n j i e jiNON-M M JieHTHc John 9:28 “ But as for us, we are disciples o f M oses” ; n t c u t n f i T e T N - N J i q ; B e e p John 15:14 “ As for you, you are My friends” ; n t o 2c u cu -T e Nre-OYM JiJiY S h lll 22; 14 “ You also are not a m other” ; JiN ok jiN r-O Y eBO A JiN 2 M -neT K O cM oc John 8:23 “ For My part, I am not o f this w orld” ; i.NON j i e i.N 0 N -N i.-n e 2 0 0 Y ShChass 166:6-8 “ But as for us, we belong to the daylight” ; n t o k 6 e n t k - n i m John 1:22 “ T hen as for you, who are you?”
The extraposited topic a n o k can receive explicit lexical content from a fol lowing entity term in apposition, e.g. a n o k jv,e n iT A .A .A .in tu p o c A.N?-oY2 HKe ShChass 99:2—4 “ But as for me, wretch that I am {literally as for me this wretched one), I am poor.” In sentences o f the form jiN r-O Y npo4)H TH C j ^n o k , the morph j ^n o k is the inflected m odifier 153, ‘myself, personally'. E.g. jiN r-o Y J^ rJie o c Ji No k M att 20:15 “ 1 m yself am good.”
B. ne
P a t t e r n s W ITH
ONE
EN TITY
C o n t a in in g TERM
V a r ia b l e
o r
3
4)
(PA TTERN S
AND
I n v a r ia b l e
ne
For special patterns o f Ji No k n e , cf. 280
265 Pattern recognition. Patterns 3 and 4 consist o f two elements; a free 252 enti ty term or other compatible predicate, followed by the subject pronoun n e /re /N e .
Predicate n e / r e / n e n ty n p e M - n N o Y T e n e “ He is the son o f G od”
Cf. also Pattern 12. Range o f predicates: A rather wide range o f predicates is compatible, at least with Pattern 4. Perhaps excluded are the zero article phrase and e -® T p e -. The personal independent ( a n o k etc.) occurs only as an explanatory or evaluative predicate 293. For other patterns o f a n o k n e , see Patterns 9-11. Interlaced composition. A m odifier or other elaboration 257 o f the predicate, or at least the last part o f one, can occur in postponed position, at the end o f the sentence after n e . E.g. g tu c e c u jc e -?eN6tAcuA.oN n g e-M ey-cuA Jce Shiv 68:14-15 “ As though they were idols that do not speak” ; n e - m apia 207
NOMINAI.
Sl;NTl;Nrl-
A e r e tm ataaahnh Luke 24:10 “ Now, there was Mary M agdalene.” Such an interweaving o f predicate with n e is called interlace (hyperbaton); it is a compositional device. Cf. also 271. 266 P a tte rn 3 : th e unex p an d ed delocutive nom inal sentence (endophoric n e ) Predicate
n e /re /N e
ntytUM n e “ It’s sum m er’’ (ShlV 110:22) Structure: n e as ‘endophoric’ subject pronoun, i.e. one that refers to an inter nal element within the pattern (the predicate). In this pattern variable n e , the subject, focusses attention on the predicate and agrees with it formally in number/(gender). (English translations typically employ impersonal "it is, ir’s.” ) This pattern is also a formative element o f the cleft sentence 464, 470. Closely related is Pattern 12. Cf. also Pattern 9. In some occurrences o f Pattern 3, n e asserts existence and introduces some person or thing into the actual line of discourse or into a story (English “ There is/are” ), like o y N - 476. Cf. the exis tential cleft sentence 462. Negation: (M -)nqjtuM an n e Conversion: Converter-Predicate n e . Preterit (only?) is attested. Further exam ples: r e n p c u r e ShIV 111:2 “ It is w inter"; xnJipjicK eY H r e Mark 15.-42 “ It (was) Friday (the day o f Preparation)” ; K e -t)T o o Y n - e b o t n e n t e ncu2 c e i John 4:35 “ There are four more months and the harvest com es” ; oycM H N-NOYT6 r e A y c u N - o y c M H N - p t u M e Jin r e Acts 12:22 “ It is a divine voice and not a hum an voice” ; e i c - u j o M r e p - p o w n e n e e r - N H o v e 'f -u jiN e NCJk-^KJipn o c Luke 13:7 “ Lo, these three years I have com e seeking fruit” ; m n n c jin M e g -cN jiY fi-KjiTJineTJiCM Ji t e c k h n h r e e T e - u jJ iy - M o y T e e p o - c jte -N -e T ® -o y jijiB N -N -er® -oyjiJiB Heb 9:3 “ And after the second curtain, there is the tabernacle that is called the H olies o f the H olies": h - J i n o k Jin MMJiTe n e J.NOK N tH - n icu T e N T - J i q - T J i o y o - e i John 8:16 “ It is not a m atter o f Me alone, but o f Me and the Father who sent M e.” Conversion: N e - o y u j i n e N ji-y JiN n e ShChass 169:37-39 “ It w ould not be a scandal unto them ” ; N e -n N J iy js.e n e N - j c n - u j o M r e M ark l.^:25 “ Now , it was the lim e o f the third hour.”
267 P attern 4: the unex p an d ed delocutive nom inal sentence (an ap h o ric n e ) Predicate ne/re/N e n eN N o y x e n e “ He is our G od” (John 8:54) Structure: In this pattern variable n e is ‘anaphoric’ (retrospective), i.e. refers back to some item outside of the present sentence, which has already been mentioned in the text, n e represents the outside item and agrees with it formally in num ber/(gender), e.g. c e - n i e e r i p ? a .-'fcp?a.NNHc jc e -
208
I'ATTIiRNS
o Y n p o < } )H T H c
CONTAINING
n e
n e Luke 2 0 :6 “ For they think, as regards John, that he is a
prophet.” Negation: (M-)neNNOY're a n n e Conversion: Convertei-Predicate n e . Relative, circumstantial, and preterit occur. Suppletion: The zero article phrase is predicated o f the 3d person in the verbal con structions o N - and p - 180(b), e.g. g - o N-®NoeiK M att 19:9 “ He is a n adulterer or is adulterous.” Further exam ples: O Y peg-p-® N O B e r e Luke 7 :3 9 “ She is a sinner” ; mh n - 2e n a i T o y p riK o N jiN M-rffJX T H p - o y Ne Heb 1:14 “ Pray tell, are they not all ministering sp irits? ” ; 6 e n e n jis e K e I x . e K \ \ c n e e T -e Y Jirre A iZ e T Ji-K Ji-n e Y J'rre A iO N NOYeq; e e o A e p o - g 1 C or 9:18 “ W hat is my rew ard? It is that, as I preach, I m ight present the gospel w ithout its being paid for” ; f i e e M -n -e T ® -N Ji-6 d ) M N -T -e T O Y -o N -^N oeiK e p o - c n e ShChass 169:25-28 “ He is like the m an who w ill abide with an adulterous w om an” ; Jin a y e-N eT c u N e jte - g e N J iu j N - g e Ne M ark 1 3 :1 “ Look at these stones, look limv they a re !” : o Y e e o A gM -nN O Y T e r e John 7 :17 “ It is from G od” ; N - z e N e s o A a n gM -nK ocM O c N e Jo h n 17:14 “They are not o f the w orld” ; o Y n p o c -® o Y o e iu j n e M att 13:21 “ It is tem porary (is som ething for a w hile).” Conversions: NAUjAJce e r e - N A i Ne M att 7 :2 4 “ These words o f Mine (M y w ords, which are these)” ; N e g n e e H n . . . e T e - r e g 6 o M r e N - s y A -e N e g M N -T egM N T -N oyT e Rom I ;20 “ His secrets . . . w hich is His eternal pow er and His d e ity ” ; n - e T e - f J - n c u - T N a n n e Luke 16:12 “ T hat which is not y o u rs” ; n - e r e - n c u - r a n n e ShC hass 7 7 :1 8 -1 9 “ W h at does not belong to m e ” ; J i- n e g p A c T e A e ere-M N N C A -T nA pA cK eY H r e M att 27:62 “ Next day, that is, after the day o f Preparation” ; TBAujop . . . e re -N T O K n e n ^ z A A i?-nMAMMcuNAc ShChass 38;35-.'?9 “ The fox . . which means you, O servant o f M am m on” (explanato ry predicate 293); (o)Y ptuM e . . . e -n A p x cu N n e fJ-TCYNArcurH Luke 8:41 “ A m an . . . who (was) ihc ruler o f the .synagogue” ; o y M o o Y e - M - n c u - K a n n e ShO r L‘5.‘j:4 2 —44 “ A w ater , . . w hich is not y o u rs” ; r e c g i M e eT®-Jtcu m m o - c jc e -A N P -O Y n A p e e N o c e - o y e i a h r e ShAmel II 6 2:3—4 “ The w om an who says I am a virgin, even though she isn ’t one” ; N -e r^ -Jtc u m m o -c Jte -A N O N -g e N A n o c TOAOC e - N - 2 0 iN6 AN N6 Rcv 2:2 “ Those who call them selves apostles but are not (are not such)"', N e-oyKO YT n e g N -T e g O o T Luke 19:3 “ He was sm all o f stature (in his stature)”
n e WITH TWO OR THREE OTHER ELEMENTS (PATTERNS 5 TO 8) 268 Pattern recognition. Patterns 5 to 8 consist o f three or four elements: a free 252 entity tenn (or other compatible term) as extraposited topic or as subject, another one as predicate, and variable and/or invariable n e in a mediating role. Additionally, Patterns 5b and 8 contain a third free element. (In the following models n e stands for n e / re /N e and ‘Entity T erm ’ also includes entity state ments.)
209
N O M I N A L
Pattern 5 5a 5b 6 6a 7 7a 8
S E N T E N C E
Constituents Entity Term Entity Term Entity Term Entity Term jiNOK + n e Entity Term jiNOK + n e Entity Term
+ + + + + + + +
Analysis
Entity Term + n e Same + on n e NToq N ro q o n n e n e + Entity Term Entity Term n e + Entity T erm Entity Term n M + n e + Entity Term
Topic Predicate n e T opic Predicate n e Topic I Resumed Topic + Predicate n e Predicate n e Subject , Predicate n e Subject Subject n e Predicate Subject n e Predicate Topic I Resum ed Topic n e Predicate
E.g. (5) nKa.2 THptj n c u - l n e lo b 4 1:2 “ The whole earth is M ine” (5a) n e K 2 ( ^ n e K ? ^ o n n e ShChass 21 ;5 7 -5 8 “ Your form is unchangeable” (5b) Tc n e ^ . . . 1 NToq ntoc ) o n n e A ntiphonary and Herm eneiai, Antiphon for Feast o f the Council o f Nicea (Drescher, Apa Meiia 176:1; Dep. 58) “ A s for Jesus Christ . . . He is the sam e” (6) ncu-T rx p n e nK ^2 THptj Exod 19;5 “ For the whole earth is M ine” (6a) NToq n e n N o y T e ShChass 8 4 :1 1 -1 2 “ It is H e who is G od” (7) nKX2 n e n 2Y n o n o JL io N N -N jio v e p H T e Acts 7:49 “ The earth is the footstool of My feet” (7a) XNOK n e t x n x c t x c i c John 11:25 “ 1 am the resurrection" (8) nKOY’f n j h t - t h y t n T H p-T N I n x l n e n N o 6 Luke 9:48 “ The one w ho is least among all o f you is the one who is great”
Patterns 6 and 7 both have the form Entity Term
n e
Entity Term
and are formally distinguished, as patterns, only by opposite arrangements of predicate and subject. (There may also be a slight difference in the congruence of n e / T e / N e .) Predicate n e Subject = Pattern 6 Subject n e Predicate = Pattern 7 The same is true o f Patterns 6a and 7a. jiNOK n e Subject = Pattern 6a ANOK n e Predicate = Pattern 7a For these pairs, identification o f predicate and subject is not signalled at the level o f the individual sentence; rather, it is signalled within a larger unit o f text that includes the preceding sentences with their ongoing argument or nar rative and the way they present entities to the reader. It is in view o f this larg er constellation o f signals that an entity term in Pattern 6/6a or 7/ 7a can be identified as being (i) the subject (theme) 247 if it expresses that which is rel atively more familiar, presupposed, or given, or as being (ii) the predicate (rheme) if it expresses that which conveys new information about the subject under discussion. To the extent that ambiguity nevertheless remains, the ancient reader had to'm ake a personal decision o f how to interpret (perform) the sentence, reading it either as Pattern 6/6a or as Pattern 7/ 7a by choice.
210
P A T T E R N S
C O N T A I N I N G
f i e
General range o f predicates: Taken as a whole, patterns in this group attest all types o f predicate 286 except anaphoric o y iJ z o 'fu e . However, it is not cer tain that every one of these patterns is compatible with all predicates. General range o f subjects/topics: Entity terms (including ^infinitive); entity statements; prepositional phrases expressing relationship. 269 Congruence o /n e / re /N e in nuniberJ(gender). W hen subject and predicate are definite and they differ in number/(gender), the selection o f n e , r e , or Ne fluc tuates, in some clauses agreeing with one entity term and in other clauses with the other as though number/(gender) had no influence. Invariable n e also occurs (rarely), at least in Pattern 5. 270 The referential function o /n e / r e /N e differs in Patterns 5, 6, and 7 (Pattern 8 belongs with 7). In Pattern 5, invariable n e also occurs. i. In Pattern 5 (272), n e / r e / w e is a .subject pronoun, and it i.s anaphoric (ret rospective) i.e. refers back to a preceding item, the extraposited topic 253. E.g. Ne'fptUMe I 2eN'foYJv,A.r Ne “These men are Jews (These men, I they are Jew s).” Here, within the two-m em ber kernel statement, n e pronominally rep resents the extraposited topic: Extraposited Topic I Predicate + Subject Pronoun. ii. In Pattern 6 (275), n e / r e / N e is a subject pronoun, and it is cataphoric (prospective) i.e. looks ahead to a following apposition, which is the subject made lexically explicit. E.g. n t u - T n e n K A g “The earth is mine (Mine it-is, the earth).” Here, within the two-member kernel statement, n e heralds and anticipates the coming explicit subject: Predicate + Subject Pronoun I Explicit Subject in apposition. iii. In Pattern 7 (277) and 8, n e /r e /N e is neither a subject pronoun nor does it cross-refer. Rather, it only signals nexus between subject and predicate (has ‘copular’ function, functions as a ‘copula', signals union o f subject and pred icate): Subject + Copula + Predicate. The pattern cannot be reduced to a twomem ber kernel statement and a peripheral element. E.g. n e T in o T n e t j v , i jieHKH M -Bppe 1 Cor 11:25 “ This cup is the new covenant” (Subject + Copula + Predicate). For endophoric n e (referring to an elem ent within the pattern), cf. Patterns 3, 9, and 12. F or anaphoric n e as a predicate pronoun, cf. Pattern 10.
271 Interlaced composition (hyperbatoii) in patterns 5, 6, and 7. In Patterns 5 to 7, a modifier or other elaboration 257 can follow either entity term. M ost simply, such a m odifier comes immediately after its entity term. In other words, if we represent entity terms etc. by letters A and B (no m atter whether extraposited topic, subject, or predicate) and their modifiers by a and b, the least com pli cated positions o f the modifiers are
211
N O M I N A L
S E N T H N C E
Pattern 5 Pattern 6 Pattern 7
A o B ft n e A a neB h A axxeB h
However, a m odifier or other elaboration (a or b) or the last part o f one can also occur in postponed position, after n e — like part o f a strand (A . . . o, or B . . . ft) interwoven through the sentence pattern. This compositional device is called interlace (hyperbaton), and its simplest forms are Pattern 5
A B ne a and A B Tse b
Pattern 6
A ne a B and A ne B o
Pattern 7
A ne o B and A ne B o
(with a and h as optional items). E.g. (Pattern 5): [A B n e a] n ^ oyM e n e NT-A^ -jc o o -q John 4:18 “ Thi.s which you (sing, fem.) have said, is true” [A B n e b] ne'fptJUMe oy
•
[A n e a B] ? e N n iC T 0 C u e ? i- M e p iT N -eT*’- 6 o A .i M -n z tu B e T - N x N o y -q 1 Tim 6:2 “Those who cleave to good work are faithful and beloved” [A n e B a] N N o y? Ne the ropes that broke”
na .T n t - a v - c o ) a t i
SbChass 150:3—4 “These are
(Pattern 7): [A
ne
a B]
nK e())A A .A iO N A e n e
N -N -eT N -A ^m
M M O -O y
oyN TA.-N
Heb 8:1 “ Now the point in what we are saying is that we have such a high priest” m m ay N - o y A p x ie p e y c N -T eT n iN e
[A
212
n e B a] n o T K A e e t - N A - T A A - q a n o k n e TA.cA.p5 ? A - n c u N g H -n K o cM o c John 6:51 “ And the bread that I M yself shall give for the life o f the world is My flesh”
PA TTERN S
C O N T A IN IN G
H e
272 P a tte rn 5 : ex trap o sited topic w ith P a tte rn 4 Extraposhed Topic I Predicate ne/re/Ne NeTpiDMe I 2eNToY-2^A-'f Ne “ These men are Jew s” (Acts 16:20) (These men, I they are Jews) Structure: entity term (or other compatible item 268) + Pattern 4. I.e. extraposited topic 253 + kernel statement, forming two rhetorical units. The pronominal subject morph n e / re /N e represents and refers back to the extraposited topic, agreeing with it in number/(gender). Rarely, invariable n e occurs in Pattern 5 (2 C or 3:2, cited below). Negation: NeTptuMe (N-)2eN'foY-2^-»-'i -»-n Ne. Negative fixed to the predicate.
n-
(if present) is pre
Conversion. Two patterns, (i) Preterit: Extraposited Topic I ConverterPredicate n e ; (ii) circumstantial or preterit: Converter-Extraposited Topic I Predicate n e . Further examples; reNenicTOAH n tc u tn n e (collated) 2 Cor 3;2 “Our letter is
you"; Njil A6 TJipxH r e n-nnj^j^kc Mark 13:8 “These amount to {literally is) the beginning of the birth pangs” ; n im N o y - t) n e Shlll 72:8 “All good things are His” ; N e K u jjiJte m n - n e k t c u u j T H p - o y geN M e n e I N o y -ei a e 2 6 n 6 o a n e Shlll 141; 14—15 “All your words and your commandments are true, but mine are false” ; n e x c ic n e Acts 17:3 "The Christ is Jesus” ; mmeaoc a e TH p-oy i5-nccuMi. z^Z Ne 1 Cor 12; 12 “All the members of the body are many” ; n t c u t n NTeTze i.N Te Luke 22:26 “But you are not thus” ; e-®2 M0 0 c a e n cjiO y n JiM m m o -i h cJ^ZBoyp MMO-T i5-ncuT JiN n e e-®TJiX-q Mark 10:40 “But sitting on My right or on My left is not Mine to bestow” ; n e r n ie e N-oyeBOA Jin n e ^ - n T c u ^ M -n e j^ ShEnch 79:46-49 “This persuasion does not come from Christ’s ordination” ; t g in o C N-Acupex oyeeoA giTM-nNoyTe t e Jiycu oyeeoA ziTN-^pcune Jin t e Shlll 107; 17-18 “This great gift is from God and not from human beings” ; neN ujoy
213
NOMINAL
S U N T U N C I:
273 P a tte rn 5 a: p red icate of unchanging identity in P atte rn 5 Entity Term I Same Entity Term o n n e /re /N e nicATANJic I nicATANJic ON n e “ Satan is always the sam e” (ShAmel II 290:8) (Satan, I he is again Satan) Structure (a subpattem of 5): extraposited topic + repeated entity term + o n + ne/T e/N e. The repetition o f the extraposited topic as predicate and the pres ence of ON ‘again, still’ express unchangeableness, ‘always the sam e’. For an extraposited topic expanded by 5a, cf. Pattern 5b. Negation: ? Conversion: C om erter-Extraposited Topic I Predicate o n n e . Relative and circumstantial (only?) are attested. Further examples: n eK g ]^ n e K g l^ o n n e ShChass 2I:.‘57-.‘58 “ Your form is un changeable” ; NTOK NTOK ON n e JiYiU NEK -pO M ne NJi-CUJtN JiN Ps 101(102):27 “ But Thou art the same, and Thy years shall not fail" oO b t 6 avxoq e l Conversions: N T eige o n roppH N -N Ji-ToprH ere -N T O O y N T o o y o N Ne N-er®Kcu N - 2TH -Y e - 2 eNeijLCUAON n -jlj^ im o n io n (collated) ShGue I6 3 b :4 0 ^ 2 “ Likewise, let there be anger for those who belong to anger and who are always the same— they who trust in demonic graven images [sic]” ; (The sun relurns) Nq-OYtuN? eBOA NTOq NTOq (i.e. e -N T o q NToq) o n n e g M -n eq o Y O eiN Shlll 3 1:9-10 “ . . . and reappears, being ever the same in its light”
274 P a tte rn 5b: ex trap o sited topic w ith P a tte rn 5a NcoBT A e I NTOoy NTooy ON n e “ Now. walls are always the sam e” (ShChass 143:20-22) (Walls. I them, I they are again them) Structure (a subpattem o f 5a, but with invariable n e ): entity term + 3d per sonal independent + repeated personal independent o n n e (invariable). This is a complex pattern; Greater Topic + (Lesser Topic + Lesser Kernel Statement) Greater Kernel Statement The ‘greater’ extraposited topic 253 is an entity term with lexical content. The ‘lesser’ topic is a grammatical (non-lexical) morph (N Toq/N Toc/N Tooy) that represents and refers back to the greater topic, agreeing in nuniber/(gender) (NCOBT . . . hiTooy). The pronominal subject morph n e is (in the recorded examples) invariable;- it refers back to NToq/NToc/NTOoy but does not express number or gender, n e is invariable, unlike Pattern 5a.
214
P A T T E R N S
c o n t a i n i n g
n e
Negation and conversion: ? Further exam ples: Ic n e x c N C J i q M N - n o o y NToq N T o q o n n e A ntiphonary and H erm eneiai, Antiphon for Feast o f the Council o f Nicea (Drescher, Apa M ena 176; 1; Dep. 58) “ As for Jesus Christ, yesterday and today He is the sam e” ; NeK
*
N TOOY
N T O o y ON
ne
J t iN N - c y o p n
c y jig p jii e - r e N o y
c y ji-e N e z ShAmel 11 2 9 0 :6 -7 "‘As for Your words and Y our comm andments, they are unchanging from the beginning down, till now and unto eternity” ; N eqzB H ye JiYtu N e q T c u c y J t i N N - u j o p n n t o o y N T O o y o n n e S h lll 4 2 :2 2 -2 3 “ Since the beginning. His deeds and com m andm ents have been the sam e”
275 P a tte rn 6: explicit su b ject exp an d in g n e Predicate n e /re /N e Explicit Subject oyM e n e nN oyT e “ God is true" (John 3:33) (True is He, God) oyA ynH
A e N - T e q M A .A .y n e o y t y H p e N - A . e H T
Prov 10:1
“ A foolish son is a grief to his m other” (A grief to his mother is he, a foolish son) Structure: a two-member pattern (cf. Patterns 3 and 4) expanded by an entity term or other compatible subject 268 in apposition to n e and making it lexi cally explicit ( ‘explicit subject’). The explicit subject does not form a distinct rhetorical unit. Here n e is cataphoric 270 (prospective), i.e. refers ahead and heralds the coming explicit subject. For sentences in which the explicit subject is an entity statement (e.g. ® c y A o q n e ®Jcoo-y ShAmel 1 228:7 “To speak o f them amounts to disgrace itself” ), cf. chapter 22. Negation:
(F i- )o y M e
an
n e n N o y re
Conversion: Converter-Predicate n e Explicit Subject. Relative, circumstan tial, and preterit occur. Further examples: o y c c u M J i f i - o y c u T n e J i N o n t h p - n 1 C or 10:17 “ All o f us are one single body” ; o y j i n e n N o y r e Rom 3 :30 “ God is one” ; T B o r e M - n j t o e i c n e u j i c N i . y Prov 20(LXX 23): 1 9 “ A double weight is the Lord’s abom ination” ; o y K p o q J i e r e T T i . n p o N - N i . c e B H c Prov 12:6 “ The words o f the ungodly are crafty” ; o y T j i i t o j i e N e N e g i o o y e N - M n j ^ p j ^ N O M O c Prov 1 3 : 1 .") “ The ways o f the lawless am ount to destruction” ; t j i - n i m r e T e e i g i K c u N N M - N e T c g j i T M ark 12:16 “ W hose is this like ness and these inscriptions?” ; N - o y c j i p S N - o y c u r J iN r e c j i p S n i m 1 Cor l.“5:39 “ All flesh is not a single (kind ot^ flesh” ; g e N e e i H N J i e o n n e p w M J i O n i m n - J i t - ® n j i ShRossi 11 3 7.‘5fc;31-33 “ M oreover, all stingy rich persons are poor” ; o y i . < y M - M i N e n e n i .1 Matt 8:27 “ W hat sort o f M an is th is? ” ; g e N o y N e N e N u j i S hlll 107:24 “ W hat are our capacities?” ; Jiycu KewKJiZ NgHT n e n j i i N g o y o N N J i g p N - N - e N T - J i y - N j i y e p c u - T N e N e ? SliAinel 1 4 6 2 :5 -6 “ And this is just one more great cuu.se o f piiiii tor those who have at any m oment seen you” ; n e N p o o y c y J iN n e “gcus N - r e i g e S h lll 83:24—.5 “ Such things are no concern o f ours” ; n i m r e T i . T ShChass 121:9-10 “ W ^o is th is? ” ; icugjiN N H c n e n e q p j i N Luke 1:63 “ His nam e is John” ; f i e e N - o y c y n n p e
215
N O M I N A L
S E N T E N C E
ne neKpjiN Ps 8 :9 (8; 10 Budge) “ How wonderful (Like a wonder) is Thy nam e"; eboa 2iTN-OYpcuMe ON ne nrcuoyN N-N-eT*'-MOOYT 1 Cor 15:21 “ The resurrection of the dead is also by a m an” ; Nee JiN gn'M-niOYJ' eNT-Jiq-p-^NOBe ne neTMJieio Rom 5:16 “ The justification is not as by the one who sinned” ; "cyAOq ne ®jcoo-y I ®ujine ne ''ccutm ep o -o y ShAmel I 228:7 “ To speak o f them amounts to disgrace itself, to hear o f them amounts to shame itself” ; oy Jie ne J^q-BCUK egpjif Eph 4:9 “ W hat does ‘He ascended’ m ean?’’ Conversions: Nj^ceBHc NJ^Me eTe-geNBore M-nJtoeic Ne Neygiooye ShIV 10:14-15 “ The really impious ones, whose ways are abominations unto the L ord” ; nM ere-N -N O y-q JiN Ne Necooy John 10:12 “ He whose ow n the sheep are not” ; ®pcuMe e-2eN npi3ic u;hh Ne NeqxBHye ShlV 25:4 “ People whose works are little activities” ; ecytune e-ypMN-NOyre ne oyji John 9:31 “ If any one is a worshipper o f G od” ; NJ^Me Ne-n
276 P a tte rn 6a: th e p ersonal independent in pred icate focus w ithin P attern 6 A.NOK n e Explicit Subject (Predicate n e Explicit Subject) ANOK n e n oyoTN M - n K o c M o c
“ It is / who am the light of the world” (John 8:12) (1 it is, the light of the world) Structure (a subpattem of 6): In this pattern, the predicate is a personal inde pendent (A.NOK etc.). This forms the logical inversion of Patterns 1 and 4, by focussing upon the personal element of the nexus. E.g. (Pattern 1) A.N?-noYoiN M -nKocM Oc John 9:5 “ 1 am the light of the world” ■ (Pattern 6a) a n o k n e n o y o fN M - n K o c M o c John 8:12 “ It is 1 who am the light of the w orld” (Pattern 4) nN oyT e n e ShChass 66:17-18 “ He (the aforementioned Christ) is G od” (Pattern 6a) NToq n e nN oyT e ShChass 84:11-12 “ It is He who is G od” In the examples on record, only the sing, masc n e occurs. This pattern might be analyzed as Pattern 9 (281) + explicit subject. Negation and conversion: ? 277 P a tte rn 7: the te rn a ry nom inal sentence (copular n e) Subject
u elT elu e
Predicate
nefA .n9TneT A iA .eH K H M -B ppe
“ This cup is the new covenant” (1 Cor 11:25)
216
P A T T E R N S
C O N T A I N I N G
n e
Structure: entity term (or other com patible subject 268) + copula 270 + en ti ty term (or other com patible predicate 268). N ot analyzable into kernel state m ent and peripheral elem ent. C opular n e signals nexus and does not crossrefer 270.
Negation: (M-)neTA.noT a n n e TAiAeHKH M -B pp e. T h e negator a n pre cedes the copula and predicate and negates the nexus as such. (E.g. M - n ty o p n a n n e nenNeyM ATiKON x w x ne'J'YxiKON 1 C or 15:46 “ T h e first [m an] is not the spiritual one but the anim ate o n e” ; mh M -nA i a n n e n ty H p e M -n g A M -ty e M att 13:55 “ Pray tell, is this M an n o t the son o f the c a rp e n te r? ” )
Conversion: Converter-Subject n e Predicate. R elative, circum stantial, and preterit occur. Further exam ples: n V f n e nJiCCUMJi 1 Cor 11:24 “ This is My body” ; t c c u u j e n e n K O c M O c Matt 13:38 “ The phrase ‘the fie ld ' is (stands for) the w orld"; n e 6 p o 6 j l e E T - N J i N O Y - q n e NcyHpE n - t m n t - e p o Matt 13:38 “ The 'good seed' m eans the children o f the kingdom ” ; r n E T p j i j l e n e n Ji I e - u j JiY - c cu t m Luke 8:13 “ A nd ‘the rock' m eans those who listen” ; n Jii n e tbcu n - j c o e i t c n t e Rev 11:4 “ These are the two olive trees” ; r e k a o m N -N g A A O r e ^ u j H p E (i.e. z e n u j h p e ) N-®
N O M I N A L
S E N T E N C E
2J i-T e 2 H M -ncJiBBJiToN Mark 15:42 “ Friday (the day o f Preparation), which is before the sabbaih” ; n - e r e - n e q B O H e o c n e n N o y T e n-VJikcub Ps I45(I46):5 “ He whose helper is the God o f Jacob” ; n t o k jiYiu n - 6 t ®-p h t egpjiT n m m Ji- k e r e - N E K K J ip n o c M -n o N H p o N Ne N o y -o Y N o y - o y N e N o y - K ShP 130^I09v; 12-18 “ You and those w ho flourish along with you, to whom your wicked fruits belong, ju st as theirs belong to y o u ” ; ( o ) y p c u M e . . . e - n e q p j i N n e M j i e e j i i o c Matt 9 :9 “ A m an . . . whose name (was) M atthew ” ; N e - T e y r e x N H r j i p n e ® p e q - T J i M i e - ® ' c K y N H Acts 18:3 “F o r their occupation was tentm aker”
278 Pattern 7a: personal independent as subject in Pattern 7
ANOK ne/Te/NG Predicate o f Identification (Subject n e Predicate) ANOK n e PABpiHA. “ I am Gabriel” (Luke 1:19) Structure (a subpattem o f 7): personal independent ( a n o k etc.) + n e /re /N e + predicate o f identification (proper name, identifying epithet, personal inde pendent), expressing an important announcement o f identity. I.e. subject + copula + predicate. (With 1st and 2d personal independents as subject, this pattern supplies predications excluded in Patterns 1 and 2 [260(lv)].) Negation and conversion: ? Further exam ples: P roper name as pi edicate j i N o K r e g p o y e Ruth 3:16 “ 1 am R uth” ; i J t o k n e n e T p o c Matt 16:18 “ You are P eter” ; article phrase as predicate j ^ n o k n e n N o y re n N o y r e n - i c a j i K n N o y r e i i - i j i K c u B Matt 22:32 “ 1 am the God o f Abraham , the God o f Isaac, the God o f Jacob” ; n t o k n e n A q ; H p e n j i M e p i r M ark 1:11 “ You are My Son, My beloved” ; N T o q n e n e x c Matt 16:20 “ He (was) the C hrist” ; Jk N O K T e (textual var. n e ) r e c M H M - n - e T ® - c u u j e a o A g i - n J C A T e John 1:23 “ I am the voice o f one crying in the w ilderness” ; a n o k n e t a n j i c t j i c i c J i y c u n c u N Z John 11:25 “ I am the resurrection and the life” ; a n o k n e t b c u N - e A o o x e M - M e John 15:1 “ 1 am the true vine” ; personal independent as predicate a n o n n e N T o q S h lll 22:18 “ W e and he are as one (W e are him )”
279 Pattern 8: extraposited topic with Pattern 7 Extraposited Topic I nA.'f n e /r e /N e Predicate (Topic I Subject n e /re /N e Predicate) nK oyi N2HT-THYTN THp-TN I n i l n e nN o6 “The one who is least among all of you is the greatest one” (Luke 9:48) (The least among you all, I this is the great one) Structure: entity term + nA.i/TA.i/NA.f (or NToq/NTOc/NTooY) + copula + Predicate; i.e. extraposited topic 253 + kernel statement. Forms two rhetorical units. W ithin the kernel statement (subject n e predicate), the subject ( n i l or
218
P A T T E R N S
C O N T A I N I N G
n e
N Toq) is a pronoun that represents and refers back to the extraposited topic, agreeing with it in number/(gender).
Negation and conversion: ? Further exam ples; n -e T ® -N J i-e ip e ri.p M noY iusy M -nN O Y Te I nJiT n e nJiCON i.Ycu TjiCcuNe i.Ycu Ti.Mi.i.Y M ark 3:35 “ For whoever does the will o f C od, this one is My brother and My sister and M y m other” ; n-eT® -N H Y -^e N T o q e b o a . g iT M -n p o I N T o q n e nujcuc N - N e c o o Y John 10:2 “ But he w ho goes through the door, he is the shepherd o f the sheep” ; o y o n rAp n i m j ^n eNT-JiY-ei e B O A Z M - n i c p X H A l NjiT N e nicpjiHA Rom 9 :6 “ For not all who are descended from Israel are Israel”
SP EC IA L
PATTERNS
OF
A. N O K
n e
(PA TTERN S
9
TO
11)
Pattern recognition. Patterns 9 to 11 consist of two elements: a personal inde280 pendent ( a.n o k etc.) followed by n e (/T e /N e ). (Because o f small documenta tion, the variableness of n e is open to doubt in Pattern 9; n e is invariable in 10, but variable in 11.) Pattern 9 10 II
Constituents
Analysis
A.NOK n e “ It is 1” Predicate + Subject A N O K n e “ I am he, 1 am such” Subject + Predicate A N o K n e “ 1 am someone important” ( ? ) + ( ? )
Patterns 9 and 10 are formally distinguished, as patterns, only by opposite arrangements of predicate and subject. Identification o f predicate and subject is not signalled at the level of the individual sentence; rather, within a larger unit o f text to which the pattern belongs, c f 268. Apart from these three patterns, J i N o k n e (presum ably with variable n e ) also occurs in Patterns 3, 4, and 12. E.g. n - a n o k J i n M M J iT e n e J iN o k N M - n ic u r e n r :iq-T JiO Y o-e~i John 8:16 “ It is not a m atter o f Me alone, but o f M e and the Father w ho M - n n j i M M c u N J i C ShChass 38:35-39 sent M e” ; T s jiu jo p . . . e r e - N T O K n e “ The fox . . . which m eans you, O servant o f M ainm on” (explanatory predicate 293).
Pattern 9:
a n o k
ne
“It is I ” (endophoric
ne)
281 A.NOK (etc.) n e (Predicate + Subject) “ It is 1/It’s m e,” French c ’est moi Structure: n e a.
219
N O M I N A L
S I 'N T l iN C i ;
“ No, it’s me! ”). Recorded examples of this pattern occur as discourse spoken by a single male speaker, and thus do not indicate whether n e is invariable or variable; accordingly, this may be a subpattern o f Pattern 3 (with variable n e / r e / N e ) . (English translations typically employ impersonal “ It is . . . ” .) Closely related is Pattern 12. Negation and conversion:! Exam ples: JiY -njiY e - T c e q - M o o u ; e g iJtN -e JiA Jic cA . . . JiYtu A y - p - ^ g o r e . . . I n e J tA - q NA-Y Jte-A N O K n e I M n p - p - ^ g o r e John 6 :1 9 -2 0 “ They saw Jesus walk ing on the sea . . . And they were afraid. He said to them, ll is /; do not be afraid” ; N T epoy-N A Y J ie e p o - q . . . A v - s y T o p rp e y - J t c u mmo-c Jte-oY4>J'NTACMJi n e Aycu e b o a 2 N - e o r e e e o A I NTeYNOY J^e Acj-cyAJte nmma-y
etj-Jttu MMO-c jt e —TU3K N2 HT 1 ANOK n e 1 Mnp—p-® 20 Te 1 Atj-oYto
282 P attern 10:
a n o k
2 iJiN -M M ooY M att 14:26-28 “ But when they saw H im . . . they It is a ghost! And they cried out for fear. But immediately He Take heart, it is /; have no fear. And Peter aasw ercd Him, Lord, m e comc to Y ou on the w ater”
n e “ I am he, I am such” (anaphoric predicate ne)
A.NOK (etc.) n e (invariable) (Subject + Predicate) “ I am he, I am such. So I am ,” French je le siiis Structure: n e as invariable, yet anaphoric, predicate pronoun, n e refers back to a previously mentioned name or epithet o f definite determination status. This pattern occurs both in (i) dialogue, to confirm one’s identity in response to a question (“ Are you Azael? ”— Answer, “ 1 am he") and in (ii) exposition, to identify the subject with a previously mentioned type of entity (“ W e should be called the children of God. And so we are” ). The pattern that refers back to an indef. epithet is A N f-o Y V o Y e i/2 0 lN e 289 in Patterns 1 and 2 and oy^^ n e etc. 267 in Pattern 4. E.g. 2e N - 2 eB p A io c n 6 I JiN f-o y J i -® 2 Cor 11 ;22 “ Are they Hebrew s? So am 1 (1 am one, also)."
Negation: n - a n o k an n e Conversion: Converter- a.NOK n e. Relative and circumstantial (only?) are attested. (Relative n -e re -N T o c i n e “ W hoever or W hatever he may be.” ) Examples; (i) dialogue, X Y -^N O Y -q A e Jte-N T O K n e 2 HAIJiC a y iu n e J tA - q Jte -Ji-A N O K AN n e John 1:21 “ They asked Him , Are You Elijah? He said, I am not he" ; n e jc A - c N A -q N 6 i-T e c 2 iM e Jc e -e N e -N T O K n e icuabI n e J tA - q J te -A n o K n e 2 Sam 20:17 “ The woman said to him. Art thou Joab? and he said, / am lie " ; (ii) exposition. n e jt A - y J ie TH p-O Y x e - n t o k n e ncyH pe M -nN O Y Te I NToq j l e n e jc A -q n a - y Jce-NTU)TN eT6T N -ji.tD MMoc Jte-A N O K n e Luke 22:70 “ And they all said. Are You the Son of G od. then? And He said to them. You yourselves say
220
P A T T E R N S
C O N T A I N I N G
n e
that / am H e": n t c u t n reT N -M O Y T e e p o - e T J t e - n c J ig Aytu n j t o e i c AYiu KJiAcuc T eT N -Jtcu M M o-c jiNOK PAp n e John 13:13 “ You call Me teacher and Lord; and you are right, for so I a m " ; jiq-O Y cuu;B . . . j t e - n - e N T - J i q - c c u n N - r e q b i J t NM MJi-i 2N-TJ(.H n jii neT®-NJi-nji.p3iAiA0Y MM O-i . . . i q - o Y tu s y S A e n 6 i lOYJtJiC . . . Jte-M H T i ANOK n e gpJ'BBei M att 2 6 :23-25 “ He answered. He who has dipped his hand in the dish with Me, will betray M e . . . . Judas answered . . . , A m ! the one. M aster? (Am 1 he. M aster?)” ; A -n N O Y re t o y n o c M -niH X M -nccuT H p Tc . . . VcugANHc J ie . . . N e q -J tc u m m o - c n e . . . Jte -A g p c u -T N r e r N - M e e Y e e p o - T Jte-A N O K n e n - a n o k a n n e I a a a a e icgH H T e q -N H Y m n n cc o -T Acts 13:23-2.‘5 “ G od raised up to Israel a Savior, Jesus . . . And John . . . said . . . , W hy do you suppose that I am H e? la m n o t He. But look. He is coming after m e” ; jte -e Y e -M O Y T e e p o - N J c e -N o ;H p e M -nN oY T e AY“ J n e I J o h n 3 :l “ Thai we should be called the chil dren o f God; and so we a r e " ; k a i t o i eY -:xcii m m o - c J t e - r A n e N - r e c g iM e n e n e c g A l Aytu NToq n a m e n e (sic) ShOr 157;2.‘i-3 0 “ For it is said that the head o f a woman is her husband (1 Cor 11:3); and so he is." Conversions: geN cyH pe < y H M n -ere-N T o q n e n j h t - o y e c y c u n e oYgHKe n e h o y i ^ m a o Ruth 3:10 (ed. Shier) “ Young men, whatever any o f them might he, whether poor or rich” ; t a T r e e e e -u jA K -T A U je -® o e iu j n - j a j N - c o f i JciNM -nAicuN ^ - N - e r e - N O Y - K Ne J te -o A H r e e - n t o c a n n e ShChass 2 2 :5 8 -2 3 :7 “ Likewise, many times from o f old, you have been wont to announce am ong your people that it is the end (Pattem 3), where as it was not (Pattem 10)”
283 Pattern 11:
a n o k
n e
“ I am som eone im portant” (etc.) n e / T 6 / { N e ? ) “ I am someone important”
AN O K
Structure: Uncertain. This pattem announces existence and, by extension, self-importance; it usually occurs in reported discourse imbedded within nar rative, where the narrator em ploys a derogatory tone. Negation:
an o k a n
ne
C onversion:! Exam ples: A q - r t u o Y N N ( 5 i - e e Y T A c e q - J t c u i ^ M O - c e p o - q j t e - A N O K n e A cts 5 :36 “ Theudas arose, giving him self out to be som ebody im portant (saying I am som e one im portant)” ; e e o A j i e g N -N -e r^ -J tc u J i m o - c Jte -A N o N n e Gal 2 :6 “ From those w ho were reputed to be som ething (who said We are ones who are im portant)” ; jte -e Y e -T A A -q ezp A i e - r C i* n -ta T e ro Y -M e e Y e e p o - c * e -N T O c n e I AY cu e s y c u n e n t o c a n n e a a a a t a T n t o c T e N T - A c - e i e - ® j c i T O T e e - ® T p e n - n o 6 h n e T - c o T n (collated) ShP 130^98r:28-98v:9 “ So that they m ight put it (food) into the hand o f the wom an whom they consider to be som eone important. But even if she is not really som eone important, nevertheless, for her part, it is she who has come to be served and, furtherm ore, to have you dish out the larg er or choicer portio n ” ; c - n e e Y e r A p e p o - c J t e - A N o K r e N 6 i - T - e T e MNTC-®npA2ic e-YAAAY T e Athanasius of Alexandria, Epistle on Virginity 3 (First Pseudo-Clem entine Epistle O n Virginity 3) [Lefort 255 :2 8 -2 9 ] “ For, the one w ho has no good deeds thinks, I am som eone important, while in fact she is o f no account” T N - K t u eg p A T M - n - e T ® - o
221
N O M IN A L E X T EN SIO N
OF
C LEFT
SEN TEN C E
SENTENCE
PATTERN
1
284 P a tte rn 12: extension o f cleft sentence P a tte rn I (464, 467) Focal Point + n e/T e/N e (or invariable n e ) 7 c A.N n e - N e q - B A H T i Z e I
N etiM 3L«H TH C
nc
“ It was not Jesus who baptized; rather, it was His disciples who were doing so (i.e. N e-N eY -B A .nTiie) (John 4:2) Related closely to Patterns 3 and 9, which contain endophoric 266 n e focussing attention on the predicate. Structure: entity term + n e . (Both variable and invariable n e occur.) Follows and depends upon a preceding cleft sentence 464, whose topic element (a rel ative clause) this pattern presupposes. Thus Focal Point n e - Relative Clause (cleft sentence) followed by Focal Point n e (nominal sentence Pattern 12) Pattern 12 can also extend other kinds of sentence; e.g. M N -oyoN nim N X -c y -q i I N x - y Ne (i.e. N e-eT ® -N Ji-uj-< ii) Matt 19; 11 “ Not all can bear this saying; rather, it is those to whom it has been given who can do so. ”
Negation and conversion: like cleft sentence Pattern 1 Range o f fo ca l points and congruence o f n e : like cleft sentence Pattern 1 Further exami51es; N -oyeN T O A H jiN f i- B p p e T e ’t ' - c g j i i m m o - c n h - t n 1 TeKTOAH N -jic T6 I John 2:7 “ It is not a new com m andm ent that 1 am writing to you; rather, it is the old com m andm ent (that I am w ritin g )” : M - n e y 6 B o i JiN n e N T - j L t) - T o y j to - o y I x a a j i TCKoyNJiM r e M N-neK6BoV Ps 43(44):3 “ It is not their ow n arm that delivered them ; rather, it is Y our right hand and Y our arm (that did so)” ; N-jiN O K XN n e T t ) - N J i - u j o n - T e p o - q I n e N T - j i q - T N N o o y - T ne Mark 9 :37 “ It is not Me that he will receive; rather, it is the One w ho sent M e (that he will receive)” ; i7M ONJ.xoc N er^-H n e-®p-®NHCTeiJi I NTOoy Njiwe Ne SliChass 1 02:46-50 “ It is the monks who should fast; it is really they (who should)” ; o y r e ri.p N - o y N T H 6 i.N o y r e N - o y n i - Z p e i.N TeNT-i.c-TAA(5o-oy I \ \ \ i k neKUjJiJCe n e n j c o e i c e r ^ - T o y j t o N - o y o N nim W is 16:12 “ For it was neither herb nor drug that cured them: but it was Your w ord, which heals all, (that did,) O L ord” (w ith et®T o y jt o m odifying n e K U j J i J t e ) . A fle r interrogative cleft sentences: N im n E N T - jit ) - T jiM io - o y
N - ® J ir r e A o c
M - n N e y M j i J iy c u
N e q A iT o y p r o c
I M H N Toq j iN n e A y c u n e q i c u T ShO rig 309 (Orlandi 22:1 3 -1 4 ) “ W ho made them spiritual angels and m ade his servants flam es o f fire? Pray tell, was it not He and His Father (who did so )? ” ; n im n e - N T - J i q - p - ® N o B e I nJiI n e I JC N -N e tje lo T e Ne John 9 :2 “ W ho is it that sinned? Is it this m an (who did)? Or is it his parents (who did )?” ; N IM n e N T - j i t j - j i X - c N r e ig e I . . m h n t u jt n JiN n e ShO rig 357 (Orlandi 3 2:12-13) “ W ho is it that m ade it be this w ay? . . . Pray tell, is it not you (that d id )? ” ; N - c jiT e
222
P A T T E R N S
C O N T A I N I N G
n e
eN e-M M O N j.xoc NjiMe . . . NET®-Hfr e-®p-®NHCTiA I j^ -N T O K n e ShChass 103:31-38 “ Is it really the monks . . . who ought to fast? Or it is you (who ought to)?” ; NiM n e -N T -J iq -J tc u ? e p o -T . . . I n - J iNon xn n e Luke 8:45 (in dialogue) “Who was it that touched me?— . . . Not us (It is not we who did so )”
IN V A R IA B L E n e
IN O T H E R T Y P E S O F S E N T E N C E
285 Invariable n e occurs with som e other types o f sentence, especially preterit clauses; but not as an essential pattern constituent. Here, the category or struc ture optionally signalled by n e , the motivation for its use, and the conditions o f its occurrence are at present unknown. These occurrences of n e may be somehow related to nominal sentence structure. Like the other enclitics, n e tends to com e early in the sentence. E.g. (a) W ith the preterit conversion, cf. 438 (very frequent); N e y -u j^ H /. n e xytu n c y - c m o y e-nN O Y T e Acts 16;25 “ They were praying and bles.sing G od” ; N e p e - n e q N o 6 A e N - q j H p e n e 2 N -c tu c y e Luke 15:25 “ Now his elder son was in the field” ; N e - A .Y - * ^ ' * ^ e i n e 2N -N eY 2ooY Luke 1:7 “ They were advanced in years (had become great in their days)” ; N e - N e c c u - q n e 2m (i.e. e 2 pM -) nN o v T e Acts 7 :2 0 “ He was beautiful before G od.’’ (d} With the m ain statement o f a conditional sentence o r equivalent (infrequent): (i) future (na.-), e N c y A N - O Y t o ? a n o n e r o o T - N e - ® c t u T M o n e - T e c M H Fi-njcoeic n e N N o y T e t n - n j i - m o y o y n e Deut 5:25 “ If we hear the voice o f the Lord o u r God anym ore, then we shall d ie ” ; (ii) optative, e a j J c e - i - T A O Y e p H T e piKe gboa. 2 N - T e q 2 iH eq;JC6 -I-nA.2 H T o y j ^ - q NCA.-nA.BA-A eqjj(.e-A'f-JccL)2 A e e-®jv.ti3 p o N 2 n - n a 6 ijc eTe-Jto n t c d o y n
n e N Te-N K ooY e o y o m - o y Job 3 1 :7 -8 “ If indeed my foot has turned aside out o f its way, or if my heart has followed my eye, and if too I have touched gifts with my hands, then let me sow and let others eat” ; (Hi) past e - M M O N etyjcne A Y ~on—o y n e 2 ^^^—®2 J^ipeTiKoc ShAmel II 341:7—8 (= Z 591:6 -7 ) “ Otherwise, t h ^ they were counted as heretics.” (c) W ith
the fo ca lizin g conversion (rare): n t - a - T c A e J c o o - c n e I nh A e A Y - M e y e J c e - e q - J c e - n e N K O T K hi-ntDBUj John 11:13 “ Now Jesus had spoken o f His death, but they thought that He meant taking rest in sleep.” 6TBe-neqMOY
(d) W ith the imperative (rare): -t--NA-j(.NOY-TN e - y t y x x e I Aj(.t-q e p o - e i n e ayco anok. 2cd-® -t--N A -Jco o -c n h - t n jc e - . . . Mark 11:29 “ I will ask you a question; answer me, and I will tell you . . . ” (e) W ith <^ufe ‘it is right, fitting, necessary’ 488 (rare): a n o k ta p e u f u f e n e 6 -®TpeY-CYN2 icTA MMo-V 2 iTe-THYTN 2 Cor 1 2 :1 1 “ For I ought to have been commended by you.”
223
NOMINAL
SENTBNCn
T Y P E S O F N O M IN A L S E N T E N C E P R E D IC A T E FO R M A L C L A S S IF IC A T IO N OF P R E D IC A T E S
286 Various formal types of nominal sentence predicate 252 can be distinguished, of which the most usual are the def. and indef. article phrase. (Many o f the nominal sentence patterns are com patible with only some o f these types.) infinitive: Action as an entity 288 e-® T p e-; Explanatory or evaluative comment 293; action as an entity 288 rJe e N -: Similarity (Is like . . . ) 301 n - + noun: Denotation and description (i.e. identifying and describing) 292; explanatory or evaluative com m ent 293 n ^ - , ncu=; Possessedness (Belongs to . . . ) 296 o y - + noun: Denotation and description (i.e. identifying and describing) 292; explanatory or evaluative comment 293 o y x i^ N -2e a n d o y T e i^ e (or M-MiNe, oyTeifMiNe, n - 6 o t ) : Similarity, admiration (O f what sort is . . . ? How is . . . ? Is like this. Is such, O how . . . ! > 301 oyeBOA 2 N - or oyeBOA tc u n : Source (Comes from . . . ) 302 o y - + other prepositional phrases: Relationship of time, place ‘from ’ or ‘towards’, or manner 298 oyAjiAy: Insignificance, near non-existence (Is nothing. Is something triv ial) 294 o y o y ; Request for class name (W hat is . . . ?) 299 oyA, o y e i, ^ofN e: Anaphoric reference (Is one o f them. Is such) 289 But oyA, o y e i is also a cardinal number, meaning ‘is/are one, a unity, one single entity, as one’ (John 10:30) jc.e- + clause: Explanatory or evaluative comment (The fact or statement or idea or possibility th a t. . . ) 293 JceKA(A)c + clausc: Explanatory or evaluative comment (For . . . to . . . , T h a t. . . m ig h t. . . ) 293 ® + common noun: Class name, as such 290; explanatory or evaluative comment 293 ®+ infinitive: Explanatory or evaluative comment 293; action as an entity 288; class name, as such 290 Demonstrative pronouns nVf this, neTMMAy that, and h h this; Demon stration (pointing something out, cross-reference) 291; naii, also explana tory or evaluative comment (Means this. Is tantamount to this) 293 Personal independent (a n o k ): Explanatory or evaluative comment 293; personal identification 295; self-importance 300; (repeated + o n ) unchanging identity 303
224
N O M IN A L S E N T E N C E P R E D IC A T E S
Possessed noun (e.g. 2 h t» 138); Denotation 292 Prepositional phrase (without expressed article): Relationship o f time, place from ’ or tow ards’, or manner 298 Proper noun: Denotation 292 Repeated entity term + o n : Unchanging identity (Is always the same) 303 Reported discourse without x e - : Explanatory or evaluative comment 293 Specifiers ( o jo m n t , ao ; etc.) and specifier phrases 64: Explanatory or evaluative comment 293; quantity and other categories of ‘specification’ 297. C f also 294, 2 9 9 ,3 0 1 .
S E M A N T IC C L A S S IF IC A T IO N OF P R E D IC A T E S
287 Nominal sentence predicates (in their sentence patterns) express the following semantic distinctions, of which the most frequent are denotation and descrip tion. These distinctions are only approximate and overlap to some extent. Action as an entity, eating and drinking; for us to fear Him 288 Admiration, O/i, how . . . ! 301 Anaphoric reference, fii) one of them: (is) he: (is) such 289 Class name, (is) tentmaker 290 Demonstration, this 291 Denotation and description, a person; great 292 Description, great 292 Explanatory or evaluative comment, (means) the place of the skull 293 General relationship. See Possessedness Inherent (essential) identify and quality, is (by nature) rich 292 Insignificance, nothing; insignificant 294 Personal identification. Gabriel, you 295 Possessedness, the Lord’s; mine 296 Quantity and other categories o f the specifiers, two 297 Relationship of time, place ‘from’ or ‘towards’, and manner, contrary to Your will 298 Request for class name, what. . ? 299 Self-importance, something important 300 Similarity and admiAtion, like this; of what sort?; Oh, how . . . ! 301 Source, of this world 302 Unchanging identity, always the same 303
288 Action, spoken of as an entity 150, is predicated by ^infinitive (as masc. com mon noun), e-®infinitive, and e-® T p e-. Example.s: TM NT-epo rAp a n M-nNOYTe n e 2 i-* c tu Rom 14; 17 “For the kingdom of God is not a matter of eating and drinking"; njctuK e b o a M-nNOMOc n e e-H T H p -q Shlll 66:19-20 "The fulfillment o f the law is not swear ing at all” ; Te
225
NOMINAL
SENTENCE
N K iTH ropoc e i MneqMTO e b o a Acts 25:16 “ It is not the custom o f the Romans to hand over any accused person to be killed before the accusers have come into that per
son’s presence” ; n i l JlE n e e-^T peN -C A C A -N eN epH y Rom 1:12 “ And this means fo r us to encourage one another”
289 Anaphoric reference (cross-reference back to a previously mentioned entity) i. to a d e f entity term (is he, is such), is predicated by the def. detemiinator pronoun n e (in Pattern 10); ii. to an in d ef entity term (is one o f them, is such) is predicated by the indef. determinator pronoun oYA/oYei/2oTNe. Examples:
(i) n e j c i - y
a e T H p - o y J t e - r J r O K n e n < ^ H p e M - n N o y T e I rJro q A e e T E T N - J c t u m m o c J c e - i N O K n e Luke 2 2 : 7 0 “ And they all said. Are You the Son of God, then? And He said to them. You yourselves say Ihal 1 am H e ” ; J c e - e y e - M o y T e e p o - N jce-Nq;Hpe M - n N o y r e A y w a n o n n e 1 John 3 : 1 “That we should be called the children of God; and so we are” : (ii) 2 e N 2 e B p i i o c w e 1 i N ? - o y i zcu-® 2 Cor 1 1 : 2 2 “Are they Hebrews? So am 1 (I am one, also)” ; N - e T * - j c t u m m o - c J c e - i N O N - g e N i n o c T O A O C e - N - j o m e a n N e Rev 2 :2 “Those who call themselves aposlles but are not (are not such)” ; oyfi-® c2 i me n e jc i-q
N i-y
jce-N T tu T N
e - a ;ip e - n e c 2 ii z y n o n x e y e e p o -c
jce -o y N o e iK
x e . . . iy tu
e -o y e i
N iM e
ShOr 1 5 9 : 4 2 - 5 0 “There is a kind o f woman whose husband suspects that she is adul terous , . . and indeed she is (is such)” Te
290 Class name, as such, is predicated by a zero article phrase: Ne-TeyTexM H rjip ne®peq-TAMie-®CKyNH Acts 18:3 “ For their occupation was tentmaker.” Cf. also 136. Further examples: n e y N o y x e rjip n e ®ptuMe ShlV 183:6 “For their god is the human being as su c h " ; ®a;Aoq n e ®Jco-oy I "iijin e n e ®co)Tm e p o - o y ShAmel 1 228:7 “To speak of them amounts lo disgrace itself, lo hear o f ihem amounts lo shame its e lf”
291 Demonstration (pointing something out) is predicated by the three demonstra tive pronoun sets nVi this, neTMMaiY that, and h h this; e.g. TMe2-c N T e a g eT®-eiNe m m o -c t g t a i Matt 22:39 “ And the second, which is like it, is th is " 292 Denotation and description are the most frequent types of nominal sentence predicate. They have the form o f entity terms, namely in d ef or d e f article phrase (table 18), possessed noun, o r proper noun. (Cf. also action 288, class name 290, explanatory or evaluative comment 293, quantity 297, request for class name 299, self-importance 300, and unchanging identity 303.) Generally speaking, the nominal sentence predicate expresses ‘inherent’ (unchangeable, permanent, unconditional, essential) or unmarked identity or quality, in con trast to N - of ‘incidental’ predication 179, which marks momentary, circum stantial, accidental, non-essential identity or quality. E.g. A<)-p-®2 HKe €TBe-THYTN e-ypM M Ao ire 2 Cor 8:9 “ Though He was (inherently) rich,
226
NOMINAL
SENTENCE
PREDICATES
for your sake He became poor” ; a a - k n-®pmma6 ShChass 85:34 “ Make yourself (non-essentially) rich.” (a) Denotation. A denotative predicate is one that names an entity as an instance of a class or as a unique individual: o v p i u M e (is) a person; c i m c u n (is) Simon; 2 h t - o y (is) their belly. (Also for naming constructions, cf. 130.) Denotative predicates belong to the following classes: proper noun (cim cun), possessed noun (eHT=), article phrases of the gendered common noun (oYNoyTe). All proper noun and possessed noun predicates are denotative (except that possessed nouns also enter into compound prepositions and compound verbs 209). But a gendered common noun predicate is ambiguous, being susceptible of two interpretations: both denotation and description ( o y n o y te n e “He is a god” and “ He is divine” ).
(b) Description. A descriptive predicate is one that speaks of an entity by its qual ity but without explicitly naming (denoting) the particular entity to which it refers: o y n o 6 (is) great, o y ^J^n o m o c (is) lawless, o Y B p p e (is) new, o Y p iu M e (is) human, oym b (is) true, o y o Y o eiN (is) bright, o y p m n - ^ h t (is) intelligent. Descriptive predicates are in d ef and def. article phrases of either a gendered common noun or a genderless common noun. They are usually introduced by O Y - or 2 e N - (rarely by the d e f article n - ‘the one characterized as . . . ’). All genderless common noun predicate.s are descriptive. But a gendered common noun predicate i.s ambiguous, being susceptible of two interpretations: both denotation and description ( o y n o y te n e "He is divine” and “He is a god”).
M odem Coptic dictionary entries (e.g. C rum ’s) for gendered common nouns feature the denotative meaning, though in fact both semantic functions poten tially belong to every gendered common noun. The descriptive function occurs more frequently with certain semantic classes than with others (those denoting abstractions, substances, etc.). TABLE 18
Semantic Functions of C o m m o n N oun Predicates W hen Expanding o y - or nG endered Common Nouns 104
Denotation Description Description with anaphora'
OYptDMe (is) a person npcuM e (is) the person oYPiD M e (is) human OYPiUM e (is) a human one npcJDMe (is) the human one
Genderless Common N ouns 113
o yn o o yn o
6 (is) great 6 (is) a great one
n N o 6 (is) the great one
N ote; In the table, o y - stands for o y - or g e N - ; n - stands for ihe three forms o f n - , n K en e i'- , n - . . . eT*-i5MiY, n i-. 'Cross-reference to a previously mentioned entity
227
NOMINAL
SENTENCE
Descriptive predication (corresponding to adjectives in Western Indo-European lan guages) is also expressed by three other means: suffixally conjugated verboids of qual ity 3 7 6 , NiNOY-q “He/It is good” ; the stative construction o n - with descriptive inci dental predicate 1 7 9 , q - o n - * n o 6 “ He/It is great” ; and the stative of intransitive verbs whose infinitive expresses process or entry into a state 1 6 8 ( b ) , q-OYOB
293 An explanatory or evaluative comment can be predicated by an entity term 141, (ii) x .e - or ^eKA(A)c expanded by a clause 150, (Hi) some other expres sion o f action as an entity 288, (iv) reported discourse (hypostasis 142). Items (ii) to (iv) permit a complete statement to function as predicate. Examples: (i) r o A r o e i e x e - n M i M -neK piN ioN n e Matt 27:33 “ Golgotha, which means the place of the skull” ; Tctui^je n e nKOCMOc n e 6 p o 6 JlE e T - N iN o y - q Ne No;Hpe N -T M N T -epo Matt 13:38 (explaining a parable) “ (The phrase) ‘the field' is (stands for) the world, and 'the good seed’ is the sons of the kingdom” ; nNOMOc n e nNOBe Rom 7:7 “ Does the Law amount to sin ? ” ; N jo q Men eT*-ctu
294 Insignificance, near non-existence (is nothing, is something trivial) is predicat ed by o y a a j i y . zeNAAAY 74(d). E.g. n c B B e o y a a ^ y ay^^ t m n t - j i t CBBe o y \ x x y x e 1 Cor 7:19 “ Circumcision is of no importance and uncir cumcision is of no importance” ; a n ? - o y a a a y 1 Cor 13:2 “ I am nothing.” 295 Personal identification is predicated by a proper name, identifying epithet, or the personal independent. E.g. a.nok n e rjiBpiHA Luke 1:19 “ I am Gabriel”
228
NOMINAL
SENTENCE
PREDICATES
(278); NTOK n e nA ojH pe n ^ M ep iT M ark 1:11 “ Y ou are M y Son, M y belo ved "; a n o n n e nto < ( S h lll 2 2 :1 8 “ W e and he are as one (W e are him )” ; T eN enicT O A H n t c u t n n e 2 C or 3 :2 “ O ur letter is y o u ” ; J ln o k n e n o Y o iN M -n K o c M o c John 8 :1 2 “ It is I w ho am the light o f the w o rld ” (276); T B jiajop . . . e re -N T O K n e “ T he fox— w hich m eans you.” 296 Possessedness, or general (undefined) relationship, is predicated by the p o s sessed pronoun nA -/ncu= 5 4 ‘b elongs to . . . (A n expression o f the p o sse s sor is suffixed to the possessed pronoun.) Examples: n ^ - n j c o e ic rjip n e o k ji j 1 Cor 10:26 “The earth is the Lord’s” ; jin o k MEN i N r - n i - n i Y ^ o c 1 Cor 1:12 “ I belong to Paul” ; T tu - o y t e T M N T-epo N - M H H Y e Matt 5:3 “Theirs is the kingdom of the heavens (The kingdom of heaven belongs to them)” ; N TETN-ntu-TN iN I iy-
297 Quantity and other categories o f the specifiers 63 are predicated by a sp e cifi er or a specifier phrase. Examples: jt u c r e 6 e N-CNjiy iN Ne iA A i o y c ip S N -oytuT Te Matt 19:6 “ So they are not fM’O but one single flesh” ; eic-
298 Relationship o f time, place fr o m ’ or ‘tow ards’, and manner is predicated by an appropriate preposition eith er (i) expanding the indef. article, e.g. o Y n p o c-® o Y o ei< y n e M att 13:21 “ It is tem porary (is fo r a w h ile)” ; or (ii) (m ore co m m only) w ithout article, e.g. e e o A an jc.e-ne< )pooY < i) n e eT B e-N ^H K e John 12:6 “ N ot that he cared for the poor (N ot that his care w as for the p o o r).” Cf. also possessedness 296, sim ilarity 30 1 , and source 3 02. These prepositions are not eligible to be predicate of the durative sentence, 310. Further examples: (i) ANr-oyKATAptu-TN a n Shlll 116:17-18 “ I am not like you” ; N -e re -N -T N -N A y A e e p o - o y a n jeN i^jA -eN e? Ne 2 Cor 4:18 “The things that we do not see are eternal (iinlo eternity)” ; (ii) eNe-jAOH tap n e e-M n A x en o y o e iN Aytu n tu N j e i e-n K o cM o c N eN -N A -6 N-*A<|)opMH n e ShAmdl II 247:12-248:1 “ For, if it were before life and light came into the world, we would have an excuse” ; jc i n n - j c o j- c N - r n e n e nMA N -*ei ejpA i M -npH Aytu a ;A - jc tu - c N - r n e n e neqM a ejpAT ShChass 59:55-60:2 “The sun’s rising is from one extreme of heaven and its setting is unto the other extreme of heaven” ; e-nJCiNJCH NA-y T e TeyjynoM O N H ShIV 46:18 “For them, their endurance is in vain (unto van ity)”
299 Request fo r class name (W hat is . . . ?) is predicated by oyoY , z eN o y , and form s a belittling, rhetorical question w hen predicated o f a person. N T K -oyoy A2 PO-K K -jH n Shlll 38:17-18 “ What are you? Why are you hidden?” ; ANON-NiM H 2 GNoy Ne NeNu;i Shlll 107:23-24 “ Who are we? And what are our capacities?” ; A N O N -jeN oy ^ e jtu tu - N . . . J c e -T N -o N-AT-ctu-iTi ShLeyd 229
NOMINAL
SENTENCE
362fc; 12-21 “And who, then, are we . . . to be disobedient?” ; z e n o y n h - t n NeTw N e eT®-KH Josh 4:6 (ed. Thompson) “What are these stones to you?"
ne
300 Self-im portance (I am someone important) is predicated by the personal inde pendent in Pattern 11 (283), e.g. a n o n n e Gal 2:6 “ We are ones who are important.” 301 Sim ilarity (i) is predicated by the bare prepositional phrase N ee n - (is) like . . . . (ii) The question O f what sort is . . . ? H ow is . . . .^ is expressed by the indef. article phrases M-MiNe, oyoY m -m ing, and pi. with 2eN - (cf. 74). (Hi) The demonstrative reply, is like this, is such, is expressed by oyTefMiNe, oyTeT^e and pi. ^eNTeiMiNe, ^eNxef^e. (iv) Adm irative excla mations, H ow great!. Oh, how . . . ! are expressed by the indef. article phras es o y x i^ M-MiNe, N~2e, OYJi-qj n - 6 o t , and pi. with ?eN -. Examples: (i) N e e M -n —eT ® -N i-6tu M N - T - e T o y - o N-*NOeiK e p o - c n e ShChass 169:25-28 “He is like a man who abides with an adulterous woman” ; N e e N -o y a ;n H p e n e neKpjiN Ps 8:9 “How wonderful (Like a wonder) is Thy name” ; N ey M ep ic Ne N e e eT*-CH2 J c e - c e - N J i- < y a j n e n —“t o N-®BJi
302 Source (comes from . . . , is from . . . ) is predicated by oYeBoA 2 n - (indef. article o y - f z e n - expanded by g b o a 2 n - , g b o a n-/mmo=, g b o a 2 i t n - , or eBOA TCUN. Examples: n t o j t n N TeTN-zeN eBO A 2 M-neiKOCMOc I iNOK i N r - o y e s o A iN 2 M-neTKOCMOc John 8:23 “You are o f this world, 1 am not o f this world” ; n i t o y e BOA M M O - O y n e Mark 14:69 “ This man is one o f them ” ; n B in x ic M i N -itugiN N H C oyeBO A TtuN n e Matt 21 ;25 “The baptism o f John, whence was it?” ; T e iN o 6 N—A tu p e i o y e B O A g iT M -n N o y x e Te i y t u oyeBO A giT N -^ p tu n e a n Te Shlll 107:17-18 “ This great gift is from God and not from human beings”
303 The unchanging identity of a subject is predicated by tke repetition of an enti ty term followed by on. This predicate is expressed in Patterns 5a and 5b, cf. 273, 274: n t o k a g n to k on n e a y ^ N eK ponne na-cujc.n an Ps 230
NOMINAL
SENTENCE
PREDICATES
101 (102):27 “ But Thou art the same, and Thy years shall not fail” ai) 5e 6 ambc, el; neK ^F^ neK ^F^ o n n e ShChass 21:57-58 “ Your form is unchangeable.”
O T H E R SE M A N T IC F U N C T IO N S OF T H E P R E D IC A T E
304 Nominal sentences can equate one entity with another ( ic n e n e 5 ^ “Jesus is the C hrist” ; jlnon n e ntoc| “ We and he are as one” [We are him]); fo cu s attention on a predicate (nqjcuM n e “ It’s sum m er” ; jinok n e “ It’s m e” ); make referential connections (nVf n e na^qpHpe n ^ M e p i T “This is M y Son, My beloved” ; a n o k n e 282 “ 1 am he” ); and m ake com parisons 505 (tai t g e e e T e p e -N O jo p n NA-p-®2aie N Te-N 2Ae p-® qjopn Matt 20:16 "So the last will be first, and the first last” ).
231
The Basic Sentence of Existence and Indication Formed with o y N - and eic(oYN-®J^rreAoc Angels exist, e ic -n e T N p p o Here is your king)
See chapter 21
14
The Durative Sentence Components and Patterns o f the Durative Sentence Tense and Discourse Perspective 307
305
The Four Interchangeable Predicates 308 Durative Infinitive 308 Stative 309 Situational Preposition and Adverb 310 Present-based Future ( n a - ) 311 Expression of Tense
312
The Durative Sentence Patterns 313 Term in Extraposition 313 Adverbial Premodifier 314 Extension o f the Converted Durative Sentence Invariable n e in the Durative Sentence 316 Pattern 1 n jc o e ic m g n - n a i k a i o c 317 Pattern 2 -}'-Me MMo-K 318 Postponed subject 319 Conversions of Pattern 1 and 2 320 Extraposition o f converter and subject 321 Pattern 3 o y N - 6 e A e k c u t e jc .c u -c 322 Pattern 3a e i c - n o y p p o n h y n g -® 323 Conversions of Pattern 3 324
315
CO M PO N EN TS AND PA TTERN S OF THE D U R A T IV E S E N T E N C E 305 The ‘durative sentence ’ nNoYTG A e co o y N N-NeTN2 HT “ But God knows your hearts” (Luke 16:15) -}--oBe “ 1 am thirsty” (John 19:28); -}--2 M -nicuT “ I am in the Father” (John 10:38) o y n - ^ a ? ta p NA-ei 2 M-nApAN “ Many are going to come (will come) in My nam e” (Mark 13:6)
233
O U R A T IV E S E N T E N C E
is a set of three sentence patterns that share the ability to have all o f the fol lowing items, interchangeably, as their predicate 2A1: The Interchangeable Predicates Infinitive ( c o o y n “ know s” ) 308 Stative ( o e e “ [am] thirsty” ) 309 Situational preposition or adverb (2 N - “ Lam] in . . . ” ) 310 Future auxiliary n Ji- (“ [am] going to , w ill” ) completed by an infini tive 311 The category o f ‘durativity’ is expressed by these four interchangeable predi cates, in the sense that they attribute to their subject an enduring, ongoing, or general action or process (knows) 308 an enduring state (am thirsty) 309 a static situation (am in the Father) 310 an immanent future action or process envisaged from the speaker’s present situation (present-based future) (am going to come, will come) 311 306 The three sentence patterns (here illustrated with the infinitive kcut) (1) (2) (3)
nNOYTe KU3T, 317 God builds, God is building 318 I buildy I am building MN-AA.AY 322 No one builds. No one is building
each w ith th e fo u r interch an g eab le pred icates
Pattern 3 is based on an existential sentence formed with oyM -
correspond to three types o f subject: Definite subject nK oyT e, Na^r. etc. in Pattern 1 Personal subject . -T - in Pattern 2 Non-definite subject o y c o n , ®c o n , g eN cN H V , z o Tn g , 3
etc. in Pattern
Thus each of the three sentence patterns enables a particular type of subject to enter into nexus (grammatical union of subject and predicate 248) with the set of four interchangeable predicates. Pattern
Subject Types
The Interchangeable Predicates
1 2 3
Definite Personal o y N - Non-definite
Durative Infinitive Stative Situational Preposition/Adverb (future auxiliary)
234
STRUCTURE
1 npcuM e 2 t-_ 3 OYN-®pu)Me
OF
THE
DURATIVE
SENTENCE
ctu T n c o rn
2 M-neTMji. NA-CtOTn
In Pattern 3a based on e i c - (a minor pattern), both definite and non-definite subjects can occur; cf. 323.
These patteins also occur in relative, circumstantial, preterit, and focalizing conversion 320, 324. When the predicate is an infinitive (nN oyT e kcut, ■f'-KcuT, m n -aa;^y kcut), the sentence expresses ‘durative con ju gation ’ o f the infinitive, contrasting with non-durative conjugation (chapter 15), which is unmarked for the cate gory o f durativity.
TEN SE a n d d i s c o u r s e P E R S P E C T IV E
307 The basic durative sentence patterns express present tense; cf. also 312. (For the overall Coptic tetise system , cf. chapter 25.) Depending on the type o f dis course perspective 527 that is signalled in their immediate textual environ ment, durative sentences describe the subject in terms o f either contem pora neous observation (as at the time that the sentence is uttered) or tim eless (gen eral, usual, recurrent, predictable, potential) truth. E.g. i. present (or present-based future) tense + durativity + discourse perspec tive of contemporaneous observation e ic Z H H T e
N eK M A SH TH c
c e -e ip e
M -n -eT e-M e< y < y e
e-^A A -q
“ Look, Your disciples are doing what is not lawful to do” (Matt 12:2) T eN oy NTcuTN N e< })aip iccA io c . . . neTN cJi^-N -2 oyN a g mg? N-®Tcupn 2 i-® jLKAeApciA “ Now, you Pharisees . . . your insides are fu ll o f extor tion and uncleanness” (Luke 11:39) e i c - N o y e p H T e N - N - e N T - A Y - T c u M c m —n o Y 2 J>^i c e - 2 i p M - n p o A y c u c e - N A - q i T - e “ Hark, the feet of those that have buried your husband are a t the door, and they are ju st about to carry you out” (Acts 5 :9 ) ii. present (or present-based future) tense + durativity + discourse perspec tive o f timeless truth Npeq-p-® N O Be c e - M e N -N-eT® -M e M M o-oy “ Sinners love those who love them ” (Luke 6 :3 2 ) Ne2 io o y e M -n p tu n e n - a i k a i o c c o f n M -nN oyT e “ The ways o f the righteous person are acceptable with G od” (Prov 15:28) oY N -o y n H rH N-®tjuN2 ^ - N e ^ i o o y e n -tc o ^ )!* ^ “ A fountain o f life is in the ways of wi.sdom” (Prov 13:14)
235
DURATIVH
e e A n ic A e
n
-
nacgbhc na- tako
SENTENCE
“ The hope o f the ungodly n 7 // perish”
(Prov 10:28)
T H E F O U R I N T E R C H A N G E A B L E P R E D IC A T E S THE D U R A T IV E IN F IN IT IV E
308 When a verb lexeme is actualized 160 as an infinitive predicate in one of the durative patterns, this actualization can be called the 'durative infuutive’: •f'-NeJC.-®AMMONION GBOA • f ' - e i p e N -2 eNTAA6 o M n o o Y n m pjkCTe Luke 13:32 “ I am casting out demons and performing cures today and tomorrow.” Its durativity is signalled by sentence pattern and direct object syntax, and not by any formal characteristic o f the infinitive morph. General details of verbal syntax can be found in chapter 8. Direct object syntax. After a durative mutable infinitive 167, e.g. N o y x e, N 6X - ‘cast (out)’, any zero article phrase as direct object is normally suffixed to the prenominal state. E.g. •}—Neac-®AAmoNioN g b o a Luke 13:32 “ I am casting out dem ons.” Other direct objects of the durative mutable infinitive must be mediated by the preposition n-/m m o=, following the absolute state. For full details of direct object syntax (the Stem -Jem stedt rule), cf. 171. Examples with non-zero object: T e T N - N o y j c e e b o a m m o j - t n Acts 13:46 “ You thrust it from you"; N e q - N o y J C e J lG c b o a n - o y a j i i m o n i o n Luke 11:14 “Now He was casting out a demon” ; e i - N o y J c e eeo A n - n j i A i m o n i o n Matt 12:27 “ I cast out demons”
THE STATIVE
309 Statives 162 only occur as the predicate o f the durative sentence. Stative and durative infinitive contrast in meaning in predictable ways 168, as follows. (a) Transitive verbs 168(a): the stative expresses a descriptive, static passive meaning (the enduring state of a subject after it has finished undergoing or receiving some action), q -K H T “ It is built (describing a state), is situated, is established,” and the infinitive expresses enduring, ongoing, or general action c e - K c u T M M o -q “ They build/are building it.” The stative o n - (cf. infinitive Gipe) expresses incidental (non-essential) predication as contrasted with inherent (essentia!) predication of the nominal sentence 179, 180(b); e.g. c - o N -”ciB H she is wise (at the moment or under a certain condition, incidental ly) versus o y c a b h t e she is wise (permanently or by nature, inherently).
(b) Intransitive verbs (except those listed in [c]): the stative describes the endur ing state o f the subject after some process has come to an end or some quali ty has been acquired, ce-ujoY O JO Y “They are dry,” and the infinitive
236
STRUCTURE
OF
THE
DURATIVE
SENTENCE
expresses enduring, ongoing, or general process or entry into a state, c e - u j o o y e “They are becoming dry, They dry out.” (c) However, of the following five intransitives B c u K , stative b h k go 61, stative h h y come n c u T , stative h h t run
? e , stative 2 h y fa ll (also z e e - , 2 h y e - fin d ) gtuA, stative
only the stative occurs in durative sentences, and it expresses enduring, ongo ing, or general motion, c g - b h k “ They are going. They go.” The infinitives of this group only occur in non-durative conjugation (chapter 15); thus, no contrast between infinitive and stative can be expressed in the durative sen tence, cf. 168(c).
THE S IT U A T IO N A L P R E P O S IT IO N A N D A DV ERB
310 The situational predicate is expressed by prepositions o f place (and by exten sion, those o f time and manner) that do not imply motion; and by a lim ited number o f situational adverbs. E.g. n N o v r e 2N -T 6 cMHTe Ps 45(46):5 “ God is in the m idst o f her.” (English translation o f this predicate type requires addi tion of the verb to he as copula.) Examples o f situational prepositions that occur as predicate; e jc n - , mn - . Jin ecH T n or simply necH T N -, N -, n t n - , N i^ p S -, o y B e - , j i - , j i - , 2 n - , Such prepositional predicates can be premodified by a combinative adverb 206, e.g. eapiV e jcN -, N2 oyN N -, N2 pM 2 N -, 2 p3il 2 N -, 2 p il 2 ijc n - , etc. Examples o f situational adverbs (that cannot be further analyzed as prepositional phras es) occurring as predicate: M nooy “ is today, falls on today’s date” ; t o j n “ is where? Where is . . . ? ” ; TiV “ is here” (occurring only in the relative construction eT®-TiV “ Which is here”). For n - , N i* ‘unto’ in clausal interjections such as T e x ^ p ic n h - t n “Grace be unto you”, c f 240. Further examples; n A N o e e n n i J i T o g b o a N o y o e i u ; nim P s 50(5I);3 “ My sin is continually before m e” ; n - t m e iN I John 2:4 “The truth is not in him ” ; 2 ^ -T e q e A i'J 'ic Ps 90(9I);15 “1 am with him in his affliction” ; T O y i l y x e M - n i y i i M n o o y ShAmel I 379:6-7 “The festal worship of Pshai falls on today’s date, is today” ; c - M M i y ShIV 18:13 “ It is there. It is present” ; n e x p o c M M i y Acts 9:38 “ Peter (was) there” ; N - e T e p e - n c i 2 o y 2 pi.i jijc c u - o y Shlll 189; 15 “Those that the curse rests upon” ; e r i e p e - n K i K e bbo\ John 2 0 ;I “For it was siill dark” (darkness still being outside); e p e - o y N o 6 N - K i y c u J N n b o a Paphnoute Cephalas, Stories of the Monks of tlie Desert (BMis 474; 15-16) “While a bad sirocco was blow ing” But prepositions o f relationship (lime, place ‘from’ or ‘towards’, and manner, e.g. n i p i - n e K O y c u q ; “Contrary to your will”) are predicated in llie nominal sentence 298. Source (“ is from, comes from”) is also predicated in the nominal sentence by o y e B o A
2N - 302.
237
DURATIVE
s e n t e n c e
Two prepositional predicates require special comment: i. e p o - ( q ) hi-/epo= describes financial and moral indebtedness: “ is a deficit against the account of, is owed by, is incumbent upon.” E.g. n t o k oY N -oyH p e p o -K Luke 16:7 “ How much do you o w e?” (As for you, how much is agaitjst your account?); MN-®NoBe e p o - i S hlll 133:15 “ No sin is imputable to m e.” Non-personal prepositional objects must be introduced by periphrastic e p o - q N - / e p o - c N -/e p o -o Y n - . Optionally, the creditor is specified by n t o o t = hj-/N TooTs ‘in the reckoning o f . . . e.g. MN-®NOBe e p o -T T€NOY N TooT -oY iJ-NAAAo<}>Y'^oc Judg 15:3 “For once, I am guiltless with regard to the foreigners” (This time, sin is not a deficit against me in the reckoning o f the foreigners). English translations o f this construction usually reverse the dynamic and use ihe verb owe, with the Coptic subject translated as the amount or thing owed and the object of the Coptic preposition as the debtor; Coptic A is owed by B becomes English B OH’es (Ihe sum of) A. Impersonal c - e p o s means “It is incumbent on " Further examples: oyA e p e - 2^2 N -6 iN6tup e p o -q Matt 18:24 “ One who owed many talents” ; n-eT®e p o - o y Shiv 43;28 “ What they owe” ; n -e T G -o y N -o y o N e p o - q Shlll 149:6-7 “T hedebtor” ; njiT rjip ep o -N n t o o t ^ Ji-njcoV c ShChass 98:51-53 “ For we have this as an obligation unto the Lord” ; N gooy n - n h c t e i j i eT®-TH
ii. n-/Fim o= describes relationship between a constituent member and the organism to which it belongs (‘ts a constituent o f ) , as with the members and faculties of the body or the parts of a plant. E.g. MiJ-^NOYNe M M o-oy Matt 13:6 “They have .no root” (No root is a constituent o f them); p c u -o y M M o-oy Mey-qjAJc.e Ps 134(135): 16 (134:17 Budge) “They have a mouth, but they cannot speak.” Other prepositions (m17-, n t n - , 2 i~, 2 n~, 2IJC.17-, etc.) can express similar close relationships such as appurtenance, cus tody, infection, etc. (various kinds o f ‘having’); for examples, cf. 393. English translations of this construction must reverse the dynamic and use the verb has. with the Coptic subject translated as the possessed and the object of Ibe Coptic preposi tion as the possessor: Coptic A is a constituent o f B becomes English B has -4. Further examples; e -y N -M N T -c N o o y c n - c n t e m - o c o b t N-TnoA.ic (collated) Rev 21:14 “ And the wall of the city had twelve foundations” ; 0 y N -"6 0 M i^ - n N o y r e e-^T O yN ec-zeN u jH pe Matt 3:9 “God is able (has the ability) to rai.se up children.” The general possessive oyK T e-/M N T e- ‘have’ (chapter 18) overlaps these construc tions in meaning.
T H E P R E S E N T -B A S E D F U T U R E
311 Nji- the futtire attxiliary ‘is going to . . . , will . . . ’ expresses an immanent future envisaged from the speaker’s present, enduring situation. This is the
238
STRUCTURE
OF
THE
DURATIVE
SENTENCE
normal, broadly functioning future tense in Coptic, usually found in exposi tion, generalization, narrative, and dialogue, n a - is completed by a non-durative infinitive 328 or another verbal auxiliary 184. E.g. -f--NA-JteYn ^A rreA o c m m o -k Mark 1:2 “ I shall send my messenger before thee” ; Te-N ji-BcuK e n e c H T qjji.-ai.MNTe Matt 11:23 “ You will go down to H ades” ; NToq a b N -q-N ji-
i. In an articu lated attributive clause (n-eT® -N A -ccuTn “ Whosoever chooses. If one chooses” ), n a - can express generalization and potentiality 501(a) rather than futurity. Examples: n - e T ® - N A - B t u A 6 e e e o A N - O Y e i N - N e i e N T O A H Matt 5:19 6<; iav ouv A-ijaii ktX. “ Whoever then relaxes one of these commandments” ; n-eT®-NA-j|a)TB Matt 5:21 6<; 5’ liv (poveuar] “ Whoever kills” ; o y o n nim eT®-NA-NOY6 c Matt 5:22 nac, 6 fipyi^onevoq “Every one who is angry” ; n - e T ® - N i - 2Y n o M i N e A e u ; a b o a Mark 13:13 6 5e uitoneivtw; “The one who endures to the end”
ii. The explicitly durative p a st situation-based futu re is N eq-N A -. E.g. AY-CCUOY2 e 2 oyN N-oYMHH
239
D U RA TIvn
SENTKNCB
E X P R E S S IO N O F T E N S E 312 The basic sentence pattern expresses present tense. (For the overall Coptic tense system, cf. chapter 25.) Past tense can be signalled by preterit conver sion. Otherwise, a fuller range o f tenses etc. can be expressed by periphrastic conjugation based on q jcune or e f completed by a circumstantial conversion o f the durative sentence 427. Periphrastic conjugation o f the stative is based on qjcune; o f the situational prepositions, on p - 180(b); o f the u x -fu tu r e , on e i 427. The infinitive is more fully conjugated by selection of non-durative conjugation, chapter 15. Examples: (stative) q -N i- a ;t u n e eq-MHp Matt 16:19 “ It will be/will come to be bound” ; i K - a ; t u n e e k - N 2 0 t Mall 25:21 “ You have been faithful” ; JceK ic e p e -n e Y K E C i n —boa
T H E D U R A T IV E S E N T E N C E P A T T E R N S TERM IN E X T R A P O S IT IO N
313 Any personal morph (or personal element o f the possessive article) within the sentence pattern can be anticipated by a term in extraposition, that is, a term placed at the front of the sentence pattern (‘extraposited’) Extrapositecl Term
Sentence Pattern (contains a personal morph agreeing with the extraposition) Anticipation I Resumption Topic under discussion I Comment
240
THE SEN TEN C E PA TTERN S
NTCUTN I TKTN-gjOBe £-2^-2 N-JC.AJC. “ But as for you, I you are of more value than many sparrows” (Matt 10:31) and thus set off as a topic of thought. Extraposition and personal morph agree in (person)/number/(gender). The agreeing personal morph shows how the extraposited term relates to the sentence. Rarely, a 3d person demonsirative pronoun within the sentence pattern is preceded by a tenn in extraposition; n - e T '’- N i- - t'- “a ;in e r i p N i- 1 I n<^Hpe M-nptuMe M-n a l Luke 9:26 “ Whoever is ashamed of Me and of My words, of lhal person will the Son o f man be ashamed.”
(a) 1st and 2d person morphs can only be preceded by an extraposited personal morph: namely, the personal independent iNOK I -t--N i-T O Y N O c-q J i - n z i e n ~ 2 0 0 Y “And as for Me, 11 will raise him up at the last day” (John 6:40) or its semantic equivalent N - e T “- 6 N - p M M i O N 2 H t E
h
I T N - H n e - “ p - “2 H K e
“As for tho.se of iix who are rich, I we must become poor” (ShChass 98:48-51)
(h) 3d person morphs can be preceded by either a personal independent or some other entity term.
NTOoy THp-OY I c e -o N -^peq-ktug e-nNOMOc “All of them, I they are zealous for the law” (Acts 21:20) n i l I q -N i- < i) tu n e N -0 yN 06 “ He will be great” (This one, I He will be great) (Luke 1:32)
na;H pe M-nptuMe I c e - N i - T i i - q ezpiV
e t o o t - oy
N-ppojMe
“As for the Son of Man, I He will be delivered into the clutches of men" (Mark 9:3 1) Extraposition occurs mostly with Pattern 2. C f also 321. Several terms can occur in extraposition, side by side,
Nif t 2 tu t u - q na;H pe I zomoiojc I q - N i - i i - Y “These tile Son, too, will do likewise” (John 5:19) (These I also the Son I likewise I He will do them) Further examples. Pattern I: n-eT®-ctuTM I ngtuB 2 0 | ^ N N ig p i-q ShChass 1 1 6 : 2 0 - 2 2 “To anyone who listens, the proposition seems difficult.” Pattern 2: rip iJ-N -E T ep e -N e n N i N -iK ie ip rO N I n e y - < u u ; e b o a Acts 8 : 7 “ For many of those who had unclean spirits cried out” ; n t o k a e I c e - m o y k 2 m m o —k Luke 1 6 : 2 5 “And you are in anguish” ; n-eT® -N i—i p N i A e m m o - i J i n e M T O e b o a N - p p t u M E I c e - N i - i p N i MMO-q Luke 1 2 : 9 “The one who denies Me before human kind will be denied” ; NKefrTTS N -iK iO ipT O N I q -O Y e?—“c ig N e N i-Y Mark 1 : 2 7 “ He commands even ihe unclean spirits” ; nNOYTe I n --f--p -" 2 0 Te gH T-q iN Luke 1 8 : 4 “ 1 do not fear God” ; o y o n nim e t^ -n h y
241
D U R A T IV E S E N T E N C E N -e N T -iN -N iY e p o -O Y jin - c o t m - o y I m n -® 6 o m m m o - n e jc o o -Y Acts 4:20 “For we cannot but speak of what we have seen and heard”
- “T M -
A D V E R B IA L P R E M O D IF IE R B EFO R E T H E SE N T E N C E PA TTERN
314 Adverbial prem odifier before the sentence pattern. An adverb or preposition al phrase (chapter 9) preceding the sentence pattern lays dow n a circumstance or relationship o f time, place, manner, degree, or attitude in which the sen tence is being asserted (i.e. under which the predication is made). Premodifier I Sentence Pattern jtiN-TCNOY AC I nKCAeaiN KH zATNNoyNe (i.e. 2^~TNOYNe) N-NojHN “ From this time forth, the axe is laid to the root of the trees” (Matt 3:10) 2 N -T e q 4'YXH A e I N e q -p H c e -n e z o Y O n e “ But in his soul he was very alert” (Athanasius, Life of St. Anthony 9 [Garitte 15:5]) 2 N -2eNKGM HHOje A e e-N A
315 For extension o f the converted durative sentence by a clause in conjunctive conjugation N-eT®-cooYN e -N e Y 2 BHYe N c e - 2cun eJc.u)-OY c e - p 20 Y0 - c 20Yo p T N M M A - Y “ Those who know about their deeds and conceal them are greatly cursed along with them ” (S hlll 41 ;5-6) cf. 353. For conjunctive clause extending the non-durative infinitive after N A - , cf. 3 5 2 (l)(a); extending n h y ‘is going to com e’, 352(l)(b). IN V A R IA B L E n e IN T H E D U R A T IV E SE N T E N C E
316 Invariable n e occurs in some durative sentences (especially in preterit con version), but not as an essential pattern constituent 285. Here, the category or structure optionally signalled by n e , the motivation for its use, and the condi tions of its occurrence are at present unknown. E.g. N e p e - n e q N o 6 A e N - u ; H p e n e g N - T c c u q j e Luke 15:25 “ Now his elder son was in the field” ; eN
242
a n o n
e T O O T —n
e —®c c u t m
o n
e-T ecM H
M - n x o e ic
THE
SENTENCE
PATTERNS
n e N N o y re t n - na - m oyoy n e Deut 5:25 “ If we hear the voice of the Lord our God anymore, then we shall die. ” 317 P a tte rn 1: D efinite S ubject Definite Subject I Predicate n jc.o eic Me n - n a ik a io c “The Lord loves the righteous” (Ps 145[146]:8) Negation: M -njc.oeic mg a n and n x o e i c Me an . The indispensable signal of negation is enclitic a n 250, which follows the predicate more or less im m e diately. If N - is present it is prefixed to the subject. Examples; M-neKgHT r ip c o y to jn an Acts 8:21 “For your heart is not right” ; NAU^Ajce JtE NA-nApAre a n Malt 24:35 “But My words will not pass away”
Subject: definites (def. article phrases and pronouns, def. specifier phrases, proper nouns); also possessed nouns. The pronoun oyoN him and article phrases with . . . n i m occur som etim es in this pattern and sometimes in Pattern 3. Rarely occurring as subject are entity statements ISO, e.g. J lE e -M n k -e iA -T O O T -k co J o iq an M ^npoiM e Matt 15:20 ed. Kasser “But to eat ( e - ‘’oYO>M) without washing your hands does not defile the person.” Cf, chapier 22.
Subject and predicate are not bound; consequently, an enclitic conjunction such as A.e 235(b) or a m odifier o f the subject can interrupt the sequence of Subject I Predicate: njc.o eic A e n e . (This is the only Coptic nexus pattern that can occur without the presence o f a nexus morph 248.) Further examples: r n e M N-nkA? NA-nApAre Matt 24:35 “Heaven and earth will pass aw ay” ; i c o n p a)o;e e p o - K ShChass 3 9 :1 -2 “And Jesus is sufficient againsi you” ; n^i' n a -jc u ) e p o -K N - 2eNo;Aj(.e Acts 11:14 “He will declare to you a m es sage” ; Ayo) N o y — c o o y N m m o-^ i John 10:14 “ And My own know Me” ; gNO NiM n a - 2A o6 Shiv 86:10 “Every thing will lasle good” ; o y o N nim n h y ep A T -q John 3:26 “ All are coming lo Him ” ; n j c o e ic NMMe-“ Luke 1:28 “The Lord is with you” ; NTepe-nM HH
Conversions: relative, circum stantial, preterit, focalizing. C f 320. 318 P a tte rn 2 : Personal S ubject Personal Prefix + Predicate f - M e m m o - k “ I love you” (John 21:16)
243
O U R A T IV F S E N T F N C K
Negation: N--t—Me a n and -t—we j^n. The indispensable signal o f negation is enclitic a n 250, which follows the predicate more or less immediately. If Fiis present it is prefixed to the subject. Examples; N -q -N i-K O ) n h t - n iN g bo a Mall 6:15 “ He will nol forgive you” ; iNOK 6 e •f'-ON2 iN n e 5 ^ A e o n 2 n^ h t -® Gal 2:20 “ So 1 for my pan do not live; ralher, Chrisl lives in m e”
Subject: personal prefixes 78 in the basic pattern, and personal intermediates 80 in the conversions. (The personal prefixes o f the durative sentence only occur in this pattern.) The Personal Prefixes -f--
TN -
var. r T e - , rare var. x p qc-
t g t n
K -,
am you (masc.) are you (fem.) are he/il is she/il is I
-
ce-
we are you (pi.) are Ihey are
The variant r - ‘you’ occurs only after negative n - (e.g. N -r -cc U T n a n choose”). Special combinations with the future auxiliary
“Y ou do not
N i-
2d sing, fem.: x e N i - , vars. x e p N i - and x e p i - , “ You are going to . . . ’ 2d plur.: x e x N i - , var. x e x N N i - , “ You are going to . . . ”
The personal prefix is bound to its predicate, forming a bound group, and the sequence Subject + Predicate cannot be interrupted by an enclitic or other ele ment: f - M e Ae. Further examples; c - 6 h y N 6 i - x n Y A H Matt 7; 14 “ For the gale is narrow” ; M w o -c NH-XN Mall 8 ;1 1 “1 tell you” ; K-xo)|m N -N -ex e -N O Y -K iN Ne ShChass 41:29-31 “ You seize things that are not yours” : x e - ^ K ie ix x e - o e e M -noeiK MN-nMOOY Shill 204:4 “ You are hungry, you are thirsty, for bread and water"; x e - i^ - ^ - X M H x e n -^ g n n o C M - n p i r n i e Y - o q ; ShChass 97:28-31 “You are In the midst o f many great projects” ; N - g - M -n e lM i. i.N Luke 24:6 “ He is nol here” ; - f- -N i-x iM a ) -x N Luke 6:47 “ 1 will show you”
Conversions: relative, circumstantial, preterit, focalizing. Cf. 320. W hen con verted, Pattern 2 has the following structure: M utable converter 396 + Persona! Intermediate + Predicate N € -i-M e (N €i-M e) “ I loved” (preterit) Thus Basic: c e -M e “ They love” Converted: e r o y - M e , e y -M e , N ey-M e, e y -M e 319 Postponed subject: entity term expanding a persona! subject. A 3d-person subject (q, c, c e /y ) cart be expanded by an entity term later in the clause. The expansion element is usually mediated by n 6 i - 87(b).
244
T H E S F N T E N C F P A 'n F .R N S
q-cooyN rAp N6i-neTNcia)T f^T^-^N-MnHyc “ For your Father in heav
en know s” (Matt 6:32) Nec-MMAY -a.e n 6 i- m a p ia TMArAAAHNH MN-TKEMApiA “ M ary M agdalene and the other M ary were there” (M att 27:61) Much less often, it is expanded by apposition 87(c). q-jcto TAP M M o - c NToq nj^oeic “ For the Lord says” (Shlll 6 0 :4 -5 )
A first or 2d-person subject m ust be expanded by apposition 87(c). t - u j i N e ep to -T N ? M -n jc o e ic anok r e p T io c “ I Tertius greet you in the L ord” (Rom 16:22) In these constructions, the personal morph (-f-, - i - , ic-, q - , etc.) expresses grammatical information, and the expansion expresses lexical content in a postponed, rhetorically distinct element.
C O N V E R S IO N S OF P A T T E R N S 1 AND 2
320 Affirmative: Formed with mutable converters 396 Pattern 1 (prenominal state)
Relative Circumstantial Preterit Focalizing
e re p e epe-
N epe-
Patlem 2 (prepersonal stale) eT = (and eT®e= N e«
epe-
Thus Basic N e^ioM e c to x n , c e - c t o r n “The women choose, They choose” Rel. erepe-Ne^ioMe Circ. epe-Ne^ioMe Pret. Nepe-Ne^ioMe Foe. epe-Ne^ioMe
ctorn, eTOY-ctoxn, er®-ctorn 405 ctorn, ey-ctoTn ctorn, NeY-ctoxn ccorn, ey-ccoTn
Negations: expressed in the following variant forms (where after the predicate) (i) W ithout negative
n -:
affirmative conversion +
an
always comes
an
Rel. erepe-Ne^iOMe ctorn AN, eroY-ctoTn AN, eT®-ctOTn an 405 Circ. epe-Ne^ioMe ctorn AN, e y -c tO T n an Pret. N€p€-N€2IOM€ c o r n AN, N€Y-C
245
DURATIVE
SENTKNCK
(ii) With negative n - (var. n n -); Fi- + affirmative conversion + an. Only focalizing conversion A ffirm , foe. N eg foe.
e p e - N e g io M e c t o r n ,
e v-ccu Tn
N - e p e - N e g io M e c c u rn a n ,
N -e v -cc o T n an
(vars. tiN - e p e - N e g io M e c t o r n iN , N N - e v - c tO T n a n )
This looks like the negative preterit conversion. (Hi) Immutable sentence converter + negatived basic pattern ( n - . . . an): rel ative and circumstantial (the usual negation)
Basic N-NegioMe c to rn an. N - c e - c t o r n an “The women do not choose. They do not choose” Rel. eTe-N-Ne2iOM € ccuTn AN, e r e - N - c e - c c u T n C irc. e-N-NegiOMG ctoTn AN, e -N -c e -c tO T n
an an
Also occurs with circumstantial preterit 498 (rare) e - N e - h i - n A i p - ^ n e e o o y J^^n
“ If this Man were not an evildoer” (John 18:30) (iv) Focalizing conversion with negation of topic element 453
e r e - N - c e - c to T n
an
+ F ocal P oint
Thus, negative circumstantial and negative focalizing are distinguished as follows. Circ. var. Foe. var.
e - N - c e - c c u T n iN e y - c c u T n an eT F ,-N—c e - c g ) T n iN N - e y - c c u T n an . e y - c c u x n
an
Examples, (a) Relative: npcuMe e x e p e -T e q C iJ t q;oY tuoY Luke 6:8 “The man whose hand (was) withered” : T -e x e p e -J C c u - c j o o K e 1 Cor 11:5 “She whose head is shaven’’; tkcum h N-epH M Oc hm a e x o Y - i N i x c u p e i Life o f St. Pachomius (Lefort 107a:2-5) “The deserted village where they had made their retreat” ; n 2AAO eT® -oYiiB A ni-niA iM C U N Life o f St. Pachomius (Lefort 102b;20-21) “The holy senior monk Apa Palamon” ; niV e r e p e -T M N T -c N O O Y c e M-YA.H M -n e N r e N o c ^ e A n iie e-®TA20“ ‘l Acts 26:7 “Which the twelve tribes o f our peo ple hope to attain to” ; (negation f i j ) t a i r e e e e x ep e-N K e^ H T N-NpcuM e e iN e an N-NGYepHY Prov 27:19 "So the hearts of people are not like one another” ; NeKKGMNT-AceBHc eT N -p-® xpiA AN N -^ Jcoo-Y oYA ShChass 34:23-26 “ Your other impious deeds, which we need not enumerate” ; N -e T ^ -O Y e m -p -^ N o e e M N -N -eT ® -oY e< i)-eip e an ShChass 66 :5 8 -6 7 :2 “Those who want to sin and those who don’t” ; (negation [Hi]) nMA e T e -M -n e Y t|N T n a - m o y an Mark 9:48 “Where their worm does not d ie” ; ilpcuMe e T e -N - c e -p -® q ;A Y an N -x iT N T -e p o N-M nHYe ShChass 113:41-44 “People who are not worthy o f the kingdom o f the heav ens” ; n-eT®-p-®2 tuB . . . n - e T e - N - q - p - ® 2tUB an Rom 4 :4 -5 “One who works . . . One who does not work.” (b) Circumstantial: e p e - 2 Hpcu.a.HC 6 N -rex p A p x H c eJCN-TPAAiAAiA Luke 3:1 “And Herod being tetrarch o f Galilee” ; e p e - j c t u - c 6 o A n e B o A . 1 Cor 11:13 “Wiih her head being uncovered” ; e Y -M o o q ; e
246
THE
SENTENCE
PATTERNS
2 N-NeNTOAH T H p-oY NM- NJ^.1K iicuM i M -nJC oeic Luke 1:6 “Walking in all ihe commanilnieiits anil ordinances o f the Lord” ; (negation [i]) ^eNpcUMe . . . e p e N e Y M N T -iK ie ip T o c 2 Hn iN e-N G Y epH Y ShChass 168:57-169:4 “ People whose impurities are no secret to one another’’; 0 Y N T -c -T e 5 0 Y C ii g -^ k cu n c h e - ' V n KCUNC GY-KeAGYe N i - c iN Shiv 13:13-14 “ It has the authority to slay or not slay, without being ordered to do so"; \negalian [Hill OYptuMe h - o y c u t M -n o n H p o c e -M -n J C o e ic q ; o o n NM M i-q jin Sh lll 134:12 “Any single wicked person with whom ihe Lord does not dw ell” ; zeN K eM iiN . . . nxT e - N - c e - c H ^ iN e - n e ^iJCCucuMe John 20:30 “Other signs . . . which are not written in this book.”
(c) Preleril: n e p e - n o Y i n o Y i + M -neqoY O i e^oYN e p o - q
n -c m h
Athanasius, Life o f St. Anthony 9 (Garitte 14:24-25) “ Each one was rushing at him with a loud cry” ; nyjiJCe N e q - U ) o o n N N igPw -nN O Y Te John 1:1 “The Word was with God” ; (negation [i]) N e p e -N eq K ecN H Y r ip n ic x e Y e e p o - q iN John 7:5 “For even His brothers did not believe in Him” ; N eq-O Y tuuj r ip iN n e e-® M ooq ;e 2N--f-oY.2^iii John 7; 1 "For He did not want to go about in Judea.” (d) Focalizing: e e o A TCUN H ^iTN-OY e p e - N i i q ; o o n N i-N Shlll 72 :2 -3 “Whence or how is it that these things are happening to u s? ” ; e p e-T n H P H hi-ncuJTz 2 ^ - t 6 i j c M -n A iK iio c Prov 10:11 “The fountain o f life is in the hand o f the righteous” ; n -g t® jc o c e eY -JC O ce e x B e - N e Y n p iS ic N - i r i e o N ShIV 4 :2 -3 “The exalted are exahed on accouni o f their good deeds” ; (negation [i]) mh epe-neYBCUA. <^ oon a n e e o A 2 iTM-riHOYTe Gen 40:8 “ Is not the interpretation of them through G od?” ; t m n t e p o N-M nH Ye e c - ^ M - n e iM i iN h n i l ShAmel II 462; 10-11 “The kingdom o f the heavens is not here or there” : (negation [ii]) N -e p e -n p tO M e N i-cu N ^ iN e - n o e i K MMiTe Luke 4:4 “A person shall not live by bread alone” ; mh n - g n —cuq; iN N-Nirpi
321 Extraposition o f the subject 313 with its own extraposited mutable converter
is rare. Examples: circmistantia! ( e p e - . . . e * . . . ) oYMHHq;e i q - ^ e p e - n - e - c u i Y M o \T e e p o - q x e -V o Y i^ ic . . . e q -M o o < y e ^ ht - oy Luke 22:47 “ A crowd came, with the one called Judas . . . preceding them” ; preterit ( e - N e p e - . . . e - N e s . . . , circumstantial preterit) o n x o c e - N e p e - N-i^NOovF. m-^ m ing nim iY^u NK eicuoN . . . F .-N ev -N D i M -n —e x o Y -N i-M O Y exB H H x-q e Y < i)iN -o Y O M ^ N G Y -N i-M e ^ -p c u -o Y e p o - q iN g n g ^ ShGue 164b.-12-15 “Truly, if all kinds o f beasts and other living things . . . knew what they would die from if they ate it, they would never take a bite o f focalizing ( e p e - . . . e= . . . ) e p e - NNOBe r ip N-N^eAAHN MN-Ni-N-eX®-OYtU
247
DURATIVK
SKNTKNCK
322 Pattern 3: Non-definite Subject o y n - + Non-definite Subject I Predicate
OYN-6e Ae kcot e jc to -c “Another is building upon it” (1 Cor 3; 10) This pattern consists of a basic existential sentence ( oyn - / mn- ‘there is/there is not’) expanded by a durative predicate 479. oyhi-/MN- is sometimes absent in conversion 324(ii). Negation:
m n -
250 replaces
oyn -
OYN-, var. o y N - ; m n -. var. m m n-. After converters, o y N - ( o y N - ) is often written
y N - (y n -), and m m n- is often written m m n- without its first superlinear stroke: e - y i J - , N e - y f i - , g t g - m m n - (more rarely e x e - y N - ) etc.
Subject: non-definites (indef. and zero article phrases and pronouns), bare spec
ifiers, and bare specifier phrases. The pronoun o y o N nim and article phrases with . . . NIM occur sometimes in this pattern and .sometimes in Pattern 1. Subjects in the negative often have a zero article, whereas the corresponding affirmatives often have indef. o y - or j e n - ; likew ise, corresponding to o y N - o y i and o y N - j o e m e “ Someone is . . . , Some are . . . ” is negative M iJ -A iiy “ No one is . . . , None are . . . ”.
Subject and predicate are not bound; consequently, an enclitic conjunction such as Ae 235(b) or a modifier of the subject can interrupt the sequence of Subject I Predicate: oyn - 6 e a e kcut. For oy n -®6om ‘be able (to)’, cf. 394. Further examples: e q ;cu n e oyN-oyMeAoc u;cuNe 1 Cor 12:26 “ If one member suf fers” ; i y - N i y jce-M MN-6eJCoT MMiy John 6:22 “They saw that there had been no other boat there” ; mh o y N -® M ee y e noA yM ei nmma - k ApophPatr 181 (Chaine 44:16-17 = Z 317:21-22) “ Are any thoughts bothering you?” ; e q ; J c e - o y N - o y i. Me M -n N o y x e 1 Cor 8:3 “ But if indeed one loves God” ; n - e x e - o y N - o y o N e p o - t | Sh lll 149:6-7 “The debtor” ; N^Me o y N - i P i e o N nim N i- q ;c u n e N i - q Shiv 188:1-2 “Truly, every good thing will happen to him” ; M N -oyoN nim N i - q ; - t |i 2i - n e i q ; i j c e Malt 19:11 “Not all can bear this saying"; o y N - j i ?
Conversions: Relative, circumstantial, preterit, focalizing. Cf. 324.
323 Pattern 3a: Definite or non-definite subject presented by e i c A similar pattern is formed with e i c - ‘here is, behold’. e i c - + Definite or Non-definite Subject I Predicate eic-rjOYPPo nhy n e -® “ Behold, your king is coming to you” (Matt 21:5) 248
THK SKNTKNCK
PATTKRNS
W hen formed with e i c - . this pattern is compatible with both definite and nondefinite subjects; it has no negation and no conversions. For further examples, cf. 479.
C O N V K R S I O N S OF P A T T K R N
3
324 (i) Affirmative and negative: Immutable sentence converter ( e x e - , e - . N e -, e - 396[b]) + whole basic pattern Basic OYN-zeNgioM e cto T n , MN-^cgiMe c tu x n “ Some women choose. No women choose” Relative eT 6 -(o )Y N -2eN2 ioMe Circumstantial e -(o )Y N -2eN2 ioMe Preterit N e -(o )y N -2eN2 ioMe Focalizing e -(o )Y N -2eN2 ioMe
c c o rn , c to r n , c to r n , c to r n ,
eT e-M N -^cgiM e e-M N-® c2 iMe Ne-M N -^cgiM e e-M N -^cgiM e
c c o rn c to x n c to x n c to x n
(ii) Affirmative variant: M utable converter ( e r e p e - , e p e - , N e p e -, e p e - ) in place of o y N Basic
OYN-gENZioMe ctoT n, “ Some women choose”
Relative Circumstantial Preterit Focalizing
eT e p e -g eN g io M e c to x n e re -g e N Z io M e c t o r n N epe-geN Z ioM e c to r n ep e-g eN Z io M e c to r n
(Hi) Focalizing with negation o f topic element 453 e re -M N - . . . c to rn Examples, (a)Relative: (i) nzcue e x e - o Y N - j i j NoyJCe MMo-q e n i j o y MMO-Oy exBe-® 2 0 Mx ShChass 85:40-44 “The thing that many neglect for money” ; MMi M - n e x p i nM i e x e -M N -^ K i? e-N i< i)c u -q N jH x -q Matt 13:5 “Rocky ground, where there (was) not much soil” ; {it) n M i r i p e x e p e - C N iy H o ;o m n x c o o y ? e p o - q e - n i p i N Matt 18:20 “For where two or three are gathered in my name.” (b) Circumstantial: (i) e-yN -oyM H H
249
DURATIVF
SKNTFNCF
e T e-M N -® 6tu p 5 a e n h y e x n - n i m s b o a g V T o o T - g Job 25:3 “ And upon whom will there not come a snare from him ?"; m h e T e - M N - 6 o M m m o - g i g - ^ t o y Jce-THYTN Isa 50:2 “ Pray tell, is it that I do not have the ability to save you?”
I
250
Non-durative Conjugation The Structure of Non-durative Conjugation 325 Components and Patterns o f Non-durative Conjugation Tense and Co-occurring Categories 326 Distinguishing Features o f the Three Patterns 327 The ‘Non-durative’ Infinitive 328 Direct O bject Syntax o f M utable Infinitives 329 Term in Extraposition 330 Postponed Subject 331 Other Elaborations o f Subject or Infinitive 332 Adverbial Premodifier 333 The Non-durative Conjugation Patterns 334 Pattern 1: The M ain-clause Bases 334 Past tense j i - 334 Extension o f x - b y another clause 335 ‘Not y et’ MnjkTe- 336 Aorist u jjip e - 337 Optative e p e - 338 a. M ain clause 338 h. Subordinate d a n se 338 c. Entity statement 338 etjNJk- as optative 339 Jussive MA.pe- 340 Extensions o f the optative, jussive, or imperative Pattern 2: The Subordinate-clause Bases 342 Negation 342 A. Bases Forming Adverbial clauses 343 Precursive t J r e p e - 344 Extension o / t J r e p e - by another clause 345 Conditional epqjJiN - and e p e - 346 Extension o f epup^N - by another clause 347 Temporal clauses referring to the past 348 Limitative ujA.NTe- 349 B. Conjunctive Bases 350 Conjunctive w r e - 351 Environments o f the conjunctive 352
325
341
251 ». t
ir .
N O N - D U R A T I Vi ;
CONJUGATION
Extending a non-narrative verb 352 Extension within a subordinate clause 353 Extending or completing other elements 354 Following 355 Main clause in sequel to an adverbial clause 356 Future conjunctive T j^pe- 357 Environments of the future conjunctive 358 a. In sequel to an expressed command 358 b. In sequel to a rhetorical question 358 c. Independent clause (polite request) 358 d. After verb o f incomplete predication 358 e. Expressing purpose 358 Pattern 3: The Causative Infinitive x p e - 359 Conjugated 360 Expanding a verbal auxiliary 361 As a gendered common noun 362 Forming adverbial infinitive phrase 363
T H E S T R U C T U R E O F N O N -D U R A T IV E C q N J U G A T I O N C O M P O N K N T S A N D P A T T E R N S OF N O N - D U R A T I V K C O N J U G A T I O N
325 ‘Non-durative co njugation'is a net o f three patterns (1)
Ji-Tc A e oytuqjB “ But Jesus answered” (Luke 22:51) jiq-OYtoujB “He answ ered” (Matt 3:15)
(2)
hiTepe-Tc oycu “ W hen Jesus had finished” (Matt 7:28) hiTepeq-OYUJ -a.e “ And when He had ceased” (Luke 5:4)
(3)
. . . T p e - iH c o y c j\.e KOT-tj “ . . . Jesus to return” . . . T p e q - u ja ^ e A e “ . . . Him to speak”
(e.g. in Z M -n x p e -Ic j \ e K O T - q Luke 8:40 “Now as Jesus was reluming" and Z M -n T p e q -q ;iJc e j \ e Luke 11 ;37 “While He was speaking”)
each containing a non-durative conjugation base ( x - , N T ep e-, T p e - , etc.) as its first essential constituent, as follows: Conjugation Base + Emily Term + Infinitive The conjugation bases are nexus morphs 248, and they occur in two states 30 — prenominal and prepersonal.
252
STRUCTURE
OF
NON-DURATIVK
CONJUGATION
Prenominal Prepersonal State State
Pallern (I): Main Clause Bases Past Tense 334 affirm. (He chose) Past Tense neg. (He did not choose) ‘not yet’ 336 (He has not yet chosen) Aorist 337 affirm. (He chooses) MBs M G peAorist neg. (He does not choose) epee«eOptative 338 affirm. (He shall choose) Optative neg. (He shall not choose) N N eNNes Jussive 340 affirm. (Let him choose) MA^peMA^ps MnpTpe- MnpTpes Jussive neg. (Let him not choose)
X—
Xs
M neMnA.Te<^A^pe-
Mns= FinjLTs:
Pattern (2): Subordinate Clause Bases NTepe-
NTep=
e p q ;iN -
e * q ;iN -
var. e p e - e s u jiN T e - q;iNT= N TeN= T ip e -
T ip s
Precursive‘after, when’ (past) 344 f/yrer/jc Conditional‘if, when’ 346 c/jooira) Limitative ‘until’ 349 (Until he chooses) Conjunctive 351 ( . . . and choose) Future Conjunctive 357 ( . , . and he shall choose)
Pattern (3): Causative Infinitive Base Tpe-
Causative Infinitive 359 (... him to choose____ cause him to choose)
Tpe=
The bases are conjugated by suffixation of an entity term as subject ( a^-Tc , jk - q - , etc.); personal subjects are expressed by the personal intermediates 80. Two of the prepereonal ba.ses (e = e - and e = q ;iN -) are split morphs, in the middle of which the personal morph occurs (Ihus e=e occurs as e re -, e K e -, e p e -, e q e -. e c e - , etc.) A special set of personal intermediates occurs with the conjunctive base iis 83.
The conjugated base actualizes 160 the verb lexeme as a non-durative infini tive 328. (General details o f verbal syntax can be found in chapter 8.) Base + infinitive together constitute the predicate 247, in two (or three) discontinuous parts. The base is the syntactic nucleus of the predicate," and the infinitive expresses lexical content. The entity term is subject (actor of the verb).
subject A
-
past + tense (base)
OYCUOJB
IH C O Y C
“Jesus”
+
"Jesus answered”
"answer' (infinitive)
predicate ( "answered") In patterns built on a prenominal conjugation base, subject and infinitive are tiot bound; consequently, an enclitic such as A e 235(b) or an elaborating ele ment (or both) can interrupt the sequence of Subject I Infinitive: ji-Tu)giNNHc rjip nBA.nTicTHc e i Luke 7:33 “ For John the Baptist has com e.”
253
N O N - U U R A T I VE
C O N J IJ O A T I r ) N
In elliptical rhetoric, the infinitive is nol expressed and the base by itself makes up the predicate. E.g. oytg M n e -n iT p-®Noee oytg Mne-NeqKee?OTe John 9:3 "This man did not sin; and also his parents didn’t.”
TENSE A N D C O - O C C U R R I N G CATEGORIES
326 The overall Coptic tense system is described in chapter 25. Some non-durative bases express past or future time range within the main tense system. Others express a tenseless reference point; still others express relative time. Two of the bases are unrelated to the tense system. Past: A -/M n e - 334, M n ^ re - 336 Future: e p e - /N N e - 338, x ^ p e - 357 Tenseless: u p jip e -/M e p e - 337, n t € - 351 Relative time: after t J r e p e - 344, when(ever)/if e p u ;jiN - 346, until cyjiNTe- 349 Unrelated to tense: M A p e -Z M n p rp e - 340, r p e - 359 M ost bases also co-express non-tense categories, such as affirmation/nega tion, completion or expected completion of action, factual versus hypothetical action, intention/wish, sequel, causation. Those o f Patterns (1) and (2) also signal main or subordinate clause status 248, respectively. Still other, co-occurring, non-tense categories are formally signalled on a larg er scale by the discourse type 527 (e.g. narrative, generalization, authoritative command) in which the sentence occurs. The discourse perspective o f a par ticular type o f discourse (e.g. statement o f timeless truth, contemporaneous observation, etc.) is a major factor in the meaning expressed by any actual occurrence o f a non-durative pattern, as all these category systems intersect. Some of the bases of Pattern (I) also occur as in absolute state. Without subject or pred icate expressed, they have the function o f non-inflected interjections 241 of affirmation and denial; e.g. q ;o ‘Y es!’ (I, we, you, it, somebody etc. habitually does, c f cpa= 337); Mne ‘N o!’ (I, we, you, it, somebody etc. did not, cf. M n = 334); n n o ‘N o!’ (It shall not come to pass!, cf. NNe= 338). With personal subject attached, the base M ips 340 forms the inflected interjections 242 M i p o - N “ Let’s go” and M i p o - K “ W on't you go.”
327
D I S T I N G U I S H I N G F E A T U R E S OF T H E T H R E E P A T T E R N S
(1) Pattern 1 (334) forms main clauses 248 and is negatived by substitution of the negative alternant base 250 (thus M n e - in place o f a - ) ; e.g. a c - m o y M att 22:27 “ She died” ; neg. Matt 9:24 “ She has not died. She did not die.” It is subject to conversion (except for affirm, conditional e p e - ) . m h c
m o y
(2) Pattern 2 (342) forms subordinate clauses 248 and is negatived by t m 250 occurring between base and infinitive. It is not subject to conversion. E.g.
254
STRUCTURK
OF
N () N - D U R A T I V E C O N J U G A T I O N
N T e p o y -z e e p o - q Mark 1:37 “ W hen they found H im ” ; N T ep o y -T M -ze e p o - q Luke 2:45 “ W hen they did not find H im .” (3) Pattern 3 (359), the causative infinitive, functions simultaneously as con jugation base and infinitive. Being an infinitive, r p e can either be conjugated ( A q - T p e c - c t o T n “ He caused her to choose” ), or complete a verbal auxiliary (q - N A - T p e c - c t o T n “ He will make her choose”), or be actualized as am asc. common noun ( n - T p e c - c t o r n “ H er [act of] choosing” ). This ambivalence sets Tpe apart, in function and rank, from the other bases. It is negatived by TM - 250(b). E.g. e-® T peq-B toK egoYN e - T M N T - e p o M - n N o y T e Mark 10;25 “For him to enter the kingdom o f G od” ; e - ® T M - T p e q - 80 )ic e^oyN e-neeyJk^TpoN Acts 19:31 “ For him not to venture into the theater.”
THE ‘ N O N - D U R A T I V E ’ INFI NITIVE
328 In durative sentence patterns (chapter 14) the infinitive is actualized so as to express durativity (the enduring, ongoing, or general character o f an action or process). But when the infinitive is actualized in other environm ents, name ly non-durative conjugation as a masc. common noun 105(c) as the imperative (chapter 16) as a lexical com plem ent after the future auxiliary n a - ‘is going to ’ 311 or other verbal auxiliary 184 such as o v e u ; - ‘want to’ there is no expression o f the category o f durativity. Such may be termed the 'non-durative infinitive’, bearing in mind that this means nothing more than ‘an infinitive not explicitly expressing the category o f durativity’. (In other words, these four environments do not signal information about the category o f durativity one way or the other.) Syntactically, the non-durative infinitive is less restricted than the durative infinitive in how it relates to direct objects 329. D I R E C T O B J E C T S Y N T A X OF M U T A B L E
INFINITIVES
329 D irect object after the non-durative mutable infinitive. After a non-durative mutable infinitive 167, e.g. N oyJce n €JC- nojc = ‘cast (out)’, any zero article phrase as direct object normally is suffixed to the prenominal state. E.g. Mepe-AA.A.Y NeJC-®Hpn i - e p p e e-® 2coT n - a .c Mark 2 :2 2 “ No one puts new wine into old wineskins.” Any other direct objects of the mutable infini tive occur both mediated by the preposition n - , m m o = and suffixed to the infinitive NoyJce N - varies with n€JCN oyJce MMo= varies with nojc =
255
N O N - D t l K A I I VI :
C O N J ( Mi A i I O N
and these iw o coiiMruciions vary wiili one aiioihcr in stylistic contrast. For exam ples and further details, cf. 171(c).
TERM IN
extr a po sitio n
330 Any personal morph (or personal elem ent o f the possessive article) within the sentence pattern can be anticipated by a term in extraposition, that is, a term placed at the front o f the sentence pattern (‘extraposited’) Extraposited Term
Sentence Pattern (contains a personal morph agreeing with the extraposition) Anticipation I Resumption Topic under discussion I Comment I Jktj-Jcno n - icaak “ Abraham, I he begat Isaac” (Matt 1:2) and thus set off as a topic o f thought. Extraposition and personal morph agree in (person)/number/(gender). The agreeing personal morph shows how the extraposited term relates to the sentence.
(a) 1st and 2d pereon morphs can only be preceded by an extraposited personal inde pendent. NTCUTN I iT E T N - i i - q N-*CnHAilON N-®COONe “But as for you, I you make it aden of robbers” (Matt 21; 13)
(b) 3d person morphs can be preceded by either a personal independent or some other entity term. NToq A e I NTepeq-BtUK “ He, 1 when he came” (Acts 11:23) nel^tuB I ii - N i Y e p o - q “ I had the following vision (As for the following thing, I I saw it)" (Shlll 38:3—4) (For extraposition o f the subject with its own conjugation base, cf. 332[a].) Several terms can occur in extraposition, side by side. T il 1 eBOA ZM-nec«ycucuT 1 n -eT ® -N T i-c T H p-q I ic -N O J c -q “B ui she out of her poverty put in all that she had (But she, I out of her poverty, I all that she had, I she pui it in)” (Luke 21:4) NTCUTN A e 1 n -e T ^ -c y iiB n A iK iio c 1 iT e T N - ip N i MMo-q “ But you denied the Holy and Righteous One (But you, I the Holy and Righteous One, I you denied Him)” (Acts 3; 14) Further examples; N il I e T eT N O ;iN -Z ip ez eptu -T N e p o - o Y Act.s 15:29 “ If you keep yourselves from these"; N -N - e N T -iy -c tu T M e - n u ; i i . e I iY ~ riicT eY e Acts 4:4 “But many of those who heard the word believed” ; n i m N -p p o eq-Ni-BCUK e-®Miq;e N M -K eppo I mh N - q - N x - 2 M ooc iN N«yopn N q -Jci-^m o JtN e Luke 14:31 “ What king, going to encounter another king in war, will not sit down First and take counsel?”
256
S T R U C ’T l J R f
POSTPONED
OF
s u b j e c t
N O N - D U R A T I V li C O N J U G A T I O N
: ENTITY TERM E X P A N D I N G
A PERSONAL
SUBJECT
331 A 3d-person subject (tj, c , y ) can be expanded by an entity term later in the clause. T he expansion elem ent is usually m ed iated by n 6 i - . A q - e i n 6 i -T c (M att 3; 13) “ Jesus ca m e” N T epeq-M O Y -ae n 6 i - ? h p
OTHER
E L A B O R A T I O N S OF S U B J E C T OR I N F I N I T I V E
332 Other elaborations o f subject o r infinitive. A dditionally, the follow ing elab o rations o f subject and infinitive also occur.
(a)
Extraposition o f the subject 3 30 with its own extraposited base: A -n p to M e Aq-CCUTn Examples; i^ -N e rp iM M iT e y c i e N M -N e < f> ip ic c iio c i y - i p x i m—''MOKMeK Luke 5:21 “ And the scribes and the Pharisees began to question” ; e p e - n N o y T G M -neNXoeic Ic n e x c neicuT M -neooy eqe--f' n h - t n N - o y n N i N -c o < t)ii Eph 1:17 “So that the God of our lord Jesus Christ, the Father o f glory, might give you a spirit o f w isd om ” ; h e p u j A N - z o y o e-N M H H u ;e
N T-A K -Jcoo-c Jc.e-ce-Jc.i-®2Niy NA-q eymAN-ncuNT na-V eJCN-'f'-®co SliChass 4 1 :1 1 -1 6 “ Indeed, if more than the crowds that you claim are bringing pos sessions to him are ceaselessly transferring their allegiance to me"; n t g - t m n t A T -C B B e
TGBOA
2 N - T e < f > y c lC
e -A C -JC e K -n N O M O C
GBOA. iJ c - K p iN e
M M O -K
Roin 2:27 “ And the uncircumcision o f the physical element that has kepi the Law (i.e. those who are physically uncircumcised but have kept the Law) will condemn you”
257
N O N - D U R A T I VK
CONJUGATION
(h) Multiple subjects expanding one single base: ji-n p to M e ccuxn
T ecgm e
Two or more non-personal subjects can be linked by n N - , h , etc. within the con jugation pattern. E.g. i- N e < f ) ip ic c iio c .a.e NM -NerpiM M ixeYC KpSpM ejoY N e-N cqM ieH T H C Luke 5:30 “And the Pharisee.^ and Jhe scribes murmured against His disciples.”
(c) Multiple subjects each with its own base: A.-npcuMe (A.Yto) A -xecziM e c to x n Examples;
n t o k
jlb
M n e -® p e tj-n e ^ -® C N O tj
b b o a
M n e -® p e tj-q jM u ;e -
®ei.a. 0 A 0 N M n e - ® 2 e A A H N . . . t c i o - k
ShChass 26:53-27; 11 “ But for your part, mur derers, idolaters, pagans (etc.) did not satisfy you”
(d) Multiple infinitives expanding one single base and subject: A -npcow e bcuk A.Y
adverbial
PREMODI FI FR BFFORF THF SENTFNCF PATTFRN
333 An adverb or prepositional phrase (chapter 9) preceding the sentence pattern lays down a circumstance or relationship o f time, place, manner, degree, or attitude in. which the sentence is being asserted (i.e. under which tlie predica tion is made). Premodifier I Sentence Pattern eT®-PiMA.Y I A . q - e i n 6 i - i
2PA.I A e g N - N e g o o y
Adverbial clauses and infinitive phrases 490 occur in this position with the same function; e.g. NxepoY-NJiY e - n c i o Y I A^Y-P^yJ® Matt 2:10 “ When they saw the star, they rejoiced.” Conjunctions and initial attitude markers (chapter 10) also occur in premodifier position.
258
PATTKRN
1:
MAIN-CLAUSE
BASKS
T H E N O N -D U R A T IV E C O N JU G A T IO N P A T T E R N S PATTERN
I;
THE M A I N - C L A U S E BASES
334 T he p a st tense a jiq -ctO T n /M n ti-ccu T n He chose or has chosen He did not choose or has not chosen Bases: affirm, x - ,
neg. M n e-, Mn= Affirmative
Negative
1 i i -
iN -
2
iT G T N -
J.K -
i-,
3
iqic-
vars.
M n i-
f i n e - , Var.
ip-, i p e -
iY -
M n iJ -
MneXN-
MHK-
Mnq-
Mnp-
M n o \-
Mnc-
A.- expresses the past time range without' reference to durativity. (English translations o f ji- are influenced by the discourse type 527 in which it occurs; e.g. event-oriented narrative, John 3:26 "They came to John,” versus present-based description o f the past, tJ-A.NOK a.n n e n e 5^ A.AAA. Jce-tlT-A.Y-TA.YO-eI 2AeH Pi-n-eT^-hiMAY John 3:28 “ I am not the Christ, but / have been sent before H im .” ) Further examples: iq-JCi n - o y o T k i q - C M O Y e p o - q i q - n o u ; - q ay*^ i q - T i i - q N i - Y Mark 14:22 “ He took bread, blessed it, broke it, and gave it to them” ; M n q - p - A i i y n - 6 o m S - n M i eT®-MMiY Mark 6:5 “ And He did no mighty work there” ; i K - i e - ® T i K O - N Luke 4:34 “ Have You come to destroy u s? ” ; Mnc-MOY iA A i ec-NKOTic Mark 5:39 “She has not died but is sleeping” ; n n o Y T e M n e - A i i Y NiY e p o - q e n e ? John 1:18 “No one has ever seen God” ; i N O K il-eT 2 M -npiN M-niTcuT iY
Conversions: affirm, (i) relative ( g n t - a - and var. n t - a - ) , (ii) circum stan tial (e - A - ) , (Hi) preterit ( n e - A - ) , (iv) focalizing ( n t - a - and var. € n t - a - ) ;
259
N O N - D U R A T I VI ;
CONJUGATION
neg. (v) relative ( e r e - M n e - ) , (vi) circumstantial ‘w ithout. . . -ing’ ( e - M n e and var. M ne-), (vii) preterit ( n e - M n e - ) , (viii) focalizing with negation of topic element 453 (e re -M n s ). Often, the circumstantial conversion o f the negative base is simply written h in e -, Mn« (for e - M n e - , e-M n=); e.g. N N e Y -e u ;- p -A jk jk Y N-gtoB e j c c u - o y M n o y -JC N O Y -o Y ShIV 44:27 “ They shall not be empowered to do anything without asking them .” Further examples; (() n jc o e ic eNT-iK-JCi-®OYa e p o - q ShChass 42:34—35 “The Lord, whom you have blasphemed": (ii) oyenicTO AH e - i t | - c i 2 - c q ;i-N ecN H Y eT®-2 N -T e5 H ne Athanasius, Life o f St. Anthony, title (Garitte 1:3-4) “ An epistle thal he wroie to ihe brethren who were in foreign counlries” ; (Hi) n e - i q - e i g b o a 2 M -n e io o p iY<^ n e q -M e ? n —MCi? . . . NToq .a.e iq -jc io o p Athanasius, Life of St. Anthony 15 (Garitte 21: 7-9) “ He had come via the canal and it had been full of crocodiles . . . But he prayed and went across” ; (iv) n e ijtu B N T -ii-N iY 2 M-rteBOT e n H n ShIV 198:15 “ It was in the month of Epepthat I had this vision” ; (v) npcuMe exe-Mrtq-BCUK 2 M -nu;oJCNe N -N iceB H C Ps 1:1 “ The person who has not walked in the counsel o f the ungodly” ; (vi) e - M n i - c 0 YN-®2 0 0 YT Luke 1:34 “ Without my having known a man” : cf. also below: fvjj) e - N e - M n i - ^ John 15:22 “ If I had noi come” ; fvjjj) eT e-M rte*-Jccu2 M Ji-M i. Jer 3:2 (quoted in Besa, Frag. 35 [Kuhn 116:14-15]) “ In what place is it that you (fem.) have nol been defiled?”
335 Extension o f
by another clause occurs in four patterns:
(a)
A.- . . . A.YtO A.-
(h)
X - . . . X - . . . ( ‘asyndetic’ linkage, i.e. without conjunction) Very close linkage, signalled by absence o f a conjunction between clauses; e.g. iY ~ r ti2T -o Y iy - o Y tu q ;T N i - q “They beni down and worshiped H im ” ; iN - m e n - ^ g i c e 2 N-TeY
(c) (d)
A- . . . e - A - . . . (sequential circumstantial, cf. 428) A - . . . (AYtu) N T e - . . . ( n t € - expanding relative or circumstantial con version o f X -, or expanding A C -u ;to n e 353, 354[c])
336 ‘Not y et’ M n ^ re — /M nA .T tj-C tO T n
He has not yet chosen Base: neg. (only) M n ^ re -, m tixts (Negative) 1 Mni-f--, rare var. M n iT i2 M niTK M n ix e 3 M n iT q MrtiTC-
260
MrtaTNMniTGTNMniTOY-
PATTERN
1:
MAIN-CLAUSE
BASES
M njkTe- is a negative base. It expresses a p resent-based description o f the past in term s o f w hat has not happened up to now and expresses the expectation that it can o r will eventually occur: M nA .T c-ctoT n “ She has not yet chosen.” Examples: M nixe-T iO Y N O Y John 2:4 “ My hour has not yet to m e ” ; MniTOY-NOJC-K pcu e-n eq ;T eK cu o Y n e e N-N-eT®-MMiY Shlll 103:19-20 “They have not yet even thrown you into prison, as they did to those others” A corresponding affirmative (“She already has or had . . . ”) is supplied by: (i) hj^.h ‘already’ with the past tense (e.g. hj^.h iTeT N -p-® pM M io 1 Cor 4:8 “ Already you have become rich” ); (ii) past tense o f the verb OYtu completed by the circumstan tial durative construction o f a verb 185(a), e.g. i q - o Y t o eq-p-**N oeiK e p o - c Matt 5:28 “He has already committed adultery with her.”
Conversions: (neg.) (i) relative ( e r e - h i n j i T e - ) , (ii) circum stantial ‘before . . . ’ ( e - M n jiT e - and var. MnA.Te-), (Hi) p reterit (N e-M n A .T e-), (no focal izing conversion). O ften the circum stantial conversion is sim ply w ritten hinA .Te-, MnA.T= (for e -M n A .T e -, e-MnA.T=); e.g. MnA.Te-OYJ^AeKTtop M oyT e N - c e n cna .y K-NA.-A.nA.pNA. m m o - T h i-u ;M N T -c to to n M ark 14:72 "Before a rooster has crowed tw ice, you w ill deny m y three tim es” ; gAOH KinATe—n e 5 ^ bcoa e e o A n - t 6 om t h p ^ M -nA iA BO A oc 2 ' ~ n e ^ o c S hC hass 7 4 :4 6 -5 0 "Before Christ on the cross had destroyed all the d e v il’s p o w er.” Further examples: (/) o y o n r i p n i m e T e -M rtiT 0 Y - c 0 Y
337 T he a o rist u ;A p e u ;A q -c to T n /M e q -c to T n H e (generally) ch ooses or will choose o r chose H e (generally) does n o t or will not or did not or cannot choose
Bases: affirm . u ; A p e - .
u ;a = ;
neg. M e p e - , Me»
Affirmative
Negative
1 q ;iT -
0^3l N -
M er-
M eN -
2 q ;iK -
< ^ 3 lT e T N -
M GK-
M exeTN -
< i)ip e -
3
y jiq -
M epeM eq-
M GY-
M ec-
u ;A p e - expresses nexus betw een actor and verbal action w ithout reference to any particular range o f time. It is a tenseless (generic, atem poral, extratem poral,
261
n o n
- d u r a t i v e
c o n j u g a t i o n
omnitemporal) reference point next to the Coptic tense system 525. (Its name, the aorist or ‘unlim ited’ conjugation, should not be confused with the term ‘aorist’ in ancient Greek grammar.) a j a .p e - often co-occurs with the discourse perspective 527 o f timeless truth (gnomic/wisdom literature, theology) so as to express generalizations and gnomic assertions about habitual actions or propensities; and about what does or does not, will or will not, can or cannot, did or did not, happen by nature. (English correspondents o f the aorist are usu ally the generalizing present simple he chooses and the generalizing future simple he will choose, negative he does not chooselwill not or cannot choose.) Also, like the conjunctive 351, it can come under the aegis o f any time range that has already been expressed or implied by the preceding text to which it is a sequel. F or u jjip e - in a past tense context, cf. also 348. The Coptic durative present tense q - c t u r n also occurs in this kind o f discourse 527. Examples: a jip e -o Y u ;H p e n -c o 4 )O C eY
N q-p-® C M O T
NiM
jN -Z E N C X H M i
jc eK iC
e q -N i-p -'* 2 J k ^
iN T cu N ioc I NToq AC e q - M e e y e e - n e x c jM -n eq g H T M N -n eitu p ? n - n o h poN Fi-Teq'l'YX'^ u^iq-tuu^M N-NejcHBC M-n-eT®-MMiY (collated) Athanasius, Life o f St. Anthony 5 (Garitte 8:1 0 -2 2 ) “He came out and fought against Anthony . . . As the enemy insinuated filthy thoughts into him, Anthony repelled them through prayer. The enemy brought upon him the wish for pleasure, but Anthony started to fee) shame and built a barricade around his body through faith and fasting. Furthermore, at night the devil had taken the form o f woman and had assumed various forms o f appearance, so that he might deCeive Anthony. But he, by thinking on Christ in his heart and the intel lectual vision o f his soul, extinguished that enem y’s glowing coals” ; n-
262
PATTURN
I:
MAIN-CLAUSE
BASUS
eT e-M M iC T ir5 jitu - O Y M N -N e n N i N - i K i e i p r o N eY
Conversions: affirm, (i) relative (e T e -u jA .p e - and var. e -u jA .p e -), (it) cir cum stantial ( e - u j j i p e - ) , (Hi) preterit ( N e -u jj^ p e -), (iv) focalizing ( e - u jji p e - ) ; neg. (v) relative ( e r e - M e p e - ) , (vi) circumstantial ( e - M e p e - ) , (vii) preterit ( n e - M e p e - ) , (no focalizing conversion?) Examples; (i) cimcun n -e x e -o jiY -M O Y T e e p o -q jc e -n e T p o c Matt 4:18 “Simon, who is called Peter” ; n il e-u ;iY -M O Y T e e p o -q J c e - n e x c Matt 1:16 “ (The One) who is called Christ” ; (ii) a ;a 2 p ii e - 2eNNTH6 e-q ^iY -M O A j-o Y ShIV 85: !2 “ Even sahed herbs” ; N e - i q - p - 2 eN No6 r i p N -o Y o eiu ; e - u ) iq - T o p n - q Luke 8:29 “For it had spent much time in seizing him ” ; (Hi) N eiu ^^ x e j^.e M N -N eijBH Ye M N -jeN K ooY e e -N iU jc o -o Y N e - q jX N - ii- Y n e iY^u N e -q ;iN -J c .o o -Y eN-OY
338 T he op tativ e e p e e q e -c tO T n /N N e q -c tu T n
He shall choose, or . . . (that) he might choose He shall not choose, or . . . (that) he might not c h o o se,. . . lest he choose Bases: affirm, e p e - , 6 * e - ; neg. n n € - , NNes (and e N N e-, eNNe*, cf. below) Affirmative 1 e ie 2 eK e-
ece-
N N i-, rare var. N N elNN eK -
N N en N N exN -
NNe-
e p e -
3 eqe-
Negative
ENGexeTNe-
eye-
NNeqNNec-
NNeY-
Immediately following jc e K i(i)c , a variant of the negative based on eNNe* can occur (the identity of initial e in this variant is uncertain). 1st sing. neg. jc e K i(i)c e N N i- is liable to confusion with 1st pi. affirm. i,e K i( i) c e N - N i.- 339. Negative Variant
1 eNNi—
eNNeN-
2 eN N eK eN N E3 eN N eqeN N ec-
eN N eTN -
Frenominal:
eN N eye N N e -
For e Y -N i-. e K - N i - , e p e - N i - etc. as optative, cf. 339.
263
NON-DURATIVE
CONJUGATION
Conversions: (i) neg. relative (eTe-NNe=, var. eTe-Ne=); (ii) neg. circum stantial ( e - N N e = , var. NNe» with e - unwritten) Examples: {i) f i e e e re -N N e Y -e c y -M e c y T -N Z in M - n N o y r e Aytu e r e - N N e v eqp-N -pA T-O Y N -N eq 2 io o Y e (textual vars. e T e - N e y - - - - e T e - N e y - ■■■) Rom 11:33 “How unsearchable are G od’s judgements and how inscrutable his ways!” ; (ii) Necj2 oTTe aY“ ^ ° Y 2 eMATe e -N N e -< ^ -o Y p A 2T n - t c u 6 c T p e Y -n ip e giJCM-nKA? Mark 9:3 “And his garments became glistening, intensely white, as no fuller on earth could bleach them” ; ak - ku ) na - y fl-oYTCucy NNeY-(i.e. e-N N eY -)ecy-C A A T -q Ps 103(104):9 “Thou hast set them a bound which they shall not pass”
Generally, e p e - expresses a future tense without explicit connection to the speaker’s present situation (e.g. to formulate legislation of what is to be done). Thus it contrasts with the more usual, durative, present-based n a - future 311 (‘is going to . . . ’). Following jce(KAAC) it forms the usual expression of pur pose (So that he might). (a) M ain (independent) clause i. e p e - expressing future tense with a strong expectation of fulfillment e p e - n j c o e i c TcDcuBe na -< j KATA-Neqa^Hve “The Lord shall requite him for his deeds” (2 Tim 4:14) In actual occurrences, the meanings of main-clause e p e - are greatly affected by the types o f discourse 527 in which it occurs and the authority status of the speaker, in context. These include: authoritative promises, and predictions (I will or will not. You shall not. They shall); commands, legislation, and oaths (You shall. They shall, / will); prohibitions (You shall not. They shall not); strong wishes (Let me. You must, May he); etc. For extensions o f the mainclause optative, cf. 341. Further examples: eTe-Kcu n —OYMNT-Ocijce 2 N-TeKMHTe M N -T ecg in e Gen 3:15 “1 shall put enmity between (In the midst oO you and the woman” ; 2^m hn -t--J(.cu M M o-c NH—TN Jce-N NeY -'t’-®MAe IN N- T e Ir e N e i Mark 8:12 “Truly, Isay to you, no sign shall be given to this generation” ; NNeN-oYCUM oY^a^e NNeN -ccu cyANTN-2 CUTB M -n ^Y ^ o c Acts 23:12 (oath) “ We shall not eat nor drink until we have killed Paul” ; NNei-:xiOYe I N N e i - p - ® M N T p e n - n o y jc I NNei-:xi-**6oA Shlll 20:13-14 (oath) “ I shall not steal, I shall not bear false witness, 1 shall not lie” : nANOYTe J^e eqe-JCtOK eB o\ N -reT N xpiA T H p -c Phil 4:19 “ And my God will supply all your need” : N N e — ®KApnoc cycune e e o A rl2 H T -e J(iN-TeNOY cyA -eN e2 Matt 21:19 “ May no fruit ever come from you again!” ; e K e T A eie-n eK eicu T MN-TeKMAAY 19:19 “You shall honor your father and your mother” ; NNeK-topK n n o y jc I e K e -'f’ .a.e N-NeKANAYup M -n Jc o e ic Matt 5:33 “You shall not swear falsely, but shall perform to the Lord what you have sworn” ; CAcyq N -2 0 0 Y ereT N e-o Y tu M N -2 eN A eiB Exod 12:15 “ Seven days ye shall eat unleavened bread” ; NNeK-2 tu T i Deut 5:17 “Thou shalt not commit mur der” ; N NeTN-cycune S e e ri-N 2YnoKpiTHc Matt 6:5 “ You must not be like the
264
PATTERN
I:
MAIN-CLAUSE
BASES
hypocrites” ; NNe-^pcuMe AMAzre n - t 6 i j c M -n-eT ® -2 iTOYtu-q ZOACUC ShIV 168:12 “No person shall under any circumstances hold hands with the one who is next to them” ; NToq j^.e nJcoVc N--f-pHNH e q e --t- n h - t n N--t-pHNH 2 Thess 3:16 “ Now may the Lord o f peace H im self give you peace” ; iy t u e q e - j c o o - c N 6i-nA A O c T H p-q j c e - e q e - u p c u n e e q e -u p c u n e Ps 105(106);48 “And all the people shall say. Amen, Amen (Let it be. Let it be)” ; TApN-6cu gP i-nN O B e jc e —e p e -T e x A p ic p-® 20Y 0 1 N N ec-u p cu n e Rom 6 :1 -2 “Are we to continue in sin that grace may abound? By no means (It shall not b e )!” ; -f-pHNH e c e - c y c u n e n a - k Judg 6:23 “Peace be to thee” ; e u p ton e eif^AN-nApABA M -n -e N T -A i-g o M O A o r e i MMo-q e ie -N A Y e -T M N T -e p o N -M nH ye n t a - t m - b c u k e g o y N e p o - c S h lll 20; 15-17 “ If I violate the oath that I have sworn, may I see the kingdom o f the heavens and not go into it”
ii. J c e - or jc g k a ( a ) c + e p e - expressing polite o r restrained co m m an d /p ro hibition (W ould you . . . o r polite w ish directed to a 1st or 3d person (Let
me. M ay he) JceicAC 6 e e K e - e i N f-K A -T O O T -K 2 ijc c u -c “ C om e and lay Y o u r hands on h e r” (M ark 5 :2 3 ) Further examples; a a a a JceKAC eve-JCCuK e e o A N6i-Nerpi
(b) Subordinate clause (dependent) j c e - o r JceKA(A)c + e p e - form ing adverbial clause o f purpose/result 5 02, 504 (so th a t. . . m i g h t s o as to so t h a t . . . ) JCeKAC A e NNeN-CKANAAAlXe MMO—OY BCDK e-eAAACCA NP-NOY-Xe N -T e K o e iM e “ H ow ever, so that w e m ight n o t give offense to them , go to the sea and cast your h o o k ” (M att 17:27) TOTe A Y -e iN e N A -q N -z e N u jH p e ojhm jceKAC e q e -T A A e -N e q 6 iJ C ejco^-O Y N tj-ujA H A “ T h en children w ere brought to H im that H e m ight lay His hands on them and p ra y ” (M att 19:13) A fter jceKA(A)c, negative N N e-/N N e » is often spelled eN N e-/eN N A ». In this construction j c e - is immediately bound to the conjugation base, e.g. jc e —epe-TMAAY M -nAJC oeic ^ epAT-^ Luke 1:43 “That the mother o f my Lord should come to m e.” But :xeKA(A)c (a terminal morph) is often separated from the con jugation base by an intervening element (term in extraposition 330, adverbial preniodifier 333, enclitic conjunction such as A e 235[b] or initial attitude marker, inflected mod ifier, adverbial clause); e.g. JceKAC 2 t u t u - c e c e - c y c u n e 2 N - T n ip e e N iA Athanasius, Life o f St. Anthony 3 (Garitte 5 :3 -4 ) “ So that she too might live in the man ner o f a virgin” ; JceKAc n t c u tn eT eT N e-B cuK NTeTN--t--®KApnoc John 15:16
265
N O N -O U R A T I Vi; C O N J U G A T I O N “That you should go and bear fruit"; JceKjLC o n NupHpe N xe-nN O Y T e eT *-jcoop e e e o A e q e - c o o Y 2-O Y e - y M i n - o y i u t John 11:52 "But to gather into one the chil dren o f God who are scattered abroad.” Further examples: (i) purpose. M np-K piN e JceKAc n n g y - k p in g m m u j-tn Matt 7 : 1 “ Judge not, that you be not judged” ; a a a a j c c k a c N N e-n u p iJ c e M ooupe e-n eg O Y O g S -n A A O c M A p N -n ip irr iA e n a - y e-® T M -cyiJce 6 e Acts 4:17 “ But in order that word may spread no further among the people, let us warn them to speak no more” ; e x B e - n iT z t o t o - q Tc J t e -e q e - T B B e -n A A O c 2 iT M -n e q c N o q MMiNMMO-q Aq-MOY nBOA N-TnYAH Heb 13:12 “ So Jesus also died outside the gate in order to sanctify the people through His own blood” ; n a i J^.e A q-X A pi2e MMO-OY N-NpcuM e M -n eq + M e JCGKAC N N eY -eN to x A ei NA -q M N -reqctO N e 2N-AAAY N - 2 UJB Athanasius, Life of St. Anthony 2 (Garitte 4 :1 8 -2 0 ) “ And he bestowed them upon the people o f his village, so that he and his sister might not be encumbered by any affairs” (or Lest he and his sister be encumbered); JceKAAC eNNA-KtOT e z p i f eJC N -K e-cN T e Rom 15:20 “ Lest 1 build on another man’s foun dation” ; JteKAAC e N N e -O Y i J c o o - c jc e-N T -A T eT N -B A n r ize e -n ip A N 1 Cor 1:15 “ Lest anyone should say that you were baptized in my name” ; (ii) result NiM n e -N T -iq -p -® N O B e 1 o a t n e J C N -N eq ^ io re Ne jceKAC (textual var. JceKAAc) e Y e - J c n o - q e q - o b—®BAAe John 9:2 “Rabbi, who sinned, this man or his parents, that he should be bom blind?” ; N T-A Y ~^“jp n J c e - e Y e - g e Rom 11:11 “Have they stumbled so as to fall?” ; Te-oYu?M s b o a 2 N - i K i e i p c i i nim N-®A iiMONION jceKAC eY e-M ecTu)-® eBOA 2 I t n - 7 c mn —N e q ir r e A o c Sh lll 203:9-11 “You eat from all the filth o f demons, so that you are hated by Jesus and His angels”
:xe(KjLjLC) e p e - also occurs after certain verbs of incomplete predication 185(d), e.g. verbs of agreement, command, entreaty, exhortation, fear, glad. ness, persuasion, profitableness, sufficiency, worthiness, etc. Cf. 502. N -'t'-M n o ji jln JceK ic e K e - e i ezoyN z ^ -T iO Y e z c o i “ I.am not worthy for you to come under my roof” (Matt 8 :8) This function overlaps in meaning with e - ® r p e - 363. Further examples: N -q -M ijc y i pu) AN N-®TAYe-npAN M -nNOYTe MAAicTA Jc e-e q e -p -® M N T p e MMO-q Shill 17:9-10 “He is not even worthy to utter the name o f God, especially so as to take an oath on it” ; a j c i - c jk ek a c e p e -N e itO N e p-® oeiK Matt 4:3 “Command these stones to become loaves” (Say for these stones to become loaves); c e n c - n j c o e i c J^.e M -nu)2C JK e-eqe-NeJC-®eprATH c eBOA e - n e q u ) 2c Luke 10:2 “Pray therefore the Lord o f the harvest to send out laborers into his harvest” ; c e - p - ® 2 0 T e 2 H T-q M - n ir r e A o c J ce-N N eq -n A T A C ce m m o - o y ay^u Nq-MOOYT-OY ShIV 21 :2 -4 “They fear lest the angel strike and kill them.”
As an individual component of the sentence, the morphs x e - and JceKJL(jL)c are negatived by jln (“ not so that . . . cf. 199); e.g. JceK^iC jln eY e-'t' N -oY eA oj ezHT-THYTN i-W i. n p o c -o Y T C iN o ! Cor 7:35 “N ot to lay any restraint upon you, but in the interest o f good order.” (c) Forming an entity statement 150 x e - or JceKjL(jL)c + e p e - , e.g. as predicate of a nominal sentence or as sub ject expansion of a clause 486
266
PATTERN 1: MAIN-CLAUSE BASES M -noYti>up JiN n e M - n e n n T O e a o A M - n ^ e ic u T eT® -2N -M nH Ye J c e K ic e q e - z e eao A . n 6 i - o y j ^ N -N eiK oyi “ It is not the will of My
Father who is in heaven that one of these little ones should perish” (Matt !8:14) Further examples: TAZpe a n o k r e jcekac e e~ ie-e ~ ip e M -n o y io u p M - n e N T -iq -T A O Y O -^ i John 4 :34 “ My own food is for Me to do the will o f Him who sent M e” ; n i l n e nupAJce n t - a n - cujtm e p o - q jciN N -up opn JceK^c e n e M ep e-N eN ep H Y 1 John 3:11 “For this is the m essage that we have heard from the beginning, that we should love one another” ; a n a y Jte-OYAcy N - ? e r e TAPinH N T -A -n eitO T TAA-c NA-N Jte-eY G -M O Y Te e p o - N jc e -N y iH p e M -nNOYTe 1 John 3:1 “ See how great is the love that the Father has given us, that we should be called children o f God” ; niT n e nzcuB M-nNOYTe :x .e -e T e T N e -n ic T e Y e e - n - e N T A-nH TNNOOY-q John 6 :29 “ This is the work o f God, that you believe in Him whom He has sent”
339 e » N i- as optative. Shenoute and other Sahidic authors (as well as some Biblical passages) sometimes express the optative as e p e - . . . n».-, e = N i-. Ajfirm. 1st pi. JceKjL(i)c e N - N i is liable to confusion with neg. 1st sing. x e K i.(x )c g n n jl- (var. of neg. n n jl-). Examples, (a) Commands, rules, wishes, etc.: m n t - c n o o y c N - c o n r e p o M n e e p e -n g A A O n a-B (U k egoY N e - N H e i THpoY N -T cY N irtorH ShlV 5 8 :1 -2 “T w elve times per year, the Senior Monk shall enter all the houses o f the congregation” ; e Y - N i —up-NAY e -n -e T ® -u ;u )N e NgHT-eN ay^u mmay g y - n a - n a y e - n - e r ® Hn e -® q ;u )n e ay^u e - n - e r - e c y c y e e-® AA-q ShIV 161:11-13 “They shall be per mitted to examine a sick person inside o f our community; and there they shall prescribe what needs to happen and what should be done” ; e p e -n o Y A noYA 2 N -N -e T * -e ip e N -M nipA <|)Y cic N A - e m e ShChass 164:58-165:4 “Each o f those who commits abominations shall know” ; e Y - N A - T i i - q n a - y 2 M -ncyi er®-THcy ShIV 55:20 “They shall receive it in the appointed amount” ; e e o A 2 N -tb c u n - k n t g e r e T N A - e m e e-rn ip A B O A H (textual var. e T e T N e -e T n e ) Mark 13:28 “From the fig tree you shall leam the parable” naGexe xfiv 7tapaPoXf|v; e p e -n e q c M O Y er®o y a a b N A -iycu n e n m m a -n t h p - n g i - o Y c o n S h lll 62:10-11 “ May his holy bless ings be with us all collectively” ; (b) after x e - , x e K x ( x ) c purpose: x e - e r e T n x Jti-®TAei6 NAMe ShChass 101:41-45 “So that you might be truly honored” ; J c e - e q - N A - u ^ - g T H - q e J tcu -o Y ShChass 9 8 :1 1 -1 2 “That He might be merciful to them” ; jceKAC e p e -n o Y A noYA N A -ptocye e p o - q Life o f St. Pachomius (Lefort 11 3 a :2—3) “ So that each might be self-sufficient” ; jceKAC e q - N A - p - * ? ^ ^ N N -iN T O N io c Athanasius, Life o f St. Anthony 5 (Garitte 8:19-20) “ So that he might deceive Anthony” ; jk gk ac J^.e e re T N A -e iM e (textual var. e r e T N e - ) Mark 2:10 “ But that you may know . . . ”
The negative of e q N i - is extremely rare (e.g. eKN^-TCDCoBe jln n - n - g t ®TOJo^Be n j l - k N -z e N n e e o o Y S hlll 104:27-28 “ You shall not retaliate against those who retaliate against you with evil deeds”).
267
NON-DURATIVE
CONJUGATION
340 T he jussive MApeM A p eq-cojT n/M npT peq-ccuT n Let him choose Let him not choose Bases: affirm. MApe-, map»; neg. n n p T p e - , rinpTpe=; emotive neg. (‘Oh, let n o t. . . ’) Mntop e-® T p e-. Mntop e-®Tpe= Affirmative 1 M A p i-
2 -----3
MApeqM ipec-
Negative
M ApN-
M n p r p i-
M n p rp e N -
------
------
------
M ApoY-
M n p rp eq -
M nprp ey-
M n p rp ec-
M Ape- expresses a command directed to one or more 1st or 3d person entities (jussive command).
n-eTe-OYN-®MAAJce MMO-q e-®ccoTM MApeq-ccoTM “ W hoever has ears to hear, let them hear” (Luke 14:35) M n p T p e N -N K O TK N e e M - n K e c e e n e a a a a M A p N -p o e ic “ Let us not sleep, as others do, but let us keep aw ake” (1 Thess 5:6) It occurs only in dialogue (allocution), whether realistic or rhetorical. The missing 2d person, i.e. a command addressed to a 2d person entity or entities, is supplied by the ordinary imperative (chapter 16). Thus 1 M ip i-c to rn
M A pN -ctO T n
2
ctO T n
ctO T n
imperative
cto T n 3
M A peq-ccuT n
M ip o Y -c to rn
M A p ec-ctO T n
and corresponding negatives. For extensions of the jussive, cf. 341. MApo-N ‘Let’s g o ’ and MApo-K ‘W on’t you g o ’ are interjections 241, 242. Further examples:
M ip i-M n cy i
n -n a y
ep o -q
Shiv
gM -nM A
e 't'-N A -B tO K
ep o -q
“Only let me be wor thy to see Him in the place that 1 shall go to, and let Him punish me with fire"; M A p e N - T i M i o N - o Y p t U M e K A T i - T e N 2 i K U ) N A Y ^ u K i T i - n e N e i N e Gen 1 : 2 6 quoted in ShlV 3 7 : 1 - 2 “ Let Us make a human being according to Our image and according to Our likeness” ; M i p e q - p - ® O Y o e i N f l C i - n e T N O Y o e i N Matt 5 : 1 6 “ Let your light shine’’; M i p e - n e K p A N O Y o n I M i p e - r e K M N T - e p o eT I M i p e - n e K o Y t u t y c y t o n e Luke 1 1 : 2 “Hallowed be Thy name. Thy kingdom come. Thy will be done” ; M n p - r p e N - c c u c y N - r e x A p i c a a a a M i p N - " t - - ® e o o Y NToq M - n N o y T e n-eN T -A q-K A A -N 2 i - n e N A Y T e 3 0 Y C i o N ShlV 2 4 : 8 - 1 0 “ Let us not despise grace; rather let us glorify God, who has put us under our own free will” ; M n p r p A - c t O T M Jce-A T eT N -p-2A 2 N - c y i J c e M N - r t 2 A A o ShAmel 1 7 3 : 1 1 - 1 2 “Don’t let me hear that you have had many words with the Senior Monk” ; -t--c o n c AY^u M A p e q - K O A A Z e m m o - i g N - o Y K t u g T
268
1 1 4 :1 8 -1 9
PATTERN
MMO-K 2N -T a6oM
1:
MAIN-CLAUSE
BASES
THp-C gN-OYMKA? NgHT . . , MntOp e-<*TpA-MOY gM -
neicH Y TeNOY OYTe Mnp—a a - t n-®u;mmo e-neiM A 2 N -oY 6 enH Shlll 145:2 7 -1 4 6 :1 “I implore You grievously with all my m ig h t,. . . Oh, do not let me die in this present time and do not soon make me a stranger to this place” ; MnpTpeN-"toY B e-nN O Y T e Acts 23:9 “ Let us not contend against G od” ; Mntup e - ® r p e - n o Y i noYA MMo-N zp o u ; e -n -eT ® -2 iT o Y tu -tJ ShlV 3 2 :9 -1 0 “ Oh, let not each of us bur den their companion” ; N -e r ^ -jN - N e x c o p i MnprpeY-BCOK g z o y n e p o - c Luke 2 1 :21 “ Let not those who are out in the country enter it”
Conversions: None
341 Extensions of the optative, jussive, or imperative An optative 338, jussive 340, imperative 364, etc. expressing legislation, i.e. commands, prohibitions, or strong wishes (eq e-cco T n , eq-w A -ccoT n, M Apeq-cojTn, c c o t h , e-® Tpeq-ccoTn, o y z o j b e - N A N O Y - q n e e-®cojTn, etc.) can be extended by: (a) . . . N q-cojT n (conjunctive 351) (b) . . . e-® T peq-cojT n (preposition + causative infinitive 362) (c) . . . e-®cojTn (preposition + infinitive) (d) TApe- (future conjunctive) 357 Examples:
M A p N - ? A p e 7 e p o — n 2 n - 2 U Jb
nim a y c u N T N - n p n c e x e 2 n - o y m n t -
A K p iB H C
e -N K A N (U N
.
2 M -n e N 2 H T T H p -q (J )p A ric
M -n e u p A H A
.
.
. . . H T N n C ( J ) p A r l2 e
M - n B A n ric M A
e -^ T p e N -cu A H A
M M O -N
e - V p e N - - t — n M A e iN
N -T A p X H
M -n e cT A Y P o c
egpAi
e -n N O Y T e
e-N U ;A A
N -T ec-
e -re N T e g N e
. . .
TeNfiijc enecHT e - n M i N -p to -N h e-T M M opr (i.e. e -r e N M o p T ) N cyopn N T N -q i T - c e z p i i e - r e N T e z N e h t n - j c o o - c gM -n eN gH T J t e AN-C(J)pAri2e MMO-N S h iv 129:22-130:13 “We must be careful in all things and must attend precisely to the orders of prayer . . . must pray to God with our whole heart . . . must seal ourselves at the beginning o f the prayers with the seal o f baptism, must make the sign of the cross on our forehead . . . and must not lower our hand to the vicin ity o f our mouth or our beard and then raise it to our forehead and say inwardly that we have crossed ourselves” ; e p e - n^AAo n J l-biuk egoY N e - N H e i T H p-oY n - t c y NAPtOrH KATA-^KBOT N q - MnYCpT N -p i NIM eT^-NgHT-OY • • • AY“J Til Te e e eT® -NA-cytone N-TNKecYNArtorH cyHM er^-MnMgiT n - t a i e^® T pe-nitO T M-nMA eT*-MMAY e ip e 2 to u )-q o n K iT A -T ei2e MN-N-eT®-THcy NMMA-q ShIV 58:1-11 “The Senior Monk shall enter all the houses o f the congregation monthly, and shall inspect all the cells within them . . . and thus will it be also for our little congrega tion to the north of this one, and the Father Superior of that establishment and his staff shall also do likewise” ; -t~-9TH-K e-TACo(J)iA I p e K T -neKMAAJce J^.e e -N A c y iJ te I e-^TM -Tpe-A A A Y 6u > u ;t e?oY N g ^ - n g o N -N eY epH Y 2 M -n c u )o Y 2 e-M N -® xpiA N-®6u)cyT Shiv 131:14-17 “Attend to my wisdom and incline your ear to my words. Further, let not any one stare at the face o f their companions in the assem bly unless there is a need to stare”
269
NON-DURATIVE PATTERN
CONJUGATION
2; T H E S U B O R D l N A T E - C L A U S E BAS ES
342 Negation. The clauses in Pattern 2 are negatived by the negator t m - ‘not’ 250, which comes after a personal subject and before a non-personal one. tUANTC -T M - r .tU T n tJUANTe-TM-Tf^r,9IMe CCOTn R a r e ly , t m - f o llo w s a n o m in a l s u b je c t; . . . N T e - T e K o y e p H T e T M - J t i - ® J t p o n P ro v 2 :5 , 3 :6 “ A n d y o u r fe e t w ill n o t s tu m b le .”
The base T A pe- (future conjunctive 357) is not negatived. Conversions: none A. B a s e s F o rm in g A d v e r b i a l C l a u s e s :
N T ep e-,ep u jA N -,a jA N T e-
343 N T ep e-, epujA N -, and u j a n t g - form adverbial clauses 490, and either pre cede or follow the clause that they modify. They express relative time 529 in relation to the time of the modified clause: i. NTepe- 344: accomplished event, in a relatively preceding stage (when he chose/had chosen) ii. epujA N - 346: undifferentiated time/cause, without distinguishing fact (since he chooses) versus stipulation (w hen[ever]lifhe chooses/chose) iii. ujANTe- 349: the event beyond which the action or process of the main statement no longer continued/continues/will continue (until he chooses/ chose) 344 The precursive NTepe-: ‘after, when’ (past time) N T e p e q -c o jT n W hen or After he chose or had chosen Base: N T ep e-, NTep= Negation: t m - , cf. 342 1
N T e p i-
N T e p N - , v a r.
2
N T epeK -
N T epeT N -
N xepeN -
N x e p e - .v a r . N x e p e p 3
N T epeq-
N T epoY -
N T epec-
In relation to the clause that it modifies, N T e p e- expresses an immediately preceding single event 348, as being relatively completed and past: ‘after she chose; when she had chosen’. Ayto NeY-p-**ypnHpe N T epeq-cocic ^ M -n e p n e “ And they were sur prised when he lingered in the tem ple” (Luke 1:21)
270
PATTl-RN
2:
SUBORDINATE-CLAUSE
BASES
N T e p e q -T M -n ie e A e AN-KA-pco-N “ And when he would not be per suaded, we ceased” (Acts 21:14) N T e p o Y - c e i A e n e JC A -q N -N e q M A e H T H c “ And then they had eaten their fill. He told His disciples” (John 6 ; 12)
NTepe- belongs to narrative and typically describes the background against which a past event is said to have taken place; it is typically combined with the past tense a - , the preterit durative sentence N e p e -, and n e jc e - ‘said’. Cf. also chapter 23 (adverbial clauses). Further examples: N x ep o Y -N iY N6 i-N A p x iep eY c MN-NerpAMMATevc e - N e ty n H p e e N T - i.n - x x - Y TiqjHpe o»hm eY-JCi-®u>KiK e B o x 2 M - n e p n e eY--X.tu m m o - c J t e - to c i N N i ncyH pe AY-^riNAKTei Matt 21:15 “ But when the chief priests and the scribes saw the wonderful things that He did and the children crying out in the temple, Hosanna to the Son of David! they were indignant” ; N x e p e-g T o o Y e J^.e cy to n e N e -Y N -0 YN0 6 N -cy T o p rp c y o o n 2 N-MMATOI Acts 12:18 “ Now when day came, there was a great stir among the sol diers” ; N TepoY -TM -Ze e p o -O Y a y - c u j k n -'U c c u n Acts 17:6 “And when they could not find them, they dragged Jason” ; nneg-upoM N T N - c o n N T - i-T c oYON2 - q e-N SqM iO H TH c N T ep eq -rtu o Y N e s o A 2 N-N-eT®-MooYT John 21:14 “The third time that Jesus revealed Himself to His disciples after He rose from the dead"; niT i i - q N Tepeq-gK O Luke 6:3 “ What David did when he was hungry” ; N xepeq-N O Y -H-e N6 i - i r p i n n i c e-® NT-q e so A gN -reY cyH er®MMAY N e p e - n e r p o c n k o tic Acts 12:6 “ The very night when Agrippa was about to bring him out, Peter was sleeping” ; N x e p e - n iY ^ o c .a.e e i e q -N i- o Y tu N N - p to - q n e jte-riA A ic u N Acts 18:14 “ But when Paul was about to open his mouth, Gallio said . . . TN-cyn-^gM or NTM-nNOYTe n e itu r M-neNjtoTc ic n e x c eN-cyAHA 2ip u )-T N N -o Y o e iu ) nim NTepN-ctOTM e -T e T N n ic T ic 2 M - n e ) ^ Ic Col 1:3-4 “We always thank God, the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, when we pray for you, after having heard of your faith in Christ Jesus”
345 Extension o / NTepe- by another d a m e occurs in four patterns: (a)
N T ep e- . ..Ayaj x - . . .
(b)
N T ep e- . ..AYto N T ep e- . ..
(c)
N T e p e - . ..N T ep e- . . .
(d)
N T ep e- . ..N T e- . . . Examples; (a) iY “ J N r e p e - n e n N A N - i K i e i p r o N p i g r - q e - n K i ? i Y * " A q-a)cy eeo A 2 N - o y n o 6 n - 2 POOY i q - e i eeo A JiM o -q Mark 1:26 “ And when the unclean spirit had thrown him to the ground and he had cried with a loud voice, il came out o f him” ; (b) N x epi-ei J^.e e z p i T e - r e r p c u i c e - n e Y i r r e A i o N f i - n e x c A Y t u N T e p e - o Y N o 6 f l - p o o y i u n n a T g M - n J t o e i c M n i - M T O N 2 M - n a m T i 2 Cor 2:12-13 “When I had come to Troas to preach the gospel of Christ and a door had opened for me in the Lord, my mind could not rest” ; (c) N repe-ncA cyq J^.e N -g o o y g t U N e - * ’j c u ) K e B O A N t o Y J ^ ^ il N e B O A 2 N - T i c i i N T e p o Y - N i Y e p o - q 2 M -n e pne A Y - c e Y Z - n M H H c y e T H p - q Acts 21:27 “When the seven days were almost completed the Jews from Asia, having seen him in the temple, assembled all the crowd” ;
271
NON-DURATIVU
A.ya> N T e p i-Jtn io -q ei
N A -i
egpA i
CONJUGATION
e :x N -N q M N T -c y A q T e
eJC N -T eK K A H C iA
(i.e.
M n e q -o Y tu ?
-N eq -M N T -cy iq re) N x ep eq e ro o T -q
e-^ u p jijce
K -T eig e 2ATH-I Shlll 33:2-4 “ And after I had reproached him for his iniquity when he came to see me at church, he no longer persisted in talking to me about matters of this sort” ; (d) N T e p e q - j ^ . O K i M A 2 e J^.e m m o - o y Nq-NAY J t e - N A N O Y - n e Y C M O T xq--f- e Jtto -o Y M-necXHMA m- monaxoc (collated) Life o f St. Pachomius (Lefort I I2b: 14-18) “ But when he had tested them and had seen that their character was good, he clothed them in the monastic habit”
346 The conditional epqjA N - and e p e - : ‘if, when, since, whenever’ eq ajA N -ccuT n and e q -c c o T n If or When or Since or W henever he chooses/chose Base: epajA N - (var. ep eajA N -), e»ajA N -; short form e p e - (var. e p - ) , e= Negation: t m - , cf. 342. (One English correspondent o f epq;A N -TM - is ‘Unless Long Form (Usual) 1 eTcyAN2 eKopAN-
eNcyANereTNqpAN-, rare var. epqiANTeTN-
epcyAN-, var. epecyAN3 eqcyANecupAN-
Short Form e l - eNgk- ererN ep e-
eq- ey ec-
eYqiAN-
The short form e q - c t o r n is rare except with negation. It can be distinguished from the cir cumstantial durative e q - c t o r n 320 by its negation with tm - ; by its less restricted rela tionship to the direct object with mutable infinitives 329, including occurrence of the preper sonal state; and by its occurrence with biok . e i, ntOT, ge, or gtOA 168(c).
epojA N - forms a presupposition/stipulation clause o f the conditional sentence 497. It does not distinguish factual presupposition 495 (since [cause]) from general stipulation 496 (if, whenever). Unless preceded by a subordinative conjunction, it does not differentiate between temporal and causal me£ining: ‘when, since, or if she chooses or will choose, whenever or if ever she choos es or chose’. In relation to the main clause, epcyAN- expresses relatively simultaneous cause/time. ei
c ih u s c s
in m m n i n v . i c n n ; in
PATTERN
2:
SUBORDINATE-CLAUSE
BASES
The ambiguity of ep ajA N - is resolved when it combines with preceding e i M H T i ‘unless, except’; e a jc o n e ‘if, if ever’; k a n ‘even if, even though’; and z o t a n ‘whenever, as soon as, such that’ 234. Relating to past time, epajA N - expresses a generalization instead of a single event (whenever), thus contrasting with Nrepe- 348. Further examples; n c i s e r i p p -* N o q p e eK cyA N -p-nN O M oc Rom 2:25 “ Circumcision indeed is of value if you obey the law” ; c e - N H y N6 i - 2e N 2 0 0 Y 2 0 T A N e v u p ^ N - q i M - n i - T c y e A e e r n t o o t - o y Matt 9:15 “ The days will come, when the bridegroom is taken away from them” ; e q q jA N -e i M N -A iiy N A -eTne J t e - o Y e B o A t u j n n e John 7:27 “When He appears, no one will know where He comes from” ; n x o e i c e K c y i N - o Y t u c y o y n - ® 6 o m m m o - k e - * T B B o - i Matt 8:2 “ Lord, if You will, You can make me clean” ; e K u p A N - K A - n i T e s o A N T K - n e u p B H p AN M - n p p o John 19:12 “ If you release this man, you are not Caesar’s friend” ; k a n e T c y A N - K p i N e j^.e a n o k T A K p i c i c o Y M e e r e John 8:16 “ Yet even if I do judge, my judgement is true” ; N - o Y M o i ^ e a n r e o Y T e N - o Y N o e e a n n e S Y c y i N - M e c r e geNptOMe N -peq-JC io Y e ShAmel I 95:6-7 “ It is not surprising nor sinful if they despise people who are thieves” ; e T e T N u ; A N - M e p e - N - e T ® - M e r i p m m u j - t n a u ; n e n e T N B e K e e r e - Y N T H - T N - q Matt 5:46 “ For if you love those who love you, what reward have you?” ; eTcyiN-cyAHA 2 N -o Y A cn e n ii m S ner®-cyAHA 1 Cor 14:14 “ For if I pray in a tongue, it is my spirit that prays” ; eYO^AN-TM—-t--®Ne2 N c A - g e N ^ H B c N 6 i - N - e T ® - n p o c e x e e p o - o Y M e Y - J t e p o Shlll 170:18-19 “ For if custodians do not add oil to lamps they will not bum ” ; jceKAc equpA N -^i Nq-TtogM eYe-oYtUN NA-q NxeYNoY Luke 12:36 “ So that they may open to him at once when he comes and knocks” ; e i y t o n e j^ .e e c c y i N - n t o p x M A p e c - 6 t o N Telge I Cor 7:11 “ But if she separates from her husband, let her remain thus” ; e p c y A N - n i c o N p - ® N O B e e - p o - i t a - k o ) N A - q e B o ^ N O Y H p N - c o n Matt 18:21 “ If my brother sins against me, how often shall I forgive h im ?” ; a m o y N ^ - M e u ^ - N A H T e u p t o n e e K u p A N - 6 N - ® e i A U ) A O N N g H T - o Y ShChass 43:33-38 “Come and inspect my buildings to see whether you find any cult images in them” ; N A N O Y -nN O M O cepqjA N -oY A ii-qzi-T eqM N T -M e I Tim 1:8 “The law is good, if anyone uses it lawfully” ; e r e T N - T M - O Y t U M n - t c a p 5 M - n c y H p e M - n p t o n e N T e T M - c u ) M - n e t i c N o q m m t h - t n mm^y M - n t u M j m j h t - t h y t n John 6:53 “Unless you eat the flesh of the Son of man and drink His blood, you have no life in you” ; o y o i n h - t n e r e T N c y i N - T M - B t O K e - r e K K A H c i A h e r e x N c y A N T M - j c i eBoA 2 M - n c u ) M A M N - n e c N o q M - n J t o e i c Shlll 45:10-11 “ Woe to you if you do not go to church or if you do not receive the body and blood of the Lord” ; epujA N T eT N -K er-T H Y T N
2N
-T n ic T ic
2M
-n o Y o e iq j
T H p-q
ereT N -gM -
eBoA T e T N A - c y t o n e A J C M - ® n e e o o Y Ps 89(90): 17b “If you turn in faith for all the time that you are in the dispersion, you will be without evil” ; n a i a t - t h y t n e Y c y A N - N e 6 N e 6 - T H Y T N N c e - n t O T n c u j - t n Matt 5:11 “ Blessed are you when people revile you and persecute you” ; e Y o p A N - M t c e ^ e N 6 i - N e c o o Y Meq-KAA-Y Gen 30:42 “Whenever the cattle happened to bring forth, he did not put them in” ; n jc to to p e
ep c y A N -n en N A M -n o N H p o N e l e z p ^ r ejcN -cA oY A
cyiq-JcT N - r e q
6 T-
NHpAgS-TeqCTJteq-'f'AA.A.eT I Sam 16:23 “ And whenever the evil spirit came upon Saul, David took his harp in his hand"; A c - c y t o n e J^.e e p c y i N - N o p H p e M - n i H A J t e - N e Y c c D c y e tyipe-M A J^-fgA M
er eg piT
a y ^u
nAMAAHK m i - N c y H p e
n
-
n
-
eT®-2 N-MMA n - u ; a Ne-upAY"^^ MN-MA^TgAM Judg 6:3 “And it came to pass whenever the children of Israel sowed their fields, that Madiam went up, and Amalek and the children of the East went up together with Madiam”
273
NON-UURATIVK
C O N J U Ci A T I () N
347 Extension o f epo)3.N - by another clause occurs in three patterns: (a) e p a jA N - . . .
nte-
...
(b) ep
348 Temporal clauses (N T e p e -, epujA N -) referring to the past When
N Tepe-
A N -T O JK
or
N 2H T
e p u jA N -
modifies a non-durative statement about the past
N T ep N -C C U T M
e -N < y A JLe
N - T C O < })IA
M -n N O Y Te
eT® -
“ We became encouraged when we heard the words of G od’s wisdom that are within you” (Shlll 1 4 :3 ^ ) N Z H T -K
23
2H T “ Often when I got up . . . !5 0 :!4 -!7 )
N
I was painfully disturbed” (Shlll
alternant forms o f sentence occur, according as the temporal clause refers to a single event ( N T e p e - when, after) or a generalization ( e p a j A N - whenever), and according as the main statement expresses the perspective o f narrative past (they rejoiced) or descriptive past (English past perfect they have rejoiced). The alternant combinations are given in table 19. TABLE 19 S e l e c t i o n o f T e m p o r a l C l a u s e C o n s t r u c t io n s M o d if y i n g t h e N o n - d u r a t iv e P a s t P e r s p e c t iv e A p p l ic a t io n
of
T em po ra l C lause
Single event (when, now that) Generalization about multiple events (whenever)
of
M a in S t a t e m e n t
Narrative Past (they rejoiced)
Descriptive Past (they have rejoiced)
N T e p e - . . . A -‘ e p cy A N - . .. u jA p e-^, e p u jA N - . . . N e - u jA p e '’
epU JA N - . . . A -’
'jii-p jic y e e M Jire N re p i-J K i N - n e c z J ii N -re K M N T - e itO T Shlll 13:22-23 “1 rejoiced greatly when 1 received the letter from Thy Holy Fatherhood/I have rejoiced greatly now ihai I have received . . . ) ” ^Tenseless, whether past or non-past. e Y c y j i N - n a y e p o - q cyjiY -nji2T -o Y Mark 3:11 “Whenever they beheld Him they fell down before Him” ; e Y U j J i N - N T - O Y N J i - q o n u p jiq -jc o o -c J c e - K J i i - Y e g p J i i e - n e Y M i I e Y T M -N T -O Y
A e
N i-q
M e q -p n K e-cy iN e
OY J^^ e
M e q -jc o o -c
M -n -e N T -
Jiq-Jclr-O Y e l M H r e T o Y c o n n - o y i u t ApophPatr (Elanskaya 1994) l5 o ;l-8 “Whenever things were returned to him; he said Put them in their place; and whenever they were not returned, he neither inquired after them nor spoke to the one who had borrowed them more than once”
274
PATTERN
2:
SUBORUINATF-CLAUSE
BASES
’e N cy A N -e ip e r ip n - tm e A N -T A ie-T M e Shlll 112:25 “For whenever/if we do the truth, we have honored the truth” ^ N e -c y i« giving background information with the narrative: epcyAN-MtoYcHc BtOK 620YN e-re cK H N H N e - c y iq - e i en ecH T N 6 i-n e cT Y A o c N -r e K A o o A e N t j - i g e p i T - q Exod 33:9 “ And whenever Moses entered into the tabernacle, the pillar of the cloud descended and stood”
349 T he lim itative ujANTe-: ‘un til such tim e a s’ qjANTtj-CCOTn Until he chose or chooses or has chosen or had chosen Base; i y x m e - , u ja n t* Negation: t m - , cf. 342 1 upjiN'f—. rare var. u; anta2 UpANTK-
u; jintn UpJlNTeTN-
cyA N Te3 UJJiNTtjUJJiNTC-
UpJiNTOY-
In relation to the clause that it modifies, u j a n t e - expresses the limiting event beyond which the main event no longer continued, continues, or will contin ue: 'until such time as, until the point where, until’. Aq-AUJAY
2N -KH M 6
UJANTq-TOJOYN
N 6l-K eppO
eJLN -K HM e
“ It multiplied in Egypt .till another pharaoh arose over Egypt” (Acts 7 :1 7 -1 8 ) Or it expresses, similarly, a circumstance under which a command is to be car ried out. 6oj
u jA N T e T N -e i 6BO A 2 M-rrMA eT®-MMAy
“ Stay there until
you leave that place” (M ark 6 :10) Cf. also chapter 23 (adverbial clauses). Further examples: N e q -u p o o n A e g M -n n ji opjiNre-gH ptO A H c m o y Matt 2:15 “And he remained there until Herod had died” ; AY-Jt'-®6oA. rjip e-iu)cH<|) 2 M -n H i M -n p M N -KH M e c yA N Tq -e i e z p jii e -2 e N N o 6 N -e A i'| 'ic
Shlll 103:4—6 “For they spoke lies against Joseph in the house o f the Egyptian, until the point where he entered into great afflictions” ; iY^u M ne-N-eT*-MMAY e i c yA N xe -n N O YTe 6 u j n t e p o -o Y N q -rp e Y -B c u K e n e c H T e-JiMN-re e Y -o N ? Sh lll 143:7-8 “And those people did not come, until God had already become angry at them and made them descend alive into hell” ; i . y w jiq -n jiT J iC ce MMO-q M N -n eq cyH p e M N -neqA Jioc T H p-q cyjiN T q-T M -cyejT rr-^ ceene NTJi-q Num 21:35 “ And he smote him and his sons and all his people, until he left none o f his” ; j i Y^ u
iY “ 2'°Y ^
N cto-oY
upjiNTOY-TM-Ki-AJiAY
enJigoY
e-®Tpeq-oYJCJiT
Josh 8:22 “ And they smote them until not any was left behind to survive” ; cyjii-cyAHA cyjiN't'-NJiY e - n g o M - n e )^ ShAmel 1 4 6 7 :8 -9 “I am accustomed to pray until I see the face o f Christ” ; cyjiNT-q-JctOK 6 b o a Luke 12:50 “ How I am constrained 275
NON-DURATIVE
CONJUGATION
until it is accomplished!” ; i .y w reNOY Ce-CBTCUT e \ - 6 w i ^ T e b o a cyANTK:x i-n o Y tu n a - y Acts 23:21 “And now they are ready, waiting until you issue a slatement to them” ; o y c o a eq-gTMTtOM N -tj-N A -JC eN A -q a n c y iN T tj-e iN e eBOA M -n e q g in gN-OY^xpo Matt 12:20 “ He will not quench a smoldering wick until He brings His judgment in viclory"; N N e it-e i g b o a eT*-MM^Y M - n g ie N-KOJ^-pANTHc Mall 5:26 “You will not get out till you have paid the last penny"’: r ip n e e - ^ r p e q - p - ^ p p o opiNTq-K cu N -N e q jc ijc e T H p-oY 2A -N eq oY ep H T e 1 Cor 15:25 “ For He must reign until He has pul all His enemies under His feet” ; up A N T e-rn e MN-nKAg n i p i r e o y i iu t a N -o y tu T h oYuptOA,? N -oytU T N N e Y -c iN e eBOA gS-n N O M O c upANToY-optone T H p - o y Matt 5:18 “Till heaven and earth pass away, not an iota, not a dot, will pass from the law until all is accomplished” ; cyA N xe-oY cycune e n - g N - N e i g i c e Shill 18:2 “ How long are we lo be in these labors?” ; t y iN T e -o Y q jio n e n j c o e ic n n er-o Y A A B M-ne e - N - r - K p iN e a n Rev 6:10 “O Sovereign Lord, holy and true, how long (Eiog n o ie) before Thou wilt judge?”
Extension. A limitative clause can be extended by n t g - . . . ; e.g. A q-M oouje 2 H T -O Y u j2tN T t j - e i N q - A ^ e p A T -tj eJCM -nM A Matt 2 : 9 “ It went before them, till it came and rested over the place.” B . C o n ju n c tiv e B a s e s ; 350
351
n t g - ,T
Ape-
The two conjunctive bases N T e- and T A p e- must follow anoiher clause or element. (An apparent exception is the independent construction o f T A p e- 3581c].) In this sense they are dependent clauses. Unlike N r e p e - , upANTe-, and epupAN- 343, they cannoi precede the clause or item on which they are dependent, and they extend rather than modify.
The conjunctive
ntg-
N q -cc o T n
. . . and choose or . . . to choose or . . . and he chooses/will choose etc. Base: n t g - , n= (and vars. as displayed below). The prepersonal state is con jugated with a unique set o f personal intermediates 83. Negation: t m - , cf. 342 1 NTA-, var. TX2 N r -, vars. N ?-, N eK N T e3 Nq-, vars. N q -, N e q N C - , vars. N C - , N e c -
NTNN xexSN ce-
Variants based on Ne= (not the siandard spelling) can be distinguished from the preter it durative N e q - c c u r n by their negation with t m - ; by their less restricted relationship to the direct object with mutable infinitives 329, including occurrence o f ihe preperson al stale o f the infinitive; and by their occurrence with bcuk, e i, n t O T , ? e , or gtoA 168(c). The 1st sing, T A p e-.
276
n t a -
of
ta-
supplies the missing 1st sing, o f the future conjunctive
PATTERN
2;
SUBORDINATE-CLAUSE
BASES
In syntax and meaning, n t g - signals more or less closely joined extension after verbs and certain other kinds o f element. Apart from signalling sequen tiality, N T e- is an ‘em pty’ base in the sense that it is outside of the tense sys tem and expresses no other grammatical categories or lexical content— no time relation, mood, aspect, particular kind o f subordination, or the like. Like the aorist u j A p e - 337, the conjunctive is a tenseiess reference point next to the Coptic tense system 525. It signals only nexus and sequel after what cam e before. Thus by default, a conjunctive clause can come under the aegis o f any time, range, mood, subordination, etc. that has already been expressed or implied by the preceding text o f which it is an extension. Choice o f subject is free, i.e. not affected by the preceding text. 352 The syntactic environments o / n t g - are: (1) extending a non-narrative verb 352; (2) extension within a subordinate clause 353; (3) extending or com pleting other elements 354; (4) following JceKA(A)c 355; (5) as a main clause in sequel to an adverbial clause 356. (I) Extending a non-narrative verb. Verbal constructions that freely are extended by the conjunctive are ‘ (a) non-durative infinitives, namely (i) non-durative conjugation bases (including T p e - and excluding a - and M n A T e - except as described in 3 5 3 ,354[c]) with their infinitive; the conjunctive itself can be extended by another conjunctive; (ii) the imperative; (Hi) the infinitive as a verbal noun 105(c), including its occurrence in adverbial function (chapter 23); (iv) the infinitive after future auxiliary n a - 311 (b) NHY in the durative sentence with future meaning (like N A -ei) “ (Is) going to com e.” Thus N T e - does not occur in the main line o f past narrative (not after uncon verted A - and M n A T e - nor after N e p e - nor n e j c e - ‘said’) nor in durative statements about the present. Examples. Non-durative infinitives: (a)(i) c y ip e -n p e q -p -® N O B e JCi e jc to - q Ntj-TM-TAA-Y I c y ip e -n A iK A io c j^.e cyfl-gT H -q xyw Nq--t-Ps 36(37):2I “ The sinner borrows, and wilt not pay again: but the righteous has compassion, and gives” ; n n o Y T e
e q e -cM O Y
ep to -T N
N q -A Y 5^ N e
n h -tn
N - N e x N g ic e
T H p -o Y
Shill 179:10-12 “ And God shall bless you and increase you in all your labors” ; j K e - e N e - N A Y N T N - n i c T e y e e p o - q Mark 15:32 “That we may see and believe” ; M i . p e - N e T N - t - n e q icu n e e Y - M H p e p e - N e x S ^ H B C m o y 2 N T e x S - p - e e n - n i p t O M e e T ® - 6 c u c y f e so A g H T - q M - n e Y J C o T c Luke 12:35-36 “ Let your loins be girded and your lamps burning, and be like people who are waiting for Iheir master” ; N T e p e q - . a . o K i M A 2 e .a .e m m o - o y
N q -N A Y J c e - N A N O Y - n e v c M O T A q - 't ’ e jc c u -
OY M-necxHMA m - m o n a x o c (collated) Life of Si. Pachomius (Lefort l\2h: 14—18) “ But when he had tested them and had seen thal their character was good, he clothed them in the monastic habit” ; eqq^AN-f-^^Hoy M -n K o cM o c T H p - q N q 277
NON-DURATIVE
CONJUGATION
A e g t u t o - q h N q - - f - - ® o c e M M o - q Luke 9:25 “ If one gains the whole world and loses or forfeits one’s own self” ; cyiN T o Y -N o jc-o Y e z p i i e - n K to g r Ayu) e g p A i e - n M o o Y N c e - p i g T - o Y e-n K A ? ShIV 24: 13-14 “Even as far as throwing them into the fire and into the water and hurling them onto the ground” ; 20)CTe t i c e - p - u p n H p e T H p - o Y N c e - ' f ' - ® e o o Y M - n N O Y T e Mark 2:12 “So that they were all amazed and glorified G od” ; eNcyAN-TM -2U )fn oV n e T N - N A co p M -e q
:x o o - q N A -N
H
e N -N A -p -o Y
M M iY
^ -T A N A P k H
T ip N - T ii- Y
T H p -O Y
e T *-N A -e i C y iZ P iT
e Jcto -N
e - n jA E
h
o y
n e T * - u ;o o n
N -K O A p A N T H C
N TN -
TAA-Y NT^-p-^BoA ShChass 197:50-198:5 “ If we do not become reconciled, what shall we say or do in the crisis that will befall us, and what awaits us there? (Bear this fact in mind,) and we shall give everything away, down to the last penny—give it away to escape!” (it) a n i n c e B o A N - r e c T o A H e r - N A N o Y - c N T e T N - T A A - c NTeTN--f- N-oYSoYP e-T eq6i:x Luke 15:22 “ Bring the best robe, and put it on him; and put a ring on his hand” ; (Hi) oYNoBe n e ®oyium—n o e iK N-oYPtUMe N T -f ii- p - n e q 2 C0 B ShChass 104:28-31 “ It is sinful to eat a person's bread and not perform his labor” ; K ^ i r ^ p o y n - ® 6 o m m m o - o y e - ® c y A H A e J t t o - i N x e - n j c o e i c Kio NA-i eBoA Shlll 135:29-136:1 “For, they can pray for me and so the Lord will forgive m e” ; a.q-epHT n a - y on e-^rpeY-oYtUM ti c e - c u ) NMMA-q ShChass 131:23-26 “ He also promised that they would eat and drink with Him” ; N-eT^-NA-Tpe-AMNTe oYtUN N pto-q Nq-OMK—OY ShChass 114:56-115:1 “Those whom He will make hell open its mouth and swallow up” ; A c-cytone A e 2 M-nTpeY-tyAJce ay^u Nce-CYNZHTi a - i c 2 u)n ezoYN ep o -o Y Luke 24:15 “ And it happened that while they were talking and di.scussing together, Jesus drew near” ; (iv) -f--NA-cyopcy p -N iin o e H K H n t a - k o t - o y N -2 eN N o6 ta -c u ) o y 2 e p o - o Y M -n c o Y o T H p -q N M -N A irieoN Luke 12:18 “ I will pull down my bams and build them larger; and there 1 will store all the grain and my goods” ; ay*"
ce-N i-ctU TM e-TACMH Nce-u^cune N -oY oze n -o y u > t oYqptuc n - o y io t John 10:16 “ And they will heed My voice and become one flock, one shepherd” ; N e q -N A -p o e ic n e Nq-Thi-KAA-Y e-® 6tOTZ e -n e q H i Matt 24:43 “ He would have watched and would not have let his house be broken into” : (b) n h y with future
meaning: oYN-zeNgooY n h o y egpiT ejcto-® NTe-NoYJCAJce Kxe-oYcytu^Z epo-® N c e - o T n - e egoYN n c a - c a nim Luke 19:43 “ For the days shall come upon you. when your enemies will cast up a bank about you and surround you, and hem you in on every side” ; eH A iic men n h y N q -A n o K ie ic T i n - 2ujb nim Matt J 7 : ll “Elijah is coming, and he is to restore all things” In this environment, the conjunctive indiscriminately expresses both the next distinct action in sequence ( b i u k N T e T N - c y m e 2 N -o Y iu p 5 e T B e - n c y H p e c y H M Matt 2:8 “Go and search diligently for the child”) and closely related or synonymous action ( q p i N e N C A - - t - p H N H N r - n t u T n c o j - c P s 33[34]:14 “ Seek peace, and pursue it” ). Furthermore, the closeness between conjunctive and preceding verb varies from rela tively looser sequential, consequential, cumulative, or synonymous relationships ( q p t o c u T N ? - o Y t u M Acts 11:7 “Kill and eat” ; c t o r e m m o - T n F - n a n a - 1 Ps 25[26]: 11 "Redeem me, and have mercy upon m e” ) to a much closer kind, with nuances of purpose and result (KA-SqpHpe qpHM F ic e - e i epAT-® Luke 18: 16 “ Let the chil dren come to m e” ; e T - N A - p - o Y T A - K A - H p o N o M i M - n t O N ? c ) A - e N e 2 Luke 18:18 “What shall I do to inherit eternal life?”).
Extending a verb, n t g - is optionally preceded by a conjunction such as a a a a (but), A y u } (and), e - n M i. (instead of), h (or), or t o t g (and then), but mostly occurs without such a linking term.
278
2:
PATTl-RN
SUDORDINATE-CLAUSE
Examples preceded by conjunction:
-f--n a .p A K A A e i
n
DASES
—T e T N M N T - p M N - g H T
e-®TM-TpeTeTN-20MeA.ei n2HT-oy a a a a NTeTN-j(.i-2pH-TN e-NcyAJce eT®-oYAAB Shill 31:3-5 “1 urge you (‘Your Sagacity’) to pay no attention to them, but rather to attend to the holy words” ;
h
r i p
q -N A -M e c T e -o Y A
N q - n e p e - o Y A
h
N q-A N eixe n - o y *. N q - K A T A < | ) p o N i N - o Y A Luke 16:13 “ For either he will hate the one and love the other, o r he will be devoted to the one and despise the other; am o y N u p o p n e B o A ^ - N e K A K A e i p c i A T o T e n p - j c o o - c j c e — n i c t O T H p ShP 130’83r b: 10-14 “ First have done with your unclean deeds, and only then say the words O my Savior"
The subject of a conjunctive clause can be either the same as that o f the pre ceding verb or different. Further examples with different subject: m n n c c u - c A e o n •f’-NA-NAY e p t o - T N N Te-neTN gHT p^upe John 16:22 “ But later 1 will see you again and your hearts will rejoice"; e i c g H H T e - f - - N A - T p e Y - e i N c e - o Y t u o p r m o m t o c b o a N - N e K O Y p H H T e A Y ^ u N P - e i M e j c e - A N O K A i - M e p i T - K Rev 3:9 “ Behold, 1 will make them come and bow down before your feet, so you learn that 1 have loved you’"; e i c T n ip e e N o c
n a - u ju )
N c-Jtn o
N -o Y cy H p e
N ce -M o Y T e
e -n e q p A N
Jte -
eMMANoYHA Matt 1:23 “ Behold, the virgin shall conceive and bear a Son, and they will call His name Immanuel (His name shall be called Immanuel)” ; t c u o y n n t n M e T A N o i Shill 181:10 “Rise and let us repent” ; K ^ i r ^ p o y n - ® 6 o m m m o -o y e - ® c y A . H A e j ( U ) - i N T e - n j ( o e i c k u ) n a - i e B o A Shill 135:29-136:1 “ For, they can pray for me and so the Lord will forgive m e” ; M A p e - n i l upcune e q - o Y o N ? n h - t n e so A AYtu N T eT N -:xi-‘’cMH e-NAopAJce Acts 2:14 “ Let this be known to you. and give ear to my words”
After an imperative, the personally conjugated conjunctive base resolves the unexpressed categories of number/(gender). Examples:
t c u o y n
N T e -a .5 io Y
N ? -M o o cy e
M M o -q
Acts
e x B e -n A A o c
8 :2 6
“Rise and go (sing, masc.)” ; bujk
M N -rn o A ic
N T e - p - n n e e Y e
6 e
N -N e g o o Y
M - n o Y ^ B io Esth 4:8 “Go and beg (sing, fem.) him for the people and the city, and remember the days of thy low estate” ; M e x A N o T 6 e a y ^ u N r e T N - K e r - T H Y T N Acts 3:19 “Repent therefore, and turn (pi.) again” N egation and the conjunctive, (i) Following a negative verbal clause, the conjunctive can
fall under the aegis of the previous negation; e.g. e c y u jn e eYcyAN-TM-ctOTM ay^u N ce-Jci-® cB u) e - p - p M N - 2 H T e Y - N A - N o j c - o Y eBoA 2 p A i N 2H t - n ShlV 106:5-6 “ If they do not listen and learn to be wise, they shall be exf>elied from among us” ; J c e - N N e q - n a . T A c c e m m o -o y N q-M ooY T -oY ShlV 21:3-4 “ Lest he strike and kill them.” (ii) Often, however, a logically displaced negation occurs because neg. m ain clause + affirm, conjunctive expresses the logical equivalent of affirm, p re supposition/stipulation + neg. main statem ent; e.g. J irip -c to fT i N T o q e p o -T eT-jcto N - N A l N T e T N - e B ^ - T H Y T N e - N 2 o o Y N - N H C T e i A e T * - T H c y ShChass 102:2-8 “ However, do not listen to me say these words and then forget all about the appointed fast days” (= If you hear me say these words, do not forget. . . ) ; M eY -Jcepe-oY 2 HBC N ce-K A A -q 2A -oY iyi Matt 5:15 “People do not light a lamp and put it under a bushel” (= When people light a lamp, they do not put it under a bushel). So too, neg. main clause + neg. conjunctive can express the logical equivalent of neg. m ain statem ent + .neg. presupposition!stipulation; e.g. T J - t n - n a - o y g m - a a a y M-neiMA N rTM-Jcu) NA-N Ncyopn Jce-Acy r e T e r( i.e . T eK )epriC iA ApophPatr 241 (Chaine
279
NON-DURATIVE
CONJUGATION
73:28-29 = Z 3 46:21-22) “We will not eat anything here and have you not first tell us what your occupation is” (= We will not eat anything here unless you first tell us what your occupation Is), (in) Or the conjunctive may introduce a negation after a preceding affirmative, or an affirmation after a preceding negation; e.g. eYupAN-TAMO-oY N c e-T M -B O H e e i e p o - o y h N c e - T M - q iT - o y mmay t a x y neY C N oq e q e - e i egpAi e:KCu-OY ShlV 85:3 -5 “And if they notify them and do not assist them or remove them from there immediately, their blood shall be upon them” ; e Y t y iN TM -p-®ANicy M - n p A N M-nNOYTe N c e - e i p e j^.e N -K e^N ^u; N c e-n ip A B A M M o-q eY -N i-p-® B O A . e-T oppH eT®-NA-ei Shill 19:4—6 “ If they do not swear an oath in the name o f God but rather (.a.e) swear a different kind o f oath and they violate it, they shall escape the wrath that is to com e.”
353 (2) Extension within a subordinate clause. When the conjunctive extension occurs within the following subordinate clauses circumstantial clause relative clause e u j j c e - o r e u j c o n e . . . ( ‘i f ’)
the range o f sentence types eligible to be extended by the conjunctive is some what longer, including also the p a st tense a - , S n A T e-, the durative sentence with all its predicate types 305, and o y n t g - ‘have’ (chapter 18), as well as the possibilities mentioned in ( I ). e u j c o n e O Y N T H - T N - ® n i C T l C MMAY AYOJ N T e T N - T M - p - 2 H T C N A Y “ I f
you have faith and do not doubt” (Matt 21:21) N-eT®-cooYN e - N 6Y2 BHYe N c e - 2c0 n eJCOj-OY c e - p 2 0 YO-C2 0 YopT NMMA-Y “ Those who know about their deeds and conceal them are greatly cursed along with them ” (Shlll 4 1 :5-6) Further examples o f the additional types: kan e -A Y “ OYtuM N ce-T M -C A gcu-O Y es^A . M M o-oY n A .oroc N i-T N T tO N -oY e-gNO YZO op ShlV 196:14-16 “If they have eaten and not withdrawn from them, reason would compare them to dogs” ; geNgBHYe N - c e - u p o o n (i.e. e - N - c e - u p o o n ) a n h NToq e Y -o p o o n ay^u N T A - T M - e m e a n o k o Y T e n 2 A .A .o Shlll 157:1-2 “Deeds that are ‘non-existent’, or rather, which do exist bitl / and the Senior M onk do not know about them” ; N e e r ip N-oYptUM e e q - 2 N - N e q n e e o o Y e - i q - e i M noYe e-® T p eq -6M -n oY O > iN e AYtu NTe-JKOO-c NA-q JKe-TBBO-K eBOA. 2 N -N e K n e e o o Y Shlll 204:12-14 “ It is like the example o f a man who lives in iniquity and who has come from far away to visit you and to whom you say Get clean of your iniquity” ; MniTOYtUM (i.e. e-MnATOY-oYtuM ) eBOA. 2 M - n o e i K ay*" N c e -c c u eBOA g M - n i n o r ShlV 6 6 :1 7 -1 8 “ Before eating from the bread an d drinking from the cup” ; kan e i- O Y e M - ® o e iK
2 M - n e iJ c o n
n m m a -y
n - o y iu t
e Y -o Y tu M
g i- r e iT p in e Z A
n m m a -i
h
e p e -T o o r-®
n - o y iu t
x y w
ay*"
t o o t - o y
N ce-T O A M A
e-® T A K o
2N-AAAY N - c c u c u q Shlll 40:21-24 "If 1 eat with them and they with me, or if my hand and theirs are in the same dish upoii the same table, and they dare to harm G od’s creatures with any pollution” ; o y a o h t .a .e n e n - e r e o Y N T A -q -co Y N“q -T ^ -N A N2HT-OY ShChass 194:57-195:2 “The person who has possessions and does not bestow charity with them is foolish” ; e u ;4 c e -o Y N -2 o e iN e N - N T iM io
2 PAI
280
M -n N O Y T e
N2 H T - N
eY -K p M p M
.
.
.
NTOOY
N C e - T M - T iM O - l
g N -T M H T e
PATTERN
2;
SU D O R D I N A T E - C L A U S E
BASES
M-MNT-MNTpe cNAy • • • N il N -T eiM iN e eY -p-® N O Be e p o - o Y may ^ ^ -Y Sh lll 139:16-21 “ If indeed there are some of us who complain . . . and yet Jo not notify me with two supporting testimonies . . . such people sin against themselves alone” ; o Y p tu n e n eN T -A -n N O Y T e -f- N A -q n - o y m n t - pm m ao M N -geN Z Y nipxoN T A a y *" o Y e o o Y e -N -q -q p a .a .T a.N n - a.a ay Z N - N - e T q - N i - e n ie Y M e i e p o -O Y THp-OY AY*" N Te-TM -nNO YTe 't'-^eSoYciA NA -q e-®oYtUM eBOA. n 2 h t - c ShAm^l 11 363:12-364:3 “Once upon a time there was a man to whom God gave a for tune and possessions and fame, who lacked none of the things that he desired, and to whom God did not give the ability to profit from them”
354 (3) Extending or completing other elements (a) Premodifying conjunction 234(b) +
ntg-
e-n M A N T e - Instead o f . . . -ing eiMHTi N T e - Unless . . . H N T e - Unless . . . KAN N T e - Even if . . . M NNCA-NTe- After . . . -ing MHntoc N T e - L est. . . MHnoTe N T e -, jce-M H n oT e N T e - L e st. . . NCiBHA. N T e - Unless . . . 2 CucTe N T e - So that. . . , Consequently, As a result . . .
forms an adverbial clause 493. eiMHTI NTeTN-KeT-THYTN N TETN -p-ee N-Nei
AAAA KAN ANON H OY^rPeA.OC eBOA2N-Tne NtJ-TAUje-®OeiUJ NH-TN nBOA M-n-eNT-AN-TAUje-®of
ntg-
ApA N T e - So then . . . (before a question) ApHY N T e - Perhaps . . . M o n c N T e -. e - M o r i c N T e - . . . hardly . . . ; . . . almost . . . not MeupA-K 381 N T e- Perhaps . . .
forms a main clause. eN-NA-A^epAT-N ^-OYCOOYTN ^ - O Y y ji M-Me I AYOJ e-M O ric N TN -KcoAJc N-TNNA^B “ We shall Stand very m easurably upright; and 281
NON-DURATIVE
CONJUGATION
we shall scarcely incline our shoulders” (ShWess9 \2 5 a ;3 2 -b :6 = ShIV 67:21-23) ApA NTe-OYOYJCAY u^cone “A nd so— will salvation come to m any?” (ShChass 168:7-9 = Shlll 74:18-19) (c) Forming an entity statement expanding the subject o f a clause etc. 486
It happened th a t. . . , As a matter of fa c t. . . 185(e) AAAO NTe- . . . AAAO NT6- It is One thing i f . . . but another thing i f . . . reNoiTO NTe- Let us hope th a t. . . KeKoyi n e ntg - Just a little while longer and . . . MHreNoiTO NTE- God forbid th a t. . . (Ne-)NANOY-c n e NTe- It is better th a t. . . nApA-KeKoyi n e N T e - (and similar phrases) It is almost th a t. . . c-N A -u ;a jn e N T e - It will be the case th a t. .. OYMo'i^e Te/OYtyine n e NTe- (and similar phrases) It is a wonder/a shame that . . . ZAmoYNTe- How good it will be i f . . . , I hope and pray th a t. . . A c -cy c o n e n t g -
E.g. AYOJ 2AMOI NTe-TM-neicyAJce to jm n t e ~ 2 ^ 2 n ^ h t - n “And I hope and pray that this saying does not apply to many of us” (ShAmel 1 231:1-2) OYMoei^e an Te NTe-TeicyoMT N-CYNArcorH moyZ 2N-2eN2BHYe N - c e - ty o o n (i.e. e - N - c e - t y o o n ) an h NToq e Y -u jo o n ayoj NTA-TM-eiMe ANOK OYTe nzAAO “ It is no wonder i f these three con gregations are fu ll of deeds that are ‘non-existent’, or rather, which do exist but I and the Senior Monk do not know about them” (Shlll 156:28-157:2) KeKOY^ n e NTeTN-Ao eTeTN-NAY e p o - ^ i “A little while, and you will see me no m ore" (John 16:16) 355 (4) Following JceKA(A)c. In a clause o f purpose JceKA(A)c optionally is expanded by the conjunctive (instead of optative 338) if an adverbial clause
stands between JceKA(A)c and the conjunctive. JCeKAAc e-ATeTN-NAy e p o - q NTerN-pAcye on “That, once having seen him again, you may rejoice” (Phil 2:28) JCeKAc e ^ c u n e oyn -^ 6 om Nre-TeYoYNOY CAAT-q “That, if it were possible, the hour might pass from Him” (Mark 14:35) JCeKAAc eiT e eicuAN-ei ta - nay epcu-TN eiT e e-N -t-?A T e-T H yT N AN ta - ccutm e-neTNOYOj “ So that whether I come and see you or am absent, I may hear of you” (Phil 1:27) JCeKAC KATA-ee NT-ATeTN-CCUTM JCINN-CUOpn NTeTN-MOOCye 282
PATTERN
2:
SUBORDINATE-CLAUSE
BASES
2 PAi NZHT-c “ That, ju st as you have heard from the beginning, so you might walk in it” (2 John 6) 356 (5) The conjunctive as a main clause in sequel to an adverbial clause (the apodotic conjunctive). Follow ing a factual presupposition clause 495 (or its logical equivalent), the conjunctive can also function like a main clause in sequel to the preceding one. e p e - c y iN e NCA-®piMe e-O YCCO N e I N T e - T o e i r epo-® m m in m m o -®
“ W hen you set out to weep for a sister monk, you mourn for your own self” (ShAmel I 2 04:14-205:1) Ayoj eN q)A N -ei eao A e - n T o o y g t^ -^ ib o a I NTN-cyNAre m n - n g c n h y “ And whenever we come out to the outer mountain, we celebrate Mass with the brethren” Paphnoute Cephalas, Stories o f the Monks o f the D esert (BMis 4 41:32-33) The conjunctive can optionally be preceded by an adverbial m odifier such as Ayto or H. Further examples: e N - c o B x e
N-Tj^.inANH M-nBtOA eBOA M -nniC X A I h N - o Y N e ? ShAmel I 210:3-5 “Given that we are preparing the provisions for the conclusion o f Easter, aren’t you at least washing with water and rubbing yourself with o il? ” ; i Y “ N e j c - n c A T A N A C eBOA 2 N - r n e J se -iq -K tO T e N C i- e e N - p - N e q B o r e I N r - i i - y 2u)cu-k x y w Nr-JCOK-Oy eBOA 2 N -N n ip A < |)y c ic N c e -jc iT -K e^ oyN e M iy ShBM 198 (82ft;22-25) “ Satan was cast out o f heaven because he tried to perform his sexual abominations-anrf are you too peiforming and perfecting them In the form o f perversions, and expecting to he brought into that heavenly place?” (= Since Salan was cast out . . . can it be that do you loo perform . . . and then expect . . . ? ) ; m h O iH p p -® o y o e iN an ^ M -n e 2o o y h n - t n - C o j u ^ a n f l - c o n c y i^ p il e r n e . iy to N -T N -N iy iN e - A i i y a n o n I ncyAN^TH-q o n N'q-TM -TC i.Be-N eN eBiH N ShChass 15:14-27 “Now , isn’t the atmosphere luminous during the daytime? And don’t we often look up . . . and we personally see nothing? —and then foN), the Merciful One does not instruct our wretched selves” (= When we look up, the Merciful One does not instruct us); MMN-®cytONe . . . MMN-®j^.OKiMA2e m m o - k ^ iT N -je N n e ip iC M o c ey-2H T i N T e - n c iT iN iC I Ayto N 'r - fM -e c y - + o y s e - n N O B e ShChass 13:12-27 “ You have no illness . . . or test through hidden trials from Satan— and you can’t even struggle againsi sin?” (= Since you have no illness, can’t you at least struggle against sin?) N r - T M - jc u )K M
2 N -O Y M O O Y i Y “ ^ N r- T M - T A 2 c - K
357 The future conjunctive T a .p e T A p eq -co jT n
. . . and he shall choose Base: T A p e - , TAp= (rare var. N T A p e -, NTAp«) Negation: none
283
NON-DURATIVE
CONJUGATION
A single negative example is on record, and it is o f dubious text-critical status (TApN--tJCN-TApN-TM-'t' Mark 12:14 [textual var. TApN--)- jcfi-M ncup] “Shall w e give or shall we not giv e? ”). In place of the missing negation occur j(.e-N N e= and x e K 3k(x)c c N N e s (or NNe=), the optative negative 338(b); these constructions, however, do not explicitly express the category o f speaker’s promise. E.g. Mnp-T<5AVo Jte-N N eY -T tiM e-T H Y T N I Ku> e b o a . Ta^poY-Kcu n h - t n c b o x Luke 6:37 “Condemn not, so you might not be condemned; forgive, and you will be forgiven.” 1 (TA pi-) 2 TApcK T A p e3 T A p eq -
TApfJTA pcTN -, rare var. TApeTCTNT A poy-
T jip e c -
The 1st sing, is rare. In its place occur the conjunctive n t j i - (var. t a - ) 351 and x y w these, however, do not explicitly express the category o f speaker’s promise. E.g. T C N o y 6e 2 cucu-q c c u t m N C A -n e2 p ooY n - t c k z m ^ a a n t a - k c u e^pi.! 2Apcu-K n - o y 2 P ^ N-®oeiK (textual var. t c u o y n t a - k o j 2^ p o -K n - o y o c ik .) 1 Sam 28:22 “And now hearken, I pray thee, to the voice o f thine handmaid, and I will set before thee a morsel of bread” ; t c n o y a z c p a t - t h y t n ayu^ •t'NJi-+-*'2An e p o )-T N 1 Sam 12:7 “Now stand still, and I will judge you.”
ra^pe- signals more or less closely joined extension after an affirmative com mand (imperative, Ma^pe- 340, or 339) and expresses the speaker’s promise or assurance that an event will occur in the future if the command is obeyed. (Its English correspondent is 'and' plus the special future of speaker’s wish, intention, etc.: and I will, and you shall, and he shall, and she shall, etc.). It occurs almost exclusively in dialogue (allocution), both realistic and rhetorical. 358 The syntactic environments /TApe- are: in sequel to an expressed command or a rhetorical question; as an independent clause (expressing polite request); after a verb of incomplete predication; and expressing purpose. (a) In sequel to an expressed command TjkpoY-1' n h - t n I u^iNC TJipeTN-6iNe I TCU2 M TJipoYtUN (i.e. Tj^poY-OYtuN) NH-TN “A sk and they shall give unto you, seek and you shall find, knock and they shall open unto you” (Luke 11:9) MJipN-npocexe e-NcqupAJce TipN -eine e-n-eTN -u )iN e Nccu-q “Let us pay attention to His words, anti we will understand what we are looking for” (ShLefort 41:9)
31ITI
The closeness between T A p e- and the preceding command seems to vary along a spec trum ranging from (/) a relatively looser sequential relationship, as in the examples above, to fn) a much closer relationship, with possible nuances o f purpose or result 504, as in the following: TCUM <5e epN-ANOMIA NIM MN-JCI N<50NC NIM . . . TApe-N-eT*-COOYN MMO-K c p q e e - * ' p - ^ 2AA. n a - k “ So put a stop to all acts of lawlessness and violence . . .
284
PATTERN
2;
SUBORDINATE-CLAUSE
BASES
so lhal those w ho know You m ight have the leisure to serve Y ou” (or “ and those who know You shall . . . ” ) (ShChass 4 8 :5 3 ^ 9 :7 ) NJk-T N - o y j i B c u T A p T - K U j N A - V M - H c K p —T T M c e Y e “ M ake a net for me, so lhal / m ight have a rem inder o f you in my cell" (ApophPatrum [Elanskaya (1994) 23fc.'26 -2 9 ])
ta m Io
(b) In sequel to a rhetorical question, Ta^pe- implies an unspoken imperative commanding the interlocutor to answer the question. ecj-TcuN noycuNup raipe-®
(c) An independent construction of raipe= occurs, only with Ist-person plural subject, expressing polite request. This implies an unspoken imperative ask ing the interlocutor to grant permission, ra^pe- expresses the speaker’s assur ance that action will occur if permission is granted. njcoeic TJipN-2 iOYe n-tchcjc “Lord, shall we draw the sword?” (= Command us, and we shall draw) el jiaxaxot*ev naxaipTI (Luke 22:49) TJipN-
T A p e - can function as a com pleting clause after certain verbs o f incom plete predication 185 such as k w ‘perm it’; e.g. k a - n a 'I ta p o y ~ b u > k John 18:8 “ Let these m en g o .”
(e)
T he future conjunctive occurs (very rarely) after narrative, expressing purpose; e.g. A q - M o y N A C e s o A e q - < ^ A H A 2 A p o - c T A p e c - o y J C A i I i^ y w A - n N o y T e c c u t m e p o - q A pophPatr 240 (Chatne 7 3 :5 -6 = Z 3 4 5 :3 2 -3 4 6 :1 ) “ And he continued to pray fo r her to hccomc well, and G od hearkened to him ” ; I q - T c u o y N e - " T p e q - B c u K < ^A -S n A -iA K iu B n A -T A rliK O N il N q-K O )p< i) c p o -q T A peq-^ N A -q M -n jo A O K O x iN o c T A p e q -T A A -q m -ttc o n A pophP atr (E lanskaya [1994] 13/?,-36-14o;6) “ He got up to go to Apa Jam es the A lm oner to ask him to give him the sum o f one solidus so that he m ight repay the brother”
285
n o n
p a t t e r n
3:
t h e
-d u r a t iv e
c a u s a t i v e
359 The causative infinitive
c o n j u g a t i o n
i n f i n i t i v e
r p e -
rp e-
Tpecj-ccurn . . . him to choose, for him to choose, him choose or . . . cause him to choose, make him choose Base:
rp e -, rpe*
1 T p A -. rare var. T p e r -
xpeN -
2 T[>eK-
T p c T N -, var. T p e x e T N -
T pe3 Tpeq-
T p eY ~
T pec-
Tpo, an
independent state of the causative infinitive, abnormally occurs in St. Anthony quoted in Besa, Frag. 30 (Kuhn 100:28-101:17, at 101:2 and 17) perhaps as a nonSahidic d ia le d form c e -< t> e o N e i epcu-TN n - n a y ■ ■ • ey-Tpo M -neN 2H T e-® 2A o n A e n “ They (demons) envy you constantly . . . making our spirits become depressed.” (Here xpo n- exem plifies the Stem -Jem stedt rule 171 like any other durative transitive infinitive.) The independent state (spelled epo) is a norm al elem ent o f the Northern (Bohairic) dialect and is also attested in d ia le d L6 o f M iddle E gypt (xpo); but in Sahidic it is generally non-exislent, and all direct objects are suffixed to Tpe-/Tpes.
In some constructions (table 20) r p e - means ‘cause . . . to’, and in others it has only grammatical meaning. Like the other bases, r p e - is followed by enti ty term and infinitive (Base + Entity Term + Infinitive) Tpe-nexoproc upoove “(cause) the grass to wither” rpe-Y-ei “(make) them come”
Unlike the other bases, the morph r p e - is at the same time a transitive infini tive (occurring in prenominal and prepersonal states). Thus, for example, the sentence jiq-Tpe-nexopTOC upoove “It caused the grass to wither” (Jas 1:11) contains two infinitives: the infinitive r p e ‘(cause) . . . to’ and the infinitive ujooYe ‘wither’. Each infinitive (together with its base) relates to its own sub ject in a relation of nexus 248: I-------------------------------------------------------------- 1
base -
base
c|
- rpe
nexoproc
infin. upoove
subj. infin. “It caused
286
subj. -
the grass to wither”
PATTERN
3: C A U S A T I V E I N F I N I T I V E T p e T A B L E 20
S e m a n t ic
S y n t a c t ic a l F e a t u r e s IN I t s F o u r F u n c t io n s
and
M
of
e a n in g
N e g a tio n
Grammatical Meaning Only
(1) Conjugated r p e (2) Completing verbal auxiliary; A fter N J i- o r ( e ) u p A fter o y e t y -
rp e -
By
tm -'
X
N Jk-T M -T pe-
X
(3) r p e - as common noun (4) A d v e rb ial infinitive p hrases
9
X X
e -B -r p e -
X
O th ers
X
e-^ T M -T p e (2 M -n -rp e - ...
t m
- )
'See below, Negations
Negations: (i) e-^rpeq-ccurn is negatived as e-®TM-Tpecj-ccuTn; (ii) 2M-nTpetj-ccuTn. as 2M-nTpet|-TM-ccuTn (i.e. after n - )
tm
- after® but rpesTM-
Exam ples: (i) n c -m m n -^ C o m MMO-q o n n e e -® T M -T p e -n A l M oy John 11:37 “ Could H e not have kept this m an from d y in g ? ” ; (ii) a y - t o a m - o y N-®CNoq 2M -nTpeY -TM -<5M -*'6oM Sv tm ht) 8uvaa0ai aCtouQ Lam 4:14 “ They were defiled with blood in their weakness (while they were not being enabled)”
360 The syntactic environm ents o f rpe- are: conjugated 3 6 0 aicj-TpeYty cu n e He caused them to exist; expanding a verbal auxiliary 361 ■j— N Ji-TpeY -eT I will make them come; as a gendered com m on noun 362 neeiTpcTN-AYnei This grieving o f yours; and forming adverbial infinitive phrases 3 63 2 M -nTpai-cuN 2 While I am living. Cf. table 20.
(1) Conjugated, rpe- is conjugated in both durative t|-rpe-net|pH e jc N -n a ir a ie o c M N - M n o N H p o c “ He m akes His sun rise on the good and on the e v il” (Matt 5:45) and non-durative conjugation jiC |-T p a i-O Y c u 2 2 N -O Y M A n - o y o t o y g t “ He has made m e dw ell in a
place o f green grass” (Ps 22[23]:2) e c | e - T p e T N - 2 tUN € 2 o y n e - n N O Y r e “S o that He might make
you draw near to G od” (1 Pet 3:18) In both syntactic environments all direct objects are directly suffixed to rpeor Tpe=. Conjugated rpe- alw ays expresses causative meaning ( ‘cause . . . to . . . ‘m ake . . . ’). Further exam ples: durative M - c g M n h - t n . , . e T - T p e x N - e i p e M -n M e c Y ^ Rom 15:15 “ I have written to you . . . by way o f rem inder (rem inding you)” ; a y iu
287
NON-DURATIVE
CONJUGATION
e R - T p e - 2 eNKOOYe a h a t j i n m m jl-k ShChass 43:28-31 (= S h lll K1:23) “ And you m ake olhers go astray along with y o u rse lf’; non-durative th p -o y Shiv 36:21 “ He caused Ihem all to exist” ; A q - x p e - n e x o p T o c ( ^ o o y e Jas 1:11 “ It caused the grass to wither” ; n - t p a a ia a ia h m a C N T - iq - T p e - n M o o Y p-®Hpn John 4 :4 6 “ Cana in G alilee, where He had m ade the water turn into w ine” ; M nq-T pe-® M ooY p-®Hpn ShW ess9 142r; 13-17 “ He did not cause water to turn into w ine” ; n N o y T e a c eqe-T A < ^e-T H Y T N A yiu e q e - T p e T N - p - ® 2 0 Y ° 2^ - t a rAHH 1 Thess 3:12 “ May God m ake you increase and m ake you abound in love” ; <^AY-TpeY->‘^“ ^''’e 2 N“ 0 YJCNA2 < ^ a n to y - o y b a < ^ ApophPatr 29 (Chatne 6 :2 -3 ) “ They are sw irled about forcibly until they becom e clean” ; ( ^ A N x e q - T p e q 2 0 M0 A0 re i N -N e q M e e Y ^ ApophPatr 181 (Chaine 44:22 = Z 317:27) “ Until he made him confess his thoughts"; eK < ^A N -T peY ~ P ~ *^^^‘jJ M -npA N M -n N O Y re S h lll 1 6 :1 9 -2 0 “ If you m ake them sw ear an oalh by the nam e o f G o d ” ; e i< ^A N -T M -T p e-n K A 2 o y i u n N - p c u - q N q-O M K -O Y S h lll I 3 l:2 0 “ If 1 d o not cause the earth to open its mouth and sw allow them u p !” (a divine oath in Biblical style = 1 shall surely cause ihe earth to open its m outh and sw allow them up); k a a - t T A -T p e-N e c N H Y p-oYANA<^ NA -i S h lll 16:12-13 “ Let m e make the brethren swear an oath before m e” ; 2“ ^CTe N q-T pe-N K C A A c c u tm a y iu NCMno N q T peY -uJ^-!^^ M ark 7:37 “ He even m akes the deaf hear and the dum b speak” ; 0 YA T-6 0 M n e e-® T pe-nA iA B O A O c Tpe-® pcuM e p-®NOBe ShChass 6 3 :12-15 “ It is impossible for Ihe devil to make people sin”
361 (2) As the expansion o f a verbal auxiliary 184, rp e - is compatible with NA,- ‘is going to’ up- (van eup-) ‘is able to’ NJi-ty- (or NA-eup-) ‘is able to’ OYeup- ‘wants to’ Completing n \ - . (e)uj-, or NA-(e)ty-, rp e - expresses causative meaning ‘cause . . . to . . . ’, ‘make . . . but completing oyeup-, it has only gram matical meaning (and no distinct translation in English). Examples: •('-N Ji.-T p e Y -^ ' n c c - o y i u u j t Rev 3 :9 “ 1 will make them come and bow d ow n": eV < ^A N -T ^-2 p o a ; •('-N A -T ^ -T p e Y ~ c iU T e-® < ^cune [2 lN -N ^^T onoc ShP 130'98r:4-6 “ W hen/If I cease to burden Ihem, I shall stop them from dwelling any longer in my places"; T iM o e e o c . . . nAi e T ^ -N A -T p e T N -p -n M e e Y ^ N -N i2 IOOYC I C or 4 :1 7 “ Timothy . . . w ho will remind you o f (make you remember) iny Ways” ; 2 M -nM A e T K -N A -T p e Y -p -^ ^ f^ ^ ^ J m may S hlll 16:22-23 “ In the place where you are going 10 make them !M'ear an oath” ; N -e -i^ -N A -T p e -A M N T e -O Y iu N N -p c u - q N q-O M K -O Y ShChass 114:56-115:1 “Those whom He will make hell open its mouth and sw allow up” : e < ^ jc ,e -2AeH MnAxe-Ci.e. e - M n A T e - ) n e x c bcua eBOA n - t 6 om T H p ^ M -nA iA BOAO c 21- n e ^ o c M r iq - e u j- T p e - ^ p u jM e p-"N O Be n i p A - n e q o Y i u u j h o c u j m a a a o n e q - N A - < ^ - T p e Y - ^ 'P E m n n c a T p e q - e i e-nK O C M O c ShChass 7 4 :4 5 -5 8 “ Since before Christ on the cross had destroyed all the d evil's power, he was not able to make any one sin against their will, how m uch less can he m ake them do so after His com ing into the w orld” ; nA<^oYOjOY exe-M N -A A A Y N A - u j- T p e q - u jc u n e e q - u jO Y e iT 1 Cor 9; 15 "M y ground for boasting, which no one can make empty” : a y ^ j N e e e T e T N -O Y e c ij-‘'T p e -p p c u M e A A - c NH-TN A p i - c Jo^T-THYTN NA-Y Lukc 6:31 “ And as you wish that people would do to you, do so to them ” ; o y n e x e T N - O Y e a j-T p A - A - q (i.e. x p A -A A -q )
288
PATTERN
3;
CAUSATIVE
INFINITIVE
T p e -
i ;
NH-TN M att 20:32 “ W hat do you want m p/orfo for y o u ? ” ; n N o y T e ncN C cuTH p haV e T * -O Y e u j-T p e -p c u M e nim tUN2 I Tim 2 :3 - 4 “ G od our savior, who desires allpeo-
^
pie lo live"
; 362 (3) A sa gendered common noun. Like all infinitives xpe- can be actualized in the i article phrase as a masc. common noun 105(c); here it has only grammatical meaning (and is without distinct translation in English). It is compatible only with def. sing. (n -. n e e i-) and zero articles. eic-nee[i]Tp€TN-AYni ra^p KjiTji-nNOYTe aiC|-p-®2cuB n h -tn € -y n o 6 N-cnoyAH “For see what earnestness this your godly grieving (the fact of your godly grieving) has produced in you” (2 Cor 7:11) n€200Y
ne
N -^T p eY -n a^p aire
N xe-M nyA H
N -M nH ye
N -M nH ye
oycuN N-NAia^Kjiioc THp-oy M-nKai2 ncc-bcuk €2oyN TJ2HT-oy e-NeyMji n-Fiton “It is the day of their disappearing and for the gates of the heavens of heavens to open unto all the just of the earth and for them to enter, through them, into their resting places” (ShChass 178:54-179:6) N J i N o y - V p e - n p c u M e M o y N 2 o y o e - ® c u N 2 e c j - p - ® N O B e “For a per son to die is better than to live sinfully” (ShAmel I 52:9) e i c 2 H H T e o y n e T ® -N J iN o y -c | h o y n e r^ -N O T M N c a i - ® T p e - 2 e N C N H y o y c u 2 2 N - o y M J i N - o y c u r “See now! what is better or what more pleas ant, than fo r brethren to dwell together? ” (Ps 132[133]: 1) Further exam ples o f T p e - form ing entity statem ent 151: njiV A e n e e -® T p e N c A C A -N eN e p H y Rom 1:12 “ And Ihis m eans fo r Ui to encourage one another”: KC 21UB . . . e x e-n A V n e e-®TpeN-p-® 20Te ShChass 160:14-16 “ O ne m ore thing . . . , namely this: fo r us to fear Him ” ; o y n e n eesBio n j h t I n e . x e n2AAO N A -q j c . e - e - '’T p e K -p - n n e T N A N o y - q n e N - N - e T ^ - p - n e e o o y n a - k A pophPatr 137 (Chaine 3 0 :2 3 -2 4 = Z 304 :7 -8 ) “ W hat is hum ility? The senior m onk said to him . It is for you to do good unto those who d o evil unto you”
363(4) Forming adverbial infinitive phrases, as described in chapter 23 (490); e.g. 2M-nTp3i-cuN2 “While I am living.” Nee N-oyoeiup
reNoy N6i-ne3^ 2M-nakCCUMai “Now as always Christ will be honored in my body, while I am living and while I am dying” (Phil nim
cj-Nak-aktaki'
on
e i r e y M -n x p a ^ -tu N ? e i r e ^ M -n x p a k -M o y
1:20) 9M-nTpey-NKOTic ac n 6 i - npcum€ aicj-ei N6i-necjjcaixe “But while people were sleeping, his enemy came” (Matt 13:25) M n c j- jc e - A a ia iy N -u p a u c e N ^ - y M N M r .a ^ - ^ x p e y - n a ip A ix i “He said noth ing more to them after they had refused’’ (Shlll 148:7) The follow ing lexically fixed expressions occur 4 9 3 : A N X i-® xpe- Instead o f . . . -ing, ao(.N -® xpe- W ithout . . . -ing, e - n M i. e - ^ x p e - Instead o f . . . -ing, e - n x p e - and e -* * x p e - In order for . . . to. eiMHXi e -* * x p e- U nless, MNNCJi-*’x p c - and m n n '
289
NON-DURATIVE
CONJUGATION
CA-e-®Tpe- After . . . -ing, xcupic-®Tpe- Except when/U nless, 2J^eH e-®TpeBefore . . . -ing, Z M - n r p e - W hile . . . -ing, 2 iuC T e e -® T p e - So that, z i T M - n r p e Because o f . . . -ing Especially important are infinitive phrases of purpose 502 and result 503. a ^ q - e i N 6 t - T c cboa 2N -T rakA tA aktai eJCM-niopAa^NHC upji-icu2 ^NN Hc e-®Tpeq-jc.i-®BaknTiCMJi cboa 2 iTOOT-tj Matt 3:13 “Then Jesus came from Galilee to the Jordan to John, to be baptized by him” n K e c e e n e n-npcumc ere-MnoY-MOY 2N-NeinAHrH MnoY-MeraiNoei ON €BOA 2 N-N€ 2 BHYe n-n€y6ijc I e-^TM-rpeY-OYtuupT N-NAJiiMONiON n - n o y b MN-N2JiT Rev 9:20 “The rest of humankind, who were not killed by these plagues, did not repent of the works of their hands so as to cease worshiping golden demons and silver ones”
T O re
e-®Tpe- also expands some verbs of incomplete predication 185; e.g.
jiq-OYe2-®cai2Ne Ae e-®Tpe-MMHHupe nojc-oy e2pa^i eJCM-nexopToc Matt 14:19 “Then He ordered the crowds to sit down on the grass.” For e -® T p e - continuing the optative, imperative, or jussive expressing com mands, prohibitions, or strong wishes, cf. 341.
290
16
The Imperative The Nature o f the Coptic Imperative Affirm ative Imperatives
364
365
Infinitival Imperative 365 Special Imperative 366 Prefixation o f 367 N egative Imperatives
368
Periphrastic Imperatives
369
The Jussive/Im perative Paradigm
370
Resolution o f Number/Gender o f the A ddressee Extension o f the Imperative
T H E N A T U R E OF T H E C O P T I C
371
372
IMPERATIVE
364 The ‘imperative’ ccuTM “ L isten !” (Mark 4 :3 ) M np- 2 cuTB “D o not k ill” (Luke 18:20) a.pi-nV i “D o this” (Luke 10:28) Mj.-Ta.MO-i 367 “Tell m e” (Matt 2:8) upcune ereTN-CBTCUT “B e ready” (Matt 24:44) is an actualization o f the verb 160 that expresses the speaker’s request or com mand to an addressee/addressees (2d person). It belongs to the realm o f direct discourse and dialogue 521. In m eaning, the imperative ranges from the hum blest petition to the m ost authoritative com m and (e.g. ccutm nNoyTe e-nji<^A H A Ps 54[55]: I “ H ear m y prayer, O G o d ” ; C A 2 e - T H Y T N e B O A M M O - i N - e T ® - C 2 0 Y 0 p T e - T C A T e < ^ A - e N e 2 Matt 25:41 “ Depart from me, you cursed, into the fire for ever” ). The comm and expressed by the ordinary imperative and by M A p e - 370 contrasts with the optative e p e - , w hich expresses a strong expectation o f fulfillment 338(a) ( c K e - T A ie - n e K e ic u T “ You shall honor your father” ). Polite or restrained comm and is expressed by the jc .e - or aeK A (A )c + optative 338(a)(ii) ( jc c k a c c K e - e i “ W ould you com e”). A polite request for perm ission to act is expressed by the 1st sing, conjunctive t a - and I st pi. future con junctive TApfi- 358(c) (TA-OYA2 -T nccu-k “ Let m e follow you” ).
The imperative, which contains only one main information unit, does not express nexus and so is not a clause 248 (though it forms a com plete
291
I M I' I- R A n V li
utterunce). N evertheless, it is useful to describe it here, in ussociution with the infinitive o f non-durative conjugation (chapter 15) to which it is mt)stly iden tical in form and generally identical in syntax; its direct object construction is that o f the non-durative infinitive 328, 329; terms in extraposition 330 and adverbial premodifiers 333 can occur before it; it can be follow ed by the usual expansion elem ents o f a verb 181. Invariable n e som etim es occurs with the imperative, cf. 285. For nxs reflex, (dativus ethicus) after the imperative (2 MOOC Nji-K “Just sit dow n”), cf. 181(g). For negations, cf. 368 369.
AFFIRMATIVE IMPERATIVES
365 The 'iijfinitival’ imperative is the usual form o f the affirmative; it has the same forms as the non-durative infinitive 328 ccuTM “ Listen” ccuxn, c e x n - , coT n = “ C hoose” n iC T ey e “ B eliev e” CJI-NA.I “Take these” c|iT -c| “S eize him ” except for the ten verbs listed in 366; mutables occur in all three states. Exam ples: qi M-neK<5AO<5 M ark 2:11 “ Take up your pallet” ; qi-NAT c b o a 2M-neVMA John 2:16 “Take Ihese Ihings aw ay” ; q i T - q q i T - q c t a y p o y M M O-q Shiv 7 :16 “ Seize Him, seize Him, crucify H im ” ; j c i - ^ m o c it 2 h t - t n j c o e i c Ps 8 5 (86);II “ Guide m e, O lx>rd” ; N i n a - V n N o y T e K A T A - n e K N O < 5 f i - N i Ps 50(51): I “ Have mercy upon m e, O God, according to Thy great m ercy” ; bcuk e - n c K H e i Mark 5 :19 “G o hom e” ; oyA Z -K N c t u - e i M ark 2:14 “ Follow M e” ; o yez-T H Y T N f i c c u - ^ i M ark 1:17 “ Follow M e"; n n o y b z ^ r ^ Z e p o - o y I NpcuMe T N N o o y -c o Y NA -i Shlll 24:22-23 “ K eep the money, send me the m en” ; n -ex ® NA-pA2T -K e-TeK O Y o<5e k t o e p o - q N - T K e o y e i Luke 6:29 “ To the person who strikes you on the cheek, offer the other also ” ; n -n c k m n t<^AN-2T H -q qcuT e c b o a M -nANOBe Ps 50(51): 1 “ According to the m ultitude of Thy com passions blot out my transgression”
366 Special affirmative imperatives. Ten verb lexem es form 'special affirmative im peratives’, mostly beginning in x reflex, cease ( a o ) AMOY come (e i) A N m e bring (e iN e ) ANAY look ( n ay ) A p ip e do ( e i p e )
AAo=
A y hand over A oyiuN open (o y iu N ) ajci say (jccu) ma give (-t-) m o take away
instead o f an infinitival 365 imperative. A ll except mJi- 367 are the normally occurring imperative o f their verb lexem e.
292
FORMATION
OF THE
IMPERATIVE
(a) Intransitives
(ei)
jiMOY (said to one male); Ji Mh (to one female); Jim h itn van jiMHeiN (to several addressees) ‘come’ ‘look’
(NJiY)
(b) Transitives, mostly mutable 167; prepersonal states terminating in ei» or i»
take the personal second suffixes 88 (e.g. aiYei-ccj “Bring him” ; Ji^i-coy “Say them”) (eiNe) (eipe)
aiN(e)iNe, JiNi-, ‘bring’ a^pipe, a^pi-, a^pi* ‘do’ (and a^pi- forming imperatives of com pound verbs 180[a]) (AO) jiAos reflex, ‘cease’ (stop yourself) (oYtuN) JiOYtuN, OYN-, — ‘open’ (jccu) —, (var. auce-), ‘say’ (— ) — , x y - (var. a^Y^-), 3,y e is ‘hand over, bring’ (— ) MO (var. Mcu), — , — , ‘take’ (t) 1.rar® mji-, txxs ‘give’ (the imperative of 173 is MANJl=) Exam ples: ( a ) A M o y c b o a M - n p c u M e Mark 5:8 “ Com e out o f Ihe m an” ; a m h e in o y eZ -T H Y T N fic tu -e ~ i M ark 1:17 “ Com e, follow m e ” ; (h) A N e in e n a - i N - O Y C A T e e p e Mark 12:15 “ B ring me a denarius coin” ; A N i- c o y e - n e l M A Luke 19:27 “ Bring them here” ; A p i- n M A yiu k - n a - c u n ? Luke 10:28 “ D o ihis, and you will live” ; Tc A p i-n A M e y ^ n j c o e i c Luke 23:42 “ Jesus, rem em ber m e. L ord” ; A A C U - T N 2 ^ p o - c M ark 14:6 “ Let her alone” ; m c u N ? - c o Y e N - T 6 i J C n - C 2 Jh M -n e K e ic u T M N -T eqc< t)pA ric M artyrdom o f St. V ictor the G eneral (B M ar 29 :2 5 -2 6 ) “Take it and you will recognize your father’s handwriting and his seal” ; -t6 e N - N A - n p p o M - n p p o M att 22:21 “ Render therefore lo Caesar the Ihings lhat are C aesar’s ” ; • ( ' - N A - n p p o <5e M - n p p o Mark 12:17 (sam e); m a n a - y n t u j t n N c e - o y c u M Luke 9:13 “ You give them som ething to eat” ; Luke 11:4I “ Give alm s” ; M A - n N o < 5 N e < 5 N - N - e T ® - c c u < ^ q Ps I22(123):4 “ Give reproach to them that scorn” ; n c N o V K c t ^ - n h o y T A A - q n a - n m m h n c Luke 11:3 “ Give us each day our daily bread” ; M A -N A -i-q m m a tc 2 Sam 20:21 “ Just give him to m e”
367 Prefixation o f m Ji- to form affirmative imperatives. Compound verbs formed by t - 180(a) and Class V causative verbs (in Initial t and final o 193, such as TjiM O ‘instruct’) fluctuate between the infinitival affirmative imperative 365 and a form marked by prefixation of m ji- . ■j—ZTH-K, var. ZTH-K “Pay attention (Give-your-mind)” TJiMO, var. Mai-TjiMO “Instruct” Exam ples: •('-2 t h - t n e p c u -T N M ark 12:38 “ B ew are” ; nNO YTe nANOYTe MA--1—2T H -K e p o - r Ps 21(22):1 “O God, my God, attend to m e"; •(—®cbcu N-NIAT-CBCU 1 Thess 5 :14 “ Instruct the ignoram ” ; T A V e-N exH pji 1 Tim 5:3 “ Honor widows; M A -T A e ie -n e K e ic u T (textual var. omits m a -) m n - t c k m a a y Matt 15:4 “ Honor your father and your m other” ; m a - t b b o - o y 2 P A ^ 2 n - t m c John 17:17
293
IMPERATIVE
“ Sanctify them in the truth” ; m a - k t o - n (i.e. - t k t o - n ) n N o y T e Ps 84(85):4 “Turn us, O God” ; MA-TCABo-N n jc o e ic e - n c K N i Ps 84(85);7 “ Show us thy mercy, O Lord” ; t c a b o - i e - N - e N x - A K - J c o o - Y n a - i Life and Martyrdom of EEustathius. Theopista, and Their Children (BMar 109:15) “Tell me about what you said to m e” ; M A -jcN e-N -eN T -iY -ciu T M John 18:21 “ Ask those who have heard” ; ep<^AN-neKjc,jLJce 2Ko Mi-TMMO-q Prov 25:21 “ If thine enemy hunger, feed him” ; M A -T C -i- o y K o y l M -M ooY Judg 4:19 ed. Thompson “Give me a little water to drink”
NEGATIVE IMPERATIVES
368 N egative imperatives are formed by prefixation o f n n p - 251 (vars. n n c u p -, M n ep -) to the non-durative infinitive. M n p- I Non-durative Infinitive Examples: M nep-K A -nei<^A jce (lextual var. M n c u p -K i-) 2 M -n o Y 2 HT 2 Sam 13:20 “Do not put ihis mailer in your heart” ; M np-p-® 20 T e Matt 14:27 “ Have no fear” ; Mnp-NOJC-ic N xne Luke 14:8 “ Do not sit down in a place of honor (uphigh)” ; M np-KpiNe Luke 6:37 “Judge not” ; M n p -e i c b o a Matt 24:26 “ Do not gooul (come out)” The rare construction Mncup e - + Infinitive expresses an emotive negative imperative ‘Oh, do n o t. . . ; Please! d o n o l. . . ’; e.g. Mncup <5e h a c o n e-® copM -eK m a y a a - k JlY^u tcuoyn Nr-MOYqjT n ccu -k Besa, Frag. 28 (Kuhn 94:20-21) “So please! my brother, do not lead yourself astray; and gel up and search for your self.”
PER IPH R A STIC IMPERATIVES
3 69 'Periphrastic imperatives’ consist o f upcune or a^pi- (the special imperative o f e ip e ) expanded by a non-infinitival predicate:
(a) upcune ( ‘be, becom e’) + circumstantial 427 upcune eK-/epe-/eT€TNM np-upcune e K - / e p e - / e T € T N -
+ Diirative Predicate
Examples: <^cune exeTN-OYAAB 1 Pet 1:16 “ Be holy” ; <^cune CK-oYiuiuM e <5e MMO-K e -n -e T ® -jc i-* ’2 Jin nm m a-k 2N-OY<5enH Matt 5:25 “ Be accommodating to your accuser quickly” Ia0i eOvomv; M n p - < ^ t u n e C K - e i p e m m o - k n - ® a i k a i o c m a y a a -k ShAm^I II 503:2—3 “ Do not start making yourself righteous, by your own means” upcune e - +
Other Sentence Patterns
(Negation, presumably M n p - u p c u n e e - ) E.g. <^cune e-YNT-ic-®eaoYCiA mmay ejcfi-M HTe M -n o A e ic Luke 19:17 “ Have authority over ten cities”
(b)
ip t-
Mnp-upcune
294
+ Situational Preposition 310
FORMATION
OF T H E
IMPERATIVE
E.g. A p i-2 i2 H M -T ijc o e ic 2 n - o y i u n 2 c b o a (i.e. 2 ^ - o y o y i u n 2 c b o a ) Ps I46(I47);7. “ Be before the Lord m anifestly” ; M n p -< ^ tu n e f i e e N -N i2y n o K p iT H c Mall 6; 16 “ Do not be like hypocrites” An imperative o f a nominal predication o f the nom inal sentence can be expressed by <^cune N - + ^Common N oun; e.g. <^cune A e N - ® p e q - e i p e M -n<^A jce Jas 1:22 “ Be doers of the w ord” ; < ^cune a c f i - ® x p H C T 0 C c 2 o y n e - N e x N e p H Y Eph 4 :32 “ And be kind to one another” ; M rTp-<^cune n j l - k n - ^ c a b c n o y a a - k Prov 3:7 “ Be nol wise in Ihine own conceit.” < ^cune can also be com pleted by a prepositional p re d icate: e.g. <^cune JLXN-®jc,pon n -n V o y a jlT 1 Cor 10:32 “ Give no offence (Be wiihoul impediment) lo Jew s” ; < ^cune fJ-TjL2e G al 4; 12 “ Becom e as 1 am .”
THE
j u s s i v e
/im p e r a t iv e
PA RA D IG M
370 The imperative fits together with the pattern of the jussive Mjipe» 340 (nega tive Mnprpe®) to form a combined paradigm 1 M A p i-ccu x n
MApN-CtUXn
2 ccuxn (masc.)
ccuxn
ccuxn (fem.) 3 M A p e q -c c u x n (masc.) M A p e c -c c u x n (fem.)
M A poY -ccuxn
Let me choose Let us choose Choose imperative Choose Choose Let him choose Let them choose Let her choose
with corresponding negatives 1 MnpxpA-ccuxn
M npxpeN-ccuxn
2 M n p - c c u x n (masc.)
Mnp-ccuxn M n p - c c u x n (fem.) 3 M n p x p e q - c c u x n (masc.) M n p x p e Y ~ c c u x n M n p x p e c - c c u x n (fem.)
R ESO LU TIO N
371
OF N U M B ER/G EN D ER
imperative
OF
THE
ADDRESSEE
T he num ber/(gender) o f Ihe addressee(s) is not formally expressed by the imperative (except in a m o y / a m h / a m h i x n var. a m h e i n 366), but can be resolved by i. the def. article o f an article phrase in direct address, e.g. n ic x c Y ^ n j l - i x e c 2 iMe John 4:21 “ W oman, believe m e” ; exse-nAi M M e p A x e x c u k N 2HxShllI 179:9 “ So, beloved ones, take courage” ii. a personal independent or inflecied m odifier agreeing with the addressee(s), e.g. < ^cune <5e n x c u x n n - ^ x c a c i o c Matt 5:48 “ You, therefore, musi be perfeci” ; NxcuxN 21U X - X H Y X N Api-coY N A ~ Y Nxci2e Matt 7 :12 “ Do so to them ” iii. an accompanying circum stantial clause, e.g. <5cu epe-KCUNC ShIV 13:13 “ Slop killing” ; n x o k a c e K - N H C x e Y ^ x c u 2C N - x e K A n e M att 6:17 “ Bui when you fast, anoint your head” iv. a reflexive construction o f the imperative 181(e)(g), e.g. o Y e 2 ~ ''’HYXN fJccu-eT M ark 1: 17 “ Follow m e” ; 2 m o o c n a - k Paphnoute Cephalas, Stories o f the M onks o f the Desert (BMis 4 7 3 :3 4 -^ 7 4 :1) “ Just sit dow n” V . any other personal m orph referring to the addressee(s) o f the com m and, e.g. peKX-neKMAAJce A e ShlV 131:14-15 “ Incline your ear to my w ords”
295
IM P E R A T IV E EXTEN SIO N
OF
THE
IM P ER A TIV E
372 The imperative can be extended by f i r e - (conjunctive) 351, with or without a conjunction such as E-gNreTN-JiTjii NreTN-Mez-MMOOY €T®-2 N -N eeJiA 2i c c 2i Gen 1 ;2 2 “ Increase and m ultiply and fill the waters in the seas” ; c c o t m a.Ycu N T e r N - N o e i Matt 1 5 :1 0 “Hear and understand.” For affirmative imperative extended by the future conjunctive x j ip e - . cf. 358(a) (u jiN e T xp eT H - 6 iHe “ Seek and you shall find”). Cf. also 341.
296
17
The Sujfixally Conjugated Verboid The Nature o f the Suffixally Conjugated Verboid Term in Extraposition 374 Postponed Subject 375 Verboids Beginning with
nji
Expression o f T ense N x ix T s
or
ne
373
376
377
378
2 NE-, 2N3i= ‘It Is Pleasing to. B e W illing’ n e J c e - , neJC3i= ‘Said’ MG
379
380 381
NECjp- ‘B e Pleasant’ and o y e r - ‘Be D istinct’
382
o y n t e - ‘H ave’. See chapter 18
THE NATURE OF T HE SU FFIXALLY C O N JU G A T E D VERBOID 373 The items described in this chapter express predicative meaning like that o f
verbs (infinitive or stative), but formally they are a distinct class. H ence they may be called ‘verboids’, i.e. morphs that in som e respects resem ble verbs. Verboids are nexus morphs 248, and their subject is directly suffixed to the morph, terminating a bound group. N e c tu -K “ You are beautiful” n eJ ce -iH co Y C “ Jesus said” Because the subject must be suffixed, verboids occur in two alternant states (i) a prenomiital state, which must be com pleted by a non-personal entity term as subject; (ii) a prepersonal state, which must be conjugated by suffixation o f the personal suffixes, according to the eightfold pattern o f persons 75. (Som e verboids occur in only one state or the other.)
30:
Nue-nNOYTG “God is great,” N n n n -q “H e is great” n 3i T3it - th y t n “B lessed are y o u !”
N3ii3iT-cj M-npcuMe “ B lessed is the
person” N e c |p - n c p n - 3ic “The old wine is good ”
Tense. The basic forms (except h gjcg-) express present tense; other tense for mations are given in table 21. (For the overall Coptic tense system, cf. chapter 25.)
297
S U F F IX A L L Y
C O N JU G A T ED
V ER B O IU
T A B L E 21 T en ses E x pr es s ed
B eginning In
nV nc
2N€-
by
S u f f ix a l l y C o n j u g a t e d V e r b o id s
P resent
P ast
X X
P reterit co n v ersio n
Other
—u p c u n e e C onjugated
nejceMEUpJlS N € C |p - /O Y e T -
X X
Negation. Verboids vary as to whether or not they are compatible with nega tion. If compatible, they follow the pattern Verboid + Subject + Jin 250. N-N3iN0Y-neTNup0Y
Adverbial complements follow the verboid. 3 74 Term in extraposition. Any personal morph (or personal elem ent o f the pos sessive article) within the sentence pattern can be anticipated by a term in extraposition, that is, a term placed at the front o f the sentence pattern ( ‘extraposited’)
Extraposited Term
Sentence Pattern
(contains a personal morph agreeing with the extraposition) Anticipation I Resumption Topic under discussion I Comment 2 0 iN €
N 2 H T -O Y I
“But as for som e o f them, I they said” (John 1 1:37) and thus set o ff as a topic o f thought. Extraposition occurs only before ver boids with initial n j ^ - or n c - 3 7 6 and before n e J C J i = 3 80. Extraposition and personal morph agree in (person)/number/(gender). The agreeing personal morph shows how the extraposited term relates to the sentence. (a) I St and 2d person morphs can only be preceded by an extraposited personal morph: namely, the personal independenl. ANOK J lE I n e jc A -r “ And for m y part, 11 said ” (Acis 26:15) (h) 3d person m orphs can be preceded by eiiher a personal independenl or some other entity term. N T o o y AC I n e j c A - Y N A - q “ For their part. I they told him " (M att 2;.‘i)
298
I
SUFFIXALLY
I
CONJUGATED
VERBOID
nM cuT I NAAA-q e p o - r “ As for my Father, I H e is greater lhan I” (John 14:28) Further exam ples: c u j n t rjip nim N xe-nN O Y T el n a n o y - o y J Tim 4 :4 “ For every thing created by G od is good” ; i c a c I n e a t A - q j c c - a n o k n e M ark 14:62 “ And Jesus said, I am h e ”
375 Postponed subject: entity term expanding a personal subject. A 3d-person subject (q, c , y) can be expanded by an entity term later in the clause. Njiupcu-oY ON N fii-N A p ro c “ But the lazy, too, are num erous” (S h lll 115:1-2) nejc.ji-c| NJk-Y n 6 i-T c “ Jesus said to them ” (Mark 1: 17) The expansion elem ent is mediated by n 6 i - . In this construction, the person al morph (■}—, - T - . K -, CJ-, etc.) expresses grammatical information, and the expansion expresses lexical content in a postponed, rhetorically distinct e le ment.
V E R B O ID S
b e g in n in g
W IT H
NA,
OR
N€
376 A set of seven verboids
(var. Nj^e-), n xxxs (var. nj^as) ‘be great’ [For NATJiaiTs, cf. 378] NJiNOY- (var. NJ^Ne-), nj^noy * ‘be good’ Nece-, N € c c u = ‘b e b e a u t i f u l ’
(— ), N€CBcucu= ‘be intelligent’ NJiupe-, NJiupws ‘be many, much, plentiful’ (— ), na2Acu6 s (var. n3i2Ao6 *) ‘be pleasant’ (— ), Ne6 cu= (var. Neficucus) ‘be ugly’ T hese, respeclively, are historically related lo: i.TAT ‘increase in size,’ a n aT ‘be pleas ant’, cjk ‘be beauiiful’, t c a b o ‘teach’/ c a o ‘lea m ’, ‘become m any’, 2 ^.06 ‘be sw eet’, T 6 ACIO ‘make ugly’.
are formed with initial ing a quality.
nji
or
nc . They
express descriptive meaning, predicat
NJiNOY-neTNoypoT “Your zeal is excellent” (Shlll 27:5) For NANOY-c e -N C . . . (“ It would have been better if . . . ” ), cf. 4 9 9 ( a ) . Descriptive predication (corresponding to adjeclives in W estern Indo-European languages) is also expressed by ihree oiher m eans; the stalive o f inlransitive verbs whose infinilive expresses process or entry into a state 1 6 8 ( b ) , q-oY O B <^ “ H e/ll is w hite” ; the stative construction o n - with descriptive incidental predicate 1 7 9 , q - o n -® n o 6 “ H e/Ii is greal” ; and ihe nominal senience predicate o f descriplion 2 9 2 , OYpiUMe n e “ H e/It is hum an.” In some instances these constructions com e very close in m eaning, form ing synonym s: oY ^rjieO N ne/NANOY—q “ It is good” ; o y ^ o y I n e /q - c o B K “ It is sm all” ; N A < ^cu-q/q-o< ^ “ It is m uch” ; N A A A -q /q -o n -® n o 6 “ Ii is great.”
299
SUFFIXALLY
CONJUGATED
VERBOID
Further exam ples: T eN 0Y <5eN T 0 N ecu5-® 2pA i ^ - n o v e i N e Aycu NANOY-'’2pJiV ZNOYqjAJce (i.e. z n - n o y u j j o c c ) Jdt 11:23 “ And now thou art both beautiful in thy countenance, and witty in thy w ords” ; NANoy-®jci rjip ezoY e-® piuK 2 I C or 7:9 “ For it is better to m arry than to be aflam e” ; N A e -n N o y T e e - n e N 2 HT 1 John 3:20 “ God is greater than ( n a c - . . . c - ) our hearts” ; rip Matt 11:30 “ For My yoke is easy” ; c i c z h h t c n a n o y - k h a c o n Aycu n c c c u - k e-"<5a)<^T N ccu-K Cant 1:16 (S hlll 5 3 :6 -7 ) “ Behold, thou art fair, my brother, and beautiful to gaze upon” ; n a n o y - c S -n p c u M e e t^ -m m a y e - M n o Y - J c n o - q M att 26:24 “ It ( - c 486) would be better for that man if he had not been bom ” : n n e x -N A N O Y -q M N - n n e e o o Y HO H eb 5:14 “Good and evil"
Negation: ( n - ) Verboid + Subject + aiN Conversions: (i) relative ( e r - , e r e - ) , (it) circumstantial ( e - ) , (Hi) preterit ( n € - ) , (iv) focalizing ( e - ) . In relative construction if the resumptive morph has the function o f subject, the converter is e r - ; otherwise, e r e - occurs. E xam ples: (i) NCTNZBHYe c t - n a n o y - o y Matt 5 :1 6 “ Y our good w orks” ; N e2® ny^ CT-NANOY-OY JiN Shiv 11:1 -2 (= ShAinel I 307:6) “ Evil deeds” (Deeds that are not good); n e x c e x e - N J K ^ e - n e q N A ShGue I6/?.'8 “ The Christ whose mercy is great” ; T2 o e iT e M-MNT~2 HKe e T e -N A < ^ e -c o Y N T -c a n ShIV 162:19-20 “ The cheap garment that is not worth m uch” ; (ii) n a n o y - o y p a n e-N A N O Y -q e 2 0 Y E -0 YMNT-pMMA0 e -N A < ^ c u -c Prov 22:1 “ A fair nam e is better than much w ealth” ; ® p A < ^ e . . . e - N A A - q e - n A i 3 John 4 “ Any greater joy than this” ; 2 e N 2 o i ' T e e -N A < ^ e -C 0 Y N T -0 Y 1 Tim 2 :9 “ Costly attire” (Garments whose prices are great); 2eN2BHYe c - n a n o y - o y a n ShP I31^40r />;9-8up “ Things that are not good” ; e - N e - N A U j u j - o Y a n N < 5 i - N - e T ' ' - N A - p - ® B O A ShChass 173:7-9 “ If those who are going to elude it were not n u m ero u s” ; (Hi) N e - N e c c u - q n e 2 M -(i.e . e 2 pM -)nN O Y Te Acts 7 :20 “ He was beautiful before G od” ; (iv) 2 i t ^ - o y c - n a a a - y e -N eY ^P H Y ShChass 135:44-^6 “ H ow are some greater than o th ers? ”
377 Expression o f tense. In addition to the preterit conversion expressing past tense, a fuller range of tenses etc. can be expressed by periphrastic conjuga tion o f upcune completed by a circumstantial conversion o f the verboid, cf. 427. (For the overall Coptic tense system, cf. chapter 25.) E.g. nerNBeKe c|-N A -ujcune e-NAujcu-cj 2 N -T ne Luke 6:23 “Your reward will be great in heaven.” 378 nj^Tats ‘Blessed is . . . ! ’ (naKapioc;. . . ) can be analyzed as a nexus o f the verboid naa - ‘is great’ 376 and the possessed noun ciat * ‘(the) eye(s) of . . . ” 138. It can function as an interjection 240. n a t a t - t h o y t n epupjiN-pcuMe nim m c c tc u -tn “Blessed are you when all people hate you” (Luke 6:22) naT at-c| M-npcuMe e re -M n c j-B c u K 2*^-nujOJC,Ne N-NJiCeBHC “Blessed is the person who has not walked in the counsel o f the ungod ly” (Ps 1:1)
300
SUFFIXALLY
CONJUGATED
VERBOID
A prenominal state is formed periphrastically. by the extension morph n 139: NJiTaiT-c| n-, NJiiaiT-c n-, NJiTaiT-OY n - (e.g. NJieiJiT-OY n - n 2 m€T®-M MAY Shiv 25:20-21 “ B lessed are those servants”). The antonym is o Y o e i HXs “ Woe unto.”
Negation: none Conversions: (i) relative
(e x e -),
(ii) circumstantial
(e -),
(Hi) focalizing
(e -)
Exam ples: (i) t a i x e e e e x e - N A e iA T -o Y N-N-eT*-NA-<5N-oYnjL.ppHCiA m nNAY N-TANAPKH S hlll 6 8 :2 2 -2 3 “ Thus (This is the way that) blessed are those who find the ability to speak freely in the tim e o f n ecessity” ; (ii) o y o c i n a - n jc,e-A N -A M eA ei e - N A e iA T - o y N TO oy N-N-eT®-oYJ^JiB T H p - o y J c e - A y < ^on-N eiN o< 5 N~2 i c e ShAm61 II 3 74:7-8 “ W oe unto us for we have been negligent, whereas ( n t o o y ) blessed are all the saints for they have received these great suffer ings” ; (Hi) e-N A iA T -N e p< ^A N -nccuT H p Tc n a z m - c n e - M n e e o o y M -nCATANAC ShAmel II 51: lO -1 1 “ It is when the savior Jesus saves us from the evils o fS a tan that we are blessed”
2 N € - , 2 N A = ‘ IT IS P L E A S IN G T O , BE W I L L I N G ’ 379
2 N€-, ‘It is pleasing to. Be w illing. Be content. A gree’ occurs both absolutely (A cj-ei c b o a up^ptu-TN e - 2 NA-cj 2 Cor 8:17 “ He has com e to you o f his ow n accord”) and expanded by an entity statement 487 (2 n a - n N2 0 Y0 e -® e i €BOA 2 M-nccuMA 2 Cor 5:8 “It is very pleasing to us to com e out o f the body. We are very w illing to com e out o f the body” ). Formally, 2 N € -/ 2 NA= must be treated here as a suffixally conjugated verboid. But syn tactically it belongs with the impersonal predicates such as an apk h and 24u(n-> Verboid -i- Subject -i- a n (e.g. n - 2 N € - t a 4 ' Y x h a n N 2 H T - q Heb 10:38 “ My soul has no pleasure in him ”)
Negation:
Conversions: (i) relative ( e r e - ) , (ii) circumstantial ( e - ) , (Hi) focalizing ( e - ) Exam ples: (i) In simple a w ih u tiv e constructions if the resum ptive m orph has the func tion o f subject, the converter is e x e - and the subject is expressed as a personal suffix on the verboid: N - e x e - Z N A - y a n e-® C A 2cu-oY c b o a n - x c c b o ) e e o o y ShOrig 365 (O rlandi 34:4) "T hose who are not willing to withdraw from evil doctrine." But if the resum ptive m orph would have non-subject function, no resum ption is expressed (cf. 489): e K e-< ^cucux N r - o Y e M - ‘'Aq K A X A -n - e x e - 2 N e-xeK ')'Y X H (i.e. e ®oYOM-q) Deut 12:15 “ Thou shalt kill and eat flesh according as thy soul is pleased to ” ; OYPM2H x e e-® 2M ooc M N - n - e x e ~ 2 N A - c (i.e. e-® 2 M o o c NMMA-q) I C or 7 :39 “ She is free to be m arried to whom she w ishes” ; n e o Y o e n ^ M - n - c x e - 2 NA-K n e nN O Y xe Ps 68(69): 13 “ It is a propitious time, O G o d ” (It is the time o f that which You are pleased with); ^ - n x u j < ^ e x e - 2 N A -q ShEnch 69:62-63 “ Just as he pleas es" (III the m anner with which he is pleased); x e iM iN e N -pcuM e e x e -N -2 N A ~ Y a n e-®ccuxM e - n e q < ^ A x e ShA m el I 6 1 :3 -4 “This sort o f person, whose words they are not willing to listen to "; (ii) ^ - o Y 2T o p a n a a a a e - 2 N H - i ^ I Pet 5:2 “ Not by con straint but w illingly” ; • ( '- n a - j c c u a c n a - k M -n e i< ^ A Jc e e - N - 2 N A -i a n
301
SUFFIXALLY
CONJUGATED
VERBOID
e-® JC O o-q ShAmel II 191:11 “ I am going to say the follow ing to you, even though I am not happy to say it” ; •(■-NA-glOYe e p o - o y N T A -q iT -o y e - 2 N A -y a n Martyrdom and M iracles o f Si. M ercurius the General (BMis 263:17) “ I shall beat them and sleal ihese things against iheir w ill” ; (Hi) e - 2 N e -n J C o e ic 2 N -N -e T * -p -® 2 0 T e 2 H T -q Ps 146:11 “ The Lord lakes pleasure in them that fear H im ” ; Aya> AAHea>c e - 2 N A - y AN e-® T pe-A A A y N -p c u w e MAKApize M M O - O y e - n x H p - q S hlll 161:2 9 -1 6 2 :1 “ And il is really true ihal they are not at all willing for any person to con gratulate ihem ”
Or/ier tenses (including non-durative conjugation and n a - future) are formed in a reflexive construction o f p~ 2 NA= ‘be w illing’, in which the suffix o f 2 na= agrees in number/(gender) with the subject o f the infinitive p -. ep u p A N -n Jcoeic p - 2 NA-q “ If the Lord w ills” ( J a s 4 : 15)
AN-P- 2 NA-N e-®ei upApcu-TN “We wanted to come to you” (1 Thess 2:18) Further exam ples; N - r e T N A - p - g N H - x N a n e - ® N A y e - N e T N u ;H p e m n NETNCNHy ShAmel II 278:7 “ You will not be happy to see your children and your brothers” ; A y - p - 2 N A - y rAp Rom 15:27 “ For Ihey were pleased to do it” ; o y o i Ne-® e - M n e p - 2 Ne-® e-® ei e 2 P ^ ' ” S h lll 200:17 “ W oe unlo you (sing, fern.), for you have not been willing to come up from or out of your acts of wickedness” ; N T e p e q -p ~ 2 N A -q A e N < 5 i - n N O y r e nA l e N T -A q -n o p J C ~ f c b o a J C i N - e e i- N - 2 H T - c n - t a m a a y Aycu A q -T A 2 M -eT c b o a 2'"'’M -neq2M O T e-® < 5 A n -n e q j^H p e c b o a n 2 ht~® Gal 1:1 5 -1 6 “ But when He who had set me apart since 1 was in m y m other’s womb, and had called me through His grace, was pleased to reveal His Son in m e ”; p-gN A -K h o y c u y ) . . . e— NA-N e s o A ShAmel 1 83 :7 -8 “ Be pleased, and will, in Y our mercies . . . to forgive us” ; n j c o e i c A pi~ 2 NA-K e -® T o y Jc o -r Ps 39(40):13 “ Be pleased, O Lord, to deliver m e”
n e jc e - ,
n c x A =
‘SA ID ’
3 8 0 n e x e - , n exA = ‘said’ (chapter 24) signals direct discourse in past time, and is extremely com m on. It has no negation or conversions. n ex e-T c
na- y
“Jesus said to them” (Mark 2:1 9 )
Unlike its synonym x t u m m o - c ‘say’, it cannot be follow ed by indirect dis course 519. Paradigm; n e x V l, nexa^K, nejcH (ShAm61 I 74:6), n exA C , nexA N , nexHTN or n exe-T H Y T N , n ex A y .
Negation: none Conversions: none Constructions: (a) Completed by x e - to introduce reported discourse, syn onym ous with A ( q ) - x o o - c x e E xam ples: n e x e - N c q M A O H T H c N A - q x e - C K - o y e u p - T p e N - B c u K e - T c u N M ark 14:12 “ His disciples said to Him. W here will You have us g o ? ” ; A q - ^ i 6 e < ^ A -c iM cuN n e x p o c I n e x e - n n N A - q x e - n x o e i c John 13:6 “ So H e came to
302
SUM-IXALI.Y
CONJUGATED
VERBOID
Sim on Peter, and the latter said (K&yEi. Greek praesens hisloriciim) lo Him, L ord"; n e J c e - 2 0 (Ne N -N eq M jieH eH C N -N eY ^pH Y - x e - John 16:17 "S om e o f His disci ples said lo one another” ; n e Jc e -K e o Y A A e j c e - Luke 9:61 “ Another said” ; n e J£ .e -T c A e n j i - y J t e - M ark 6;31 “ And Jesus said lo them ” ; J te - M n iu p n j c o e i c Acts 11:8 “ But I said. No, L ord” ; A q -O Y iu a ji A e n <3i- ic neJC A -q N3i - y j c e - Matt 11:4 “ And Jesus answered and said to ihem ” (diroKpiGeiq . . . elirev oOtoiq) (h )
Parenthetical in the midst of quoted matter E xam ples; c - N A -< ^ c u n e m n n c a - n a V n e J te - n N O Y T e N T A -ncu2 f ^ b o a 2 M - n A n N A ejcN -C A pS n i m AcIs 2:17 “ And afterwards it shall be, G od has said, lhal I will pour out iny Spirit upon all flesh” ; n - C T ® - M e m m o - i n e j c A - q q - N A - 2 A p e 2 e-nA
(c) Following reported discourse. E.g. MMN-®pjiupe tyoon N-NJiceBHC
nexe-njcoeic Isa 48:22 (ShChass 169:11-13 = Shlll 75:13) “There is no joy to the ungodly, said the Lord.” An adverbial clause preceding nejce- lays down a circumstance or relation ship in which the sentence is being asserted (i.e. under which the predication is made). Premodifier I Verhoid
I nexJi-q them” (Matt 26:21)
e v -O Y tu M
n j^ -y
“And as they were eating I He said to
Conjunctions and initial attitude markers (chapter 10) also occur in premodi fier position; e.g. mnncco- c ac I nejca^-q N-NcqnaieHTHC John 11:7 “Then after this I He said to His disciples.” M etyj.=
381
‘ n o t
k n o w
’
‘not know’ occurs only as a negative morph. NAMC Meq;e-® x e -N m Ne h o y n e “Truly, you (sing, fern.) [wetyA* + ®89] do not know who or what they are” (ShAmel I 76:1-2) Som ehow relaled is the expression m cu ^e - nim ‘A certain person w ho shall rem ain nam eless. Such-and-such’ 6 8eiva. Olherwise, the prenom inal state o f this verboid does not occur.
Conversion: relative (examples below) Construction: (a) Followed by object constructions n -, e -, or by .xe-; ‘not know’. Rare. (Much tnore usual expressions of know are the infitiitives gimc
and c o o y n .) E xam ples; Me
303
SUFFIXALLY
CONJUGATBD
VERBOID
N - e x e - M e m ji- N e p o - o y J c e - o y Ne ShlF2 p. o n /);2 0 -2 3 “ Do not trust those w hose nature we do not know” (those about whom we do not know what they are); for J c e - , cf. exam ple cited above.
(b) The lexically fixed expression n eo jA -K forms an initial attitude marker 238: ‘perhaps, maybe', literally “ You (invariable, generic 2d sing, masc.) don’t know . . . It is follow ed immediately by a main clause or conjunctive clause. Exam ples: M em ji-K jv.e 2 JiTe-THYTN 1 Cor 16:6 “ And perhaps I will stay with y o u ” ; M e u ;x -K NToq n e n e j ^ Luke 3:15 “ Perhaps it is he who is the C hrist” ; M eq;ji-K j i q - n i p j iz e m m c u - t n N6 i - n - e T * - n ip j i 2e I Thess 3:5 “ Perhaps the tempter has tempted you” ; M e m j i - K rJip N T - J i q - o Y e m m o - k e x B e - n A i n p o c -o y o Y N O Y Phim 15 “ For perhaps it is because o f this that he was parted from you for a w hile” ; m g u ^ a -k rJip N T e -o y J^ t o a m j i e -^ M o y 2 J i - o y j i r j i e o c Rom 5:7 “ For perhaps one will dare to die for a good m an”
N eqp-
‘ BE
plea sa n t
’
a nd
o y eT -
‘be
d is t in c t
’^
3 82 Tw o verboids occur only in a prenominal state: ‘be pleasant, enjoyable’ (cf. N o q p e ‘profit, advantage’) o y e r - (var. o y a j T - ) ‘be distinct, different’ (cf. n - o y « j t ‘sin gle’) 158
Neqp-
E.g. N e q p - n e p n - A c Luke 5 :3 9 “The old wine is good .”
Negation: none Conversions, (i) Netjp: none, (ii) Constructions o f pair, o y e r - . . .
o y eT -:
o y e r - : circumstantial ( e - ) .
(a) alone o y e T - . . . ‘is distinct’;
oyer-
(b ) correlative is one thing and . . . is another”
Exam ples o f oyex-: ( a) oyAJioc e-oyeT-Teq6in-u;jLxe . . . 2e n a a o c . . . eo y e T - n e y z p o o y H e-oyeT-reyjicnfe Ezek 3 :6 “ A people o f different speech . . . nations o f other speech or o f other tongues” ; n c n n o b c . . . o y x o y x enTJV.H o y e T - n N O B e n N o e c Psote o f Psoi. Farewell Address before His Martyrdom (BMis 154:7-8) “ O ur sins . . . one by one, since each sin is distinct” ; (h) o y e T - n N x y N -"en iT iM i. oyeT-nNJiy N - ® c o n c ShAmel II 4:2 “ The hour o f threats is one thing, and the hour o f entreaties is another” ; oyeT-n-ex®-Jco Jiyu) oyeT-n-eT^-Tcuzc John 4:37 “ One sows and another reaps” (The sower is one thing and the reaper is another); o y e T - n e o o y m en ri-N -e ,T ''-2 N -T n e o y e x - n e o o y A e N -N -er® I C or 15:40 “The glory o f the celestial is one, and the glory o f the terre al is another”
304
18
Predication o f Possession: ‘Have' m n t g - (mm^ y ) 383 The Nature o f o y n t g - and m n t g - 383 Compatible Subjects 384 Inflections o f the Prepersonal State 385 Reduced (zero) vocalization 386 Term in Extraposition 387 Postponed Subject 388 Expression o f Tense 389 Syntax o f the Direct Object (the P ossessed) 390 Extension o f o y n t g - 391 Expressions o f Indebtedness with o y n t g - 392
O Y N xe- (mm^ y ) and
Other Expressions o f Possession ( ‘H ave’)
393
a. Durative prepositional predicates 393 b. Prepositional com plem ents o f opcune/opoon 393 c. Belong to tix-/tiu }s 393 d. Which he has eT®-NTA.-tj and e T e - o Y N T A -g - c t j 393 e. Get, come to have, acquire k o j n a = , J ti, jcn o 393 f. Consider as . . . oYNTi= . . . gu jc and . . . - n t o o t = Have the ability to. Be able to. Can 394
oynt€ -
( mm^ y )
383 The nature o f M N T e - , M N T i= )
and
393
MN T e - ( m m a y )
a nd m n t g - . The verboid o y n t g - , o y n t a = (negative is a very com m on and ordinary expression o f possession:
‘have/not have’.
OYNTe-BBA
ngybhb ay ^
’oYNTe-N2AAATe
n - ttte neyma ?
“ Foxes have their holes, and birds o f the sky have their nests” (Luke 9 :5 8 ) O Y N TH -TN -noY oiN (textual var, O Y N T e-T N -) John 12:36 “ Y ou have the light” MNT€-A 3i3iY e-N A A A -tj e - T A ^ “ N o one has greater love than this” (John 15:13) MMNTA-N-6 e 2 e A n ic mmay “ W e have no other hope” (S h lll 136:19) Historically and formally related to the existential morph o y n - 476, in Sahidic Coptic o y n t c - is a transitive 166(a) suffixally conjugated verboid
305
PREDICATION
OF
POSSESSION
373, whose subject (the possessor) is directly sulfixed to the veiboid: oynta-T “I have,” MNTe-®npo<})HTHc “A prophet does not have.” The list of entity terms that can occur as subject/possessor is restricted, 384. Like other suffixally conjugated verboids oyNTe- occurs in two states 30, prenominal and prepersonal. o y N T e -, oyNTAs ‘have’ (vars. o y N r e -, o ynta =)
MNT6-, MNTA= ‘not have’ (vars. Prepersonal alternants 386:
mmntc - , mmnta =)
o ynt =, ( m) mnt =
A direct object (the possessed) is optionally expressed. Like the subject, a direct object can be either a personal morph or some other entity term; for pat terns of subject + direct object, cf. 390. In most patterns, a direct object fol lows the suffixed subject. After converters ( e r e - , e - , N e - , e - ) , o y N x e - etc. is som etim es written y N T e - etc., and MMNTe- elc. is som etim es written M M Nxe- etc. (without its first superlinear stroke): e - y N r e - , N e - y N T e - , e -M M N x e -, etc.
The adverb mm^y (untranslatable) often accom panies o y n tg - and (hi)MNTe-, coming soon after the verboid as though it were an enclitic.
o y n ta -t on mmay N - 2 eNKeecooY “And I have other sheep ”(John 10; 16) OYNTA.-N MMA.Y M-neNeioJT 3k.Bp3k.23iM “We have Abraham our father” (Luke 3:8, textual van oYNTA-N-neNTojr) Its function and the conditions for its presence or absence are at present unknown, ( kimay has no distinct translation in this construction.) Negation: (Ji)i»TNTe- 250 etc. occurs in place of o y n te - etc. Conversions: (i) relative (e re -), (ii) circumstantial (e-), (Hi) preterit (ng-), (iv) focalizing (e-), focalizing with negation of topic element 453 (eTe-MNT=) Examples: (r) N e e rjip e x e - y N T e - n ic u T ncuN ? John 5 :26 “ For as ihe Father has life” ; TeyjkPJknH e x e - o y N T j i - y - c ShIV 52:2 0 “ Their love that they have” ; Niec o o y e T e-M M N T -oy-® (i)cuc M att 9 :36 “ Sheep without a shepherd” ; n - e r e oyN T Jk-q . . . n -e x e -M N T ik -q Matt 13:12 “ The person who has . . . the person who has n o t . . . (fr) e -y N T X -q -N e q u p H p e 2 N - o y 2ynoTJkrH I Tim 3:4 “ Keeping his children in subm ission” ; z e N e e H y e n - b o t g e -M N T -o y -® H n e ShEnch 9 4 : 2 ^ “ Countless, abominable deeds"; (ffi) N e -y N x e -o y A J k m c T H c e-pcU M e cNJky n e Luke 7:41 “ A certain creditor had two debtors (Had something against two people)” ; N e-M M N T -oy-® u;H pe MMJky n e Luke 1:7 “They had no child” ; (rV) e -o y N T J k q - c 2 N-N-eT®-KJk-®MJk Njk-q Shlll 85:14 “ It is among those who make a place for him that he has it” ; e-M N 't’-o y z c u B i . e MMJky e q - o p S e-®C23i'i M -n p p o eTBH HT-q Acts 25:26 “ But 1 have nothing definite to write to the em peror about him ”
384 The following kinds of subject (possessor) are compatible with the prenominal state OYNTe-/(M)MNTe-: definite, indefinite, and zero article phrases; oy^i and A3i3k.Y. (Other kind.s of subject occur in the constructions described in 393.)
J06
OyNTe-
AND
MNTG-
Examples; mh oyNTe-nzM ZJiA ®2 m o t Luke 17:9 “Does the servant have any thanks?” ; N e-yN T e-oY A JiN icT H c e-pcuM e cnj^y n e Luke 7:41 “ A certain cred itor had two debtors (Had something against two people)” ; MMNTe-®rrNi. ®Ki.c 2i-® cxp5 Luke 24:39 “ Spirits do not have bones and flesh” ; N e-O Y N T e-o y ^ oyBcu N-KNTe Luke 13:6 “ A certain person had a fig tree” ; MNTe-Ajijiy e -N Jix ji-q e-T A ^i John 15:13 “ No one has love that is greater than this”
385 Inflections o f the prepersonal state. Full conjugation o f the prepersonal state o y n ta = follow s the same pattern as the preposition na=. 1 2
I have you have etc.
1
-T
1
o y n t a
-
2
k
OYNT6-®
3
2
o y n t a
O Y N T A -tJ
we have etc.
o y n t a
-c
o y n t a
-n
O Y N TH -TN
3
o y n t a
-y
I do not have you do not have etc.
m n t a -T
M N TA -K M N T 6 -®
3
M N TA -q M N T A -C
1 2
w e do not have etc.
M N T i-N mi 5 t h
3
-
tn
MNTA-Y
When a non-personal direct object is suffixed to the conjugated prepersonal state, reduced (zero) vocalization occurs: o y n t =, (m )m n t =. E.g. N e - Y f < T O Y - 2 e N K e a ; H M A e n - t b t Mark 8 : 7 “ And they had also a very small amount o f fish. ” Cf. 390(d2). 1
OYNf-
2
oY?)T-ic-
1
M N t- (nmt-i-)
2
MNT-ic-
(ount-i-)
OYNT-e-
3
M N T -e -
3
OYNT-qOYNT-C-
MfiT-qMNT-C-
1
o y n t
1
MNT-N-
2
OYNT-eTN-
2
MNT-ETN-
3
o Y N T- o y -
3
MNT-OY"
-
n
-
But fully vocalized spellings (like 385) often occur in this position; e.g. e q jo jn e OYf»T-HTN-®nicTic mm^ y (= O Y N T -eT N -® nicT ic mm^ y ) Matt 17:20 “ If you have faith.” Fully Vocalized Spelling o f the Reduced Form s I 2
O y N T X -K -
3
O Y N T A .-q -
c y N T i.-r-
I 2 3
O yN T A ^-C O y^JTA ^-N oyN T H -T N -
o y N T A .-y -
-
MNTA.— K -
MNTe-®-
O yN TC -® -
1 2 3
m ntx- T
M N T A .-q M N TA ^-C -
1 2 3
M N T A .-N -
M N TH -TN M N T X -y-
307
PRFDICATION
OF P O S S E S S I O N
387 Term in extraposition. Any personal morph (or personal elem ent o f the pos sessive article) within the sentence pattern can be anticipated by a term in extraposition, that is, a term placed at the front o f the sentence pattern ( ‘extraposited’)
Extraposited Term(s)
Sentence Pattern
(contains a personal morph agreeing with the extraposition) Anticipation I Resumption Topic under discussion I Comment NAel A e I MMNT -O Y -‘*NOYNe MM31Y “But as for these, I they have no root” (Luke 8:13) and thus set o ff as a topic o f thought. Extraposition and personal morph agree in (person)/number/(gender). The agreeing personal morph shows how the extraposited term relates to the sentence. 1st and 2d person m orphs can only be preceded by an extraposited personal morph: namely, the personal independent. J iN O K 1 o y n t j i - T
M M J iy N - O Y 2 p e e - ® Y O M - c
“ For m y part. I I have food to eat” (John 4:32) NBj^mop 1 oYN TJi-Y -NeY BHB “ As for foxes, 1 they have their holes” (M att 8:20) n 2 o q 1 o Y N T e - T e q M J iT O Y N e c u ^ i
“ As for the serpent, I its venom has its lim itations” (ShChass 28:2 4 -2 6 )
388 Postponed subject (possessor): entity term expanding a personal subject. A 3d-person possessor (q, c , y ) can be expanded by an entity term later in the clause. The expansion element is mediated by n 6 i - . 0 Y N T - t j - * ’e 3 0 Y c i A . m m ^ y N 6 i - n a ) H p e M - n p c u M C e - ® K A .- * ’N O B e e b o a
“The Son o f Man has authority to forgive sin s” (Mark 2 :1 0 ) For other possibilities, cf. 87. A personal second suffix 88 as subject, follow ing a penultimate personal object morph 82, is expanded by the m ediation o f r i - rather than n 6 i - : e.g. n k ji nTm e x e - o Y N T J i - c q - a m - h p c u m f Job 2 :4 “ All that a man has” (Every thing such-that has-it-he m - the m an); c f 390(c).
In this construction, the personal morph ( - q etc.) expresses grammatical information, and the expansion expresses lexical content in a postponed, rhetorically distinct element. 389 Expression o f tense. The basic forms express present tense. (For the overall Coptic tense system, cf. chapter 25.) A fuller range o f tenses, etc. can be expressed by periphrastic conjugation o f qpcune com pleted by a circumstan tial conversion o f o y n t e - , cf. 427.
308
OYNTG-
a n d
m ntg
-
E xam ples:
eyn o M O N H A e M J ip e c -c y c u n e e - y N T J i - c mmj^y n - o y z c u b Jas 1:4 “ A nd lei steadfastness have its full effe c t” ; i.e e - ® T p e q - u ;c u n e e -y N T J i-c ) mmj^y N -oyM N T -M N T pe g - n j i n o y - c 1 T im 3:7 “ M oreover, it is necessaryyi)/- him to have a good recom m endation” ; J te - J iK - p - ® n ic N -x e A e io N
Toc
2N -oY K O Y t
m cune
e -Y N T -K -® eao Y ciJi
m m j^ Y e j t N - M H T e
M -n o A e ic
Luke 19:17 “ Because you have been faithful in a very little, have authority {come to have authority) over ten cities” ; w n p - m c u n e e-oY N T e® - 2Ji2 n - 2 J^i ShAmdl II 6 2 :4 -5 “ Do not acquire (literally come to have) m any husbands”
But a more usual means o f expressing these other conjugations o f ‘have’ is the reflexive verbal construction koj na= reflex. + n - ( ‘have’, ‘com e to have’). Exam ples: M n j i T e T N - K J i - ® n i c T i c n h - t n M ark 4 :40 “ Do you n o iy e t have fa ith ? ” ; e -® T p e q -K c u N Ji-q M -ncuN ? 2 pM N jH T -q John 5 :26 “F or H im to have life in H im self” ; e-Y-J^NJiPKH x e e -n jiT e-*K cu N ^ -q M -n -e x q - N J i- T J iA O - q ejpJ^T H eb 8:3 “ Hence it is necessary for this person to have som ething to offer”
390 Syntax o f the direct object (the possessed). The subject (possessor), and like w ise the direct object (possessed), can be either (i) a non-personal entity term 384 or (ii) a personal morph. Thus there are four com binations, w hose syntax is illustrated in table 22 with the affirmative o y N T e -. The order o f subject and object depends upon which pattern has been selected. T A B L E 22 S y n t a x o f t h e D i r e c t O b je c t (t h e P o s s e s s e d ) a f t e r o y n t e -
(F o r resum ptive n 6 i - , cf. 388) D irect O bject (P ossessed )
S ubject (P ossessor )
N on-personal entity term
Non-personal Entiiy Term (a) o y N T e - n i a J T n c u N ^ ' “ T h e F a th e r has life ” (S uch-that has-it-G od) S u b je c t + O b ject
P erso n al m orph
Personal Morph (b ) ( e T e - ) Y N T - c - n N O Y T E ^ “ W hich G od h a s” O b ject + S u b jec t (c) ( e T e - ) o Y N T A - t j - e ’ “ W hich you (fem .) h a v e ” (S u ch-that h a v e -it[q ]-y o u [e ]) O bject + S u b ject
( d l ) O y N T A -T A e MM31Y N - o y o Y H J u p '’ “ I have a d e sire ” S u b ject + O bject (d2) 0 Y N - t'- T e 3 0 Y C iA ® “ I have the p o w e r” S u b jcct + O b ject variant spelling:
(e) o Y N T A - c - c e ’ “ S he ( c ) has them ( c e ) ” S u b jec t + O b ject
0 Y N T A lf - T e 3 0 Y C i3 i ‘ n e e r j i p e x e - Y N T e - n i c u T n c u N j 2P^T N j H T - q John 5:26 “ For as e T e - Y N T - c - n N O y T e z p j i i n j h t - n 1 John
Himself”
the Father has life in 4:16 “The love ihat
309
i >k i ; u i
(:a
t i
()N
o i - p o s s i -s s i o n
Ood h m tmong u s " ; x M N T - I r j i e o c e T C - o y N T J i - q c - n N O Y T e e z o y N e - N - e T * - n H T ijO Y N i p o - q 2 N -o Y M N T -2JiK (collated) ApophPatr 191 (Chaine 49:15-16 = Z 322:14-15) “T hejoodness that God has towards those who wberly flee to Him” J n o y tu m e r e - O Y N T ji - q - q e z o y u e p o -® S e e j t o c u T - e M - n o y tu m e T e - o y N T J i - q - e e jo y N e p o - q (collated) ShZ 387:14-15 = ShAmdl 1 41:1-2 “ The desire that He has for you, just like the desire that y o u (e) have for Him” ^e-y N T ji-V A e MMJiy N - o y o y t u m e - * e i cyjiptjD-TN Rom 15:23 “And since I have longed to come to you” (Having a wish to come to you) -’ N - e T e - y N T j i - c - c e (lextual var. - c o y ) T H p - o y Maik 5:26 “ All (pi.) that she had” ‘o y N -t--T e a o y c iji John 10:18 “ I have power to lay it down.” Similarly, e - M N T J i - r - “ j i r J i n H JV .e M M J iy I Cor 13:2 “ Without having love”
Notes on the five combinations (table 22, constructions [a] to [e]) (a) The direct object (the possessed) is autonomous 28, and is not mediated by a
preposition. Subject and direct object can be interrupted by another autonomous element such as Ae; e.g. we-oYNTe-Tcjuopn men ycNAiKAicuMA N-qjMOje Heb 9; 1 “Now the first one had regulations for worship.” (b) Base with reduced vocalization (oyNT= etc. 386) + penultimate personal
object morph ( - e - , - e c - , - c - , -c q -, - q - , -q c -) 82 as direct object + non personal subject. Extremely rare and in writing sometimes hard to distinguish from combination (e). Seemingly attested only in relative conversions or cleft sentences, with the direct object person suffixed to oyntCa)^ and functioning as resumptive morph. E.g. nka nim eTK-yNT- e r -niieicuT (textual vars. oyNT-c-, Y N T-e-, oyNTA-q-, oyNTA-qc-) (collated) John 16:15 Ttavia boa ^ Jiaiiip “All that my Father has”; e -M -n i 2 ojB a.n N-oyuJT neTe-oYNT-e-MMEAoc THp-oy Rom 12:4 “Without its being the same function that all the members have.” (c) Fully vocalized base (oynta=) + penultimate personal object morph 82 as direct objeci + personal second suffix 88 as subject. Like (b), this construction is extremely rare; it is hard to distinguish from combination (e). As with (b),
the attestation is in a relative conversion, where the direct object person suf fixed to oyNTAs functions as resumptive morph. A subject expansion is medi ated not by 7761- but by n - 203. E.g. nka nim eTe-oyNTA-cq-^ M-npcuMe Job 2:4 “All that a man has” (Every thing such-that has-it-he hithe man). (d) A non-personal direct object (the possessed) relates to the conjugated verboid
in either of two ways; ( dl ) Fully vocalized base + personal suffix (oyn ta-i, oynta-k, etc.), and direct
object mediated by the preposition fi-. If present, mm^y usually stands between subject and object. E.g. oy^Jta-i N-oYnpo<})HTi3i 1Cor 13:1 “I have prophet ic powers” ; oynta-T mmay N-oYBeKe I Cor 9:17 “I have a reward.” (d2) Conjugated base with reduced vocalization (oYN f-- o y n tk -, etc. 386)
+ non-personal direct object suffixed to the conjugated base; e.g.
310
O y N T e - AND
MNTG-
O Y N T -q-oY
(e) Fully vocalized base + personal intermediate 8 0 as subject ( o y n t a - i - , o y n t a - K -, etc.) + personal second suffix 88 as direct object (possessed) Personal Second Suffixes sing. 1st 2d 3d
-T
-K , -C K , -T K (masc.) I?] Ifetn.) - q or - c i j (masc.) - c (fern.)
pi. [? ]. - C N
-
thytn
- c e or
- c o y
Further exam ples: 6 y n e T e - o v N T j i - e i - t ) Ps 72(73):25 “ For what have I ? ” ; n - e x e - Y N T e - e - t j John 4 :1 8 “ He w hom you ( - e - ) have” ; n - e x e - o y N T H -T N -Z j 2 Cor 8:11 “ W hat you have” ; n K x p n o c e - N e - o y N T H - T N - e t ) Rom 6:21 “ T he profit that you h a d ” ; M N T i.-y -q S h lll 90:18 “ They do not have it” ; nK e e x e - o y N T J i - t j - c t ) Matt 13:12 “ Even what he has” ; e - o y N T J i - g - c j n - n - g t *N Ji-q (focalizing conversion) S h lll 8 5 :14 “ It is am ong those w ho m ake a place for him that he has it” ; t m n t - m n t p g e - N e - o y N T J i - y - c Rev 6 :9 “ The witness they had bom e” (The witness they had); N - e x e - y N T J i - y - c e e j o y n e p o - q Acts 25:19 “ The things that they have against him ” ; e - M N T J i- tj- c o y (textual var. - c e ) JV.e e -® T i.i.-y Matt 18:25 “ But since he could not p a y ” (But not having them so as to pay them ); ^ n o n o y n t j i - n - c k MMJiy j t u c —®enuT Prochorus, A cts o f St. John Evangelist (Morgan M576 f.2v ft; 13-15; Dep. 102) “ As for us, we ihink of you as a father” (W e have you as a father)
391 For extension o / o y n t e - hy a clause in conjunctive conjugation, cf. 353. 392 Expressions o f indebtedness with o y T ire - include o Y N x e - Creditor + Amount or Thing Owed + e - Debtor oY N T e- Creditor + e - Debtor (English translations o f this construction usually reverse the dynam ic and use the verb owe, with the prepositional object o f e - translated as the person who ow es: Coptic A has [an amount] against the account o fB becom es English B owes to A [an amount]). E.g. eo jc u n e A e e-oY N T -ic-oY Z O M N T e - n - e r ® 2 ITOYUJ—It Deut 2 4 : 1 2 ( 1 0 ) “ If your neighbor ow es you m oney” (If you have m oney against your neighbor); N - e x e - o Y N T e - n e q a o e i c e p o - o Y Luke 1 6 : 5 “ His master’s debtors” (Those such that his master has [som e unspeci fied amount] against them). In meaning, this construction overlaps with the
311
PREDICATION
OF
POSSESSION
situational predicate ep o = N -/e p o = in the durative sentence 310(i), except that here the creditor must be specified.
O T H E R E X P R E S S IO N S O F P O S S E S S IO N ( ‘ H A V E ’ )
393 (a) Durative prepositional predicates. Particular kinds or degrees of possession,
constituent (inalienable) membership, appurtenance, custody, infection, etc.— various kinds of ‘having’—can be expressed by a prepositional predi cate in the durative sentence 310. The subject is the possessed and the prepo sitional object is the possessor. m n -®noyn € MMo-oy “They have no root” (Matt 13:6) (No root is in them)
(English translations of this construction must reverse the dynamic and use the verb has, with the Coptic subject translated as the posses.sed and the preposi tional object as the posses.sor: Coptic A is in the possession o f B becomes English B has A.) As the following examples demonstrate, selection of prepo sition (ntoots, mmo=, 2 ICDCUS, 2 i-xiu=, etc.) is motivated by the semantic class of the subject/possessed item in Coptic. For oyn-®6om ‘be able’, cf. 394. Further examples: a ie -e n iA H nePAOJccoKOMON F ir o o T -tj n -T o y J ia c John 13:29 “Because Judas had the money box” (proper noun as possessor); oyn-® b jl^ MMO—o y MGY-^JiY GBOA 1 OYN-®M3i3iXe MMO-OY MGY-CCUTM I pCU—Oy MMO-OY M eY-m ^iAe I mJiJiNT-OY m m o -o y MeY-mtUAM I n g y C ix m m o -o y MeY-<3oM«3M I N eY -O Y epn T e m m o -o y M eY -M oou ;e Ps 134(135): 16-17 “TTiey have eyes, bul thej' cannot see; they have ears, but they cannot hear; they have a mouth, but they cannot speaV; ihey have a nose, but they cannot smell; they have their hands, but they cannot touch; they have their feet, bui they cannot walk"; (o)Y *tu n - k n t e . . . e p e - 2 eN«3cuBe 2 iu )c u -c Mark 11:13 “ A fig tree in leaf” (having leaves); OYKoAYMBHepi.. . . e p e - t n - c t o ^ z i x c o - c John 5:2 “ A p o o l. . . which has five porticoes” ; e p e-m x M N c n t g j i c u t - t h y t n Luke 9:3 “Having (i.e. wearing) two tunics” ; (o)YPtUMe . . . e-YN-zeNJiJiiM O NiO N gicu cu -q Luke 8:27 “ A man . . . who had demons” ; oY pw M e . . . epe-O Y nN Ji n - j i^ im o n io n N-jiKxeJipTON N2 HT-c) Luke 4:33 “ A m an , . . who had the spirit o f an unclean demon” ; o y n -o y j^ j^ im o n io n NfiMA-q John 10:20 “He has a demon” ; N e-Y N -oY N o<5 n - 2 M0 M 2 iiu c u -c n e Luke 4;38 “ She had a high fever” ; oyfi-O Y H p N -o e iK NTe-THyTN Matt 15:34 “ How many loaves have you?” ; m n-"kjiJioc n t o o t - i c John 4 : 1 I “ You do not have a jar” ; e -o y N -* K ie J ip ji NTM -noyJi noyJ^ Rev 5:8 “Each holding a harp” ; oyii-*«3oM mmo* e - “ Be able to” (Have capacity to), e.g. oyn-*<3om F im o-k e-*T B B o-T Luke 5:12 “You can make m e clean.” But the general possessive verboid o y N T e - overlaps these prepositional constructions in meaning; e.g. n - e x e - y N T MMJ^y e-®ccuTM Luke 8:8 “The person who has ears to hear” (= n - e T e -o y N -® M iiJ ce F iM o-q e-®ctuTM Luke 14:35)
(h) Prepositional complements o/q;cune/q;oon ‘be’ function like those in (a) above.
OTHKR EXPRESSIONS
OF
POSSESSION
Exam ples; M N -® N O Y nejie u ; o o n 2 P ^ i N2 H T -tjM a tt I3 ;2 I “ He has no root in him self” (Root does not exist in him ); n —e N T - i- A e r e c u N u j t o n e NMMJi-q Mark 5:15 “The man who had (ihe dem on named) Legion." Especially typical is q j w n e / q j o o n NXs ‘have’: n k x nim e x * -m o o n NA-q M alt 13:46 “ All that he had” ; j i - n - e r e <4)u ;e upcune N ji-i e - * T p j i - c 2Jii n h - t n Jude 3 “ 1 had need ( n - e r e - u p u ^ e ) to write to you.”
(c) ‘Belong to ’. Relatedness (being possessed, owned, etc.) is expressed by the possessed pronoun n3t-/ncu» ‘the one o f’, cf. 296. Exam ples: nominal sentences x n o k j i e j i N r - n j i - n e x c 1 C or 1:12 “ 1 belong to Q irisl” ; t c o - o y T e T M N T -ep o N -M n H y e M att 5 :3 “ T heirs is the kingdom o f the heavens” ; n m ji j te eT 6T N -ccuT M e p o - q M -ncu-V jin n e a a a a n i - n j ^ r cut John 14:24 “ The word that you hear is not M ine but My Father’s ” ; expanding p - in nonduralive co/yMga/fo/rTeKAHpoNOMiA N ji-p -T c u -N Mark 12:7 “TTie inheritance will be ours”
(d) ‘Which he has’ is expressed by either eT®-NTA-q (etc.) or eT e-oyN T A q - c q (etc.) 390(e] Exam ples: K k2 n i m er'-NTi-q M alt 13:44 “ A ll that he h a s” ; n-eT*-NTi-c T H p - q Luke 21:4 “ All that she has” ; n K e e T e - O Y N T ji- q - c q Matt 13: 12 “ Even what he has’
(e) ‘Get, come to hare, acquire' is expressed by koj na= reflex., by x i. or by Jc.no reflex., i.e. rHTHc Matt 2 1 :46 “They held Him to be a prophet.” 394 ‘Hare the ahiltty to, Be able to. Can ’ (constructions containing expressions of actor [entity term] and action [infinitive as noun])
(a)
o y n -^6 om n - / mmo= [power exists in . . . ], like expressions o f constituent membership 393(a); negation, ( m) m n o Yn -®6 om n -
actor e-^action
o Y N -q ; 6 oM n - actor e-^action (for q ; - , cf. 184[c])
All four conversions occur (focalizing only in the negative?). Exam ples: o y n -^ O o m f i - n N o y T e e -* T O Y N e c-z eN < i)H p e N-JkBpjk2 JkM e b o a M att 3:9 “ God is able from these stones to raise up children lo A braham ” ; MN-cy<3QM m m o -i e -^ M O o y je ApophPatr 182 (Chatne 45; 11) “ 1 cannot w alk” ; n -e T e -o y N -''< 3 o M M M o-q e - * q i M x p e q - q i Matt 19:12 “ Let the one who is able to receive, receive” ; z w - N ie y c iA N -o y tO T e x o y - T i x o M M o -o y ezpjiT N - 2J12 N - c o n TepoMne e - M N - m 6 o M e N e ? e -* Jtu )K g b o a N -N -eT ® -
2 N-NeicuNe
__________________ ________________________
3J3
PREDICATION
OF
POSSESSION
N Ji-'f--n e Y 0 Y0 T e p o - o y Heb 10:1 “ It can never, by the same sacrifices which are continually offered year after year, make perfect those who draw near” R elated constructions: (i) o y n - " 6 o m absolute ‘it is possible’; (ii) o y n - ''6 o m N-/MMOS actor “ is empowered, is skilled’; (Hi) o y n -® 6 o m e-'^action ‘it is possible to’; (iv) o y n -® 6 o m e -® T p e- actor + action ‘it is possible for . . . to {v) o y n -® 6 o m N T e - [conjunctive] same as preceding; (vi) oyn-®«3om e - + article phrase [not infinitive] expressing act + n -/m m o = /n n ji2 P N ~ actor ‘ . . . is possible for . . . ’ E xam ples: (i)
R om 1 2 : 1 8 “ If po ssib le” ; (ii) o Y p c u M e M M o-q 2E N - N e r p j i < t ) H Acts I 8 ; 2 4 “ An eloquent man, well versed in the scriptures” : (Hi) e-N e-oY N -® «3oM e-® K ji-neT pcuM e e e o A NCJiBHA J c e -J iq -e n iK jiA e i P i- n p p o Acts 2 6 : 3 2 “ This m an could have been set free i f he had not appealed to Caesar” ; (iv) M M N - m « 3 o M e - ® T p e q - p - ® M J i e H T H C n j i - T Luke 1 4 :2 6 “ He cannot be My disciple” ; (v) m m n -® « 3 o m N T e - T e r p j u J i H (textual var. e - ® T p e - T e r p j i < t ) H ) b cua g b o a John 1 0 :3 5 “ Scripture cannot be broken” ; (vi) oyn-®«3om e - 2 cuB nim i5 - n - e T * - n ic T e Y e M ark 9 : 2 3 “ All things are possible to the one who believes” ; oyn-®«3om e p o - o Y N N j ^ z p f i - n N O Y T e Luke 1 8 :2 7 “They are possible with G o d ” e m Jce -o Y N -m < 3 o M
e - Y N T - t j - n u ;j i J c e e -Y N -® < 3 o M
(h) Comp)ound verb 180(a) 6 m-®6 om [find-p)ower] Acior ( . . . ) 6m-®6om e-^action Actor ( . . . ) (e)q;-6M-®6oM e-®at7ion occurs in hwth durative and non-durative environments. Examples: N x e p e q - ^ i JV.e g b o a Mnq-em-«3M-**«3oM e -® m ju ce nm m ji - y Luke 1:22 “ And when he came out, he could not speak to them ” ; j i q - j i p x e c e j i i N -T J im e -* o im jiYtu e - ® c p - n c y jijc e z c u c x e N q -T M -(te x tu a l var. TM-em-)«3M-®«3oM e-®BcuK ezoY N e - x n o A i c n o y c u n ? M ark 1:45 “ He began to talk freely about it and to spread the news, so that He could no longer openly enter a tow n” ; Jce-feNe-u;-«3M -®<3oM 2tu c u -N e -® c e n c -N -e T ® - 2 N - e A i 't 'ic n i m 2 Cor 1:4 "S o that we m ay be able to comfort those who are in any affliction” ; N e c - o Y tu m e-® M ooY T -q I Mnec-«3M-''«3oM JV.e Mark 6:19 “ She wanted to kill him ; but she could not” ; OYPo e q -o Y tu N e-MN-AAj^Y Nji-eu;-<3M-®<3oM e-®u;cuTM M M O - q Rev 3:8 “ An open door, which no one is able to shut”
Cf. also q ;- , e q ; - , N i - q ; - 184.
314
The Impersonal Predicate (iN iP K H ,
See chapter 22
2 J t n c , r e N o i T o , e 3 e c T i . q ; q ; e , 2 J t M o '0
Part 3 Complex Clause Patterning
19
The Conversions: Relative, Circumstantial, Preterit, and Focalizing
The Nature o f Conversion in Coptic The Function o f Conversion The Converters 396 Double conversion 397 Triple conversion 398 The Relative Conversion
395
395
399
The Nature o f the Relative Conversion 399 Forms o f the converter 399 The function o f relative conversion 400 As secondary converter 401 Term in extraposition 402 R oles o f the R elative Conversion 403 The sim ple attributive: relative and circumstantial as alternants ( n c i o y eN T -A Y -N ^Y e p o - t j ) 403 Bare ex®- 405 e p - expressing resumptive subject function 406 Antecedents o f time or manner ‘in which’ 407 The appositive attributive (MJipiJi taT eNT-AC-u;TT- 23 i2 N - 2 ic e e t c .) 408 Unconverted attributive clause after n^T + adverbial premodifier 409 The explanatory relative clause (o yi, e r e - n N o Y T e n e etc.) 410 The articulated attributive constructions (n -eN T -A -M cu Y cH c C2AI eTBHHT-q etc.) 411 Extensions o f the R elative Conversion 412 The Circumstantial Conversion 413 The Nature o f the Circumstantial Conversion 413 Forms o f the converter 413 Simplification (omission o f e - ) 414 The function o f circumstantial conversion 415
319
CONVERSIONS
As secondary converter 416 As tertiary convener 417 Term in extraposition
418
Extraposited subject with extraposited converter Adverbial Premodifier 4 20 R oles o f the Circumstantial Conversion 421 The adverbial circumstantial ( e p e - T e f A q ; H M n e -n e q ;N e ncu2) 421
n
-® t b t
419
m m
^y
Relationship resolved hy preceding conjunction 422 /4i second member o f antithesis 423 e-JiMON, e - M o n c , and e - n - k a t j i - . . . a n 424 Invariable e q - forming adverbial modifier 425 The com pletive circumstantial (M A peq-ccufM e - n e n p o ( J ) H T H C eq -jc.d j N-Nii) 426 In periphrastic conjugation 427 The sequential circumstantial (Aq-jc.N O Y -ei e - A i - x e nAi) 428 Extending a relative clause 429 The attributive circumstantial clause (oYPiiJHe e p e - T e q 6 ijc. UJOYOJOY etc.) 4 30 Unexpressed antecedent 431 In epistolary salutation formula 432 Extensions o f the Circumstantial Conversion 433 The Preterit Conversion
434
Forms o f the Converter 434 The Functions o f Preterit Conversion 435 As secondary converter 436 The preterit secondarily converted 437 Invariable n e in Preterit Clauses 438 Preterit in Narrative or Exposition 439 Term in Extraposition 440 Extraposited subject with extraposited converter Adverbial Premodifier 442 Extensions o f the Preterit Conversion 443 The Focalizing Conversion
444
Forms o f the Converter 444 The Functions o f Focalizing Conversion 445 A s secondary converter 446 Focalizing conversion in second and third degree conversion 447 The Focalizing Conversion as a N exus Pattern 448
320
441
NATURE
OF C O N V E R S I O N
Eligible Focal Points in Durative and Non-durative Patterns Focalizing Conversion o f Other Sentence Patterns 4 5 0 Shift o f focus in the nominal sentence 451 Negation 452 Negation o f the focalization nexus 452 Negation o f the topic elem ent 453 Term in Extraposition 454 Extraposited subject with extraposited converter 455 Adverbial Premodifier 456 The Focalizing Clause as an Entity Statement 457 Extensions o f the Focalizing Conversion 458 Focalization Expressed by the Circumstantial Conversion
449
459
Neutralization o f Focalizing versus Circumstantial Conversion
460
T H E N A T U R E O F C O N V E R S I O N IN C O P T IC THE
FU N C TIO N
OF
C O N VERSIO N
395 The sentence patterns (nexus patterns) described above in part 2 are ‘basic' sentence forms, meaning that they are the basis o f four grammatical super structures called 'conversions’: Relative 3 99 Circumstantial 413; cf. 4 0 3 -4 , 408, 411 Preterit 434 Focalizing 444 (The imperative [chapter 16] is not subject to conversion, not being a nexus pattern.) Each conversion is formed upon the m ain-clause basic nexus patterns by the prefixation or substitution o f a ‘converter’ 396, a morph that signals that the converted clause has a special (marked) relationship to the surround ing text, in syntax and/or structuring o f information. For exam ple
Basic: c e - c c u r n “They ch o o se” Relative: e r o y - c c u T n MMo-q “ . . . whom they ch o o se” Circumstantial: e y - c c u T n “ . . . (they) ch oosin g” Preterit: N e y -c c u T n “They ch ose” Focalizing: e y - c c u T n ( N T e i 2 e ) , as in “It is (in this w ay) that they choose” (Converters: er = relative, e= circumstantial, Ne= preterit, e= focalizing)
321
CONVERSIONS
SO likewise
Basic:
iY - c o j T n “They ch o se”
Relative:
E N T -AY-CCUTn MMO-q
Circumstantial: Preterit: Focalizing:
. . whom they chose, had chosen” e -A v -c c u T n “ . . . (they) having chosen” NK-AY-ccuTn “ They had chosen” N T-AY-ccuTn (NTeT2e), as in “It w oi (in this way) that
they chose" (Converters: g n t - relative,
e -
circumstantial,
N e-
preterit, n t - focalizing)
In immediate sentence-level analysis, relative and circumstantial clauses can be classi fied as 'subordinate’ douses-, preterit and focalizing clauses, as 'm ain' clauses (cf. 248). But because preterit and focalizing conversions each signal a special structuring o f infor mation that has m eaning only within a textual structure larger than a sentence, they can not ultimately be classified as independent.
THE
CONVERTERS
396 Converters enter into tw o types o f construction with the converted clause:
(a) Mutable converters occur as prenominal and prepersonal states 30, within cer tain patterns o f the durative sentence 320, 324. (i) Prenominal
(ii) Prepersonal
State
State
Relative Circumstantial Preterit Focalizing
eT=, er®e= Ne= e=
erep eepe-
N epeepe-
The personal intermediates 80 are suffixed to the prepersonal state, replacing the personal prefix o f the basic durative sentence (e.g. basic 'f -c c u r n .
preterite conversion
N e- 'i- c c u rn )
Relative 1 e - f - (e x * +
N e tNGKN epe-
eK epe-
3 exq-
eqec-
N eq-
1 exN 2 exexN -
e N -, var. rie x e x fl-
N eN N ex ex N -
3 exoy-
ey-
Ney-
er®- 405
322
eV-
Preterit
2 e x ic e x e - , var. e x e p e excPI.
- I - )
Circum stantial and Focalizing
N ec-
NATURE
OF C O N V E R S I O N
M utable conveners with the fu tu r e auxiliary n j i - :
2d sing. fem. Rel. ex eN Ji-, vars. e x e p e N ji-, exepM ji-, and e x e p jiCircum. e p e N ji-, vars. e p N ji- and e p jiPret. N epeN ji-, vars. N epN ji- and N ep jiFoc. epeN Ji-, vars. e p N ji- and e p ji2d plur. Rel. e x e x N ji-, i.e. e x -e x (N )-N A Circum. e x e x N j.-, i.e. e - x e x (N )- N x Pret. N exexN ji-, i.e. N e -x e x (N )-N JiFoc. e x e x N i.-, i.e. e -x e x (N )-N X -
(b) Immutahle sentence converters are converters prefixed to a whole basic sen
tence pattern (with alternants selected according to sentence pattern). They occur where the mutable converters do not occur and vice versa. Relative 399; e re -, alts, e -, e r -, gnt - (common var. n t - ) Circumstantial 413: e Preteril434: N e Focalizing 444: e -, alts, n t - (var, g n t - ) , e r e TABLE 23 A t t e s t e d S im p l e C
o n v e r s io n s o f t h e
R elative
N om inal sentence (chapter 13) Containing a n ? - etc. C ontaining n e etc. Durative sentence Patterns I and 2 320 Pattern 3 o y n - / m n - 324 N on-duraiive conjugation i q - / M n q - 334 M H A T q - 336 q ; 3k q - / M € q - 337 e q e - 338 N N e q - 338 Suffixally conjugated verboids In initial na. or n e 376 n a V a .t= 378 2 N 6 - 379 m e o ja s 381 oyer- 382 o Y N T e -/M M N T e - 383 Cleft sentence Pattern I 464 O Y N - / M N — 477 Im personal predicate 487, 488 oyoi N — 244
MMON, Monc, N-KATA-
C
S e n t e n c e Pa t t e r n s
ircumstantial
P reterit
X
x'
X
X
Fo c a u z i n c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
. . . AN 424
323
CONVERSIONS
RELATIVE
'Only in conlrary-lo-fact conditional sentence 498 and regret 499? ^Cf. 451 ^Cf. 451 and 459 ^Not attested with neg. w e q - ? ’The basic cleft sentence already has the function of focalization 461
397 Double conversion. The conversions that are main clauses (preterit and focaliz ing) are subject to simultaneous, second conversion by the relative ( e r e - , var. e - ) , circumstantial ( e - ) , or focalizing ( e - ) converters, as shown in table 24. T A B L E 24 D o u b le C o n v e r s io n s Se c o n d a r y C Prim ar y C
onversion
onversion
Relative ( e x e - or e - )
Circumstantial
Preterit
Focalizing
(e-)
(Ne-)
(e-)
401
416(a) 41 6 (b ) 41 6 (b )
cf. 398 cf. 398
P reterit F ocalizing durative F ocalizing p ast tense (afrirm .)
446
398 Triple conversion. The focalizing conversion is subject to what formally appears to be simultaneous conversion by the circumstantial + preterit immutable sentence converters, as shown in table 25. T A B L E 25 T r i p le C o n v e rs io n s Se c o n d a r y + T ertiary C C
Prim ar y C onversion
onversions:
ircumstantial o f t h e
P reterit ( e - N e - )
F ocalizing durative e p e F ocalizing past tense (affirm .)
n t- xs
417 417'
' e N e - N T - i = is not focalizing in meaning, cf. 498
T H E R E L A T IV E C O N V E R S IO N THE
n ature
of
T H E R E L A T IV E C O N V E R S IO N
399 Forms o f the converter Im m u t^ le sentence converter (allomorphs) e - : before qpa^pe- 337 (var. eT e-qp a^ pe-) (aorist affirmative) and as sec ondary converter o f the preterit conversion (var. e r e - ) 401 e N T - (common var. n t - ) ; before 334 (past tense affirmative) e T - ; before Na^Noy- etc. under conditions described in 376 e r e - before: durative Patterns 1 and 2 negative, under conditions described in 3 20; nominal sentence (chapter 13); cleft sentence Pattern 1
324
CONVERSIONS -
RELATIVE
464; impersonal predicate 487, 488; w n e - 334 (past tense negative): Mna^Te- 336; Meqpak« 381; 378; n n g - 338 (optative negative); Na^Noy- etc. under conditions described in 376; oyoT n - 2 4 4 ; oyi J - / m n - 477; OYWTe-/MNTe- 383; qpakpe-/M epe- (affirm, var. e-q pa^ pe-) 337 (aorist); e n e - 379; and as secondary converter o f the preterit conversion (var. e - ) 401 N T - : Cf. G N T Mutable converter (allomorphs) e r e p e - , e T « ; in the durative sentence under conditions described in 3 2 0 GT®-: in the durative sentence under conditions described in 3 2 0 ,4 0 5 e p - : cf. 406 400 The function o f relative conversion. The relative conversion signals that the converted clause m odifies, i.e. descriptively expands, a preceding entity term; or forms an entity term by expanding n - . It plays the follow ing roles: i. the sim ple attributive construction 404 (the star that they saw) ii. the appositive attributive clause construction 40 8 (Mary, who has worked
hard among you, . . . ) iii. the explanatory relative clause 410 (One, that is, God) iv. the articulated attributive construction, an entity term 411 (that which
you hear) It is also an element in the cleft sentence (chapter 20). Tenses in the relative clause express relative time 529. 401
As a secondary converter, the relative is an elem ent in relative preterit conversion (a double conversion 397): e x e - N e , var. e - N e . E.g. n - e x e - N e q - q ^ o o n iN ShA m el II 4 18:7 “ That which was non-existent” ; n e o o y e - N e - y N T i - I - q 2 i 2T H -ic e - M n iT e - n ic o c M O c u n tu n e John 17:5 “ The glory that I had with Thee before the world came into being” ; n T tu q ; e - N e i - N ^ H T - q S h lll 117:29 “ The rule that I was living by.”
402 Term in extraposition. A dependent personal morph, usually the subject, with in the relative clause can be anticipated by a personal independent ( j ^n o k etc.) in extraposition, that is, placed at the front o f the relative clause (‘extraposited ’) before the converter Antecedent + Extraposited Term
Converted Sentence Pattern
(contains a personal morph agreeing with the extraposition) Anticipation I Resumption Topic under discussion I Comment
325
CONVERSIONS
-
RELATIVE
a n o k . I e - f - N j ^ - B c u i c e p o - q “ And the place where I am going” (John 8:21) (And the place, for M y part, I which I am going to) N e e NT o q I C T q - ^ M - n o Y O E i n “ A s He is in the light” (1 John 1:7) (In the way, for H is part, I that He is in the light)
Ta.1 6 e Te e e hiTCUTN I g t g t n x - u ;x h x m m o - c “ This, then, is how you shall pray” (Matt 6:9) (So this is, for your part, the w ay I that you shall pray) and thus set o ff as a topic o f thought. Extraposition and dependent morph agree in (person)/number/(gender). The dependent morph within the relative clause shows how the extraposited term relates to the clause. Also occurring in this position are inflected m odifiers that agree with an elem ent within the relative clause; e.g. i i e e ? u )U )- n N T -iq --} - nj^ - n Acts 11:17 “ As H e gave to us loo (Jusi as, us too. He gave to u s)” ; K i T i - e e o n NT-3k-n e N n e p i T N - c o N nikYAoc C2 i i N H -T N 2 Pet 3:15 “ So also our beloved brother Paul wrote to you (Just as, also he, our beloved brother Paul wrote to you).”
ROLES
OF
THE
R E LA T IV E
CO N VERSIO N
403 The simple attributive: relative and circumstantial as alternants Since relative and circumstantial 413 alternate in three attributive construc tions (404, 408, 411), both conversions w ill have to be mentioned in these paragraphs; cf. also 430. An ‘attributive clause' m odifies (descriptively expands) a preceding non-personal entity term. n c i o y eNT-a^Y-Na^Y e p o - q 2 N-MMa^ N-qpa^ “The star that they had seen in the East" (Matt 2:9) npcuMe e T e p e - T e q 6 iJc m o o y t “ The man who had the withered hand" (whose hand was withered) (Mark 3:3) The m odified term ( n c io Y , npcuw e) is its ‘antecedent’. Tense in the converte d d a u se expresses relative time 529. Antecedent (except n - ) and attributive clause can be separated from one another by modifiers or other autonomous sentence elem ents: f i e e r^p eTe-MN-®MNr-A^HCTHC q p o o n ShChass 3 9 :3 0 -3 2 “ For just as no thievery exists.” 4 04 The 'simple attributive clause ’ construction nupHN GT-Na^NOY - t) “The tree that is good. The good tree” OYupHN e-Na^NOY - q “ A tree that is good, A good tree” (i) (ii) (iii)
326
ROL ES OF
RELATIVE
CONVERSION
contains three essential elements: i. Antecedent, the nucleus of the construction (nqpHN, oyupHN) ii. Converter (relative or circumstantial), followed by the rest of the con verted clause (eT-Na^Noy-t), e-Na^Noy-t)) iii. ‘Resumptive morph’ occurring as part of the converted clause, i.e. a morph that agrees with the antecedent in number/(gender), and refers to it (nqpHN eT-N3kNOY-tl). Resumptive morphs include: all personal morphs (including the personal element in the possessive article); variable ne, re, ng and invariable ne in the nominal sentence; -Ma.Y (in ewa^y ‘thither’, MMa.Y ‘there’, and gboa^ MMa^y ‘thence’) expressing place. Under certain limited conditions described below, the resumptive morph is not expressed 405, 407. For 2 NG-, a;a;e, Meqpqpe, and c-AOicei in relative conversion, cf. 379, 488,489. Alternation o f relative and circumstantial. After definite antecedents (n - etc.) the attributive role is filled by a relative clause, after non-definites (o y -, etc.) by the circumstantial; after . . . nim and oyoN n im , cf. 60; after bare specifi er, 65(iv). (a) npcuMe eTepe-Teq6iJc MooyT (Mark 3:3, textual var. epe-) (b) oyptuMe epe-Teq6iJc qpoytuoY (Matt 12:10) (antecedent) (attributive clause) (a) “The man who had the withered hand” ; (b) “A man who had a withered hand” (But after antecedents expressing time or manner ‘in which’, both relative and circumstantial occur indifferently 407.) D efinite antecedents a re : def. article phrases ( n - . . . ) , def. deierm inator pronouns ( n i i ) . proper nouns (m o jY ch c ). Article phrases built on . . . n i m and at least som e determ inators (such as z^ 2 ) 3*”® rnodified by either relative or circum stantial indifferently. Possessed nouns 138 are not com patible with any kind o f attributive clause. All other non-personal entity term s are non-definite and are m odified by the circum stantial o r by the appositive attributive clauses 408. Personal m orphs are m odified only by the appositive attributive. Indeed, the appositive attributive enables both relative and circum stan tial to m odify all these types o f antecedent. Further exam ples: n e iq ^ iJ c e eN T -ik - q - cu cu n e Luke 2:15 “ This saying that has com e to pass” (This saying + c o n v e r t e r + it has com e to pass); ( o ) Y p t u M e e - j k - q - j c o N - o Y < 3 p o 6 M att 13:24 “ A person who sow ed seed” (A person + c o n v e r t e r + he sowed seed); m c d Y c h c N T - i y - i p N i M M O - q Acts 7:35 “ M oses whom they refused” (M oses + c o n v e r t e r + they refused him)-. o y p t u M e e - A y - T O o j - q Acts 2 :22 “ A man who was attested” (A m an + c o n v e r t e r + They attested him); n T O O y £ N T - A q - T i c c e N i - y e - M i y Matt 28:16 “ The m ountain that H e directed them to " (The mountain + c o n v e r t e r + he directed them to there); o y c j i w e e - y N T ^ - o y q ; e e p e MM iy M ark 7:25 “ A wom an who had a daughter” (A wom an
327
CONVERSIONS -
RELATIVE
+ CONVERTER + she has a daughter). The resumptive m orph can occur in a clause subor dinated to the relative conversion, e.g. n e x N a ^ H p e e x e T ij- J c a ) m m oc : x e - i N - J c n o - c j e t j - o ij-®BAA.e John 9:19 “ Y our son, who you say was bom blind” (Y our son + c o n v e r t e r + you say, “ W e gave birth to him blind” ). Am biguity might arise ,when, within an attributive clause, two or more m orphs that are identical in number/(gender) m ight be understood to be the resum ptive m orph: thus n N o y T e e N T - i t j - i i - t ) means both “ The god who m ade him ” and “ T he god whom he m ade.” Personal resum ptive m orphs occur in all three persons: 2 ln o k n e n o y o e iN e N T - i e i ^ e i e - n ic o c M o c John 12:46 “ It is I who am the light who has com e into the w orld” ; 2l n o k i N r - o y p t u M e e t - c u o o n ^ i - o y e ^ o y c i i Luke 7:8 “ For I, for m y part, am a m an set under authority” ; n t o k n e n^tu^Hpe n i w e p iT e N T - i T - o y tu q ; n ? h t - k Luke 3:22 “ It is Y ou who are My Son, My beloved in whom I have been pleased” ; cD n p tu w e oyoN nim e x E -K p iN e Rom 2:1 “ O fellow, who ever you are, you who judge another” ; N T K - o y c i^ g b o a . ^ iT M -n N o y x e John 3:2 “ You are a teacher com e from G od” ; N i/ N T -iie T N -J C i M -nN O M oc Acts 7:53 “Y ou who have received the Law ” ; e N T - i c j- q ^ tu n e Luke 2:15 “ This saying that has com e to pass” ; N ptuw e e N T - i K - c o n c e jc c u - o y Besa, Frag. 28 (K uhn 92:22) “The people for whom you have m ade entreaty”
405 Bare ex®- i?i the simple attributive construction. W hen a durative sentence (q -^ N -M n H y e “ He is in the heavens”) occurs in conversion by relative e r « and the antecedent is resumed as subject, nothing (0 ) is suffixed to the con verter GT« (g t= + 0). This significant absence (zero morph, 0) in place o f a personal morph expresses resumption + subject function. q -^ N -M n H y e n e T N e ic u T eT ® -2*^ -M n H ye
“Your Father who is in the heavens” (Matt 5; 16) (Your Father + gt + ®+ in the heavens) The bareness (® morph) o f er®- is compatible with sing, masc., sing, fem ., and plur. antecedents. Corresponding negatives are both gt ®- . . . a^N and e r e N - q - . . . x N / e T e - N - c - . . . x N / e T e - ? i - c e - . . . j. n , cf. 320. Further exam ples: n e q ^ T o p x p o;h m ex ^-jN -T eK K X H C ii S h lll 30:10 “The little incident in the church” : T o p r n eT® -N i-6u)A .n esoA . 2 N - T n e S h lll 17:16 “ The wrath that is going to appear out of heaven” ; d) iip tu M e e f * ^ K o - in c i y t u eT ® -poeic iN ShChass 164:51-54 “ O you people who sleep and do not keep w atch !” ; r n o A i c £ T * -o y iiB Matt 4:5 “ The holy city (The city that is holy)” ; N loy.a.i.r 6 e N K iM i-c John 11: 3 1 “ The Jew s, then, who were with her in the house”
406
e p - expressing resumptive subject function. In a very few Sahldic texts, perhaps under influence of the dialects o f M iddle Egypt, the m orph e p - occurs as a n affirm ative past tense counterpart to bare ex®- 4 05; like ex®-, the bare converter e p - expresses any 3d person subject resum ption o f the antecedent. The norm al Sahidic equivalent is g n t - x s . E.g. N e -o y N -o y ^ A A O ^N -N p i i5 -® p e tj-u ;ri-® 2 ic e e p -< [)o p e i (= e N T - i t j <[)opel) N -oyxM H A pophPatr 53 (Chatne 12:4-5) “ Once there was a very ascetic senior m onk in Cellia who had donned a m at (as his garm ent)” ; [ r ^ I a a o e p - q ; i J c e (= e N T - i t j - < |) i J t e ) N hiM i-N Paphnoute Cephalas, Stories o f the Monks o f the Desert (BM is 439:11-12) “ The m onk who had spoken with us.”
328
ROLES OF RELATIVE C O N V E R S I O N
407 Antecedents expressing time or manner ‘in which’ relate in special ways to the sim ple attributive clause (both relative and circumstantial).
(a) The resumptive morph is optionally left unexpressed if its sentence function would be adverbial m odifier (n 2 h t» , mmo», MMa.Y). [ ffc) After a definite antecedent o f time or manner, both relative and circumstantial attributive clauses occur indifferently. Exam ples; time n N i \ e N T -itj-M T O N John 4 :52 “ T he hour that he recov ered in” ; q ; i - nezooY exepe-Nil Ni-q;cjune Luke 1:20 “ Until the day that these things com e to p ass” ; g M - n c H Y e x e - M n i T t j - C B T t u T - c ) e - * 6 p H ShBM 212 93fc;3-4 “ In the season that he has not yet gotten ready to dig” ; z n - o y o y n o y e - N - q - c o o Y N M M o - c iN Matt 24:50 “ At an hour he does not know ” ; N - N e ^ o o Y rip e N - g N - T C i p S Rom 7:5 “ For while (in the days when) we were in the flesh” ; OYN-OYOYNOY NHY e -N -T e T N i-o Y c D O jT iN M -n itu T John 4:21 “ A n hour is com ing when you will not worship the Father” ; M-neYoeiq; el-o N-^Koyi Neei-q^AJce ne 2tuc-®KOYi 1 Cor 13:11 “ W hen I was a child I spoke like a child” ; m anner N e e e T e p e - N ^ y n o K p i T H C eipe m m o - c M a tt6 :2 “ As the hypocrites d o ” ; iiee o n e p e -n i p x i e p e Y C p-*MNTpe Ni-T Acts 22:5 “ As the high priest bears me w itness” ; iiee e T e - N e y - l i .e . i iN e Y - ] e q ; - M e q ;T - i i2 i n 7 i-nN O Y T e Rom 11:33 “ O how unsearchable are the judgem ents o f God! (O the way that they shall not be able to search out the judgem ents o f G o d !)”
For attributive clauses forming a sentence o f correlated com parison, cf. 505. E .g. K.a.Ta.-ee eNT-a.N-ccuTM t M o n tg e e eNT-a^N-Na.Y (Ps 47[48]:8) “A s we have heard, so have w e also seen .” |4 0 8 T h e ap positive attribu tive The ‘appositive attributive clause’ constructions
(a)
T3kY e N T - a . c - q p n - 2 a k 2 N - 2 i c e worked hard am ong you” (Rom 16:6)
e n ic })p A
n n e p iT
n e N o ; B p - 2 M 2 a^^
n iY
ep cu -T N
“ Mary, who has
e - y n ic T O c
2 a ^ p tu -TN
n e
tJ-Aia^icoNoc “Beloved Epaphras our fellow servant, who is a faithful minister o f Christ on your behalf” (Col 1:7)
(b) T e p r io c n - e N T - 3^ q -c 2 M N -T efenicT O A H “Tertios, w ho has writ ten this letter” (Rom 16:22) relate more loosely to the antecedent, as in the relationship o f apposition 149. They have the form o f the simple attributive clause 4 0 4 with addition o f na^r/TM/Na^r or n - / T - / N - immediately before the attributive clause.
(a» (h)
Semantic Antecedent
Formal Antecedent
Attribulive Clause
iDef.. non-def., or personal) (Def. or personal)
n il n-
Relative or circumstantial Relative only
329
CONVERSJONS
-
RELATIVE
In construction (a) formed with na^T, Ihe semantic antecedents are definite, non-definite, or personal; relative and circumstantial vary freely as the attribu tive clause. But in construction (b) formed with n - , semantic antecedents are restricted to definite or personal, and only the relative occurs. The ‘semantic antecedent’ is the obvious m eaningful antecedent: the ‘formalantecedent’ ( n i l , n - ) stands in apposition to it, agreeing in number/(gender). (The formal antecedent has grammatical, noi lexical, m eaning and so in English is usually lefi untranslated. The construction m ay be compared to the English non-restrictive relative, wilh a comma before who or which; e.g. “ London, which is in E ngland.” ) W hen the semantic antecedent is a place name, the formal antecedent is expressed as n w i (literally “ The place"); N iZ ip e x n w i e N T - i Y - c i N o y a j - t j N^HT-tj Luke 4:16 “ Nazareth, where He was brought u p ” N a^apa ou t]v te 6pummevo(;; N i-® T n e n w i e x e p e - n e j ^ N2 H T -q Col 3:1 “The things lhat are above, where Christ is.” Bare e x occurs under ihe same conditions described in 405. There is no obvious difference in meaning between rel ative and circumstantial in construction (a), circumstantial occurs less frequently. Further exam ples o f construction (a). Def. antecedent: + relative. n e K o y JC ie i n i i E N T - i i t - c i T t u T - q Luke 2 :30-31 “ Thy salvation, which T hou hast prepared” ; npiC K i. e N T i.-y -K flu M -n e y M iK ^ ^ i^ -T i+ y x H Rom 16;3—4 “ Prisca and A q u i l a ............who laid down their necks on behalf o f my soul"; n - e N T - i q - c t u N T n i l £T ® -cM iM iiT o ji- N iG N e g Rom 1:25 “ He who created, who (*-) is blessed forever” ; n i n c T i T o y - 'J 'i c ti- .a .iK iio c N il e r e - f i - c e - p “x p i i iN M -* M e T iN o ii Luke 15:7 “ The ninely-nine righteous persons, who need no repentance” ; + circumstantial, N eyoyH H B . . . N il e p e - N e y i n H o y e 6 oA.n esoA . Ep Jer 31 (30 Kasser) “ Their priests . . . . whose heads are uncovered” : r n o A i c e x e - y N T - c - C N T e MMiy x iT e - n e c x e x N iT H C M N -n e c .a .H M io y p ro c n e n N o y x e Heb 11:10 “ The city which has foundations, whose builder and m aker is G od.” Non-def. antecedent: + relative, o y N i? B . . , n iT e T e - f i n e - N e N e i O T e o y A e iNON 0 ) - 6 m-®6 0 M e - * q i Acts 15; 10 “ A yoke, w hich neither our ancestors nor we have been able io bear” ; + circiimxtantial. ( o ) y o n T i c i i N - “i r r e A o c N il e y - J t t u M M O-c J t e - i q - T i u o y N Luke 24;23 “ A vision o f angels, who said ihai He had arisen” ; A i i y n - c 0 <[)0 c . . n i l e q - N i - a j - 6 K i-6 oM e - ’*.a.iiicpiNe 1 Cor 6:5 “ Any wise person, who can decide"; (o )y c H 6 . . . n i l ' e - M t i e - A i i y p -p tu M e iA e e p o - q eN £2 Luke 19:30 “ A colt, on w hich no one has ever yet sat.”
One very important function o f construction (a) is to enable an attribulive clause— such as e T e -N -c e -M O o q p e iN “W ho do not w alk”— to m odify a personal morph: thus, n ? h t - n N i i e T e - N - c e - M O O t u e i N Rom 8 .4 “ In us, wha do not w alk.” This function cannot be exercised by the sim ple attributive construction 403, w hose antecedent is always non-personal. Examples c f personal antecedent: + relative, ijToq neT®-Ni-BinTi2e mmojT N . . . n i l e T e p e - n e q 2 i e N - T e q 6 iJt Luke 3; 16-17 “ It is He ( N T o q ) who will bap tize you . . . , He whose winnowing fork is in His hand” ; N2 H T -n N if e x e - N - c e M o o a je iN KiTi-®cipS Rom 8 :4 "In us, who walk not according lo ihe flesh” ; + circiimstaniial, N i N o y - c iN e-"aja)Jcn e a o \ N e H T - o y N - o y p t u M e N-oytuT N il e y a j i N - K i i - y e - y N -® 6 oM M M o -o y e-®eMKO M -n ic i^ T H p - q Jdt 10:19 “ Better not to leave a jingle man o f them ( - o y ) , who if perm iiied could afflict the whole land.”
330
ROLES OF RELATIVE C O N V E R S I O N F urther exam ples o f construction (b): def. antecedent t g c k h n h m - m g T - e N T i - n J c o e i c n n c c e m m o -c Heb 8:2 “ The true tent, which the Lord set u p ” ; ic n - e - a j i Y - ^ ^ o Y T e e p o - t j J t e - n e x c Matt 27:17 “ Jesus who is called C hrist” ; ci3 n p iu M e n - e x it - i c p i N e Rom 2:1 "O fellow, you who ju d g e ” ; n e n N A n - t m £ n - e T e - M M N - a j 6 o M M - n K o c M o c e-® JC iT-tj John 14:17 “ The Spirit o f truth, whom the world cannot receive” ; personal antecedent t n - n a ~ b o ) k r i p e 2 oyN e - n e t j M i N-MTOK N - e N T - iY - n iC T e y e Heb 4 :3 “ For we, who have believed, will enter H is place o f rest” ; e p o - K n - e x e - o Y N T i - t j m may m - o c o o y n 1 C or 8 :1 0 “ You, a person o f know ledge”
409 Unconverted attributive clause after nM + adverbial premodifier. W hen niT/Tj.r/Na,T is immediately follow ed by a premodifying adverb or adverbial clause, the attributive often occurs in unconverted (basic) form.
Antecedent + na^Y + Adverbial Premodifier + Unconverted Clause, with resumptive morph nTBBO I nM a.jcNT-q M N-^A3^a.Y Na.-Na.Y e - n j c o e ic “H oliness, without which no one will see the Lord” (Heb 12:14) Further exam ples: Tc n i l g - o m a M - n p iO je eT®-icH N i - q e jp i T A tj-^ Y n o M iN e e - n e c T o c Heb 12:2 “ Jesus, who instead o f the jo y that was set before Him endured ihe cross” ; n e N C O N T i M o e e o c . . , n i l e q a j i N - e i 2 N -O Y 6 en H -t--NHY o jip tu - T N Heb 13:23 “ O ur brother Tim othy . . . , with whom I will com e to you, if he com es quickly” ; iNOK n i Y ^ o c . . . n i l e l- ^ iT e - T H Y T r i m en -f’-e iB i H Y n ^ h t - t h y t n e e i-T H K n ^ h t mmoj - t n e -N - -t- -z iT e -T H Y T N iN 2 Cor 10:1 “ I, P a u l. . . , who am hum ble ( n i l . . , -t--TBBiHY) vvhen I am in your presence, but w ho am confident (e e i-T H K in you when I am not in your presence.” With converted attributive clause: N e iu jiJ c e N il 2 '’’' o ° ’> '- o y e p e - n e N B i o c N i —i N i i 2 N -T ip e T H Shlll 2 2 4 :20-21 “ These words, through w hich our life w ill im prove in virtue”
410 T he exp lan atory relative clause The ‘explanatory relative clause’ o f the nominal sentence
(a) e r e - . . . n e namely . . . , Which is to say . . . (b)
eTe-na^f ne/ra^i xe/Na^i Ne namely the following . .
e.g.
(a) o y x exe-nNOYTe ne “One, namely G od ” (Luke 18:19) ne reKKAHCiA “H is body, that is, the church” (H is body, which is the follow ing: the church) (Col 1:24)
(b) r t e q c w M x e r e - n x i
relates to the antecedent more like apposition than attributive. The resumptive morph (ne/xe/Ne) either agrees in number/(gender) with the antecedent or is expressed as invariable sing. masc. ne/nvr ne 252(c). These constructions seem to be compatible with antecedents o f any determination status.
331
CONVERSIONS
-
RELATIVE
Further exam ples: (a) o y M i i y N - o y tu T e x e - e i A H M N - x n e x e ShIV 129:7-8 “ A single mother, nam ely the Jerusalem o f heaven” ; o y o y N o y . . . e x e - T e N o y x e John 5:25 “ A tim e . . . namely now ” ; eTe-B^tpN^LB^LC n e M N -cyw ecuN Acts 13:1 “ Some teachers, namely Barnabas, Sym eon” ; c i y A o c e x e -n iy A o c n e Acts 13:9 “ Saul, who is (also called) Paul” ; n e iM i N - o y t u x eT*-MMiy e x e T M N T - p p o w - M n n y e n e ShAmel I 2 2 7 :12-13 “ That very place, which is the king dom o f the heavens” ; (b) n e e A s e x e - T i T x e e y n o K p i c i c N - N e « t ) ip i c c i i o c Luke 12:1 “ The leaven, that is, the hypocrisy, o f the Pharisees” ; p tu w e C N i y . . . e x e - N i T Ne m o jY c h c NM -2 H A .eiic Luke 9 :3 0 “ Two men . . . , nam ely M oses and E lijah” ; e x e - n i l n e n6o)M M -n e c N o tj Acts 1:19 “ Akeldama, that is. Field o f B lood” ; en2Le2L e T e - n i l n e oytuN Mark 7 :3 4 “ Epphatha, which means the following: Be opened” ; x n ip A c ic e y H . . , e x e - n i l n e ^ ^ -T e ^ H M-nciBBiTON Mark 15:42 “ Friday (the day o f Preparation) . . . , that is, (the day) before the sabbath” ; k o p b jln e x e - n i T n e J c e -o y A tu p o N n e Mark 7:11 “ Korban, which m eans that it is an offering”
4 11 T h e articulated attributive clause con stru ction s The 'articulated attributive clause constructions'
(a) n - e N T - 3k-McuYcHc cgVf eTBHHT-q “Him o f whom M oses w rote” (the-whom M oses wrote about) (John 1 ;45) nH G T e - N e q - o “The man w ho had been blind” (that-who was blind) (John 9:17)
(b) nM eNT-a^Y-ctUTM e-nq>a.Jte “Those who heard the word” (Luke 8:15) na^r e-a^-Aa^Yei-a^ a^a^-q “What David did” (Luke 6:3) usually consists o f the def. sing, article n - / T - / N - (or rarely, the pronoun h h /t h /n h ) expanded by a relative clause, forming an entity term: tJie person who . .. , he/slie/they who .. . , the one who . . . , whoever . . . , the thing that . . . . that which . . . . the one th a t. . . , w h a t. . . , whatever . . . The construc tion is also (rarely) formed by na.i7 Ta.i7 Na.f expanded by either a relative or a circumstantial. Bare er®- occurs under the same conditions as described in 405 (e.g. Na.1 eT®-ccuTM Luke 8:14 “Those w ho hear”).
(a) n nn
+ Relative clause, with resumptive morph
(b) na^T + Relative/Circumstantial clause, with resumptive morph There is no obvious difference in m eaning between relative and circum stantial in con struction (b)\ circum stantial is very rare. By far the mo.st frequent consiruction is (a) formed with n - ; n H and n i l are rare. Further exam ples: N - e x N - N i y e p o - o y M N - N - e r e - N - T N - N i y e p o - o y i N Col 1:16 “ Things visible and invisible” (Those which we see and those which we do noi see); n - e T e - N - c j - N M M i - i i N e t ) - - | - o y B H -rL u k e 11:23 “ The one who is not with
332
ROLES
OF
REl.ATIVE C O N V E R S I O N
Me is against Me” ; T - e x e p e - J c t u - c • Cor 1 1 : 5 “ She whose head is shaven” ; N - e T e - N o y - t ) N e e T ® - 2 M - n K 0 C M 0 C John 1 3 : 1 “His own who were in the world” (Those who are ones belonging to Him and are in the world); n - e T e - Y N T t ) - ® M iiJ c e e -® c o )T M Mark 4 : 9 “ W hoever has ears to hear” ; n - e T e T N - c t u T M epo-t) Matt 1 0 : 2 7 “What you hear” ; n - e x e - S - n i A i o c iN ne Rom 9 : 2 5 “ The one who was not My people” ; N - e T e - M N - ® 6 o M m m o - o y Rom 1 5 : 1 “The weak” (Those in whom there is not power); n - e N T - i t j - A i - t j John 1 1 : 4 5 “What He did” ; N - e N T - i Y - o Y * ^ ^ ^ Mark 6 : 4 4 “Those who ate” ; N - e x e - M n e N i Y e p o - o Y 1 Cor 2 : 9 “ What no eye has seen” ; n h e - q ; i Y - o q ; - o Y £ 2 o y n e - N H e i 2 Tim 3 : 6 “Those who make their way into households” ; n - e r e - N T o t j n e Gal 5 : 1 0 “Whoever he may be” ; n - e T ® - N T o o T - K Rev 3 : 1 1 “ What you have” (That which is in your grasp); n-eT®-MMiY "That one; He; It” (The one that is over there) SKeivo^, -ov: T - e T ^ - c n i T i A i 1 Tim 5 : 6 “She who is self-indulgent” ; n h t h p - o y eT ® -epo-k Matt 1 8 : 3 2 “ All your debt” (All those things that are against your account); N-eT*-OYeq;-®p-®NOBe M N -N -eT ® -oY eq;-“e ip e iN ShChass 6 6 : 5 8 - 6 7 : 2 “ Those who want to sin and those who don’t”; n i l e T ^ - c ^ i i ShIV 6 4 : 1 6 “ The one who writes”
Generalizations in which natural and grammatical number and gender are irrelevant are expressed with the general number and gender 4 6 , which is for m ally sing, masc.; e.g. n - e r e T N - e i p e M M O - q 1 Cor 10:31 “W hatever you d o.” Such general statements typically contain present tense, Na^- future 3 1 1 , or aorist. Further examples: n - e x o Y - N i - o Y O M - c j Mark 8:1 “Anything to eat” ; n - e x ® N A - : x i - “o Y i .^.e e - n e n t T i e T * - o Y i i B Mark 3:29 “ But whoever blasphemes against the Holy Spirit” ; n - e T * - N i - e B B i o - q c e - N i - J c i c r - c j Matt 23:12 “Whoever hum bles themself will be exalied” ; n -e-q ^ iY -X -^ -o V '-O Y l N i-tj e a o \ q ;iq - M e N-OYKOYei Luke 7:47 “ The one who is forgiven little, loves lillle” ; n - e - q ; i q - T i i c o 1 Cor 10:10 “ The Destroyer” ; n - e - a j i Y “ ^^OYTe e p o - t j :xe-ToY .a.ic Luke 22:47 “The man called Judas” ; n -e x e - Y N T - c j-'M iiJ c e mmay e-"ca)T M M ipeq-ctuT M Matt 11:15 “Whoever has ears to hear, let them hear.” For the invariable and unanalyzable nominal base n e x - forming masculine gendered com mon nouns, cf, 110; e.g. N eitneT -oY A iB Acts 9:13 “Thy saints”
E X TEN SIO N S
OF T H E
R ELA TIV E
CO N VERSIO N
412 A relative conversion can be extended (carried on) in several w ays. The exten sion, like the preceding relative, usually contains a resumptive morph that refers to the antecedent. Linkage by conjunction is optional. Rarely, the resumptive morph (provided it is not the subject) is omitted in the extension clause: e.g. n e l T i f o n i f n t o j t n ex eT N -N iY e p o - c j iY*^^ e T e x N - c t U T M Acts 2:33 “This honor which you yourselves see and hear.”
(a) Antecedent I Relative Clause -i- (a^y^) Relative or Circumstantial Extension Clause
333
c ; o N V i: R s
1( )
N s
k i ; i . a r i v i-
Relatii’e extcHsion, with conjniution: n -e T e -N -tj-p -® 2 c u B iN x w x eT®-iiicT£Y^ Ro*n 4:5 “ One who ( n - 4 1 1) does noi work but rather irusts” ; n a c n h y • •. mat e T e - N o y - o y n e fie io T e i y t u i J T - i - n e ) ^ e i g b o a tiz H T -o y K iT i-" c ip 5 Rom 9 :3 -5 “ My brethren . . . , to whom belong (N il e x e - N o y - o y 408) the ancestors and out o f whom, according to flesh, has come the Christ” : o y o N nim ex*N i-p -n B O A M -n a ji i y t u e T ® -N i-tje 6 -n e q c o N Sh lll 137:19-20 “ Each person who might ( N i - ) exceed the limit and might rob his brother.” Likewise, without con junction: ne'i'ajiJte e N T - i - q - a j t u n e e N T - i - n J t o e i c o y o N 2 -t j e p o - N Luke 2:15 “This saying that has come to pass (and) which the Lord has revealed to us” ; 2 0 )b NIM eT®-Tii'Hoy e r c j- I p e MMo-oy Luke 13:17 “All the glorious things that he was doing” (Things that are glorious [and] that he is doing); N-eT®-Ti2 M£T ® -oyiiB 1 Cor 1:2 “Who are elect and holy.” Circuntsianiial extension, with conjunction (cf. 429): e e e r c - T iA T e m m o - c h e c - p - ® o y o e i N ShIV 11:14 “The way that ii glitters or shines” ; ii'A .iiN o c n -eN T -i< j-p -® 2H reM O )N e - e H B i ) c i y t u e - iq - p - ® i y r o y c T i A .i o c e - p i KOT£ ShChass 108:21-26 “Aelian, who served as hegemon o f the Thebaid and served as augustalis o f Alexandria"; . . . n ii' 2 N -N e 2 0 0 y N - x e q c i p 5 i q - J c i c e . . . i y o ) e - iy -c u u T M e p o - q Heb 5 :5 -7 “C hrist___ who ( n i l . . . i q - 409) in the days o f his flesh made offering . . . and was ( iy u ) e - i = ) heard” ; a n o k n iy A o c . . . n i l e r-2 iT e -T H y T N men -t--eBBIHY NZHT-THyXN eei-TH IC .a.e NgHT MMtU-TN e - N - t - Z iT e - T H y x N iN 2 Cor 10:1 “ I, Paul . . . . who am humble ( n i l . . . - f - - T B B i H y ) when I am in your presence, but who am confident (e e i-T H ic .a.e) in you when I am not in your presence.” L ikew ise, w ithout conjunction: n N o y r e n - S T e p e - N e q e i A o Nee N - o y o j i ? n - k c d z t e p e - N e q o y e p H x e e iN e N -o y z o M T -B ip tu T Rev 2:18 “God, whose eyes are like a fiery flame and whose feet resemble bronze alloy” ; o y o N nim er'-ctU TM c - N i ^ i J c e e x e - N i i Ne e - N - i j - e i p e M M o-oy iN Matl 7:26 “ Every one who hears these words o f mine and does not do them” ; n - e x e -M n t j - iM e a € e - i q - p - n e M n q ; i N -zeN C H uje Luke 12:48 “But he who did not know, and did what deserved a beating (blow s)” ; nMA eT £-M N -® M ooy e-M N-®oeiK. N2 H T-q e - M N - A i i y m - m o t n g c N2 HT-q ShIF2 p. OB fc;26-^32 “ (The place) where there is no water, there is no bread, and ihere is not any refreshment. ” ( b ) Antecedent I R elative Clause + (^ycu) Unconverted Extension Clause Here one relative converter is expanded by two or more clauses: Converter + (Clause + Clause). Non-durative clauses occur. With conjunction: N - e N T - i N - N i y e p o - o y i y o j i N - c o T M - o y Acts 4:20 “What we have seen and heard” ; n e 3 ^ . . . n i l eT e-M n q -p -® N O B e o y r e S n o y - z e e-®K.poq ^ - T e q x i n p o 1 Pet 2:21-22 “The Christ . . . , who did not sin and in whose mouth deceit was not found” ; nceH p iO N n -e T e p e -T en A H P H i i - T C H q e i y t u A q-cuN2 Rev 13:14 “The beast, on whom is the wound o f the sword and who lived” ; n M i e T e - M - n e y q N x N i-M o y an i y o ) T eycA T e n - c - n a - j c g n a a n Mark 9:48 “Where their worm does not die and their fire is noi quenched." Without conjunction: T - e N T - A - c - M o y A y -T o y N o c 5 ^ eTBe-NecM TiT-NAHT ShChass 194:5-8 “ She who died and was raised because of her compassion” ; N ? e e N o c . . , n a i e T e -M n o y -o y e a j-® M o iC 2 -o y A y -T A A -y MMINMMO-Oy M-nJcojgM Eph 4:17. 19 “The Geniiles . . . , who did not wish lo hum ble themselves and gave themselves unio pollution” ; tm n t-m a I -® 2 0 m n t t a i e x e p e - j o l N e Me m m o -c a y - o a a n a e b o a z n - t o i c t i c 1 Tim 6:10 “ Love o f money, which some crave and so have wandered away from the faith.”
334
f O N VliRSIONS
CIRCUMS TANTIM.
(c) Antecedent I Reliitive Clause + (a^y^) Conjunctive Extension Clause Here one rclaiivc cinivertcr is expanded by a clause and iis conjunciive extension(s): C onverter + (Relaiive Clause + Conjunctive Extension[sJ). Cf. 353. With N - e x e - a j i y - M o y o y T M - n c tu M i iy [ o j] N c e - M o y o y x M - n N o s e N z H T -o y Shiv 24; 19 “ Thi>se w ho m ortify ihe body and m ortify the sin wiihin them ” ; n-e-r® N i-p-® N O B e . . . i y t u M - n - e N T - i q - i i - q ShlV 171:1-2 “ W hoever sins . . . and does not say what they have done.” Without i y t u ; n - e r ' - N i - e j i p e ? e - z e N K o y i N q - a j iu n e e q - e N z o T e p o - o y ShIV 113;5-6 "W hoever has charge o f a very little and is faithful in it.” (d)
n - Relative Clause ( i y t u ) n - Relative Clause Two or m ore articulated attributive clauses 411 in apposition, with or without conjunc n - e T ® - a jo o n i y t u n - e x e - N e q - o j o o n i y t u n -ex® NHy Rev 4:8 “ The alm ighty, who is and was and is to com e” ; n - e T * - a jo o n n - e x e - N e q - a j o o n n - £ T ® - N H y n n i N T t U K p i T t u p Rev 1:8 “ The one who is, was, and is to com e, the Alm ighty”
tion: n -n iN T tu K p iT tu p
(e)
The infinitive as such can be extended by ( i y t u ) + Infinitive 2 3 1 (ii); N e e e r e p e - z o e i N e c o o jm h o jo b ? 2i - n 6 o)NT h n c i e o y M - n N o y r e ShIV 4 3 :2 6 -2 8 “ Just as som e have fainted or becom e scorched from the anger or the curse o f G od”
TH E C IR C U M S T A N T IA L C O N V E R S IO N THE
NATURE
OF C IR C U M S T A N T IA L
C O N VERSIO N
413 Forms o f the converter e - ; Immutable sentence converter; secondary and tertiary converter 4 16, 417 e p e - , e«: Mutable converter For neutralization o f the distinction between circumstantial and focalizing conversion, cf. 460. 414
Simplification (omission of e.-).
The converter e - is often not written before initial e ,
M, or N. E.g. e - e q - . e - e p e , e - S n i x q - , and e - M n q - are represented by e q - , e p e - , M n ix q -, and S n q - ; e - i i - q - c t U T n iN 320 by N - q - c t u x n iN ; e - N T - i q by N T - i q - . Examples of simplification: N -er'-N H y e Jttu -N n ip i- T e N 6 o M N il e p e - (i .e . e - e p e - ) n e y T i A .6 o a j o o n e so A z iT M -n N o y x e M i y i i - q S h lll 31 ; 2 1-23 “ Things that happen to us beyond our control, w hose healing conies from God a lo n e"; e p e - n s i A MMiy eT B e-® N iy i y t u n w i i J t e eTBe-® ctufM e r - ( i.e .
e - e l - ) x u 3 M-nx'i J te - e p e - T M N T - j^ M io a jo o n eTBe-*NA iy c u x e i o y c i i e T B e - " p - n 2 i n ShChass 102; 19-29 “ The eye is there for seeing and ihe ear for hear ing. by w hich 1 am saying ihe follow ing: lhal wealth e.xisis for acis of mercy, and autliority, for doing justice” ; mh N T - i - n e ) ^ e i iN eBOA. ^ m - o i h a ic iT i-® c ip 5 i i T - i (i.e. e-N T-A -)TeicicA H C ii e i eBOA ShChass 146:52-57 “ Pray, is il nol from Israel that Christ descended according to ihe flesh, while it is from Him lhat the church has descended? ”
335
t:ON VliKSIONS
r I K C U M S T A N 1 1A L
415 The fiinction o f circumstantial conversion. The ‘circumstantial conversion’ signals that the converted clause m odifies (descriptively expands), com pletes, or carries on another clause or a preceding entity term. It plays the follow ing roles: i. adverbial clause 421 (When they hear, Satan immediately com es) ii. com pletive clause 426 after a direct object (W e found him sitting), a verb o f incomplete predication (They ceased going about), or the like iii. sequential clause 428 (He asked me whereupon I said) iv. attributive clause 430 (A person who sowed seed) It is also an elem ent in several focalization patterns 459, 460, 4 7 0 ,4 7 1 , and is a predicative expansion o f the existential sentence 4 80, 482. A s a com pletive clause (ii) it can form an entity statement 426. Tenses in the circumstantial clause express relative time 529, except for the sequential circumstantial 428, which extends narration in the same time line. 416
As a secondary converter (in double conversion 397), the circumstantial occurs in (a) circumstantial preterit conversion and (b) circumstantial focalizing conversion (where e - often is not written 414). Exam ples: (a) i - i n i - M i K i p i o c o y tu e 2 N - t n o 6
ii-epH M Oc e -N e -N T O tj
e q - i N i x t u p e i Z M - n w i eT®-MMiy
ApophPatr 181 (Chaine 4.1:21-22) “ Apa Macarius dwelt in the Great Desert, and it was 428 he alone who was living as a hermit in that place” ; 2 M - n e y o e ia j T H p-q e - N e y - a j o o n ziJcM -n K iz ShAmel II 539:14—15 “ In the whole time when they were dwelling on earth” ; as a comrary-to-fact stipulation clause 498, e - N e K - S - n e ^ i M i John 11:32”If You had been here"; h e - N e - o y + y x H iN n - x o j o n T ex^-N zH T -oy N e y - N i - t u a j c b o a a n n e x e - . . . Shlll 220:7-8 “ So, if it were not a living soul that resided within them, they would not cry out saying . . . after ziM oi' 499, e.g. jamoT e - .N e - M r f q - K ii- q o y s H -N ShChass 70:7 -9 “ How good it would have been if He had not set Himself against us! ” ; attested sentence type.s include nominal sentence, durative. past tense (negative only?), aorist (affirmative only?), cleft sentence (Pattern 3). exi.stential. Attributive e - N e is ambiguous (relative preterit/circumstantial preterit).
an
KATA-nNOMOC N-TeNT OA.H N-CApKIKON
AA.AA k . a t a - t 6 om M -ntuN 2
41 7
As a tertiary converter (in triple conversion 398), the circumstantial occurs in what for mally appears to be circumstantial preterit focalizing conversion (durative and past tense). E.g. e - N e - e p e - n N o y T e C N ep rei a n M-nj^.iKAioN z N - N - e r e - N o y - q N6 N o y o e ia j nim N e p e -n J c i n 6 o n c N A -p-nK oC M O c n -® k ak £ n e ShAmel 1
336
CON VHKSIONS -
CIRCUMSTANTIAL
2 4 1 :3 -4 “ If God did not activate justice among His own at all times, violence would make the world into darkness"; e - N e - N T - i x e T N - e i M e j c e - o y n e - t- - o Y e a j o y N i N 2 0 Y ° e - y e v c i i N e - T e T N i - T 6 i i o iN n e N -N -eT e-M M N -® N O B e e p o - o y Matt 12:7 “ If you had known what ‘I want m ercy more than a sacrifice’ means, you would not condem n those who are without sin.”
418 Term in extraposition. A personal morph within the circumstantial clause can be anticipated by a term in extraposition, that is, a term placed at the front o f the sentence pattern ( ‘extraposited’) before the converter
Extraposited Term(s)
Converted Sentence Pattern
(contains a personal morph agreeing with the extraposition) Anticipation I Resumption Topic under discussion I Comment e a ;c u n e oyn icT H I e - o y N T - c - OYXH “If (e a ;c u n e e - ) any b eliev ing woman has (a relative who is) a w id ow ” (1 Tim 5:16) e
419
A n extraposited subject can be accom panied by its own extraposited converter (thus e p e - , , . e s ) ; rare. E.g. oyM M H aje e p e - n -e -o jiy -M o y T f: e p o -tj JceT o y.a.ic . . . I e q - M o o a j e 2 H T -o y Luke 22:47 “ A crow d cam e, with the one called Judas . . . preceding them .”
420 Adverbial premodifier before the converted sentence pattern. An adverb or prepositional phrase (chapter 9) preceding the converted sentence pattern lays down a circumstance or relationship o f time, place, manner, degree, or attitude in which the converted clause is being asserted (i.e. under which the predica tion is made).
Premodifier I Converted Sentence Pattern Z ^-Z ^Z M -M ep oc a^ycu
n - c m o t I e-a^ -n N O yT e m n NGNeiGTe N -< yop n 2 N-NenpocJ)HTHC . . . “ After, in many places and various ways, I G od spoke o f old to our fathers by the prophets , , . ” (Heb 1:1) GTi NToq I eq-a;akjce . . . “W hile He was still speaking . . . ” (Mark 5:3 5 )
337
c o n v e r s io n s
-
CIRCUMSTANTIAL
Conjunctions and initial attitude markers (chapter 10) also occur in premodi fier position (cf. 422); e.g. ® con m g n e y - O Y t u q p T n - n g i a i u a o n ®con ey-MOYOYT N-N-eT®-OY 3^a^B ShIV 8 :1 1 -1 2 “ Som etim es worshipping idols, and som etim es slaying the saints.” Further exam ples: e e A n i c e x ' - c o T r i x i i e b o a 9 i t o o t - c e N - N i - z i u N e z o y N e - n N o y T e H eb 7 :19 “ Better hope, through which we shall draw near to G od” ; e o jjc e - ? N - T c A p a r i p e - N - - t - - 2 J .T e - T H y T N iN a a a a -f--N M M H -T N 2 M - n e r iN i
Col 2:5 “ For though in flesh I am not with you, 1 am nevertheless with you in spirit”
ROLES
OF T H E
C IR C U M ST A N TIA L
CO N VERSIO N
421 T he adverbial circum stantial A s an adverbial clause 490 the circumstantial plays the same role as the adver bial modifier: it descriptively expands another clause, stating circumstances under which it is said to be valid or is envisaged. It occurs before or after the jnod ified clause. Before. ep e-T ei'a.aiH N -^ r ir Mwa^y M n e-n eq p N e ncu? “Although there were so many fish, the net did not tear” (John 21:11) After, a^y-^i e z p V t e-n ew ea ^ o y e-a^ -npH tuA “They went to the tomb when the sun had risen” (Mark 16:2) Its logical relationship to the m odified clause is ambiguous. (English transla tions often must supply although, when, whenever, while, if [ever}, inasmuch as, unless, etc., as in the exam ples quoted here). For the bare adverbial cir cumstantial in conditional sentences, c f 497. Further exam ples: (i) before the m odified clause e y -K T O .a.e M M O - O y e-T riA .iA .iiA n e j c i - q N i - y Matt 17:22 “ And, as they were gathering in Galilee, He said to them ” ; NTOK A e e ic -N H C T e y e T tu z c f i - T e i c i n e Matt 6:17 “ But as for you, when you fa st. anoint your h e ad "; e-y n p o cjjH T H C 6 e n e . , . i q - a j p n - e i M e Acts 2:30-31 "Being therefore a prophet . . . he foresaw ” ; e -K T N X i-y -T c r i p MMiy o y n e T * -N iT iJ c p o - o y ShChass 119:52-55 “ For, since they do not have Jesus, what is going to strengthen th e m ? ” ; n p tu M e e q -2 iJ C M -n e q M i n - n k o t k N ^ - N i - a j t u t u T iN ShEnch plate 1 la .- 13-17 = Rossi I I 3 8a.-8-1 1 ) “ The person, while being in bed, will not lack” ; e - a j i y - c t u T M N x e y N o y u j i t j - e i N 6 i - n c i T i N i C N c j - tj i - n a j i: x e Mark 4:15 “When they hear, Satan im m ediately com es and takes away the w ord” ; e t) - 6 N - * ip iK e r i p e p o - o y a j i q - J c o o - c J t e - . . . H eb 8:8 “ For, by way o f fin d ing fa u lt with them , he says . . . i y o ) e - it) - J c c u K e B O A .i t ) - a j a ) n e N - o y o N nim e-r^-ctuTM N C tu-t) N -® iiT io c M -n e y Jc iT N - a j i - e N e 2 Heb 5 :9 “ And, inasmuch as H e had become pcifect. He bccaine the source o f iheir eternal siilviition ti> all who obey H im ” ; e - i i c - j c i 6 e N - o y ip x H g b o a . j iT M - n N o y x e i i - K N-®pMMio N ? H f ^ ^ N - 2 eN ^B H ye e - N i N o y - o y ShChass 8 5:31-35 “So, since you have received an office fron\ God. make yourself rich in it by m eans o f good deeds” ; iy c u e t) - N i- T iA .e e - n j c o e i i q - c e n c t u n - t j N 6 i - n - e T " - o N -*A iiM 0N i0N Mark
338
ROLES OF
c ir c u m s t a n t ia l
CONVERSION
5:18 “ And, as H e u rn goUtg to board the boat, the one w ho was possessed with demons begged H im ” ; e q - N i - C B T e - T n e N el'-N M M i—tj n e Prov 8:27 "W hen He was going to prepare the heaven, I was wiih H im ” (ii) A fte r the m odified clause n a o j t J - g e K - o y e a j - ^ c a ) g b o a z 't o o t - ® e -iN f- O Y C z iM e N -c iM ip iT H C John 4 :9 “ H ow is ij that You want a drink from me, inasmuch as I am a Sam aritan w o m a n ? "; oypJiCOY n a - k n e eic-NKO Tic neKMOKMeK n e eic-p H C ShA m el II 5 3 1 :5 -6 “ It is your dream while you are asleep, and it is your thought while you are a w a k e " ; N e e i-M M iy n e e y - N A - a j t u n e Isa 48:16 “ I was there when they were about to h a p p e n "; N e q e o r r e i y - M o y e e - iy - o y B i o j e w ix e e - N N e - a j- o y p iz f n - to ) 6 c x p e y - n tp e z i-N ii ZiJCM-nKi2 Mark 9:3 “ His garm ents became glistening, being (having become) intensely white, as no fu lle r on earth could bleach th e m ” ; i y - B tu K o n e - x e t j x i p i c T eT® -p-2 MMe MMO-Oy S h lll 87:4—5 “They also re c e d e d ,/o r it m’QS His grace that guided them " N egative adverbial circum stantial clauses (often translated into E nglish by the con struction without . . . -ing) " t '- N i - T i M o - t j 2 tu tu - T e - N - - t - - a j i n e iN ShChass 103:1-3 “ I will tell him m yself, without feeling sham e” ; w e a j i - i c i i - J c i - z o i N e N—® 6onc N2HT-THYTN e - M n i - e i M e S hlll 139:4—5 “Perhaps I have done wrong to som e o f you, without having know n” ; N io j N - z e n i i N i - a j c u n e e - M n i C0 yN-®2 0 0 yT Luke 1:34 “ H ow shall this be, without m y having known a m an ? ” ; i T e f N - T p e y - e a j - “A.oyA.i.Y e - n e y o y t u a j iN n e ShChass 4 5 :6 -9 “ You m ade them shout aloud without it being their desire" (i.e. involuntarily)
422 Headed by conjunction. The ambiguous logical relationship o f the adverbial circumstantial is resolved by a premodifying conjunction (cf. 493): e p e - Though, But, R ather; cf. 423 Aycu e p e - And, And indeed. Too, Furthermore eiM HTi e p e - Unless, Except for . . . -ing e N g o c o N e p e - As long as e cjjo co N e p e - ( e n z o c o N e p e - ) As long as. Inasm uch as eT i e p e - W hile . . . s t i ll . . . e a jc u n e e p e - If (ever) e a j j c e - e p e - Supposing that KiN e p e - Even if. Even though K i i n e p e p e - Although K i T i - e e e p e - Just as 505 K iiT o i e p e - Although MiAiCTA e p e - Especially if/since i i e e e p e - Just as 505 nJLA.iN ON e p e - M oreover, And yet ® con e p e - . . . “c o n e p e - . . . At one lime . . . at another time . . . x c u p ic e p e - Except when. Unless Z ie H e - S n i x e - (often written M n i x e - ) Before e p e - At the s?nie liine 2 tu c e p e - As, As if. On the grounds that 2 0 )c e a j J t e - e p e - As if 2 0 C0 N e p e - As long as ZOTiN e p e - W henever, As soon as. Such that \
339
CONVERSIONS
-
CIRCUMSTANTIAL
Examples: n - 2 £ n e y o Y tu u j n e n o y tu a j tJ-N^iiM tUN e -n o y tu a j n - n a 2lim w n n e n e y o y t u a j ShChass 7 9 :51-57 “ How shall we not conclude that their wish is the wish o f the demons as also ( iy t u e - ) the wish o f the demons is their w ish?” ; e a jtu n e e - N - c e - N i - e r i c p i T e y e JlN MMO-Oy M ip o y -J ti (i.e. ®c2 iMe) 1 Cor 7:9 “ Bui ( / ( e ^ t u n e e - ) they cannot (are not going to) exerci.se con trol, let them marry"; KiN e - y N T i - I - x n i C T i c T H p -c ^cucTe e-® n e N e-® T o o y eBOA 1 Cor 13:2 “Even i f ( k x u e - ) I have all faith so as to remove mountains” ; iT e T N -lN e N i- I M -nelptU M e 2^uc e q - a jT o p x p M -nA .ioc Luke 23:14 “ You brought me this Man as (z tu c e - ) (one who was) perverting the people” ; i c i T i - e e e - N T e x N - n t u - N 2 Cor 1:14 “Just as ( K i T i - e e e - ) you are ours” ; Mnpp-®ajnHpe M - n x S z o . . . 20)C e - y z tu B N -B p p e neT® -Ti2o m m o j-tn 1 Pet 4:12 “Do not be surprised at the burning . . . as though (e tu c e - ) it were something new that were happening to you”
423
The second m em ber o f an antithesis can be loosely attached by adverbial e - i - , which is sometimes modified by i.K K \ or . . . jh.e. 2tuu)t) ‘but rather’ 422. ic--t--® oYa ) N - o y I N -oyxH H B e iN . . . I iAAA e - ic - - } - - ® o y d ) N -tiic ip n o c
N -T .a.iicii6cyN H “What did it blossom? Not a finger , . . ; rather ii blossomed (having, rather [iA A i], blossomed) the fruits o f righteousness" (ShChass 183: 2 -9 ) Contrast between antithetical clauses is optionally signalled by focalizing conversion 444 in the first clause. Further examples: e q - T p e - N C i.p 5 i.y a ) NecNcucuc) N -2eN < yH pe . . . N -iT -C B tu ctUA.6 (i.e. co)A.ic) iN e - n 6 e p o ) B I iA A i e - i q - K i - n M i N - N B ic i N o c ex®2 0 0 y e -M iC T ir5 nim Shlll 76:20-77:1 (= ShChass 171:10-21) “ He makes the flesh and blood o f ignorant sons . . . adhere not to the rod, having rather allowed punishments worse than any whip” ; iy c u e p e - x n e h n e c x e p e d j M i kh iN e z p i i e j^ N -eeN M i N T e -n ic i2 i i e e e N -(i.e . N-)TMeA.tUT eT®-icH e j ^ - n n ' f I iA.A.i e - i t j - o t j T ^ ^ - T e t ) 6 o M ShChass 59:45-54 “ And the heaven or firmament rests not upon particu lar positions o f the earth as a ceiling rests upon a house; rather (iA A i), He nailed it (hehaving-nailed ii, rather) there by His power” ; e - n w i e - ® x p e y - e i p e M - n i r i e o N i y - e i p e ztututj M -nnoN H p oN iy c u e - n w i e - ® T p e y - e B B io - o y N -N -ex® -}--®CBa) N i - y . . . e - i y - J c i c e .a.e ztututj M M o-oy N z o y o e g p i i e J c tu -o y Shlll 163:19-22 “ Instead o f doing good, they rather (ztutuq) did evil; and instead o f humbly submitting to their instructors . . . they rather exalted themselves all the more (further more [iy tu ], instead o f submitting. . . , having rather [.a.e ztututj] exalted themselves)”
424
Adverbial modifiers/initial attitude markers are also formed by circumstantial conver sion o f the following elements: m m on : ‘otherwise, else, for then’
e-
+
M o n c + conjunctive: ‘hardly, alm ost. . . not’ N - K i T i - . . . iN : ‘and not according lo . , . ’
Examples: mh eT-Jctu m m o -c J c e - o y iA iK o c n e n N o y x e . . . N N e c -a jtu n e e-MMON e p e - n N o y r e N i-K p iN e M-nKOCMoc iJ io j N - z e Rom 3 :5 -6 “ Am 1 saying that God is unjust . . . ? By no means! F or then how could God judge the world?” ; i z p o - t j i t j - n o p a j - t ) eBOA. N 6 i - n i i z N -T oyw H T e ziJC M -niciz . . . i y o ) e - M o n c iq -T tu o y N e e p i i N-JCNie ShAmel 11 2 99:1-5 “ Why did he pros trate him self on the ground in your presence . . . and barely force himself to get up
340
ROLES OF C I R C U M S T A N T I A L
CONVERSION
a g a in ? ” ; K i x i - M n i p i ^ o c i c N -iip tu M e K iT i- N e C T O ix io N M -nicoC M O c e - N - K i T i - n e x c Tc iN Col 2 :8 “ A ccording to hum an tradition, according to the ele m ental spirits o f the universe, and not according to Christ Jesus”
425
Invariable e< \- fo rm s im personal adverbial modifiers from a small num ber o f verbs (durative present affirm aiive): e q - K tu T e ‘round about, around’ (kCkXio, kukXoGev), e q - C i o j e ‘bitterly’ (niKpcoq). E.g. K i i - T -} --N i-p lM e e q - c i o j e Isa 2 2 :4 “ Let me alone, I shall weep bitterly” (it being bitter).
426 The com pletive circumstantial
As a completive clause, the circumstantial expresses new, supplemental infor mation relating to a direct object Ma.peq-ccufM e-nenpo<})HTHC eq-Jcd) n - nVi' “Let him listen to the prophet saying (he-saying) these words” (ShChass 89:12-15) or the subject of a verb of incomplete predication 185 a^ci-6cu e-N-q-KiM a^N “It remained motionless” (It continued it-not-moving) (Acts 27:41) The converted clause contains a resumptive morph 404 that agrees in numberZ(gender) with either (i) the direct object or (ii) the subject of the preceding verb (listen to the prophet /le-saying, it continued /7-not-moving). (i) The completed direct object construction typically occurs e.g. after iccu leave, kcut hitild, Na.y see, ccutm hear, c o o y N know, give, Tcuqp ordain, Ta.20 establish, cueupforget, 2e e - fin d , 2a.pe2keep, jccu say, 6iNefind, and the verboid o y n t g - have. Exam ples: i N - N i y e - o Y ^ etj-N ejc-® .^A iM oN ioN e .a o \ 2 M -n e ic p iN M ark 9:38 “ W e saw a person casting out (he-casting out) dem ons in Y our nam e” ; i K - j e e p o - o Y e - 2£NNOY:x Ne Rev 2 :2 “ You found them to be (they-being) fa ls e " ; i C - 2 £ e - T e c a j e e p e e c - N H j c z i - n e 6 A .o 6 e - i - n . a . i i M 0 N i 0 N a .o z i t u t u - c M ark 7 :3 0 “ She found her daughter lying (she-lying) in bed (and) the demon gone fro m h e r” ; i q - i c i i - t j e t j - o N z ShChass 32:10-11 “ He left him alive (he-living)” ; iN -c tu T M H i N - 6 N T - t) £ t ) - c H 2 S hill 21:18 “ W e have heard, or found it written (iibeing-w ritten)” ; . . . n C £ - 6 n t - n e p e - N e N z H T MN-NeN+YXH o j o y e i T iY*^^ e y - z K - ie iT ShlV 37:2 6 -3 8 :1 “ And find us with our hearts and our souls empty and h ungry” ; c e - N i - 6 i N e M -najH N ex®-MMiY e - i y - n o p K - t j S h lll 141:15-16 “ They will find that tree to have been uprooted (they-having-uprooted-it)”
(ii) The completed subject construction typically occurs after verbs of in complete predication, such as k x - t o o t ^ reflex, g b o ^ cease, \ o cease, oycu already have (dore), oycuN? gbo^ (ingressive) appear to, be seen to, 6 w continue, cucic continue, qpcune happen to. (Similarly, the circumstan tial completes qpcune ‘be’ and ei ‘come’ to form periphrastic conjugation 427.)
341
CONVERSIONS ~ CIRCUMSTANTIAL Examples: iq - o Y O ) e q -p -® N o e iK e p o - c z S - n e q z H T Matt 5:28 “ He has already com m itted adultery (he-has-Finished he-com m itting-adultery) with her in his heart” ; i Y - ^ o e Y - M o o a je N M M i-q John 6:66 “ They ceased going about (ceased theygoing-about) with H im ” ; J c e ic ic NNeic-oYcDN? c b o a . N -N p tu w e eic-N H C T eY e Matt 6 : 18 “ T hat you may not be seen to be fa stin g " (seen you-fasting); i c i - t y t u n e Jte m6 i - ( u ) 2J l n n h c et)--l--® B inT iC M i M - n j t i i e M ark 1:4 “ John happened to he bap tizing (John becam e he-baptizing) in the w ilderness”
Fonving an entity statement As an entity statement M - 6 n t - c e v -e rK A A .e i
2
e T B e - eN^HTHMa^ N Te -n e y N O M O c “ I
found that he was accused ( 1-found-it they-accusing him) about questions o f their law ” (Acts 23:29) the com pletive circumstantial expands the follow ing invariable morphs; and does not contain a resumptive morph in grammatical agreement: i. the invariable sing. fem. morph c in the expressions
6 n t - c e p e - ‘find out th a t. . . ’ 516 2 e e p o - c e p e - ‘find th a t. . . ’ 516
Na^Noy-c e p e - ‘it is a good thing th a t. . . ’ 486 ii. ea^MOi epe- ‘how good it would be i f . . . , if only . . . ’ Exam ples: NeN2 BHYe r i p N e x ^ -T p e -N e iu p iJ te -f—*2i n e p o - N 1 iY*!^ N iN O Y -c e Y - t ShRyl 69 (3 4 :1 -2 ) “ For it is our deeds that cause these words to pass judgem ent upon us; and it is a good thing that they do so (it-is-good they-doing-so)” ; N e e N T - i N - 2 £ e p o - c e q - J ti- ® K B i m m o - o y t h p - o y iY *^ e q - ic iT i ic p i N e M M o-oY e -n M O Y ShAmel 11 54 3 :1 1 -1 2 (ShW ess9 159a;8-14) “ Just as we found that he uras taking vengeance (w e-found-it he-taking-vengeance) upon them all and con demning them to death” ; o n e - i N O N - 2eN M il'-neN M T O N iN 2 N - 20)b nim ShM ing 92a; 2 0 -2 4 “ How good it would be i f we were not lazy (how-good-it-would-be we-not-being-lazy) in everythingf”
427 Completive circumstantial in periphrastic conjugation
(a) Tenses. The circumstantial com pletes constructions o f ujcune and e (, to enlarge the range o f tenses 528 expressed in sentence patterns w hose basic predicate is restricted to present and preterit (i.e. nominal sentence 255, durative sentence [stative, preposition, Na^-] 312, suffixally conjugated verboid 377, 389); and o y o f n - ‘w oe to ’ 244. q-Na^-qpcune e q - M H p 2N-FinHYe “ It w ill be bound (It-will-be it-beingbound) in the heavens” (Matt 16:19) This construction i^'periphrastic' conjugation (conjugation that is based on an added auxiliary veib). A periphrastic jussive (na^pe-) is also formed:
342
ROL ES OF C I R C U M S T A N T I A L
CONVERSION
Ma^peq-qpcune e-oya^A n e “Let it be one thing” (Let-it-be it-being one) (Sir 5:12) For periphrastic imperative, cf. 369. All periphrastic expressions o f tense are based on q^cune ‘b e/b ecom e’ except that e i occurs instead o f qpcune to enlarge the range o f the (future auxil iary) predicate ‘(be) going to ’ 311. a .q - e i e q - N A - 2 0 T B -e q “He was about to kill him self” (H e-cam e hegoing-to-kill-him self) (A cts 16:27) Further exam ples: . . . N e A A o i j c e - u p t u n e e y - T o p ? N - ® c e M N o c Tit 2 :2 “ (Bid) the older men be tem perate (they-be they-being-tem perate), serious, sensi ble” ; T N - N i - y t u n e e - 0 Y N -2£NN 0 6 N -ic p iM i z iJ ttu - N eBOA 2 > 'rM -n N o y T e S h lll 1 5 8 :11-12 “ W e will be such that great condem nations are upon us (we shall be there-being-great condem nations upon us) from G od” ; n e T N s e ic e q - N i - u p t u n e e - N i t y t u - q 2i j - T n e Luke 6:23 “ Y our reward will be great (it-w ill-be it-being-great) in heaven” ; c e - N i - u p t u n e e - o y o i N i - y MMiy ShlV 4:1 2 -1 3 "It shall be woeful for them (shall be ir-being-woe unto them) there.” N o resum ptive m orph is possible w hen the basic sentence is a nominal sentence (unusual): i y t u n e q e i g b o a e q - N i u p tu n e e - T e e i A i C C i x e Josh 17:9 kqI E a ta i auxoC f| 6ie^o5oq QaXacca “ And the sea shall be its term ination” (its com ing out shall be it-being-the-sea).
Periphrastic e i occurs instead o f ty to n e in order to enlarge the range o f Ni‘is going to . . . ’ 311. Further exam ples: N x e p e - n i y A O C e t e q - N i - o y t u N t i - p c u - q Acts 18:14 “ But when Paul was about to open (cam e he-going-to open) his m outh” ; e y t u n e 6 e e K ( i ) i N - e i e i c - N i - T i A O e z p i i M - n e i c j L t u p o N e j c M - n e e y c i i C T H p i o N Matt 5:23 “ So if you are about to lift up (if you com e you-going-to-lift-up) your gift onto the altar”
(b) ‘Incipient action' (subject beginning to act, entering a state, beginning to par ticipate in a process, acquiring a quality, cf. 174) is expressed by periphrastic conjugation based on q^cune ‘becom e’ 528. Exam ples: i c - y t u n e e c - - f - - * n i e - N e q o y e p H x e Luke 7:38 “ She began kissing (she-becanie she-kissing) H is feet” ; i x e T N - u p c u n e e T e T i 5 - p - ® x p i i N - o y e p t u T e Heb 5 :1 2 “ You have com e to need (you-have-becom e you-needing) m ilk” ; nztUB e - N e q - M O K z N - < i ) o p n i q - u p c u n e e q - M O T N N - i i p t u M e Athanasius, Lettres festales et pastorales (Lefort 7 6 :2 1 -2 2 ) “ T he thing that was difficult before, becam e easy (the thing became it-being-easy) for people”
The sequential circumstantial 428 A s a sequential clause, the circumstantial expresses an event or state that is in sequel to or is an aspect o f that which is being asserted in the preceding clause. It typically occurs in narrative, almost always extending the past tense a - .
343
C O N V E R S IO N S -
C IR C U M S T A N T IA L
a iq -J C N O Y - e i e - a i i - J c e - n a i i
“He asked m e, whereupon I said the follow ing thing” Sequel and simultaneity are not formally distinguished; e.g. ag N-CTe<})aiNOp N6 i - 2 eNpci)Me N -p e q -p -® 2 0 Te e - a i Y ~ e 'P ® N - o y N o 6 N -N e g n e egpi-T e jc c u -q Acts 8:2 “ D evout men buried Stephen and (next? sim ultaneously?) made great lamentation over him .” Tense in the converted clause does not express relative time; rather it belongs to the same narrative plane as the preceding clause (main tense 525). This distinguishes the sequen tial circumstantial from the adverbial circumstantial 421. Exam ples: expressing a consecutive event or stale in the narrative line a.-OYKOM ec J tN o Y - e i . . . e - a . i - J t e - n a .1 N A -q ShChass 5 4 :5 2 -5 8 “ A count asked m e . . . and I said the follow ing thing to him ” ; N x e p i-a ^ A Jte m n -o y * . . . . A q -O Y c u a ^ . . . e -A l-o Y O J U ^ N A -q . . . ShChass 104:17-36 “ W hen I spoke with a certain person . . . he replied . . . and I replied to him . . . A -nN O Y T e n a y e-neY M K A ? e - A q - -|N - 2 eN
429 The sequential circumstantial (optionally linked by a conjunction such as i.Y“^) can extend a relative clause; cf. 412(a). Tense in the circumstantial extension belongs to the same narrative plane as the preceding relative clause and does not express relative time. Examples: n e i o j x . . . nAl eN X-A q-N eZM -X HYTN eBOA 2 N -T e 5 o Y c iA M-nKAKe e -A q -n e N e -T H Y T N e 2 0 YN e -T M N T -e p o M -n
344
R O L E S OF C I R C U M S T A N T I A L
CONVERSION
Thebaid and served as augustalis of Alexandria” ; ne5cc . . . na.1 2tJ-Ne200Y N -x e q ca.p5 a .q -J tic e . .. e p o - q Heb 5 :5 -7 “ C hrist. , . , who (nM . . . a .q - 4 0 9 ) in the days of his flesh made offering . . . and was e -a .s ) heard”: n-ex**-Moo
430 The attributive circum stantial clause As an attributive clause (described in 403) the circumstantial modifies, i.e. descriptively expands, a preceding entity term. In this extremely common function, circumstantial and relative alternate and vary according to syntactic environment; for details, cf. 404, 407, 408, 411, 431. Tense in the converted clause expresses relative time 529. i. oYPo^Me epe-Te<]6iJc u^oycuoY “ A man who had a withered hand” (Matt 12:10) ii. n g y o y h h e
.. . nVi
epe-NeY^^nHOYe
6oAri
e e o A “Their priests
...,
whose heads are uncovered” Ep Jer 31 (30 Kasser)
iii. ni.T e-i.-A i.Y eiA i i - q “That which D avid did" (Luke 6:3) iv. NNG200Y r ip eN -g ri-T C ip s “For while (in the days when) we were in the fle sh ” (Rom 7:5)
V. NNeTN-OY^uM eBOA NgHT-oY eq-oY^uT “ You shall not eat from them anything that is ra w ” (Exod 12:9) As these illustrations show, the circumstantial attributive occurs after i. non-definite antecedent clause: the simple attributive 404, 408 ii. appositive n i i (following any kind of antecedent): the appositive attribu tive 408 iii. n i l : forming the articulated attributive clause 411 iv. any kind of antecedent expressing time or manner ‘in which’ 407 V. an unexpressed antecedent 431 431
An unexpressed direct object antecedent, as in n NexN-oYOjM “ You shall not eat (any thing)," is modified by the circumstantial (rare) and the resumptive morph is q. E.g. NNexN-oYOjM eBOAN2HX-OY eq -o Y O )x E x o d 12:9 “ You shall not eat from them
anything that is raw” ; e ti-N a .-e lN e x o jn e q - e l n e m m o - o y e - i " Ne-** Jdt 12:3 “Whence shall we bring anything that resembles them, to give ii to you?” Recorded examples are affirmative duratlve present.
432 In epistles, a sahitation formula (based on the verb cgA'i ‘write’) contains the circumstantial conversion. Examples: niY'^oc mN-xiMoeeoc
AB XHp-OY 2M-nexc
Tc
M-nexc Tc eY-C2M N-N-ex®-oYAnaT ex®-
CONVERSIONS -
CIRCUMSTANTIAL
NJviAKONoc I TexApic NH-TN MN--|-pHNH Phil 1:1-2 “Paul and Timothy, servants of Christ Jesus, writing to all the saints in Christ Jesus who are at Philippi, with the bishops and deacons: grace to you and peace” FluCXog Kui Ti^ioOeog SoO^oi XpioToC ’ItiooC Ttuoiv Tolg (iyioK; iv X p io ra ’hiaou tolg o ta iv iv iXi7t7toig ktX.: N A n o c T b A o c M N - N e n p e c B Y T e p o c e v - c ? * .! N -N e c N H Y eT**-2N -Ta.N Tioxia.
MN-TCYPiA m n - tk y a i k ia N -eT **-^oon 2 N -N 2 e e N o c I XAipexe Acts 15:23 “The apostles and the elders, writing to the brethren in Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are dwelling among the Gentiles: greetings” ; a.na.-o)pciH ce eq-cgA i
hi-neqMNpiT N-
E X T E N S I O N S OF THE C I R C U M S T A N T I A L C O N V E R S I O N
433 A circumstantial conversion can be extended (carried on) by another clause, and if it contains a resumptive morph 404, 426, the extension clause does also. Linkage by conjunction is optional. (a) Circumstantial Clause + (i-Y ^) Sequential Circumstantial Clause
With conjunction: e-Ynpo
(b) Circumstantial Clause + (a.ya)) Unconverted Extension Clause In this construction, one circumstantial converter is expanded by two (or more) clauses; Converter + (Clause + Clause). With conjunction: Mnp-Jti-**6oA e-N extJepH Y e-A xexN-KA-XHYxiJ ka2HY M -npojM e MN-Nec|2BHYe AY^^ ix e x N --|2 io )X -x h y x n M -nB ppe Col 3:9-10 “ Do not lie to one another, seeing that you have put off the old person with its practices and have put on the new one” ; e-a.q -M o Y w en ^ - x c a . p 5 ic |-o )N 2 -ae ^ - n e n n i I Pet 3:18 “ Having died in the flesh, but having become/been alive in the spirit” ; a n a y e -N -e N x -A Y ~ E P -* ’'^*’~ ‘l M -nN oY xe 2N-oYM e eY-KOiNONei e -n rA M o c a y o j c e -x 6 A io a n M -n eJcn e-* a;H p e Shiv 39:23-25 “Consider those who have truly pleased God by partaking of marriage 346
FUNCTIONS
AND
SYNTAX OF
PRETERIT
CONVERSION
and not despising the begetting of children” ; e-N -x N -N A Y an oy-ae N -TN -cojTM AN e-**2pooY NTA-q Shill 2 0 3 : 1 9 - 2 0 “Not seeing Him and not hear ing any voice from Him.” Without coiijitnction (limited to the past tense?): (o)Yea.B e - a . - Y C 2i M e J t i T - t ) A c - N O J C - t j e - a ; o M N T N - a ; i n - n o I t Luke 1 3 : 2 ! “ Leaven that a woman took and hid in three measures of flour” ; e - a .c |- J tic e 6 e e 2 pa.l 2N-TOYNAM M-nNOYxe M - n e p H T M-netTNa, . . ex^-oYAAB a.q-no)2T M-neTTAlo Acts 2 : 3 3 “ Having become exalted at the right hand o f God and having received the promise of the Holy Spirit, he has poured out this gift.”
(c) For the conjunctive within a circumstantial clause, cf. 353.
T H E P R E T E R IT C O N V E R S IO N 434 F O R M S O F
the
co nverter
Immutable sentence converter; secondary converter (in triple conver sion, 398) N e p e - , Ne=; Mutable converter N G -:
Vars. N B - . . . n e , N ep e-/N e= . . . n e , cf. 438 Negative N e p e-/N es . . . an , taken in isolation, is ambiguous, being identical wjth the negative focalizing conversion 452 N - e p e - / N - e s . . , an .
T H E F U N C T I O N S OF P R E T E R I T C O N V E R S I O N
435 The 'preterit conversion’ signals that the converted sentence has a special relationship to the ordinaiy train o f narration, exposition, or dialogue by i. providing background information, either simultaneous
MnoY--xe-A3ii.Y
e-Ai.i.Y I Ney-p-®20Te ri.p “ And they did not say any thing to any one. For they w ere afraid” Koi o65evi ofcSev ein av fi(poPoCvxo ydp (M ark 16:8)
or anterior n xiA ii-pxoc i.q -p -® 2 0 T e N r e p e q -e iM e Jc e-o v 2 p a)M i.io c n e eBOA Jc e-N e-3 n j-M o p -< i n e “ And the tribune was afraid when he realized that he (Paul) was a Roman citizen; for, he had bound him” (Acts 22:29) ii. or by slowing the pace o f narration
nu;i,Jce
A e
M -n N o y re At]-i.Y3i^Ne I i.Y“^
N e c -i.u ;i.I
N 6 i-T H n e
N-MMi.eHTHC eMi.Te 2 N-eiAHM “ And the word of God increased; and the number of disciples was multiplying greatly in Jerusalem ” (Acts 6:7) 347
CONVERSIONS
-
PRETKRIT
iii. or by expressing remote hypotheticality or wish (contrary-to-fact), thus shifted away from the factuality of the main discourse; cf. 498 n jc o e ic e - N G K - M - n e ^ iM a i N e p e -n a ic o N Nai-Moy n e “ Lord, if You had been here, my brother would not have died" (John 11:32) 2i.Moi N e - A N O N - O Y i ^ M M O - O y “ If only we were one of th em !” (ShIV 92:18) Despite its Latin name (‘already past’, praeter-itus) the Coptic preterit con version is not essentially a mark of anterior time. The preterit signals a tem porary shift (in any of several ways), a stepping away from the primary line of discourse. 436
As a secondary converter (in triple conversion 398), the preterit occurs in circumstantial preterit focalizing conversion ( e - N e - e p e - durative, e-Ne-NT-a.« past tense). For examples, cf. 417.
437
The preterit secondarily converted. The preterit is subject to secondary conversion, as relaiive preterit (exe-Ne etc. or e - N e etc.) 401, circumstantial preterit (e-we etc.) 416(a), and focalizing preterit conversion ( e - n e etc.) 446. Thus the combinalion e - N e etc. is triply ambiguous.
INVARIABLE n e
IN P R E T E R I T CLAUSES
438 Many preterit clauses contain invariable n e 285, coming soon after the preter it converter. The function, meaning, and conditions for the presence or absence of n e are unknown. N e y - c M O Y e - n u o y T e “ They were praying (+ n e ) and blessing G od” (Acts 16:25) uei-M H CTeY e Nei-tyAHA (without n e ) “ I was fasting and praying in my house” (Acts 10:30) N e p e - 0 Y 20 T e r i.p N M M i.-Y (textual var. N M M i.-Y n e ) “ For fear was (var. + n e ) with them ” (Mark 16:8) N e y -ty A H A n e
Like the other enclitics, n e tends to come early in the sentence (though always after the converter). It does not occur in preterit delocutive nominal sentences. The presence and absence of n e is often a textual variant when manuscripts are com pared (e.g. in Mark [ed. Quecke] 1:45, 2:15, 5:42, 6:3, 6:19, 6:53, 8:9. 11:14, 11:18, 12:37, 12:38, 16:8).
PRE T ERI T IN NARRATI VE OR EXP O S I TI ON
439 In narrative or exposition, preterit clauses often serve to portray the back ground against which the main line of discourse is being asserted— for exam ple, by giving an explanation 348
FUNCTIONS
AND
S Y NT AX OF
PRETERIT
CONVERSION
NeqpcuMe i.Y-^1 g b o a e-®i.Mi.2 Te mmo-
M0Y2 THp-OY eBOA gM -nenN i. eT®-OY3^a^B I i.Y ^ NeY-Ti.u;e-® oeiu; M - n u ;i.Jc e M -n N O Y T e 2 M - n i.p p H C ii. n im 1 . . . n g y - o n - 0 Y 2 h t n -
OYO^T 3^Y^ OY'J'Y’^^' n - o y t I a y o j Ne-MN-A3iaiY m m O '- c e-N -eT® -u;oon Ni.-q Jce noy - I Ne I AAAi. Nepe-NKa. nim u ;o o n Nii-Y 2i-0Y C 0n I ay^ 2 n - oyno (3 n - 6 om Nepe-NAnocTOAOc f N-TMNT-MNTpe N-Ti.Mi.CTi.CIC M-nJCOGIC Tc I iY^U N e-Y N - 0 YN0 6 N -x ip ic u ;o o n e g p il eJCtu-OY THp-OY I N e-M N -A iiY r i p N 2 h t-o y u ^iiT n e “ And when they had prayed, the place in which they were gath ered together was shaken, and they all became filled with the Holy Spirit. And they spoke the word of God with all boldness. They w ere of one heart and one soul, and no one sa id that the things which he possessed were his own, but they had everything in common. And with great power the apos tles g a ve testim ony to the resurrection of the Lord Jesus, and great grace was upon them all. For no one among them w as n eed y” (Acts 4:31-34) These various perceptions of the background preterit are not mutually exclu sive, as the following passages will show. Further examples: BHe2.Ni2. Jte N e c - 2 HN ezo y N e-eiep o y cA A H M . . . I o y m h h a ;e Ji.e ee o A (i.e. n e a^A-MApea. NM-MipiA . . . I MApeA 6 e N Tepec-co)T M J t e - i c nhy a c - ^ gboa z h t - cJ I MApiA A e N ec-^M O oc n e I neJte-M A peA 6 e n -T c John 11:18-21 “ Bethany was near Jerusalem . . . and many Jews had come to Martha and Mary . . . When Martha heard that Jesus was coming, she went and met him; and Mary was silling in the house. Martha said to Jesus” ; a y o j N re p o Y -e 'i eBOAZM-rrenzAOY i.y-nW T 349
CONVERSIONS
-
PRETERIT
I Nepe-OYZOxe ra.p n m m a-y I NeY-p-**
TERM IN EXTRAPOSITION
440 Any personal m orph (or personal element o f the possessive article) within the sentence pattern can be aniicipated by a term in extraposition, that is, a term placed at the front o f (tie sentence pattern (‘extraposited’) before the converter
S50
FUNCTIONS
AND
SYNTAX OF
PRETERITE
CONVERSION
Extraposited Term(s)
Sentence Pattern (contains a personal morph agreeing with the extraposition) Anticipation I Resumption Topic under discussion I Comment t6 ijc M -n j(.o eic I N P .c -m o o n “ And as for the hand of the Lord, I it was with them ” (Acts 11:21) and thus set o ff as a topic o f thought. Extraposition and personal morph agree in (person)/number/(gender). The agreeing personal m oiph shows how the extraposited term relates to the sentence. (a ) 1st an d 2d p erso n m o rp h s can o n ly be preced ed by an ex trap o sited p erso n al m o ip h : n am ely , th e personal indep en d en t.
2.NOK jLe I N e i - o M - n a .J c o e ic a n n e e-* * T p A -n cu T n t o o t - o y N - N - e x ^ - J c i M M O -in 6 o n c “ B u t fo r m y p art, 11 w as n ot at lib erty to pu rsu e th o se w h o w ere d o in g m e w ro n g ” ( S h lll 1 4 5 :2 -^ )
(h) 3d p erso n m o ip h s ca n be p reced ed by e ith er a p ersonal in d ep en d en t o r som e o th er e n tity term . NToq I Ne q- 2YnoTACce 2 n - o y m n t - 2 A k “ B u t as for him , I he m eekly o b e y e d ” (A thanasius, L ife o f St. A nthony 4 [G aritte 6 :1 1 -1 2 ]) na.1 e N T - A q - o Y o J N n - b b a a M -n B A A e I eIe-N e-M M N -* * 6 o M M M O - q o n n e e - » T S - T p e - n a .1 m o y “ A s fo r H im w h o o p en ed th e e y e s o f the b lin d m an, 1 co u ld H e n o t h av e k ep t th is m an from d y in g ? ” (John 11:37) i^ytx) n g y O o o m M N -N eY ZY rtA pxO N TA I N e Y - + m m o - o y e b o a “ A n d a s for th eir plots o f land an d th eir g o o d s, I th ey so ld th e m ” (A cts 2 :4 5 )
441
A n extra p o sited su b ject ca n h e a c c o m p a r ie d b y its ow n extra p o sited c o n v e rte r (thus N e p e - . . . N e s ); rare. E .g. o n t o c e - N e p e - N T ^ N O O Y e m - m in g n im a y ^ ^ n k g ZcuoN . . . I e - N G Y - N O i M - n - e x o Y - N A - M O Y e x B H H T ^ e Y < i ) A N - O Y O M ^ N e Y -N A -M e ^ -p c u -O Y e p o - q a n S hG u6 164fc. l 2 - 1 5 “ T ru ly , if all k in d s o f b e a sts an d o th er living th in g s . . . knew w h at th ey w o u ld die from if th ey ate it, they w o u ld n ev er tak e a b ite o f it.”
ADVERBI AL PREMODI FI ER BEFORE THE CONVERTED SENTENCE PATTERN
442 An adverb or prepositional phrase (chapter 9) preceding the converted sen tence pattern lays down a circumstance or relationship o f time, place, manner, degree, or attitude in which the converted clause is being asserted (i.e. under which the predication is made). Premodifier I Converted Sentence Pattern g N -T e g o y ^ iT e I N e q - u ;o o n N6i-nu;i.oc.e “ In the beginning I was the W ord” (John 1:1) 351
CONVERSIONS -
FOCALIZING
e T B e - n i.T 6 e N g o yo I N e y -u p iN e N c c u -q n 6 i - n I o y -^3^T
“ And for this reason all the more I the Jews sought Him ” (John 5:18) Adverbial clauses 490 occur in this position with the same function; e.g. i-yiu e p e - n e rA c u c c o K O M O N n t o o t -<] I N eq-gtutJT N - N - e T O Y - N O Y - x e MMO-OY e p o - q John 12:6 “ And as he had the money box, I he used to take what was put into it.” Conjunctions and initial attitude markers (chapter 10) also occur in premodifier position.
E X T E N S I O N S OF T HE P R E T E R I T C O N V E R S I O N
443 A preterit conversion can be extended (carried on) by another clause. Linkage by conjunction is optional, at least in (a) and (b). (a) Preterit Clause + (j^yio) Preterit Extension Examples; N eT-N H creY e Net-
(b) Preterit Clause + (i.Y“ ^) Circumstantial Extension Examples: ntoc jlg Nec-ccPBe h ec-paL a)e e c -p o o y T MMa.xe ShAmel I 53:5^-10 (= ShZ 392:9-10) “But for her part, .she laughed and rejoiced with great glad ness” ; N eq-^ii-T epH M O c ti^Me N -2 0 o y epe-ncjkX^NJkC nipjkZe MMo-q F.q-cnoon NM-NeeHpioN Mark 1:13 “ And He was in the wildemes.s forty days, lempted by Satan; and He was (Kui f|v) with the wild beasts” ; N-ex^-NHy rj^p Jkycu N-ex**-BHK Ne-N3k
(c) Preterit Clause + i.ya) Unconverted Extension Clause In this construction, one preterit converter is expanded by two (or more) clause.s: Converter + (Clause + Clause). Durative conjugation perhaps does not occur as the extension. E.g. Nec--j--**coeix ne Jkycu N3k N o y -c eMJkXe ShChass 122:12-15 ‘‘It was famous and good indeed.”
T H E F O C A L IZ IN G C O N V E R S IO N Traditionally Called the “ Second T enses” F O R M S OF T H E C O N V E R T E R
444 Immutable sentence converter (allomorphs)
GNT-: Cf. NTe x e - : before negation, under certain conditions described in 453 352
FUNCTIONS
AND
S Y N T A X OF F O C A L I Z I N G
CONVERSION
NT- (var. GNT-): before past tense affirmative i.e - : under all other conditions; and as secondary and tertiary converter Mutable converter; e p e - , e* For neutralization o f the formal distinction between focalizing and circum stantial conversion, cf. 460. Negations: cf. 452, 453 Sometimes n t - represems e - N X - ; e n x - represems e - e n x - or e - N T - ; e p e - and e= represent e - e p e - , e - e = ; all of these are simplified writings of the circumstantial conversion of the focalizing converter 4 1 4 , a double conversion. Shenoute and other Sahidic authors (as well as some Biblical passages) sometimes express the optative as e p e - . . . N i - , e = N i- ; in this function it does not signal focalIzation. For examples, c f 339.
T H E F U N C T I O N S OF F O C A L I Z I N G C O N V E R S I O N
445 The focalizing conversion signals that the converted sentence contains a spe cial 'focal p o in t’— i.e. a special point o f emphasis or attention. The location of the focal point is not indicated by the converter. In other words this conver sion marks the sentence as one that has a special structure o f information 448, but without indicating the exact contour o f that special structure. Basic (unmarked): A Y -oyoN g-O Y eBOA N-gi-Z “They appeared to m any” (Matt 27:53) Focalizing (marked): NT-3kq-OYON2-q g b o a hixelge = Signal o f Focalization + “ He revealed Himself in the following w ay” (John 21:1) Knowing the full context o f this sentence in John 21:1, a reader might rea sonably assign focus to the phrase in the follow ing way, thus: “ It was in the follow ing way that He revealed Himself.” (Context: MNNci.-Ni.l o n i .7c OYON2-
CONVERSIONS
~ FOCALIZING
and grammatical structure, vocabulary, standard phraseology, larger context and its train o f thought, reader’s expectations, and any other relevant signals. Thus the reader’s choice, though subjective, is based upon real structural cri teria: the fo ca liza tio n ’ (making a particular sentence element into a focal point) whose presence is elicited by this conversion is, finally, an act per formed by the reader, and yet it is not arbitrary. (Despite careful attention, in many instances choice of a focal point is open to several reasonable possibil ities.) The focalizing conversion occurs frequently and is a typical feature of literary Coptic. B ut it hardly ever occurs in the main story line of a narrative. In the following examples, a reasonable choice o f focal point has been indi cated in the translation by italic type. These choices have been made in con sideration of the overall structure of the contexts in which they occur; here, however, the examples are quoted oul of context. ereT hi-A O B e “ You are m a d \" (1 C or 14:23) “Truly, I am not lying (saying lies)'' (ShWess9 171c; 6 -7 ) N - e p e - n N o y T e ri.p -j- i.N M -neriTTa. 2 n - o y u ; i “ It is not hy measure that God gives the Spirit” (John 3:34) MH e p e - n x o y c N i.-e50M 0A 0rei Ni.-K “ Shall the dust give praise to T h ee?” (Ps 29[30]:9)
o N T c u c e i - J c i - ® 6 o A i.N
Jc e K i.c e q e - e iM e J c e - e T B e - i.u ; N - A o i 6 e e - N e v - 3 H i> K i.K e e o A e p o - q N T e lg e “To find out why (^because o f which pretext) they shout
ed thus against him ” (Acts 22:24) N T - i . q - j t e - n i .1 A e e q - n ip i.X e MMO-q “ He said this testing him" (John 6 : 6) ,
“ Is
e K -jc c u M -n i.1 2 i.p o - K
o f your own accord that you say
th is?” (John 18:34) n i.H i
e Y -N i.-M O Y T e
ep o -q
Jce-n H ei
M -neu;A H A
N -ri^e e N O c
“ My house will be called The house o f prayer fo r all the nations" (Mark 11:17) T H p-oy
A focal point often expresses discriminating information, sometimes contrastively ( “This, not that,” “H ere, not there,” “ W here?” , “ W hat?” , “ H ow ?” ); heightened attention or emotion (“ 1 tell you,” “ You are m ad!" “ Are you asleep? ”); or some other kind o f amplified or enhanced communi cation (“ Do you say this o f y o u r own accord, or did others say it to y o u ? ” ). Coptic also has a less ambiguous form of focalizing structure, namely the cleft sentence (chapter 20). Cleft sentences and focalizing conversions overlap in grammatical func tion, and they occur in the same kinds of textual environment often side by side. Tlie phe nomenon of focalization is also present in nominal sentence Pattern 6a with personal independent in predicate focus 276, e.g. a^NOK n e noyolN M-nKOCMoc John 8:12 “ It is I who am the light of the world” ; cf. 451. 354
FUNCTIONS
AND
SYNTAX
OF
FOCALIZING
CONVERSION
Some standard phraseology occurs in focalizing conversion as a matter of course: e.g. ey-p-O Y . ev-N A -p-O Y “What are they doing/will they do?” ; el-JtO ) Pfw o-c NA-K “ I (hereby) tell you” ; eq-xojN . . . “Where is . . . ?”
Under very limited conditions, the focalizing conversion also forms entity statements 457. 446
As a secondary converter (in secondary conversion 397). focalizing occurs in the focal izing preterit conversion (durative); e.g. JteKiC e q e - e i w e Jte-eTBe-a.
447
Focalizing conversion in second and third degree conversion. The focalizing conversion is subject to: (a) double conversion, as circumstantial focalizing ( e - e p e ~ durative, e - N T - A past tense, 416(b); also elided to e p e - , nt-a-, 414); (h) third-degree con version, as circumstantial preterit focalizing ( e - n e - e durative, e -N e -N x -a . past tense) 417.
T H E F O C A L I Z I N G C O N V E R S I O N AS A N E X U S P A T T E R N
448 The focalizing converter is a type of nexus m orph 248. It signals nexus, i.e. mutual dependence (grammatical union), between the element chosen to be fo ca l point and the remainder of the sentence (the “topic elem ent”), as between a predicate and a subject, so as to com pose a complete statement: It is!was . . . (focal point) . . . thatlwho ... . (topic element). Focalization can be assigned to elements in various positions within the sentence— final, interme diate, initial— as the following examples show. i . q - o Y O N 2-ti A e GBOA.
fflj N T -
converter (nexus morph)
N T s i ^ B (John fo c a l point
topic element
21
“ It is (or was) m the follow ing way that He revealed H im self’’ focal point
(b) e p e converter (nexus morph)
topic
B eeA ^eBoyA
NMM3i-q
fo c a l point
topic element
“ It is Beelzebul who is with H im ” focal point
topic
(c) ?M-n3ipX(DN N-NAAIMONION fo c a l point (nexus morph)
eg-
NeOC.-®JlAIMONION eBOA
converter
topic element
“ It is by the prince o f demons that He casts out dem ons” focal point
topic
Sources: John 21:1, Mark 3:22, Mark 3:22 355
CONVERSIONS
- FOCALIZING
It is noteworthy (example c) that the focal point can be an element that occurs before the converter morph, in the arrangement Focal Point + Topic Element. (But an adverbial complement before the converter is not necessarily the focal point; cf. 456.) Focalizing conversion is often translatable by French C'est... quUque ... The less com mon English construction h is .. . that.. . often has an excessively elaborate and clum sy effect; sometimes a simple translation is unavoidable: 2.N2.Y - x e - e y - p - o Y 2 N-iiCAB BATON Mark 2:24 “ Look what they are doing on the sabbath!” ; epe-Na.T N i-m o )n e TNAY Mark 13:4 “ When will this be? (When will these come to pass?)” ; eic-NicoTit Mark 14:37 “Are you asleep?” Some items are hy their very nature focalized in meaning, so that they frequently elicit a focalizing conversion (or cleft sentence 461): e.g. interrogative specifiers (auj ‘which?’, NiM ‘who?’, o y ‘w hat?’, oyH p ‘how many?’), interrogative adverbs (to jn ‘where?’, t n a y ‘when?’) and items in certain focalizing rhetorical structures (“ Not here but rather there” ; “ Here and not there” ). Repeated text is no longer new information and usually plays the role of topic element. E.g. A - i c o Y O N g - t j e - N e q w i e H T H C 2 i J C N - e a . A a . c c a . N - T i B e p i a c I N T - a q O Y O N g - q JLC C B O A NxeVge John 21:1 “Jesus revealed Himself again 10 His disciples by the Sea of Tiberias. And He revealed Himself in the following way"; e.q)x.e.0 Y N T -q -0 Y 6 0 M
rap
o n
e -o Y N x a -q -c
2 N -N -e T **-K a -*M a
N a -q
N2 H T - o y
Shin 85:13-14 “For, if indeed he [Satan] has a certain degree o f power, it is among
those who make a place for him within themselves that he has it” ;
N x e p i- e i
ujapoj-T N NacNHY N T - a l - e i 2 N - o Y J C . i c e a N N - ^ m a j c e ii N - * c o < | ) i a 1 Cor 2:1 “ When 1 came to you, brethren, I came to you m t in loftiness of word or wisdom": e p u j i N - n M O N a x o c n h c t c y c m h e q - N H C x c Y e N a - K ShChass 104:5-8 "If a monk fasts, pray does he fast for youl"\ n - e T * * - n i c T e Y e e p o - ( N - e q - n i c x e Y e e p o - e i a N a A A a e - n - e N X - a q - x a o Y o - ^ i John 12:44 “ He who believes in Me, believes not in Me hut in Him who sent Me" ; n im N T - a q - a a - Y N X- a q - a a - Y XHp-oY exBe-ncNoY-XAi ShAmel II 463:13-464:1 “ All the things that He did— He did them entirely for our sahation" : c I - n h y o j a p o j - X N e e i - N H Y Z N - o y - X O j k e B o A N - * * C M O Y N x e - n e 3( c Rom 15:29 “ When 1 come to you 1 shall come to you in
the fullness of the blessing of Christ.” ELIGIBLE FOCAL P O I NT S IN DURATI VE AND N O N - DU R A T I V E PATTERNS
449 Most focalizing conversions are based on a durative or non-durative sentence (for other sentence types, cf. 450). The following elements of the underlying basic sentence structure are eligible to be chosen (by the reader) as focal point o f the converted sentence; subject, predicate, suffixed direct object, expansion o f an entity term, and adverbial complement. By far the most frequent is type (v), the adverbial complement, which occurs in either initial or final position of the sentence. i. Subject: entity terms MH e p e - n e x o y c N i.-e 50 M0 A0 re i Ni.-K Ps 29(30):9 “ Shall the dust give praise to T h ee?” 356
FUNCTIONS
AND
S Y N T A X OF F O C A L I Z I N G
CONVERSION
N T -i.-i.u; N-eKKAHcii. p-®2 CUB G-OYu^OY-M epiT^ n e Nee M -n ef®^Mi.Y “Which church has done any deed as admirable as that man has?” (ShChass 203:48-55) epe-B eeA ^eB oyA NMMi.-q “ It is Beelzebul who has afflicted Him, B eeh ebu l is with Him” (Mark 3:22) ii. P redicate: infinitives, statives, prepositional phrases/adverbs; also the predicate together with its complements N T -i.c-u ;o o Y e “It has d rie d u p !” (Mark 11:21) Mnc-MOY i-AAi. ec-NKOTK “ She has not died but is sleep in g ” (Mark 5:39) n-eT® -N i.-oya)u; r i.p e-®Ni.2M-Tet]4'Y’‘n e q - N i.-c o p M -e c “ For whoever would save his life w ill lose i t ’’ (Mark 8:35) ereT N -A oB e “You are m ad!" (1 Cor 14:23) T M N T -e p o ri.p M -nNoyTe N - e c - 2 N-®u;i.Jce i.N i.AAi. 2N-oy<5om “ For the kingdom of God consists not in talk bu t in p o w e r” (1 Cor 4:20) ec-M M i.y N6 i-TMNT-pM 2 e “It is there that freedom resides” (2 Cor 3:17) MH e q - N i.-q i-o Y 6 epo)B ezpi.! e p o - i ShChass 70:49-51 “ Fray tell, is he going to take a ro d again st m e? (Surely he will not take a rod against m e!)” iii. Suffixed d irect object: entity terms ®con MGN e-u;i.Y-Jci-®Me ®con jte on e-u;i.Y --xei-® 6 oA “ Some times they speak the truth, but other times they speak lie s ” (ShAmel I 249:2-3) i.Y“ MeYe Jce-eq-Jce-neNKOTK M-ncuBu; “They thought that He meant taking rest in s le e p ” (John 11:13) iv. Expansion o f an entity term : attributive constructions of the noun 96, terms in general relationship (‘of . . . ’) 147 Attributive noun. Mepe-Ai.i.Y NeJc-®Hpn i-B p p e e-®2 CUT N -i.c . . . x w i , e-u;aiY~Nej(.-®Hprr B-Bppe e-®2tuT i -B ppe “No one puts new wine into old wineskins . . . but new wine is put into new wineskins” (Mark 2:22) General relationship. 2 N-TANi.cTi.cic 6 e e c -N i-p -® c 2 iMe n-nim mMooY “ So in the resurrection whose wife will she be?” (Mark 12:23) V. A dverbial com plem ent: adveibs/prepositional phrases 194, adverbial clauses/infinitive phrases 490 (direct/indirect objects marked by a preposition are included here). The most frequent type. Complements occur in initial and final position.
357
CONVERSIONS -
FOCALIZING
Some complements seem to be restricted to initial position or final position; such restric tions in Shenoute’s Coptic have been tabulated by Shisha-Halevy, Coptic Giamniaiical Categories 80-81, 84, 87. Whether the same restrictions occur in other authors remains to be seen. Complements lhat are compatible with both positions express a stylistic (rhetorical) effect depending on which position has been selected.
Adverbial completnent in initial position: Adverb. - |'- c o o y n an a f . - f.b o a tcun NT-Jk-gtupireNHC ccu o y z egoYN N-oyAu^H N-®u;AO(.e m -m n t-a a 6 ShWess9 1-7 “I do not know wherefrom Origen collected a large number o f impudent state ments” ; M o n c r^p e N - N A - A i c B A N e ShAm61 II 476:1 “For, it is only with difficulty that we will perceive it” Prepositional phrase. Meu^A-K pci) exBp.-nAi N T -A -n e iN o 6 N-CA20 Y e l e 2 PAi eotM-neigHreMCDN n -a n o m o c gboa 2 iTM-nNOYTe Shlll 26:7-9 “And perhaps this great curse fell from Ctod upon that lawless hegemon fo r the following reason" ; e r s H H T - c ON e-u;A q-K T O -q eeo A 2 M -n eq 6 cuNT ShIV 14:10-11 “It is on account o f her, too, that He turns from His anger” Adverbial clause. N T ep eq -T cm -q M M o - q NT-A-neqcTOM Axoc anarperre ShAmel II430:13 “It was after he made him drink it that he vom ited” ; F.pqjAN-TBACUOp AUiKAK F.BOA AN . . . ^-geN gP O O Y eY~OU; epe-nM OYl 'Tppe ShChass 3 8:35-42 “It is not when a fox barks with noisy cries . . . that a lion is afraid” ; et-roAM A ei-Jtct) naI (i.e. n - nat) ShMun 96 (verso text): 14-15 “I say this daringly” Alternatively, some of the sentences in this pattern could be classified as being built around a circumstantial conversion 460.
Adverbial complement in f in il position: Adverb. ep e-N A j NA-u^cune tnay Mark 13:4 “When will this be? (When will these come to pass?)” Prepositional phrase. n t - a - h a I u^cune s b o a ■giTM-njcoF.ic Ps 117(118):23 “ It is (or was) through the Lord that this happened” Adverbial clause. e-u^A Y -qi-ngH B c mmav epcU A N -noyoeiN ei e^pAi Shiv 20:12-13 “It is when the sunlight comes up that the lamp is taken away” ; el-otcu n -n a I F ,r--f-^tjmrre n h - t n 1 Cor 15:34 “I say this by way o f putting you to shame" Infinitive phrase. N T-A -no(.oeic tap e i an e~**KATAAYe m -h n o m o c MN-Ncnpo4)HTHC AAAA F,-^3cotc-ov EBOA Shlll 66:14-16 “For the Lord came not to abolish the law and the prophets but to fulfill them”
358
I'UNCTIONS
A N D S Y N T A X OF F O C A L I Z I N G
CONVERSION
Direct object. n - e T ® - N i.- ty e n - n e Iu ;H p e u ;h m e p o - q eotM -n^pAN e o - u jc u n MMO-r F .p o - q Luke 9:48 “ As for whoever receives this child in My name, it is M e that they receive” ; n t - a t g t n - ^ i g b o a e - T e p H M o c e-®NAY e - o y Luke 7:24 “W hat did you come out into the wilderness to behold?” Indirect object, n x o e i c eK-otcu n a - n N-TF,inApABOAH I 0(.e N -e K - 0(.a) M M o -c e - o y o N n i m Luke 12:41 “ Lord, are You telling this parab le/o r us or are You telling it about all? ” Reiterated article phrase 62. e-u;Ape®-ep-oY NA-y
I m h e-u;Ape®“W hat do you do to them? Lsn’t it true that you tear them and slice them into fr a g ments and pieces? " (ShAmel I 108:9-10) njkg-oy AN H ujApe**-oc?-OY‘^no6e*^no6e
nto
h
F O C A L I Z I N G C O N V E R S I O N OF O T H E R S E N T E N C E P ATTERNS
450 Other sentence patterns that occur in focalizing conversion include (i) suffixally conjugated verboids, (ii) oyrJ-/(M )M N- ‘there is’, and (Hi) o y f J r e /(M)Mh4Te- ‘have’. Examples: (i) 2i T N - o y e - N i i i - y e - N e y e p H y ShChass 135:44-46 “ How are some greater than others?” ; Ayo) a a h o o j c e -g N A -y a n e-®Tpe-AAAy N -p a jw e MAKApize MMO-Oy e - n x H p - q e-® T peY --X oo -c exBHH T-oy J t e - g e N p e q •|'-**cBcu N eShlll 161:29-162:1 “ And it is really true that they are not at all willing for any person to congratulate them, and to say of them that they are teachers"; e-NAiAT-N ep
451
Shift offocus in the nominal sentence (a) The nominal sentence does not occur in the focalizing conversion. Instead, shifted focus ill the nominal sentence can be expressed by shifted position of subject and pred icate (the predicate being by definition the focal point of attention); e.g. (in nominal sen tence Paltern 5 Topic I Prcdiciilc n e 272) n n o y x e n e N e io jx n e “God is our father " ver^ius neN E iujT n N i y r e n e “Our father is God." If the predicate type requires it, such a .sliifl is accompanied by a shift of sentence pattern 259: A N r-n o y o eiN “ I am the lifiht" (Pattern I [263]) versus a n o k n e n o y o e iN “It is I who am the light,” “ The light is Ml’" iPallern 6 [2751). 359
C () N V i; R S U) N S
r () C A 1. 1ZI N Ci
(h) The adverbial modifier of a nominal sentence can be localized in ihe circumsianiial cleft sentence without n e 459. NEGATION
452 (a) N egation o f the focalization nexus. Negation usually applies to the nexus 448 between focal poini and topic element: It is n o t . . . t h a t . . . Negalion of nexus is expressed by enclitic . . . *.n or opiionally n (n )- . . . Jln. The indis pensable signal of negation is i.N 250. If n (n )- is present, it is prefixed to the converter. occurs before, after, or in the midsi of the focal point, depend ing on sentence arrangement. Before the focal point. neru^cuNe fiN - e q -u jo o n an f . - h m o y John 11:4 “This illness is not unto death" ', m h e-u;i.pe-nM i.TO i ^ x p o e - N e q JUJce ^N -N eqcoTB ea m-mujus Shlll 200:2-3 “ Pray, is it not by m eans o f his com bat weapons that a soldier defeats his enemies? ” After the focal point. n-eT®-niCTeYe e p o - I N -e q -n iC T e y e e p o - e i an AAAi. e - n - e N T - i . q - T i . O Y O - ^ John 12:44 “He who believes in Me, believes not in M e but in Him who sent M e” In the midst of the focal point. T M N T -e p o N-MnHye e c - ?M-neiMa. an H nAi Sh Amel II 462:10-11 “The kingdom of the heavens is not here or th ere” Taken in isolation, negative N - e p e - / n - e = . . . negative preterit N ep e-/N e* , . . a k .
is ambiguous, since it looks like the
Rhetorical questions containing a negatived nexus expect an affirmative reply
(they are often preceded by
mh
‘pray tell’).
Examples; mh ep e -n e v B c u A q jo o n a n g b o a ^ ix Ji-n N o Y T e Gen 40;8 “ Is not the interpretation of ihem through God?"; mh n t - a i - c m n t - c n m m a -k a n e - y c A x e e p e Mall 20:13 “Did I nol sellle with you for one denarius?": mh exBe-NANOBe a n n x - a k - m a c x ip o y m m o-i ShAmel 181:10-11 “ Pray tell, isn’t il because of my sins that You have scourged m e?” : e x B e -n A l a n 6 e exexN-nAANA Mark 12:24 “ Is not this why you are wrong? (So Is it n o t/o r the following reason that you are wrong?)”
453 (b) N egation o f the topic element. Quite a different, and rarer, type of negation has the attested forms of G T e - N - c e - c c u T n Jin e re -M h i- .. . c c o r r r etc.
eTB-M noy-ccDTn e re -M N T -o y (Formally, these are identical with the relative conversion of a negatived clause.) 360
FUNCTIONS
AND
S Y NT AX OF
FOCALIZING
CONVERSION
n-eT®-oYtuM eq -ovtuM M -nJcoeic . . . i-Ytu n -eT e-N -q-oY tU M i.N eT e-N -q -o y cu M i.N M -nJcoeic “ As for the one who eats, il is in honor of the Lord that he eats . . . And as for the one who does not eat. it is in honor o f the L o rd that he does not eat” (Rom 14;6) In such a sentence, negation applies only within the topic element (“He does nol eat”), whereas the overall nexus is affirmative (“It is in honor of the Lord lh at. . . ” ). Because this structure is rare, it cannot be easily investigated. Rhetorical questions containing a negatived topic element expect a negative
reply. E.g. ere-MN-®6ci)p5 Ae n h y gjcn —nim g b o a giTOOT-tj Job 25:3 “And upon whom will there not come a snare from him ?” Further examples; eTe-Mne**-Jta)2M m - ma Jer 3:2 (quoted in Besa, Frag. 35 [Kuhn I 16:14-15)) “Where (In which place) have you not been defiled?” ; c a ^ o jc u -k 6 e eBOA Ta.-NAY Jc e -e T M n e q -(i.e . J c e - e x e - M n t|- ) e i e n e c H x exBHHT-K I e ty c u n e mmon e ie -e x B H h t-* ApophPalr 192 (Chaine 4 9 :3 4 -5 0 :1 = Z 323:2-4) “ So depart and let me see whether it is on account of yon that it did not come down; if not. then it is on account of m e” ; oykoyn e x S n e q - e i (i.e. e x e - w n q - e l ) e n e c H x exBHHX-K e x B e -J c e - n c o N qjocM e p o -K ApophPalr 192 (Chame 50:5-6 = Z 323:8) “ Isn’t it on account of you that it did not come down, because the brother is annoyed at you”
They can question the veracity of the basic clause .statement as a whole (“ Is it that . . . ? ”). E.g. eTe-MnOY-ccuTM . . . ere-M ne-nicpaiH A e i n e Rom 1 0 :1 8 -1 9 “Is it that they d id not h ear! . . . Is it that Israel d id not under stand? ” Further examples; mh ex e-M N -6 o M JiM o -e i e-*X 0 YJce-XHYTN Isa 50:2 “ Pray tell, is it that I do not have the ability to save you?” ; mh ex e-M N -x H x ti-* H e i mmay e—^oyWH i.\w e - * c a ; I Cor 11:22 “Pray tell, is it that you do nol have houses to eat and drink in?” However, these examples could also be understood to express negation of a focal point 452 — “ Did they nol hear?"-, “Do I not have the ability?’’; “ Do you not have houses?”
TERM IN EXT R AP O S I TI ON
454 Any personal morph (or personal element of the possessive article) within
the sentence pattern can be anticipated by a term in extraposition, that is, a term placed at the front of ihe sentence pattern (‘extraposited’) before the con verter E xtraposited Terni(s)
Sentence Pattern
(contains a personal morph agreeing with the extraposition) Anticipation I Resumption Topic under discussion I Comment 361
(• () N V I; R S I ( ) N S
NTooy I
I ( ) ( ' A 1.1 /. I N Ci
eJcu)-K
■'And ftw Ihcir part, they rejoice in Y ou” (ShGue 16lfc;36) and thus set off as a topic of thought. Exiraposition and personal morph agree in (person)/number/(gender). The agreeing personal morph shows how the extraposited term relates to the sentence.
(a) 1st and 2d person morphs can only be preceded by an extraposited personal morph: namely, the personal independent. ANON JlC I eN-OYO)
(h) 3d person morphs can be preceded by either a personal independent or some other entity term. N T o o \ I eY -^i-N eY epH Y ee o A ^i^-T M N T -enpi. “ As for them, they are altogether formed o u to f vanity” (Ps 61[62]:9) TOYepHxe I e c - j y o o n fM -ncojM A eTBe-**Moo
455
An extraposited subject can he accompanied by its own extraposited l onverter (thus e p e . . . e*); rare. E.g. ep e-N N O se ra.p n - n ^ g a a h n MN-NA-N-eT**-OYa)
ADVERBI AL P R E M O D I FI ER BEFORE THE C O N V E R TE D SENTENCE PATTERN
456 An adverb or prepositional phrase (chapter 9) — as distinct from the focal point— can precede the converted sentence pattern, laying down a circum stance or relationship of lime, place, manner, degree, or attitude in which the converted clause is being asserted (i.e. under which the focalization is to be made). Prem odifief I Converted Sentence Pattern
eT B e-N geeN oc Jie TiT-AY-niCTeye I e-MNT-oy-AjijkY e-^jccu Ni.-K “ As for ihe Gentiles who have believed, Ihey have noth ing 10 say to you” (Acis 21 ;25) 2hi-Ti.Ni,cTaLcic Ae I ec-N i.-p-® 2iM e hi-NiM SiM o-oy “ In ihe resur rection, therefore, whose wife will she b e? ” (Luke 20:33) Adverbial clauses 490 occur in this posilion with the same funclion; e.g. e p ty a .M -n e ^ 362
1 mh e q -M J^ -p -^ o Y o
Jo h n
FUNCTIONS
AND
S Y N T A X OF
FOCALIZING
CONVERSION
7:31 “ W hen the Christ appears, will He do more than the signs that this Man has d o n e?” Conjunctions and initial attilude markers (chapter 10) also occur in premodifier position.
THE F O C A L IZ IN G C LA U SE AS AN E N T IT Y STATEM ENT
457 A focalizing clause functions as an entity statemeni 150, (i) after the preposi tions MNNca.- (+ focalizing durative past) ‘after’ and jc in - (+ focalizing durative present or pasi) ‘since’ oYpiwMe N -6i.A e jci N -e q -i^ g H T -c N-TeqMi.i.Y was in his m other’s w om b” (Acts 3:2)
lame since he
(ii) expressing reported discourse after negative conjugation of the infinilive 6 n - var. 6 n n - (cf. C m e) ‘(not) find out th a t. . . ’ 516(iii); (Hi) as an entity statement expanding the subject of a clause 486. E x am p le s: (i) t7 N N c a .-N T -a .Y -N O Y -x e M - n K A T H r o p o c E b o a ^ - f n e e 2 pAl eJC M -nK A Z J o h n E v an g elist, B ook o f the In v estitu re o f St. M ichael A rch an g el 4 (M iiller 1 4 : 7 - 8 ) “ A fter th e a c c u se r had b een ca st from h e a v e n ” ; J c i N - e p e - ‘a lre a d y . . . w h e n ’: q - n a - m o y ? M - n e n N A ex**-OYAAB j c i n — N- T e q wAAY L u k e 1 :15 “ H e w ill b e alread y filled w ith th e H oly S p irit w hen he is w ithin h is m o th e r ’s w o m b " ; NAl NC e N T - A ? - j ; o o - Y n h - t n j c . i N - e 'l - q ) o o n NM MH-TN L u k e 2 4 :4 4 “ T h e se are m y w ords th a t I sp o k e to yo u w hile I w as still w ith y o u ” ; JciNTA—, for j c i n - + n t - a - , ‘s in c e ’: j c i N T - A - N e N e i o T e PAp n k o t k ^ o j b NiM MHN eB O A N T e i^ e 2 P e t 3 :4 “ F o r e v er since o u r a n cesto rs fell asleep , all th in g s h a v e C o n tin u e d in th is w a y ” ; S n i - p - ^ o Y o g - m n t - c n o o y c n -^ o o y JC iN T -A l-B tW K e ^ p A l e - e iA H M e-**oYO)UjT A c ts 2 4 : 1 1 “ It is n o t m o re th an (I h ave n o t sp e n t m o r e th an ) tw elv e d a y s sin c e I w e n t up to Je ru salem to w o rs h ip " ; e i c - A - o Y H |» N - o Y o e n y J c iN T - A - n A e i T A Z o - q M ark 9 :2 1 “ A b o u t ( a - 68 ) how lo n g h as th is afflicted h i m ? " ; (ii) t i - - |- - 6 N - e p e - j ( . a ) t? M o - c a n x . e . - o y M a rk 1 4 :68 “ I d o n o t u n d erstan d ( 6 n - . . . a n ) w h at yo u are sa y in g " ; N - q - N A - 6 N e q - N A - q i - n e q B A A AH e z p A i e - n N O Y T e n a u j N - ^ e S hA m el I 1 1 8 :1 -2 “ H e w ill n o t find o u t ( < 5 n - . . . a n ) h o w h e m ight lift up h is e y e s to G o d ” ; M n o Y -< S N N -e Y ~ N A - p - o Y N i_ - q L u k e 1 9 :4 8 “ T h e y d id n o t find o u t w h a t to d o (w hat th e y m ig h t do) to H im .” (In th e s e attesta tio n s, th e fo calizin g c o n v e rsio n s c o n ta in an in te rro g a tiv e sp e c ifier an d are a ffirm a tiv e d u rativ e.) T h e nom inal se n ten ce, w hich h a s no fo calizin g c o n v ersio n , is d ir e c tly su ffix e d to n eg ativ e 6 n - in u n co n v erted form : e.g. AYOJ o a a a o c M n e q - 6 N —A n p - n I m I s a 1:3 “ M y peo p le h as n o t kno w n w ho I a m ” ; o y m n H p e r e e x e - M n o Y - - x o o - c N A - q jc e - e ic g H H T e A K -ep H T n a - n N - g e N e p o N o c S ev erian o f C a b a la , E n co m iu m on S a in ts P eter an d P a u l (F o a i 9 3 :1 8 -1 9 ) “ It is a w o n d e r th at th ey d id n o t say to H im , L ook, Y ou p ro m ised us th ro n e s”
EX T K N SIO N S OF THE F O C A L IZ IN G C O N V E R S IO N
458 The focalizing conversion can be extended (carried on) by another clause. Linkage by conjunction is optional, at leasi in (b), (c), and (d). 363
CONVI-RSIONS
(a) Focalizing Clause + Examples:
lOCALIZINC
Focalizing Extension
ep e-n ey Z H T
o y o u ^
N o y H f A ycu e q -T A K H y
eq-B H A
g b o a
cxe-
N -Ni2AAoyc ShChass 119:45-50 “ How much their hearts (lit. heart) are crushed and are ruined, being undone almost like spider webs!” ; c n - n a - b c u k h AON
N ee
N T -A N -B C U K
GBOA 2 M -R M A G N T - A N - e i
GBOA
N 2H T -q
eT B e-R A I
eT® -M M A y
Shill |3 4 : 16-19 “ It is because of that man that we are going to leave, indeed, have left, the place from which we have come, because he abused us” Jte -A q -jtiT -N
n
6 onc
(b) Focalizing Clause + Examples:
K -N A y
Circumstantial Extension Jte -N T -A q -c N T -M n H y e
T H f> -oy
nag
;
N ~2e
2 M -n eq A o -
ShMing 288fc;l-8 “ You see how He established all the heavens by His reasoning and surpassed them all” ; m h N T - A q n c M o c Aycu e - A q - p - 2 i T n e
M M O -O y T H p - o y
BCUK e 2 P A i e - T n e N 6 i - n A 2 C U M - o e - A q - e i N e e n e c H T N - N e q e N T O A H j c g k a c e p o - o y N T N - A A - y Shlll 120:7-9 “ Didn’t Pachomius the Great go up into heaven and bring down his rules, so that we might hear them and do them ?” ; cf. also 423 eN e-ccuT M
(c) Focalizing Clause +
Unconverted Extension Clause
In this construction, one focalizing converter is expanded by two (or more clauses): Converter + (Clause + Clause). E.g. m h e - t y A p e - n A 2 - o y a n h t y A p e - o c 2 - o y ® n o 6 e ® n o 6 e h ® a a k m ® a a k m ShAmel I 108:9-10 “ Isn’t it true that you tear them and slice them into fragments and pieces?” ; N T - A N - o y A 2 ~ N t a p a n N C A - 2 e N t y A J t e e - A y - r ir c u B - o y
2
A N -o ycu N
n h -tn
g b o a
n -t6 o m
M - n e N jt o e ic
Tc
n e x c
2 Pet 1:16 “For it was not that we followed cleverly devised myths and (thus) made known to you the power and coming of our Lord Jesus Christ.” M N - T e q n A p o y c iA
(d) Focalizing Clause + Examples:
Conjunctive Extension Clause
(o y n N A e - N A N o y - q ) e q u ;A N - o y c u N
NTOq
N 2oyo
A ycu
AAAA
e q - p o e ic
N q -p A ty e A ycu
eq ~
e jt c u - q
2A
p e
2
1q
2
N A -q g b o a e - u ;A q - M e p iT - q
-co o y N
rAp
e -® T M -n A 2 T -q
Jte -e q --f-
o y B H -q
N - o y A A iM O N io n
an
A ycu
N q - c y c u n e 2 A - T e 5 o y c i A N - o y n N A [ N - ] j t [ A O ( , e | Shlll 40:11-15 “If it (a good spir it) appears to him, he for his part loves it very much and rejoices over it. For he knows that it does not oppose him but rather keeps watch and prevents him from bowing down to a demon and coming to be under the authority of a [hostile] spirit” ; e p e -n -e T ® u ;A J t e N M M e -* n a - k c u
an
N -2 e N M A T O i 2 ^ P A T -q
N q -K C U A y e N -N -e T ^ -c c u rn
Shlll 188:20-22 “ He who speaks to you is not going to put soldiers in his charge and stop those among you who are choos ing death rather than life” ( e p e - . . . n a - optative 339) N A -y
(e)
M -n M o y N 2 o yo e -n c u N
2 2 P^'
N 2 H T -e
The infinitive in itself can be extended by conjunction -h infinitive 231(ii): N T -A -n J to e ic P A P J t o o - c A y c u a a - n N - ® M n u ;A e - Shlll 73:5-6 “For the Lord spoke and made us worthy for . . .
When focalizing conversion with negatived focalization nexus is extended, optionally a single a n occurs. Examples: m h e - u ; A p e - n A 2 - o y a n h u ; A p e - o c 2 - o y ® n o 6 e ® n o O e h " a a k m ShAmel I 108:9-10 “ Isn’t it true that you tear them and slice them into frag ments and pieces?” ; e - N A l A T - q r A p a n M - n - e r ^ - K A e H K e i . . , o y r e e N A i A T - o y N - N - e T o y - K A e H r e r M M O - o y . , , ShOxford Clar.Pr.b.4 67ro;28-fc; 16
"aakm
I
364
F O C A L I Z A I ION
BY T H E
CIRCUMSTANTIAL
“ For congratulations should not be offered to one who instructs . . . nor should congrat ulations be offered to those who are instructed . . . "
459 F O C A L I Z A T I O N E X P R E S S E D B Y T H E C IR C U M S T A N T IA L C O N V E R S IO N Adverbial Focal Point I Circumstantial Clause eT B e-nA f I e - N - q - q p i n e a n e-®M oyTe e p o - o y Jte-NACNHy “ It is fo r that reason that He is not ashamed to call them My brethren” ( H e b 2 :ll) In this focalization pattern the focal point is an adverbial modifier or adverbial clause occurring in initial position, and the conversion is circumstantial. The identifying mark o f the pattern, and signal o f focalization, is the grammatical union o f an adverbial m odifier or clause with a following circumstantial con version (affirmative or negative) to fo rm a complete, main-clause sentence. Note that a nominal sentence in circumstantial conversion is eligible to func tion as topic element (ShAmel 1 30 5 :4 -6 , cited below). Only sentences con taining an unam biguous circum stantial form ( e - N - q - q p i n e a n , e - N - q - N A - N A y a n , e-nnATq-BCJU A. eeoA ., e - A q - ^ o n - q , e - y N o 6 an n e npcjUMe, etc.) are cited below; but cf. also 460.
Negation o f focalization nexus ( “it is not . . . t h a t . . The indispensable signal of nexus negation is enclitic a n , which occurs before the circumstantial clause. Further examples:
N -N e rf> A < J)H I ShP 130^47v (p. c K r ) h: 18-25 “How will the one who has knowledge of the Scriptures not surely see and rec ognize the angel?” ; e T B e - N e N J t c u 2 M M N - N e N c c u c u q . . . I n j t o e i c A y c u nA rreA oc e - M R A T q - B C U A GBOA N M M A - N ShAmel II 318:11—319:1 “ It is because of our pollutions and our abominations . . . that the Lord, together with the angel, has not yet come to terms with us” ; M e t y A - K rAp e q - A O K i M A Z e N - T e c A P A n H 1 e - A q - 2 o n - q e p o - c n p o c-o y K o y i Shlll 56:17-18 “For perhaps it was by way of his testing her love that he hid himself from her for a while” ; n a g ; N ~ 2 e N 2 o y o I e - N - T A i A K O N i A A N M - n e R N A N A - t y c u n e 2 N - o y e o o y 2 Cor 3:8 “How will the dispensation of the Spirit not surely be all the more in splendor?” ; A y c u n a u ; N ~ 2 e I e - y N o 6 A N n e n p c u M e e q - T A i H y e M A r e ShAmel I 305:4— 5 “ And surely {How can it not be that) the human being is great and very glorious” ; m h e T B e - T M N T C T M H T A N I e - A - N A T OtCUK G B O A N ~ 2 C U B N IM e - N A N O y - q II hi e T B e - T T T N T A T -ccu T M AN N TOq I e - A - N e T K O o y e JccuK G B O A N - N IN 0 6 M - n e e o o y ShWess9 I06a;7-17 “ Pray, is it not through obedience that these accomplished every good thing, and is it not through disobedience that these otliers accomplished such great ev ils?” ; m h e T B e - N i 2 B H y e p c u a n e T N - n A A C c e M M O - O y 2 M - n e N 2 H T M M IN M M O -N A y c u T N M N T - p e q - K A ~ 2 T H - N e p O - N M A y A T - N I e - A y - J t O O - C e -N ^ -N A -N A y
n au ; N ~2e n -e re -o y N T A -q AN
N 6 i- N e n p o < J ) H T H C
e -n A rre A o c
e r® -o y A A B
A ycu
m m ay
M -n co o y N
N q -c o y c u N ^
e y - M ic y e
e y -Jtcu
m m o
- c
jc g - b c u k
2^
-
365
CONVERSIONS
n o y o e iN M-neTNKtU2T ShAmel I 219:7-10 “Pray, was it not precisely because of these deeds that we conceive in our own heart, and our self-isolation, that the holy prophets said, struggling as they spoke, Walk in the light of your fire?” ; 2 i t n - o y n - e N T - A q - p - N A i T H p - o y NA-q u^A N Toy-u^tune N-®eNoxoc e-Tof>rH I €-Aq-p-®eBiHN N ( 5i - n A A i M O N i O N eT®-MMAY ShWess9 86fc;2I-28 “How is it that this demon became impotent against Him, the One who cre ated all these unto Himself as servants to the point that they became liable to the A nger?” ; 2^2 N - c o n eTBe-N-eT®-MMAY I e - A i - J t o o - c Shlll 145:25 “ There were many times, concerning them, that 1 said . . . ”
N E U T R A L IZ A T IO N O F F O C A L IZ IN G V E R S U S C I R C U M S T A N T I A L C O N V E R S IO N 460 Because some conversion forms such as e q - c c ju r n , e q - c c ju r n a n , e - u p A q ccjuTn, e - Y N T A - q , etc. do not by their appearance express a distinction between circumstantial versus focalizing, some o f the examples cited as focal izing conversions, above and elsewhere in this book, such as
2 M-nApxcjuN N-NAAIMONION I eq-N eJC “ ®AAi MON Io N SBOA. “ It is by the prince o f demons that He casts out dem ons” (Mark 3:22) 2it1^-oV I e-NAAA-Y e-N eY epH Y “How are some greater than others?” (ShChass 135:44--^6) epupAN-TBAupop AupiCAK. sBOA. AN . . . I epe-nMOY'i TTPe “It is not when a fo x barks . . . that a lion is afraid” (ShChass 3 8 :3 5 -4 2 ) could just as well be said to contain a circumstantial and assigned to the mainclause focalizing pattern consisting o f I Adverbial Focal Point + Circum stantial Clause I 459. But it is even more accurate to say, from the viewpoint o f decipherment, that the topic elem ent o f main-clause sentences in this form is neither distinctly focalizing nor distinctly circumstantial, but that such a dis tinction is here neutralized, i.e. not maintained: Adverbial Focal Point + N eutralized FocaliziiiglCirciwistantial Clause provided that it is a complete main-clause sentence.
366
20
The Cleft Sentence The Focalizing Function o f the Cleft Sentence Existential Cleft Sentences: ‘There Is
’
461
462
Patterns Containing a Relative Clause 463 Pattern 1 r e ic n ic T ic TeN T-A c-N A ^M -eic 464 Pattern la ovptuM e n - pmmao neNT-Aq-TCju6e n - oyma N -eA.ooA.e 465 Pattern la at the beginning o f epistles 466 Extension o f Pattern 1 467 Pattern 2 n t o k .e N T - A i c - T A O Y o - ' i 468 Patterns Formed w ith n e and a Circumstantial Clause 469 Pattern 3 N e -N T o q n e eq-ANAXcjupei 470 Pattern 3a oY pujM e n e eq-iccjuT N -o Y T o n o c 471 Term in Extraposition
472
Adverbial Premodifier and Postponed Subject
473
Cleft Sentence versus Nominal Sentence 474 Negative Rhetorical Questions Formulated as a Cleft Sentence 475
T H E F O C A L I Z I N G F U N C T I O N OF T H E C L E F T S E N T E N C E
461 Like the conversions, the cleft sentence is a gram m atical superstructure, which is formed upon some o f the main-clause ‘basic’ sentence patterns (nexus pat terns) described in part 2 . For example, Basic (non-durative past, chapter 15):
AY“ fTAAcce TAP N-AAAM Nupopn “Adam was formed first” Cleft sentence (superstructure, built upon the basic form ): TAP n e N T -AY-nA.3LCce M M o -q N cuopn “ For it is Adam who was
formed first” (1 Tim 2 :1 3 ) and Basic (dtirative fiiture, chapter 14): K -N x-u)M U )e NA-q MAY^A-q “ You shall serve Him alone” 367
« I lii i
SI N I i ; n ( |-:
Cleft semem e: NToq nETic-NA-cuMcue NA-q “It is Him alone that shall you serve. You shall serve Him alone" (Matt 4:10) and Basic: AK-eiMe e-TAAiKAiocYNH “You have known my righteousness” Cleft sentence: NTOK. eNT-AK.-eiMe e-TAAiK.AiocYNH “It IS You who have known my righteousness” (Ps 39[40]:9) A cleft sentence is marked as containing a special fo c a l p o in t’, i.e. a special point o f emphasis or attention. It thus signals a special (marked) structuring of information content within the sentence; and in this function, though not in form, it resembles the focalizing conversion 444. (In fact, cleft sentence struc ture differs radically from any o f the conversions.) The fo c a l point o f a d e ft sentence is always the first element o f the pattern and is always an entity term. AAAM neNT-AY~fT^^cce M M O - q Nupopn NToq neTic-NA-upMupe NA-q NTOK. eNT-AK.-elMe e-TAAIK.AIOCYNH Cleft sentence patterns express nexus 248 (i.e. grammatical union, mutual dependence as o f a predicate 247 and a subject) between the initial focal point and the remaining information in the sentence— which is the ‘topic elem ent’— n eN T -AY~*^^^t:ce iHMO- a Nuiopn NTOq MAYJ^J^-q neTic-NA-ujMcue na - cj NTOK. eN T -A K -eiMe e-TAAIKAIOCYNH so as to compose a complete statement: Focal Point <------ > Topic Element “It islwas .. . (focal p oint). . . tliatlwho . . . (topic element).” (It is/was Adam who was formed first; It is Him alone that shall you serve; It is You who have known my righteousness.) These are Coptic cleft sentences in the traditional sense o f the term. In all cleft sentence patterns the focal point is an autonomous element; conse quently, an enclitic conjunction such as a s 235(b) or an elaborating element (or both) can immediately follow the focal point; aaam r^p neN T AY-nA.Acce MMo-q ^ op rf 1 Tim 2:13 “For it is Adam who was formed first.” 368
PATTERNS
CONTAINING
EXISTENTIAL CLEFT SENTENCES:
A RELATIVE ‘ T H E R E IS
CLAUSE ’
462 Another set of patterns i.s also described in this chapter because they formally look like cleft sentences, but these do not conjain a focal point. Instead, they have the meaning of an existential sentence with predicative expansion (chap ter 21), such as begins with o y w - or e i c - : e.g. ovptuMe n e T e -o y N T q-upHpe CNAY Luke 15:11 “There once was a man who had two sons.” These patterns, in which n e there is asserts existence and introduces some per son or thing into the actual line of discourse 266, may be called ‘existential cleft sentences' (existential in meaning, cleft sentence in appearance). Such, below, are Patterns la and 3a (cf. 465, 471).
P A T T E R N S C O N T A I N I N G A RELATI VE CLAUSE
463 The two cleft sentence patterns containing a relative clause are typical of the literary language. Pattern 1, in its two variant spellings (elided and unelided), occurs very often. Pattern 1 (containing
ne/re/N e)
Basic: TeTN-NA-Jce-nAi “You shall say this” Cleft, unelided: nAi n e -e re T N -N A -J c o o -q “It is this that you shall say”
(Mark 13:11, textual var.) Cleft, elided: n^i nereT N A -Jcoo-q “ It is this that you shall say” (Mark
13:11, textual var.) Pattern 2 (not containing n e/re/N e) Basic: ic-pcjuupe “ You are responsible” Cleft: NTOK eT®-pcjuupe “ It is you who are responsible” (Matt 27:4)
The topic element (or in Pattern la, predicative expansion) is in a relative clau.se (ereT N -N A -jco o -q . ereT N A -jco o -q , eT®-Jcuj, eT®-pcjuupe) con taining a resumptive morph 404, which agrees with the focal point in number/(gender): n^T . . . jc o o -q . Resumptive 0 morph (bare er®- 405) occurs if conditions require; FJtok . . . s t ®. The resumpiive morph (e.g. - q in oa T n c -C T C T h i-N A -jto o -q ) marks the position where the focal point would meaningfully occur (thus rc T N -N A -jc c -nAT “ You shall say this”). Occurrence and non-occurrence of the resumptive morph is exactly as in rel ative and circumstantial attributive clauses 4 0 4 , 4 0 5 , 4 0 7 . But in a cleft sentence the rel ative clau.se does not have altributive function, being an essential constituent of the pat tern.
Pattern recognition. In Pattern 1/1 a, the sequence ... n e -
or
n (e )-
+ Relative Clause 369
C L L I r S H N T U N C Ii
(e.g. .. . ne-eNT- . .. or .. . neNT- .. .) signals that the information of the sentence can be understood as a cleft sentence. In Pattern 2, the sequence Personal Independent + Relative Clause
(e.g. NTOK 6NT- . . . ) signals cleft sentence structure unambiguously. 464 Pattern 1 (endophoric n e and relative clause) Entity Term
ne-/re-/Ne, , , , , , , n(e)-/T(e)-/N(e)-
+
focal point
Relative Clause containing a resumptive morph
NAi Ae NeT®-2 ATN-Te2 i h “ It is these that are along the path” (Mark 4:15, textual var. Ne-eT®-2 J.Te-) TeitnicTic TeNT-AC-NA2M-eic (i.e. reicniCTic T e-eN T -A c-) “ It is your fa ith that has made you well” (Luke 18:42) N i M ra^p N-ujHpe n e-eT e-M ep e-n e q eicju T nAiAeve M M O - q “ Indeed, what son is it whose father does not discipline him?/Indeed, what son is it whom his father does not discipline?” (Heb 12:7) This is the most frequent cleft sentence pattern. It consists of two units: a twomember, deloculive nominal sentence with endophoric 266 n e (nai ne . TeicnicTic r e , n i m N-upHpe n ej plus a relative clause containing a resump tive morph (eT®-2ATN-Te2»H. ENT-AC-NA^M-eic. eTe-Mepe-necj.eicjuT nAiAeye MMo-q). Nominal NAi predicate
<------ >
Sentence
Relative Clause
N eendophoric subject
grammatical union
-e r
®-2ATN-Te2iH
converter
clause elements
focal point
focalizatioii signal
topic elem
The morph n e /T e /n e unites with the relative converter to form a bound group, usually eliding with the initial e of the converter (nai A e n e r - = naTAe N e - e r - ) . Focal point: any entity term Topic element: any relative clause, either affirmative or negative, except the
relative of a nominal sentence; contains resumptive morph. (Attested are durative with def. or non-def. subject, past tense, aorist, optative negative, oYNTe-/(M)MNTe-, and the preterit conversion.) Nexus morph: endophoric 266 ne/re/N e or n(e)/T(e)/N(e) agreeing in nuni-
ber/(gender) with the focal point, “ It is . . . endophoric 370
or invariable n e or n(e).
PATTERNS C ONTAI NI NG
A RELATIVE CLAUSE
Negation o f cleft sentence nexus: the indispensable signal o f negation is enclitic an, which occurs before ne. If negative n - is present it is prefixed to the focal point. E.g. n -a n o k . an n ercj-N A -u p on -T (i.e. n e - e r q - ) e p o - q Mark 9:37 “ It is not Me that he will receive.” 3iN. w h ich ten d s to co m e early in th e sentence, c a n o c c u r in th e m idst o f the elem en ts th at m a k e u p th e fo cal p o in t; M - n - e i ^ -BHK j -n c ? o v n g - r x a ^ n p o M - n p c u M e n e r® c i u i u q M -n p c u M e M att 15:11 “ It is n ot vhaf goes into the mouth of a person th at defiles th e p e rso n .”
Elision: Final e of ne(/Te/N e) usually elides with initial e o f the relative con verter (thus T6NT for T e -e N T -), so that e is written for e e 24(a). E.g. T e i c n i c T i c T eN T -AC-NA?M-eic. variant o f r e i c n i C T i c T e - e N T - ACNA2 M -eic.
Elided (usual)
Unelided
n e r e - , n e r e p e - , neT= , n e r -
n e - e r e - , n e - e r e p e - , n e-eT= , n e - e r
ne-upA neN T -A -
n e -e -u p A n e -N T -A -o r n e -e N T -A etc.
etc.
Ambiguities: (i) G rap h ically ,
th e elid ed form s ( n e r e - = n e - e r e - etc.) are identical w ith th e articu lated attrib u tiv e clau se ( n l e r e - etc. “ T h e o n e w h o . . . ” 4 1 1 ) . T h u s taken o u t o f co n tex t n o n o e i c n e T M o o N e m m o T P s 2 2 (2 3 ); I m ean s b o th “ It is the Lord w ho sh e p h erd s m e ” (cleft se n ten ce) and “ T h e L ord, w h o sh e p h erd s m e, . . . ” (ap p o sitiv e a ttrib u tiv e), (ii) T h e articu lated attrib u tiv e clause (an en tity term ) is elig ib le to o c c u r as th e fo cal po in t o f a cleft se n ten ce w ith elision, p ro d u cin g an am b ig u o u s se t o f fo rm s such as n e T N c o o y N M M o q n e T N O t c u M M o q (i.e. n l e T N - c o o y N M M O - q n e - e T N atcu M M O - q ) John 3; 11 “ It is wlial we know th at w e sp e ak o f ” ; n e T q o y J ^ t y q n e N T jiq jijiq 2 N -2 H T -C (i.e. n l e T q - o y J ^ t y - q n e - e N T - i . q - 3i 3i - q . . . ) S h L e fo rt 4 2 :2 1 “ It is that which He wanted that H e m a d e in M a ry ’s w o m b ” (i.e. In M a ry ’s w o m b . H e m ad e w h at H e w anted to m ake). F u rth e r ex am p les. Variable n e / r e / N e : M -nccuM 3i jin e T ® -N 3 i-u ;cu n e n e - t y j i K j ; o - q (i.e. n e - e - t y j i K - ) 1 C o r 1 5:37 “ It is n o t the future body th at y o u s o w ” ; Tc n e - N T - 3 i q - T 3 i A 6 o - r John 5 :1 5 “ It is Jesus w ho h ealed m e ” ; o y M J iT o y N - 2 o q T e T ® -2 3 i- N e y c n o T o y R om 3 :1 3 “The venom of asps is u n d er their lip s ” ; n t o c o n T eK K A H C iJi T e r o y - t y j i a t e e p o - c a c e - n a t o e i c 2 N -T e c M H T e S hC hass 1 4 7 :3 5 -4 0 “ M o reo ver, it is she— the church— about w hom it is said. T h e L o rd is in her m id st” ; T o y n i c r i c T e - N T - j i c - N 3 i 2 M - e M ark 5 :3 4 “Yourfaith has m a d e y o u w ell (It is your faith th at h as sa v ed y o u )” ; n t c u t n r jip N e r e p e - n t y j i j t e atcu m m o - c e p u ) - T N S h lll 4 8 :1 8 - 1 9 “ F o r it is you ag ain st w h o m the sa y in g is d ire c te d ” ; o y N -K 3 iT H ro p i3 i n e r e T N - l N e M M O -q e 2 o y N e - n e T p c u M e Jo h n 1 8:29 “ ly/ior ac c u sation d o you bring ag ain st th is M a n ? ” ; e ie - N i M n e r e - y N - ® 6 o M M M O -q e-® cuN 2 M att 1 9 :25 “ T h en who can liv e ? ” ; n im n e r e - N e q (o p tativ e n eg.) - p - ® 2 0 T e 2 h t - k n o t e R ev 1 5:4 “Who shall n o t fear Y ou, O L o rd ? ” u<; OE of) (if) (poPtiGfi K upie; rjip neT®-MOTN M att 9 :5 “ F or, which is e a s ie r? ” ; z ^ Z NeT®-T3i2M I 2 ^ N K o y l A e N e r® -c o T n M att 2 2 :1 4 “ F o r many are called, b u t/e w are c h o s e n ” ; ij-6 lN 6 c u p N e N T -3 iK -T 3 i3 i-y N31-I M a tt 2 5 :2 0 “ Y ou d eliv ered to m e / i i ’c talents (It isfive talents th at y o u d eliv ered to m e )” ; n jii N e r q - o t c u t J M o - o y N 6 i - n t y H p e M - n N o y r e Rev
371
CLEFT
SENTENCE
2 :1 8 “ It is the following things th at th e Son o f G o d s a y s " ; oyx g b o a n 2 h t - t h y t n neT®-NA-nAf>AjLiAOY m m o -i M att 2 6 :2 1 “One of you w ill betray m e ” ; N - o y o N NiM AN n e n t - a y - e ' e b o a 2 N -K H M E 2 ITN-MCUYCHC H e b 3 :1 6 “ W as it not all w ho cam e o u t o f E g y p t under the lead ersh ip o f M o s e s ? ” ; e V e - e u ; a ) n e o y n N A h O Y A rre A o c n e - e N T - A q - u ; A J t e NM M A-q A cts 2 3 :9 “ W h at if a spirit or an angel sp o k e to h im ? " ; N -® ci.p5 a n 2 i- ® c N o q n e N T - i .q - ( 3 e A n - n A i n a - k g b o a M att 1 6 :17 “Flesh and blood has n ot revealed th is to you (It is n o t flesh and b lood thal has rev ealed this to y o u ) ” ; n t o k n e T K - J tc u m m o - c John 18:37 “You sa y ” (textual var. NTOK n e T * -jtc u M M o -c ); e p ty A N - n - e T ® - ty c u J te J t p o N - o y c o n N - o y i u T o y KAOM N - o y c u T n e - t y A q - J t i T - q (co llated ) S hA m el I 3 9 2 :1 4 -1 5 “ If a w restler is victo rio u s in o n e b o u t, it is a single a w n th a t he w in s”
Invariable n e : t 6 o m N T e - n - e T ^ - J t o c e neT ® -N A -p-® 2 X iB e c e p o - * L u k e 1:35 “ It Is the power of the Most High th a t w ill o v ershadow y o u ” ; n t o c t a p r r e - e N e c - M O O N G N - N e c o o y M-necituT G en 2 9 :6 “ F or it w as she w h o w as ten d in g the sheep o f h er fa th e r” ; n t c u t n t a p a n n e i^ -c u A j^ e (w ith tex tu al var. NeT®-q;AJte) M ark 13:11 “ F o r it is not you w h o s p e a k ” ; a n o n a n n e N T - A N - M e p e - n N o y T e I AAAA N T oq n e N T - A q - M e p i T - N I John 4 :1 0 “ II is not we w h o loved G o d ; rath er, it is He w h o loved u s ”
Conversions: (i) relative ( e r e - ) ; (ii) circumstantial ( e - ) ; (Hi) preterit (w e-). Double conversion: (iv) circumstantial o f preterit ( e - N e - ) . E x am p les; (i) t a a e i o a KoyM e r e - n A V n e - u ; A y - o y A 2 M - e q a t e - T u ; e e p e u ;h m . . . M ark 5:41 “ T a lith a cum , w hich m ean s (w h ich is translated as the following). L ittle girl, . . . N e e o n e r e - A M N T e neT ® -N A -K A H poN O M ei n - n e t ^ - n a - m o y 2 P ^ ' 2 N -N ey N O B G S h A m el 1 232:12-13 “ Ju st as it is hell that w ill inherit those w ho die in th eir sin s” ; t c o < J ji a M - n N o y r e . . . t a i e r e p e - T A i K A i o c y N H NHy e b o a N 2 H T -c Aycu o y e o o y M N -oyM N T -pM M A O NeT®-2ioyNAM Aycu 2 '2 B o y p m m o - c Shill 14:3-6 “ G o d ’s w isdom . . . from w h ich ju stic e pro ceed s and w hich is su ch tliat it is glory and wealth that are at h e r right and le f t" ; (ii) Ay-BCUK o n e - r e q x A p i c t e t® P - 2 MME M M o - o y S h lll 87:4-5 “ T h ey also receded, for it w as His grace that guided th e m ” ; N N e y - e u ; - J t i - o y 2 N A A y e - ® o y o M - q N T o o T - o y n - n - e t ^ - a i a k o n e i e -N -A N O K AN n e N T - A i- T A A - q N A -y Shiv 113:16-18 “ T h ey shall n ot be ab le to receive anything to e a t from the serv ers, w ith o u t it being me w h o h as given it to th e m ” ; M n p -p -® u ;n H p e M -n T M g o . . . 21UC e-y2C U B N - B p p e neT® -TA 2o M M cu-TiJ I Pet 4:12 “ D o not be su rp rised at the b u rn in g . . . as th o u g h it w ere something new th at w ere h ap p en in g to y o u ” ; (Hi) n e - o a i t a p n eT ® -N A -n A p A A iA o y M M o -q John 6:71 (tex tual v ar.)“ F o r he w as g oing lo b etray H im ” ; 2 ^t®H M n A T o y -(i.e . e - M O A T o y - ) C N T - T n e M N-HKA2 N e - o y n e r ® - t y o o n S h O rig 814 (O rlandi 60:40-41) “What ex isted b efo re h eaven and earth w ere c r e a te d ? ” ; (iv) e - N e - o y J t i n 6 o n c h o y2C ub e q - 2 o o y n e N T - A q - u ; c u n e cu nV o y aaV N e V -N A -A N e x e n e m m c u - tn e y A o r cu c A cts 18:14 “ I f it w ere a matter of wrongdoing or vicious crime that had o ccu rred , 1 should have reason to b e a r w ith you, O J e w s ” ; h e - N e - o y 'f y x H a n n - Z c u o n te t ® N2 H T -O Y N e y - N A - c u u ; e b o a a n n e J t e - . . . S h lll 220:7-8 “ S o, if it w ere not a living soul that resid ed w ithin them , th ey w o u ld n ot cry o ut sa y in g . . . ”
372
P A T T E R N S C O N T A IN IN G
A R E L A T IV E C L A U S E
465 Pattern la (existential n e and relative clause) Itidef. Entity Term + n e - / T e - / N e - + Relative Clause (containing a resumptive morph) o \ p c o M e N - p M M i io n e N T - i i q - T c o 6 e N - c ^ M A N - e A .o o A .e
“There once
was a rich man who planted a vineyard” (M att 2 1 :33) In form this subpattem is a cleft sentence (Pattern 1), but its information struc ture is like the existential sentence predicatively expanded by a circumstantial clause 480: here n e expresses existence and indication like o y N -, there islwas. Like Pattern 3a below 471, this subpattem often is a narrative formula at the beginning of a parable, tale, etc., introducing a new character into the story (English equivalent. Once upon a time there was a . . . who . . . ; There once was a . . . who . . . ). For other expressions o f existence and predicative expansion, cf. 471, 482. Focal point: indefinite article phrases and pronouns Topic element: relative clause o f present, past, and preterit; contains resum p tive m orph Nexus morph: n e - / T e - / N e Negation o f cleft sentence nexus: none? Conversions: none? F u rth e r ex am p les: o y p iu M e n e 'r e - o Y N T - q - u ; H p e CNAy l-uke 1 5 :11 “ T here o nce w as a m an w h o had tw o s o n s " ; o y p iu M e n e - N e - y N T A - q MMAy N - t y H p e CNAy M att 2 1 :2 8 “ T h ere once w as a m an w ho had tw o so n s” ; o y p c u M e p -p M M jio n e - N T A - T e q x c u p A o y c u c u A e L uke 1 2 :1 6 “ T h ere o n c e w as a rich m an w hose land bro u g h t fo rth p le n tifu lly ” ; pcuM e cN A y N eN T -3iy-B C U K e - n e p n e e-® u;A H A L uke 1 8 :1 0 “ T h e re o n ce w ere tw o m e n w ho w ent u p into the tem p le to p ra y ” ; K eyA n e r i c - t y j i J i T M M o -q L u k e 18:22 “ T h ere is o n e th in g that yo u still la c k " ; 2 eN K 0 0 y e N E N T - A y - J t o - o y E 2 P ^ I e - N c y o N T e M a r k 4 :1 8 “ T h e re w ere oth ers that w ere sow n am o n g th o m s ” ; e r i K e - K o y l N - o y o V ty n e - f - - t y o o n n m m h - t n Jo h n 7 :3 3 "T h e re is a little w h ile longer that I sh a ll be w ith y o u " (no re su m p tiv e m o rp h after a focal p o in t e x p ressin g tim e ‘in w h ic h ’ 407); 2 e N c o n c o n N e r o y - T A M io M M o - o y S h Y oung N o.8 c k a : 3 6 - 3 8 “ T here are v ario u s tim es 62(d) w hen th ey are p re p a re d ”
466 Pattern l a at the beginning o f epistles. Salutation formulas (based on the verb ‘w rite’) at the beginning o f literary epistles can have the form o f (per haps) Pattern la, in which the function o f n e is more indicating (‘here is . . . ’) 476, like e ic , than existential or focalizing. E x a m p le s: c i N o y e i o c n ie A A X ic T o c neT®-c2AV (i.e. n e - e r ® - ) M -neqM epiT n e ic u T ii-e e o < J ) iA e c T A T O c A ycu m - m a k a p ic u t a t o c A n A - T i M o e e o c nApxl e n i c K o n o c I ^ M - n J t o e i c xAipe S hM un 9 5 :6 - 1 3 “ T he m ost hum ble S h en o u te, to h is d ear fa th e r A rch b ishop A p a T im o th y beloved by G o d and m o st b lessed ; g reetin g s in
373
CLI;FT
the Lord";
SENTIiNri-
Shlll 21:6 “ Shenoule, lo Tahom"; b h c a M A e o A i o c Besa, Frag. 28 (Kuhn 91:7) “The most humble Besa, to his beloved brother Matthew” t y e N o y T e n e r^ -c g A i N -T A g to M
n ieA A X ic T o c ner^-cgA T M -n e tjM e p iT
n - c o n
467 Extension o f Pattern I has the form of nominal sentence Pattern 12 (284); e.g. ic AN n e -N e q -B A n T i^ e I a a a a NeqMAeHTHc Ne “ It was not Jesus who baptized; rather, it was Ins disciples who were doing so (i.e. N e - e N ey-B A nT ixe)” (John 4:2) where NsqMASHTHC n s represents NsqMASHTHc N e -e -N e y -B A n T ix e . For further examples, cf. 284. 468 P a tte rn 2 (relative clause w ithout n e ) Personal Independent
+
e r ^ -(o r e u r - x s )
focal point
NTOK. eN T-AK-TAOYo-r “Tlioii has sent Me (It is You who have sent M e)” (John 17:21) NTOK. eT®-jcoi M M o-c “ It is you who say it” (Matt 27:11) This pattern does not contain n e /re /N e . Focal point and topic element are not bound to one another, i.e. they can be interrupted by another, autonomous ele ment 28 (n to k . ta p eT®-cooYN ShAmel I 104:11-12 “ For, it is you who know ” ). Focal point: only personal independents (jlnok. etc.); contains resumptive morph Topic element: relative clause, only er®- and 6 nt - a= Nexus morph: none Pattern recognition: since personal independents are not eligible to be the antecedent o f a relative clause, any grammatical union of Personal Independent e.g.
ANOK.
er®- or
a n o k
+ s n t
Relative Converter -
unambiguously signals this pattern. Negation o f Cleft Sentence Nexus: the indispensable signal o f negation is enclitic an , w hich occurs before the relative converter. Conversions: none Further examples. AjJi/v/iom’e: anok eT*-NA-KATHropi mmu ) - tn NNAgpPi-nitOT John 5:45 “ It is / who shall accusc you to the Father” ; ntok far eT*-eiMe e-n A N o 6 N e6 Ps 68(69); 19 “ For Thou knowest my reproach (It is Y«u who know my 374
PATTIiRNS r O N T A I N I N G
A CIRCUMSTANTIAL
CLAUSE
reproach)"; n t o o y e T ® - p u ) u ; e ShIV 98:24 "It is they who are responsible” : n t o k eT®-NA-KOT-K Nr-TANgo-N ShIV 74:25. cf. Ps 84(85);6 “ It is You who will turn and revive us” ; NTOt) er^-N A -N A gM -er e -T 6 iJ t M-niAAA0 m m o - c J t e - K e q T o o y n - g b o t n g NTG-nu>2 C ^1 John 4:35 “ Is it not you yourselves who say. There are yet four months, then comes the harvest?”
PATTERNS FORMED W I T H
ne
AND A C I R C UM S T AN T I A L CLAUSE
469 Patterns 3 and 3a are minor patterns, which occur more rarely. The topic ele ment (or in Pattern 3a, predicative expansion) is a circumstantial clause Basic: q-ANAxcjupei
“He lives as an anchorite alone”
Cleft: Ne-NToq MAyAA-q n e etj-ANAXcupei “ It was he alone who lived as
an anchorite” (ApophPatr 181 [Chame 43:21-22]: fuller citation below 470) containing a resumptive morph 404, which agrees with the focal point in number/(gender) (ntocj . . . e g - ANAxcupei). 470 Pattern 3 (endophoric n e and circumstantial clause) Personal Independent _ Interrogative Specifier
+
,
,
ne/Te/Ne
focal point
+
Circumstantial Clause containing a resumptive morph
NG-NToq MAyAA-q n e eq-ANAXcupei ^M-nMA eT®-MMAy “ It was he alone who was living as an anchorite in that place” (ApophPatr 181 [Chaine 43:21-22]; fuller citation below) This pattern consists of two units: a two-member, delocutive nominal sentence with endophoric 266 n e (NToq MAyAA-q ne) plus a circumstantial clause (eq-ANAxcupei). Focal point and topic element are not bound to one anoth er, i.e. they can be interrupted by another, autonomous element. Focal point: restricted to personal independents and interrogative specifiers Topic element: circumstantial clause, either affirmative or negative; contains
resumptive morph Nexus morph: endophoric 266 ne/re/Ne, agreeing in number/(gender) with
the focal point, “It is . . . ” (and invariable ne?) Negation o f cleft sentence nexus: ? Examples:
n im
a g
g b o a
N2H T -T H y T N
M M o -q G -^ o y G g -o y M A g G G JtN -T G q ty iH
nc e q -q i- ® p o o y q ; 6-oyN -® (3oM Matt 6:27 “ And which of you is it who. 375
CLl-l' I
SKNTKNCl;
b y being an x io u s, can add one c u b it to ih eir s ta tu r e ? ” ; e
(n e .e - M n e T N- )
Matt 2 5 : 4 5
“ A s you d id it n ot to one o f these little o n es, you d id not do it to M e "
Conversions. The circumstantial preterit (a double conversion) is attested:
A-AnA-MAKApioc oytuz 2 N -tn o 6 N-epHMoc e - N e - N T o q n e eq-jiNa^xcjupei 2 M-nMA st^-m m ay ApophPatr 181 (Chame 43:21-22) “ Apa Macarius lived in the Great Desert, and ( e - circumstantial) it was he alone who was living as an anchorite in that place.” Other conversions: ? 471
P a tte rn 3a (existential n e an d circu m stan tial clause) Indef. Article Phrase + n e /te/N e + Circumstantial Clause (containing a resumptive morph) oYPtJUMe n e eq-iccjuT N -o Y T o n o c e - r e q x p iA “ There once was a cer tain man who was constructing a place for his own use” (Shlll 27:9, cited more fully below) In form this subpattern is a cleft sentence (Pattern 3), but its information struc ture is like the existential sentence predicatively expanded by a circumstantial clause 480: here n e expresses existence and indication like o y N - there is/was. Like Pattern 1a above 465, this subpattern oflen is a narrative formula at the beginning o f a parable, tale, etc., introducing a new character in the story (English equivalent. Once upon a time there was « . . . who . . . ; There once was a . . . who . . . ). F o c a l indefinite article phrases (and pronouns?) Topic element: relative clause o f present and pasi (and preterit?); contains resumptive morph Nexus morph: n e /re /N e Negation o f cleft sentence nexus: the indispensable signal o f negation is enclitic a n , which occurs before n e . If negative n - is present it is prefixed to the focal point. E.g. Ps I8(I9):3, cited below. Conversions: none? E x am p les: - I '- n j i - t j i y o e p c u - T N N - o y n J ip jiA ir M J i I o y p i u M e n e e q - K tU T N - o y T O n o c e - r e q x p i J t S h lll 2 7 : 8 - 9 “ I shall tell y o u a parable. T here o nce w as a m an w ho w as c o n siru ctin g a place fo r h is o w n u se ” ; o y p c u M e n e . . . e - o y N T J i - q MMJiy N - o y u ^ H p e Jiycu u ; e e p e C N T e e -jiq -K C U T N J i- y N - 2 e N H i S h lll 9 6 ; 1 9-20 “ T h ere once w as a m an . . . , w ho h a d a son an d tw o d au g h ters, an d for w hom he had b u ilt h o u s e s ” ; f i - 2 e N 3 i c n e jin N e o y A e N - 2 e fJ o ;3 iJ c e Ne e - N - c e N31-CCUTM 3LN e - n e y 2 p o o y P s I 8 ( I 9 ) :3 “ T h ere are no .speeches o r w o rd s w hose v oices are not h e a rd ”
376
P A TIIiR N S
C O N T A IN IN G
A C IR C U M S T A N T IA L
CLAUSE
TERM IN EXT R AP O S I T I ON
72 (a) E xtraposition o f fo c a l poin t before the cleft sentence pattern. The lexical con tent of the focal point can be expressed as a term in extraposition, that is, a term placed at the front of the cleft sentence pattern (‘extraposited’) E xtraposited Term {s)
C left Sentence Pattern
(.contains nAi/neTMMAY/NToq agreeing with the extraposition) Anticipation I Resumption Topic under discussion I Comment nAicjuT eN T-Aq-TA oyo-T I NToq ne-FiT -A q--|' na-T N - 0 YeNT0 A.H “As for my Father who sent Me, I it is H e who has given Me a com mandment” (John 12:49) and thus set off as a topic of thought. The extraposition is represented within the cleft sentence pattern by an anaphoric demonstrative pronoun (nAi. neTMMAY) or 3rd personal independent (NToq), which refers to the extra posited term and agrees with it in (person)/number/(gender). Thus in the example above, the semantically important term n^YcjuT is extraposited, and within the pattern it is represented by the fonnal focal point NToq, which agrees with if in number and gender. Further examples; n - e r e p e - n p c u M e r j i p N 3 i - J t o - q I njiT o n n e T q - N 3 i - o 2 c - q Gal 6:7 “Whatever a person sows, that will they also reap” ; M - n - e - f — o y j i t y - q I n^'f ne-f—e ip e JiMO-q Rom 7;20 “ I do what I do not want (Not what I want, it is that very tiling that I do)"; n N o y r e n t y n p e N - o y t O T n - e T ® - t y o o n j N - K O y N - q M -n e q ^ tu T I n e - N T - 3 t q - q ; j k j ; e e p o - q John 1:18 “As for God. the only Son. who is in the bosom o f His Father— it is He who has made Him known” : Tee3iA3icc3i n o 6 I NT o c T e T ® - N 3 i - n c u p i N 3 i - y C B O A Josh 15:47 “ As for the great sea— it is this ( n t o c ) that will divide them” ; N - e N T - 3i y - M o y M K - n e x c I N T O o y N e T ® - N 3 i - c u N 2 O N M N - n e x c Shiv 4:18-19 “ As for those who have died with Christ— it is they who will also live wiih Christ” ; jin o k N -e N T -i.r-c o T M -o Y N T O O T - q I N Ji'f N e - l ' - o t c u M M O - O y e - n K o c M o c John 8:26 “ For my part, as for the things that I have heard from Him— il is these thal I declare to the world”
Similarly, a single element (entity term) belonging to the focal point can pre cede the cleft sentence pattern in extraposition. NTOK. Ae neNeitjuT I rejcnpoNoiA TeT®-p-**2 MMe mmo-n “ But as for You, O Father— it is Your providence that governs us” (Wis I4;3) The extniposiled element is represented within the cleft sentence pattern by s cross-refeiTing personal dependent, which agrees with the extraposition in nuniber/(gender). Thus in the example above, the personal element - e ic - (of reicnpoNoiA) agrees with ntok.. 377
CLUI T SHNTI I NCK
(h) Extraposition, before the cleft sentence, o f an element belonging to the topic element. A personal morph within the topic element can be preceded by a lerm in extraposition before the cleft sentence pattern. Extraposited Term I Cleft Sentence Pattern eniAH n To y a a 'i I zeNM^eiN NeTo y - J^iTi MMOoy “ For, as for the Jews— it is signs that they dem and” (1 Cor 1:22) Thus in the example above, - o y - agrees with n To y a a i . Further examples: Nei2AeeY I O YoyNoy N -oycuT T £N T -A y-A A -c Matt 20:12 “ As for these last, it is only one hour thal they spent” ; n a V a e T H p o y 1 n i n N A N -oycuT neT®-eNepn m m o - o v I Cor 12:11 “ All these are inspired by one and the same Spirit (As for all these, it is one and the same Spirit that inspires them); n a T t a p T H p - o y I N2 eoNoc M - n K o c M o c N e T ® - u ; i N e nccu— o v Luke 12:30 “For, as for all these things, it is the nations of the world that seek them” ; a n o n I o y N o y r e N - o y c u T n e T ® -ty o o n n a - n I Cor 8:6 “As for us, there is a single God who exists for us": n e q N A M N - r e q M e I n i m n e T ® - N A - t y i N e n c c u - o y Ps 60(6I);7 “A s for his mercy and truth, n-ho will seek them out?”
a d v e r b ia l
p r e m o d if ie r
and
po stpo ned
s u b je c t
473 An adverbial prem odifier (or adverbial clause 490) can precede the topic ele ment, laying down a circumstance or relationship o f time, place, manner, degree, or attitude in which the topic element is being asserted. It occurs either before the entire cleft sentence pattern nnJl 2 P n - n a i I nim neT®-MnupjL 2 Cor 2:16 “ W hen it comes to these
things,'vv/io is sufficient?” K.ATA-ee e N T -A -n A ^ cju T
t c a b o - ^ i I n a T Ne-f-jctju M M o -o y “ As my Father taught me, it is this that I say” (John 8:28)
or before the topic element but located within the cleft sentence pattern NIM
A e
N 2H T -T H oyT N
Eg - q i - ^poQ y (^
n eT e-o y N -® 6 o M
M M o-q
e-® ye 2 -oyMA.2e e - T e q q ;iH Luke 12:25 “ W hich of you, by being anx ious, can add a cubit to his stature?” Postponed subject. Likewise, a 3d person subject (q, c, c e /y ) in the topic ele ment can be expanded by an entity term later in the clause, mediated by n 6 i87(b). E.g. NAi Nerq-JCO) M M O - o y N6i-nq;Hpe M - n N o y r e Rev 2:18 “ II is the following things that the Son of God says.”
378
CLl-FT
SENTENCE
CLEFT SENTENCE VERSUS NO MINAL SENTENCE 474 A cleft sentence such as (a) r^p a n neNT-^q-BCJUK ezpAi e-MnHye (i.e. ne-SNT-Aq-, cleft sentence) “ For, it was not David who ascended into the heavens” (Acts 2:34, Chester Beatty manuscript ed. Thompson) differs significantly in syntax and meaning from a nominal sentence such as (b) N-AJiYeiA TAP AN ne n-eNT-Aq-BtJUK eep^Y e-MnHye (nominal sentence) “ For, David is not the one who ascended into the heavens” and “ For, the one who ascended into the heavens is not David” (Acts 2:34, British Library MS Or.7594 ed. Budge) Both (a) and (b) are special (marked) presentations of the information M n e -A A y e iA bcjuk e 2 pAi e - M n H y e “ David did not ascend into the heav ens.” The cleft sentence (a) is a focalizing presentation, while the nominal sentence (b) is not focalizing. The distinguishing features o f (a) and (b) are given in table 26. TABLE 26
D istinguishing Features of Examples (a) and (b) Cleft Sentence
(a)
N
ominal
S e n t e n c e (bj
Minimum number of Two Three bound groups Focalization Present Absent Articuhiled :ittribuNone Third component of the pattern tive 4 1 1 Nexus arrangement Focal Point + Topic Subject + Predicate or Predicate + Subject Location of focal point/predicate Known (first item) Ambiguous: depends on interpretation Reference status of n e Endophoric Ambiguous: anaphoric or cataphoric Correlate of resumptive morph AAyeiA n-(eNT-) Translation It is X who Y X is the one who Y, and The one who Y is X
NEGATIVE RHETORICAL QUESTIONS F O R M U L A T E D AS A CLEFT SENTENCE 475 (a) With negatived cleft sentence nexus a rhetorical question presupposes ‘Y es’ in reply. It is often (optionally) preceded by the initial attitude marker mh ‘pra'y te ir. Examples; mh m-haT an n e r o y - ty iN e Nccu-q e-®MooyT-q John 7:25 “ Is it not this Man whom they seek to kill?” ; mh N-TeqMAAy an Te-AyAy-MoyTe e p o - c 379
CLEI' T SENTENCi ;
Matt 13:55 “ Is it not His mother who is called M ary?” ; mh n - j in o k neN T -3ii-ceT n-T H Y T N M -nM NT-CNOoyc John 6:70 (Morgan M569) “ Is it not I who chose you to be the Twelve?” ; N -o y o N n i m jin g b o a gM-KHMe giTN-MiuYcHC Heb 3:16 “Was it not all who came out of Egypt under the leadership of M oses?” ; mh n tc u t n jin eT*-Jtcu m m o -c J t e - . . . John 4:35 “ Is it not you yourselves who say . . . ?”
(b) With negatived topic element (and affirmative cleft sentence nexus) a rhetori cal question often presupposes a negative reply: ‘Nothing’, ‘No one’, etc. Examples: o y r J i p n e r e p e - n j c o e i c n N o y T e J t i - ® e o o y ShChass 115:9-12 “ For wtuH is there in which the Lord God is not glorified?"; n i m r i . p iJ-y jH p e n € T e - M e p e - n € q € i c u T n j i i A c y c M M O - q Heb 12:7 “For what son is there whom his father does not discipline?”
580
I 21
Sentences of Existence and Indication Formed with o y N — and e i c The Nature o f the Coptic Existential-Indicating Sentence The Functions of o y N - and e i c - 476 Syntactic Comparison o f oyN - and e i c Sentence Patterns
476
477
478
Pattern I oyn-® m a and e ic -n e T N p p o 478 Predicative Expansions o f the Basic Pattern 479 Pattern 2 oY N -oyM e N T e - n e ^ I n 2 ht-® 479 Pattern 3 I e-NAAA-q e - n e q j c o e i c 480 Multiple expansions o f Pattern 1 481 Pattern 3a z^Z m en I e - A N - jc o o - y 482 Pattern4 M N -oy^ i J - o y c u T I jce-Mrrq-cOMC 483 P attern s o y F i —2o iN e m sn f N - N e q e c o o y I c e - N A - < y c o n e TeN oy ^ -e s N C M O T 484 e i c - Indicating Tim e or Measure 485
T H E N A T U R E O F T H E C O P T IC E X IS T E N T IA L IN D IC A T IN G S E N T E N C E T HE F U N C T I O N S OF o y N -
AND e i C -
476 The sentence patterns described in this chapter (except Pattern 3a) begin with the prenomtnal 30 morphs o y N - ‘there is’ (negative m n - ) or e i c - ‘behold’, completed by an entity term. oyN-: vars. o y n - . y n - , MN-: vars. mmn-, m m n -
y n
-
After converters, o y N - or o y n - is often written y S - or y N ten M M N - (without its first superlinear stroke): e.g. e - y N (m ore rarely ere-yN-). etc.
-, -,
and
m m n
-
is often writ
N e -y fi-, ere -M M N -
oyN -^A rreA .oc “ Angels exist" (Acts 23:8) o y N - o y o y N o y NHy “ An hour is com ing” (John 4:21) e c j-jc o c e e - n e c jjc c e ic “There is no servant who is above his m aster” (Matt 10:24) 381
EXISTENCE
AND
INDICATION;
o y N -
ANI J
e i C -
e ic -o y p iU M e eq -M € 2 n - ccoba^ “ L o, there was a man full o f leprosy” (Luke 5:12) MN-oyJ^ N -oytU T Jce-M rrq-coM c “ There is not a single one that did not sink” (ShW ess9 87c;;30-32) o Y N - 2 o iN e M€N ^ - N e q e c o o Y c e - N A - t y c o n e T eN oy ^ ~ 2 e N C M O T e - N ^ - o y A u p - o y an N2 H T -o y “There are some o f his sheep that will then assume characteristics that he does not like in them ” (ShChass 204:30-35) Pattern 3a (without oy F i- or e i c - ) :
2^2 MSN N-upAJce e -A N -j(.o o -y “There are many words that we have spoken” (ShLefort 42:25) e i c - and o y F i- express a spectrum o f meaning, which ranges from pure ‘indi cation’ (deixis, demonstration, pointing, here is, anil in traditional narrative style lo) to ‘existence’ as such accompanied by mild indication ( ■ . . e.xists, there once was . . . , . . . is here). Generally, e i c - expresses indication and o y F i- expresses existence. oyN -/M N - can form questions as well as affirma tions, while e i c - cannot. N e - y N - 2 eN upooc A e 2 N-TexcopA eT®-MMAy “ And in that region there were shepherds" (Luke 2:8) e ic - n e 3 ( c n e 2 i^ B M -n N o y re “ Behold the Christ, the Lamb o f G od” (John 1:36) o y n e nA'f I e ic -o y c B c o i - e p p e “ W hat is this? A new teaching! ” (Mark 1:27) o y N - 2eN jiN eynA T oc I MApoy-CMMe NA-y “There are proconsuls; let them appeal to them !” (Acts 19:38) eic-nA -T upeA .eeT “Behold, the bridegroom !” (Matt 25:6) N e-yN -2eN oyeY eN iN Ae eBOA. 2N-N-eT®-BHK. e2PAT e - ^ o y c o ^ T M -nujji “ Now among those who went up to worship at the feast there were some G reeks” (John 12:20) MN-®NoyTe NCA-oyjL “There is no God but one” (1 Cor 8:4) eiC2HHTe Ae eic-oypcoM e e-opA y-M oyre e p o -q Jce-XAicxAioc
“And there was a man named Zacchaeus” (Luke 19:2) eupjce-oyN-®ccoMA M-'}'yxiK.oN oyN-®ccoMA on M-nNeyM^TiKoN
“ If there is a physical body, there is also a spiritual body" (1 Cor 15:44) MN-®jv.iK.Aioc A.AAy I MN-oyA “ There is not any righteous person, there is not one such” (Rom 3:10) For e i c - prefixed lo enlily terms of time or measure, c{. 485.
In function, o y t i - and e i c - bring an entity term to the attention of the read er/listener and make it an actual part o f current discourse as an ‘e.xistenf or
382
NATURI-;
o r
Till;
I; X I S T n N T I A L - I N D I C A T I V E S K N T li N C b
‘in d ica ted ’ item. (Similar function can be exercised e.g. by French v o id , voila. Italian ecco.) o y N - / e \ c - is an essential element in one o f the durative sen tence patterns 322, where its occurrence is conditioned by the non-definite sta tus o f the subject; cf. 479. e i c - niean.s 'here is . . . ’ only in the sense of indication; thus it can co-occur with the lexically explicit expression of being-in-a-place, such as rineTMJi ‘right here, in this place’; e.g. e ic - n e 5 (c MneiMA h M -njil Matt 24:23 “Christ is right here! Or, Over there!” ; e i c - n r J i o c mm^y MN-TecMOyNe Shlll 45:3 “Look, there is a peacock over there! and a goose!” e i c - can also be preceded by the indicating interjection eicgH H Te ‘Lo!, Behold!, Listen! ’ 245. At the other end of the semantic spectrum, the fact of existing i.s lexically expressed by the verb ty cu n e, ty o o n ‘exist’. Existence (‘ihere is/was . . . ’) is also expressed by existential ne/Te/Ne in the nominal sentence 266 and cleft sentence 462.
S Y N T A C T IC C O M PA R ISO N OF o y N - A N D e l C -
477 o y N - and e i c - differ in their patterning and syntactic compatibilities, as table 27 displays. Negation, (a) o y n -: substitution o f (ni)m n - 250 in place o f o y n -; (b) e i c - : none TABLE 27 Syntactic D N
ugatable
D
ifferences b e t w e e n
efinite
Subjects
E xcluded
o y n
-
a n d
31NOK Eligible To B e Subject
eic-
Time
C onvertible R
eference
E xpressed
(a) o y n (h) e i c -
MN-
x'
(In Pattern 3?)
X
X
In Pattern 1
'See below. Si/hjects
Subjects, (a) After o y N -; non-def. article phrases and pronouns; oyHp, and cardinal numbers without article; the articulated attributive clause n -er® - 411 “The one who. W hoever” ; and (only in Pattern 1) e e n - (+ ^infinitive) “ A way o f (doing so-and-so)” ; persona! forms excluded, (b) After e i c - : entity terms (though Pattern 3 is perhaps limited to non-def. sub jects); the personal independent occurs (perhaps limited to Pattern I ; 1st sing, is attested). Conversions, (a) o y N -: relative ( e r e - ) , circumstantial ( e - ) , preterit ( n e - ) , and focalizing ( e - ) ; (h) e i c - ; none Tense, (a) o y n - : basic patterns express present tense, and contrast only with preterit past N e - y f i- ; (b) e i c - is tenseless. For the overall Coptic tense sys tem, cf. chapter 25. 383
EXISTENCE
AND
INDICATION:
O y N -
AND
e i C -
SEN TEN CE PA TTERN S
478 P attern 1 ( oyn - / mn - and e i c - ) : The basic pattern (a) OYN-/MN- + Existentllndicated Entity (b) e i c - + IndicatedlExistent Entity (a) AYiu ON oyN-®MA “ And still there is room ” (Luke 14:22) (b) e ic -n e T N p p o “ Here is your king” (John 19:14) In traditional narrative, a new character is often introduced (or given renewed vividness) by e i c - lo. behold (l5oi> etc.), followed iinmediately by a narrative tense. e i c - 2 eNMAroc I A y -e i eeo A n -u jji “ Behold, wise men came from the east” l5oii ndyoi dno dvaxoXtbv jtapeyevovTo (Matt 2:1) Jv.e e i c - n A r r e A O c M - n J C O e i c I A q - o y t u N ^ g b o a 2 ^ o y p A co y e-iiucH
NTepoy-BUJK
The existent or indicated item is often expanded by a modifying phrase or clause. oyN-®ctuMA ON M-nNeyMATiKON “There is also a spiritual body” (1 Cor 15:44) eic-oyM NT-JCAJce e - n N o y r e namg “ Here, truly, is hostility against G o d !” (Shlll 75:7) Bui expansion by an attributive circumstantial clause is described under Pattern 3 (480), e.g. MN-^eneAA I e-NAAA-q e - n e q j c o e i c John 15:20 “ There is no servant who is greater than his master.” Further examples: foj M N -^jtrreAoc Acts 23:8 “Angels do not exist” ; o y N - e e M -^M p-oycitU) I o y N -e e Z N -oyM iuje Sir 27:21 “There is a way of (N -) binding up a wound, and there is a way of reconciling in a conflict” ; e c y Jc e -o y N -N -e T ®-6 n - n o 6 2tyu) e i^ -jc o c e ^ - f i c y H p e N-ripiUMe gijcM ShChass 117:32-36 “Even though there are those who are great and high among the sons of men on earth’’; M N -n -eT ^ -e ip e ii-oyM NT-xpHCTOC I M N-oyoN lyiZPiT e - o y i Rom 3:12 = Ps 13(14): 1 “ No one does good, not even one” : o y fJ -g e N n iu p S J..e n-®2 m o t 1 Cor 12:4 “ Now there are varieties of gifts” ; NNitgpM -nNoyTe J..e MMN-A2t2ty N -2tT -6 oM Matt 19:26 “ With God there is no impossible thing” ; MN-®T2tAo 6e egpjti’ g it-^ N o ee Heb 10:18 “ There is no longer any offering for sin” : MN-®ioyj..2tT gi-^geAAHN Gal 3:28 “There is neither Jew nor Greek” ; oycyH pe .. . e - M N - e e N-®cy3iJce NMMjt-tj 1 Sam 17 “A child . . . that there is no way of speaking to” ; e-MN-^NOMOc (circumstantial conversion) Rom 5:13 “ In the absence o f any law” ; e-y N -® 6 oM e-^T peY -nA itN it N -N 2tK ecu)Tn Mark 13:22 “ If it is really possible to ( e - ) lead astray my elect, too” ; rie e 384
I
eTe-oYN-2.2t2 N -N oyT e z i- z ^ e N -Jc o eic 1 Cor 8:5 “ As indeed there are many gods and many lords” ; Ne-YN-OYnpo i-iy 6 o M ritp n e e -® T p e Y -'t-n 2n gboa. z^^-Z^Z 26;9 "For this might have been sold for a large sum "; e-M N -o)6oM e n e e e-^JCiUK EBOA. N -N-eT'*-N3i--t--neY 0Y0i e p o -o Y (focalizing conversion) Heb 10; 1 “ It can never make perfect those who draw near” ; fbjeicg H H T e eic-T2tM2t2tY NitCNHY (textual var. lacks eicgH H Te) Matt 12:49 “ Behold, here are my mother and my broth ers” ; e - n M 2t N-TT2tiBe N T -2tY“ K.^~MU)YCHc N gH T -c e ic-n o Y O M q ex®o y ^ ^ b M N-nT2t
P R E D I C A T I V E E X P A N S I O N S OF THE BASI C PATT E RN (PATTERNS
2 -5 )
479 P attern 2 ( oy n - / mn- and e i c - ) : the basic pattern expanded by a durative predicate B asic P attern I D urative P redicate 305
OYN-OYMe NTe-nexc I n 2 ht-** “Christ’s truth is in me” (2 Cor 11:10) e ic - n o y p p o I nh y Ne-® “ Behold, your king is coming to you” (Matt 21:5) When formed with oyn - / mn- , this is the same as Patterns 3 and 3a of the durative sentence 322, 323. Its main function is to biing a durative predicate into grammatical union (nexus 248) with an entity term (subject), not to express existence or indication. All durative sentences with a non-definite sub ject are introduced by oy n - / mn - and conversely, definite subjects in the durative sentence cannot be introduced by oyn - / mn- . But when formed with e i c - , both def. and non-def. subjects occur, and e i c - has an indicating (deic tic) function. P redicative expansion: any of the four durative predicates 305: infinitive, sta-
tive. situational preposition, njl.Furtlier examples; (o) O Y N -6e j,.e I ku )t e jc u ) -c 1 Cor 3; 10 “ Another is building upon it” ; o y n -ZGN zo oy a g I nhy Zo t ^ n . . . Mark 2:20 “ The days will come, when . . . " ; N 2 tN O Y -c e - N G - O Y N - o Y U J N e N - c i K e I M H p e-ne< |M 2tK2 Luke 1 7:2 “ It would be better for him if a millstone were hung round his neck” ; n - e T e - O Y N - * ' M 2 t 2 t J c e 6 e I m m o - < ) e - ® c u ) T M Mark 7 :1 6 “The person who has 393(a) ears to hear": M N - ^ i t N i t C T i t c i c I N 2 t - c y u ) n e Mark 1 2:18 "No resurrection is going to happen” ; (h) e i c - n i . i I kh e - Y - g e m n - o y to j o y n n - z a ? gM-niHA. Luke 2 :3 4 “ Beliold, this one is set for the fall and rising of many in Israel” ; eic-x ecK H N H Ji-n N o Y T e I MN-Npu)Me Rev 2 1 :3 “ Behold, the dwelling of God is with humanity” : e i c - T n i t p e e N o c I N2t-U)U) Matt 1:23 “ Behold, the virgin shall conceive"; 385
EXISTENCE
AND
INDICATION:
o y N -
AND
e i C -
e ic - * 20 Y e - c 0 A.0 MU)N I M -neiM 2t Luke 11:31 “ Something greater than Solomon is here"; eic-* cA eiN I nim THp-<) ShIV 161 ;2-3 “ There are doctors everywhere in the world”
480 Pattern 3 (oyn - / mn- and e ic - ): the basic pattern expanded by a cir cumstantial attributive clause Basic Pattern I Circumstantial Clause (containing a resumptive morph) MN-®?M2AA I e-NAAA-q e - n e q j c o e i c “ There is t\o servat\t who is greater than his m aster” (Joht\ 15:20) Ne-YN-OYpuJM e n e 2 N -eiepoycA A H M I e - n e q p A N n e cyMeiUN “There was a mat\ it\ Jerusalem whose t\ame was Sim eot\” (Luke 2:25) eic^H H Te A e e ic -o y p iw M e I e - ( y A y - M o y re e p o - q Jce-ZAKXAioc “At\d there was a mat\ t\amed Zacchaeus” (Luke 19:2) This pattern oftet\ is a t\arratlve formula at the begit\t\it\g of a parable, tale, etc., introducit\g a t\ew character into the story (equivalent to English Once upon a time there was a . . . who . . . ; There once was a . . . who . . , It has a two fold function: to express existence/indication and to bring a predicate, of any kind, into grammatical union (nexus 248) with the existent/indicated entity term. The basic pattern is (always?) formed with a non-definite entity term (oyBJiciAiKoc, ®2 M2aa). The attributive circumstantial clause 404, 408 con tains a resumptive morph 404, which agrees with the entity tem i of the basic pattern in number/(gender). For other expressions of existence + predicative expansion, cf. 465, 471. For non-expression of the resumptive morph, cf. 404, 405, 406, 407, 426, 427. 488, 489. Further examples: (a) O Y N -goeiN e N -N -eT ^-itgepitT -O Y M -neiM 2t I Njti e - N - c e - N 2t-JC i-*'t'ne M -nM oy Matt 16:28 “ There are some standing here who will not taste death’’; N e-Y ii-O Y B 2tciA i k o c I e p e - n e q c y H p e u;u)N e 2 N-K2t2tpN2toyM John 4:46 “ And at Capernaum, there was an official whose son was ill” ; Ne-YN-OYJt A e eeoA 2 N-Ne<)M2teHTHc I eq-NHJC e-K O Y N -tj n -T c n e x e p e - i c Me mmo-<) John 13:23 “ There was one of His disciples who was lying against the breast o f Jesus, whom Jesus loved” ; OYN~2 eN K e2 BHYe A e e - N 2tcyu)-OY I e - 2t<)-2t2t-Y n 6 i - T c John 21:25 “ But there are many other things that Jesus did” ; OYN-geNciOYP ritp I eeo A NgHT-c N-TeYM2t2tY N Teeige Matt 19:12 “ For there are eunuchs who were bom from their mothers in this condition"; OYN-zoi’Ne I e - c y 2tY~MOYTe ep o -O Y Jce-NOYTe I Cor 8:5 “There are some that are called gods” ; j^y*^ MN-AA.2tY I e-MNT-
THE
SENTENCE
PATTERNS
481 Multiple expansions o f Pattern I. Many expanded patterns contain two (or more >circumstantial clauses and,'or prepositional phrases after the basic pat tern: N e -Y N - 2A? I e y -c o B A ? I ^M -nicpAHA “ Many lepers ey -ciu B A ?) were in Israel” and “ In Israel, there were many (z^Z) who had leprosy (e y -c tu B A e )” (Luke 4:27) Further examples: o Y N - o y c y H p e u ^ h m I M - n e i ’M i I e - Y N - - t - O Y n - o T k n - T « d t N T ooT -tj John 6:9 “ There is a lad here who has five barley loaves” and “ A lad with five barley loaves is here” ; e ic -O Y g T o Ie q -O Y O B ^ Ie p e - o Y n ix e NTOOT-tj M - n - e T * - 2tA . e e p o - t ) Rev 6:2 “And I saw (a vision); and behold, (there was) a white horse with a bow in the grasp of the one riding it” and “There was a white horse, whose rider had a bow In his grasp” ; eic-oY pM M 2to I m h o o y I gN -O Y noA ic I ep e-N p u )M e c o o y n Jce-O Y N T -tj-gitZ N-xpHM2t mmj^y ShIV 25:23-26 “Here today is (a parable of) a rich person in a certain city, whom people know to possess much money” and “In today’s parable, there is a rich person, who is in a certain city and whom people know to possess much money” and “In today’s parable, a rich person is in a certain city, and people know him to possess much money” : Ne-YN-OYPU)Me A e eBOA. 2 N - N e < J ) 2 t p i c 2 t i o c I e - n e < ) p 2 t N n e n i k o a h m o c I e - Y ^ ^ p x i U N T i T o Y A i t T n e John 3:1 “ Now there was a man of the Pharisees named Nicodemus who was a Jewish ruler” and “ Now there was a man o f the Pharisees who was named Nicode mus, a Jewish ruler” and “ Now there was a man of the Pharisees, who was named Nicodemus and who was a Jewish ruler”
482 P attern 3a (formed w ithout o y r i - or e ic - ) Non-definite Entity Term I Circumstantial Clause (containing a resumptive morph) existent entity
22^2 MEN N-(yAJce I e -A N -J C o o -y “There ate many words that we have spoken” (ShLefort 42:25) In this subpattem, the existent entity is introduced without o y r i- or e i c - . The identifying mark of Pattern 3a, and signal of ‘existence’, is the grammatical union o f a non-definite entity term with a following circumstantial clause to form a complete, main-clause sentence. (Except for its main-clause status. Pattern 3a looks like a simple attributive clause construction 404.) The exis tent entity is expressed by indef. article phrases and pronouns, specifier phras es and pronouns. No negation or conversion occurs. Pattern 3a is attested both as a narrative formula in the beginning o f a story (cf. 465, 471), and in the course of exposition. Further examples: 2tY<^ geNKecMOT THp-OY I e-2tY "-’^''’’~OY MM o-o Y Mark 7:4 “ And there are all sorts o f other traditions which they have received for observance” ; O Y M N T - J c i t j c e M N - O Y e i p H N H 1 e Y - c y o o n 2 N - T e i 6 i N - K U ) e B O A . II 2 o e i N e I N 2 t - N e B O A N - N e | « T e e o o Y ShAm^l 1 9 6 : 2 - 5 “There are enmity and peace that co-exisi in this forgiveness; there are some who have forgiven 387
l-XISTHNCt
AND
INDICATION:
o y N -
AND
e i C -
us our evil deeds” ; t j h o y MN-cN2tY I e - 2tY ~ -xno-oY Shill 69:18 “There were fiftytwo (babies) that were bom ” ; oYHp N -T Y noc M -noNHpoN | e-2tY--XOK-OY eBOA. 2 M -nM2t M -n eK p 2tNioN 2 M -n T p eY -ti)U Jn e n -o y m o y -x 6 n - o y u j t 2 N-TK2tKi2t giTN-TecBU) N- N-GT**-?!JCU)-oY ShRyl 70 (34:31-32) “O how many kinds of evil deed there were that got accomplished on Golgotha, as they became one single act of complicity in evil, by instruction of their superiors!” ; o y 2 Ka.o N - 2t N 2t X t U p l T H C
I e - O Y N T 2t - < ) M M 2t Y N - O Y
N IT H C e q - O Y H ? g N - O Y l ' M e
ApophPatr 99 (Chame 22:9-10) “There once was a venerable hermit who had a servant that lived in a village” ; nim eB O ^ n ^ h t - t h y t n eq -q i-® p o o Y u > I e -o Y N -* 6oM MMo-<) e-®0 Ye2 - 0 YM2t2 e eJCN-xegcyiH Matt 6:27 (textual var.) “And which of you is there who by being anxious can add one cubit to their stature?”
483 Pattern 4 ( mn- or interrogative oyN -): the basic pattern expanded by a negative jc e - clause with resumptive morph (a) Basic Pattern ('m n- only) I j c e - Negative Main Clause (containing a resumptive morph): ajfirmation (b) Basic Pattern (o y N - only) I jc e - Negative Main Clause (containing a resumptive morph): rhetorical question (soliciting negative reply) (a) MN-oyA N -o y u jT I Jc.e-M rfq-tuM c “ There is not a single one that did not sink” , i.e. All sank (ShWe.ss9 87o.-30-32) (b) MH o y N -6 e (y A ip e I JC .e-M noy-opjc.-oy “ Pray tell, are there any other sheepfolds that have not been fortified?” , i.e. All have been forti fied (ShAmel II 33:9-10) Pattern 4 has the same two fold function as Pattern 3. Logically, subpattern (ci) is a double negative: There is no X such as does not Y = Every X docs action Y. Subpattem (b) is a rhetorical question that expects a reply o f ‘No (None exists)’: Is there any X such as does not Y 7 = No (none exists), every X does action Y. Thus subpattem s (a) and (h) are logical equivalents. The jc e - clause contains a resumptive morph 404, which agrees with the entity term of the basic pattern in number/(gender). For the forms, possible syntactic positions, and conditioned non-expression of ihe resumptive morph, cf. 404, 405, 406, 407, 426, 427, 488, 489. Further examples; ( a ) MN-A.2t2tY N - p u ) M e g N - N - e T ^ - g i O Y N i t M M - n p p o I JC.e-N-ce-N2tY Shlll 189:11-12 “There is none among those at the right hand of the emperor who do not see” ; nHi men h n h i MN-6e 2 cUB I Jce-N -q-JC H K eeoA. N2 HT-OY THpoY ShBM 196 8 lo.-32-33 “As for the house or houses, in all of them there is nothing else that is not perfect” ; MMN-'*C2tzoY M -nsoA. N -T e rp 2tH I j c e - M n e N - c t U T M ep o -O Y ShP 130’ 15r b:6-9 “Come now. are there other scriptures that we have not heard about?’’; m h o Y N - 6 e a ; 2 t i p e I j c . e - M n o Y - o p j c . - o Y h O Y N - ® p c t u 2 i ~ * ' c o b t I Jce-MnoY-JCACT-OY ShAmel 11 33:9-10 “ Pray tell, are there any other sheepfolds 388
THE
SKNTENCE
PATTERNS
that have not been fortified, or are tliere any pens or walls that have not been erected?"; OY ritp • • • I JCe-geNeBOA. Ne ZM-nKit? T H p -o y Shlll 215;7-10 “ For what kind of things (are there) . . . that are not entirely terrestrial?”
484 P attern 5 (o Y N -/eic- or interrogative mn- ) : the basic pattern expanded by a basic clause with resum ptive morph (a) Basic Pattern foY N - ct‘ e i c - only) I Basic Clause (containing a resumptive morph): affirmation (b) Basic Pattern (^mn- only) I Basic Clause (containing a resumptive morph): rhetorical question (soliciting affirmative reply) (a) oyN-eoiNe mgn ^N-Neqecooy I ce-NA-ujiune reNoy ^-eeNCMOT e - N ^ - o y A ( y - o y jin N2 H T -o y “There are some of his sheep that will then assume characteristics that he does not like in them ” (ShChass 204:30-35) eiC 2 HHTe eic-n A Jip icT o N I A i-c B T io r-q “ Behold! I have made ready my dinner” (Matt 22:4) I (b) M H M»g-®piuMe ... I M eq-KAA-q e-® ei M -neqM To e B o A “ Pray tell,
is there not a kind o f person who refuses to let him come into their pres en ce?" (ShChass 131:31-40, cited more fully below) Pattern 5 has the same two-fold function as Pattern 3. Subpattem (b) expects a reply o f ‘Y es’ and is thus a logical equivalent o f (a): A re n ’t there some who X ? - Yes, there are some who X . The expansion clause contains a resumptive morph 404, which agrees with the entity term of the simply pattern in number/(gender). For the forms, possible syntactic positions, and conditioned non-expression of the resumptive morph, cf. 404, 405, 406, 407, 426, 427, 488, 489. Further examples: (a) M -piow e I M e-H j^N oy-oy ew jiTe w n jiT o y - (i.e. e - h i n 2tT o y -) i^pxei ShChass 134:37—40 “There are many people for whom it would have been much better if they had never held office” ; ityo) o y N -o y ty itJc e I n(i.e. e - f i - ) 'f '- o y e c y - jc o o - t) jtN 't'-N 2t-Jcoo-< ) ShChass 68:26-30 “And there is something that I am going to say, even though 1 do not want to say it” ; eic-T eK M i.i.y NM-NeKCNHy I c e -K iU re n c u ) - k z ib o a Mark 3:32 “Your mother and your broth ers are outside asking for you” ; eicgH H Te e ic - o y c g iM e I it c - e i Malt 15:22 “ And lo! A Canaanite woman came” ; Njti N T e p e q -M e e y e e p o - o y e ic -n irre A -O C M -n jc o e ic I 2K )-oyu)N 2 eeo A g f i-o y p jic o y Matt 1:20 “ But as he considered this, the angel of the Lord appeared lo him in a dream” ; 2tyu) 2 0 C0 N e q -M o o c y e MN-TM2t2ty e ic - o y p to M e I 2K )-ei ShAmfil I 54:1 “And while he was walking with (his) mother, a man came” ; e q -c y itjc e j..e M N-nnHHcye eicgH H Te eic-Te<)M 3i2ty M N -NeqcNHy 1 N e y -jtg e p jtT -o y n e 2 i - n c 2t n - b o a Mall 12:46 “ While he was still speaking to the people, behold, his niolher and his broth er were standing outside” ; ( b ) m h M N - ^ p t U M e I e p t y a i N - n e < ) ^ 2 ^ A . p - ‘* B A A .e H 389
1 X I S II
N T e-K eg tU B
N f
I
A N D
e< )-6
N -
I NJ I ) I (
62t e i e
A I I () \
ty tu n e
:
tl -
M M O -q
A N D
M e q -K 2 t2 t-q
e
e-^ ei
I
-
M -neqM T O
ShChass 131:31-40 “Pray tell, is there not a kind of person who. when their manservant goes blind or has some other horrible thing happen to him, refuses to let him come into their presence'?" eeoA
e ic -
I N D I C A T I N G T I ME O R M E A S U R E
485 e i c - prefixed to an entity term of time or measure expresses present completedness: “For three days now. P recisely this amount. A lready the second one,” etc. E.g. e ic -(y o M f N -200y c e - 6 e e r e p o - e i Matt 15:32 “They have been with me for three days now” ; e ic - n jk .i n e n t y i e T o y - N A - u ji MMO-q N - 2 eNpcuMe n - a t - c o j t m Shill 166:22-23 “The measure that will have been measured out unto people who are heedless is this” ; e ic - T M e ^ -C N T e
N -e n ic T O A H
re
tjii
Na^MepaiTe
m m o -c
NH-TN 2 Pet 3:1 “This which 1 write to you. my beloved, is already the sec ond letter.” Further examples: "t—m okm gk m m o -i e ic - z e n p o M n e e-^T M -T pe-^ptU M e 6 N-®cyiJce e-®jctu ShIV 172:6-7 “ For some years now. It has been my intention lhat no one should speak out"; e-Y N T 2t-T J..e MM2tv N-OYoyuJti) e-® ei cyAptu-TN e i c - 22t2 S -p o M n e Rom 15:23 “ Since I have longed for many years to come to you"; 2ti-MOY I eic-OYZeBJttUM itc M n i-o y e M -® n e T -2 HM ApophPatr 69 (Chafne 15:28) “ I ’m simply dead! For a week now, I haven’t eaten any hot food”
390
22
The Entity Statement as Subject Expansion Entity Statement Expanding the Subject o f a Clause
486
Entity Statement Expanding an Impersonal Predicate (jkNArKH etc.) 487 The Syntax of q jq je , M etytye, and c - A O K e i Nai= 488
THE E N T I T Y STATEMENT E X P A N D I N G T HE S U B J E C T OF A CLAUSE
486 W hen a Coptic entity statem ent 150 such as that the righteous shall live by faith ( j c e - e p e - n A iK A io c n a - c u n ? g b o a 2N —T n iC T lc )
to keep the whole law (e -® p -n N 0 M 0 C T H p - q ) fo r me to be judged (e -® T p e Y -. 2^NAKpiNe Fim o-Y) functions as the subject o f a clause, it almost never enters directly into a nexus 248 o f subject + predicate. Rather, the entity statem ent is represented by q, c, n e , or r e (expressing grammatical information as a 'grammatical subject’, English it) in a nuclear nexus pattern, such as q - oYON^ GBOA . . . “ It is e v id e n t. . . ” c ^ e p o - q . . . “ It is obligatory for him . . . ” oyeAAxicToN n e . .. “ It is a very trivial matter . . . ” and the entity statement follows the nexus pattern in apposition, as a ‘subject e.vpansion', expressing the lexical content o f the grammatical subject. (Grammatical Subject + Predicate) I Entity Statement nuclear nexus
subject expansion
Such sentences typically express the speaker’s judgpinent or attitude: it is evident, ohlig(itary, necessary, siiffideni, expedient, a f;ood thing, pleasing, trivial, wondetfiil. amaz ing. siirprisini;, of concern, hard, shameful, not God’s h'HI, a matter of disgrace, a tiaitsgre.fsion. it would he better, may it never happen, etc.
q -o y o N g eBOA I j c e - e p e —h a i k a i o c n a - c u n ^ eBOA 2 N -T n ic T ic “ It Is evident that the righteous shall live by faith” (Gal 3:11) [q expanded by Jc e - .. . ] '
.? 9 /
ENTITY
STATEMENT
AS S U B J E C T
EXPANSION
c - e p o - q I e-®p-nNoM oc THp-q “ It is obligatory for him to keep the whole law” (Gal 5:3) [c expanded by e-®infinitive] oyM oei^e jiN r e I NTe-Tei(yoMT N-cyNJiriurH Moy? 2N-zeN2BHye N -c e -(y o o n (i.e. e - N - c e - ( y o o n ) jin h NToq e y - (y o o n Jiytu NT2i-TM-eiMe 2iNoK oyT e n^AAo “ It is no wonder if these three con gregations are fu ll of deeds that are ‘non-existent’, or rather, which do exist but 1 and the Senior Monk do not know about them” (Shill 156:28-157:2) [ r e expanded by n r e - ...] oyeAJixicToN n ji-i n e I e -® rp e y - 2iNAKpiNe mmo-i “ T o me, it is a very trivial matter for me to be judged” (1 Cor 4:3) [ne expanded by e -» T p e y - . ,.] oyM oei^e Ae r e I e -N 2i(y tu -o y “It is won derful that we have spoken many words” (Shlll 183:28-184:1) [xe expanded by jc e - ...] N-q-o N-®pooy(y n 2i - n I Jc e -n N o y re N2i-JCNoy-N e r B e - 2
oycynHpe r e I e r e - M n o y - J c o o - c Nji-q Jce-eic^H H re AK-epHT NJi-N N -^eN epoN oc “It is a wonder that they did not say to Him. Look, You promised us thrones” (Severian of Gabala, Encomium on Saints Peter and Paul [Foat 93:18-19]) [ r e expanded by focalizing con version 457 e r e - M n o y - . . .] R are ex am p les o f an en tily sta te m e n t in b asic subject position include: (i) nomiiuil sal ience e - ® 2 M o o c (tex tu al var. n e g M o o c ) J..e NCJtOYNjtM m m o - i h citgBOY P M M O-i M - n tu - T ne M ark 1 0 :4 0 “ B ui to sit a t m y righl hand o r at m y left is n o t m ine to g ra n t” ; (ii) durative sentence e - M n i c - e i i .- T O O T - i c cu)u)<) M - n p u ) M e M alt 1 5 :2 0 ed. K asser “ B ui to eal w ithoul w ash in g y o u r h ands d o es n o t d efile th e p e rso n ”
The nuclear nexus pattern can be a durative sentence, non-durative conjuga tion, nominal sentence with n e 275, or suffixally conjugated verboid (e.g. q -o y o N 2 e b o a , N N ec-ujcune, oyM oei^e r e , N2iNoy-c); cf. also 487. Selection (or fluctuation) of q or c as grammatical subject is a matter of 392
EXPANDING
THE
SUBJECT
OF A CLAUS E
lexically fixed phrasing associated with each particular predicate; that of n e or Te is motivated according to the gender of the predicate. The grammatical subject (q, c, n e , or r e ) refers ahead and heralds the coming entity statement 275. Negation and lottversiotis have the usual forms associated with the selected nexus pattern. Selection of the form of entity statement ( j c e - , e-®Tpe=. etc.) is a m atter o f the compatibilities lexically associated with each particular predicate. Cf. also 354(c). Further examples. Masc. grammatical subject: q - M O K ? N - N - e x e - Y N T - O Y I e - ® T p e Y - B t U K e g O Y N e - T M N T - e p o M - n N O Y x e Mark 10:23 “ It is hard for those who have riches to enter the kingdom of God” ; <)-o M-*'Moi2 e NN2t2 p2t-N eM itre I jc e - ShAmel II 537:2-3 “It is very amazing to us that . . . n itN T tu c A e e - N - q - O B c y e p o - N I j c e - ShAmgl II 454:9 “ And of course with out its being forgotten by us t h a t < ) - o 6 e N - ® p o o Y t i ) N 2t - N h q - g M - n e N g H T I J c e - N e q - H n e - ® J C o o - c n e jc e - ShIV 18:4—5 “ So It is a matter of concern lo us, and il is on our mind, that il would be necessary lo say . . . O Y J^N JtrK JtioN n e I e - ® c e n c - N e c N H Y 2 Cor 9:5 “ To urge the brethren is necessary” ; M - n o Y < J O < y n e MneMTO e e o A . M -njteitU T e T ® - 2 N - M n H Y e I J c e K i t c e q e - g e e e o A . f i 6 i - O Y J t N-NeiKOYi Matt 18:14 “ It is not the will of My Father who is in heaven that one of ihese lillle ones should perish” ; oY ty^ot) n e N-OYptUMe n-ToyJlVi' I e-®JCtU2 TT e-*'-t'-ne<)0 Y0 r e-YptUM e N -2tA.A.0 (|)YA.0 c Acts 10:28 "It is shameful for a Jewish person lo louch or lo approach a person of another naiion"; n e I * jc o o -y II "cym e n e I ®cu)tm e p o -o Y ShAmdl I 228:7 “To speak of them amounts to disgrace itself, lo hcai of ihcm amounts to shame itself” ; oy n e nuj^Y M -n e v to n ? . . . e - ^ c i c y e n e I e e e x e p e - n g i t T u^itjce M N - T e c g i M e 2tY<^ e - ® B O T e n e I e e e x e p e -T e c g iM e cyitjce M N-ngiti ShOr 159:25-41^“ What is their life worth . . . when it is bitter how husband lalks with wife, and disgusting how wife talks with hus band?” ; oY‘i)UJU’T NH-TN n e I jce-OYNTH-TN-®22tn M N-N exN-epHY 1 C o r6 :7 “The fact that you have lawsuits with one another is a deficiency for you” ; q -p tu c y e J . . e e - ^ j c o o - c i ? M 2t T e I j c e - 2 e N n A . 2t N H N e ShWess9 140c;2-5 “But it is sufficienl merely to say that these are deceptions” " x p H M i t M M 2t Y
Fern, grammatical subject:
c - m o k ? I e -® T p e -® p M M 2 to b u )k e g O Y N e - T M N T - p p o N-MnHYe Matl 19:23 “It is hard for a rich person to enter the kingdom of the heav ens” ; N2tN O Y-c ritp N2t-T I e - T p 2t-MOY 1 Cor 9:15 “ For il would be better for me to die"; N - c - p - ® N o < ) p e I e - ^ x i - ' c g i M e Matt 19:10 “It is nol expedient to marry” ; n - c - t o ritp N 2 t - Y I e - ® c i) 2 t J c e 1 Cor 14:34 “ It is not permitted to them to speak” ; OYJ^NOMii. ri.p h h - t n t c I x e -e T e T N - C 2 i.i-c o Y Shlll 26:4 “ For, il is a transgression for you to even write them” ; N2tNOY-c A e I e u ;j c e - 2tTeTN -p-® ppo 1 Cor 4:8 “ And il would be better if you had reigned” ; N - o Y M O i g e r e O YTe N -O Y N oee n e I eY tyJ^N -M ecTe-geN ptuM e N -p e q -jc iO Y e zpJti N2 H t - o y ShAmel I 95:6-7 “It is not surprising nor sinful if they despise people among them who are thieves” ; N e N g B H Y e r j t p N e x ' ^ ' - T p e - N e i c y i t j c e •}--®22tn e p o - N i^YUJ N 2 t N O Y - c I e Y -'t' ShRyl 69 (34:1-2) “For it is our actions that cause our words to judge us. and it is a good thing that they d o !’’; n j i n o y - c N3t-<) NgoYo I e N e -Y N O Y U ) N e N - c i K e itcye e - n e t ) M jt K g Mark 9:42 “ It would be much better for him if a millstone were hung round his neck"; e N g o c o N e c - N c u ) - N I e - * ' T M - p - ® N O B e M npT peN -ctucy N - T e x 2 t p i c ShlV 24:8-9 “So long as il is up to us not to sin, let us nol despise grace” ; N - c - p - ® x p i 2 t jt N I N-®'t'-®2 ic e Nj^-t) N K e c o n ShMiss4 233:2 “There is no need to bother him again”
393
tNIIlY
STATEMLNT
AS S U U J L (
I EXPANSION
ENTI TY STATEMENT E X P A N D I N G AN I MP E R S O N A L
PREDICATE
487 A small list of ‘im personalpredicates’ (predications not formally analyzable into subject and predicate), namely (a) ANATKH ‘it is necessary’. uvuyKii 2CU ‘it is sufficient, enough’ 2Anc ‘it is necessary, . . . m ust’ 2 N e -/ 2 NA= ‘it is pleasing unto . . . ’ 379 (b) re N o iT o , negative M H re N o iro (var. M e r e N o iro ) ‘may it come to pass’, YEVOIIO, HT) yevoiTO e s e c T i, negative o y i^ e se c T i ‘it is permitted, possible, proper’, eceaii. oiiK E^eaii (c) (y (y e (var. eqpqpe), negative Mecycye (but also N -qptye right, fitting, necessary’, cf. 488
jin )
‘it is
(d) 2AMOI ‘how good it would be i f . . . , if only . . . ’ similarly can be expanded by an entity statement Impersonal Predicate I Entity Statement predicate
subject
I e - ® T p e q - T i u o Y N e e o A Z N - N - e r ^ - M o o y T “ It is necessary for Him to rise from the dead. He must rise from the dead” (John 20:9) A t least some of these morphs can also occur without expansion by an entity statement: e p o - N John 14:8 “ It will be enough for us,” M e re N o iro S hlll 47:24 “ Never! ” In basic form they express present time, ecu also occurs as an intransitive verb. For the overall Coptic tense system, cf. chapter 25. Further affirmaiive examples: gu) ritp I e - ‘*Tpe-Nco
Negation. Group (a): (optional n - ) + impersonal predicate + a n 250, e.g. eiu AN and N-21U a n . Group (b): substitution o f an alternant negative morph (see list above). Group (c): mixed negation, cf. 488. Group (d): no negation. 394
tytye,
M ety ty e,
a n d
c
-
a o k g i
n a
=
Negative examples: (a) gu) e p o - q I J c e - 2tq-p-®NOBe ShMiss4 822:14 “ For him merely lo have sinned was not enough” ; mh N-gtu epo-N I e-^Tpe-nNOYTe K t u N 2 t - N e e o A . N - N e N N O B e ShAmel I 67:14 “ Pray tell, is it not enough for us that God forgives us our sins?” ; m h g itn c I e -® T p e -n x c cyen-NitT Luke 24:26 “ Pray tell, is it not necessary for the Christ to suffer these things?” ; (h) M e r e N o i T o I e - ^ T p e - n i n cytune S hlll 29:16-17 “God forbid that this should happen!” ; John 18:31 “ It is not lawful for us to put anyone O YK ejecTi N2t-N I to death” ; (c) cf. 488
Conversions: (i) relative ( e r e - ) , (ii) circumstantial ( e - ) , (Hi) preterit ( n e - ) , (iv) focalizing ( e - ) Examples: (i) n -g t'^ -o n - ^ b o t g e -n p itN e T e -o y K e S e c T i I ShIV 4:12 “Things that are abominations againsf'the profession (of monasticism) and which it is nol permitted to do” ; (ii) T2ti’ r e e e e - g i tn c I e -'T p e y -J c e c T -n c y H p e M -npu)M e John 3:14 “ So must the Son of Man be lifted up” ; 2t q - 0 Y0 M -0 Y e -O Y K e je c T i I e-^OYOM-oY Mark 2:26 “ He ate them, without its being lawful for him to eat them "; (Hi) N e -g itn c I e -® T p e -T e irp 2t
THE SYNTAX OF ujuje, Meujuje, A N D C - A O K e i NA = 488 u)u)€. (van ecycye), negative Mecycye, ‘it is right, fitting, necessary’ has two forms of negation. Affinnaiive examples: u ;u ;e I e-®cyoYci)OY 2 Cor 12:1 “ It is right to boast” ; K2tT2t-neNNOMOC 4 )u ;e e p o - q I e-®MOY John 19:7 “ According to our law He must die” ( i t is fitting for Him to die); I e -® T p e N -Jc o o -c n h - t n 2 N - O Y n 2 t p p H c i 2 t Acts 2:29 “ We may say to you confidently . . . ”
Negations, (a) In main clauses; ( n - ) + (y(ye + \ h . (b) In relative and cir cumstantial conversion: substitution o f Meqpuje, but relative also N -u ju je a n 489. Examples: (a) Ncycye I e-®BOA.-c N -T elM ppe M -n eg o o Y M -n c 2tBB2tTON Luke 13:16 “Isn’t it fitting to loose her from this bond on the sabbath day?” ; NitcNHY I e-® T pe-N 2ti cy tu n e N xeige Jas 3:10 “ My brethren, this ought not to be so” ; (h) cf. below. Conversions
Conversions: (i) relative ( e r e - ) ; (ii) circurnstantial ( e - ) ; (Hi) preterit ( n e ‘ought to have, should have’); (iv) focalizing ( e - ) ' Examples: (i) gtuB n i m e x e -c y c y e I e-®2t2t-Y ShIV 43:11 “Every thing that has to be done” ; n -e x e -M e c y c y e I Matt 12:2 “ What it is not lawful to do” ; see also below, and 4 8 9 ; (ii), c f 4 8 9 ; (Hi) N 2t i j . . e N e - c y c y e e p t u - i T j I e-®2t2t-Y Matt 23:23 “These you ought lo have done” ; N e-cycye 6e n t o k epo-K n e I e-®N2t Matt 18:33 “And should nol you have had mercy?” ; (iv) k -n j^ y J c e -e -c y c y e NOYHp I e - ‘* M e p e - < J ) 2 t n 2tY<^ ShChass 89:.‘>l-54 “ You see how much one must love jus tice and mercy” ; r i - e - c y c y e r i t p e - N c y n p e I e-® ctuoY 2 egOYN N - N e i o x e Tie l o r e N-NcyHpe 2 Cor 12:14 “ For children ought not to lay up for their par ents, but parents for their children” 395
I - N I I I V
S I A I T M I N I
AS
S U B J I - C I
I X I ' A N S I O N
H istorically, u ju je relates to the infinitive u je ‘p ro ceed ’ as being evolved from c - ( y e “ It ( c ) proceeds. It is norm al pro ced u re.” u je in this m eaning also occurs in the relative clause eT®-uje “ . . . that is norm al procedure, . . . that is suitab le” (bare ex®- 405), w hich occurs (optionally) after antecedents e e and nMA, in phrases S e e , K A xA -ee, n j^ p ji- e e , t a T t e e e , h m a . ‘a s ’, ‘ac co rd in g a s ’, ‘co n tra ry to h o w ’, ‘th u s ’, ‘the p lace w h e re ’. F or o y n e T - e c y u j e n e , cf. 1 10; for (ycy e n e , 285(e). Examples; f ie e ex'^-cye 1 e-® T p i-Jco o -< ) Eph 6:20 “ As 1 ought to speak" (In the suitable way for me to speak); Mn2tT < j-c o Y N -ee ex '-c y e (textual var. e x e -c y c y e 489) I e-®cooYN 1 Cor 8:2 “ He does not yet know the way one ought to know"; e p e -n M 2t ex'^-cye (textual var. e x e -c y u p e 489) I e -'o y u J ty T figH T-tj g f i - e ie poYCJtXHM (focalizing conversion) John 4:20 “The suitable place in which to worship is in Jerusalem, Jerusalem is where one ought to worship”
489 In relative conversion, c - a o k e i n a = ‘it seem s good to, it is the decision o f’ and u ju je ‘it is right, fitting, necessary ’ often occu r w ithout subject exp an sion; consequently the relative clause contains no resum ptive m orph referring to its antecedent (cf. 379). o y n e r c - A o K e i n h - t n (scil. e-®jkjk-q) “ W hat is it that it seem s good to you (to do)? W hat is your d e c isio n ? ” (M ark 14:64) Further examples; N - e x e - c y c y e (i.e. Titus 2; I “The things that it is fitting (to do). Things that are fitting” ; N-gcuB e-Mecycye (i.e. or e-®2t2t-Y ) Luke 23:41 “ Nothing that it is wrong (to do). Nothing wrong” ; n -o Y 2 U)b ritp n e e - c y c y e NNJtgpA-r (i.e. Acts 25:27 “ For in my opinion it is not a thing that it is right (to do). It is not an appropriate thing"; n M 2 t e x e - N - u j u j e (textual var. e x e - M e c y c y e ) Mark 13:14 “The place where it ought not (to be set up)”
396
23
The Adverbial Clause Construction: Adverbial Clauses and Infinitive Phrases Clause and Phrase as Adverbial M odifier in Coptic 490 Adverbial Clause and Adverbial Infinitive Phrase 490 The Adverbial Clause Construction 491 Sequential conjunctions and initial attitude markers 492 Catalogue o f Adverbial Clauses and Infinitive Phrases 493 T h ^ o n d itio n a l Sentence 494 Factual (Unconditional) Presupposition 495 General Condition 496 Undifferentiated Cause 497 Contrary-to-fact (Contrafactual) Condition 498 N A N oy-c and ^ amo Yin contrary-to-fact condition 499 M ixed Conditional Sentences 500 Approximate Equivalents of the Conditional Sentence 501 Purpose and Result 502 Purpose 502 Result 503 The Ambiguity of Purpose and Result Correlated Com parison; ‘Just as . . . so too TAl Te e e as a Conjunction 507 N e e Forming Exclamations 508
504 ’
505
C L A U S E A N D P H R A S E A S A D V E R B I A L M O D IF I E R IN C O P T IC THE A D V E R B I A L CLAUSE AN D THE AD VE R B I AL I N F t N t T I V E PHRASE f
490 In many sentences adverbs and/or prepositional phrases occur after the sen tence pattern as adverbial modifier 194, i.e. to descriptively expand (modify) or complete a preceding verb, verbal clause, or imperative ( t - M e PiMtu-TN e M A x e 2 C or 12:15 “ I love you very m uch”); also to modify non-verbal sen tences 195(i) (oV Te "f-pHNH N -^eN pojM e N N A ^pN -nN ovre ShChass 397
A D V l K l i l A l
Cl
AllSl
( O N S
I Kl U
1 I O N
I6 S :5 6 169; I “ What does tlie peacc orhuiiiiin heitigs to in (he eyes o f G o d ?” ). Similarly they often occur before sentence patterns, as premodifi er 195(vii), to lay down a circumstance o f time, place, manner, degree, or atti tude in which the sentence will be asserted: M nooy 2^ -T e irp 2i
The present chapter surveys the numerous subordinate clauses 248 that act somewhat analogously to these two roles, i.e. either postmodifying or pre modifying a main (or at least a superordinate) clause. These are 'adverbial clauses’. N eY -p-® (ynH pe I NT c p c q -c u cic ? M -n e p n e “ They were surprised when he lingered in the tem ple” (Luke 1:21) N T e p e q - ^ A e e b o a I M n q - e u j - 6 M-®6 oM e-®(y 2uc,e NMMJi-y “ And when he came out, he could not speak to them ” (Luke 1:22) Also surveyed in this chapter are adverbial ‘infinitive phrases ’ playing these same two roles. Infinitive phrases are prepositional phrases o f the infinitive either containing r p e . . . Infinitive 363 (with the actor of the infinitive suffixed after r p e )
2iY-p-® 2 o T e A e I 9M-nTpe-N-eT^-MMAY bcuk e^oyN e-TCKAooAC “They were afraid while those people were entering the cloud" (Luke 9:34) ? M - n T p e - T c A € K O T - q I 2i - n M H H ( y e u j o n - q e p o - o y “Now while Jesus was returning the crowd welcomed H im ” (Luke 8:40) or without r p e (and thus with no actor expressed, i.e. with 0 actor)
2i y - e i I e T B e -*^NAy ep o -q “ They came to see H im ” (Euodius o f Rome, Homily on the Passion and the Resurrection [Chapman 89:18-19]) jiycu e-nM A N -^p -^ e y c iA M -n c 2iT2iN2ic . . . I c e - N 2i-p-® 2 M22iA mn e x c “A nd instead o f sacrificing to Satan . . . , they will serve C hrist” (Shlnvect 349:8-13) Although formally these infinitive phrases belong with the other preposition al phrases o f chapter 9, their verbal content and the frequent expression o f a verbal actor brings them close to the subordinate clauses in meaning. Tense in the subordinated clause or phrase expresses relative time 529 compared to the main or superordinate clause. 398
. \ m
I, K l I A I .
C I.AUSl-.
A N D
I N I I N I I I V L
iMIUASi;
T i l l , Al )Vi: UI!lAI, ( I . AU S l ; (' () N S I UIJ C T I () N
491 An adverbial clause contains within itself a nexus 248 between a subject and a predicate so as to form a whole (and subordinate) statement; N r e p e K - e e i when yon came, eK tyJ^N -eei i f you come. Infinitive phrases are similar ( e - ® T p e K - e e i / o r y07/ to come). Furthermore, almost every adverbial clause (or infinitive phrase) expresses some particular kind o f relationship between itself and another clause to which it relates. The relationships include cause because you have come, concession although you have come, temporality when you came, general stipulation whenever you come, contrafactual stipula tion i f you had come, etc. A grammatical union o f two clauses in such a rela tionship is an ‘adverbial clause construction’: it brings two clauses into rela tionship in such a way that one nexus (the adverbial clause) is the presupposi tion or stipulation of the other nexus (other clause). Adverbial Clause
+
Other Clause
presupposition or stipulation
O ther Clause +
Adverbial Clause presupposition or stipulation
Similar is the grammatical union o f an adverbial infinitive phrase and the clause that it modifies. Various kinds o f grammatical (and indeed logical) rela tionship are signalled by the m any adverbial clauses and infinitive phrases listed in 493. 492 Sequential conjunctions and sequential initial attitude markers. In sequel to a preceding adverbial clause o f factual presupposition { if since), time (when, whenever), or place (where, wherever), the main (or superordinate) clause is optionally introduced by one o f the following 'sequential conjunctions/initial attitude m arkers’: jipji apa ‘then’ (inference) e i e - ‘then, there’ (inference; rarely sequence or place) T o r e l o i e ‘fZ/e/i’ (se q u e n c e )
e u jjc n e , var. ecyjce ‘th en ’ (inference); cf. 498 Examples: e c y jc e -2t-oY Jt Moy 22tpo-O Y T H p -o y 2t-nT H p-< j Moy 2 Cor 5:14 “ Since One has died for all, therefore all have died” ; ecyjce-jiN O N -N cyH pe e l e jiN0 N-NeKA.Hp0 N0 M0 c Rom 8; 17 “ If we are children, then we are heirs” ; e u jtu n e n e i c y o J C N e h n e i ' g t U B o y e B O A 2 N-TiptUMe n e e V e - t j - N i t - B t u A . g b o a Acts 5:38 “ If this plan or this undertaking i.s of human beings, then it will fail"; e c y tu n e Jie N T - 2 tN - p - N - e T e - M e c y c y e e ie - c e - N 2 t - T 6 2 t io - N ShIV 3:24 “ But if we have done wrong, wc shall be disgraced"; e N u j j i N - M o o u j e j n e n t o <| g M - n o y o e i N rie e NTot) e T q - 2 M - n o Y o e i N
eie-O Y N T2t-N
i ?M2t Y N - o y K o i N U ) N i 3 t M N - N e N e p H y
I John 1:7 “ But if we walk in the light, as He is in the light, we have fellowship with 399
AI J VI i RUI AL
CLAUS I - ; C O N S T R U C T I O N
one another"; ec y tu n e e p e c y i t N - O Y J t M e p e - n K O C M O c e i e - N - T 2 t r 2 t n H M - e i c u T N2 Ht-<) 1 John 2:15 “ If some one loves the world, love for the Father is not in them ” ; g O T i t N j . . e e < ) c y 2t N - J C o o - c J c e - N K 2t n i m eVe-nBOA. M - n -e N T -2tcj-T p e-N K 2t n i m Z Y ^oT itcce 1 Cor 15;27 “ But when it says. All things have been subjected to Him. it means with Ihe exception of the One who put all things under Him” ; jo n o Y “Ktu eeoA. e'fe-M N — 6e e 2 p3if 23l-® nobe Heb 10; 18 “Where (there is) forgiveness of these, there is no longer any offering for sin” ; N T ep eq --f--‘*OYtu ri6 i- n e x o p T o c 2t q - e ip e N-OYK2tp n o c TOTe iY “ °Y ‘^N 2 eeoA. N6 i-N eN TH 6 Matt 13:26 “So when the plant came up and bore grain, then the weeds appeared also” ; e p c y i.N -n e x c o y u Jn ^ eBOA. eT e-n eN tU N 2 n e t o t g g^UT-THYTN xeTNik-oYUJNg eeoA. NMM2k-q 2 N -o Y eo o Y Col 3:4 “ When Christ who is our life appears, then you also will appear with Him in glory” ; gOTitN rjtp ercy2tN-p-®2i.T-6oM t o t g cy2t'f-6M-®6oM 2 Cor 12; 10 “ For when I am weak, then I am strong” ; e -m m o n ecy jcn e iY ~ o n ~ o Y n e 2tuc-® 2^ ip eT iK o c ShAm^I II 3 4 I;7 -8 “Otherwise, they would have been considered heretics” ; e p u p a i N - o Y J t r j t p jc n i o - i e x B e - n g H Y N - T 2t '} ' Y X H e u p j c e e u j t u n e 2tN?-OYC2tBe N e i - N 2 t - M e p i T - t ) e c y tu n e 2tN r-o Y Jt0 HT - t - - N 2 t - M e c T t u - q ShGue 160o;4—6 “ For if someone reproves me for the profit of my soul, if ever 1 am wise I would 500 love him, and if I am foolish 1 will hate him”
4 9 3 C A T A L O G U E OF A D V E R B I A L CL AUS E S AN D I N F I N I T I V E PHRASES
(1)
+ c ir cu m sta n tia l c o n v e r s io n 4 2 2 :
‘Though, B ut'
(2) 2iN T i-® T pe- 36 3 : ‘Instead o f . . . -in g ’ (3)
+
c ir cu m sta n tia l c o n v e r s io n
422:
‘Also. A nd indeed. Too,
Furthermore ’ (4) jia cN -^ in fin itiv e 1 0 5 (c ): ‘W ith o u t . . . -ing. W ithout someone . . . -in g ’ (5) 2iJc.N-®Tpe- 36 3 : ‘W ith o u t. . . -ing’ (6 ) e - , e p e - , e = c ir cu m sta n tia l c o n v e r s io n 4 2 1 , 4 9 7 : th e lo g ic a l r e la tio n sh ip b e tw e e n th is an d the m a in (o r su p e ro r d in a te ) c la u s e is u n d e fin e d (E n g lish tra n sla tio n s m u st s u p p ly when, whenever, if, since, as, because, given that, ahhoiigh, inasmuch as, while, e tc .); c f. a ls o J^ya),
eiMHTi, eN 2 o c o N , e
(7) e -® in fin itiv e 1 0 5 (c ); ‘In order to. T o ’; c f. 5 0 2 , 5 0 4 (8 ) e -M M o N
‘O therw ise’ (c o n d itio n a l con trary to fa c t), c f. 4 2 4 , 4 9 8
(9) e - N e or e - N e p e c o n v e r tin g c la u s e s ‘I f . . . were! had . . . ' (c o n d itio n al c on trary to fa c t), c f. 4 9 8
(10) e-n M 2 i e -® T p e - 3 6 3 : ‘In.stead o f . . . -ing’ 400
Al JVli RBAL
CLAUSH
AND
105(c); ‘Instead o f .
( 1 1 ) e - n M 2i N - ® in fin itiv e
e - n M 2i +
e - n r p e - 363: 'In order fo r
(1 4 )
e -® T p e- 363: ‘In order fo r
c o n ju n c tiv e
See
. .
PHRASU
-m g ’
354(a): ‘Instead o f . . . -ing’
(1 2 ) (1 3 )
eB O A jc e - .
INFINITIVE
to. T h a t .
. . . ..
to. T h a t .
.
might, T o ’;
. . . .
might, T o ’\
502
c f.
cf.
502, 504
( 6 4 ) jc .e - + m a in c la u s e
234(b), 496: ‘Unless, W ith o u t .
(1 5 ) e i e - ( + p a s t n e g a tiv e m a in c la u s e )
. .
having’ (1 6 )
eiM H T i (a)
422
or
(c)
234(b) 496
c la u s e c f.
+
(1 7 ) e N ^ o c o N
or
354(a)
c o n ju n c tiv e
+ e -® T p e -
(f) +
363
or
(d)
or
(b)
+ c irc u m s ta n tia l c o n v e rs io n
346 o r (e) + j c e - + m a i n ‘Unless, Except f o r . . . -in g ’;
+ e p u jx N -
J c e K 2i ( 2i ) c + o p t a t i v e :
+ m a in c la u s e
234(b)
422: ‘As
o r c irc u m s ta n tia l c o n v e rs io n
long as. While ’ (a) enei o r (h) e n e i J ^ H ‘Sin ce’ ( c a u s a l ) ; c f . 495
(1 8 )
( 1 9 ) e < |) o c o N
e p e -. (2 0 )
See
‘i 4 i
v a r.
(sh o rt
( 2 2 ) e T B e -® in fin itiv e ; eT B e-Jc e-.
m a in
234(b), 495
c la u s e
234(b):
o r c irc u m s ta n tia l
See
fo rm )
e p e -,
346, 497: 'I f When. Since,
e iM H T i, e c y c u n e , k jin ,
422
c o n v e rs io n ;
‘While
. . .
s till .
. .
’
‘In order to. T o ’
(6 4 ) j c e - + m a in c la u s e
234(b) o r (b} e u j i u n e e p c y j i N - 346 o r (c) 422 c o n v e r s i o n : ‘I f (ever)’ ( g e n e r a l 496). See a f t e r e t y i u n e , c f . 353
e t y i u n e + m a in c la u s e
.e c y iu n e + c irc u m s ta n tia l
also
+
long as. Inasmuch a s ’
(2 1 ) e r i + c irc u m s ta n tia l
(a)
e n e iA H n e p
(6 ) c irc u m s ta n tia l a n d (2 0 ) e p q p jiN -
e p u jjiN -,
W henever’. See also
(2 3 )
(c)
(v a r. e n e o c o n ) + m a in c la u s e
422:
c o n v e rs io n
or
k 2i n ; f o r c o n j u n c t i v e
e u j j c e - ( v a r . e u j j c n e - ) + c l a u s e 234(b), 495; (a) ‘Given that. Supposing that. I f (as is or seems to be the case). I f indeed. Sin ce’ ( c a u s e ) ; (b) ‘Even though’. See also k j i n , fo r c o n ju n c tiv e a fte r
(2 4 )
e c y jc e - , c f.
353
(2 5 ) e u j j c e - + c irc u m s ta n tia l (2 6 ) H + c o n ju n c tiv e
422
(a)
K-jiN e p u j j i N -
c u m s ta n tia l
422
‘Supposing th a t .
. .
'
354(a): ‘U nless’
( 2 7 ) K2iN o r K 2iN e u j j c e - + c l a u s e (2 8 )
c o n v e rs io n ;
496
or
c o n v e rs io n
234(b)(ii), 495: ‘Even if’ ( f a c t u a l )
(b) k j i n + (c) k j i n
or
c o n ju n c tiv e
354(a), 496 o r c i r 234(b);
e q p i u n e + m a in c la u s e
‘Even i f ’ (2 9 ) K iiin e p + c irc u m s ta n tia l
422
c o n v e rs io n :
‘A lthough’ 401
a d v i ;r h i a i
,
c i.a u s k
c o n s t r u c t io n
(30) K2iT2i - e e - + circumstantial 422 or relative conversion 505: 'Just as'. cf. 506 (31) KjiiToi + circumstantial 4 2 2 conversion: ‘Although’ (32) MjiAicTJi + circumstantial 422, 497 conversion; 'Especially iflsince’ (33) MNNC2i-®infinitive 105(c): ‘A fter . . . -iitg’ (34) MNNCJi- + (a) conjunctive 354(a) or (h) H t - x - (focalizing past) 457: ‘After . . . -ing ’
(35) MNNc2i-®Tpe- or MNNc2i-e-® T p e- 363: ‘After . . -ing' (36) (a) M H ntuc + conjunctive 354(a) or (h) jc e - w H n t u c + main clause 234(b) or (c) MHnore + main clause 234(b) or conjunctive 354(a) or (d) JC,e-MHnoTe + conjunctive: ‘Lest, That. So as to prevent that’ (37) M ncon + relative conversion: ‘In case. Whenever it might happen that’
(38) N ee + circumstantial 422 or relative conversion 505: ‘Just a s' (39) NoyecyN-^infinitive (var. NnoyecyN -) 105(c): ‘Without . , , ing. Without someone . . . -ing’
(40) (a) NCJiBHA + conjunctive 354(a), 496, ‘Unless'; (h) ncjibha jc e - + main clause 234(b), 498: ‘But fo r the fa c t that. Apart fro m the fa c t that' (41) N xepe- 344: 'When, After . . . h a d' (past time) (42) njiAiN ON + circumstantial 422 conversion: ‘Moreover, And yet' (43) nM2i (= MnMJi) + relative conversion; ‘W herever’ (44) ®con . . . ®con . . . + circumstantial 422 clauses: A t one time . . . at another 'time . . . ’
(45) x tu p ic - + circumstantial 422 conversion: ‘E.xcept when. U nless’', cf. 496 (46) xtupic-®infinitive 105(c); ‘W ith o u t . . . -ing’ (47) xtupic-® Tpe- 363: ‘Except when. U nless’', cf. 496 (48) (yji-npji + relative conversion: ‘U ntil’ (49) ujjiNTe- 349: ‘U ntil’ (50)
e -w n jiT e - (often written
wnjiTe-) (circumstantial) 422:
‘Before ’
(51)
e-®Tpe- 363: ‘Before . . . -in g ’
(52) 2M -nT pe- 363: ‘While . . . -in g ’ (53)
+ circumstantial 422 conversion: ‘A t the same tim e’
(54) 2 o n o y + main clause 234(b), 496; ‘In .so fa r a s ’
402
ADVKRHAL
CLAUSE
AND
INFINITIVE
PHRASE
(55) 2 tu c + circumstantial 422 conversion: ‘i4i, i4i if. On the grounds th a t’-, cf. 495 (56) 2 tu c eqpjce- + main clause 234(b) or circumstantial 422 conversion: ‘i4i i f ; cf. 495 (57) 2 0 C0 N + main clause 234(b) or circumstantial 422 conversion: ‘i4i long as ’
(58) 2
(64) (a) jc e - or (b) jc.e-eneiAH or jc e - . . . rjip or (d) g b o a jc e - or (e) e T B E - J c e - + main clause (not optative) 234(b): ‘B eca u se’; cf. 495 jc e - + optative. See (65)(66) JceKJic j(.e-M Hntuc and jc.e-MHnoTe. See (37) MHntuc (65) jceKJic (var. jceKJiJic) or jc e - + optative 338(b): ‘So t h a t . . . might, hi Older th a t. . . might. In order to ’ 502. See also eiM H Ti (66) JLGKxc (var. JceKJiJic) or jc e - + e p e - . . . n ji- (affirmative focalizing N2i- future, without focalizing meaning 339): ‘So t h a t . . . might. In order t h a t . . . might. In order t o ’; cf. 502, 504. See also e i m h t i (67) jc iN -e p e - (focalizing conversion of durative 457): ‘A lready . . , w h en ' (time previous) (68) JC.INTA- (focalizing conversion of past 457): ‘S in c e’ (time elapsed) Examples; ( I ) ey-N it-T itit-t) N2t-Y .. • iAAit n t o o y z t u -o y ev-ZJ^pe? e p o - o y e-®TM-TpeY-Jtn2tT2t MMO-Oy ShIV 5 6 : 5 -7 “They shall give il to them . . . though also personally watching them so they do nol deceive them” ; 2tc--t--®OYcb n - o y I N-OYTHHBe H NTOq KeMGAOC e - 2tC --|--®0 ycU N -NK 2tpnOC N-TJ..I K itiocY NH ShChass 1 8 3 :2 -9 “ What did it blossom? Not a finger or some other organ; rather, it blossomed the fruils of righteousness” ; (2) 2tN Ti-® TpeTeTN -p® p M N -N o y T e 2tT eT N -p -® 2tT -N O Y T e Shlll 5 1 :1 0 -1 1 “ Instead o f your being godly, you were ungodly” ; (3) Nicy f i- g e n e y o y t u c i) n e n o y tu c y n -n j.jh m u )n 2ty u ) e - n o y t u c y N-Nj^jtiM toN n e n e y o y t u c y ShChass 7 9 : 5 1 -5 7 “How shall we nol con clude that their wish is ihe wish o f the demons as also (ity u ) e - ) the wish of the demons is their w ish?"; ( 4 ) 2tJCM-‘*n e2T -® C N oq ee o A . M epe-®KU) e e o A c y tu n e Heb 9 :2 2 "Without shedding blood there is no forgiving” ; K -N 2t -e c y -B tu K e g o y N eJC tu -q 2tJCN-‘* T p e y -M H N e y e m m o - k John the Presbyter, Life of Pesenlhius of Qift (BAp 8 0 :2 8 -2 9 ) “Can you enter into his presence without your being announced to 403
Iw
y'
ADVERBIAL
CLAUSE
CONSTRUCTION
him ?” ; (6) fJ -g e K-OYe 6(>vaa0ai raevEYKeiv “ He will provide you the way of escape, that you may be able to endure it” ; (14) NeY-KU)Te NCA-OYMNT-MNTpe egoYN e - i c e-®TpeY“ MOOYT-q Mark 14:55 “They sought testimony against Jesus to pul Him to death” : c^iaha e-®TM-TpeTN-BU)K egoYN e-®nipACMOc Luke 22:40 “ Pray that you may not enter into tem ptation"; (15) a a h o u j c m e I - k a a - k e b o a ele-M neK -T A M A -l Jce-NTAK(i.e. NTK)-NrM Martyrdom of SS. Theodore the Anatolian, Leontius the Arab, and Panigerus the Persian (CairoHamuli G' f.8r o ;8 -l 2 = Morgan Facs. vol. 39 pi. 35; Dep. 412) “ Truly. 1 will not let you go unless you tell me who you are” [Sahidic dialect?]; e-w epe-A A A Y N - p u ) M e eq-TOAM g e N - (i.e. 2N -) AAAY N - N O B e e ^ - 't '- n e q o Y O l egOYN e-n eo Y c lA C T H p lo N e le -M n o Y -e lM e e p o - q giTM -nenNA eT^-OY^J^B Athanasius, Homily on Luke 11:5-9 (Morgan M577 f.45r o; 17-25; Dep. 172) “No man polluted by any sin can approach the altar without its (or his) having been known by the Holy Spirit” ; (16) (a) e M H T I (i.e. eiMHTI) NTeTN-KeT-THYTN NTeTN-p-ee N-NI
ADVI - RI 3AL C L A U S E
AND
INFfNITIVE
PHRASE
as 1 am in the world, 1am the light of the world”;
e-NenNeyMATiKON npoc-nK U )T N-reKKAeciA u;iNe jcek aac e re T N e P -^ Z o y o 1 Cor 14; 12 “Since you are eager for manifestations of the Spirit for building up Ihe church, strive to excel”; (h) enei,a.H AK-
egOYN
e - n H ^ i
M -nxu)U )pe
N q-TU )pn
fi-N eqgN A O Y
e q - T M - M O Y P N
405
ADVIiRUlM.
CI. AUSi;
C' () N S r R 11 (' r I () N
e
406
ADVIiRUM,
f'l.AUSi;
AND
I N 1-I N I T I V H PHRAS1- ;
. . M H n o T e 2eN-|--TcuN Ne 2 Cor 12:20 “For I fear that Imay come and find you nol what I wish ... (and) that ilicrc is qiiarrclinp”; (il) see preceding example; (J7) Ay-t NA-N N-2eNKoYi N-oetK M - n e o A M - n M A N-oyo^M M n c o n erN-p-^xpeiA M M o - q SlilV 57:14 16 “They permitted us a few pieces of bread outside of the refec tory in case we need it"; IJM) cf. 506 below; (39) N N e - “pcuMe bcuk e-'’Te?cNecfiijc e-poyee oye
407
AOVI R B I M ,
( IM J S 1 -: C O N S T R U C T I O N
cuck Ie
499 NANoy-c an d 2 amoT as main clauses o f the conditional contrary-to-fact. Exclam ations o f regret, expressed as a contrary-to-fact conditional N A N oy-c M -npu)M e g t ^- mmay I e - N e - M n o Y - - x .n o - q “ It w ould be better for that m an if he had not been b o m ” (M att 2 6 :2 4 ) are based upon n a n o y - c ‘it w ould be b etter’ and/or 2 am o i ‘how good it w ould have b ee n ’, as follow s. (a) Exclamation + e - N e . . . (contrary-to-fact clause 498) NANOY-c e - N e . . . “ It w ould be b etter i f . . . w ere/h ad . . . ” e - N e . .. “ H ow good if w ould have been i f . . . w ere/h ad . . . , If only . . . w ere/had . . . ”
2AM01
Examples; NiNOY-c N i - q NeoYo I e-Ne-YN-oYiUNe n-cike x iy e e-neqMiK 2 Nce-NOJc-q e-reeiAiCCi Mark 9:42 “It would be much better for him ifa millstone were hung round his neck and he were thrown into the sea”; eiMoV I e-Ne-iNr- 0 YMii-'’20 MT iN iY<^ MAl-n-eTe-ncu-i iN ne SliCliass 77:16-19 “H ow good it would have been if I were not (Ifonly I were not) greedy for money and for what does not belong to m e ”; 2^moi 6 e I e-Ne-MN-'’pa>Me nkotk h NCi-N-eT'’-NKOTK 2 N-TeYcyH iY^^ N e - o Y N - 2 NirieoN (i.e. 2 GNirieoN) e-Ni
(h) 2 amoY + contrary-to-fact main clause 498, ‘‘H ow good it w ould have been if . . . , If only . . . ". T he stipulation clause in pattern (b) has the form o f a m ain clause (n e Y -N A - etc.). Examples: 2 iMoT on 1Ney-Ni-ficujce (textual var. e-NGY-Ni-) gboa N-N-eT"u^Toprp Gal .S:12 “I wish (How good it would have been if) those who unsettle you would be mutilated!”; 2 iMoi IN e - i N O N - o Y ^ m m o - o y ShIV 92:18 “Ifonly (How good it would have been if) we were one of them!”; 2 iMol on I Ne-
414
PURPOSF. A N D
RliSULT
M I X H D C O N U l riONAt. S H N T K N C E S
500 Real and contrary-to-faci clauses can be gram m atically united in the sam e conditional sentence. Examples: mh
501 S O M E
a p p r o x i m a t e
equiv a l e n t s
of
the
c o n d i t i o n a l
SF.NTF.NCE
(a) Articulated attributive clause 411 instead of stipulation clause; e.g. n-eT®Ni-jti-^oyi Ae e-nenfji er^-oyiie I MMNT-cj-'’KU) eeoA o^A-eNe? Mark 3:29 "Whoever blasphemes against the Holy Spirit never has forgivenes.s” (= If any one blasphemes again.st the Holy Spirit, they will never have forgiveness)
(h) Main clause (or imperative) instead of stipulation clause; e.g. nicreye e-njcoeic Tc nexc IAycu K-Ni-oyJCil Acts 16:31 “Believe in the Lord Jesus Christ and you will be saved" ( = If you believe in the Lord Jesus Christ, you wjll be saved); k - m h p e-'’c 2 iMe I Mnp-
(r) Main clause (or imperative) + conjunctive; e.g. JCi-'*tne I N T e T N - e m e j!.e-nJCoeic ?oa5 Ps 33(34);7 (33:8 Budge) “Taste and know that the Lord is good" (= If you taste, you will know that the Lord is good); ig-TN-Ni-oyeM-AAiy an M-neiMi I N r — T M - J c c u N i - N Ncyopri Xf-io; re T e r(i.e. TeK-)eprAcii ApophPatr 241 (Chame 73:28-29 = Z 346:21-22) “W e will not eat anything here and not have you first tell us whal your occupation is” (= Unless you first tell us what your occupation is, we will not eat anything here)
(d) Command + future conjunctive; e.g. i i r e i ITipoy--)-
n h - t n Matt 7:7 “Ask, and it will be given you” (= If you ask, it will be given you); M ip N - n p o c e x e e-Neqa;iJce IT ip N - e m e e-n-eTN-a;iNe Nccu-q ShLefort 41:9 “Let us pay attention to His words, and we shall understand what we are looking for” (= If we pay atleiition, we shall understand).
PURPO SE AND RESU LT PURPOSK
502 E xpressions o f purpose (to, in ord er to, that . . . m ight, so that . . . might) are ad v erb ial clau ses and in fin itiv e phrases. T h ey in clu d e: e -'* in fin itiv e ,
415
A D V I i R B I A L ( L A U S l i C () N S r R U ( T I () N
cyApu)-TN A—20 lNe Jcice NgHT I Cor4: IX “Some arc arroganl as though I were ran coming to you” ; Neq-'t'-'*CBU) r^p NA-y n e gcuc e-yN T-cj-TeS O Y CiA mmay Ayiu fie e an N-NeyT^MMATeY*^ Mall 7:29 “ For He taught them as One who had authority, and not as their scribes” ; ■ f -l' Ae N-oyrNcuMH gojc e -^ y -N A n a - I giTM -nJCoeic e -^ p -^ n icT o c I Cor 7:25 “ But I give my opinion as one who by the Lord’s mercy is trustworthy"; e T B e -o y TeTi5-eiopt-i nccu—n 2 “ ^*^ N T -A N -(e -N T -iN ) p-njkT 2 n - t e n 6om h TENMNT-eyceBHC Acts 3:12 “Why do you stare at us, as though by our own power or piety we had done this?” ( 5 6 ) A N -ep -g N N ob (i.e. A N -p -g eN N o b ) M -n e e o o y eN-coBcy mm o-n gcuc ecyJce-ZNNOBe (i.e. zen n o b e ) an Ne ShIV 182:7-8 “ We have done great wrongs, neglectfully, as if assuming that they are not sins"; Jce -N N e y -Jci-'’oyA e p o -N gcuc e c y Jte -e -A N --t'-'’c o e -N o e iK ShIV 92:5-6 “Let Ihetii not slander us as if we had been stingy with the bread” ; ( 5 7 ) cf. (17) above; mh o y n - 6om e - '’Tpey-N H CTeYe fifii-N cyH pe M-nMA N -cyeA eeT gocoN (textual var. e
CONDITIONAL
SENTENCE
J C e - c y e n - n - e T e T N - p - ' ’x p i A M M O - q e - n c y A John 1 3 : 2 9 “Some thought, because Judas had the money box, that Jesus had told him. Buy what we need for ihe feast”; (c) C O N c N i - Y • • - e Y - 2 i - ' ’u ) N e e g p J n e - O A A A C C A J c e - N e - g e N O Y i u z e n g Matt 4 : 1 8 “Tw o brothers . . . casting a net into the sea, for they were fishermen”; (d) A Y -p-^Z O T e
2H T -O Y
N -M M H H cy e EBOA J c e -N e c j-N T O O T -O Y
2 C L > c - ' ’n p o < J ) H -
Matt 2 1 : 4 6 “They feared the multitudes because they held Him to be a prophet”; (e) j k N - c 6 H p E T O Y N - K Y n p o c e T B e - J C e - N e p e - N T H Y + o y b h - n Acts 2 7 : 4 “W e sailed under the lee of Cyprus, because the winds were against us”; (65) -fo y e c y - N A Y r j k p e p c u - T N j c c k a c e l e - ' f ’ n h - t n n - o y z m o t M - n N A T i K O N R om 1:11 “For Ilong to see you. that I might impart to you some spiritual gift”; aaaa jcgkac NNe-ntyjkJce Moouie e - n e z O Y O 2 M - n A A O C Mi.pN-nApArriAe NJ^-y e“T M - t y A J c e Acts 4 : 1 7 “But in order that word may spread no further among the people, let us warn them not to speak”; na-n n - o y mnt-pmn-zht Jce-eNec o Y N - n M e I John 5 : 2 0 “He has given us understanding, so that we might know Him who istrue”;l66) Ayiu njiiABOAOc men Ne-cy^q-jci M-ngpi N-TecgiMe N T e y c y H . . . JceKAC e q - N A - p - ® 2 AA n n - a n t c u n i o c Athanasius, Life of St. Anthony (Garitte 8 ; 17 - 2 0 ) “And tliedevil used to assume the form of a woman at night... in order to deceive Anmony”; nxixt-oy N-N-eNT-i.Y— tbbo N -NeycTOAH Jte— epe— TeyeSoYciA NA-cycune egoyN e-ncyHN M - n c u N g Rev 2 2 : 1 4 “Blessed are those who have washed their robes, that they may have the right to the tree of life”; (67) q - N A - M O Y 2 M - n e n N A eT^-oyj^AB JciN-eq-gN-gHT-c N-TeqMi.Ay Luke 1:15 “He will already be filled with the Holy Spirit when he is within his mother’s w o m b ”; (68) J c i N T - A - N e N G i o T e r ^ p n k o t i c go^B ni m m h k e b o a N T e i g e 2 Pet 3 : 4 “For ever since our ancestors fell asleep all things have continued in this way.” THC
T H E C O N D IT IO N A L S E N T E N C E 494 A 'conditw nal sentence' is an adverbial clause construction 491 in w hich the adverbial clause expresses a stipulation (if. . . ). T he stipulation (protasis) can eith er precede or follow the m ain clause (apodosis).
Adverbial Clause (stipulation) I M ain Clause “ If . . ,
)
( th e n ) . . . ”
M ain Clause I Adverbial Clause (stipulation) “ ...
if . . . ”
In o rder to understand the C opiic conditional sentence, it is useful to d istin guish four kinds o f closely related adverbial clause. F
a c t u a l
(a) F actual presupposition clause 495: 'Since o r I f (as seems to he tr u e ). . C
onditionals
(h) G eneral conditional clause 496: 'I f ever o r Whenever o r I f (in a gener al sense) . . . , then . . . ’ 409
ADVIKHIAI.
< I . AUS i : ( <) N S I R I ' ( I I () N
(c) UmlilTcrcniiiitcd causal clausc (nol disiinguishing a from h) 4 9 7 : ‘Since or I f ever or Whenever . . . . (Ih e n ) . . . ’ (d) C ontrary-to-fact clause 498; ‘I f . . . had . . . . then . . . w ould have . . . ’ (etc.) O nly types b and d are unam biguously conditional. F A C T U A L (u
n c o n d i t i o n a l
) PRESUPPOSITION
495 ‘Factualpresupposition clauses’ (not conditional) e< y ^ e-a.T eT N -co Y C U N -T I T eT N a.-co Y N -n a.K efu )T “Since you have known M e, you will know M y F ather also ” (John 14:7) argue from a statem ent o f given fact (since, i f [as seems to he true]), w hich is not a stipulation but a presupposition o f th e given state o f affairs. T hey are headed by the follow ing subordinative conjunctions, expanded by a main clause 234(b): (i) e n e i , e n e iA H , e n e iA H n e p Since (causal). Inasmuch as: (ii) e q j ^ e - (var. e q j ^ n e - ) Since, I f (as seems to he the case). I f indeed; (Hi)
Ka^N.
Even if; (iv) j c e - , ^ e - e n e i A H , a c e - . . . ra^p, g b o a j c e - , Because. C f. also undifferentiated causal clause (c). A lso com para ble are expressions for i f ( 2 cuc, 2 ^ c e < y ^ e - ) and lon^ ax. Inasmuch a s' ( e < t ) o c o n ) , and N T e p e - 348. e q j^e -
eT B e-:xe
GENERAL CONDITION
496 ‘General conditional clauses’ o y N - o Y M e A o c
e
stipulate hypothetical statem ents o r generalizations, w hose m ain clause g ener ally was o r is or w ould be true, under the asserted stipulation, w hether o r not it will ever happen: I f you should ever he here . . . , I f you come here . . . , Whenever you are or may he here . , , . etc. T h e stipulation clause is headed by one o f the follow ing: e q j tu n e
+
Ki.N
410
main clause circum stantial clause ep
‘I f ever. I f ’
‘Even i f
CONDITIONAL
SENTENCE
Cf, also undifferentiated causal (c). A lso com piirable are expressions for ‘In so fa r a s ’ ( 2 o n o v ) and ‘U nless’ ( e i e - , g i m h t i , nc^^b h a, x cupic). F urther exam ples, 493.
UNDIEFERENTIATED CAUSE
497 ‘Undifferenliaied causal clauses’ (factual presupposition/general stipulation)
“Since or I f o r Whenever you have faith, you will receive th em ” (M att 21:22) 2 HAeia^c MEN equ)A ^N -ei I q -N a ^ -^ e K -g c u B nim g b o a “When o r W hen ever o r I f ever o r Once Elijah comes, he w ill com p lete all th in g s” (M ark e r e T N - n i c T G Y e I TerNJt-JciT-oY
9 :1 2 ) do not form ally distinguish betw een factual presupposition (a) and general stipulation (h)., they are am biguous in m eaning and translation. T h ese are form ed w hen the stipulation clause is headed by the bare circum stantial conversion (not preceded by conjunction), or bare epqja^N - 346 (not preceded by conjunction) Cf. also Ma.AicTa. + circum stantial conversion: ‘Especially if/since’.
/ CONTRARY-TO-EACT (CONTRAFACTUAL) CONDITION
498 ‘Contrary-to-fact (contrafactual) conditional clauses’ n jc o e ic e - N G K - M - n e i M A I N e p e -n A c o N n a ^-m o y n e “ L ord, if You had been here, my brother w ould not have d ie d ” (John 11:21) express a stipulation ( ‘irrealis’) that is contrary to reality, i.e. that is not able, or no longer able, to be fulfilled: I f you had been here . . . , But fo r the fa ct that you were here . . . T he adverbial stipulation clause is headed by e - ( N e ) . . . or NCABHA .x.e-, w hich com bine freely witli four form s o f m ain clause: Adverbial Stipulation Clauses I. e-(Ne).. . If..,were/had ... ii. NCABHA J!.eBut for/Apart from the fact lhai . ..
Main Clauses
N e p e - . . . NA-
(ne)
N e-
(ne) 1
... would ...
euj^ne (var. ecy^e) N e e ic n e \ nApA-OYKoyi x -
^ave ..,
... almost would have ...
Cf. table 28. 411
A1)V1;RB1 Al. C I.AUS1
T h e Fo r m a t i o n
of
t r O N S T R U t 1U)N
T A B L E 28 C o n i k a f a c t u a l C onuitional Sentences
A. CoNIRARY-tO-FAn Sni’UI.AIION Cl.AUSUS i. e-(Ne)...expresses a two-fold contrast between present//...were , had ... as follows.
. . . and past
e - N e p e - . e-Ne=, e - n e - (durative senience in circumstantial preterit double conversion) nominal sentence present
e -Ne- + cleft sentence existential sentence
oyN T e-
past
e- +
M M O N (= “Otherwise.. . . ")
e-Ne-+
affirm ative n t - a - , n t negative M n e - , M n «
a»
\
Past tense affirmative is formulated with the focalizing pasi conversion n t - a (without focalizing meaning); past tense negative, with the basic pa.st wne-. ii. n c a b h a J t e - “But for or Apart from the fact that . . ., If.. . were not/had not . .. ” is compatible with any type of main clause (affirmative or negative).
B. CoNrRARV-io-FACr M N e p e - .. . NA - . . . present
aim
C lahsi s
(ne) (durative)
alt. N e — ...+ (ne)
would ■■ (other patterns)
Invariable n e 438 optionally occurs after N e p e - . .. n a - ., .ami N e - , . . e
a
— /(w n e - ) “ . . .would have"
and nji.pji.-OYKOYi A-Z(Mne-) “ . , .almost would have"
Examples: (i)e-(Ne). .. as stipulation: o n t o c e - N e pe-NTBMOoye m-ming nim nkgzcuon . . . e-Nev-NOi Ji-n-eTOY-Ni-MOY c t b h h t ^ gyujanO Y O M - q I NeY-NA-Mez-puj-OY epo-q an eNegShGue 164/7; 12-15 “Truly, if all kinds of beasts and oilier living things ...knew what they would die from ifIhey ate it. they would never take a bite of it"; e-nereTN-niCTeYe PAp e-MU)YcHC I NeTeTNA-nicTGYe epo-> ne John 5:46 “For if you believed Moses, you would believe M e ”; e-Ne-M-nAf p - n e e o o Y I NeN-NA-TAA-q an eTOOT-ic John 18:30 "If ihis Man were not an evildoer, we would not be handing Him over to you"; e - N e - A Nr-OYnoNHpoc N-pu)Me an ne I Nepe-goeiNe NA-KpMpM an ne egOYN epo-i Shlll 118:8-9 “If 1 were iiol a wicked man. people would not murmur 412
CONDITIONAL
SENTENCE
against me ”; e-Ne-NTeTN-geNBAAe I Ne-MMN-®NOBe epu)-TN ne John 9:4l “If you were blind, you would have no guilt”; e - N e - N T K - o Y e N T H 6 Nxerje 6 K-PHT z^pigApo-K I Ne-n-eT®-ecycye ne e-^ANexe m m o - k ty^-neoyoeiuj M - n u ) ^ ShChass 42:26-32 “If you were a weed sprouting up on your own, it would be necessary to tolerate you until harvest time”; e - N e - n e T N e iu ) T ne nNo y T e I NereTNA-MepiT-® ne John 8:42 “If God were your father, you would love M e ”: e-Ne-oyJCi n 6 o n c h oy 2 U>b eq-gooy neNTAq-cycune cu firoY-a.Al I Nef-NA-ANexe ne eyAortuc Acts 18; 14 “If it were an act of violence or a vicious crime that had occurred, I should reasonably bear wiih you, O Jews”; A A H e o c e - N e - O Y M e p o c n-oyu)t ^ - N - e x N ^ A Y epo-OY THp - O Y neNTAK-TAMio-q ^ - n e i c o o Y N-gooY I Ne-NTK-OYMOige ShGu 6 16Io;31-33 “Truly, if it were only one single part of the visible world that You had created within those six days. You would be marvelous”; h e - N e - 0 YN-® 6 0 M n-oya e-®cMiNe N-OYBJiA NTe-OY^ZJtA NTA-q INeq— NA-TAA 6 o-q an ne ShChass 131:53—58 (= Shlll 36:13-15) “Or, ifit were possible for someone to restore the eye of one of his slaves, would he not go ahead and heal him?”; e - N e - 0 YN- e-Ne-NT-A-nJtoeic n N O Y T e ka-oy<5om ^M-ncATANAc e-'*Tpeq-TAK6 N-N-eT^-p-'gUJB eTANOMiA nApA-neYOYU)
(ii) NCABHA Jce- as siipulaiion: ncabha Jce-neKNOMOc ujoon na-I TH I n g (-n a -ta k 6 ne 2M-nATBBi6 Ps 118(119):92 “But for the fact that Thy law ismy meditation (IfThy law were not my meditation), Ishould perish in my lowliness”; NCABHA j!.e-NTOK ne nAeiUJT K A T A - '* c A p 3 . , . De Morle losephi (Lagarde 17:30-18:17) “But for the fact that you are physically M y father”; ncabha Jce-NNei-p-^AT-ccUTM NCA-n-eT*-TNNooY MMO-i e - n A i I eTeTN<^AN— qi N - T A A n e glJCUJ-I H NTGTN-NOJC-T e-OAAAACA N T I-(read Nei-)NA-CU)TM AN n c a - t h y t n John the Presbyter, Life of Pesenihius of Qift (BAp 92:11-14) “Apart from Ihe fact that I shall not disobey Him who brought me to this, I would not obey you even if you chopped off niy head or threw me into the sea”; n c a b h a tap Jte-AN413
AOVI R B I M ,
C lM JS 1-: C O N S T R U C T I O N
cuck Ie
499 N A N o y -c and 2 amoT as main clauses o f the conditional contrary-to-fact. Exclam ations o f regret, expressed as a contrary-to-fact conditional N A N oy-c M - n p u ) M e gt^-m m ay I e - N e - M n o Y - - x .n o - q “ It w ould be better for that m an if he had not been b o m ” (M att 2 6 :2 4 ) are based upon n a n o y - c ‘it w ould be b etter’ and/or 2 am o i ‘how good it w ould have b ee n ’, as follow s.
(a) Exclamation + e - N e . . . (contrary-to-fact clause 498) NANOY-c e - N e . . . “ It w ould be better i f . . . w ere/h ad . . . ” 2 AM0 1 e - N e . . . “ How good if w ould have been i f . . . w ere/h ad . . . , If only
. . . w ere/had . . . ” Examples: NiNOy-c N i - q Ngoyo I e-Ne-yN-oycuNe n-cike x iy e e-neqMiK2 Nce-NOJc-q e-reeiAiCCi Mark 9:42 “It would be much better for him ifa millstone were hung round his neck and he were thrown into the sea”; 2 iMOV I e-Ne-iNr- 0 yMii-'’20 MT iN iycu MAl-n-eTe-ncu-i iN ne SliCliass 77:16-19 “H ow good it would have been if I were not (Ifonly I were not) greedy for money and for what does not belong to m e ”; g ^ M o i 6e I e-Ne-MN-'’pa>Me n k o t k h NCi-N-eT*-NKOTK gN-TeycyH iycu Ne-oyN-gNiPieON (i.e. 2GNirieON) e-Ni
(h) 2 amoY + contrary-to-fact main clause 498, ‘‘How good it w ould have been if . . . , If only . . . ". T he stipulation clause in pattern (h) has the form o f a m ain clause (N eY -N A - etc.). Examples: giMoT o n 1Ney-Ni-ficujce (textual var. e-Ney-Ni-) g b o a N-N-eT"u^TOprp Gal .S:12 “I wish (How good it would have been if) those who unsettle you would be mutilated!”; giMoi IN e - i N O N - o y A M M O - O y ShIV 92:18 “Ifonly (How good it would have been if) we were one of them!”; o n I Ne-a;iTei^N-6
414
PURPOSF. A N D
Ri;SHLT
M I X H D C O N U l r i O N A I, S H N T E N C E S
500 Real and contrary-to-faci clauses can be gram m atically united in the sam e conditional sentence. Examples: mh
501 S O M E A P P R O X I M A T E E Q U I V A L E N T S O F T H E C O N D I T I O N A L SENTF.NCF
(a) Articulated attributive clause 411 instead of stipulation clause; e.g. n-eT®Ni-j!.i-'’oyi Ae e-nenfji er^-oyiiB I MMNT-cj-'’KU) gboa o^A-eNe? Mark 3:29 “Whoever blasphemes against the Holy Spirit never has forgivenes.s” (= If any one blasphemes again.st the Holy Spirit, they will never have forgiveness)
(h) Main clause (or imperative) Instead of stipulation clause; e.g. nicreye e-njcoeic Tc nexc IAycu K-Ni-oyJCil Acts 16:31 “Believe in the Lord Jesus Christ and you will be saved” (= If you believe in the Lord Jesus Christ, you will be saved); K - M H p e-'’c 2 iMe I Mnp-
(r) Main clause (or imperative) + conjunctive; e.g. Jci-^tne I N T e T N - e m e j!.e-nJcoeic 20a5 Ps 33(34);7 (33:8 Budge) “Taste and know that the Lord is good" (= If you laste, you will know that the Lord is good); ig-TN-Ni-oyeM-AAiy an M-neiMi I Nr— TM-Jccu Ni-N Ncyopri Xf-io; re Ter(i.e. TeK-)eprAcii ApophPaIr 241 (Chatne 73:28-29 = Z 346:21-22) “W e will not eat anything here and not have you first tell u.s whal your occupation is” (= Unless you first tell us what your occupation is, we will not eat anything here)
(d) Command + future conjunctive; e.g. iirei ITipoy--)- nh-tn Matt 7:7 “Ask, and il will be given you” (= If you ask, it will be given you); MipN-npocexe e-Neqa;iJce ITipn-eiMe e-n-eTN-a;iNe Nccu-q ShLefort 41:9 “Let us pay alleiition to His words, and we shall understand what we are looking for” (= If we pay attention, we shall understand).
PURPO SE AND RESU LT PURPOSE
502 E xpressions o f purpose (to, in order to, th a t. . . might, so th a t. . . might) are ad v erb ial clau ses and in fin itiv e phrases. T h ey in clu d e: e -'* in fin itiv e .
415
ADVHRBIAL
C L A U S E C: <) N S T R U C ' T I O N
e - n r p e —, e -® T p e -, g t b g —^infinitive, ^ e - o r ^eK a.(A )c + optative, x e - or jceKA(A)c + e»N A -, T hese often expand a verb o f incom plete predication; cf. 185. E.g. A N -e i I e-*'oY cuyjT N A -q M att 2 :2 “ W e have com e to worship H im ” ; -f--O Y ea;-N A Y ep cu -T N I jc g k a c e ie --f- n h - t n n - o y 2 m o t M-rTNATiKON R om 1:11 “ F or 1 long to see you, that I might impart to you som e spiritual g ift.” F or further exam ples, cf. 493. F or the future conjunctive T A p e- w ith nuances o f purpose, cf. 3 5 8 (a); fo r the am biguity o f purpose ver sus result, cf. 504.
RESULT
503 E xpressions o f result (so as to, so that) are adverbial clauses and infinitive phrases. T hey include: 2 cucT e e-® infinitive. 2 cu cT e e -® T p e -, 2 cucT e N T e- (conjunctive), and T A p e-. E.g. AY“ Me2 - n j c o e t c n a y * z c u c r e e-« T p eY -CUMC L uke 5 :7 “ T hey filled both th e boats, so that they began to sin k ” ; A q -A p x e c e A i n —®TAiye-®oi
NT-Aq-
NT-A-npcuwe
6 B O A N g H T - T H y T N neT®-NA-Kcu N A - q N - o y e c o O Y N-oytUT Nxe-nAi ge 2 M - n c A B B A T O N e-YZieiT m h N - q - N A - A M A g T e M M O - q an Ncj-TOYNOc-q I n p cuMe 6e <^OBe N o y H p e - n e c o o y I esecTi 2M - n c A B B A T O N e - p - n n e T - N A N o y - q Matt 12:11-12 “What person among you, if they have one
sheep and it falls into a pit on the sabbath, will not lay hold of itand lift itout? Of how much more value is a human being than a sheep! So it is lawful to do good on the sab bath”
T H E A M B I G U I T Y OF P U R P O S E A N D R E S U L T
504
The dividing line between purpose (in order to), intended result (so as to), and conse quential result (sa that) is sufficiently fluid that ji.e- or ji.eKA(A)c epe- and e-® (rpe-) sometimes express result, while gcucre e-'’(Tpe-) and TApe- sometimes expre.sspurpose. E.g. re-jtcug gcucu-q A y c u r e — o y c u M e B O A j N - A K A e A p c i A n i m N - ' ’. a . A i M 0 N i 0 N IJ C 6 K A C e y e - M 6 C T c u - ® 6BOA 2 i t n - T c MN-NeqArreAOc N e e N-Npip e T ® - o y e M - ' ’A K A e A p c i A
e y -M o c re
M M O -O y
eboa
2 iT N - N - e T ''-N A y
epo - o y Shlll 203:8-12 “But you touch and eal from all the filth of demons, so then 416
CORRELATED
COMPARISON
(JC6KAC eye-) you are hated by Jesus and His angels, like swine that eat filth and are despised by those who watch them”; nKeceene N-Npu)Me e T e - M n o y - M O Y ZNNeinAHPH Mnoy-M eTANoei o n eeoA zN-NegBHye N -N e y b iJ t I 6-®tmT pey-oycu
C O R R E L A T E D C O M P A R I S O N : ‘J U S T A S . . .
SO TO O . . .’
505 A dverbial expressions o f com parison jitsi as, as are built on the prep o sitio n al phrases w e e o r K A T A -ee (“ In the m a n n er” ); negation, n e e a n , K A T A -ee AN not as. T he article phrase e e ( r - 2 e ) is expanded by eith er i. a relative o r circum stantial clause; In the manner that X is true. E .g. K A TA -ee e N T - A q - 9 a)N c t o o t - ^’ Jo h n 14:31 “ A s H e has com m an d ed m e ” (In th e m anner that H e has com m anded m e) Ka0(bq IvexeiX ato (ioi; K A T A -ee e x ^-cH ? Rom 3 :4 “ A s it is w ritten” ; r i e e o n e p e - n A p x i e p e y c p-®M NTpe NA -i A cts 2 2 :5 “ A s th e high priest bears m e w itn ess” ; cf. 5 0 6 (a ); or ii. a construction o f general relationship 147 ( o f . . . ), w h o se second term is expanded by a relative or circum stantial clause: In the m anner o f A, such that X is true. E.g. N e e r^ p n - t k c ^ i m e e-yp.R O A 9M -n90(T yT t f , 1 C o r 11:12 “ F o r as fem ale com es from m ale” (In the m anner o f the fem ale, she-beingfrom the m ale); cf. 5 0 6 (b ); or iii. only a construction o f general relationship or the p o ssessiv e article: In the manner o f A. E.g. N e e N -N e T N e io T c A cts 7:51 o l itaxepeq 6 (icbv “ A s y o u r ancestors (did or w ere) (In the m anner o f y o u r an cesto rs)” ; NT eK ^ e M att 19:19 “ A s (you love) y o u rself” (In your ow n m anner); 506(c). Also comparable are + circumstantial clause 'As, As if. On the grounds that' and 2 CUC ecyjte- + main clause ‘As i f 493.
506 A ‘sentence o f correlated comparison ’ (Just as . . . so too) is an adverbial clause construction 491 that consists o f tw o elem ents— (1) an adverbial clause o r p hrase o f com parison 505 ju s t as, as prem odifying o r postm o d ify in g (2) the m ain clause headed by t a i r e e e so too ( “ T his is the m an n er” ).
Adverbial Clause o f Comparison I ta i r e e e . . .
taY r e e e . . . I Adverbial Clause o f Comparison 417
AliVliRBIAL
CLAUSF. C O N S T R U C T I O N
L ike adverbial clauses of com parison,
t jii
x e e e is expanded in three w ays;
In the m anner that X is true, rie€ e x e - (or e - ) . . . this is the m anner that Y is true xa^T x e e e e x e - (or e - ) . ..
(a)
Here r e e e is expanded by a relative or circum stantial clause (‘th a t’). E.g. K a.x a.-ee e N X - a q - 2 cuN eroor-® I r a l r e e e e-f'-eipe Fi m o - c John 14:31 “ I do as H e has com m anded m e ” (In the m anner that H e com m anded me, this is the m anner that I act in). Further examples: KATA-ee eNT-AN-cu)TM t a I o n t e ee eNT-AN-NAy Ps 47[48]:8 “As we have heard, so have we also seen”; t a T re ee eTq-NHy m m o - c Ne e NT-iTeTN-Niy eq-Ni-BU)K egpiT e-rne Acts 1:11 “He will come (NHy) in the same way as you saw Him go into heaven” (This is the manner in which He iscoming, in the manner that you saw Him ascending into heaven) outkk; £>^EijaETai ov TpoTtov £0Eaaaa0E af)Tov nopEUOnevov eI(; tov ofcpavov; fiee eTcj-coTn e-NArreAOC taJ on re e e eNT-Aq-KAHpoNOMi N-oypAN eq-
(h)
In the m anner o f A, such that X is true, s e e n - . .. e r e -(o r e - ) .,. this is the manner o f B. such that Y is true r a i r e e e n- . . . e r e - (or
e^ .
.
.
H ere taT r e e e is expanded by a construction o f general relationship 147 (o f . . . w hose second term is expanded by a relative o r circum stantial clause.
E.g. riee rap N -x ecg iw e e-yeBO A gM -ngooyT r e I raT r e e e Ki-n9ooYT e - y e B O A ?N -T ec9ine n e 1 C or 11:12 “ F o r as fem ale com es from m ale, so m ale com es from fem ale.” Further examples: Nee rip n -Ta n n h c m n -Ja m b p h c eNT-Ay-AgepAT-oy oyBe-MUJycHc tai re ee N-NeiKOOye e y - t oyse-TMe 2 Tim 3:8 “As Jannes and Jambres opposed Moses, so these others also oppose the truth” (In the manner of Jannes and Jambres, who opposed Moses, this is the manner of these others, who oppose the truth); Ne e N-N-eT'’-oyeM-'’Aq N-pip gi-^ZcuMiN epe-NeygNAAy THp-oy TOAM ... TAi ON re ee N-geNpcuMe N-peq-Mi
4 IS
CORRELATED
(c)
In the manner o f A, this is the manner o fB
COMPARISON
N ee n - ... Ta.ll
xe e e n - .
H ere r e e e is expanded only by a construction o f general relatio n sh ip or by the possessive article. E.g. r i e e M-nnApAnxujMa^ I xM x e e e M - n e 2 MOX R om 5 :1 5 oux cbq t o Jtapd 7tTC0(ia, oCxcoq t o x a p to n a “ T he free g ift is not like the trespass” (N ot in the m anner o f the trespass, this is the m am ier o f the free gift); n e e N -N e x N e io x e I xa.T ■gujT-THyTN r e T exN 'ge A cts 7:51 "A s y o ur ancestors (did or w ere), so also (do or are) y o u ” (In the m an n er o f your ancestors, this is your m anner).
(d) E lem ents from these three patterns occur blended into m ixed types. (a + b) KATA-ee rip eTe-yNTA-N-g^Z m - m e a o c 2 N-oycu)ma n-oyu)t ... tai Te TENge THp-N e-ANON-oycuJMA N-oyuJT gM-nexc R o m 12:4-5 “For as in one body we have many members ... so we all are one body in Christ” (b + a) fiee rip N-TeepHbe e-
xa^T r e e e AS a c o n j u n c t i o n 507
r e e e (+ main clause, relative, o r circum stantial) also functions as a co n ju n ctio n expressing extension 234(a), In this function it articulates a lo g ical next step o r conclusion; som etim es it signals a new train o f thought : liile w ise. So. (Cf. 2 c u c r e follow ed by a m ain clause 234[a], 503.) Examples: tai re ee NANoy-®nu)T epAT-q M - n N o y r e ShIV 175:13 “Likenise, it is good to flee unto God"’; tai te e e eTepe-Nujopn NA-p-® 2Ae NTe-NgAe p-®
N ee 508
FORMI NG EXCLAMATIONS
N e e + attributive clause also form s an exclam ation, O how . . . ! E .g. r i e e e T e -N e Y - [ i.e . N N eY -]e< y-M e< yT -N 2 '3^n M - n N o y T e R o m 11:33 “ O how unsearchable are the judgem ents o f G o d !” (O the w ay that they shall not be able to search out the jud g em en ts o f G od!).
419
24
Reported Speech and Cognition: D irect and Indirect Discourse
The Nature of Reported Discourse in Coptic 509 Reported Discourse and Its Signals 509 Verbs of Speaking and of Cognition 510 The Signalling of Questions 511 Request for the Content of Discourse or Cognition
512
Constructions 513 Reported Discourse Amplifying a Direct Object 513 jcu) MMo-c x .e - and Similar Constructions 514 Other constructions of Jtcu, jc.e-, Jcoo» 515 6 n - and 6n t» Followed by Reported Discourse 516 Parenthetical n e jt e - 517 Inverted Discourse 518 Indirect and Direct Discourse 519 Indirect Discourse and Its Signals 519 Altered person 520 Altered syntax of command or request 521 Altered form of question concerning place or manner 522 Direct Discourse and Its Signals 523 Neutral Discourse (Not Explicitly Direct or Indirect) 524
THE N A T U R E OF REPO RTED D IS C O U R S E IN COPTIC R E P O R T E D D I S C O U R S E A N D I TS S I G N A L S
509 ‘Reported discourse ’ -f'-JC.U) MMO-C Na^-K IHnOOY
K-UJCUne
NMMA-I
9M-iina.pa.Aic o r , “Truly, I say to you today. You will he with Me in Paradise" (Luke 23:43) n e Jta -q
iH -n a Y A .o c J c e - e N e - K . - o Y a ) c u
e - ^ ^e i
e -e iA .H M
said to Paul, D o you wish to come up to Jerusalem? " (Acts 25:9) 420
“He
NATURE
OF R E P O R T E D
DISCOURSE
a^Y-eiMe Jce-NT-Aq-.x.e-Terna^pa^BOA.H eTBHHT-oy “For they perceived that it m’qj about them that H e had told this parable" (Mark 12: 12) a^jci-c .KeKa^c epe-N eicuN e p -^^oeiK. “Command these stones to become loaves o f bread” (Matt 4:3) a^q-MOYTe e-neqpa^N x e -T c “He called His nam e/eiw i” (Matt 1:25) expresses the content of speech or thought as the expansion of a verb of speaking or of cognition 510; or as the content of naming expressed in a con struction of name assignment 513(b). It follows the verb (with one exception 518). Reported discourse can be an affirmative statement, command or request, question, excbmation, or less than a complete sentence; it can be as short as one syllable or consist of many sentences. The most common verbs of speaking are jtcu m m o - c ‘say’ 514(a) and the past tense verboid n e jc e ‘said’ 380. Reported discourse is an entity statement 150. Its initial signal is mostly the morph jc,e-. Other initial signals are: : x e N e - ( : x e - e N e - ) / J C N - . . . :x n - . . . ‘whether ( . . . or . . . )’ 511; various morphs signalling direct discourse 523; n n V e e + relative clause 522; and in indirect commands or requests, JC.eKa^(a^)c/jc,e- + optative, e-®infinitive, e-® rp e-, and the conjunctive 521. For reported discourse without any such initial signal, cf. 516, 517, 518. VERBS OF S P E A K I N G AN D OF C O G N I T I O N
510 Examples of verbs o f 'speaking' and of 'cognition' are: (i) speaking, Ta.MO jc e- ‘tell’, oycuiyB jc,e- ‘answer’, jtcu m m o - c jc.6- ‘say’ 514, 515, :xnoy jc e - ‘ask’, and the verboid n e jt e - Jce- 380 ‘said’; (ii) cognition, ei>re Jce‘know, perceive’, M e e y e jc,e- ‘think’, nay -xe- ‘see, perceive’, n icreY e jc e- ‘believe’, p-nM eeYe x . e - ‘remember’, c c u t m jc e- ‘hear, learn’, c o o y n jc e - ‘know’ 518, -f--®Moi2e jc.e- ‘be amazed at the fact (that)’, 6 n - / 6 n t » ‘find out’ 516; and others. Verbs of speaking and n e jc e - are optionally expanded by an expression of the partner in discourse (hearer), either as a prepositional phrase (2a^MHN •f—jccu MMO-C NH-TN JCG- Mark 8:12 “Truly, I say to you ne:xJt-Y NA-q jc,e-ce njcoeic Matt 9:28 “They said to H im , Yes, Lord” ; NTepi-MOYTG AC oyBH-q JC.G-CMOY epo-i Paphnoute Cephalas, Stories of the Monks of the Desert [BMis 472:24—26] “When 1 called out to him. Bless me!”); or as the direct object of the verb (a^q-:xNOY=ia re Tcyopn N-eNTOA.H epo-oY T H p-oY Mark 12:28 “He asked A/w, Which is the first commandment of all?”), depending on selection of verb.
421
RUPORTKD
SPKECIl
AND
COGNITION
THE S I G N A L L I N G OF Q U E S T I O N S
511 In reported discourse and elsewhere, some questions have exactly the same clause structure as an affirmation. Cf. also 33. nejc.jL.-q NjL.-q jcg- ntok n e nppo n -T oy-s-aT means both “He said to Him, Are you the Jewish K ing?” and “ He said to Him, You are the Jewish King” (John 18:33) But in many questions, one or more formal signals of interrogation are pre sent: i. an optional morph signalling interrogation such as e n e - ,
or
mh
neJtJL.-Y NJL.-q jcg- mh ntok ^tucu-K on ntk - oygboa ^N-NeqMjk^eHTHC “They said to him. Pray tell, are noi you also one of His dis ciples?” (John 18:25) Some interrogative markers 238, such as aipai and m h ,pray te ll .... belong only to the perspective of direct discourse; others, e.g. correlative jcR- . . . jcn- (vars. JCCN- and jcin-) whether . . . or, are only indirect; while others still, such as inter rogative e n e - (asking whether or not a proposition is true), occur in both direct and indirect discourse.
ii. a word or phrase whose meaning is interrogative (such as Ntw who? Aqp which? o y w h at? o y n p how m any? tcun where? fi-oni where? NJL.UP N - 2 e how ? G T B e - o Y O r jce-OY w h y?)
nejce-neiA A T oc NjL.-q jce-o Y "re truth?” (John 18:38)
tmg
when?
"Pilate said to Him, What is
iii. selection of a verb meaning ask neiAjL^Toc A6 ON jk^q-JCNOY-t) Jce-N-r-NjL-
422
CONSTRUCTIONS R E Q U E S T F O R T H E C O N T E N T OF D I S C O U R S E OR C O G N I T I O N 512
A request for the content of discourse or perception is expressed by the intenogative specifier oy ‘what?’; (a) as the focal point of a cleft sentence 4 6 1 , oy ncTK-jctu MMO-q “What are you saying?” ; (h) as the focal point of a focalizing conversion 4 4 5 , C K -Jce-oy “What are you saying?"; (c) introduced by jc e - (after a verb of speaking), eK-xtu MMo-c Jce-oy “What are you saying?” Request for a name is expressed by NiM ‘who?’ in a naming construction 1 3 0 . Examples; (a) o y n e t- N A - J c o o - q John 12:27 “What shall I say?” ; o y n c T c - J t O K e i 4 8 9 N i - K c i m c j u n Matt 17;25 “Whal do you think, Simon?” ; (h) nptuMC N--t--cooyN aiN Jc e -e K -Jc e -o y Luke 22;60 “Man, I do not know what you are saying” ; cK-NJiy e - o y Mark 8;23 “What do you see?” ; (c) cK -jctu m m o - c jc e - o y eTBHHT-K John 1;22 “What do you say about yourself?” Naming: e K - o y e ( ^ - M o y T e e p o - q jcc - nim Luke 1;62 “What would you have him called?” ; nim n e neKpaiN Luke 8;30 “What is your name?”
C O N ST R U C T IO N S I
REPORTED DISCOURSE A M PL I FY IN G A DI RECT OBJECT
;13 (a) The direct object of a verb o f cognition 510 is compatible with amplification (second object) in the form of a :x e- clause TOT6 A N -c o y N -T N H c o c jce-M iAHTH n e necpjL^N direct object
(we then learned the island that Malta is its name) “We then learned that the island was called Malta” (Acts 28:1) that contains a resumptive morph, agreeing with the direct object in number/(gender). (Thus in the previous example, c in neclpjL^N agrees in gender and number with t n h c o c . ) Further examples; h N-TCTN-Naiy e-N jexxH N M N -N p eq -a^ q p e-ei^ tu x o N Ml^-ptuMe NIM N-aiT-NoyTe jc e - e p e -n e y jH T oyocyq FioyHP ShChass 119:38-46 “Pray, do you not see how much the hearts of the pagans and ido^ters and all the atheists are crushed? (Do you not see the pagans . . . that their heart is crushed by how much?)” ; aixxai naiV TN -cooyN MMO-q Jce-oyeBOX t c u n n e John 7:27 “Yet we know where this Man comes from” (As for this Man, we know Him, whence He is); N Tepe-njtJiJte e p o - q MMiNMMO-q e q - o n-*3iT-6om . . . Jiytu jce-3 iy jcpo e p o - q Athanasius, Life of St. Anthony 5 (Gsiritte 8:1-3) “When the Enemy saw himself to be powerless . . . and to have been defeated” ; fin p -M eey e e p o - i jo a c u c j c e - N T - a i i - j c e - n a i i 2 ^ p o - i MAyaiji-T John the Presbyter, Life of Pesenthius of Qift (BAp 111:24-25) “Do not suppose in any way that I have said this on my own authority”
(h) The direct object in a coiistnu tion 130(b) is likewise compatible with amplification by jc e - introducing the assigned name. E.g. o yn oA ic e-
Ri;i>oRTi:n JCCU
s p llc h
a n d
c o g n it i o n
MMO-C J c e - A N D S I M I L A R C O N S T R U C T I O N S
514 In almost every construction reported discourse is an expansion of the verb itself 181, coming after any adverbial modifiers or adverbial clauses modify
ing the verb. Verb o f Speaking or Cognition IAdverbial Modifiers IReported Discourse
jL.Y-OYtt>
amplification (second object) in the form of a Jce- clause, which contains the actual content of discourse. The invariable direct object - c / mmo - c is cat aphoric, i.e. refers ahead to the following Jce- clause. JCCU MMO-C
+
jc e - clause (expanding - c )
X.OO-
c Verb + Formal + Direci Object
Expansion o f Formal Forr Direct Object
Thus ■f-jccu AG MMO-C NH-TN I jLc-Moocue ^M-nenNjL. Gal 5:16 “But I say to you. Walk by the Spirit” A q -jc o o -c N-TeqMjL^jiY ^-a^F.-TcuoyN “He said to his mother. Arise” (ApophPatr 182 [Chaine 4 5 : 10]) (The formal direct object does not express number and gender; it has only grammatical meaning and therefore no distinct translation in English.) In nondurative constructions of jccu, only the pronominal state Jcoo= and the imper 366(b) occur. ative Further examples; Ney-JCtu raip m m o-c J c e - A - n e q j H T n tu c y c Maik 3:21 “For they were saying. He is beside Himself’ (His mind has turned aside); mcuchc raip a i q - j c o o - c J c e -M J i-T a ire -n e K e itu T NM-xeKMaiaiY M ark 7 :1 0 “For Moses said. Honor your father and your mother” ; aiq-aipxei n 6 i-Tc e-®T2icye-®oeicy aiyo) e - * J c o o - c Jc e -M eT JiN o e i Matt 4 :17 “Jesus began to preach and to say. Repent"; a ijc i- c fie N2i-N j c e - o y n e T c ~ A O K e i n ji-k Matt 22:17 “Tell us, then, what you think” 489
For other constructions of jccu, cf. 515. Other verbs occur in the jccu mmo-c construction: e.g. on= ‘deem’, (b) cji^s ‘write’, ccutm epo= ‘hear’, etc.; their formal direct objects are -c or -q or vary freely between the two. For 6nt-c ‘find out, discover’, cf. 516. Examples: a i q - o n - c raip Jce-oyaiNairKaiioN n e e-®TM-K 2iai-y e-*cyaijce ShAmel II 44:7 “ I deemed ( o n - c ) ihai it was necessary not to let them speak” ;
424
CONSTRUCTIONS
^
Vi-on-q 6 e Jce-OYJ^NjirKaiiON ne e-®cenc-NecNHy 2 Cor 9:5 “I thought (on-q) it necessary to urge the brethren"; aLN-oytu n-jccu (i.e. CN-JCtu) m m o - c N 2 Ji2 N - c o n JiN-caij-tJ JCe-epe-TMJiaiY ” MMJiaiY N-N-eT^-jM-n-f-Me Nai-C2Jki-2tuB NiM N 2i-N ShlV 108:15-18 “W e have already said many times and have written (caij-*!) that the Mother Superior or Mother Superiors of those in the vil lage should write about all things to us”; Snp-caij-q jce-nppo N-'ioyAaiT John 19:21 “Do not write The Jewish King"; MnpTpe-oyJk ccutm epo-q jM-neyJirreAioN jce- . . . N ce-Meeye Jte- . . . ShIV 39:4-8 “Let no one hear (ctuTM epo-q) in the Go.spel lesson that... and suppose that... mh ... aiN-ctuTM H 2iN-6 NT-q eq- c H 2 Jce-aiy-KTO-oy Shlll 21:17-18 “Have we not heard and have we not found it written (6 NT-q e q - c H ? ) that they returned?”
(c) In expository style, a clause o f reported discourse can be heralded and rep re sented by the sing. m asc. dem onstrative pronoun th is’.
m eaning ‘the follow ing,
Examples: KaiTJi-ee exepe-TcyNairturH THp-c cooyN e-naii Jce-ai-NeNeioTC MOy o y T N-NeyctUMJi eTBe-nNoyxe aiytu c t b h h t - n Shlll 128:22-24 "Just a.s the enlire congregation knows l/ie following, namely that our fathers mortified their bodies for ihe sake of God and for our sake”; KopB 2kN exe— naiT ne Jte-oyAU 3poN ne Mark 7:11 “Corban, which means the following, that itis an offer ing” 515
Other constructions o fx .w , jce- (JCi- before zero article), Jcoo= 'say, tell, utter, talk about, speak' (a) 'Say, tell, utter, recount’ words: aiy-Jce-KJiT e - n M N T - o y e Luke 24:9 “They told this lo the eleven”; Ney-Jttu A e N-nair e-NJinocTOAOc Luke 24:10 “They told this to the apostles”
(h) jctu MMOs/jcoo= referring back to the number/(gender) of an antecedent or other entity term: 'Say. utter, recount, speak about'. E.g. ncuAjce n-ic eNT-Atj-jcoo-q Matt 26:75 "The saying of Jesus, which He had said”; ce-NJi-TtuoyN raip N6i-9eNxpicToc ti-NoyJt . . , eic^HHTe Jti-aipn-jt.oo-Y n h - t n h ^ t t 24:24-25 “For false Christs will arise ... Lo, I have told you about them beforehand”; Ite-t'-Jca) M M O - q nh-tn Mark 13:37 “What I say (That which I say) to you.” (c) Forming a compound verb 180: Jci-*oyai ‘blaspheme’, jci-*cyKaiK ‘ciy out’, jci-*6 oa ‘lie, tell lies’
(d) Infinitive Jce-, i.e. jctu e-: ‘talk about, refer to, m ean’ an object of thought. E.g. aiy -M ey e Jce-eq-Jce-neNKOTK M-ntuBcy John 11:13 “They thought that He meant taking rest in sleep”
(e) Infinitive jcepos, i.e. jctu epo«: ‘tell’ someone. E.g. TtuoyN eT-Jcepo-K Mark 2:11 “Arise, I tell you”
(f) Absolute jctu or jcoo-c: ‘say things, speak', (i) Without direct object or reported discourse expressed, e.g. ce-jctu raip aiytu fi-ce-eipe aiN Matt 23:3 “For they preach, but do not practice” (They say things and do not do things); (ii) Jcoo-c (with out following reported discourse), e.g. eicjHHTe aii-jcoo-c nht-n Matt 28:7 “Lo, Ihave told you” 18oi) Einov 6|iiv.
425
RUPO RT HD SPHKCH 6 n -
516
and
6
n t
»
fo llo w e d
by
AND
( OGNITION
re p o rte d
discourse
When the verb 6 i n c ‘find out, discover’ functions as a verb of cognition, only the fomis 6 n - and 6 n t* occur. Alternate constructions are selected according as conjugation of 6 n - / 6 nt= is affirmative or negative. i. Affirmatire conjugation: 6 tJT«. The suffixed invariable direct object - c (6 n t - c ) does not express number or gender (it has no distinct translation in English), but gram matically repre.sents and heralds the discourse clause, which follows as its expansion. The discourse clause has the form of e=. presumably the circumstantial conversion 426. ( J te - does not occur.) Ai-6FiT-c cy-crK jiA F.i NJi-q eTBe-jenZHTHMai NTe-neyNOMOc “I found that he was accused about questions of their law" (Acts 23:29) ii. The verb j e e p o - c ‘discover’ is constructed in the same way: N e e N T -aiN -2 e c p o - c c u - jli - ^kba MMO-Oy T H p - o y aiytu eq-K JiT aiK piN e MMO-Oy e - n M o y “Just as we found that he was taking vengeance upon them all
and condemning them to death” (ShAmel II 543:11-12 |= ShWess9 l59fl.-8-l4]) iii. Negative conjugation: 6 fi-. The discourse clause has the form of e=, presumably the focalizing conversion 457. (J te - does not occur.) m m o - c JiN J t e - o y “ I do not understand ( 6 n - . . . aiN) what you are saying” (Mark 14:68) NT-6 N -eK -N ai-p-oY aiN “You do not figure out what to do (what you will do)” (ShChass 33:14-15) M rfq -6 N -eq -N a i-aiM a i2 T e M M O-oy ^ - o y “He did not discover how he would lay hold of them” (ShChass 73:19-22)
N - 'f - f i N - e p e - J t a )
A nominal sentence expanding negative 6 n - occurs in unconverted form aiytu naiAjiOc M n e q -6 N -S N r-N iM “My people has not known who 1 am” (Isa 1:3)
PARENTHETICAL n e j c e -
517 T he verboid n e j c e - occurs not only before reported discourse, b u t also par enthetically in the m iddle or at the end. N T -jk.N -ei n e jL A - y
426
INDIRECT
AND
DIRECT
DISCOURSE
I NVERTED DISCOURSE
518 As a rhetorically marked figure, reported discourse can precede the verb c o o y N ‘know’ and tts synonyms. TGNoy cj-Njiy e e o A I n sees we do not know” (John 9:21)
Nj icy A e N - ^ e
- t n - c o o y n jl.n
“But how he now
Further examples: o y n e fq -N J i-a i-q (i.e. -Nji-aiai-q) Nji-q I ptUMC nim cooyN ShWess9 108/).-23-25 “Everybody knows what he will do to him” (What he will do to him everybody knows); eapjte NaiNOy-q h q - j o o y I n i m n j h t - t h y t n nex®cooyN aiN ShLeyd 365o; 1-5 “Who among you does not know whether he (or it) is good or bad!” ; aii-NjiY o n e-KeztuoN II e ix e eapjte-eq-cpMpoMT h N T O q ec y Jte - 2iq-p-®BAAe I Mni - e c y - 6 M - * 6 o M e-®Noei Shlll 210:7-9 “ I saw yet another animal. Whether it was stupefied or in fact blind I could not make out” ; e ix e ce-ON'2 eiTe c e - M O o y T I N - T N - c o o y N aiN Martyrdom of the Seven Sleepers of Ephesus (Morgan M633 f.8v 22-23; Dep. 168; c f TillHML I 22:4-5) “Whether they are alive or dead we do not know”
IN D IR E C T A N D D IR E C T D ISC O U R SE I N D I R E C T DI S C O U R S E A N D ITS S I GNALS
519 ‘Indirect discourse' (reporter’s perspective) is marked by one or more alter ations of the speaker’s purported words or thoughts so as to create, as a textu al effect, the perspective of a reporter or onlooker—the so-called ‘indirect’ perspective. For example, a speaker’s own words m y hour (Jesus said. My hour [Tjk^oyNoy] has come) can also be reported in the altered form of his hour (Jesus knew that His hour [ x e q o y N o y ] had come), thus expressing the indirect perspective of a reporter. Selection of direct or indirect perspective depends upon the author’s choice in each instance; both kinds of discourse are common. (The distinction o f Coptic direct and indirect discourse does not always coincide with a corresponding distinction in English.)
Three forms of alteration can occur in Coptic to signal the reporter’s indirect perspective: altered person ( “my h o u r” shifted to his hour) 520 altered syntax of command or request ( “sit down" shifted to fo r them to sit down) 521 altered form of a question concerning place or m w m cr ( “where is he stay ing? ” shifted to the place where he is staying) 522 These alterations are independent of one another and therefore can co-occur. (English speakers will note that tense in Coptic indirect discourse is no differ ent fro m the corresponding expression in direct discourse; there is no shift o f 427
X
REPORTED
SPEECH
AND
COGNITION
tense. R ather, C optic indirect discourse expresses relative tim e 5 2 9 : e.g. M n e q - T A M e - A A A Y z n - n g c n h y J c e - q - t y c u N e Life o f St. Pachom ius [Leforl 87:12] “ H e did not tell any o f the brethren that he w as sick .” literally H e did not tell any o f the brethren that he is sick. T his is strikingly different from English, w here shifted tense is often one o f the E nglish signals o f indi rect perspective.)
520 Altered person in indirect discourse. In indirect discourse, personal m orphs that w ould have occurred in the speaker’s ow n w ords are shifted w herever possible to express the reporter’s perspective (1st person shifted to 2d o r 3d; 2d person shifted to 1st o r 3d; etc.). Indirect (reporter’s perspective): e q - c o o y N n 6 i-T c j c e - A -TeqoY N O Y e i “ W hen Jesus knew that H is hour had co m e” (John 13:1) D irect (speaker’s perspective): structed from John 13:1)
a. - ta .o y n o y
ei “ M y hour has co m e” (co n
From this exam ple o f indirect discourse (John 13; 1) it is possible also to im ag ine the speaker’s ow n w ords in direct discourse as reconstructed above: 1 st person t a o y n o y “ M y h o u r” is shifted to 3d person req o Y N O Y “ H is h o u r” in order to signal the indirect perspective o f an onlooking reporter. Further examples: MneK-xaiMO-T Jce-TeK cz'iM eTeGen 12:18 “You didnol tell me that she was your wife” (direct discourse: xaiCZlMe r e “She is my wife”); n n e q TJiMe-AaiaiY ^N -N ec N H y J c e -q - c y tu N e Life of St. Pachomius (Lefort 87:12) “He did not tell any of the brethren that he was sick” (direct; -t--cya)Ne “/ am sick”); oyeZ-caiZN e n j i - i e-*T p ai-ei cyaipo-K ^iJCN-MMOoy Matt 14:28 “Bid me come to You on the water” (direct: aiMoy y>aipo-i 2 '-JtN~MM0 0 y “Come to Me on the water”); Juq-eniTiMJi NJi-y JceK ic N N e y -o y O N ^ -tj c b o a Matt 12:16 “He ordered them not to make Him known” (direct: M n p -o y O N Z -f c b o a “ D o not make Me known”) 521 Altered syntax o f command or request in indirect discourse. T he im perative and other expressions o f com m and or request belong to the realm o f direct d is course. T heir indirect form is either a construction o f purpose 502 ( e - '’infinitive, e -® T p e q -. JceKA.(A.)c o r x .e - + optative etc.) o r the conjunctive ( n t a . - , NT-, etc.). Person also occurs shifted, to the extent that this signals the indi rect perspective o f the reporter. Indirect (reporter’s perspective); A .q -o Y e 2 -®cA.2 Ne N A -y e - ^ x p e v N ojt^-oy T H p - o y “ H e com m anded them all to sit d o w n ” (M ark 6 :3 9 ) D irect (speaker’s perspective): N e j c - T H y r N t h p - t n “ Sit dow n, all o f you” (constructed from M ark 6:39) F rom this exam ple o f indirect discourse (M ark 6 :3 9 ) it is possible also to im agine the sp eak er’s ow n w ords in direct discourse as reconstructed above; 428
INDIRECT
AND
DIRECT
DISCOURSE
an im perative n g jc - , w hich is shifted to a purpose construction e - ^ T p e y - in order to signal the indirect perspective o f an onlooking reporter. H ere also the sp eak er’s 2d person t h y t n t h p - tn “ All o f y o u ” is shifted to 3d person T p e y - • • • - o y T H p - o Y “ T hem a ll,” likew ise signalling indirect perspective. Examples: itujaiNNHc NT-aiq-BaiTTTize ^N-OYBJinTicMai M-MCTaiNOiai eq-JCtu MMO-c e -n x a io c JceKJic e v e - n ic T e y e e-n-eT®-NHy MNNctu-q Acts 19:4 “John baptized with the baptism of repentance, telling the people to believe in the One who was to come after him” (constructed direct discourse: n icT ey e e-n-eT®-NHy MNNctu-i “Believe in the One who is to come after me”); a iq -jc o o - c N-NcqMJieHTHc Jce-epe-^eNeJCHY npocKJipTepi e p o - q eTBe-nMHHyje Mark 3:9 “He told His disciples that boats should be ready for him because of the crowd” (direct; Maipe-^eNeJCHy npocKJipTepi e p o - i eTBe-nMHHyje “Have boats waiting for Me because of the crowd”); ncai^ JiJCi-c M-naicoN Nq-necy-TCKAHpoNOMiai eJCtu-N Luke 12:13 “Teacher, bid my brother divide the inheritance between us” (direct: necy-TCKAHpoNOMiai eJctu-N “Divide the inheri tance between us”); aiq-OYe 2 -''cai 2 Ne e-®BO)K e - n i K p o Matt 8:18 “He gave orders to go to the other side” (direct: bcuk e - n i K p o “Go to the other side”) 522 Altered fo rm o f a question concerning place or manner in indirect discourse. Indirect discourse expressing the answ er to a question concerning place o r m anner is optionally reform ulated w ith h m a the place or e e the manner, expanded by a relative clause.
Ney-NA.y e-OMA. NT-A.y-KA.A.-q n^ h t - c) “ T hey saw w here (nMA.) He had been laid” jtoCxeGexai (M ark 15:47) A y -T A o y o e p o - o y F ie e N T -A C -ty c u n e M - n - e T '’- o n - ' ’a a im o n io n “ T hey told them how ( e e ) it had happened to the d em o n iac” jtwq gyevexo (M ark 5 :1 6 ) Indirect discourse w ith e e ‘h o w ’ is often nearly synonym ous w ith j c e - ‘that . . . E.g. A q-TA M O -O y e - e e n t —Aq—NAy e - n ^ c o e i c ^ N - r e ^ iH Ayu) Jce-A .q -tyA .jce NMMA-q Aycu N e e N T -A .q-nA .ppH ciA .ze M ^ - q 2 N-AAMACKOC A cts 9 :2 7 “ H e declared to them how on the road he had seen the L ord and that H e had spoken to him and how at D am ascus he had p reached b o ld ly .”
D I R E C T D I S C O U R S E AN D ITS SI GNALS
523 ‘Dircct discourse’ {speaker's perspective) A - T e c 2 iMe o y c u ty i e c - jc c u m m o - c Jce-MMN-f-^ZJ^^i m m ay “ T h e w om an answ ered, saying, 1 have no husband” (John 4; 17) is discourse in w hich a reporter (the author o f a text o r a narrator w ithin the text) purports to reproduce w ithout alteration the exact spoken w ords or p er ception o f a speaker. 429
REPORTED
SPEECH
AND
COGNITION
In the English translation of Coptic direct discourse, after a verb of speaking the morph J te - is not particularly translated; but after a verb of cognition j t e - is often translatable as ‘that’ ( j t e - e N e - ‘whether’). E.g. J i K - t n n o o y ly a ip o -i Jte-aiMOY NT-Meo^-NaiHl ShChass 43:32-34 “You sent word to me. Come and inspect my buildings” ; ■f-cooYN Jce-eK--t- oy B H -i aiN ShChass 38:45-47 “I know that it is not myself that you contend against,”
Signals of direct discourse include: def. article phrase in direct address func tion (rec^iMe “O woman”) 45(d), 137; future conjunctive TApe- 357; Greco-Coptic personal name ending in e or a. (riM oeee) 137; imperative 364; initial attitude marker 238 (ApA. and mh ‘pray tell, so . . . ’); interjection 240 (231-mhn ‘truly’, eic^HHre ‘behold’. oyJCJi-i' ‘hello’, etc.); jussive MApe340; rhetorical direct address marker 137 cu ‘O . . . These do not occur in pure indirect discourse. NEUTRAL DI S COURS E ( N O T EXP L I CI T LY I N D I R E C T OR DI RE C T )
524 Reported discourse (i) whose form is not such that a change of perspective could entail a formal alteration of person 520, and also (ii) that is not a com mand or request 521, and also (iii) that does not contain an altered question concerning place or manner 522, and furthermore (iv) does not contain a morph that signals direct or indirect discourse 519, 523, formally cannot express any contrast between direct and indirect perspective. This may be cdled 'neutral discourse’. TN-cooyN jce-M ecciA c nhy “We know that Messiah is coming” (John 4:25) a ^ -jc o o t-c na—k jce-A i—nay ep o-K n^oYN 2^-tbcu n -k n t g “1 said to you, I saw you under the fig tree” (or: “I said to you that 1 had seen you under the fig tree”) (John 1:50)
430
Part 4 Time Reference
25
The Coptic Tense System Main Tense 525 Tense and Tense System in Coptic 525 Co-occurrence of Other Categories Along with Tense 526 Discourse Analysis: Interaction of Tense and Discourse Perspective 527 Illustration of the Coptic Main Tense System Relative Tense
528
529
Illustration of the Coptic Relative Tense System
530
MAI N TENSE
525 Tense and tense system in Coptic. This chapter surveys the Coptic tense sys tem as signalled in various kinds of clause formation. ‘Tense’ is a grammati cal category that marks time reference (future, present, past, etc.): I shall build, I am building, I built, etc. Especially in Western Indo-European lan guages, tense has often been described as a characteristic of verbal action, expressed by features of the verb. But in a language such as Coptic, which is rich in non-verbal expressions of nexus 248 (ANr-oycziM e 263 I am a woman, Ne-^eNCNHY n g 267 they were brethren, q - Z M - n e i M A . 318 he is here, NANOY-nNoyTe 376 God is good, nejcj^-r 380 I said, o y n t a - y 383 Ihey have, o y n - ® 6 o m m m c l > - t n 394 you can), it is more useful to think of tense as a feature of clause and nexus, one which is expressed in association with almost all kinds of nexus morph, both verbal and non-verbal. ‘Main ten se’, which is described in paragraphs 525-28, conveys the perspec tive of the author/narrator of the text as expressed in the author/narrator’s own main-clause statements. But in reported discourse, in relative and circumstan tial conversion, and generally in adverbial clauses and adverbial infinitive phrases 490, relative tense 529 is expressed. This chapter gives only a general and simplified description of tense, oriented primarily to nexus patterns (clause patterns). No account is taken here of conjunctions 234(b) and other markers that can combine with clause pattern to express or resolve temporal refer ence; nor are differences between affirmative and negative nexus taken account of. A more delicate and complex description would have to be organized by systems of dis course such as narrative and dialogue, and the types and perspectives that they comprise. 433
COPTIC
TbNSH
SYSM'M
Also relevant would be a full classification of the non-lense categories 526 that co-occur with expressions of tense: aspect, mode of action, incidental versus inhereni predication, situation versus state, etc.
A ‘tense system ’ is a set of grammatical forms expressing time distinctions that, like other linguistic signs, have meaning through their ability to be con trasted with one another within one particular language. To detect how many time distinctions are contrasted within one particular language, the observer must consider not just the conjugations of the verb, but all of the nexus con structions of the language including all clause patterns, both those which are simple ( a i . N r - o Y c | N T I am a worm, a t - b c u k I went) and those which are com plex or periphrastic (such as q-NA-p-ziJccu-oY he will be over them, q - N A - < y c u n e e-YNTa.-q he will have). Languages differ from one to anoth er in how many referential ranges of time are distinguished in their tense sys tem. In Coptic, the main tense system consists of five such ranges: future present past (anterior future) (anterior past)
restricted occurrence, cf. table 29
Thus future q-NA-KuiT he will build present q - n t u r he builds past A.q-KU)T and Neq-KCUT he built anterior futu re A q - e i e q - N j i - i c c u T and
build
N eq-N A -iccuT
he was going to
,
anterior past Ne-A.q-KcuT he had built
and future q - N A - u p c u n e g - n a n o y - ^ he will be good present n a n o y - c j he is good past Ne-NXNoy-q he was good
For a fuller illustration of Coptic tense expressions, cf. 528. To the five (or three) Coptic referential ranges of time is added a sixth refer ence point: a tenseless (generic, atemporal, extratemporal, omnitemporal) conjugation of the infinitive called the aorist i.e. ‘unlimited’ conjugation 337: tyjiq-KcuT he + the action o f 'to build' (he builds, he will build, he built, he would build). The aorist expresses nexus between actor and verbal action and does not signal a particular range of time. It typically occurs in generalizations and other expressions where a temporal reference point is irrelevant. (Tlie Coptic aorist, so called, should not be confused with the term ‘aorist’ in the 434
MAIN
TENSE
grammar of ancient Greek.) Also tenseless, but not occurring as an indepen dent main clause, is the conjunctive conjugation of the infinitive 351: N q-K cuT he + the action o f ‘to b u ild ’ (and he builds/will build, and build, so as to build, etc.). Thus there is^maximum of six reference points in the Coptic tense system: five ranges (of which only three are c£i|dinal reference points) and one tenseless or omnitemporal reference point; cf. table 29. future present past (anterior future) (anterior past) tenseless TABLE 29 W ith
A ssociation o f th e S ix R eferen ce P oints t h e M a jo r P red ica te T ypes and t h e E xistential B ase
(For illustrations, cf. 528) temporal
Conjugated infinitive Durative Non-durative' Prepositional phrase Situational^ Relational’ Stative Article phrase etc.’ Interlocutive patterns Delocutive patterns N A N o y - etc. oYNTeO Y N - ’
R
T enseless
anges
Anterior Future Past
R
eference
rrcieiH
Past
X
X
X
X
none
none
X
X
X
X
X
X
none none none
none none none
none none none
none none none none none
none none none none none
none none none none none
niifiirP ruLurc
X
X
X
{xy
X
X
X
X
X
none
X
none
(xf
X
X
X
X
X
X 9
X
X
X
X
P oint
'Predicate consists of conjugation base + infinitive, is tenseJess. ^Predicates in the durative sentence ’Predicates in the nominal sentence ^Rare ’Predicates that occur in the nominal sentence patterns ^Rare ’The clause fornied with e i c - makes no distinc tions of tense 477
526 Co-occurrence o f other categories along with tense. In actual sentences, the signalling of time distinctions is combined with other grammatical categories that are simultaneously expressed in association with the nexus patterns. Co occurrence of various non-tense categories is especially typical of the nondurative conjugations (chapter 15). Also the distinction of predicates marked for durativity, versus those which are not so marked 308, 328, is very widely associated with nexus morphs and is distinct from the category of tense; e.g. 435
COPTIC
TEN SE SYSTEM
Neq-KcuT he built, he was building, he used to build, he repeatedly built (past tense + durativity) versus A.q-KcuT he built (past tense + not marked). Verbal predicates marked for incipient action are distinguished from those which are not so marked; e.g. q-NA-upcune eq-KcuT he will start building/he will be building (future tense + incipient action, rare) versus q - na - kcut he will build (future tense + not marked, normal). Some of the possible characterizations of actions, events, and states are associated with only one or two particular morphs and are not widely distributed; e.g. nnATq-KcuT he has not^’ef built, A q-oytw eq-KcuT he has already built, equpAN-n^N-TcuoYN Luke 13:25 “When once he has risen up,” etc. Incidental (non-essential) predication versus inherent (essential) predication 179 is dis tinguished in c - o N-®caiBH she is wise (at the moment or under a certain condition, present tense + incidental predication) versus oycaiBH Te she is wise (permanently or by nature, present tense + inherent predication).
527 Discourse analysis: interaction o f tense and discourse perspective. ‘Dis course’, the cohesion of sentences in large-scale units of text, is a complex system in which the formal ‘discourse types’ that are distinguished within a particular language (for example, narrative, dialogue, wisdom literature, etc.) can express various ‘discourse perspectives’ of that language, such as event, contemporaneous observation, timeless truth, etc. These categories are not the same thing as tense, though they occur along with it. To a large degree, the analysis of discourse, with all its complexity and hierarchy, falls outside the scope of this grammar. However, it is important to note that some of the Coptic non-tense categories that co-occur along with tense are formally sig nalled by the large-scale form of discourse type. This can be illustrated by comparing Coptic to an unrelated language, namely English. For example, to an English speaker the Coptic ‘present’ seems to express two different per spectives that English, given its particular structure, often distinguishes by selection of verb form; English he builds (from the perspective of general truth) versus he is building (from the perspective of contemporaneous obser vation). Unlike English, Coptic has one nexus construction (which also signals durativity 308) in which both perspectives are expressed, q-KcuT. Yet despite this simplicity of Coptic form, the distinction between present tense + dnrativity + timeless truth versus present tense + durativity + contemporaneous observation is clearly expressed in Coptic by formal factors that are signals of discourse type (such as the presence or absence of conditional sentence struc ture, narrative syntax, reference to dramatis personae, subject matter and vocabulary, etc.). Indeed, if we were to introduce the analysis of Coptic dis course types at this point, we would be able to discern another ubiquitous net work of marks (contrasts among the significant types of discourse) that are Coresponsible for signalling the meaning that is expressed wherever a nexus occurs in an actual text. From this analytical perspective, the Coptic present 436
MAIN
ten se
tense expresses one thing in association with the discourse perspective of timeless truth (gnomic/wisdom literature, theology) and quite another thing in the perspective of quoted words of an eyewitness observer. This is seen, for example, in the difference between n—GT^-Mooupe 2 N -o y c o o y t^ P-®20TG 2HT-q M-nNoyTe I n-eT®6 cuoy 6 Ji.e N -N e tf g io o v e NA-^i-®ccu«y “He that walks uprightly fea rs the Lord; but he that is perverse in his ways shall be dishonored” (Prov 14:2), present tense + durativity + timeless truth versus NeqMAeHTHC a g Ay-ZKo I Ay-A.pxei n-®tcuak n-n^mc e-®oycuM I Ne(})A.picA.ioc AG NTepoy-N3iy neJCA-y NA-q Jce-eic^HHTe ngkMAeHTHC c e - e i p e M-n-eT6-Me«y«i)e e-®AA.-q 2M-ttca.bba.ton “His disciples were hungry, and they began to pluck heads of grain to eat. But when the Pharisees saw it, they said to Him, Look, Your disciples are doing what is not lawful to do on the sabbath” (Matt 12:1-2) present tense + durativity + contemporaneous observation neT poc AG ne:x.A.-q n a - c jc e- . . . eic-N oyepH T e N-N-eNT-A.yTcuMc M-noy^Ai' c e -^ ip n -n p o Aycu c e -N A -q iT -e “But Peter said to her,. . . Hark, the feet of those that have buried your husband are at the door, and they are just about to carry you out” (Acts 5:9) present tense + durativity + contemporaneous observation The ‘timelessness’ of the present tense in the first example (Prov 14:2) is sig nalled by its occurrence in a gnomic (wisdom) text, which itself is so marked by the combination and co-occurrence of various grammatical elements to form a generic system; and not merely by the reference point of present tense as such. Generic distinctions of this larger order interact profoundly with all of the tense distinctions (not just the present) in all the nexus patterns, but are not the same as the category of tense and are marked by forms that cohere on a larger scale than nexus. Tense is always embedded in a complex web of co occurring categories.
I L L U S T R A T I O N OF T H E C O P T I C MAI N T E N S E SYSTEM
528 The Coptic main tense system is illustrated (along with various other cate gories 526) by the following main-clause nexus constructions. (a) Future
q-NA-KcuT 311 he is going to build q-N3i-wne e q -K tu T 427 he will be building, he will build (or he will start
building, he will get to building): rare 437
COPTIC
TENSE
SYSTEM
q-NA-cycune e q - K H T 427 it is going to be/become built (describing a state) ce-N A -K O T-q 175, it is going to be built (process) q-N A .-p-2 iJccuoY 312 he is going to be over them; rare Cf. q - N A - c y c u n e ^ijccu-oy he will be/become situated over them q - N A - c y c u n e e - y n o 6 n e 255 he will be/become great q-NA-cycune e-N A N oy-q 377 he will be/become good q - N A - c y c u n e e - y N T A - q 389 he will have/come to have q -n H 2 e-®KcuT he is about to build; very rare eqe-KcuT 338, he shall build TApeq-KcuT 357,. . . and he will build For future Noy e - , cf. (d) Anterior fim re
(h) Present q-KcuT, q-2i:xcu-oy, q - K H T 305 he is building/builds; he is over them; it is built (describing a state) oyN o6 n e and other nominal sentences (chapter 13) he is great NANoy-q 376 he is good oyNTA-q 383 he has oyN-®ccuMA M-TTNeyMATiKON 478 there is a spiritual body 2A.nc 487 it is necessary (c) Past i. non-durative past A.q-KcuT 334 he built/has built; it became built/got built 174 A.q-
RELATIVE TENSE
(d) Anterior future i. based on past 334 A .q -ei eq -N A -K cu T 427 he w as going to build; rare ii. based on preterit conversion 434 N eq -N A -K cuT 311(ii) he w as going to build iii. based on M nA Te- ‘not y e t' 336 MnATcj-NOY e - ' ’upcune it has not yet begun to happen (cf. M ark 13:7) Future Noy e - ‘(is) going to’ also occurs after N T e p e - ‘when’ (past), epcyaiN‘if/since/when(ever)’, and jM - n x p e - ‘while . . . ’ (contemporaneous). E.g. cqc^jiN Noy e-*caiAni 2 e Rev 10:7 oiav jiEXXT] aaXni^Eiv “When he is going to sound the irumpet.”
(e) Anterior past, preterit conversion o f past tense 435 N e-A .q-K cuT (etc. etc.) he had built (etc., etc.)
(f) Tenseless upA.q-KcuT 337 he builds, he w ill build, he built upA.q-
RELATIVE TENSE
529 In relative and circum stantial conversions (w hether o r not preceded by a co n ju n ction), and in adverbial clauses and infinitive phrases 490, o nly three ranges o f tim e are expressed: converted future, conv erted present, converted past. T hese express three distinctions o f ‘relative tim e’ relatively anticipated time and general potentiality relatively simultaneous time and general truth relatively previous time and accom plished fa c t that is, tim e in relation to the m ain (or superordinate) clause in w hich the rel ative, circum stantial, o r adverbial is included (table 30). T his set o f d istin c tions is expressed as ‘relative ten se’. R eported discourse (chapter 24), both direct and indirect, also expresses relative tim e in reference to the tense o f the verb o f speaking o r cognition; cf. 519. 439
COPTIC
TliNSn
SYSTEM
But the circuinslantial in a sequential clause 428 does not express relative time; rather, it belongs to the same narralive plane as the preceding clause. TABLE 30 E x p r e s s i o n s o f R e l a t i v e T im e in R e la tiv e a n d C ir c u m s ta n ti a l C o n v e rs io n A n d in R e p o r t e d D is c o u r s e Temporal Range
in
R e l a i i v e T i m e E x pr es s i :i) C onversion
or
R eported D
iscourse
Converted future or future in reported discourse
Anlicipatecl time, general potentinlity
Converted present or present in reported discourse
Simultaneous time, general truth
Converted pasi or past in reported discourse
Previous time, accomplished fact
I L L U S T R A T I O N OF T HE C O P T I C RE L A T I V E TE N S E SYSTEM
530 The Coptic relative tense system is illustrated by the following examples. (a) Relative time subordinate to future tense
i. anticipated time/general potentiality q-NaL-TJiMcu-TN g - n - g t '* Nai-upcune John 16:13 “He will declare to you the things that are to com e" ; 2 M - T 1UJI eTeTNai-upi m m o - c ) c e -N a i-cy i n h - t n Mark 4:24 “With whatever measure you measure out (general potentiality), you will be measured” ii. simultaneous time/general truth n-eTcj-Jccu MMo-q q-NJi-cycune NJi-q Mark 11:23 “What he says will come to pass for him” iii. previous time NA. become old?” (h) Relative time subordinate to present tense
I. anticipated time/general potentiality n-eT'^-NA-^cuTB a g q - o n x o c e - T e K p ic ic Matt 5:21 “Whoever kills is liable to judgement”
gno-
ii. simultaneous time/general truth n-eT®-cycun mmcu- tn e p o -q e q cycun MMo-i e p o -q Matt 10:40 “The one who receives you (In receiving you one) receives me” iii. previous time o y t g T3Lrco(})iA n t - a y - t jiji - c m “What is this wisdom that has been given to this person?”
440
ttaT
Mark 6:2
RELATIVE
TENSE
(c) R elative tim e subordinate to past tense i. anticipated tim e/general potentiality faiKcuB eq -N aL -M o y a^q-cM oY e - n o Y A noYA. N -N cyH pe n-Tcuch(}) H eb 11:21 “ Jacob, w hen he was about to die, blessed each o f the sons o f Jo sep h ” ii. sim ultaneous tim e/general truth e q - c o o Y N n 6 i-T c jc e ai-TeqoY N O Y knew that his hour had com e . . . he loved them to the e n d ” ; n e q e i c u r a g NM-TeqMaLjLY n g y p-® cynH pe e j c N - N - e T O Y - J C < w m m o - o y e r B H H T - q Luke 2 :3 3 “ A nd his father and his m other m arveled at w hat was being said about h im ” ^ 1 . . . A .q-M epiT -oY cyaiBOA John 13:1 “ W hen JesiTs
iii. previous tim e e-a iT eT N -K cu n c u ) - t n n - t g n t o a h M -n N O Y re TeTN-A.M 3L2 T e N -M nA .pA A ocic N -ppcuM e M ark 7 :8 “Having left the co m m andm ent o f G od, you hold fast to the tradition o f hum an b ein g s”
(d) R elative tim e (sim ultaneous and previous) subordinate to anterior future tense: rare i. sim ultaneous tim e/general truth a iq - e i e q - N J i- ^ O T B -e q e q - n e e Y e jce-A .-N -eT® -M H p ncuT g b o a A cts 16:27 “ H e w as about to kill him self, siipposing that the prisoners had escap ed ” ii. previous tim e ^ o e iN e N-NToY-a^air e-N C Y epH Y • - - n - g n t A.Y~cMiNe A e M-neTA.NA.
(e) R elative tim e (sim ultaneous and previous) subordinate to anterior past tense: rare i. .simultaneous tim e/general truth Tc rA.p N e - A .q - c e 2 T - q ep e-o Y W H Hupe 2 M -nM 3Ler^-MMaiY John 5 :1 3 “ F or Jesus had w ithdraw n, as there was a cro w d in that p la ce” ii. previous tim e Ne-A.-riKA.Ke A e cycune e - M n e - i c ^ upA.po-OY John 6 :1 7 “ It had gotten dark, w ithout Jesus having come to th em ”
(f) R elative tim e subordinate to a com m and, a tenseless nexus (u p A p e-, N T e -), o r a verbal noun (infinitive, r p e - ) i. anticipated tim e/general potentiality e T e T N -N A -e i eB O A ^M -nM A eT®MMAY NOYZe eBOA M -n c y o e ic y eT®-2Apo-OY N -N erN O Y ep H T e M ark 6 :11 “ W hen you are going to leave (W hencve/' you leave) that place, shake o ff the dust that is on your feet” ii. sim u ltan eo u s tim e N Toq A e e q - n e e Y e e - n e x c ^ M -n e q ^ H T M N -n e ic u p 2 n - n o h p o n N -req '^ Y X H upaiq-cuupM N-NejcHBC M -n -eT ® MMAY A thanasius, L ife o f St. A nthony 5 (G aritte 8 :2 0 -2 2 ) “ B ut he, by think ing on C hrist in his heart and the intellectual vision o f his soul, used to 441
COPTIC
TENSE
extinguish that en e m y ’s glow ing co a ls" narrative context)
SYSTEM
m ain-clause aorist in a past
iii. previous tim e . .. e -® T p e q -Jic K e i N2 H T -q e M - n - f - M e er® -o N - x V i e N T -jiy -T JiM o -q eTB H H T-q 2 iTM -nN OY Te L ife o f St. P achom ius (Lefort 103a: 1-4) “ T o live an ascetic life there in the deserted village about w hich he liad been instructed by G o d ” Several levels of relative time can be expressed in a single sentence, as one subordinate clause relates to another subordinate clause; e.g. e q -c o o y N n 6 i-Tc oce-jL-TeqoyN o y ^1 . . . e - 3 i q - M e p e - N - e T e - N o y - q Ne eT*-? M - n K o c M o c 3iq-MepiT-oy
upABOA John 13:1 “When Jesus knew that His hour had come, having loved His own who were in the world. He loved them to the end”
442
Chrestomathy With superlineation as found in the modem editions
N A R R A T IV E A N D R E PO R T E D D I A L O G U E M ark 16:1-8, ed. Quecke: (1) TMJ i PAJIAHN h '
NTepe-ncjiBBJiTON oyeiN e
MJiplJl TJI-TJIKCUBOC^ M N - C J i ACUMH^ 3^Y~‘i > 6 T T - 2 e N -
2 HNe xeK JiJic e y e - ^ i
N c e -T Ji 2 c - ^ - ( 2 )
N-NCJiBBJiTON
€ 2 pJiT e - n e M 2 J^oy e - j i - n p n
N e y -x c u
J iy - ^ i
M M o-c
N -N e y e p n y
x e -N iM
2 T ooyeM JiT e^
M n o y ji
ujji. (3)
n e T ®-N Ji-q i-n a )N e
Jiycu eboa
21-p cu -q M -neM 2Jioy. (4) N r e p o y - q iJ iT - o y A e e2pJ^i Jiy-N Jiy e -n c u Ne e - J iy - q iT - q MMJiy. N e -y N o 6 rJip n e eM Jire. (5) Jiycu Nrepoy-BCUK
€ 2 oy N e - n e M 2 Jioy Jiy -N Jiy e - y 2 p u jip e e q - 2 M o o c €2PJiT iJcjioyN jiM
MMO-q e q - 6 o o A e N-oycTOAH N -o y c u B ^. Jiycu J i - e o r e JciT -o y . (6 ) NToq A e Jiq-ujJiJce nm m ji-v Jc e -M n p -p -® 20T e . e re T N -K c u re n cji-T c^ nNJiZJipHNOc n - e N T - J i y - c t o y ® MMO-q. Jiq-T C U oyN -tj. n —q - 2 M -neT MJi JiN. JiNJiy e -n M ji N T - J i y - K J i J i - q N 2 H T - q . (7) jia a ji bcuk n t e t n -
jcoo-c N-NeqM JieHTHC M N -n K e n e rp o c ’ Jce-q -N Ji-p -® u}o p ff e p cu TN e-TPJiAiAJiiJi.® ereT N -N Ji-N Jiy e p o - q MnMJi eT®-MMJiy KJiTJi-ee N T - J i q - J C O O - c N H - T N . ( 8 ) Jiy cu N T e p o y - ^ i 6 B O A 2 M - n e M 2 J i o y \ y -
ncuT. N e p e - o y 2 o r e rjip NMMJi-y. Jiycu N e y -p -® u jn H p e . F i n o y - j c e AJiJiy A e N -ujJiJce e-A JiJiy. N e y -p -® 2 0 T e rjip.
A p o p h P a t r 160, ed. Chaine 3 6 :1 -1 3 : N e-yN -coN cNJiy 2 N-Npi.’ n e o y N -o y ji Ae N2HT-oy n-*2^'^o. Jiycu Jiq-nJipJiKJiAei M - n u j H p e u j h m JC e -M jip e N -o y a )2 '°
M N -N eN epH y.
NToq
Ae
n eJC Ji-q
Jc e -JiN O K -
oypeq-p-®NOBe. Jiycu m n -^ 6 o m m m o - i e-®oycu2 nmmji-k jinji. n2AAo Ae Jiq-njipJiKJiAei M M O - q jc e - c e . oyN-®6oM m m o — k . n2AAo Ae N eoyKJieJipoc n e N -q -o y cu u j jin " e-®ccuTM Jce-oyN-®MONJixoc e p e — ®Meeye pcu M-®nopNiJi N2HT-q. neJCJi-q n 6 i—ncoN Jce-KJiJi-N n —oy2eBACUMJic Jiycu on NTN-ujJiJce. Jiq -ei Ae N6i-n2AAo. Jiycu e q -o y cu u j e-®AOKiMJi2e MMO-q N 6i-ncoN neJCJi-q NJi-q Jce -Jii-2 e e -y N o 6 M-nipjiCMOc 2N-Tei2BACUMJic nJieicuT. jii-bcuk rJip e-yAiJiKONiJi 'Mary Magdalene ^Janies ^Salome "gTOOYeMJiTe = gTooye eMJiTe -'Tc = i H c o y c Jesus ^ c f o y = C T Jiy p o y ’Peter *The Galilee ’H pi = Cellia, monastic settlement in the Egyptian Delta "’I.e. M j i p N - o y a ) ? " N - q - o y c u q j 3iN = e -N -q -o y c u q j an
443
( IIRI S I O M A T I I Y <.gA-ii-|-Mr
M N - o y c ^ i M e . neJC3i-q N d i - n g A A o Jce-OYN-''MeT3i-
Noiji ty o o n , nejC 3i-q N6 i - n c o N J c e - c e . neJC3i-q N di-ngA A O Jc e-iN O K ■I’ - H X - T C U O Y N NMM3k-K 2 ^ - ’’’TI3kU; E M-TlNOBe. TleJ<.3l^-q N6 l-n C O N JC e-T N -N 3i.-u)-6M -*'6oM e .-'’oYcu 2 M N -NEN epH y. J-Ytu iY ~ 6 tu m n N e y e p n y u) 3 i n t o y - m o y -
R i'T ii 1 ; 15-17, ed. T hom pson, A Coptic Palimpsest Contciiiiiiig Jnshua. .Indies. Ruth. Judith, and Esther in the Sahidic Dialect: (15) 3k.ya) n o e m in 'n e jc 3 i- c N ~ 2 p o Y © '’ J c e - e i C 2 H h t e T o y ty B p -ty e A e e r j i c - k t o - c e p a iT -q M - n e c A jio c Ayoj tp jiT -O Y N - N e c N o y r e . n t o 2 ‘^ ‘^ ~ T e T jity e e p e k to - ® e p j iT - c N -T o y ty B e e p e . (16) 2 poy© Jlg n eJ(.A -c h a - c JCe-NNe-NaLT T3l20“ ' e-''T p3i-K 3l3l-T e NCCU-1 T3i-BU)K TJl-AO 2J^pO-''. JCe-NTO nMA ETepji-BcUK e p o - q -[--NHy nmme-'*. Jiycu n n ji e T e p ji-d c u N2 H T -q 'f--N X - 6 cu 2 ^~ '^ N2 H T -q HMMe-®. n o y A Jio c n e h a a o c jiycu n o y N o y T e n e n jiN o y T e . (17) aiycu n n ji e T e p a .-M o y N2 H T -q e i - N j i Moy 2 tu-*' N2 H T -q n c e - t o m c - t M nnji eT"-MMa.y. Na.i e p e - n jc .o ic A A -y NA-'i. Ayo) NAi e q e - o y A 2 - o y e J tc u - i. J c e - n n o y neT ® -N A n o p jc -N e -H E N e p H y .
DES CRI PTI ON W i s 7 ; 2 1 ( 2 2 ) - 2 7 , eel. cle L ag arcle ( B o e t t i c h e r ) , A e j^ y p tia c a : ( 2 1 ) t c o c J j i a r ^ p
ENT-AC-TAM io-oy THp-oy Ac-TCABo-1 e p o - o y . ( 2 2 )
oyw -oy-
n N e y M i. ri.p
N -oycuT
m 2H t-c
e q -o y i.i.B
N -peq-N O l
N -oycM O T
N -A T e cM O T -'* e q - A C c u o y p - p e q - p - ' ’2tUB e q - 6 M - ® 6 o M e q - o TCUAM N - c a . B e A [M ]A 2T e
N -A T-® N O Be
M -M a ii-* ’A r A e O N
eq-T O p 2
p -p eq -p -® n e T -N A N O [y -q ]
M M O - q
(23)
M - M A T -'* p o ) M e
e q - T A J c p H y e q - o p [ 5 e ] q - o n —A T - " p o o y u ) e q - 6 M - " 6 o M e q -6 u )ty T oyAAB
e jtM -n T H p -q
p -peq-N O l
e -N -e T * '-K iM
eq -x cu re
e T ^-ty o O M e .
T H p-oy.
2'T N -N e n N e y M A (24)
c - jcc dte . A y c u
tco < J)ia c-N H y
r^p eboa
n -'*a t -
e -M e y -ty e - 2 c u B nim
T H p-oy kim
er"-
e 2o y (N )
2 'T M -n T H p -q
E T B e - n e c T B B o . ( 2 5 ) e c - N H y r ^ p e b o a 2 i t n - t 6 o m M - n N o y T e Aycu e b o a 2 M - n e o o y f . t ^ - o y a a b H Te-nnxN T O K pA Ttup. e T B e -n a .i M e p e AAAy e q -jc A 2 M t c u m n T e p o - c . ( 2 6 ) o y e i N e r ^ p r e N T e - n o y o e i N
N - t y A - e N e 2 A ycu o y e i i A e c - o y A A B N T e - T e w e p r i A M - n N o y r e ^ y c u
eiKcUN N - T e q M N T - A T A e o c ( 2 7 ) e - o y e i J t e t e e c - 6 M - " 6 o M e - 2CUB n i m Aycu e c - 6 e e r 2 ^ P ' 2 ^ P O - c e c - e i p e M - n T H p - q M - '’B p p e. ^ y c u K ATA-"reNeA c - bhk e 2 o y N e - N e ' | ' y x H N - N - e r ^ ' - o y A A B .
'^Naonii
444
" Ru l h
'^I.c.
n
-
at
-
cmot
CURi;S I OMATH Y
C an I 1:2-5 (1 ^ ) , ed. Maspero; (2) N3i.noy -N oyeKiBe N goye-nH pn. (3) 3i.Ytu necTOi n - nekco 6 n eq-tycuty Ngoyo e-NgHNe T H p- o y. neKp3i.N oyco6N Tie. ji^y-CMOy e p o - q . Ji^ycu q-nHN eboa . eTBe-njLi ji^-NtyHpe tyHM MepiT-K. (4) a.y-coK -K Ni.-y e n ig o y . N -N i-n cu T '‘’ e - '’oya.2''N NCJi^-necToi M-neKCo6N. Ji^-nppo jcit-® egoyN e-neqTAMiON. t n NJl-TEAHA NTN-ey
N - o y N e g . Jiycu neKJCU) eq-TJig*^ N e e m—n-eT®-3iM3i2Te. ( 6 ) n e K N l NJi-ncuT Nccu-i N - N e g o o y T H p - o y M-njicuNg. e T B e - J c e - j i i - o y c u g 2 M - n H i M - n jc o e i'c N g e N g o o y e - N J i t y c u - o y . h e N I C H N O - C O N S T A N T I N O P O L I T A N C R E E D , ed. Quccke, Uiitersiichiiii}>eii zum koptischen Stuiidengehet. 436-8; rnicTic N-NiiceA.’’
T
TN-nicTeye e-yNoyTe N-oycuT nicUT rinjiNTUJKpjiTcup n - e N T 3iq-T3iMio N-rne MN-nKaig N - eTN-N 3iy ep o-o y mn-n-gt'^-n-tnN 3iy e p o - o y x n MN-oyjcoeic N-oycuT Tc~ nMONoreNHC N-upHpe NTe-nNoyTe nejcno eBOA ^M-nicuT ^J^eH N -N e c u N T H p - o y noyoeiN eeoA gn-noyoeiN nNoyTe M - n e eBOA g M - nNoyre m - m e . oyjcno ne. N-oyT 3iMio jin ne. oygOMOoyciON ne MN-neqicuT n - e N T 3i-eNK 3i^'’ NiM tycune eBOA giTOOT-q njii gtbhht-n jiNOn NepcuMe^'’ jiycD eTBe-neNoyjcJii 3iq-ei enecHT eBOA g N - M n n y e 3iq-j<.i-®C3ip3 2 N - o y f t m ^ * eq-oy3i.3i.B 2M-M3i.pi3i. 'f'nji.peeNOC 3k.q-p-®pcuMe. x y c oy^^ M M O - q 2 -»-po-N ^i-noNTioc niAi.Toc.^* i.q-ujn-^^ice i.q-Moy ji^y-K-q 2 N-OYT^koc. ji^ycD ji^q-TcuoyN eBOA 2 N-N-eT®-M 0 0 yT M n e q M e 2 ~u)OMNT N - 2 0 0 y K3i.T3i.-Nerp3i.
r
''N-Ni-nu)T = E N - N A - n c u T "’I.e. nicpiHA Israel '^Kedar '"Solomon '“Mooycye = Moocye ’"coqTe = c o b t g -'Nicea (place name); al.so. ilie firsi ecu menical council of Clirisliaiiily, Held at Nicea in A.D. 325 -’ n - e t - n - t n - n a y . . . a n = N -e re - N -T N -N A Y . . . an ’’I.e. i h c o y c n e x p i c T o c , Jesus ChrisI -^gnka = NKA -'NepcuMe = NpcuMG ^^l.e. o y tt n g y m a ’’I.e. cT A Y p o y ’^Poniius Pilate
445
( l l Kl ' . S 1 OM A I II Y
tim iiiY t;.
A q --^M ooc
q - N n y ON 2 M - n e q e o o Y
n c jlO y n a m e-® K pm e
M - iie q e ic u T
2 ^ ~ *^~ET® -Jc0ce.
N -N -e T * * -O N 2 M N -N -eT **-M o o Y T .
3k.ya) MN-'’2 ^^e N A -ty cu n e g N -r e q M N T - e p o . T e N - n i c r e y e '" e - n e n l 7 i
no c^' 3k.yu3 npeq-TAN^o n-eN T -3i.q-ei e e o x 2>TM-nicuT njk.! e T N -o y c u u jT N ji-q M N -nicuT M N -n u )H p e 3i.v
BJinTicMJi N -o y tu T e -n K c u e e o x N -N e N N o e e . aiY‘1’ re N -rip o c A O K J i’^^ e-TAN3iCT3icic N -N -eT **-M 00yT M N -ntoN g eT '^ -N Ji-u jc u n e u)3i-eN e22AMHN.
GNOMI C S T A T E ME N T S Prov
15:1-9,
ed. Worrell:
(1) t y ^ p e - T o p r H
N-NKecjLBeey.
ty 3i^pe-oyty[ 3i^]xe eq-M -neqnJi^ k t o g b o a N - o y 6 cuNT. tyji^pe-oytyji^xe N - p e q - A y n i T o y N e c - g e N o p r H . (2) [n]AAc A e N-NC3kBe c o o y N N-N-eT®-NAN0-0Y-^‘’ TTJinpo Jv.e N-N3ieHT c o o y N N - [ N - ] e e o o y . (3) NBAA M-nNoyT-e 6 cuu)t NiM e S T i-N ’‘’- N - e e o o Y m n - n -
eT®-N3iNoy-oy. (4) oyujHN n -c u n j n e h tjia C o m -hajic. n - e T ® - e ip e jv,e M M O - q
N3i— cei N-NeqK3ipnoc.
(5) lyjipe-njieHT KMty-TecBU)
M-neqeitUT. oycJiBe jv.e Ngoyo n e n - e r ^ - g ^ p e g e - N e x n i o . o y N o y N o 6 N - 6oM ^-T A lK A lO c y N H eT®-OUI. MM0 KM6 K Ae N-N3l.CeBHC N3k.-ncupK FTTi-NeyNoyNe. (6) o y N - o y N o 6 n - 6 om ^ - n h i n - n a i KJllOC. NKJipnOC A e N-N3lCeBHC NJl-TAKO. (7) NeCnOTOy N-NCO
n x o e ic Ne N eeyciJi N-nnJipjiNOMOC. N eeyciJi jv.e N-N-eT^'-coyTcuN u)Hn NNJigP^"^)' (9) M -n x o e ic Ne N egiooye M-njiceBHC. q-M e Ae N -N -er'^-nH T NC3i.-TAiK3i.iocyNH, etc.
RE QUE S T , P RAYER, C O M M A N D Ps 69(70), ed. Budge: (I) n x o e ic n N o y re 't’-gTH-K e-T3iBOHeei3i. (2) M3i.poy-x»-*’ty in e Nce-oycuAC N d i-N -er'^ -ty iN e NCJi.-Tji.'l'yxH. Mjipoy-KOT-Oy eniijoY N c e-x i-® ty in e N6i-N-eT**-Meeye e p o - i e -g e N n e e o o y . (3) Mjipoy-KOT-Oy NTeyNoy N ce-xi-**tyine n 6 i - n eT®-xcu MMo-c N31.-1 x e - e y r e e y re . (4) M3i.poy-TeAHA N ce-oyN oq excu-K N 6 i-o y o N nim eT*’-ty iN e n c u ) - k N c e - x o o - c N oyoeity nim ^''e-N MnnYe = e - M n n Y E
(non-Siandard abbrcviaiton)AOKa
446
=
TN-npOCAOKA
“ reN-iiiCTeYe = TN-niCTCYe
'^T €N - 20M0 A0 r e i = T N - 20M0 A0 r e i ” nANO-OY
=
NANOY-OY
" h o c = njcoeic ’ ’r e N - n p o c -
"I.e.
CJ1.N-
c h r e s t o m a t h y
x e - M 3i ^ p e - n N O Y T e
x ic e
N -er^-n e
3iN r-O Y 2H K e. jiN r-o Y eB iH N . n x o e i c
M -neK oyX J^^i.
(5)
ji^n o k
Ae
B o n e e i e p o -T . N T K -n jiB O H eo c
3k.ya) T3i.NA
1 1 : 2 ^ , e d . Q u e c k e ; ( 2 ) n e N i c u r e T ^ - g N - M n H o y e M a ^ p e - n e K p 3i.N
oyon.
M a i ^ p e - T e K M N T - e p b e~i. M J i ^ p e - n e K o y t u t y t y t u n e . ( 3 )
eT®-NHOY
NJl-N
KJiirJip ANON T N - K t u
MMHNe.
(4)
eBOA o y o N
K3l— N G N N O B e
n eN o iK
^®
NiM^^ e r e - o y N T J i - N
N3i-N.
e p o - q . j iy c u
M n p -x iT -N egoyN e -n ip jiC M o c . E
xod
2 { );3 -1 0 , ed. M aspero: (3 ) N N e y -u p c u n e
na- k
N d i-^eN K G N o y re
nFaAA-1. (4) NNGK-TJl^MlO N K N-OyeiAtOAON OyAG n e i N e N-AJlJiY N - N - e T ' * - ^ - T n e g i T n e Ayu) N-eT®-2i S>i-nK3i2 n n e c H T Aytu n - g t ® ^ - n M o o y 2 ^ n e c H T M-nKjig- (5) N N e K - o y c u t y r NJi-y. o y js.e n n g k t y n t y e NA-y. a n o k rjip n e n x o e i c n e K N o y T e o y N o y r e N - p e q - K t u g eT®-TtucuBe N-NNOBe N - N e i o T e egpJii e x N - N t y n p e e-nnegtyoMT M N - n n e g - q T O O Y n-jc
neK^g^-'^ m J - r e K ^ g ^ ' ' ^ neKMJice
M T i - n eK q j i T - N j i ^ F T n - t ^ n h nim n t a - k M~ N- n en p 0 c y A HT 0 c eT**-OYH2 2 PJll NgHT^K. P a c h o m i l i s , P ra f.C E P T A 9 1 - 9 7 , ed. L efort GEuvres: ( 9 1 ) N N e - ^ p t u n e M o o ty e
2 N - T C O O Y 2C
OY 2 e i r e
e -n n ji
N O Y etyN -'^piijT O Y ^ • - ''t o a o m c u n e i r e
N -oycuM . (9 2 )
N N e-® ptU M e
e -n c o j-
b c u k e - ® T G 2c - N e q
6ix
e - p o y g e o y e t y N - ® x o o y —® c o n N M M j i- q . N N e - ® p c u M e T e g c - n e q c c u M A T H p-q
x c u p ic -^ty c u N e .
oy re
e-®xtUKM
h
e -® e i3i3i-q
gboa
kjiKUJC
n 3 i . p 3 i . - e e e T - ® T H t y N3i.-y. ( 9 3 ) N N e - ® p c u M e T e g c - ^ p c u n e e q - t y c u N e , h e-® x o K M -eq
e - n n o y - T O ty - q . (94)
2M -nK 3iK e. ( 9 5 ) oyTM H.
(95a )
oyTe
NNe-A3i.3i.y u ) x x .e M N - N e q e p n y
N N e T N - g M o o c e —® t o m
[N N e -® p ]c u M e
3i.M3i.2Te
n - t
6ix
e T e r N - p —c N J i y o y T e M -n e q iy B n p
oy re
K e - A 3 i 3 i y N - e i A o c N T 3 i - q . 2l. \ \ x e k - n 3 i —K J i - o y M J i g E egpJii' o y r c u - K NM M 3i-q e iT G e K - 2M o o c e iT G e K - 3 i 2 e p ^ T - K e iT G E K - M o o t y e .
”’eBOA (erroneously oiiiilied in Quecke’s iiianuscripi) is aliesled in oiher ancieni copies of Luke.
447
(IIRI-.STOMATHY (96; N N e - A A A Y N-**coYpe e b o a N - p a.T-q N - ® p c u M e e i m h t i e - n p M W Hi
M N -n n e g -C N JiY
n - e T O y - N 3 i - O Y e 2 - * ’c 3 i 2 ^ * ^
N 3 i-q .
(97)
NNe-
®pcuMe U ) B - T e q 3 i n e 3iJtM -neqpiM N-H T. o y r e NNe-**pa)Me u)B-**pa)Me e - M n o y - T o t y - q . o y r e o n N N6-®ptUM e u )B -® p tu M e e y - g n o o c , etc.
EXEGES I S M a r k 4 :2 -8 , 13-20, ed. Quecke: (2) 3i.q-'f--*’cBa) jv,e N3i.-y emate 2N-2eNnAp3iBOAH. jiycu Neq-Jtcu m m o -c N3i-y gN-TeqcBcu (3) J t e ccuTM. eicgH H T e Aq-e~i e b o a N6 i-n - e T * * - j to (4) jiycu N T e p e q -jto oyji. men Ji^q-ge g ^ T e - re g iH . 3i.y
L E A R N E D EXPOS I TI ON 1 C or 15:35-50, etl. Thompson, The Coptic Version o f the Acts o f the Apostles and the Pauline Epistles in the Sahidic Dialect: (35) i.AAi. o y N -oyi. ’"toco = infinilive aco ■ ’' ' a y o m - o \ = A \ - 0 \ 0 K - 0 y '“’Salan ^eMnpoc-^OYoeity '•-Other aiicicm manuscripls here read t y A \-C K A N
448
'"I.e.
C'HRIiSTONlATHY
NX-jcoo-c Jte-epe-N-eT**-MOOYT N3i.-Ta)OYN N3i.u) N-ge. ey-NHY Ae
2N-3i.ty N-ccuMji.. (36) n3i.eHT. n t o k n - e - t y j i .K - J t o - q ''^ n e q - c u N ? eiMHTei Ntj—MOY- (37) xyu> m-ticcumx xn eT®-N3i-iyiJDri6 n e - u p i K J t o - q . x w x OYBABiAe r e ec-KHKJignY n -® c o y o h M - n K e c e e n e N-**6 p o 6 . (38) ly jip e -n N O Y T e A e "[■ NJi-q n - o y c c u m ji K3iT3i-ee e r q - O Y J i iy - c aycu o y ccu m ji m -h o y j^ noY^^ N -N e 6 p cu a )6 K3iT3ipo-q.
(39) N-OYC3ip5 N-OYCUT 3lN TE C3ip5 NIM. X W X OYET-TJl-N ptUMe. JlY^^ o y e T - T c x p i N-NTBNH.
o Y eT -T C i.p 5 N—
xyt u o y s t —
T31-NTBT (40) MN-NCCUM31 eT**-2N-Tne MN-NCCUMJl ET^-gM -n KAg. x w x o Y E T -n e o o Y mgn n - N - e r ^ - g N - T n e . O Y e r - n e o o Y A e n - n eT**-2 M -nK 3i.2. (41) O Y e r - n e o o Y M -n p n . o Y e T - n e o o Y M - n o o g . O Y E T -neooY n - n c i o y - o y n - ® c i o y raip t y o e e e-**ciOY 2 M -neooY - (42) T3lT Te e e M-nKeTcuoyN n - n - e t ® - m o o y t . c e - N i . - J t o - q 2 n~oY ’’'^*^o Nq-TcuoYN 2 n ~ o Y m n t ~ ^ t - T 3 i k o . (43) c e - N 3 i - J t o - q 2 N-OYCtuty Nq-TtuoYN 2 N ~oyeooY - c e - N 3 i - J t o - q 2^~O Y M ^T- 6a)B n c j - t c u o y n 2 n - o y 6 om. (44) c e - N 3 i - J t o - q n-^ccumji m -'|'Y ^ " ^ o n N q-TtuoY N N - * ’c t U M 3 i M - n N e Y M 3 l T I K O N . e U ) J t e - O Y N - * ’ct U M 3 i
HX
ON
OYN-®CtU-
M - n N e Y M 3 l T I K O N , CtC.
E P ID E IC T IC SlIENOUTE;, A R C H I M A N D R I T E
OF THE W H I T E
MONASTERY
(A.D.
3 4 6 / 7 - 4 6 4 / 3 ) , / Have H eard about Your Wisdom (excerpt) (D iscourses, book 4); the beginning o f a discourse delivered on the occasion o f a visit to the W hite M onastery by the governor Flavianus; ed. C hassinat, S hC hass
84:42—86:9: jiT -c c u t^ eTBe-TeKMNT-pMN~ 2 HT N e e e-in<-qi-®pooYty 2 A - n c o o Y T N e K -2 ^ '^ p e 2
e
-
n n o m o c n - a i k j i .i o n
3i.Y
ek
-
me
N -2Ji^n
n im
M-Me. 3ii-p3iU)e eM jiTe e n jiT e eT B e -N -e N T -3 iK -'f--* ’MTON n j i - y MMjiTe x w x j t e - K - N 3i-eY P^N e M -nN O Y T e N2 0 y 6 ^ n - n a i . e ty jte -N p tU M e rji^p N T -ai^ Y -Jt'-® tn e N-M M NT-ty3i^N-2TH-q M -nN O Y Te
ce-pji^tye eJO)-N-eT*’- e i p e M-nAiKXiON 2 < ^c re n c e - c m o y e p o - O Y e ' f e - e p e - n j t o e i c ne?Tc ic '’"’ n j i - c m o y e p o - O Y NOYHp 3iY<^ N q 'f'-®eooY NJi-Y- e-3iK-Jti 6 e N-oY^^pXH e b o a 2 ''*^~TTNOYTe jiji—k n - ' ’| ^ m x 6 n 2 h t ^ ^ -2 E N 2 B H Y e e - n x n o y - o y - oyn-**6om rjip m m o - k e-**p-23in NIM N-AiKJiiON n 2tuB eTe-OYN~23i2 NOYJte MMo-q en3i20Y MMO-OY eTBe-20MT. o"y n e nKexpHMJi er® -6 n -® no6 n 2 0 y 6 ,e -® T p e nptUMe '[--‘’2HY N-Teq'I'Y^"- " N-xpHMJi. neT®-Mnu)3i. m m o -c . e u )J te -O Y N -* * p c u M e e - n N O Y T e n e T * * -6 M-**M NTpe J t e - e - N e - O Y N T 3 i -
q - 2 eNTB3i N -xpH M 3i jiY*^ 2 eNA26 n-**noyb 2 ' - 2^ t N e q - N 3i - T 3i3i-Y n e '” iyAK-, ihe vcatliiig of Morgan M570
nexpiCTOC ih c o y c Christ Jesus 449
C I I R I i S T O M ATI I Y
■^A-TKq'l'yXH N’F N - T t o p n JS.e a n o n
N -N -eT e-N O Y “ N
Ne
H
N TN -
•|--ii 23 ifi '^3i-®jv,tupoN N -N Ji-tytune'*-'’ n - t 63 iiiiy^'’ NoyHp, etc. SliEN O U TE, Not Because a Fox Barks (excerpt) (D iscourses, book 4 ); llie conclusion o f Ihe discourse, in w hich Shenoute addresses G od; ed. Chassinal, ShC hass 4 8 :3 -5 0 :1 4 : . . . h a h n -f— N3i.-ty3i.Jte M n e K M T O e b o a n N o y T e n-n6om
nnjiNTOKpjiTtup.
j t e - N ^ - O B t y 3iN M-npO
MrTp-dtoNT
e-Tjimrr-Jieht.
'f'-cooyN
e - \ x x y . n t o k neNT-jiK-tyjiJte ^ - N e K n e T O Y ^ ^ J ^ B
NN3l.2l^-niB3i.Be-p
Jte-K
e B O A M-n3i.A3i.oc JteK3i.c e y e - u T M t y e n3i.-i h N c e - p - * ’u)3i. n3i.-i. n t o k o n neNT-3iK-Jtoo-c
NgHT-oy
Jte-cpqe
NTeT~N-eiMe
H N o y T e . u T n - 2T h - k 6 e 2 ^ - n e K A 3 i O C
Jte-JINOK
ne
ere-NJitye-neqnji
N”r - c o T - o y e B O A 2n-t6ij<. N - N - e T * * - e A i B e M M O - O y N e e M-neKA3i.oc n 1HA^* M n i O Y O e i t y TJipoY-cp^ie e - * * e m e J t e - M N - 6 e N o y T e nbaaji-k. H
3lN J t e - M n e - N g e A A H N M ~ N - N 2 e e N O C
N^-N3iy
67i-®6om
e-**coydbN^'r.
J t e - n n o y - c T ’tje
M~N-N3lT-NOyTe
^N-NeyMTPr-JinicToc
MN-NeyMTri--3lK3ie3ipTOC T H p - O y . T t U M 6 e e|^-3lNOMt3l NIM MN-Jtl n6on~c
NIM
2^-M3i
NIM
eBOA
JtiN-Jttu-q M-nK3i2 MMO-K
N-N-eToy-Jti
MMO-oy
n6onc
N - T O i K o y M e N H Tjipe-N- eT^'-cooyN
c p q e e-®p-®^2^-'- nji.-k. N - c e - n j i . - 6 m - ‘’6 o m
®2M23i^a N3i^-K N C e - p - * ’^2^''- N - N p e q - J t i
n6onc.
rji.p ji.n e-**p-
e-Ne-Mrtk-ctUTe
M - n e K A 3 i o c n i H A M n i o y o e i t y e B O A ^ - n 6 i j < . m - h i j i n o m o c NJiBoyxoAONocop"*^ M N - N i K o o y e T H p - o y e r ® - e i N e M M O - q N T - j i y - e M K o - o y ^ - n T p e K - T 3 i 3 i - Y e2pjii e r o o T - o y J t e - 3 i K - N o y 6 c e p o - o y kjin c e tyiNe N c t u - K ^ - n M 3 i e T * * ^ M 3 i y CMoy
Nee
x w x Ney-NJi-ty-Jttu jin n e N - N e K -
eToyjiuj^.'’'^ jte-MN-*'n3ippHCi3i t y o o n
^i23iA N - N e 2 B H y e eT*'-oty N e e
N3i-y ^ - t m n t -
N T - 3 i y - J t o o - c Jce-NJity N - 2 e e N -
N3i-ty-Jttu N - T t U A H M - n H i M - n j t o e i c ^ N - o y K 3 i 2 n - u J m m 6 . N T e i 2 e O N e K t y j i N - T M - c t U T e N - N - e T o y - J t i M M O - o y n6on~c g b o a ^n-n6ij<. N-Ni3iT-N3i K3iN c e - T 3 i y 6 M - n e K p 3 i N c e - e n i e y M e i jv.e o n e-'*p-NeKoytuty J t e - N T O K n e T e y 2 e A n i c N - c e - N 3 i - t y - 6 M - ® 6 o M jin e-®'f' nji-k N-NeyepHT
^~2eNCMOY
MN-2eNU)AHA
M"N-2eNNHCT13l. J t e - M M N -
® M N i - p M 2e t y o o n NJi^-y ^ - o y c o o y i ^ e B O A ^ - t m n t - ^ 2 ^ - ' - N - N e 2 B n y e N - N i p t U M e e r ^ ' - M e e y e e - 2 e N n o N H p o N NNjiy nim e 2 o y N e p o oy.
(End)
“"I c. ni cpAHA Israel 450
‘"'Nebuchadnezzar
'’^N- T^AI HY = g n - t ^ a Thy “’Pharaoh ^ e r o Y A c y ^ = e rO Y -O Y A c y -c
C H R E S T O M ATHY
C O P Y I S T ’S COL OP HON C olophon
in C h e s t e r
B eatty
M a n u s c r i p t 8 1 4 ( T h o m p s o n ’s
C o d e x B). ed. Thompson, The Coptic Version o f the Acts o f the Apostles and the Pauline Epistles in the Sahidic Dialect, p. xviii: 3i.pi-T3i.r3i.nH Ji^p i-n ji^M eeY e o y o N
n im
p-® N O B e N T e - n N o y T e
eT ® -N 3i^-tuty g M - n e i J t t u t O M e eboa e
-
nanoy
-
c
.
n ip e q kcu
eB O A .
451
G lo ssa ij to the Chrestomathy For grammatical morphs, see Ihe Select Coptic Index. Abbreviations: adv(er)b, comp(oun)d, coiij(unc(ion), feni(inine), Infl(ected) modlf(ier), init(ial) au(itude) niark(e)r, inlerj(ection), intr(ansitive), masc(uline), n(ou)n, p(articipiuin) c(oniunctum) i.e. construct participle, pl(ural), poss(essive), prep(osition), prop(er), tr(ansitive), v(er)b
E G Y P T IA N C O P T IC A reference to C r u m ’s Coptic Dictionary is given in parentheses. Definitions partly follow the wording of the Dictionary. Entries are alphabetized in the usual way (187).
xx=. See e i p e jiMAgTe vb ir MMO= grasp, embrace, pos.scss. premil, rule. e - M e y - y ) am3l2'''e mmo= without hindrance. n - e T ‘’- 3iMA2 '''e the strongest one. (9a)
XHxy. Sec N3iY monastic title of respect
BCUK E 2 o y N e - go into, enter, b c u k egpJii ascend. (29a) bjia nn masc eye. (31b) BABiAe nn fern kernel, single grain. _(37b) Bppe genderless nn new, young personi thing. (43a) B O T E nn fern abomination. (45b)
.Apa. (13a) A n e nn fern (pi A nH ye) head. (13b) 3i p i - . Sec e i p e poss nn 138 limit, end. (16a) 3iC 3ii vb intr (xciu o y^) hc(come) light (not heavy). (17b) AeHT. Sec 2 HT 3k.ycu conj and. ( 19b) specifier 72 which? n -jg compd advb how? (2 2 a) a u ) 3iT vb intr (oui^) he(come) many. much. (2 2 b) X2 0 nn inasc (pi treasure, treasury'. (24b) jigepA Ts (refl) vb tr stand. (537b) 3i.2 Hy. See KcuKAgHy prep without. (25b) vb tr (B JiB e-, BjiBtocus, bab o t ', BjiBcu'. p.c. BJiBE-) regard n.v
foolish, despise; hc(come) insipid, foolish. BABe-^pcuMe genderless nn boaster. (28b) vb intr 168(c)
BCUK
( b h k ^)
go. deinirt.
e-, e po= prep to, for. against, in com parison to. egpjii e - to. Ngoyo e —, N g o y e - more than. (.50a) eBiHN genderless nn poor, wretched person/thing. (53a) e B O A 2N-- N 2 ht= prep from, out of. (684a) G B O A 21TN-, 2 ITOOTS prcp throiigh, by the agency of. (429b) EKlBe nn feni breast. (54a) eM3i.Te advb greatly, very. (190a)
eNKA. See n k ji eweg. u j A - e N e g conipd advb forever. eternal; N - u j A - e N e g eternal. (57a) e n e c H T combinative advb 206 enJigOY combinative adbv 206 epo. See ppo epN-, epcu= compd prep 209 to. upon. (289b) e p H T vb tr Im m o s promise, vcrn-. nn masc (pi. epjiTe) promise, vow. (58b) ep Hy nn expressing reciprocity 90. (59a) ETBe-. e T B H H T = prep because o f
453
GLOSSARY
concerning, for the sake of.
eTB e-
nAi therefore. (61a) e T B e - J t e - conj because. (61b) 6TN-, e T o o T = compd prep 209 lo. (427b) e e o o y . See gooy^ e o o y nn masc glory. 'f'-‘’e o o Y compd vb tr glorify. (62a) etyjte- conj given that, supposing llial,
if (as is or seems lo he ilje case), if indeed, since (causal), even though. (63a) e g o y N combinative advb 206 62 combinative advb 206 ejtN-, ejtcu-, ejtcus (often erro neously AJtcu*) compd prep 209 upon, over, for, on account of, against, to. in addition to, after. (757a) HI nn masc house. p M N - H i genderless nn housema.ster, -mistress (of monas tery). (66a) H pn nil masc wine. (66b) ei vb intr 168(c) (n Hy^) come, ei e B O A come outside, ei e B O A 2 ^ - leave, come out of. ei e B O A 2>tn- proceed from, ei e n e C H T come down, ei 6 2 pill come up (of plants), ei 62pJii e - come to. (70a) eie- init att markr 492 then (ergo, igitur, profecto). (75a) eicu vb tr (eiA-, em*) wash. eicu eBOA wash. (75a) eiAA nn fem mirror. (76b) eiMe vb tr e - know, understand. (77b) erne vb tr (N-. nt=) bring. eiNe eBOA extract. (78b) e iN e vb tr mmo = resemble. N n masc likeness. (80b) e i p e vb tr ( p - , o*. imperative Api-) do, make, p- fonns compound verbs 180. o* n - be. (83a) e iC 2 HHTe. e iC 2 HTe, e iC 2 H H ne, eiC2HHNe, eiCNe interj lo, he hold, listen. (85b) eiJiT= poss nil 138 eye. refl e2pJi^i look up (i.e. qi-eiJiT=). (73b) eicuT nn masc (pi eiOTe) parent, father. (86b)
454
K H * ) place, pm. leave, appoint, give (concede to, permit to have), k c u e B O A forgive, release;
K c u v b tr ( K A - ,
nn
ma.sc
forgiveness,
e2pJi^i
kcu
leave, allow there to be.
kcu
n c c u
=
(refl) abandon. (94b) K A K e nn masc KCUKA2Hy
darkness.
vb
(101b)
tr ( K e K -
. . . A2Hy,
ka[ji]k= . . . A2 Hy. KHKA2 Hy*) strip
(s.one) naked; he(come) naked.
(100b)
K I M v b tr M M O = + part of b o d y (or e - + external
object)
make move; move.
e 2 o y N e - m o v e into. ( 108a) K A M e genderless n n (fem.
person/thing.
tr ( k m u ) - ,
K c u M U ) vb
k a m h
) hlack
( 109b)
mack.
KOMty=)
.sneer o/. (11 Ob) (Ker-,
kot=)
turn; refl
turn (self), return.
KCUTe
en3i20Y
Kcure
tr
vb
turn back. KTO,
K c u r e n c a - seek. (124a)
i.e. T K T O
vb
tr
(Kre-.
kto=.
KTHy^) make to turn or return: turn. K T O e B O A turn awa y , (refl) return to. (127b)
kto
epAT=
earth, soil. (131a) he(come) envious,
K A 2 nn m a s c
K C U 2 v b inir ( k h 2 *J
zealous.
peq-Kcu2
genderless
nn
jealous person/thing. (132b)
AO
v b intr
2^ -
cease, .stop, he healed.
AO
take leave of, h a v e d o n e with,
cease from. ( 135a) A A C nn masc
tongue. ( 144b) 72 nny at all, any.
A A A y specifier
MA
nn
masc
refectory MMAy NiM
place.
MA-N-oycuM
(of monks).
compd
compd
(146a)
advb
M n M A there.
er®-
2m
a d v b everywhere.
~ m a 2^-
n e i M A c o n i p d a d v b here. (153a) M e v b tr ( M e p e - , M e p i T = , p.c.
love, embrace.
m a ' i -)
M A i - ' ’jirJieoN
gen
derless n n o n e w h o loves w h a t is good. M A i - ' ’p c u M e genderless n n o n e w h o is philanthropic. (156a)
Me
nn fem
truth.
(156b)
M o y v b intr ( M O o y T ^ )
die. be dead. N;i
m a s c death. (159a) M A ^ B specifier 6 6 M A 1-.
See
M e vb
thirty. tr
(161a)
li c : Y P T I A N C O P T I C M O K M e K
ponder;
vb
(r
refl
conskler.
think,
(MeKMoyKs)
Nii iiiasc p o n
dering, thought. (162a)
daily.
M M H N e c o m p d advb M M A T e 158
only, x n
(172a)
mmate
xw x
not
second to the pMN —h i ). (347a) MJige nn masc ell. cubit (unit o f measure. fo rea rm 's length). (2 1 0 b) M2 M^)Y fn masc. cave, cave tomb. (2 1 2 b)
only ... but also. ( l90b)
MMAY advb there. (196b) M N - , N M - , N M M A = prep MvV/i,
together
with, and. (169b)
vb tr
MOONe
m anoyoy=,
(Mene-,
n x n e -)p a .'itu re ,fc e d , tend. (173a) M N T p e n n m a s c w itness, testim o n \. p.c.
_(177a) M n M A
er^-MMAY
compd
there.
advb
_(154b)
helow. (60a) on the first day.
M n e c H T c o m p d advb 223 MnoYJi^ c o m p d
_
(469a)
MniOYoeity
_
advb
compd
long ago.
advb
(499b)
M n t y j i v b tr m m o = MOYP
vb
he worthy of.
tr ( M e p - ,
Mop=,
hind; he hound.
p.c. M A p - )
(179a) MHp^, mmo=
.. . N — bind (object) with (instrument). (180a)
See
M e p e - , MepiT*. M o c r e vb MACT-)
tr
hate.
MHTe
tr
(I87a)
road, path.
M o e i T n n masc
2HT=
M e vb
( M e c r e - , M e c T t u ? , p.c.
Jti-^MoeiT
c o m p d v b tr lead, guide. (188a) nn
m idst,
fem
n t m h t e
n-
c o m p d prep in the midst of. (I90b) MTO
eB O A .
M n e M T O
eB O A
N-
conipd prep in the presence of. (193a) MTON refl
lye(come) at rest;
v b tr ( m o t n ^ )
rest (self). Nn
relief; ■('-'’m t o n
m a s c rest, leisure,
n a*
c o m p d v b tr set
at ease. (193b) n n masc (pi m o y e i h . m o y [ n ] e i o o y e ) water. (197b) M eeY e vh tr J t e - think. M eeY e e devise (plan etc.). Nn masc thought, remembrance; p - n M e e Y e n - re member: A p i-n A M eeY e remember me (make-niy-reniembrance). (199a)
M O O Y
mooyt^. Sec M O Y Mootye
travel, go about.
vl) Intr
(203b) Meg-CNJiY
nn
masc
second.
5eute-
papioc; (administrator in monastery
N - . See e r n e vb tr bring N - , MMO= prep of relationship 203 of, out of, fro m , related to; also marks
direct object. (215a, 215b) N -, Nx=, NH= prep to, fo r (dative). (216a) NA vb tr show m ercy n a* upon. Nn masc mercy, charily; a t - n a genderless nn pitiless person/thing. (216b) n o y b nn masc gold. (2 2 1 b) NO Be nn masc ,wi. a t - n o Be genderless nn sinless, innocent person/thing. p-'*NOBe compd vb sin; p e q - p ‘*NOBe genderless nn sinner. (222a) N B A -, NBAAA= compd prep 209 beyond, e.vcept, e.xceptfor. (35a) NK3i nn masc thing, m aterial object. (223a) NiM specifier 7 2 who? which? (225a) NANOY-, NANOY= verboid 3 7 6 be good; NANOY- NgoYO e - be better than. n e r-N A N O Y -tJ nn 1 1 0 good person/thing, goodness; p e q - p ®neT-NANOY-tJ genderless nn doer of good. (227a) NOYNe nn fem root. (227b) N NAY N1 M compd advb always. (235a) NNA2 P N -, NNA2 pA= prep in the pres ence of. before, in relation to. (649b) Nece-, Neccu= verboid 3 7 6 be beauti fu l; N e c e - N g O Y e e - be more beautiful than. (228b) n c a o y n a m N - , MMO= compd prep 2 1 2 at the right of. (484a) NOYHp compd advb how m uch? how greatly! (488b) NCA-, Nccu= compd prep 2 0 9 behind. after, fro m , e.vcept. (314a) NOYTe nn masc god; h n o y t b God (of the Bible), a t - n o y t b genderless nn godless person/thing, atheist. (230b) NT6 YNOY compd advb im m ediately. _ (484b) N e e N - compd prep 2 1 0 Hke. (639a) 455
G I. O S S A R Y N A Y (imperative jinay) vb tr e - see, behold. (233a) NAY nn masc hour, time, n n a y ni m compd advb always. (234b) nhy". See ei N O Y o eicy n i m compd advb always. _ (499b)_ N O Y e t y N - compd prep 211 wilhoul. (502a)
pursue. (274a) n e e o o Y (ner- g o o Y ) nn 110 evil, evil person!thing. (731b) nHYe. See n e njitye nn fem half, division. (278a) nejte-, nejtA= verboid 380 said. (285a)
NA t y e - , NAtycu* verboid 376 he many, much, plenliful. (236a) N A t y r e nn fem strength, protector.
pH nn masc sun. (287b) pi nn fem cell, room (hut, cave, etc. o f monk). (287b) pcu inii atl markr whatsoever, indeed, at all, at last, then. (290a) pcu= poss nil 138 m outh, entrance. (288a) p c u M e nn masc person, man. “ p cU M e anyone. p m n - h Y genderless nn housemaster, -mistress (of monastery). p M N - g H T genderless nn intelligent person. BABe-®pcUMe genderless nn boaster. MAi-‘’pcuMe genderless nn one who is philanthropic, p —‘’p c u M e become human, become man. (294b) p M M A O nn rich p erso n or thing. (296a) p M g e genderless nn (fem pMgH, pi. pMgeeYe) fre e person. M N T - p M g e nn fem freedom, liberation. (297a) pAN nn masc name. (297b) p p o nn masc emperor, king. M N T - e p o nn fem empire, kingdom. (299a) pAT= poss nn 138/(W/. leg. (3()2b) pooYty vb inir H’fjrn-, hove core for. Nn masc worry, care; A T - p o o Y t y gen derless nn carefree person/thing; qi*'pooYty compd vb ircare about. (306b) p A t y e vb tr rejoice p A t y e m m o = re joice at; deride. p A t y e e j t N - rejoice over. pAtye nn masc joy; jn- o y p A t y e compd advb joyfully. (3()8b) p o Y g e prop nn masc evening, e p o Y g e compd advb in the evening. (3J()b) p A g T O Y nn a kind o f monkish garment. (312b)
(238a) NE2 nn masc oil. (240b) N A 2 B nn masc yoke. qAi-^NAgB genderless nn beast of burden (yoke-bear_ er). (243a) N g o Y o compd advb especially, greatly, very, more. N g o Y O e-, N g o Y e more than. (736a) NOYJte vb tr ( n s j c - , NOJt=, nh jc ^)
throw, cast. N o y jL e e n A g o Y m m o = refl put behind oneself, ignore. (247a) n o 6 genderless nn
great, large person! thing. n o 6 n j o y o e - greater than.
_ (250a) n6 o n c.
Jti n 6 o n c attack, hurt; nn masc violence. p e q - J t i n 6 o n c gen derless nn violent person/thing. (822a) n o y 6 c vb tr ( N e 6 c - , n o 6 c ^) make angry, he angry e - at. (252b) o ^ See eipe oeiK nnniasc bread, loaf. (254a) O N advb and conj (enclitic) again, also, still. (255b) oty^ See x i y x i 002 masc moon. (257b) n e nn fem (pi n n Y e ) sky, heaven. (259a) n(cu)a)N, ncucuNe vb tr ( n e N - etc., noN=. t i h h ') pour. n(cu)a)N e B O A pour out. (263a) ncupK vb tr (nepK-, nopK=) pluck
out. root out; he(conie) pluckcd out. (268b) rrcupjt vb ir (nepjt-, nopjt=, nopJt^) divide, .separate e - front. (271b) ncuT vb intr 168(c) (hht^) flee, run. ncuT e — hasten towards. ncuT n c a -
456
p - . See e i p e
c e specifier 66 si.xty. (368b) c e interj yM- (316a)
i : c; y i > i i a n c e i v b intr ( c h y * )
f ie d
w ith.
N-
h c {co m e )filled , sa tis
cl^-
•|'-®CBa) c o m p d v b tr m m o =
taught)
(person
vb
CBTCUT^)
vb
tr
(c B re -,
tr
cbtcut=,
p repare, set in order.
(323a)
(cmamajit^, c m a a t ^ ) e -
N n m a s c praise. (335a)
nn
C N A y specifier 6 6
ccuty
vb
tr ( c e t y - ,
d e sp ise .
Nn
two.
C
21 M 6
nn
2N 6.
fem
seven.
(346b)
oyeg-cAgNe
ointm ent.
...2
^-
TBA
nn
masc
give, sell, f -
vb
tr
(TcBe-.
repay, requite.
TBBo=) TBBO
ten th o u sa n d , m y ria d .
c o n c n v b tr ( c n c n - . c n c c u n = . c e n -
entreat, coiiifort; praise. (325b) c n o T o y n n m a s c lip(s). (353a) c o y p e n n f e m thorn, spike, dart. (354a) c p q e v b intr ( c p o q T * ) (com e to ) h e at leisure, still. (357a) c c u T e v b tr ( c e T - , c o t = ) redeem , res cue. (362a) CTOi n n m a s c arom a. (362b) c c u T M v b tr ( C C T M - , c o T M = ) listen. ccun^)
ccu tm
Jte-
leam, hear. (363b)
t o o b
*.
(398b)
v b tr ( T B B C - , T B B O = , T B B H y )
purification. (399b)
N n m a s c purity,
TBNH
n n m a s c (pi T B N O o y e ) beast, d o m estic anim al. (400b) T B T n n m a s c fis h . (401b) TAKO
vb
tr ( t a k e - ,
tako=
d e stro y ; p e rish .
Hy[T]*)
tak-
Nn
destruction; m n t - a t - t a k o
masc nn f e m
indestructibility. (405a)
See
TKTO.
kto
T 6 A H A v b tr TCUAM
rejoice
ejtN-
at.
(410a)
v b tr ( t o a m = = , t o a m * )
pollute.
Nn
masc
defile,
pollution;
at-
T C U A M genderless n n stainless, unpol
c o y o nn
star. (368a) si.v. (368b) m a s c w heat, cereal.
cooyN
vb
c i o y nn mas c
luted. (410b)
c o o y specifier
(coyN-,
know , he acq u a in ted w ith.
taa6o (369a)
coycuN=) (369b)
vb
TAA6Hy*)
T O M nn m a s c
v b tr ( c o y T N - , c o y T c u N = ,
TAM-)
N-
compd
advb
2^“
uprightly.
(TAA6e-.
taa6o=,
heal; get well.
Nn
masc
m a t ( o f reeds).
(412b)
T C U M v b tr ( t [ c ] m - , t o m = , t h m * . p.c.
coyTCUN^) m ake straight: he straight, uprightness;
tr
healing. (411b)
upright. (371a)
(388b)
sell (object) for
(351a)
oycooyTN
tr
... 6 2 pill 6 T O O T S h a n d (object) over to. -|- M M O *
p u rify, b e(com e) pure.
masc
vb
forms c o m p o u n d verbs 180. -f- m m o =
N - the other kinds of, the rest of the.
tr
compd
-|- v b tr (-|--, TJiAs, T O * )
TcucuBe
listen to.
(378a)
2 ' O M e ) w om an.
(pi
ment. (385b)
nourish, rear. lend. (347b) v b intr rem ain over, be rem a in der. N n m a s c remainder; n K C c e e n e
Nn
scorn.
(price). (392a)
ceene
cooyTN
CHty^)
shame,
(385a) CA
(399a)
e-
(of
coty=,
masc
C A t y q specifier 6 6
v b tr ( c A A N t y - , C A N o y t y s )
ccuTM
2 =.
masc
c o n g re g a tio n
fem
c o 6 n nn mas c
c c u N e sister. (342b)
CAANty
Nn
M M O = c o m m a n d ; nn masc c o m m a n d
CMOT nn masc fo r m , character, likeness, p a tte rn . o y c M O T N - o y c u T one only. AT-CMOT genderless nn per son/thing without form. (340b) CON nn m a s c (pi. CNHy) sibling, b ro th er.
c o o y
(375a)
e n j i g o Y d r a w back. (325a)
p ra ise.
(ceyg-.
monks). (373b)
taught)
CCUK v b tr ( C 6 K - , COK=, CHK^ p.C. c a k - ) d raw , beguile, gather, c c u k CM oy
tr
g a th er, collect.
gathering (place?, of monks). (372b) cooygc
teach. (319b)
coB Te
vb
cooyg*)
B e e y C e ] ) w ise p e rson/thing. (319a) c B c u n n f e rn (pi. c B o o y e ) lesso n , (thing
ccuoyg
(316b)
C A B e genderless n n (fem c a b h , pi
leaching.
fo p iic
shut.
TCUM
epN- .
close off (thing) f r o m
..6BOA (person).
(412b) TAMio
v b tr ( T A M i e - ,
t a m i o
=,
t a
-
457
G L O S S A RY MiHY^) make, create. Nii masc crea ture, creation. (413a) "[■Me (pi TMe) village. (414a) TMH nn fem mal (of reeds). (415b) t c u m ( n ) t vb tr e - weet, befall. (416b) TCUMC
vb
tr
(T [e]M C -,
to m c= ,
TOMc’) bury. (416a) T A N g o vb tr (TANge-, t a n j o s ) make or keep alive. p e q - T A N g o genderless nn giver of life. (421a) -f-ne nn fem taste, compd vb tr MMO= taste. (423a) T A n p o nn fem month. (423b) TH p= inf! modif 152 . . . all. entirely, all . . . , utter: utterly. (424a) Tcupn vb Ir (T[e]pn-, Topn=) .vp/rp, rob. (430b) Tcup2 vb intr (Topg^) be(come) keen, alert, sober, upright. (432b) T C A B o vb tr ( T C A B e - , t c a b o = , t c x b h y [ t ] * ) make wise, tearh, T C A B o e - tell a b o u t . (434b)
show.
T A y o vb tr (TAye-, TAyo=) utter, put forth. (441b) T c u o y N vb tr (ToyN-, TcuoyN=) rai.\e, resurrect; arise; ref! arise. Nn masc resurrection. TcuoyN 2 ^ ~ and carry (burden). (445a) T o y N O C vb tr (ToyNec-, T 0 y N 0 c = ) wake, raise, arouse. (446b)
Tcuu; v b tr ( T ^ u ) - , TOU)=, THU)") limit.
determine, appoint, command. (449b) T A g o vb tr (TAge-, t X 2 0 =. TAgny^) reach, befall, touch. (445a) "[■ge vb Ir (TJige^) bc(come) drunken. j456b) e M K o vb Ir ( e M K e - , e M K o = , e M KHy^) ill u.'ie, afflict, humiliate. (459b) Tcugc vb Ir (regc-, t a 2C=, t a j c ^) anoint n - with. (461b) TAJtpo vb tr (TAJtpe-. TjiJtpo=, t a j c pny^) nuikclhe(conic) strong, firm, fast. (462b) t 6 a i o vb tr (T6Aie-, t 6 a i o =. t 6 a Tny') disgnne. condemn. (465b) o y specifier 72 what? what kind of? (467b) oyji s|x;cifier 72 one. noyji the first day of the week, Sunday. (469a)
458
oycu. 'f'-oycu conipd vb tr m m o = put forth, bring up (blossom); 'f'-oycu egpJii M M O = vb tr sprout. (475a) oyAAB^. See o y o n oycuBu; white (person or thing). (476b) o y c u A c vb tr (oyeAc-, oyoAc=.
oyoAC*) be)id, humiliate; he(come) humiliated. (477b) o y c u M vb tr (oy[e]M-, oyoM=, p.c. o y A M - ) eat, bite. N n masc eating, food; M A N - o y c u M refectory (of monks). (478a) o y o e i N nn masc light. (480a) o y e m e vb inlr/ww by. (483b) o y N T e - , o y N T A = verboid 383 (neg M M N T e - , MM NTA=)
luive.
OyNTG-
. . . e — hold against Ihe account of (person), be owed by (person) 392. (481a) o y N o y nn fem hour. N r e y N o y compd advb immediately. (484b) o y N o q vb intr rejoice. o y N o q ejtNrejoice over. (485b) o y o n vb intr (oyAAB^) be(come) pure: holy. n e T - o y A A B nn 110 holy person/lhing. saint. (487b) o y n p specifier 72 how many? how much? N o y H p compd advb how much? how greatly! (488b) oycuT (fem oycure). N - o y c u T .wigle. .same 158. (494a) o y T e — , oyTcu= prep between, among. (494b) o y e r - verboid 382 is different, o y e r A o y e T - B = A is one thing, B is another. (495b) o y o T o y e r vb intr hc(come) green. Nn masc greenness. (493b) oyoeiu) nn ina.sc time, occasion. Mnioyoeiu) compd advb long ago. Noyoeiu) NiM compd advb always, npoc-^oyoeiu) genderless nn 124 teinporary person/lhtng. (499b) oycuu) vb Ir (oyeu)-. oyjiU)=) want, desire, love. Nn ma.sc wish, will, oycuu) e - wont to. (500a) o y e u i N - conipd prep 211 (al.so Noy-
eu ^ N -) without, in the absence of. (502a) oycuuiT vb tr n a =
worship. (504a)
lU.YPriAN oytu? vb ir (oyeg-,
oyHg*)
iwt; dwell, live, reside, oyjig® . . . ejtN- add to. oyjig* red n c a - fol low (put self after). o y e g - C A g N e compd vb command; nn masc c o m mandment. (505b) oyjtAi vb intr (oyojt^^) he whole, safe, sound. oyjtAi (imperative, as episto lary formula) Greetings, Farewell. N n masc salvation. (51 lb) cuBu; vb tr (eBu;-,
obu
get, he oblivions to.
;=, o b u ;+) for e - over
cubu;
look. (518b) cuNe nil fem stone. (524a) CUN 2 vb intr (ONg*) he(rome) alive, live. N n ma.sc life, lifetime. (525a) cupjt vb tr ([e]pjt-, opjt=, opjt*) make firm, he firm. (530a) cucK vb intr ( o c k *) delay, continue, he prolonged. (530b) cuu) vb tr (eu)-, oui=) read, cuu) e e o A cry out. (533a) cuge. See AgepJiTs cu6 t vb tr (e6 T-, o 6 t=) choke, throt tle. (540b) u)-, eui- verbal auxiliary 184 he able to, can. (54 la) ly x iin masc festival. p-^uiJi compd vb celebrate festivals. (543a) u)Ji vb intr rise (of sun). (542b) u)Ji-, u;jipo= prep to, toward, until. uiJi-eNeg forever, eternal; n-ujae N 62 eternal. (541b) uje specifier hundred 66. (546b) ujo specifier thousand 66 . (549b) UICUB vb tr (U)B-, U)OB = , UIHB^) shave. (550b) uiiBe vb tr (u)B-, o / b t s , uiOBe^) change; bp different. uiOBe e - be different from. (551a) u)BHp nn masc (fem u^seepe) com panion, friend. (553a) u ) Bp-u;eAeeT nn fem sister-in-law. (553b) u i a h a vb intr pruw Nn inasc prayer. (559a) uieA e e T nn fem bride: daughter-inlaw; marriage. u)Bp-uieAeeT nn
COPTIC’ fem sister-in-law. n A - T u ^ e A e e r nn masc 111 groom. (560b) uiAeg nn masc rod, wand. (561b) u)HM genderless nn (fem u^hmg) small person/thing. (563a) uiMJi vb intr (u^ooMe*) he(come) light, fine, subtle. (565a) u i M M O genderless nn (fem uimmcu) strange, foreign person/thing. (565b) u)Om(n)t specifier three 66 . M e g u i O M N T nn masc third person/ thing; Fineq M e g - u i O M N T N - g o o y compd advb three days later. (566b) u)Mu;e vb tr (uiMu^e-, u)mu)ht=) M M O = or NAs .vPH’c, worship. (567a) u)N - 2T h = (refi) compd vb tr have compassion on. u)Jin-2 T h = (refl) genderless nn compassionate person; M NT-u)JiN- 2 T H = (refl) fem nn c o m passion. (716b) u) H N nn masc tree. (568b) u)iNe vb tr (u)[e]NT-, u;nt*) seek. ask. u)iN€ N C A - seek after. (569a) uicuNe vb intr he(come) sick, weak. N n masc illness. (570b) ujO N T e nn fem thorn, thorn tree. (573a) uicun vb tr (u;[e]n, u)on=, u^Hn*) receive, contain, lake; (stative) accept able. u;n-® 2 ice compd vb suffer, undertake suffering. (574b) u ^ i n e vb Ir m m o = shame; be(conie) ashamed. N n masc shame; Jti— ®u;in e compd vb be put to shame. (576b) u^cune vb intr (u^oon*) be, e.xist. dwell,
befall, happen, come into being, come to pa.ss. uicune N-, u i o o n n - be. (577b) u ^ n n p e nn fem wonder, amazement. p-®u)nHpe compd vb be amazed. (581a) u i H p e nn masc child, son (fem u ^ e e p e daughter), u). u )h m boy, girl. (584a) u i o p n genderless nn (fem u i o p n e ) fir.'it person/thing. p - ® u ) o p n e - compd vb be before, be earlier than. (587a) uicucuT vb tr (u)eT-, u ^a [a ]t *, p.c. uiJiT-) cut. slay; lock, he needy. (590b) u i o o y e vb intr (u)oycuoy) become dry, dry up. (601b)
459
G L U S S A RY
ty o y e iT * vb stative e m p t y . n e T u jo y e iT nn 110 vanity, emptiness, empty person/thing; e j c N - o v n e T t y o y e iT in vain. (602b) tyuJty vb tr ( t y e u ) - , s c a l i e r . (605b) tyjigpAi combinative advb 206 t y jijte vb intr s a y . u jA jte m n - con verse with, ty jijte m n - . . . J t e - say to (person) . . . (introducing reported speech). (612b) u ) 6 om (like 6 om ) p o w e r . a h i l i l \ - . 0 Y N -t y 6 0 M MMO= . . . e - can (abilily-exisls i n . . . t o . . . ). (816b) q i vb tr ( q i - , qiT=, qHy*, p.c. q A i~ ) lake, lake away, q i mmo= . . . eBOA 21- take . . . away from, q i mm^y take away. qiJiT* (i.e. q i- e iA T * ) refl vb 62 pit 1 look up. q j i i - ' ’NJi2 B genderless nn yoke-bearing person, beast of burden. (620a) qiJiT*. See eiAT*, qi
2 A1 B6 C nn fem shadow. (657l>) 2 HK6 genderless nn poor personhhing.
_(664a) 2 AAO genderless nn (fem 2''-'-‘^ . pl
2AAOI) oldpersonhhinf’; elder, senior monk. (669b) 2 AAHT nn ma.sc (pl 2 ^ '^ ^ T e) bird.
(67 lb) 2M —MA NiM compd advb ever'iwhere.
(154b) 20M(N)T nn masc copper, bro n ic. money. (678a) 2 MOOC vb intr sil, rem ain, dwell. 2 MOOC 6 - sit at. 2 MOOC 6 2 pAi’ sit down, be seated. (679a) 2M2^-'^ in masc fem slare, servanl. m nt-2M 2^-'^ fem slavery, p ‘’2 M2 JIA compd vb serve. (665a) 2 N -, N2 HTS prep in, al, on, fro m . 6 b o a 2 N - from, out of. (683a) 2 HN6 nn masc spice, incense. (688b) 23in nn m a x jm lgem eni, inqiiesl. (693b) 2 An 6 CHT N -, iMMO* compd prep 210
iimlerneolh.
2 JL-, 2^PO= prep under, front, fo r the sake of. (632a)
2 Ae genderless nn (fem 2 ^h , pi g ^ e e y ) Iasi person/lhing. 2 ^h nn fem end. (635a) 26 vb intr 168(c) ( 2 hY*) f o i l , c o n i m i l s i n . 26 e - fall into; find. 2 ^ e 2 pAi e J t N - fall onto. 2 ^ 6 j<.n - fall upon. 26 2 J ^ t n - fall beside. (637a) 26 nn fem m a n n e r , w a y . K A T A -e 6 conj just as. NAu; N- 2 6 coinpd advb how? NT6 i'2 e conj .similarly. ju.sl so. N e e (+ relative clause) just as; how, that (introducing reported speech). N e 6 N - conipd prep 210 as, just as. like. (638b) 21- , 2 “ JJ
2 pAi' com binative advb 206 2 p o ty vb intr ( 2 0 pty*, p.c. 2^pyP~) make, he hcuvy. 2 ^ p u p -'’2 HT gender-
less nn long-suffering person. (7()6a) 2 p u ;ip e nn masc fem w iiii^ person.
(585b) 2 Ap6 2 vb tr 6 - keep. obey. (707b) 2 Api2 J>^po= prep op u n , on (my, yon,
elc.) own. (634a) 2 i c e vb tr (2 A C t\ p.c. 2 Ji^CT-) irouble,
he iroiihled, weary. Nn masc suffering;
u ; n - ‘*2 i c e compd vb suffer, under take suffering. (7 lOb) 2 AT nn masc .sih er. (713b) 2 HT iin masc, 2 t h * poss nn 1 J 8 heorl. m i n d . JieHT (i.e. 3i t - 2 h t ) genderle.ss nn foolish person/thing; MNT-AeHT nn fem fiwlishness. p m n ~ 2 h t gen derle.ss nn iiuelligent person; m n t PM N - 2 HT nn fem intelligence. u )Jin -' 2 Th* (rell) genderless nn com passionate person; m n t - u p a n 2 TH= nn fem compassion. 2 ^ P ‘i>~ ^2 h t genderle.ss nn long-suffering per son. • |'- 2 TH= (refl) compd vb tr e pay heed to, observe. (7 14a)
HCJYPTIAN
COI'TIC
head. (756a) so that, in order that.
2 0 T. MTigoT eBOA N - coiiipd prep
Jtcu= poss n n 1 3 8
opposite. (7 18b) 2 TH*. See 2 HT 2 A T e-. See gJiTN2 o r e nn fem fear; feaiful person or thing. p - ‘’2 0 r e compd vb tr 2 h t= be
JteKji(3i.)c conj
afraid of, fear. (720b) 2 iT n e conipd advb 2 2 3 above. 2 ATN-, 2 ^ 2 t n - , 2 ^ T e - , 2 ^ t o o t = compd prep 2 0 9 beside, with. (428b) 2 1 T N -. 2 ' t o o t = compd prep 2 0 9 through, by, from. (428b) 2 T 0 0 y e prop nn masc dawn. 2 T o o y e advb at dawn; 2 TOOYe eMATe at first light. (727b) 2A eH N - (i.e. 2 ^ - t I2 h n - ) compd prep 2 1 0 before. (641b) 2HY nn ma.sc profit, benefit. •|'-*'2 hy conipd vb tr m m o = gain; benefit.
(729a) 2 0 0 y nn masc day. (730a) 2 0 0 y* vb stative be evil. n e T ‘’- 2 0 o y nn masc evil person/thing; evil. (731a) 2 o y o nn ma.sc greater part, greatness. N2 o y o compd advb especially, great ly. very, more. N o y o e - , N2 o y e iiiore lhan. (735a) 2J^2 specifier 7 2 many, iniiclt. (741b) 2 1 -X.N-, 2 '-!ttu -, 2 1 -X.tu* compd prep
H/)tin, over, in, on, at, beside, for, throiif’h. from upon. (7.‘)8b)
(764a) JtcuKM
vb
JtUJM
nn
tr
(jteKM-,
wash.
jtOKM*)
j c o k m
generation
masc
*,
(763a) (in line of
descent). (770b)
book, volume. (770b) since (time, place). (772b)
j t c u c U M e nn m a s c J t i N - prep
J t n i o v b tr (Jtnie-, j t n i o = , j c n m r ^ )
blame, upbraid.
Nn
masc
blame.
(778b)
beget, bring
J t n o vb tr ( J t n e - , J t n o = )
forth.
Jtno
n a
=
acquire.
Nn
masc
begotten offspring. (778b) Jtoeic
nn
masc
lord, lady.
fem
J tic o o y e )
(pi
(787b)
J t i c e v b tr ( J t e c T - , jtJiCTs, Jto c e ^ , p.c.
exalt; be(come) high.
jtJiCi-)
(788b)
JtiT*. See JLi JtcUTE vb tr (J te T -, JtOT») pierce, pen
etrate: go through.
JtcuTe
j i t n
- go
through. (791b)
jc o o y
vb
(hither).
( j c e y - , Jc.ooy=) sr/id
tr
(793a)
JCCU 2 M v b tr (Jce 2 M - ,
JtJi2 M*)
defile, pollute; be(come) defiled, pol luted. (797b)
209
6e
p.c. 2 ^ 6 b -) (cause to) wither. (744b)
conj (enclitic) 2 3 5
any more.
2 Cu6 b vb tr (2 e 6 b - , 2 o 6 b=, 2 o 6 b^,
6tu
( J t e - , J t i - , J t o o = ) say (sonieihiiifi). Jtcu m m o - c J t e - , J t o o - c j c e - say (introducing report ed speech). (754a)
Jtcu vb ir
514
Jtcu vb tr MMO= sing. (755b) jtu ) nil masc cup. (759b)
6
corrtinue. persist,
v b intr ( 6 e e r ^ )
desist, stop. J t e - conj heraiise,for. (746b) JCi vb tr (JC1 - , JCiTs, JCHyt) reccive. take, seize, lead. Jti n 6 o n c compd vb attack, hurt; nn masc violence; p e q Jti n 6 o n c genderless nn violent per son/thing. compd vb become incarnate. compd vb taste. (747b) J to vb tr ( J t e - , JtHy^) phnt. (752a)
nn
cub
then, therefore,
(802a)
(803a)
masc
weak person or thing.
M N T - 6 t U B n n f e m weakness. (805b) 6cutUAe
vb
tr
(6eAe-,
6
o o a
*,
6 o o \e * ) swathe, clothe, rover n -
with. 6
m
6 6
i n g
find). See
under
o m
nn
o m o
(809a)
- (presumably 6
)6o
fem
power, ability
). o y N - * ’6 o M
m
m m o
* .
(like .e-
c an (ability-exi.sts in [person] to). 6 ‘’6
e-
o m
powerful sanie
over;
mea n i n g ;
same;
m
-
conipd v b be able to, be u
)-6
m
-'’6
o m
e-
- 6
m
-'’6
o m
e-
n a
N A - t y - 6 M - ' ’6 o M
e-
same.
(815b) 6 m e
vb
(r ( 6 n -, 6
m
-, 6
n t
=)
find. 461
(; L O S S A R Y
6 m - * 6 om compd vb be able (to).
6 p o 6 (pi 6 p o )a) 6 )
(820a)
(831b) 6 eeT^. Sec 6 oj
6 o n c . Sec n 6 o n c 6epoJB nil masc (pi 6 e p o o B )
staff.
(828a)
gaze at. (837a)
6cucyT vb tr e x N 6i JC n n f e m
hand.
seed (of plant)
(839b)
G R E C O -C O P T IC jkTJkeoc, - O N
son/lfiiiig. nn
one
genderless nn
MAi-®ArAeoN who
loves
what
good pergenderless is good.
M N T — jkPjkeoN nn f e m goodness.
xrXTtH nn
fem
descent), nn fem scripture.
rpAtfiH
love, act o f charity.
A e conj (enclitic) and, but, now (often untranslatable in Engli.sh). curtain (o f skin). m ission, job. genderless n n ju st pcr-
Jkpi-TjkPJknH (preceding a c o m m a n d )
5eppi<; T e p c i c n n f e m
please,
jl IK o NI jk n n f e m
A i c e H c i c nn f e m pen ultbv
euJN
nn
ma.sc
cption, ohsen’ation. eternity, eternal
realm, realm.
AiKAioc, - O N
sonl thing. righteoiisness. persecution. tr m m o = ie.u.
j L i K j k i o c Y N H nn f e m
jkKJkeJkpTOC, - O N
genderless nn
un
A i c u r M o c nn masc
clean person/thing. MNT-JkKxejkp-
jLOKiMJkZe vb
T o c n n f e m uncleanness.
ACupoN nn masc gift, bribe.
hilt, rather, instead, in any
JkAAJk conj
fpSotiaq 2 eBACUMAc,
case, so. fi(ifiv2 ^ M H N interj j4nip/i.
resurrection. lawless act. genderless nn lawless
jkNJkCTJicic n n f e m anomia
nn
JkNOMOc,
fem
-ON
person/thing. x nxTH n n fern dcceitfulness. genderless nn unhelieving persoi\lthing, nonbeliever, m n t -
jkniCTOc, - O N
-H,
-ON
e Ovoc, g e e N o c n n m a s c
nation. m aterial, stuff, thing. e i J L C U A O N n n m a s c idol. b I k w v 2 I K U J N n n f e m image. e i M H T i conj e.xcept. e i m h t i e - except
e
\Jl O c
n n ma.sc
for, except.
eiTe
conj
or. eiTe
. , . eiTe either . . .
or.
J k n i c T o c nn f e m disbelief, i.n0CT0AiK0c,
iiii
week.
fem
genderless
apostolic pcrsonhhing. j k pxH n n f e m office, administrative posi tion. j k C e B H c genderless n n godless, impious person/thing. A Y S J ' N e vb tr m m o = iturea.w; multi ply. nn
e K K A H c i A nn f e m
church.
2 6 -^^-'^HN nn masc ethnically ‘Greek’ person in Egypt; pagan, i.'knic, nn fem hope.
"EX,X,riv
ENeprijk nn fem
power. desire
e n i e v M e i v b tr e — thing). e n i e y M e i
e-
(a person of
or n - desire (o
(perform action).
desire. aha! well done!
e n i e y M i a k nn fem
baptism. B O H e e i v b tr e - help (person). B O H e e i i . n n f e m aid, help. B O H e o c , - O N genderless nn helper. B A n T i C M A n n ma.sc
e y r e interj
vb tr glad. ecuN
eY
mmo=
gladden: he
rejoicc, exult in.
uUijv nn masc eternity, eternal
realm, realm.
Ix’cause. generation (in
rjkp conj (enclitic)/«/-, reNEA
462
nn
fem
line of
H conj
or.
H . . . H either . . . or.
G R H C O
e A i B e vb tr m m o= persecute. © A i'J 'ic nil fcm Irih iilation . © y c iJk nn fem s a c rific c . o fferin g. K jk e jk p o c , -O N genderless n n pure per
son/thing. K Jk e o A iK O c , —H, - O N g cn d crless nn c a th o lic , u n iv e rs a l p e r so n /th in g .
K(ii Y« P KAirJkp conj, f o r a ls o . KA Kcuc advb ill a b a d o r e v il w a y . KJk N conj ev e n if. K J k p n o c nn m asc f r u it, c r o p . T J ^ y e ®KJkpnoc eBOA com pd vb yield (crop). K.JkTJk-, K.j^TJkpo= p re p a c c o r d in g to. lik e, b y. K J .T i .- e e conj jusi as. Ki.T i p o - q of its ow n kind, ow n. k p i N e vb tr m m o= ju d g e . AJkOc nn ma.sc n a tio n , p e o p le . >ti)jreiv A y n i vb tr m m o= liiin . g r ie v e . p e q - A y n i gcnilcrle.ss nii gricvmi.s person/thing.
C O P T I C
n A N T O K p i T t u p , n i N T t U K p i T t u p nn m asc a lm ig h ty . n jk p jk - , n jk p jk p o s p re p c o n tr a r y to , in c o m p a r is o n w ith , b e v o n d , m o re than. nJkpjkBOAH nn fem p a r a b le . nJkpAKJkAei vb tr m m o = a p p e a l to , e n tre a t. nJkpA N O M O c, - O N genderless rm la w le s s p e r so n ! th in g. n J k p e e N O c nn m asc fem virgin . nJkppH ciJk nn fem f r e e d o m o f sp e e c h , fra n k n e ss , b o ld n e ss . jrs ip a o n o i; n i p ^ c M O c nn m asc te m p ta tion . n e r p j k nn fem ro c k y o u tc ro p , ro c k . n i c T e y e vb tr e - b e lie v e in. n i C T i c nn fe m f a ith , b e lie f, c r e e d . n A H N init att m ark r b u t. in a n y c a s e . n N e y n i , t t n a nn m asc sp irit. n N e y n i T i
K oc,
—o
n
gen d erless nn
s p ir i lu a l p e r .w n lih in g .
n O N H p o c , - O N genderless nn e v i l p e r MJk©HTHc nn ma.sc di.sciple. M e T iiN o ii. nn fcm rcpcniance. M O N i x o c , - H (B M ar 2 0 7 :2 0 ), - o n gcndcric.ss nn monk, solitary person/
tiling. M O N o re N H c genderless nn o n ly - b e g o t ten p e rso iiltliin g .
N JkZJk p H N o c genderless nn person/thing
from Nazareth; one o f Nazareth. VT[(JTeia NHCTiJk nn fe m /o s/. vof,iv N o e i , NOi vb tr m m o= u n d e r stand. p e q - N o e i g en d erless nn one w ho/that understands. N O M O c nil m asc la w . o iK o y M e N H nn fem c iv iliz a tio n , c i v i liz e d w o r ld , w o rld .
6 vioIoY f.iv ^ o M O A o r e i v b tr m m o = co n fess, a ffirm b e lie f in.
6 HOOI)OIOC g O M O o y c i o c , - o n
so n lth in g .
tio p v c iu TTopN iJ. im fem /b riik d fio d . n p o c - , n p o c p o = p rep in a c c o r d a n c e w ith , f o r ; ih a n (In com parl,sons). n p o c - ^ O Y O E K y genderless nn 1 2 4 tem porary person/thing. n p o c jL O K Jk v b tr e - a w a it, e x p e c t. TrpoofiX,UTO(; n p o c y A H T O c nn m asc p r o s e ly te .
npo< J)H T H C nn m asc p ro p h e t. n c u c advb h o w ? cABBATON n n m asc. ncA B B A T O N the sa b b a th . N c jk B B iT O N the w eek, n o y i N-Nc3kBBJkTON the first day o f the w e ek , n e g o o y n - n c x b BJkTON the sabbath day, cJkp5 nn fem flesh. cK ikN A JkA iZ e v b tr m m o = c a u s e to stu m b le ; stu m b le .
gen
derless nn co n siih s la n tia l person /tlxin g. o p r n nil fem a n g er. o y - a c . o y T e (ouSr, and o i h c Indistin gu ishable) conj n o r. n e ith e r, a n d . . . (n o t), oy-re . . . o y T e n e ith e r . . . nor.
CKHNH nn fem len t, d w e llin g . co
CTAYPOY. c T d y vb tr CTO AH nn fem ro b e . cOJMJk nn m asc b o d y .
m m o = cru c ify.
463
C i L O S S A R Y
TdHEiov TJkMioN nn masc ircasure house, storehouse. TJk
c u jl h nn fem sonf>. wait. g c u c T e conj so that.
2 JkMHN (ini'iv interj Amen.
2 BAc u Mi . c £(J6onai; nn fem week. geBjLCUMJkC c| 36on«(; nn fem week. g e e N o c EOvo(; nn mas c nation. 2 6 AAHN "E>^Xiiv nn masc ethnically 'Greek ' per son in Egypl; pagan. geAnic nn fem hope. 2 IKCON eiicwv nn fem ima)>e. g o M O A o r e i 6 h o X o y e iv vb Ir m m o=
confe.'is. affirm belief in. 4'Y’^h nn fem soul. 4 'Y x ik o c , - o n genderless nn animate person/thing, one endowed with soul.
464
2 0 M 0 0 Y C I 0 C , - O N 6^0060104 gen d e rle ss nn cnnsuhstantial person/
thing. 2 WCTE W0 1E conj so that.
Signals o f the Basic Sentence Patterns and Conversions 1. N
om inal
(C
S
en ten ce
: In
P
terlocu tiv e
ersonal
P
refixes
13)
hapter
JkN ?-
JkN (N )-
NTK-
NT6TN-
NTe-
Negation: . .. i.N and n - . . . i.N
also spelled JkN O K -
JkN O N -
NTOK-
NTCUTN-
NTO-
2. N
o m in a l
S
en ten ce
: D
elocutive
N
exus
P
ronouns
( C h a p t e r 13) (These forms also occur as components of cleft sentences.)
Ne
and
n e (invariable)
Negation: . . i.N and n - . . . i.N Invariable n e also occurs in other sentence patterns, 285. 3. S
entences
E
of
x isten ce
affirmaiivc
negative
o y N -
(
4. T h e
m
)
m n
D u rativ e
(C h ap ter
and
I
n dica tio n
(C
hapter
21)
-
S entence:
B asic
P erso n al
P refixes
14, 3 1 8 )
'I--
T N -
K - . var. r -
T e T tg -
T e - . var. r p qc-
ce-
Negation: . . . i.N and f i - . . . i.N
465
SIG N A LS OF ShNTKNCFi
Noie: T e - +
PA TlliR N S
AND
( ' () N \ I. K S I () N S
= tg n 3 ^ - , TepN3^-, T e p j^ -; t g t n - + u x - ~ Tt:TNN3^-,
TG T N ^-
5. N
on
-d ura tiv e C
B
onju ga tio n
ases
(C
hapter
15)
negative
a f firm a tiv e
M n e - , Mn= M n3^TG -, Mn3^T=5 a j3 ^ p e - ,
M e p e - . Me=
e p e - , e := e -
N N G -, N N e= o r G N N G -, eN N G =
M 3^pe-. M3^P=
M n p T p e -, M n p rp e =
N T e p e - , NTep=s e p c y a ^ N - , e=^aja^N- o r e p e - , e = a ;3 ^ N T e -,
TM -
N T G -, Ns: T 3 ^ p e -. T3^P= e - T M - T p e
T p e - , Tpe=f
^M -TTTpe . . . - T M -
6. SUFFIXALLY CONJUGATED V affirmative NXX-,
er
BOIDS ( C H A P T E R S
1 7 AN D
iiegai ivc o r N3^e- ,
N3^ NOy- ( o r N3^Ne- ) , N3^NOy= N e c e - , Nectu== NeCBtUtUiS N 3 ^ a ;e -. N 3.q;tu= N3^2'^tu6:= o r N e 6 tu = o r N e 6 tu tu = 2 N G - , 2*^^=^ n e jc e -, o y N T e -, oyN T ^s, oyN T*
7. I m p e r s o n a l affirm ative XNXrKVi
2 tu
466
P red icates negai ive
(M )M N T e -, ( m )M N T^=, MNT s
(487-89)
18)
s ic N A is
OI -
s i :n
I i : n < ' i;
r e N O iT O
M H reN O iT O
e5ecTl
OYKe5ecTi
p a i t i
-r
n s
a n d
c o n v e f u s i o n s
-q ;a ;e
q ;q ;e
M e q ;a ;e
gJkMOT
8. M S
utable entence
(C
o n ju ga ted
(C
hapter
) C
onverters
of
the
D
u rative
14)
Relative: eTepe-, et =, et ® Circumstantial: epe-, e= Preterit: N e p e - , N e= Focalizing: epe-, e= Negation: . ., i.N and n- . . . i.N 9. I m (C
mutable hapter
C
onverters
or
S
entence
C
onverters
19)
Relative: e re -, e -, eT-, eNT-, NTCircumstantial: e Preterit: NeFocalizing: e -, Fit - , eNT-, e r e Negations: formed according to which sentence pattern is converted. The focalizing conversion has two types of negation 452, 453.
467
Subject Index
N u m bers (e.g. 41 ) refer to p a ra g ra p h num bering u n less p r e c e d e d b y page o r pages. Sonxe term s fro m oilier graiim ioticol system s h ave been im p o rted into the inde.v, including a f e w that d o n ot exactly fit.
Abbreviaiions, Copiic, 41 Abbreviations used in tliis book, p a g e s 5 -7 A bsolu te Posscssivproixomiixa. See
Possessed detcrm inalor pronoun n i - , nu)= Absolute stale defined, 30 representing prenoniinal, 31, 189 Abstraction, nouns expressing, 109 Accent. S ec Stress accent Accusative. S ee D ire a object Action, nouns expressing, 105, 109, 160, 362 Actualiztilion defined, 92, 160 of iiouii lexem es, 34, 43, 47, 64, 92, 127, 140 of verb lexeme.s, 160 64, 308, 325, 328 A d jectifs dem vn stra tifs. See Article A d jectifs posscs.
Admiration, expressions of, 58, 73, 74, 301 Adverb, 194, 215-29, See a lso Adverbial clause construction; Adverbial clauses and infinitive phrases: Adverbial com plem ent; A dverbial m odification; Adverbial m odifier; Adverbial premodifier cardinal num ber forming, 219 combinative. S ee Com binative adverb com pound; form ation of, 216-28 counting days hence, 132 defined, 194 witliout initial preposition, 220 interrogative, 229 o f manner, 45, 221 non-com binative. See N on-com binative adverb reiterated entity term, 62, 228 situational, 310 Adverbal. See Adverbial A dvcrbcs-P repo.'iitions. See Com binative adverb b b o a etc.; Non-com binative adverb n b o a etc. Adverbial clause construction, defined, 491 Adverbial clauses and infinitive phrases, 490-508 circum stantial. S ec Circum stantial clause, adverbial defined, 234, 490 follow ed by n t b - tconjunctrve), 356 linkage of, 234 listed, 493 logical relationships covered by, 4 9 1 non-durative conjugation bases form ing, 343 tense in, 234, 529
469
SlIllJI.C'l
Advcrbiiil cimiplcniciil of vcrli, defined, 181 Adverbial infiiiilrve phrase. S ee Adverbial clauses and infinitive phrases Adverbial m odificalion, defined. 234, 490 Adverbial modifier, 194-229. See also Adverb; Adverbial clause con struction; Adverbial clauses and infrnitive phrases; Adverbial coniplem ent; Adverbial m odification; Adverbial prem odifier; Preposition apposition of, 197 conjunction fonning. 2^4 consiruct participle and, 122 definitive function of, 194, 195 as focal poini, 256 linkage of, 197, 231 m odifying another term. 103, 195 negation of. 199, 236. 251 in non-verbal sentence pattern, 195 as noun, 195 as predicate, 195 repetition of, 198 secondary functions of. 195 similarity to conjunction and initial alti tude marker, 195,230 between subject and verbal predicate. 195 e q - (invariable), 425 MMiTe, 158 and THp=, 152 Adverbial phrase-. S e e Adverbial modifier Adverbial premodifier with basic sentence patterns and imper ative, 258, 314, 333, 364, 380 with cleft sentence, 473 with converted clauses. 409, 420, 442, 456 defined. 258 after nAV/TAi/NAi forming attributive clause, 409 A d rerh ia le T ransposition. See
Circunistaniral (conversion) A elverhialsali. S ee Duraiive sentence
i — KUJT etc. Affect. S ee Rhetoric al affect Affective demonstrative article and determ inaior pronoun n i - , nH. 58 Agency, nouns expres.sing, 121 Agreement (Concord). S ee Referential linkage
470
I N D I . X
A ktion sari, and noii-durative conjugation. 326
Alloniorph. defined, 20 Allophone, defined, 20 A lphabet. S ee Letters o f the alphabet A lte Flexiousform en. S ee Suffixally conju gated verboid Alternant, defined, 20 Ambiguity o f the following: adverbial circunistatitial, 421, 422 circumstantial, 421-22, 459 cleft sentence, 464, 474 conditional sentence, 494, 497 descriptive and denotative functions, 93 dynamic passive, 175 focalizing circum stantial, 4,59 focalizing conversion, 445 general (pos.sessive) relationship, 54, 147 noniinal senience subject/predicate, 268 periphrastic conjugation of cycune, 255 possessive relationship, 54. 147 purpose and result, 504 questions, 5 1 1 reflexive construction, 176 resumptive riiorph, 404 transitive inlm itive. 166, 169, 174 zero article as target o f reference, 48 ANOK-. 262 e - N e , 4 l6 , 4 3 7 e p c y A N -, 3 4 6 N e p e - . . . AN, 43 4, 452
resolved by contextual factors, 2 6 8 , 4 4 5 resolved by intonation contour, 3 3 Anaphoric reference (Retrospective refer ence, Resumption). S ee a lso Bare B T - ; Extraposition; Resumptive morph; e p - ; n 6 i to antecedent of attributive clause. See Resumptive m orph defined. 2 6 7 by definite article n - , 45, 292 (table 18) elliptical: after com pound verb, 180 to entity statement, 150 by predicate O Y V eolN e. 268. 289
S U B J E C T
by predicate n i t . 260 by predicate tte “ (is) he." 53. 282. 289 by subject n e / r e / u e “ he (is).” 267, 269 -7 0 by zero m orph (bare e r - . e p - ) . 405. 406 A ncienne conjtif>a'ison. See Sufftxally con jugated verboid ‘A n d ’, expressions of. S ee Linkage (Coordination and disjunction) Aniniateness. expressed by; construct participle, 122 Greek adjectives in - o c , 117 p S - . 120 'Anoilier' k b - . 6 e . 51 Anreihim a. S ee Linkage (Coordination and disjunction) Antecedent. See also Relative (conver sion); Resiimpiive morph atiributjve clause with unexpressed antecedent. 431 defined, 403 definite aniecedent defined. 404 expressing lime or manner in which, 407 ‘fo n lia r versus ‘sem aniic’, 408 non-definite aiiiecedeni defined, 404 personal and non-personal, 403, 408 Anticipaiion. See Extraposiiion ‘A ny, ei'eiy. a ll' . . . nim . o y o N nim . 60 ‘A orist’, differeni meanings in Greek and Copiic, 337 Aorist (Coptic). Sec t y i p e Apodosis. S ee Conditional sentence Apposiiion. S ee a lso Attributive clause, appositrve; Postponed subjeci apposition o /ilie following (to a preced ing item): adverbial modifier, 197 articulated aiiributive clause, 412 attribuilve (to larget of m odification), 408 entity staieinent (to gramm atical sub jeci), 486 eniity term, 149 explanatory relaiive clause (to antecedent), 410 proper noun, 77, 129 apposition Iv the following; personal morph, 319, 331, 404 proper noun, 126, 129
I N D E X
defined, 149 as lexicirl expansion of nexus pronoun, 270, 275 personal dependent, 87, 264 and referential linkage (Concord), 149 Appositive attributive clause. See A ttributive clause, appositive Approxim ate quantity, expressed by i and N i - , 68 Appurtenance, defined and analyzed (N T e -/N T is ), 148 Arrangem ent. S ee W ord order Article, 42-62 conipatibilities of, 43 (table 3) defined and analyzed. 43 expansion elenients of, 43 gender disagreem ent between article and noun, 93 gender m otivation and, 49 and pronoun, 42 .semantic functions of, 93 and specifiers. 65. 74 suppression of. S ee Z ero anicle; Z ero article phra.se types affective dem onstrative n i - . 58 ‘anoiher’ k b - , 51 'any, every, all’ . . . n im , 60 farther demonstrative n - .. BTMMAY. 57 indefinite o y - . 50 listed, 42 nearer demonstrative n e i - , 56 ‘the other’ h k b - , 55 possessive n=, 54 sim ple definite n - / n e - , 52 zero ®. See Zero article Article phrase, in com pound verb. 180 defined and analyzed, 43 as entity term construction, 92 reiteration of, 62 several nouns with one article, 43 Articulated attributive clause construction. S ee Attributive clause, articulated Articulation o f Egyptian Coptic sounds. 37 A rlikellosigkeil. S ee Zero article; Zero article plira.se Aspect, and non-durative conjugation, 326 Assimilation o f syllabic /n -/ (iJ -). 21
471
s u i i J i i c r i NDi ; x A'.yivtli'iiuv
lu-iwi-cii iidvcrhiiil inodtl'iers, 197 bciwecii flau sfs, 231 ilcfincd. 145 betw een entity terms, 145, 231 betw een past tense clauses, 237 Attitude, speaker’s, 238, 486 Attitude m arker, initial. Sec Initial attitude m arker Attributive clause, 403-9, 41 1. 430-32 adverbial preniodifter with. 409 alternation of circumstantial and relative in, 404 appositive. 408-9. 430 articulated, 411, 430 neTM M iY “s, 57 defined, 403 expanding personal morplt, 87, 404 referential linkage in, 404 relative time in, 403, 430 role o f NA- (future auxiliary) in, 31 1 simple defined and analyzed, 4 0 3-7 modifying bare specifier, 65 modifying . . . him and o y o n n im , 60 no resumptive moipb after j N e - , .379 unconverted, 409 Attributive constructions o f the noun, 96 102 defined and analyzed, 96 the inverted attributive, 102 the mediated attributive, 99 the uiim ediated attributive, 101 elaborations of, 97 gender m otivation in, 49 infinitive in, 105 negation of, 98 occupation, type, and citizenship expressed by, 99 selection of alternate, 116 semantic function of, 92, 96 targets o f m odification of, 96 Attributive noun. S ec Attributive construc tions o f the noun Augens. S ee Inflected m odifier t h p * etc. Autonom ous morph, defined, 28 Auxiliaries, verbal, 184 Background infonnation in preterit conversion, .348, 4.35, 439
472
and N T e p e - , 344 and t y i p e - , 348 ii 4, 528(f) Bare e r - ( e r s without personal suffix) conditions for occurrence of. 405 defined and analyzed, 405 negation o f clauses containing, 405 e p - expressing past tense of. 406 Base, S ee Conjugation, bases; Converters Basic sentence, defined, 395 Bezugsprnnom en. See Resum ptive niorjih Bibliography, linguistic and philological, p ages x iii~ w
Bipartite conjugation pattern. See Uurative sentence Bohairic dialect, and Sahidic, 1, 4 Boiind group ailjacent dependency of, 27-29 defined, 27 Boundiiess classes of morphs, listed. 28 Breath group. See Stress accent group C an '. 184, 394 Cardinal num bers. 63-7 1 in adverbs, 219 with definite singular article, 66 and determ ination. 66 forination of, 67 and gender, 49, 66 and number, 66 Cataphoric reference (Prospective refer ence) with agreem ent o f number and gender, 87 defined, 270, 275 by definite article n - , 45 to entity statem ent, 150 heralding subject expansion, 486 by n jii j c e - before reported discourse. 514 in j c u ) M M O - c J c e - , 514 in 6 n t - c e q - , 516 Categories, gramm atical/senuintic non-tense categories expressed along with tense, 255, 307, 326, 526, 527 suppression of, 42 Causation expressed by Class V infinitives, 193 expressed in non-durative conjugation, 326 som etim es expre.ssed by r p e - . 359
S U B J E C T
Causative imperative. S ee M i p e Causative infinitive r p e - See r p e Center, grammatical. S ee Nucleus Cliafne, Marius, 135 Circum flex, 1 1 Cireunistantlal (conversion), 413-33, 459. S ee a lso Attributive clause; Circum stantial clause adverbial/attributive/com pletive/ .sequential adverbial clause formed by, 421 adverbial preniodifter with, 420 am biguity of, 4 21-22, 459 constructions of. 4 2 1 33 converters li.sted.413 one converter witli two clauses. 433 entity statem ent formed by, 151 extensions of, 433 extrapostlion with, 41 8 -1 9 widi focalizing function, 459, 460 focalizing not distinguished from. 460 functions of, 415 with m ain-clause status. 459, 482 preceded by n i f /T i r /N ii , 408. 41 1 in salutation formula of epistles, 432 a.s secondary conversion, 416 as tertiary conversion, 417 translations of, 421 N T S - (conjunctive) as extension within circumstantial clau.se. 353 Circum.stantial clause adverbial, 421-25 ambiguity of, 421-22 conjunctions before, 422, 493(6) fom is li.sted, 493(6) negation of, 421 translations of, 493 passim e - i expressing second m em ber of antithesis. 423 apposrtive attributive. S ee Attributive clause, apposilive articulated attributive. S ee Attributive clau.se, articulated attributive, 430-32, See a lso Attributive clau.se with unexpressed antecedent, 431 completive, 426-27 as entity statem ent, 426 and periphra.stic conjugation, 427
I N D E X
verb o f incomplete predication and, 185 sequential. 428 sim ple attributive. See Attributive clause, simple Citations in this book, editions used, p ages .n-i-.xix
Classical Sahidic dialect, p a g e s ix -x and paragraph 4 Clause defined, 248, S ee a lso Entity siaienient dependent. See b elo w , ‘subordinate' m ain; defined, 248 subordinate; defined. 248 Cleft sentence, 461-75 adverbial prem odifier with, 473 am biguity of. 464 contrasted with articulated relative clause, 464 contrasted with three-m em ber nominal sentence, 474 conversions of. 464, 46-5, 468, 470, 471 defined and analyzed, 46 1 -6 2 existential, 462, 465, 471 as O p e n in g fo n n u la o f stor>’, 465, 471 e x te n s io n o f. 467 e x tr a p o s itio n w ith . 472 fo c a l p o in ts of, 461, 464, 465. 468, 470, 471 frequency of, 463 negation of. 464, 465, 468, 470, 471 and negative rhetorical question, 475 and nexus, 461 patterns of, 463-^5, 4 68-71, 475 in salutation fonnula o f epistle, 466 signals of pattern identity in. 463. 468 translation of. 461, 462 Collective noun, 108 Colon. See Stress accent group Com binative adverb, 206 constructions of, 206 (table 16), 225, 226 in predicate of durative sentence, .310 verb and, 181 Com binative constituent, 181 reflexive as a 176. 181 Com m and, request, and wish expressions conjunctive f J r e - , 341 future conjunctive T i p e - , 364
473
S U II J IX 'T
Com mand (coniiiiiw d) imperaiive, 364 jussive M i p e - , 340 optative e p e - 338 e-in fin itiv e, 341 e p e - . . . N i - , 339 e r p e - , 341 extensions of. 341 in indirect discourse, 521 Com parative degree, 95 Com parison o f adjectives, 95 coi rclated (just a s . . . so . . . ). 505-6 zero article in expressions of, 47 Com pendium , defined, 41 C om plem ent a tth lm tif. See Predicative complement Com plementary infinitive. 185(c) Completion. See a lso Bound group; Circum stantial clause, completive; Main clause; M utable converter; Mutable m orph; Nexus; Periphrastic conjugation; Stress accent group; Verb, of incomplete predication; Verbal auxiliaries; N T e - (conjunctive); T i p e of action, 3.34, 344 expressed by e i c - . 485 Cotnpounds. See Derivation and/or forma tion Concord of num ber and gender, 48. S ee a lso Referential linkage C on dition irr^ele. S ee Conditional sen tence, types: contrary-to-fact Conditional e p o p iN - .S e e e p a p iN Conditional sentence, 494-501 ambiguity of, 494. 497 arrangem ents of. 494 defined, 494 distinguished from factual, 495 equivalents of, 501 invariable n e with, 285 types, 494 contrarj-to-fact, 435, 498-99 general condition, 496 mixture of real and contrary-to-fact, 500 undifferentiated cause. 497 C on dition alis. S ee e p q p iN C onditionnei. See e p a p i N -
474
I N D i; X
Congruence. S ee Referential linkage C onjoitctif. S ee i j T e - (conjunctive) C on joiictiffiitu r. S ee
T ip e -
Conjugation bases, 325, 373 conjugated (m utable) converters, 396 res and no expressed by, 326 in Coptic stage o f Egyptian, 186 defined, 165 durative, 306 mediators. See Verbal preextensions non-durative, 325-<33 patterns. See Durative sentence; Nondurative conjugation; Suffixally conjugated verbord periphrastic. See Periphrastic suffixal, 373-91 Conjunction, 230-37. S ee a lso Linkage (Coordination and disjunction) and adverbial modifier or initial attitude marker. 155. 195. 230, 235 o f coordination and di.sjunction, 234 correlative, 233 defined, 231 o f extension, .503, 507 formation of. 232 at head of the following: adverbial clau.se, 422 attributive construction of noun, 100 circumstantial, 420, 422 durative sentence. 314. 317. 322 focalizing clause, 456 nominal sentence, 258 non-durative conjugation, 333 predicative expansion o f direct object, 178 preterit, 442 n e j c e - , 380 negation of, 236 optional before: attributive construction of noun. 100 conjunctive T jr e - , 372 extension clause after a conversion, 412, 429, 4 3 3 ,4 4 3 , 4.58 past tense i - , 237, 335 premodifying, 234, 354 position. See a lso a b o v e ‘at head of the follow ing’ definitive feature of conjunctions, 230
S U B J E C T
enclitic, 154,235 first-position, 28(5), 235 initial versus enclitic. 235 in preniodifying function, 234 after JL eK i.{i.)c, 338 sequential, 492 subordinalive, 234, 346, 495 syntactic functions of, 234 TiV r e e e as, 507 Conjunciive i jT e - . See i J r e - (conjunc tive) Consecutive clause. S ee Result Consonantal skeleton o f the verb. 187 C onsonants defined and listed, 35 realized as zero in skeleton o f verb, 187 syllabic con.sonant instead o f distinctive vowel, 188 syllabic and non-syllabic functions of, 35 C onstruct participle (Participium coniunctum) base o f composite nouns, 122 fonnation and m eaning, 122 and verb lexeme, 164 C oiisiieln diiiol. See a p i p e C n n sneliidin ol II. S ee Focalizing Contem poraneous observation, as dis course perspcclivc. 307, 527 Context. S ee Discourse (i.e. large-scale unit o f text) Contrafactual. S ee Conditional sentence. type.s: contrary-lo-fact Contrary-to-facl. S ee Conditional sentence, types Conversions, 395—460. S ee a lso Circutnslanlial (conversion); Circum stantial clause; Focalizing; Preterit; Relative (conversion); Relative clause attestation of, 396 (table 23) converters defined and classified, 395-98 imm utable and m utable, 396 defined and analyzed, 395 double, 397 elem ents subject to conversion: cleft sentence, 464, 465, 468, 470, 471 durative sentence, 317, 318, 320, 322 ,3 2 4
I N D E X
existential-indicating sentence, 476, 477 impersonal predicate. 487, 488 nom inal sentence, 256, 263, 264, 266, 267. 272-79 passim. 281-84 passim non-durative conjugation, 327, 334, 336, 337, 338, 340 suffixally conjugated verboid, 376, 378-82 passim MMON, 245, 424 M o ric , 424 N K i T i - . . . i N , 424 oyoT N -/N i= , 244 o y N T e - , 383 0 YN«i)6 0 M, 394 o y n 6 o m , 394 functions of, 395 surveyed, 395-98 triple, 398 Converters, defined and classified. 395-98. S ee a lso Conversions immutable and m utable, 396 Coordination, defined, 145. S ee a lso Linkage (Coordination and dis junction) Copt, definition and etymology of, 2 Coptic language, 1 cultural and ecclesiastical role of, 1, 6 dates of, 1, 4 dialects of, p a g e s ix -x a n d paragraphs I, 3 linguistic affinities of, 1, 186 literary, 1, 6. S ee a lso Coptic literature M edieval scholarship on, 1 phonology and notation of, 9-26, 3 1 - 3 3 .3 5 ^ 0 , 187-90, 193 sounds of, 8-9 . 16-18, 26, 32-33. 35-39. See a lso Sounds, Coptic spelling of, 8-1 7 , 19-26. 31, 36, 38-41 spoken, 1, 9 standardization of, p a g e x a n d para graph 4 superseded by Arabic, 1 vocabulary sources, 5, 7 Coptic literature (primarily Sahidic), p a g e s ix -x a n d paragraph 6. S ee a lso Coptic language Bible, p a g e x bibliography on, 6n 19
475
I I . I M .1111 > S I ( >I I 1 1 1 . - t
(
liiiii iioii 111 iii./i r/ri<;, 270, 277, .’ /K, 2 /<>. S, r „ l u , Ni-xiis l ii|ni).i III! l-iijircili), 2'1K, 2S2 ( iHtcUiii’tl i;i)iii));iris()ii, sciilcnce of; ilcliiied, 506 Cros.s-rcference. S ee Referential linkage Crum, W. E.; A C optic D iction ary authority of, 181 classical spellings in, 4 n 17 comm on noun m eanings in, 292 dialects recognized in. 3 mingling o f n e i - and n e i - in, 56, 58 'transitive' and ‘intransitive" in, 166, 169, 174 Dative. S ee Indirect object D a m ns eihiciis (Ethic dative), 181 D a u erzeiien . S ee Duraiive sentence Day hours o f the, 131 periods o f the, \32 Debt. S ee Indebtedness Definite. S ee Determination Definite antecedent, defined, 404 Definite article, simple n - , 52 Definite subject, defined, 317 Definiteness, analyzed, 45 Degrees o f descriptive m eaning, 95 Deictic an d Deixis. See Deinonstration; Indicaiioii Delocutive, defined, 252 Demonstration. S ee a lso Indication affective n i - , n n , 58 farther n - . . . eTM M iy. neTM MiY- 57 nearer,T ier-, n i l , 56 pronouns; as predicate. 286 Demotic signs in the Coptic alpliabet, 5, 8 Denominal verb. S ee Verb, coiiipouiid Denotation am biguously distingui.shed from description, 93 defm ed. 93 and entity term construction, 93 expressed as predicate, 252. 287, 292 and gender m otivation, 49, 105, 106
476
pronouns, 44, 63 aiul predicative n - , i79 and proper noun, 126 Dependent clause. S ee Clause, subordinate Deprecation and predicate o y o y l y e n o y , 74 and n i - , h h 58 Depuydt, Leo, 9. 37 Derivation and/or formation of: cardinal num bers, 67 com pound adverbs, 216-28 compound (denominal) verhs, 180 compound prepositions, 208-13 conjunctions. 232 gendered com m on noun.s, 107, 108, 109-12 genderless com m on nouns, 117, 118-25 infinitive, 186-89, 193 interjections, 2 42-44, 246 ordinal num bers, 123 pamper nouns, 126 sim ple fractions, 69 staiive, 190, 193 De.scription adverbial m odification, 194, 234. 490 ambiguously distingui.slied from denota tion, 93 amplification o f descriptive entity te rn s . 100 degrees o f descriptive meaning. 95 expressed b y ; apposition, 149 attributive clau.se, 403 attributive constructioirs of the noun, 92. See a lso Attributive construclions o f the noun circumstantial clau.se. 415, 421, 4.30 construct participle, 164 descriptive predications, 168, 179, 292, 376 durative sentence, 307 gendered comm on noun, 104 genderless com m on noun, 113 invariable n C T -. 110 nominal sentence, 292 relative conversion, 400
H I t j't —
.>-+4
and gender o f articles, 49 modifications o f entity term construc tion, 103 m odifications of proper noun, 129 and possessed noun, 138 after predicative n - , 179 and semantic function o f article, 93 and semantic function o f entity terms, 93 Determ ination, 42 analyzed, 45 and apposition, 149 and cardinal num bers, 66 a complex category, 45 and determinators, 4 2 -62 and direct address, 45, 137 entity term s expressing, 141 indefinite. See Indefinite article and determinator pronoun; Indefinite determination non-definite. S ee N on-definite determ i nation anil possessed noun, 138 o f proper nouns, 129 and referential linkage, 45 and the selection of: attributive clause construclions. 404, 407 cleft sentence patterns, 465, 471 coordinators of entity terms C<3iid’), 145 direct object constructions, 171 durative sentence patterns, 306, 317, 322, 323 existential-indicating sentence pat terns, 476, 479, 480, 482 general relationship constructions, 147 nominal sentence patterns, 282 o f specifiers, 65, 66 zero. S ee a lso Zero; Zero article; Zero article phrase; Z ero determ inator pronoun determ ination o f direct object, 171 Determinator. S ee Determ inators Determ inator pronoun, 4 2 -62 defined, 44
iiiicc iu c ucniuiiftiiaii^c im , ‘another’ 6 e , 51 ‘any, every, all’ o y o N n i m , 60 farther demonstration neT M M iy- 57 ittdefinile oyA . 50 nearer demonstration n i l , 56 nexus pronoun n e . 53, 252 ‘the other’ nK e, 55 possessed pronoun nu)= , 20, 54 zero o y o N , 59 Determ inators, 42-62. S e e a ls o A rticle; Determ ination; D eterm inator pro noun defined and listed, 42 and referential linkage, 48 surveyed, 5 0 -60 Diaeresis (Trem a), function of, 12 Dialogue. S ee a lso Direct address; Discourse, direct and future conjunctive T i p e - , 357 identity dialogue and nam ing construc tions, 130 and imperative, 364 and jussive ( M ip e - ), 340 and selection o f nom inal sentettce pat tern, 281 and iNOK n e “ It i.s 1.” 281 and u), 238 Digrams, 15-16 Direct address and determination, 45, 137 signals of, 137 Direct discourse. S ee Discourse, direct Direct object am plified by: circumstantial clause. 426 predicative expansion. 178, 426 reported discourse, 513-14 defined, 166 in durative sentence, 308 durativity signalled by, 308 as focal point. 449 after the following: com pound verb, ISO construct participle, 122 double-object causative verb t m m o etc., 172
477
S U B J l i C T
Direct object (con tim ied) double-object-f-N is, 173 immutable transitive infinitive, 170 imperative, 364 m utable transitive infinitive, 167, 171,329 non-durative infinitive, 329 iN is , ip i= . iyE i® , AJCi=, 88 N i - (future auxiliary with infinitive), 311 OYtJTB- ( ‘have’), 383, 386, 390 cjiK®, TNNOOY=, TOOY=, JC00y=, 6 o o y = . 88 Tpe-, 359, 360 the follow ing as direct object: penultimate personal object morph, 82 personal second suffix, 88 possessed noun, 140, 171 specifier, 65 zero determ ined entity term, 171 . . . NiM and o y o N n im , 60 formal (dum my). 514, 516 general person expressed as a, 75, 181(f) and identification of e q - , 346 and identification o f N e q - , 351 m arked by N-/M M o= 171.203 mediation by various prepositions, 170 selection o f absolute/bound slate of infinitive, 171 semantically em pty, 169 Stem -Jenistedt rule, 171 syntax, 166-80 transitivity, 166-80 unexpressed object. 169. 43 1 and verbal preexteiisiotis, 183 Directional adverb, .See Com binative adverb Discourse (i.e. large-.scale unit o f text) defined, 527 and definition o f dependent clause, 395 discourse perspectives and di.scourse types contem poraneous observation, 307 co-occurrence with tense, 527 defined, 527 dialogue, 340 and durative sentence, 307 exposition, 238, 245, 282, 439, 482
478
INUl'.X
generalization, 311 narration. S ee Narrative and non-durative conjugation, 326 tim eless truth, 255, 307, 337 and i - (past tense conjugation), 334 and e p e - (optative conjugation). 338 and q p i p e - , 337 and function o f preterit conversion. 435 and identification o f subject/predicate, 268 and interpretation o f focalizing conver sion, 445 perspective; defined, 527 system s and tense, 525 type: defined, 527 woven together by referential linkage, 75 Discourse (i.e. speech and cognition), reported, 509 -24 am plifying direct object, 513 constructions of, 51.3-18 defined, 509 direct. S ee a lso Dialogue; Direct address defined and analyzed, 523 and def. article phrase, 45, 137 and Greco-Coptic personal name ending in e or i . 137 and im perative, 364 and initial altitude marker. 238 and interjection, 240 signals of, 523 indirect alterations found in, 5 19-22 defined and analyzed, 519 English translation of, 519 shifts in perspective found in, 519-22 signals of, 519-22 tense in, 519 and M i p e - , 340 and T i p e - , 357 initial signals of, 509 inverted, 5 18 neutral contrasted with indirect and direct discourse, 524 defined and illustrated, 524 po.sition in sentence, 509. 517, 518 as predicate, 286
S U U J l i C T
Utsjunclion, defined, 145. S ee a lso Linkage (Coordination and dis junction) Distributive expressions reiterated article phrase, 62 zero article in, 47 Ditto mark (=), m eaning of, 30 Djinkiin, S ee Superlinear dot Doubled vowel, 16, 28, 36, 187, 252 Durative conjugation, defined, 306 Durative infinitive. See a lso Durative sen tence; Durativity contrast witli .stative. 309 defined, 308 as predicate, 308 and verb lexeme, 160 D urative .sentence, 305-24. S ee also Durative infinitive; Durativity adverbial prem odifier with, 314 com ponents of, 305-6, 308 11 conversions of, 317. 318, 320, 322, 324 direct object syntax, 171, 308 bare specifier. 65 e t p e M - n s M e e y e /p - n M e e Y e N -, 171 . , . NiM and o y o N n i m , 60 o y e a p - , OYi«i)=, 171 JCU) M M O - c j c e - , 171, 514 and existenlial-indicating sentence, 479 exten-sioti of, 315 extraposition with, 313 extraposition o f converter and subject with, .321 invariable n e with, 316 negation of, 317, 318, 322, 323 converted. 320. 324 patterns of, 305-6, 317-18, 320, 322-24 periphrastic conjugation of, 312, 427 personal prefixes ( + - etc.) of, 78, 83, 318 predicates of, 206. 305, 3 0 8 - 1 1 situational predicate, 310 Slem -Jernstedt rule, 171 .subjecLs, .306, 317, 318, 322 bare specifter, 65 elaboration o f subject, 313, 317, 319, .321, 322 postponed subject, 319 . . . NIM ami OYON nim 60
I N D E X
tense and discourse perspective in, 307 Durativity defined, 305 and preterit conversion, 439 signals of, 308 and tense, 526 o N -, 180 ^ (Sound), non-phonemic resonance, 35 /e-/ (Phonem e), m anifestations of, 25 E ditions o f texts cited in this book, p a g e s -vvi-.viv Egyptian Coptic, defined, 7 Elaboration o f subject/predicate in durative sentence, 313, 317, 319. 3 21 ,3 2 2 in existential-indicating sentence, 478 in nom inal sentence, 257, 264, 265, 2 7 1 ,2 7 5 in non-durative conjugation, 330-32 Elanskaja, A. [., p a g e x in 6 Elision sim plification o f repeated vowels, 24 o f e - e in cleft sentence, 464 Ellipsis, expressed by conjugation base and subject (for full conjugation pattern), 325 personal independent a n o k etc. (for pattern containing personal depen dent), 77 e i p e (for com pound verb), 180 Em m el, Stephen, p a g e i \ Emotion, S ee Rhetorical affect Emphasis. See Focalization; Intensification; Rhetorical affect Em phatic and intensive pronoun. See Inflected m odifier THp= etc. Enclitic. 28, 155, 182, 257 conjunctions, 235 defined, 28 dependent relationship of, 28(6), 34 initial attitude markers, 239 position in cleft .sentence, 461 in durative sentence, 317, 318, 322 in nominal sentence. 257 in non-durative coiijugiition, 325 in preterit clause, 438 iN negating nexus, 254, 317, 318. 320, 373, 452, 459, 468, 471
479
S U B J E C T
Enclitic (continued) iN negating sentence element, 98, 143, 157, 199, 236, 505 n e (nexus pronoun) 252. 257, 285, 438 in J c e K i(i) c clause, 338(b) and stress accent group, 32 vowel doubling before ( o y n e e r e ) . 28, 252 vowel reduction before ( c e n C N iy ). 2H and MMiY after o y n t b - , 383 Endophoric reference defined, 266 by subject n e / r e / u e , 266, 281, 284, 464, 470 Entity statement defined and illustrated, 150 fonns of, 151 and reported discourse, 509 as subjeci expansion, 486-89 Entity term. S ee a h o Entity term construc tion defined and types listed, 141. 142 and definition o f noun, 91 denotation and description by, 93 focal point o f cleft sentence, 461 free: defined, 252 lexical and/or gramm atical content expressed by, 141 as lexical expansion o f personal morph, 87 linkage of, 145, 231 negation of. 143 and noun lexeme. 92 phrasal constructions of, 144-49 and plural form o f noun, 108 as predicate, 252 reiterated, 228 semantic function and syntax. 141 Entity tenn construction (i.e. article phrase/specifier phrase) defined, 92 interpretations of. 93 m odifications of, 103 semantic functions of, 92, 93 Entity term and entity statement, 141-51 Epistle, salutation fonnula in, 432, 466 E reig n isieiten . See Non-durative conjuga tion EmStedt, P. V.. p a g e .\i a n d paragraph 171
480
I N D E X
Essential predication. Sec Inherent predi cation Ethic dative, m eaning of, 181 Eventtwli.s. S ee Conditional sentence, types: general condition Existence, asserted by: circumstantial clause construction, 482 existential cleft sentence, 462, 465, 471 existential n e , 266, 283, 462, 465, 471 existential-indicating sentence, 476-85 yes/n o. 241 o y N - and e i c - , 476-85 qpcune, q p o o n , 476 Existential clause. S ee Existential-indicat ing sentence Existential cleft sentence, defined, 462 Existential-indicating sentence, 476-8.5 analyzed, 476-77 conversions of, 450, 476, 477 and durative sentence patterns, 479 expansions of, 479-84 functions of. 476. 479 negation of, 477. 483, 484 as opening form ula o f stor\-, 476, 480, 482 patterns of, 476, 47 8 -8 4 tense in, 477 E xistenzsatz. See Existential-indicating sentence Expansion by adverbial m odifier, 194, 234, 490 by apposition, 149 by attributive clause. 403 attributive constructions o f the noun, 92. S ee a lso Attributive construc tions o f the noun by circumstantial clause. 415 defined, 34 by entity statement, 486-89 as focal point, 449 o f the following items: article, 43, 65 common noun, 92 direct object, 178 existential-indicating basic pattern, 322, 479-84 expression o f speaker’s judgem ent etc.. 486 extraposited topic. S ee Extraposition impersonal predicate, 487
S U B J E C T
persoiiiil morph. S ee Postponed sub ject proper noun, 126 specifier, 43, 64 verb, 166-82,364 verb o f incomplete predication, 185 verb o f speaking or cognition. 509-24 verbal auxiliary, 184 o n - , 179, 185 nucleus and: defined, 34 predicative, 178, 1 7 9 .2 0 3 .4 6 5 .4 7 1 , 479 -8 4 and relative clause, 400 restrictive: defined, 146-48 .subject expansion: defined, 486 Explanatory relative clause, defined, 410 ExpHUuive A djcktivsatz. S ee Attributive clause, appositive Exposition (type of discourse) and existential-indicating sentence, 482 and initial attitude m arkers. 238 and preterit conversion, 439 and 2iNOK n e , 282 e ic jH H T e and, 245 Extension (of clause) defined, 234 o f the following; circum stantial, 433 cleft sentence, 284, 467 converted durative sentence, 315 focalizing, 458 imperative, .341, 357, 372 preterit. 443 relative, 412, 429 i - (past tense conjugation), 335 e p e - (optative conjugation), 341 e p q p iN - , 347 M i p e - , 341, 357 N T e p e - , 345 o y i J T e - ( ‘have’), 391 o p iN T e -, 349 S ee a lso Linkage (Coordination and dl.sjunction) signalled by i T r e - (conjunctive conju gation), 351 signalled by T i p e - , 357 Extraposition (i.e. frontal extraposition) o f both converter and subject; in circumstantial clau.se, 419
I N D E X
in durative sentence, 321 in focalizing clause, 455 in preterit clause, 441 defined, 3 13 with the follow ing patterns: circum stantial clause, 418-19 cleft sentence, 472 durative sentence, 313 focalizing clause, 454 nom inal sentence, 253, 264, 272, 274 non-durative conjugation, 330 preterit clause, 440 relative clause, 402 suffixally conjugated verbold, 374 o y i i T e - (‘have’), 387 inverted discourse (reported discourse before verb of reporting), 518 o f noniinal element of compound verb, 180 Factual presupposition clause, defined and analyzed, 495 Farther dem onstrative article and deteniiinator pronoun n - . . . eTM M iyneT M M iy. 57 Feminine gender, 42, 75 Figures, expressed by letters, 67 Final clause. S ee Purpose F inalis. See T X f e I Future. See Durative sentence I Perfect. See x - (past tense conjugation) I Present. S ee Durative sentence
Focal point, defined, 445 Focallzatlon. S ee a lso Cleft sentence; Focalizing (conversion) defined, 445 expressed by circumstantial, 459, 460 focus and predicate, 247 and intonation contour, 33 in nonilnal sentence, 256, 276, 304, 4 5 1 patterns, 445 as version o f sentence, 247 Focalizing (conversion), 444-58, 460. S ee a lso Focallzatlon and adverbial complement, 449 adverbial prem odifier with, 456 ambiguity of, 445 analyzed, 448 and circum stantial conversion not dis tinguished, 460
481
S U B J E C T
Focalizing (continued) converters listed, 444 extension of, 458 extraposition with, 454 focal point defined, 445 inherently focalized items as, 448 location of, 445, 448, 449 types, 449 forming entity statem ent, 151, 445, 457 functions of. 445 invariable n e with, 285 within larger textual structure, 395, 445 negations of, 4 5 2-3 and nexus, 448 and nominal sentence, 256 reader’s interpretation of, 445 and rhetorical questions, 452, 453 secondarily converted, 447 as secondary conversion, 446 in third degree conversion, 447 translation of, 448 Focus. See Focalization; Focalizing (con version) Formal antecedent, defined, 408 Formation. S ee D erivation and/or form a tion Fractions, sim ple: form ation of, 69 Free variant. See Variant Frontal extraposition. See Extraposition Futur energique. S ee e p e - (optative con jugation) Fm iir I. See n a - (future auxiliary) Futur II. See Focalizmg Futur III. See e p e - (optative conjugation) Future (time range in tense system), 525 various expressions of, 3 11 Future auxiliar}'. See n a - (future auxil iary) Future, immanent: defined, 31 I Future conjunctive T A p e - . See T x p e Gender. S ee a h o Noun, gendered comnioii/genderless com m on; Referential linkage association with noun, 105 concord of, 48 default, 46. 4 1 I defined, 46 disagreem ent o f article and noun in, 93
482
I N U n X
and entity term , 141 fonnally signalled by: cardinal number, 66 detenninator, 42 im perative, 3 7 1 noun, 48. 107, 109, 110, 115, 117, 126 personal m orph, 75 N - c g i M e and N - g o o y T , 106 general, 46. 48, 49, 75, 18 1, 3 8 1, 4 1 I G reek and C optic, 105 motivation and; article and determ inator pronoun, 49 cardinal number. 49 comm on noun, 49, 105, 115 infinitive, 105 names o f animals, 106 possessed noun, 138 neutralized, 46. 4 1 I and referential linkage, 48 suppressed by zero article. 47 unm arked, 46. 3 8 1, 4 1 I Gendered com m on noun. S ec Noun Genderless affix, defined. 112 Genderless com m on noun. See Noun G enderless prefixes, listed, I 12 Genderle.ss suffixes, I 12 General conditional clause, defined and analyzed, 496 General person, expressions of. 75. 18 I General relationship (Pos.sessive) ambiguity of, 54, 147 in com pound prepositions, 210 defined. 147 expressed by: m ark of relationship n - , |47. 203 possessed noun a n a s etc., 141 possessed pronoun n A -/n u )= . 54, 147 possessive article n=, 54. 147 n t a s , 147 Generalization, expressions of. S ee a lso General conditional clause articulated attributive clause, 41 I discour.se perspective, 255, 307, 3 1 1, 337 general gender, 46, 49 zeto article, 47 NA- (future auxiliary), 3 1 1 f i e e N N I - , 58
S U B J E C T
c y A p e-.
525
G en erelle A djcktivsatz. S ee Attributive
clause, articulated Genitive. S ee General relationship (Possessive) Glottal stop (phoneme) m anifestation of, 9 m anifestation o f vowel before, I 88 written expressions of, 36 G lottal slop (sound), defined, 36 Gnom ic utterance. See G eneralization Gnostic m anuscripts, dialect of, p a g e x Gods, G reek: names of, 127 G ram m atical categories. S ee Categories, gramm atical/sem antic G ram m atical subject, defined, 486 Greco-Coptic. S ee a lso Greek (language) adverb, 215 comm on noun, 94, 105, 114 defined. 7 historical background of, 5 proper noun, 126, 127 sound.s, 9, 32 spelling, 13, 14,38-41 verb, 191-92 G reek (language) adjective, 94, I 14, 117 adverb, 2 l 5 alphabet, 5. 8, 14 in Egypt, 5 gender, 105 inflection, 7 posl-Classical pronunciation, 39 preposition, 2CX) propernam es, 41, 126, 127 rough and smooth breathing, 40 spelling, 39 substantive, 94 syllable structure and Coptic superlinear stroke, 35, 38 syntactic influence on Coptic, 5, 7 verb, 191-92 vocabulary in Coptic, 7. S ee a lso Greco-Coptic vocative. 137 /li/ (Thoneme) irregular manifestations of, 17 m anifestation of vowel before, 188 Habitual. S ee
I N D E X
H a v e ’. 383-94 m ifsze irw o rt. S ec Conjugation. ba.ses;
Converters Homer. George: edition o f Sahidic New T estam ent. 56, 58 Hyperbaton. S ee Interlace Hyphen (in Coptic font), m eaning and usage of, 27, 30 Hyphen, double (=): meaning and usage of, 30 H ypostasis defined, 142 of discourse, forming entity statem ent, 151 Hypothetical m eaning, 311, 326 ' (Non-phonem ic resonance), 35 I (Sound), phonological status of, 9 Identification, ‘the sam e’ n i - . . . NOYtuT, 58, 70 ‘I f e p u jA N -. See ep
483
S U B J E T T
Impersonal predicate conversions, negations, and tense of, 487-88 defined and m orphs listed, 487 Incidental predication, 526. See also Predicative n - / m m o s defined, 179 expressed by stative o n - , 309 marked by n - / m m o =, 179, 203 Incipient action defined. 427 and ingressive infinitive, 174 and periphrastic conjugation of ne. 427 Incomplete predication, verbs of, 185 Indebtedness and selection o f predicate, 310 and o Y N f e - ('h a v e '), 392 Indefinite. S ee Determ ination Indefinite article and determ inator pronoun o y - , o y i , 50 Indefinite determ ination. See also Determination analyzed, 45 expressed along with other categorie.s, 61 Independent clause. See Main clause Independent personal pronouns. See Personal independents Indication (Deixis), 476. S ee also Existential-indicating sentence Indirect discourse. S ee Discourse, indirect Indirect object. 182 In direkter g eiiitir. .See General relationship (Possessive) Infinitival imperative, defined, 365 Infinitive. See a lso Verb as attributive noun, 105 causative, 193 (Class V), 367. See a lso T p e -
coniplenientary, 185(c) conjugated, 165, S ee also Conjugation two infinitives linked, l65 denned, 159, 160 clurative. S ee Durative infinitive functions of, 160 immutable, 167, 170 and imperative, 160 ingressive m eaning of, 174, 175, 180
484
I N D Ii X
intransitive, 166, 168 linked to pretecling entity term, 145 m orphology of, 186-89, 191-93 m utable transitive, 167, 171, 189 negation of, 105, 161 non-durative. S ee Non-durative infini tive as noun, 105 reflexive construction, 181 objectless transitive, 174, 175 passive construction of. See Passive phrase; adverbial, 490-93 as predicate in durative sentence, 305, 308, 309 in nominal sentence as noun, 268, 288, 290, 293 in non-durative conjugation, 325. 328 states of, 167, 189 and stative, 168 a.s subject, 486 transitive, 166-80 ambiguity of, 166, 169, 175 defined, 166 objectles.s, 169, 174, 175, 181 and verb lexeme, 160 Infinitive phrase, adverbial. S ee Adverbial clau.ses and infinitive phrases Infix, defined, 28 Inflected infinitive. S ee r p e Inflected m odifier T H p = etc., 152-58 defined, 152 irregular personal suffixes with, 85, 152 negation of. 157 placem ent and word order, 154-55 referential linkage of, 152 liigre.ssive, defined, 174 Inherent predication, 526 defined, 179 and nom inal sentence, 255. 292 Initial attitude m arker, 230, 238-39 and adverbial m odifier, 195. 230 conjunctive ( n t c - ) expanding a n , 354 defined, 238 and direct discourse, 238, 5l 1, 523 enclitic, 239 first-position, 28(5), 239 and interjection, 240 position in clause, 155, 230. 2,39 ■sequential, 492 Initial bound iiiorpli, defined, 28
S U B J I K T
Injunctive. S c r M ApeInstans. S ee n a - (future auxiliary) Intensification, o f adverbial m odification, 198 Intercalary days of the calendar, 135 Interjection, 240-46 clausal, 240 conversions of, 244, 245 defined. 240 form ations of, 240 inflected, 240, 242 and nexus, 249 non-inflected, 240, 245 signal o f direct discourse, 523 Interlace (Hyperbaton), 265, 271 Interlocutive. defined, 252 Interrogative. S ee a lso Rhetorical question adverbs, 229 am biguity of, 33, 511 belittling, 299 and cleft sentence. 470. 475 and existential-indicating sentence, 476, 483, 484 and focalization, 448, 452, 453 of identity, 1.30,261,281,282 in indirect discourse, 5 19, 522 initial discourse m arkers, 238, 250, 354 and intonation contour, 33 naming constructions. 1.^0 negative, 244. 250, 452, 453, 475 and nom inal sentence, 261 particles, 238. 250, 5 11 pronouns. S ee b elo w ‘specifiers’ signals of, 33, 238, 250, 5 1 1 o f sim ilarity, 301 specifiers, 63, 72, 73, 470, 512 and o y o f s.n. 244 and T j . p e - , 358 Intonation contour o f grammatical pattern, 33, 247 Intransitive, defined. 166. S ee a lso Infinitive Inverted attributive construction o f the noun. 102 Inverted discourse, 518 Irrealis. S ec Conditional sentence, types: contrary-to-fact liregular verb, defined, 190 It (im personal), 266, 486 lotuci.sni in G reek .spelling, 39
I N D K X
Iteration, See Reiteration, distributive Jem stedt, P. V., p a g e xi an d paragraph 171 J u sq u ’a c e que. S ee < y iN T e Jussive, defined, 340. S ee a lso Command, request, and wish; M x p e /k / (Phonem e), m anifestations of, 23 Kernel statem ent, defined, 253 K on dition alis. S ee e p a jA N Laryngeal. S ee Glottal stop (phoneme); G lottal stop (sound) Legislation, and e p e - (optative conjuga tion), 338 Letter. S ee Epistle Letters o f the alphabet digram s, 15, 16 m onogram s, 9 (table l nn. 1, 2, 3, 5), 13 nam es of, 9 as num erical figures, 67 sources of, 5, 8 Lexem e, noun actualizations of, 34, 43, 47, 64, 92. 127, 140 defined, 9 1 ,9 2 gender associated with. 46linkage of, 2.^ I Lexeme, verb actualizations of, 160-64, .308, 325, 328 defined, 159 as focal point. 445 linkage of, 231, 332 Lim itative < yj.N T e-. S ee
485
S U B J E C T
Linkage (continited) prepositional object. 201 . . . N i M and o y o N n i m , 60 and initial attitude markers, 238 syntactic function of, 234 at various levels of structure, 2 3 1 Linkage o f discourse elem ents. See Referential linkage Linkage of morphs, 27. S ee a lso Bound group Long definite article n e - , 52 M ain M ain M ain M ark M ark
clause, defined, 248, 395 clause status, signalled, 326 tense. S ee Tense, main of appurtenance n t c - , n t a = , 204 of relationship f i - . 203. See a lso n-/m m o=
Masculine gender, 42 as general gender, 46 Medial bound morph (Infix), defined, 28 Mediated attributive construction of the noun, 99 M ode o f action, and non-durative conjuga tion, 326 Modification, defined, 92. S ee a lso D escription; Expansion M onograms, 13 Month, days o f the. 134 M onths, Egyptian, 135 Mood, and non-/lurative conjugation, 326 Morph, defined, 18 and syllable, 18 M orpheme. See Morph /m t/ (Phoneme sequence), m anifested as syllable m n t , 26 M urm elvokal. See Resonance, non-phonemic Mutable converter conjugation paradigms of, 396 defined. 396 Mutable morph, defined, 30 Mutable transitive infinitive, defined, 167 /n-/(P honem e), nianife.stations of, 21-22 Nag Hamniadi manuscripts, dialect of, p a ^e
V
Naming constructions, 130 Narrative discourse type, 527
486
I N D E X
linkage (extension) o f clauses in, 234 and main tense, 525 opening form ulas of. S ee Story, begin ning of pace. 435 and preterit, 435, 439 and sequential circum stantial clause, 428, 429 A - (past tense conjugation) in, .134 A N O K n e etc. in. 283 A c u ; u ) n e in, 18,5 e i c - in, 476, 478 e i c 2 HHTe in, 245 N T e p e - in, 344, .348 o y N - in, 476 T A p e - in, 358 Nearer dem onstrative article and determ i nator pronoun n e i - , n A i . 56 Negation. S ee a lso Negators adverbs expressing, 2 2 1 com ponential. See b e lo w ‘of individual elem ents’ converters with, 399, 444 o f imperative, 163, 2 4 1, 2 5 1, 368. 369 of individual elem ents. 2 5 1 adverbial m odifier, 199, 251, SO."; attributive con.struction o f noun, 98, 251 conjunction, 236, 251 entity term, 143, 25 I infinitive, 105, 161, 251 inflected m odifier, 157, 25 I linkage expressing. 145, 231, 233 negators: defined and listed, 250-5 I o f nexus patterns circumstantial clause, 421, 459 cleft .sentence, 464, 465, 468, 470, 471 ,4 7 5 durative sentence, 250, 317, 318, 322, 323 durative sentence converted, 320. 324 existential-indicating sentence 250. 394, 476, 477. 482. 483, 484 focalizing clause. 452-53, 458 impersonal predicate, 250. 487. 488 nominal sentence, 250, 254; 263-84 pa.ssim non-durative conjugation, 2,50, 326, 327; 3 3 4 ^ 2 passim preterit clause, 434
S U B J L C T
relative bare e r - , 405 suffixally conjugated verboid. 250, 373; 376-82 passim N T e - (conjunctive), 352 O Y H T e- ( ‘have'), 383 T p e - , 359 6 n - ‘find out (that)’, 457, 516 rhetorical question containing. 238. 250. 452, 453, 475, 483, 484 and zero article, 47 Negators, 250. See a lso Negation; a n ; M e iy is ; M e iy iy e ; m n - ; T h iNeutcr gender (Greek). 105 Neutral discourse, defined and illustrated, 524. See a lso Discourse, reported Nexus and ‘copula’ function, 248, 270 defined. 248 entity statem ent as subject in, 486 and imperative, 364 morph o f cleft sentence, 464, 465, 468, 470, 471 defined and forms listed, 247-49 nexus pattern without a, 3 17 o f nominal sentence. 252 negation of, 250 and non-tense categories, 526 patterns ‘basic’ patterns, 395 listed, 248 and nexus pronoun n e , 53 nuclear: versus subject expansion, 486 and personal prefixes a n F - , 79 and personal prefixes 78 pronoun n e /re /N C , 53, 252, 268 -7 0 and tense, 525, 528 Nexus pronoun n e / r e / N e , 53, 252, 268-70 'N o', expression of, 241 Nom en actio n is, infinitive as, 105 N om ina sa c ra , and superlinear stroke, 4 1 Nominal sentence. 252-304 adverbial premodifier with. 258 ambiguity of, 268 analyzed, 252 53. 2 6 8 -7 1 in cleft sentence, 464 containing: XNT- etc.. 263-64
I N D E X
ANOK n e etc., 280-84 n e etc. with one entity term. 265--67 n e etc. with two or three other ele ments. 268 79 conversion of. S ee Conversions defmed, 252 elaboration o f subject or predicate in, 253, 2 5 7 ,2 6 4 ,2 6 5 ,2 7 1 ,2 7 5 existential n e in, 266 as explanatory relative clause, 410 extraposition with, 253, 264, 272, 274 focalizalion o f elem ent in, 256, 276, 304. 4 5 1 interlace (hyperbaton) in, 265, 2 7 1 negation of, 250, 254; 263-84 passim as opening form ula o f story, 266 patterns of, 252 periphrastic conjugation of. 427 postponed subject in. 275 predicates of. 252; 259-84 passim ; 286-304 ambiguity of. 268 formal classification, 286 range of: according to sentence pat tern, 259, 268 semantic classincation, 287-304 referential linkage in, 266-84 passim, 289, 304 structure'of, 252-58 tense in, 255 Non-com binative adverb expressing spa tial orientation, 223 Non-definite antecedent, defined, 404 Non-definite determinalion. See a lso Determ ination of antecedents, 404, 408, 430 o f bare cardinal number, 66 defined, 45, 322 versus definite, 45 and indefinite. 45 o f subject o f O Y N - / e i c - , 477, 480, 482 in durative sentence, 322. 323, 476, 479 Non-definite subject, defined, 322 Non-durative conjugation, 325-63, See a lso Non-durative infinitive; a (past tense conjugation); e p e (optative conjugation); e p u ; A N - ; M Ape-;
M nA Te-;
rire -
487
S U B J E C T
Non-duralive conjugation (conhnued) (conjunctive conjug.); N T e p e - ; T A p e-;
T p e - ;
o
^a
n t c
- :
adverbial prem odlfier with. 333 analysis of, 325 conjugation bases, 325 conversions of, 327; 334-340 passim; 396 (table 23) direct object syntax. 171. 329 Stem -Jem stedt rule, 171 x o o c x e - 171. 514 elaboration o f subject or predicate, 330-32 extraposition with, 330 negation of, 326, 327 patterns. 325. 327. 334. 336 40, 3 4 3 ^ , 346-63 distinguishing features of, 327 predicates of. 325. 328 subject postponed In, 3 3 1 tense and other categories in, 326, 526 tenseless, 326 p - ‘have the function o f’, 180 Non-duralive infinitive. See a lso Nondurative conjugation defined, 306, 328 and imperative, 364, 365, 368 as noun, 105 syntactic environm ents of, 328 and verb lexeme, 160 Non-phonemic letters. 9 (table I), 26. 85nn. I and 2, 188 Non-restrictive relative (in English), 408 Non-terminal bound m orph, defined, 28 'N o t y e t ’ M H A T e - . See M n A x e N o ta relaiion is. See Mark o f relationship (N-)
Noun, 91-140. See a lso Article; Article phrase; Entity term ; Specifier; Specifier phrase classes of, 91 common noun actualizations of, 92 as attributive, 92. See a lso Attributive constructions of the noun; Description constructions of, 92 and denotation/description, 93. See a lso Description; Denotation defined, 9 1
488
I N D E X
distribution over attributive construc tions, 96 as enlily lerin, 92-93 Greco-Coptic, 10.5 m odifications of, 103 properized, 1.36 gendered common noun, 104-12. See also a bove Noun, common ambiguity of sem antic functioas in. 93 collective. 108 constructions of, 104 defined, 104-5 derived and com posite forms of, 109-12 disagreeing with gender o f article. 93 formal m arking for gender. 107 formal m arking for plural, 108 and gender. 105-7 and gender m otivation, 49, 64 semantic functions of, 104 genderless common noun. 113-25. See a lso Description; a n d above. Noun, common defined, 113 derived and com posite forms of, I 18-25 distribution over attributive construc tions, I 16 formal m arking for anim ateness, 117 formal m arking for feminine gender. 114. I 17 fonrial marking for plural. 114. 117 and gender m otivation. 115 Greek adjectives as. 114 preposition as a, 124 sem antic function of, 113 types of, 114 possessed noun, 138—40 actualization of, 140 defined, 138 and determination, num ber, gender, 138 and direct object syntax, 140, 171 etym ologies of, 140 expresses general relationship, 141 forming com pound prepositions, 138. 140, 209 forming com pound verb.s, 138. 140. 180
S U B J i ; c r
meaning and usage of, 138. 140 and parts o f body, 140 as predicate, 286 prenominal state of, 139 syntax of, 138 proper noun, 126-37 actualization of, 127 ill apposition, 129 tom m onlzcd. 136 defined. 126 determ ination of, 129 and direct address (vocative), 137 formal m arking for biological sex, 126 formation of. 126 and gender, 126 m odification of, 126, 129 in naming constructions, 130 and nominal sentence predicate, 129 as predicate. 292 referential linkage of, 128 sem antic function of, 126 shortened forms of, 126 sources of, 126 syntax of, 129 j c e - before, 129 Noun phrase or Noun syntagm. S ee Article phrase; Entity statem ent; Entity term ; Entity term coastruction; Specifier phrase Nucleus and expansion. S ee Expansion NuUm orphem . S ee Zero Num ber (gram m atical category). See also Cardinal num bers; Numerical affixes; ‘O ne . . . Ordinal num bers; ‘Tw o . . . A - ‘approxi m ately’ collective noun, 108 figures expres.sed by letters, 67 form ally signalled by: cardinal number, 66 determ inator, 42 noun, 48 numerical affix, 7 1 ordinal num ber, 123 personal morph, 75 general, 4 1 1 and possessed noun, 138 quantity, 63, 297 and referential linkage, 48
I N D E X
Numerical affixes, 71 /o / (Phoneme), o y (") and cu (6) as allophones of. 20 Oath, and e p e - (optative conjugation), .338 Object. See a lso Penultimate personal object morph direct. See Direct object o f preposition: defined, 200 ‘O ne . . . expression of, 70 Optative e p e - . S ee e p e - (opialive conju gation) O rario ohiiqua. See Discourse, indirect O raiio recta. S ee Discourse, direct Order. See W ord order Ordinal num bers, 112, 123 'O ther, th e ’ nice-, nice (article and delerm inator pronoun). 55 P arfait I. S ee a - (past tense conjugation) P arfait II. S ee Focalizing; a - (past tense
conjugation) P articipiu m coniunctum. See Construct
participle Particles. See Adverb; Conjunction: E nclitic; Initial attitude marker; Preposition Partitive relationship contrasted with attributive, 102 defined and analyzed (n -/m m o s ), 203 Parts o f speech. See, (a) a t th e im m ediate level. Adverb; Article; Conjugation, bases; Conjunction; Construct participle; Converter; Determ inator pronoun; Impersonal predicate; Infinitive; Inflected m odifier; Initial attitude m arker; Interjection; Mark o f appurtenance Negators; Noun, gendered com m on; Noun, genderless com m on; Noun, possessed; Noun, proper; Penultim ate personal object m orph; Personal independents; Personal interm ediates; Personal prefixes o f the durative sentence; Personal prefixes o f the nominal sentence; Personal second suffix es; Personal suffixes; Preposition; Specifier; Stative; Suffixally
489
S I J B J H C T
Parts of speech (continued) conjugated verboid; Verbal auxil iaries; Verbal preextensions; e i c (existential-indieating base); NTe-, NTA=; OY?i-/MN- (existen tial-indicating base); { h ) l a i f ’ C i ca teg o fies. Adverbial modifier; Com mon noun; Determ inator; Entity term: Nexus morph; Nexus pronoun; Noun; Personal morph; Verb Passive. See a lso Ingressive dynamic (‘being built’, c e - k c u t MMO-q)
ambiguity of, 175 contrasting with static passive. 168 defined, 175 J C. I - in com pound verb, 180 process-oriented. See a b o ve ‘dynam ic' static ( ‘built, established’ q -K H T ) ver sus dynamic, 168 Past (time range in tense system), 525 Past tense a - . See a - (past tense conjuga tion) Pejorative, S ee Deprecation Penultimate personal object morph, form s and occurrence, 82 Perfect. S ee a - (past tense conjugation) Periphrastic conjugation based on e i or ne), 368. 369 prenominal .state. 87. 1,39. 203. 214. 3l()(i), 378 formed with invariable - q . 87 Person altered m indirect discourse, 519, 520, .521, .524 and apposition, 149 general. 75. 181 and inflected m odifier, 152
490
I N D h X
and interjections, 242 and personal morphs. 75 and reflexive, 176, 181 Personal affixes. See Personal dependents Personal dependents, 76. 78-89 expanded by entity term. 87, 203 Personal independents a n o k etc., 76, 77 and inflected m odifiers a n o = / n t o = . 1.53 mediating expansion o f personal depen dent. 87 and personal prefixes of nominal .sen tence A N f - etc., 262 as predicate, 286 Personal infixes. See Personal interm edi ates Personal intermediates penultimate personal object morph, 82 and possessive article, 84 primary, 80 suffixes to conjunctive base, 83 Personal morphs, 75 -8 9 , 141 defined. 75 and referential linkage, 48 types independent a n o k etc., 77 intermediates - i - etc., 80-84 prefix (durative sentence) etc., 78 prefix (nom inal sentence) a n i^ - etc., 79 second suffix, 88 suffix - f etc., 85-86 Personal names actualization of, 127 form s of. 126 G reek vocative, 137 Personal object morph, penultimate, 82 Personal prefixes of the durative .sentence t - etc., 7 8 ,3 1 8 Personal prefixes o f the nominal sentence A N f - etc., 79, 252, 262 Personal pronouns. .See Personal indepen dents ANOK etc. Personal .sccond suffixe.s - c q etc., 88, 366 Personal suffixe.s - f etc., 85 Phonem es (Coptic), 9 -2 6 passim defined and listed, 9 and dialect features, pai^e x n 5 as element of morph, 18 formal notation of, 9 ii 20
S U n J F . C T
glottal stop, 9, 36, 188 G reco-Coptic, 9 in history o f Egyptian, 186 m anifeslalions of, 9 non-phone mic letters, 9 (table 1), 26, 35. 85 nn. 1 and 2, 188 and simple d c f article, 52 and superlinear stroke, 38 syllabic and non-syllabic manifeslalions of, 16, 35 Phonemes (Greek), post-Classical, 39 P h ra se cou pee. S ee Cleft sentence P hrase nom inale. See Nominal sentence Pluperfect (Plusquam perfectum ), 435 Plural, 42, 66, 108 form o f nouns, 108, 117 individual concrete plural, 108 plural m eaning and singular form , 66, 108 Polotsky, Hans Jakob, p a ^ es x i-x ii Possessed determ inator pronoun n A ~ , ncu=. 54, 296 Possessed noun. See Noun, possessed Posses.sion (‘have’), various predicate expressions of, 310, 38.3-94 P o ssessiva J jck tiv. S ee Po.sse.wive article n= etc. Possessive article n= etc., 54 personal elem ent of, 84 Pos.sessivc pronoun. S ee Pos.sessed deterininaior pronoun n i - . n w ~ Posse.s.sive relationship. S ee General rela tionship P ossessh'prafix. See Possessed determ ina tor pronoun n i - , nu)= Postponed .subjecl, 87 in cleft sentence, 473 in durative sentence, 319 entity statem ent as a, 486-89 in nom inal sentence, 270, 275, 276 in non-durative conjugation, 3 3 1 with suffixally conjugated verboid, .375 with o y N T e —( ‘have’), .388 Potentiality, expressed by n a - (future auxiliary), 3 11 P ra escn s co n su ctu d in is. See u ; A p e Precursive r J r e p e - . S ee f J r e p e Predicate defined. 247 di.scontinuous, 325
I N D E X
types of. See Durative sentence; Nom inal sentence; Non-duralive conjugation Predication descriptive, 168, 179, .376 incom plete. S ee Verb, of incomplete predication inherent (essential). S ee Inherent predi cation of proper nouns, 129 and zero article, 47, 62 Predication m ediators. S ee Verbal preex tensions Predicative com plem ent, 185. See a lso Circum stantial clause, completive; Predicative expansion; Predicative N -/M M O S
Predicative expansion o f direct object, 178 of existential cleft sentence, 462, 463, 465, 469, 471 of existential-indicating sentence, 479-84 infinitive o r r p e - as, 185(c) mediated by circum stantial, 178, 471 m ediated by predicative n - / m m o = , 62, 178, 185,203 m ediated by preposition or conjunction. I7 8 _ Predicative n - / m m o s . ofeo Incidental predication; Predicative expansion com patibilities of. 179 expanding o ‘is’, 185 and incidental predication, 62, 179. 203. See a lso Incidental predication; Predicative expansion Predictions, and e p e - (optative conjuga tion), .338 Preexlensions, verbal, 183 Prefix conjugation. S ee Durative sentence; Non-duralive conjugalion Prefixes, form ing various morph classes. See Derivation and/or formation Prefixes, personal. S ee Personal prefixes P reform an ts. S ee Conjugation, bases Preform alives, pronom inal. S ee Personal prefixes o f the durative sentence Premodifier. S ee Adverbial premodifier; Initial attitude marker; Verbal pre extension
491
S U B J E C T
Prenominal stale absolute spelling of, 31, 189 defined, 30 periphrastic, 87 Prepersonal state, defined, 30 Preposition, 194, 2(X)-I4. See also Adverbial m odifier; Prepositional phrase ‘a n t/’ expressed by, 145 compound final N - of. 21 possessed noun in, 140 types listed and analyzed, 208-13 defective, 214 denned, 194, 200 expressing relationship, 43, 124, 196 expressing situation, 196,310 Greco-Coptic, 200 linked objects of, 201 marking direct object. 166-80 passim, 20.3 marking incidental predicative expan sion, 203 marking partitive relationship, 203 marking predicative complement, 185 object of: defined. 200 sim ple: forms listed, 202 and verb: in various relationships, 181 and e i c - , 485 and N - (mark o f relationship), 203 and N T e - / N T A s , 204 after p - , 180 and - t h y t n versus - t n , 205 Prepositional phrase, 194, 200-14. See also Adverbial m odifier; Preposition as attributive to entity term, 103, 195 defined, 200 as entity term, 124 as predicate, 260, 286, 298, 310 Prepronominal. S ee Prepersonal Present (sentence pattern). See Durative sentence Present (time range in tense system), .525 P resen t I. S e r Durative sentence P resen t II. See Focalizing Prcsem-basecl future. S ee n a Present tense pattern. S ee Durative sen tence P resen t d ’hahitiide. See
cyA pe-
Presentative clause. See Existential-incliCiitinp sentence
492
I N D K X
Presuffixal. See Prepersonal Preterit (conversion), 43 4 -^3 adverbial prem odifier with, 442 converters listed, 434 and durativity. 439 and exposition, 439 extensions of, 443 extraposition with, 440 functions of, 435 invariable n e with, 285 within larger textual structure, .395, 435 and narrative, 439 negation of, 434 secondarily converted, 437 as secondary conversion, 436 and tense. 435 Preverbals. S e r Verbal preextensions Privative expressions and zero article, 47 AT-, 119 Prohibitions, and e p e - (optative conjuga tion), 338 P rojection d es actan ts. S ee Extraposition; Postponed subject Prolep.se. See Extraposition; Postponed subject Promise and e p e - (optative conjugation), 3.38 and e p e - . . . na- , 339 and TApe-, 357 P ron om ahsolii. S ee Personal independents ANOK etc. Pronom dem on stratif. S ec Demonstrative Pronom p erso n n el ah soln . See Personal independents anok etc. Pronom p erso n n el proclitie/iie. See
Personal prefixes o f the durative sentence -f-Pronom p o ss e s sif p rim a ire. See Possessed determ inator pronoun nA- etc. Pronom p o s s e s s if .secondaire. See
Possessive article n= etc. P ronom en ahsolutum . S ee Personal inde
pendents ANOK etc. P ron om s relatifs. S ee Relative (conver
sion), converters listed Pronoun. S ee a lso D etem iinator pronoun nH etc.; Personal independents ANOK etc.; Specifier pronoun OYHp etc.
S U n j F . C T
clerinccl. 63 cletemiinator, 42 -6 2 Pronunciation of Coptic, 9 Proper noun. See Noun, proper Prosodic colon. S ee Stress accent group Prospective reference. See Cataphoric ref erence Protasis. S ee Conditional sentence Protatic. S ee e p a j A N Punctuation m arks in Coptic, 19 Purpose expressions listed, 502 N T e - (conjunctive), 352 T A p e - , 358 T p e - , 363 Jce-/JceK A (A )c clau.se, 338, 355 repre.senting comm and in indirect dis course, 521 and result; ambiguity of, 504 Q iialipcarif. S ee Stative Qualitative. S ee Stative Question. S ee Interrogative
Question m ark, not used in Coptic, 33 Quotation. S ee Discourse, reported Radicals. S ee Consonantal skeleton of the verb Realis. S ee Factual presupposition clause Reciprocity, personal, 90, 177 Rection. See Direct object Rectional constituent of verb, defined, 181 Referential linkage (Cross-reference). See a lso Anaphoric reference; A ttri butive clause; Bare e r - ; C ata phoric reference; Circum stantial clause, com pletive; Endophoric reference; Extraposition; Inflected m odifier; Postponed subject; Resum ptive m orph; e p with agreement o f num ber and gender, 48. 269, 486 and apposition, 149 defined, 48 expressions determ inator, 4 2 .4 5 , 49 inflected modifier, 152 nominal sentence predicate, 289, 304 personal morph, 48, 75
I N D I ' X
subject n e / r e / N e , 267, 269-70 not expressed by copular n e / r e / N e , 2 7 0 ,2 7 7 targets o f reference: collective noun, 108 entity statem ent, 150 entity term, 48, 75 specifier, 72 zero article, 48 . . . N iM and o y o N n i m . 60 Reflexive, 176 ambiguity of, 176 combinative constituent with verbs, 176, 181 expressed by direct object - k , 181 marked by m m i n m m o = , 176 Reinforcer. See Inflected m odifier T n p = etc. Reiteration, distributive. See also Repetition, affective o f article phrase, 62, 449 o f attributive noun, 97 o f entity term , 62, 228 o f noun/specifier within article phrase, 62 and predicate, 273, 274, 303 Relationship, general. See General rela tionship Relationship, m ark of ( n - ) , 203 Relationship, prepositions expressing, 43, 124 Relationship o f time, place ‘from /tow ards’, m anner, expressed as predicate, 298, 310 Relative (conversion), ,399-412. S ee a lso Antecedent: Resum ptive morph and cleft sentence formation, 463 constructions of, 400. S ee a lso Relative clause converters listed, 399 extensions of, 412 extraposition with, 402 function of, 400 preceded by n - / T - / N - , 408, 41 I preceded by n A i / T A l / N A f , 408. 41 I preceded by n H / T H / N H , 41 I as secondary conversion, 401 N T e - (conjunctive) as extension within relative clause, .153 Relative, non-restrictive (in English), 408
493
s u n jK iT Relative, subsianlivized. See Relative clause, articulated attributive Relative clause appositive attributive. See Attributive clause, appositive articulated. See a lso Attributive clause, articulated typographic representation of ( n - e r e - etc.), 27 attributive. See Attributive clause explanator}'; analyzed, 410 simple attributive. See Attributive clause, simple Relative pronoun. See Relative, converters listed Relative tense. S ee Tense, relative Relative time. See Tim e, relative R elatiypartikel. S ee Relative, converters listed Relativpron om en . S ee Relative, converters listed Remote condition. See Conditional sen tence, types; contrary-to-fact Remoteness, and n i - / n H , 58. See a lso Demonstration, affective/farther/nearer Repetition, affective. See a lso Reiteration, distributive o f adverbial m odifier, 198 o f proper name, 129 Reported discourse. See Discourse, report ed Reported speech and cognition, 5()9-24 Resonance, non-phonem ic: of consonant, 35 Resonant peak, o f Coptic syllable, 35 Restrictive expansion, defined, 146 Result expressions listed, 503 N T e - (conjunctive), 352 T A p e -. 358 T p e - , 363, 503 xe-/JceK A (A )c clause, 338 and purpose; ambiguity of, 504 Resumption. See Anaphoric reference Resumptive iriorph absent in; attributive clause, 407 bare e r - , 405
494
iN m .x completive circum stantial clause, 426 periphrastic conjugation o f nominal sentence. 427 e p - . 406 C A O K e i N A = , 488 q ju ;e , 488 ambiguity of. 404 com ponent of: attributive clause. 404, 408, 409, 410, 411 cleft sentence, 463. 464, 465, 469, 470, 471 existential-indicating sentence, 480, 482, 483, 484 reported di.scourse amplifying direct object, 5 13 defined, 404 in extension clause, 4 12, 433 personal morph as, 404 in subordinated clause, 404 types of, 404 Resumptive pronoun. S ee Resum ptive morph Rheme. See Predicate Retrospective reference. S ee Anaphoric reference Rhetorical affect, expressions o f See a lso Adm iration; Affective dem onstrative article and pro noun; Focalization; Inflected m odifier; Initial attitude marker; Intensification enclitic a a a y , 72 focalization, 445 inverted discourse, 5 18 repetition, 129, 198 selection o f attributive construction of noun, 102, I 16 word order, 182 Mncup e - , 340, 368 di, 1.37 Rhetorical person. S ee General person Rhetorical question belittling, 299 cleft sentence as, 475 existential-indicating sentence as, 483, 484 focalizing conversion as, 452, 453 negation in. S ee Negation, rhetorical question containing
S U H J l i C T
and and
H,
238
238. 250. 452 o y o y / z e u o y as predicate. 299 and T A p e - , Root, verbal. Sec Con.sonanlal skeleton of the verb Rough breathing (Spiritus asper), in Greco-Coptic, 40 MH , MH .
AN,
Sahidic dialect, classical, p a g e x a n d para graph 4 Salutations, epistolary, 432, 466 Satellite. S ee Expansion Satellites. .S>p Conversions Satziiiger, Helmut, 9 II Future. See Durative sentence; Focalizing II Perfect. See Focalizing; a - (past tense conjugation) II Present. See Durative sentence; Focalizing Second ten.ses. See Focalizing Semantic antecedent, defined, 408 Semantic function of: adverbial clause and infinitive phrase, 490-91 adverbial m odifier, 194-95 attributive construction o f noun, 92 cleft sentence, 461 conjunctive, 2 3 1 conversions, 395 dctcrm inator, 42 durative sentence. 306 entity term, 141 entity term construction, 92, 93 existential-indicating sentence, 476 im personal predicate, 487 inllected m odifier. 152 initial attitude marker, 238 interjection, 240 morph, 18 negator, 250 nexus morph, 248 non-durative conjugation, 325 nom inal sentence predicate. 287-303, 304 noun, 93 (table 8) coniirion, 292 (table 18) gendered, 104, 105, 292 genderless, 113, 292
I N D E X
possessed, 138 proper. 126 personal morph, 75 referential linkage, 48, 75 specifier, 93 suffixally conjugated verboid, 373, 383 tense, 525 verb, 159, 160-64,364 n e /re /N C , 269 Sentence converter. See Converter, immutable Sentence particle. S ee C onjunction; Initial attitude marker Sentence patterns, identifying m orphs of, p a g e s 4 6 5 - 6 7 a n d paragraph 248 Sequel and N T e - (conjunctive), 35 I and T A p e - , 357, 358 Sequential conjunctions, 492 Sequential initial attitude markers, 492 Sex, biological (expressions of), 106, 126 Shanudah. S ee Shenoute Shenoute, pa,i>e l \ . paragraph 6, a n d fig u re fo llo w in g ta b le I
Shisha-Halevy, Ariel, p a g e s u . xi, a n d xii; paragraphs 155, 230, 235, 449 Simple attributive clause construction. defined, 404. S ee a lso Attributive clause, simple Simple definite article n - ete., 52 Singular, 42 Sinouthios. S ee Shenoute Situation, expressed as predicate, 3 10 Situational adverb and preposition, defined, 310 Skeleton o f verb, consonantal, 187 Smooth breathing (Spiritus lenis), in Greco-Coptic, 40 Sounds, Coptic. See a lso Coptic language, sounds of articulatory classification of, 37 as elem ents o f syllable, 18 formal notation of, 9 n 20 intonation contours, 33 and phonem es. 9 pronunciation, ta b le / (page 13) stress accent groups, 27, 28, 32. 189 Special affirm ative imperative, 366 Specifier, 63-74. S ee a lso Specifier phrase; Specifier pronoun
495
S U B J E C T
Specifier (continued) adverbs containing a, 217 with article, 43, 65, 74 bare, 65. 145, 171.322 defined and analyzed, 63, 91, 159 determination status of, 65 interrogative, 73, 448, 470, 482 phrasal syntax of, 64. 65, 138, 145, 179 as predicate. 286 and referential linkage, 72, 115 semantic function of, 91, 93, 159 Specifier phrase bare, 65 defined and analyzed, 64, 141 as entity construction, 92 and selection of noun form, 108, 115 Specifier pronoun, defined and analyzed, 63 -^4 Speech. See Sounds, Coptic State defined, 30 selection of, 141 Stative (Qualitative) compatibilities, 110, 121, 183 defined, 162 and dynam ic passive; contrasted, 175 as focal point, 449 forms of, 186-87. 190, 193 and infinitive; contrasted, 168, 309 and nexus, 248 of ongoing m otion, 168, 183, 185, 309 as predicate, 305, 309, 479 and tense, 427, 525 (table 29) and verb lexeme, 162 Status ahsohitiis. S ee Absolute state Status constructus. See Prenominal state Status pron om in alis. S ee Prepersonal .state Stem , Ludwig, p a g e i.v a n d paragraph 17 1 Stem -Jenistedt rule, stated, 171. S ee also Direct object: syntax Stipulation, defined, 494 Story, beginning of as cleft sentence, 465, 4 7 1 as existential-indicating sentence, 476, 480, 482 as nominal sentence, 266 o Y - /? e N- as signal of, 45 Stress. S ee Focalization; Rhetorical affect Stress accent, in verbs. 188 Stress accent group, 28, 32, 99
496
1 N U l: X
Subject defined, 247 definite subject; defined, 317 non-definite subject; defined, 322 Subject expansion o f nuclear nexus pat tern, 486 S u bjektsat:. S ee Subject expansion of nuclear nexus pattern Suhjonctif. S ee n t g - (conjunctive) Subordinate clause, defined, 395 Subordinative conjunction, 234 Suhstanthci m it Suffixen. S ee Noun, pos sessed ANAS etc. Substantive clause. S ee Entity statement S u bstan th ierter ReU itivsatz. See
Attributive clause, articulated; Relative clause, articulated attribu tive S u bstan tivisch e C left S en tem e- See
Focalizing (conversion) S u bstan tivisch e T ransposition. See
Focalizing (conversion) Suffix conjugation. S ee Suffixally conju gated verboid Suffix pronoun. S ee Personal suffixes Suffixally conjugated verboid, 37.3-92 adverbial preniodifier with, 380 conversions of, 376-83 passim ; 396 (table 23) etym ologies of, 376, 378, 382, 383 extraposition with, 374 and focalization, 450 negation of, 373; 376-83 passim anti nexus, 248 periphrastic conjugation of, .377, 427 postponed subject with, 375 states of, 30, 373 tense in, .373, .377, 379 o Y N T e - ('h a v e '), 383-92 Suffixes, form ing composite noun, 112 Suffixes, personal. See Personal suffixes Superlative degree, 95 Supcrlinear dot in late manuscripts, 38 Superlinear stroke absence after /e-/, 25, 322, 383 optional, 193 over A, e, i, or y . 38 over I and 16 over N - ‘the’, 52
S U B J E C T
in O Y N -, M M N - , 322 in o y N T e - . m m n t e - , 383 after n e - / T e - / N e - ‘the". 52 and apex o f syllable, 35, 38 in Greco-Coptic m orphs, 38, 4 1 in late m anuscripts, 38 m arking nom ina sacra and non-Greek nam es, 4 1 m arking num erals, 67 in m odem editions, p a g e x a n d para graph 38 positions of, 38 replacing letter e , 38 replacing letter n at end o f line, 38 and syllabic function, 38 n - ‘the’, 52 Supralinear. S ee Superlinear Suspensions, 4 1 Syllable, defined, 18 form ation, 35 and morph, 18 Syllabic and non-syllabic m anifestation of phonem es. 35 Synthetic conjugation. See Suffixally conjugatetl verboid Tem poral. S ee N T e p e Teniporal clause, past (form s oQ, 348 Tem poralis. S ee N T e p e Teiiips fin a l. S ee T A p e Tem ps d erives. See Conversions Temps seco n d s. S ee Focalizing
Tense categories expressed together with, 255. 307, 326. 526, 527 and clause extension, 234, 428, 429 defined, 525 and discourse perspective, 307, 527 as expressed in; adverbial clause and infinitive phrase, 234, 490 circumstantial clause, 429, 430 durative sentence, 307 Egyptian verb, 186 existential-indicating sentence, 477 impersonal predicate, 487 indirect discourse, 5 19 interjection o y o i n - / n a = , 244 nom inal sentence, 255 non-durative conjugation, 326
I N U H X
relative clause, 400, 403 sequential circumstantial clause, 428 suffixally conjugated verboid. 373, 377, 379 o Y N T e - (‘have’), 389 main defined and analyzed, 525 illustrated, 528 and nexus construction, 525 periphrastic expression of. See Peri phrastic present n a - u ; - ‘can’, 184 and preterit conversion, 4.34 relative. See a lso Time, relative defined and analyzed, 525, 529 illustrated, 530 occurrence of, 529 second. S ee Focalizing .system, 525-30 and verb, 525 Tenseless conjugation, 528 construct participle, 122 sentence pattern formed by e i c - , 477 N T e - (conjunctive), 351 q jA p e -, 337, 348 Term inal bound morph, defined, 28 Term inal bound/unbound morph, defined, 28 Term inology, linguistic, p a g e s x i-x ii 'That' clause. See Entity statem ent Them e. S ee Subject III Future. See e p e - (optative conjuga tion) Tim e. S ee a lso Tense referential ranges of, 525 relative defined, 529 at m ultiple levels, 530 referential ranges of, 529 relative time expressed in; adverbial clause and infinitive phrase, 234, 490, 529 circum stantial conversion, 426, 430, 529 indirect discourse, 519, 529 non-durative conjugation, 326, .143 relative conversion, 400, 403, 529 telling time adverbs in initial N -, 218
497
s u B j i; ( ' T
Tim e (continued) days o f the month, 134 days o f the week, 133 hours o f the day, 131 months, 135 periods o f the day, 132 ‘Tim eless truth’, as discourse perspective. 255, 307, 527 Tonic accent. S ee Stress accent; Stress accent group Topic, extraposited. S ee Extraposition Topic element o f cleft sentence, 4 6 1, 463; 4 6 4 - 7 1 pas sim; 473 defined. 448, 461 o f focalizing clause, 448 specific negation of, 453 Topicalization. S ee Extraposition Topographical names, and definite article, 127 Totality, expression of, 42. 60, 74 Transitive. See a lso Direct object: syntax defined, 166 and intransitive, 166-80 Trem a (Diaeresis), function of, 12 Tripartite conjugation pattern. S ee Nondurative conjugation T roisiem e p re sen t ( e p e - ) . See Circum stantial
1/ (Sound), phonological status of, 9 U m standssatz. S ee Circumstantial Unbound morph (Enclitic), defined, 28 Undifferentiated causal clause, defined. 497 U nech tcr R clativsatz. S ee Circumstantial clause, attributive Uniriediated aitributive construction o f the noun, 101 ‘U iu il'
cyANTe-.
See
o ja n tg -
Varianl. defined. 20 \ ed ettf. S f f Focalization Verb. 159-93. S ee a lso Construct partici ple; Durativc infinitive; Inipenitive; Infinitive; Non-duralive infinitive; Passive; Stative actualizations o f verb lexeme, 160-64 adverbial com plem ent of, 181 adverbial expansion of. 181-82
498
I N 1j i; X
causative verb formed in initial t (Class V), 193 with two direct objects, 172 classes, 186-90, 193 o f cognition; defined. 5 10 com binative constituent of, 181 compound containing definite article phrase, 180 containing possessed noun, 140 containing reiterated article phrase, 62 containing zero article, 47 fonriation and syntax of, 180 inverted, 180 reflexivity and, 181 selection o f o n - versus p - . 180 conjugation of, 165, 186, 306, 32.5-63, 373-91 defined. 159 denominal. See a b o ve ‘com pound' direct object syntax ol. 166-80. 181 double-object causative, 172 Egyptian: evolution of. 186 expansions of, 18 1 82 formal classes o f the Egyptian-Coptic, 186-90, 193 Greco-Coptic. 191-92 o f incomplete predication, 185 intransitive: defined, 166 irregular: defined, 190 lexeme: defined, 159 morphology of, 186 93 “ o f m otion,” 168 rectional constituent of, 181 o f speaking: defined, 510 transitive; defined, 166 transitivity and intransitivity of, 166-80, 181 verbal auxiliaries of, 184 verbal preextensions with, 183 word order following, 182 Verbal auxiliaries. 184 Verbal preextensions. 183 Vcrhe de qu alite. S ee Sul'fixally conjugat ed verboid Verboid, defined, 373. See a lso Suffixally conjugated verboid Verstarker. S ee Inflected m odifier T H p = etc. Vocative. See Direct adtlress
S U B J H C T
VoransteUung. See Extraposition Vowel defined, 35 distinctive: in verbs, 188 doubled, 16, 2 8 ,3 6 , 187,252 reduced, 28, 99, 112 sim plification of double vowel sequence, 24 vowels listed, 35
/w /(P honem e), manifestations of, 9, 15, 16 W eek, days o f the, 133 ‘W h en ’
N T e p e -.
S ee
N T epe-
W ord division in Coptic, 19 W ord order or placem ent of; adverbial clause construction, 491, 506 cleft sentence, 461, 463-73 conversion, 395 circum stantial, 418-20, 421, 426, 428 focalizing, 454-56 preterit, 440-42 relative, 402, 403 durative sentence. 313-15 elem ents after verb, 182 enclitic. S ee Enclitic: position entity statement as subject expansion, 486 existential-indicating sentence, 478-84 imperative, 364 nominal sentence, 252-84 non-durative conjugation, 325, 330-33 reported discourse, 509, 5 18 suffixally conjugated verboid, 373-75, 387, 388 l y l (Phonem e), manifestations of, 9, 15, 16 T w ' and ‘n o ’, expression of, 241
I N D E X
Zero (Significant absence o f m orph, *). See a lso Bare e r - ; Zero article; Zero article phrase; Zero determ inator pronoun expressing determ ination, 47. See a lso Determ ination glottal stop phoneme manifested by, 36 person expressed by, 89 signalling suppression o f categories, 42 skeletal consonant in verb realised as, 187 vocalization of o y i i T e - (‘have’), 386 zero actor, 490 Zero article (®) in adjacent dependency (boundness), 28(2) and agreement o f num ber and gender, 48 ambiguity of: as target o f reference, 48 contrasted with indefinite, 45 defined and analyzed, 42 n 4, 47, 59 and ‘non-definite’, 45 and nucleus-expansion analysis, 34 and plural noun forms, 108 referential linkage to, 48 sem antic functions of, 47 Zero article phrase coordination before, 145 direct object syntax of, 171, 308, 329, 390 forming adverb, 217, 228 forming com binative adverb, 206 forming com pound verb, 180 as predicate, 290 reiterated, 62, 228 Zero determ inator pronoun o y o N . 59 Zero personal suffix (-®), 85 n 4, 89
499
Select Coptic Index
F iled in G reek a lp h a b etica l o rd e r, follow ed
Abbreviations: adv(er)b, adv(er)bial m od(ifier), arrirm (ative), aor(ist), art(iele), b(a)s(e), caus(ative), circ(um slanlial), comm (on) n(ou)n, condit(ional), conj(unclion). coiijug(atio)n b(a)s(e), conv(er)l(e)r, delerm (inator), delenn(inalor) pron(oun), dur(ative), enl(ily) term , exisl(enlial)-indic(ating), fem(inine), roc(alizing), future auxil(iary), gend(ere)d com m (oii) n(ou)n, gend(er)l(e)ss com m (on) n(ou)n. gend(er)l(e)ss suff(ix). im per(alive), impers(onal) pred(icale), inf(initive), infl(ecled) m od(ifier), init(jal) all(itude) m ark(e)r, interj(eclion), juss(ive), m asc(uline), neg(ator), nexus pron(oun). n(ou)n. nom(inal), opt(alive). p(articipium) c(oniunelum ), pers(onal) indep(endent), pers(onal) inlerm ed(iate), pers(onal) m orph, pers(oiial) pref(ix of llie) dur(alive senlence), pers(onal) pref(ix o f ihe) nom (inal senlence), pers(onal) sec(ond) sufr(lx). pers(onal) sufr(ix), pl(ural), poss(essive) arl(icle), poss(essed) n(ou)n, prenom(inal), prep(osilion), prel(eril), prop(er) n(ou)n, refl(exive), relat(ive), sent(ence), sing(ular), spec(ifier), slative, suff(ix). surf(ixally) conjug(ated) v(er)boid, v(er)b, v(er)b(a)l auxil(iary), v(er)b(a)l preexl(ension) A, inilial; forming special affirm imper, 366 A, m anifesllng; g lo tta l s to p p h o n e m e , 36 n o n -p h o n e m ic re s o n a n c e ( ') o f f o llo w in g z- 35 /e/ phoneme before zero personal suffix (-®), 85 n 4, 89 n 1 /o / phoneme in verbs, 188 /•/. /i/, and /y/ phonemes in verbs, 188 A. non-phonem ic; in verbs. 35. 188 A - (conjugated bs) past tense affirm 2d sing fem, 334 A - (past tense conjugation), .3,34-35. See a lso e p c o n ju g n b s e s a - . A = / M n e - , M n=. 334 c o n v e r s io n s o f, 3.34 e x te n s io n s o f 335 A -
tipproxim an ’ly,
- A -
68
(p e rs in te rm e d ) I/iiie, 80
fo r A A A , 24 -AAC (g e n d l.ss s u ff) old. 112
AA
A A i i e c u c (in it a ti n ia rk r) tru ly, 238 A A K e ( p r o p n n ) la st (day o f m onth), 134 AAAA (c o n j) hut ra th er (a fte r n e g a tio n ),
145
before circ though. 493 heading second m em ber o f antithesis, 423 AAo= (imper) reflex cea se (a o ), 366 A M H (imper) com e (e l), 366 A M n e i N (im per) com e (c l), 366 A M H i T N (im per) com e (eT), 366 AMOY (im per) com e (eT), .366 A N (negator), 250, 251 position of. 143 in cleft sent, 464. 468 AN- (pers pref nom) w e (are), 79, 252 ANAs (poss nn) p lea su re of, 138 ANATKH (im pers pred) it is n ecessary, 487 ANAy (imper) looH (NAy), 366 ANT- (pers pref nom) / (am ), 79, 252 ANT- paradigm. See Personal prefixes o f the nom inal sentence ANEiNe (im per) bring (e iN e), 366 a n Z h b g , var a n c h b c (gendd com m nn) sch o o l, 9 (table I). 14 A N I-, ANi= (im per) l?n'/ig (e iN e ), .366 direct object of, 88 ANiNe (im per) bring ( e rn e ) , 366 ANN- (pers pref nom) m'c (are). 79, 252 AAA.A C A - ,
501
i N O K (e tc ) n e p a t t e r n s , 2 H O - R 3
m yself, 1 5 2 , ( p e r s in d e p ) Htne. 7 7 p a ra d ig m . S ee P e r s o n a l
A N O K ( in f l m o d ) A N OK JlN
o k
iY < J J M N -
153
- iq r e
(am ), 7 9 , 2 5 2 S ee a lso P e r s o n a l p r e
J l n o k - (p e rs p re f n o m ) /
v a r ia n t o f a n ? - , 2 0
ou rselves, 1 5 2 , 1 5 3 w e/iis p r e f n o m ) w e (are), 7 9 ,
( in f l m o d )
A N O N ( p e r s in d e p )
ANON- ( p e r s ANCHBe, v a r a n ^ h b c
i
252
(g e n d d c o m m n n )
school, 9 ( t a b le I ) , 1 4 in stea d o f . . -m j? , 4 9 3 A O Y t U N ( im p e r ) open ( o y u j n ) , 3 6 6 A n A r O M G N O N in terca la ry d a y ( in c a le n A N T iT p e -
d a r) , 1 3 5 A f > - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) p a s t t e n s e a f f ir m
67
.
.
242, 243
. .. m n - / n m m a = w hat d o es h ave to do with . . . ? 2 4 3 A 2 p o q in v a r ia b le ( in t e r j ) w h at! 2 4 6 A j c e - ( im p e r ) sa y ( jc c u ) , 3 6 6 A J C I - , A JC i= ( im p e r ) .<^ay (Jc c u ), 3 6 6 A J C M - f o r A J C N - ( p r e p ) w ithont. 2 1 A J C N - ( p re p ) without -lessly, -ing, 4 9 3 A J C N - f o r e J C N - ( p r e p ) upon, 2 0 9 i J C N T p e - w ithout . . -ing, 4 9 3 A J C U )= f o r e jc u ) = ( p re p ) upon, 2 0 9 f o n n in g a d v b o f m a n n e r . . .
i -
then,
221
w ithout . .
b e f o re i n f
the,
B - (a rt)
A p i ( i n i t a tt m a r k r ) 238.
492
52
fo r N - , 21
go.
B H K ( s t a t iv e )
sy n ta x o f, 168
B H A f o r B O A , f o n n in g c o m p o u n d p re p .
so
in f i r s t p o s it io n
: then
b e f o re n t g -
210
( in f e r
e n c e ), 2 3 8 , 5 1 1 ( c o n ju n c t iv e )
so then,
354
s in g f e r n , 3 3 4 A p H Y ( in it a ti m a rk r) A p H Y b e f o re n t g -
(the) ou tside of,
B A - (p o ss n n )
138
B A f o r B O A ( g e n d d c o m m n n ) , f o n n in g
A p e - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) p a s t t e n s e a f f ir m 2 d
c o m p o u n d p re p , 2 1 0
ou tside of, 1 3 8 ou tside of, 1 3 8 c o m m n n ) out.side. f o r m
B A A A = ( p o s .s n i l )
p erh a p s,
238
( c o n ju n c t iv e )
B A N - (p o ss n n )
p erh aps.
B O A (g e n d d
354
in g
c o m b in a t iv e a n d n o n - c o m b in a t iv e
en d of. 1 3 8 e n d of. 1 3 8 ( im p e r ) d o ( e i p e ) ,
A p H JC = (p o ss n n )
advb, 2 0 6 . 2 2 3
A p H JC N * (p o ss n n ) a p i- , ip i=
fo u r ,
2 p o = ( in t e r j) w hat is the m atter w ith
2d
s in g f e m , 3 3 4
in a d v b ia l c la u s e c o n s t r u c t io n
73
( f o r m in g s p e c )
A2 p o =
f i x e s o f th e n o m in a l s e n te n c e c o n t r a s t in g w it h a n o k p a ra d ig m , 2 6 2
ANON
6 3 - 6 4 , 1 2 -1 A
a n
on e-or-an oth er,
in d e p e n
d e n ts
J l n o k - p a ra d ig m .
145
w h ich ?
A u ; (sp e c )
B j> p e ( g e n d ls s c o m m n n ) 88, 366
A p i - , f o n n in 'g p e r ip h r a s t ic im p e r , 3 6 9
A p i p e ( im p e r )
do
3(j6 o ld . s y n t a x
( e ip e ) ,
A C ( g e n d ls s c o m m n n )
go,
sy n ta x o f, 16 8
B c u N - (b s o f gendd c o m m n n ) . . ,
in a t t r ib u t iv e c o n s t r u c t io n , 9 6 - A C ( g e n d ls s s u f f )
sy n ta x o f,
in a t t r ib u t iv e c o n s t r u c t io n , 9 6 B c u K ( in f )
o f. 1 1 4
new .
114
tree,
109
o ld , 1 1 2 six. 6 7
- B c u c u N ( g e n d ls s s u f f )
had,
I 12
- A c e ( f o r m in g s p e c )
A c u j c u n e , m e a n in g , s y n t a x , a n d u s a g e , 185
A T - ( b s o f g e n d ls s c o n m n n ) . , . 119
h an d o ver, 3 6 6 a y e - ( im p e r ) h an d o ver, 3 6 6 i Y e i = ( im p e r ) brin g, 8 8 , 3 6 6 A Y C U ( c o n j) an d, 1 4 5 , 2 3 1 A Y - ( im p e r )
502
r ( le t t e r ) , 14 r
-less,
and
k a n d ic , 2 3 yo u (are), 7 8 , 3 1 8 you , 8 5
r . a lle m a n t s o f
r -
(p e rs p re f d u r)
- r
(p e rs s u f f )
- r -
and
r c N o iT o b e f o re
- r -
( p e r s in t e r m e d ) yen/. 8 3
( in t e r j) n tc
that,
-
354
m ay it com e to pa.ss, 4 8 7 let us hope
( c o n ju n c t iv e )
- V viv. u v . I / ,
D a vid . 4 1 ic c m ffmiil In, s y n t a x
A A A fo r A iy e iA A O K e i NA=
e i ( in f ) o l, 4 8 8
com e
i l l p e r ip h r a s t ic c o n ju g n , 4 2 7 sy n ta x o f, 16 8
e m a n if e s t in g :
e i - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 1 s t s in g , 3 4 6
/e / in v e r b s , 18 8
e i - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) c ir c
g lo t t a l S lo p p h o n e m e , 3 6
e T - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) fo e I s t s in g . 3 9 6
C)
n o ii- p h o n e m ic re s o n a n c e
o f f o llo w
e iA N - (p o ss n n )
in g c o n s o n a n t , 3 5
e iA T = ( p o s s n n )
e , n o n - p h o n e m ic , 9 ( t a b le I ) , 8 5 n
I,
188
378 I s i s in g ,
338
e - ( c ir c c o n v t r ) , o m is s io n b e f o re e ,
m
,
n
,
414
e i e - ( i n i t att m a r k r )
then,
238, 492
e i ' e - b e f o r e p a s t te n s e n e g
. . . having,
e - ( p r e p ) b e f o re i n f e x t e n d in g o p t o r j u s s c la u s e o r im p e r ,
unless, w iilw u l
493
e ie n - (b s o f gendd c o m m n n ) . . .
341
-w ork.
109
in o rd e r lo.
493
eye(s) of, 1 3 8 unless, 4 9 3 e T p e - unless. 4 9 3 j c e - unless. 4 9 3 J t e K i ( A ) c unless, 4 9 3
e ie p - (p o ss n n )
m a r k in g i n f o r r p e - a s p r e d ic a t iv e c o m p le m e n t . 1 8 5 ( c )
e i M H T i ( c o n j) e iM H T i
a s p re d ic a t e , 2 8 8
e iM H T i
e - ( s e n t c o n v t r ) c irc / f o c / r e la t , 3 9 6 e - , o m is s io n o f : b e f o re i ,
a
.
m
,
n
e iM H T i , p. 2 5
e s ( c o n ju g n b s ) c o n d it , 3 4 6
e i p e ( in O e l lip t ic a l r e p re s e n t a t io n o f p -
e = ( c o n v e r s io n b s , p r e p e r s o n a l) c ir c / f o c , 396
p o und vb
d o so ,
yo u ,
(p e rs s u f f )
85
m ake . . . into
_____ 1 7 9 e ip e
e = e - ( c o n ju g n b s ) o p t a f f i n n , 3 3 8
in c o m
180
a n d in c id e n t a l p re d ic a t io n
e = f o r e - e = ( c ir c + fo e c o n v t r s ) , 4 4 4 , 4 4 7
N -
am ount to. 65. 2 6 0 behold
e i c - ( e x is t - in d ic b s )
- e , G r e c o - C o p t ic p e rs o n a l n a m e s e n d in g
c o n t ra s t e d w it h p re d ic a te M n e i'M A /
in , 1 2 6 - e -
cye(s) of, 1 3 8 eye(s) of. 1 3 8 ,
e i e - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t a f f i r m
e fo r e e , 2 4
-e
I s t s in g , 3 9 6
M M A Y ( ‘ i s h e re / t h e re ’ ) , 4 7 6
( p e n u lt im a t e p e r s o n a l o b je c t m o r p h )
him lherlilllhein.
c o n t ra s t e d s y n t a c t ic a lly w i t h o y N - ,
A ll
82
- e - ( p e r s in t e m ie d ) v o w , 8 0
and d u r s e n t, 3 2 3
e A - , h e a d in g s e c o n d m e m b e r o f a n t it h e
f o r m in g d u r a n d e x is t - in d ic s e n t s , 3 2 3 , 476
s is , 4 2 3 e A - . . . j v e ( 2 < u u ) q ) , h e a d in g s e c o n d
f u n c t io n in n a r r a t iv e , 4 7 8 e i c - w i t h e x p r e s s io n o f t im e o r m e a s u re .
m e m b e r o f a n t it h e s is . 4 2 3 E B iH N
( g e n d ls s c o m m n n )
w retch ed ,
sy n
ta x o f . 1 1 4 e B O A M M A Y ( a d v b ) , a s r e s u m p t iv e m o r p h , 4 ()4
+
becau se,
493
fo e c o n v t r s ) , 4 1 6 , 4 4 7
- e e - ( p e r s in t e n n e d )
you ,
80
e = N A - f o r e s e - ( c o n ju g n b s ) o p t , 3 3 9 e e p e ( c ir c
e ic n e
+
245
lo,
then,
498
245
e ic ^ H H N e ( in t e r j) e ic ^ H H n e ( in t e r j)
h, lo, lo,
245 245
e iC
2 H H T e ( in t e r j)
e iC
2 H H T e A N O K e tc ( i n t e r j ) here (!) am ,
e iC
2 H T e ( i n t e r j ) lo, 2 4 5
245
242
fo e c o n v t r s ) , 4 1 6 , 4 4 7
e i ( le t t e r s e q u e n c e )
lo,
( i n i t a tt m a r k e r )
e i C T e ( in t e r j)
e B O A j c e - ( c o n j) e e ( c ir c
485 e iC N e ( in t e r j)
eith er, or,
fo r e i- e i, 2 4
eiTe ( c o n j)
m a n if e s t in g p h o n e m e s / e y / o r / y / , 1 6
e i ' u j A N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 1 s t s in g ,
p h o n e m ic v a lu e o f , 1 5
145
346
503
S E L E C T
e i jc c u M M O C N A K
I (hereby) tell you ,
C O P T I C
445
I N D K X
e N N e K - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n c g 2 d s in g
e K - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 2 d s in g m a s t , 346 e K -
m a sc , 3 3 8 G N N e N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n e g 1 s t p i,
( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) t i r e
338
2 d s in g
e N N e c - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n e g 3 d s in g
m a sc , 3 9 6 e K - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) fo e 2 d s in g m a s c ,
-e K
fe m , 3 3 8 e N N e T N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n e g 2 d p i,
396 (p e rs s u f f )
you .
338
85
you .
- e K -
( p e r s in t e r m e d )
80
e K e -
(c o n ju g a t e d b a s e ) o p t a f f i r m 2 d s in g
e N N e y - ( c o n ju g a te d b s ) o p t n e g 3 d p i, 3 3 8
e N N e q - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n e g 3 d s in g m a sc , 3 3 8
m a sc , 3 3 8 e K U j A N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d il 2 d s in g
e N T - ( s e n t c o n v t r ) fo c / re la t , 3 9 6
m a sc e M A Y ( a d v b ) , a s r e s u m p t iv e m o r p h ,
h ardly,
e M o n c
40 4
o th erw ise,
eM M O N
e N T - f o r e - e N T - ( c ir c + fo e c o n v t r s ) . 444, 447
424
e N U j i N - ( c o n ju g a te d b s ) c o n d it 1 s t p i, 3 4 6
b e f o re N T e - ( c o n ju n c t iv e ) , 3 5 4
e N -
e N T - ( c ir c + fo e c o n v t r s ) , 4 4 7
245, 424, 493
eN
2 0 C 0 N ( e o n j) a s lon g a s, 4 9 3
p erm illed. 4 8 7 M e N H a n d e n i r o M e N O N , in ter ca la ry d a y ( i n c a le n d a r) , 1 3 5 ( c o n j) sin ce, 4 9 3
e s e c T i ( im p e r s o n a l p re d ic a t e ) i7 i.v
( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 1 s t p i, 3 4 6
e N - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) c ir c 1 s t p i. 3 9 6 e N - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) fo e 1 s t p i, 3 9 6
e n ir o
- e N ( p e r s s u f f ) welus, 8 5 - e N - ( p e r s in t e r m e d ) welus. 8 0
e n e i
e = N A - f o r e = e - ( c o n ju g n b s ) o p t , 3 3 9
eiieiJiH
e N e - ( c ir c + p re t c o n v t r s ) i f . .
e n e i J i H n e p (c o n J)
had,
w erel
( e o n j)
493
sin ce,
493
in stead . -ing. 4 9 3 i e T p e - in stea d o f . . . -ing. 4 9 3 i N - b e f o re i n f , in stead o f . . . -in^.
e n M A b e f o re N T e - ( c o n ju n c t iv e ) ,
416, 493
of
e N e - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p i a f r m n 1 s t p i 3 3 8 e N e - ( fo e + p r e l c o n v t r s ) , 4 4 6
e n M
e N e - ( i n i t a tt m a r k r ) . I n t e r r o g a t iv e s ig n a l,
e n M
493
2 3 8 ,5 1 1
e n T p e -
f o r m in g e n t it y s t a t e m e n t , 1 5 1
in o rd e r f o r .
.to . . . . 4 9 3
2 0 C 0 N ( c o n j) a s long a s. 4 9 3
e N e - ( r e la t + p re t c o n v t r s ) , 4 0 1
e n
e N e = ( c irc / f o c / re la t + p r e l c o n v t r s ) , 4 3 7
e p - ( z e r o - c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) p a st t e n s e
e N e e ( c ir c + p re t + fo e c o n v t r s ) , 4 1 7 ,
a f f im i, lik e e N T - i ( q ) - , 4 0 6 e p - f o r e p e - ( c o n ju g n b s , p re n o m ) c o n
436, 447 e N e N T - ( c ir c + p re t + fo e c o n v t r s ) , 4 1 7 , 436, 447
eNepe-
w it h N i -
( c irc / f o c / re la t + p re t c o n v t r s ) ,
in c o n t n ir y - t o - f a e t c o n d it c la u s e , 4 9 3 ( 9 ) , 498
e p e - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 2 d s in g f e m , 346
an d not accordin g to,
424
F . N N i - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n e g 1 s t s in g , 338
c i i H A - fo e d u r c o n ju g a t io n w it h N i ( f u lu r e a u x i l ) a s p re d ic a t e , 3 3 9
r . N N K - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n e g 2 d s in g f c in , 3 3 8 e N N C - ( c o n ju g n b s , p r e n o m ) o p t n e g , 3 3 8 G N N e - , e N N e = ( c o n ju g n b s ) , o p t n e g ; a fte r jc e K A ( i) c , 3 3 8
504
( f u t u r e a u x i l ) a s p r e d i
c a te 2 d s in g f e n i, 3 9 6
4 1 7 ,4 3 6 ,4 3 7 , 44 7
e N K iT i- . .. iN
d it , 3 4 6 e p i - f o r e p e - N i - . c ir e / f o c d u r c o n j
e p e - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t a f f in n 2 d s in g fe m . 3 3 8 e p e - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) c ir c 2 d s in g fe m , 3 9 6 e p e - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) fo e 2 d s in g fe m , 3 9 6 e p e - ( c o n ju g n b s , p r e n o m ) c o n d it , 3 4 6 e p e - ( c o n v e r s io n b s , p r e n o m ) c ire / f o c , 396 e p e - ( o p t a t iv e c o n ju g a t io n ) , 3 3 8 , 3 4 1
IN
i
; r i -, k k
a l p h a b e t i c a l
c o n ju g n b s e s e p e - , e s e - / N N e - , ijN e s
and
e T -
e N N e -, e N N e = , 338
o r d e r
i. e . e T * * - ( z e r o - c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) r e l
See also
a t iv e a f f ir m d u r s e n t , 3 9 9 .
c o n v e r s io n s o f , 3 3 8
B a re e r -
e x t e n s io n s o f , 3 4 1
e T = ( c o n v e r s io n b s , p r e p e r s o n a l) , r e la t iv e ,
e p e - f o r e - e p e ( c ir c + fo e c o n v ir s ) , 444, 447
396 e T = , b a re ( e T = w it h n o p e r s o n a l s u f f i x ) .
See
e p e - . e s ( c o n ju g n b s ) c o n d it , c o n t ra s t e d w it h t i r e b s , 3 4 6 - e p e - ( p e r s in t e r m e d )
-e T
yo u ,
80
B a re e r -
(p e rs o n a l s u f f ix ) / / m p . 8 5
e T B e - ( p r e p ) , b e f o re i n f
e p e N i - , c irc / f o c d u r c o n j w it h n a -
becau se.
e T B e J c e -,
( f u t u r e a u x i l ) a s p re d ic a t e 2 d s in g fe r n . 3 9 6
in o rd e r to,
493
493
e r e - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) r e la t 2 d s in g fe m , 3 9 6
e p e - . . . N A - f o r e p e - (o p t), 3 3 9
e r e - ( s e n t c o n v t r ) f o c / re la t , 3 9 6
e p e u j i N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 2 d s in g
e r e - . . . n e , e x p la n a t o r y r e la t iv e c la u s e ,
fe m , 3 4 6
410
e p e u j i N - f o r e p u j i N - ( c o n ju g n b s , p r e n o m ) c o n d it , 3 4 6
s o n a l r e c ip r o c it y , 9 ( ) , 1 7 7 -
n a
(fu tu re
e p N T s , in n a m in g c o n s t r u c t io n s , 1 3 0 e p o = ( p r e p ) , a s p re d ic a t e in d u r s e n t , 3 1 0 e p u j i N - ( c o n d it io n a l c o n ju g a t io n ) , 3 4 6 -7 , 348
(fu tu re
e re N e p e
+
p re t c o n v t r s ) , 4 0 1
( r e la t
+
p re t c o n v t r s ) , 4 3 7
e T e n i i n e . . . . e x p la n a t o r y r e la t iv e c la u s e , 4 1 0 e r e p i - r e la t d u r c o n j w it h n a - ( f u t u r e a u x i l ) a s p re d ic a te 2 d s in g f e m , 396
c o n ju g n b s e s e p u j i N - , e = u j i N , 3 4 6 e x t e n s io n s o f . 3 4 7
e r e p e - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) r e la t 2 d s in g fe m , 3 9 6
f o r m in g e n t it y s t a t e m e n t , 1 5 1
e r e p e - ( c o n v e r s io n b s , p r e n o m ) , r e la
p re c e d e d b y c o n j, 3 4 6
t iv e , 3 9 6
e p u j i N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 2 d s in g fe m , 3 4 6
e r e p e N A - r e la t d u r c o n j w it h
n a
-
( f u t u r e a u x i l ) a s p re d ic a t e 2 d s in g
e p u j A N T e T N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 2 d p i, 3 4 6
fe m , 3 9 6 e r e p N A - r e la t d u r c o n j w it h
e c - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 3 d s in g fe m , 346
n a
-
(fu tu re
a u x i l ) a s p re d ic a t e 2 d s in g f e m , 396
e c - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) c ir c 3 d s in g f e m , 396
e r e T N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 2 d p i, 3 4 6 e r e T N - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) c ir c 2 d p i,
e c - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) fo e 3 d s i n g f e m ,
396
e r e T N - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) fo e 2 d p i,
396
she!her!it.
(p e rs s u f f )
85
396
- e c - ( p e n u lt im a t e p e r s o n a l o b je c t m o rp h )
-
396 e T e n e ( r e la t
a u x il) a s p re d ic a te 2 d s in g f e m , 3 9 6
-e c
n a
a u x i l ) a s p re d ic a t e 2 d s in g f e m ,
e p H Y ( g e n d d c o m m n n ) . e x p r e s s in g p e r
e p N i - , c irc / f o c d u r c o n j w it h
e r e N A - r e la t d u r c o n j w it h
him lherlilllhem , 8 2 sh ellier/il, 8 0
- e c - ( p e r s in t e r m e d )
e c e - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t a f f i r m
3 d s in g
fe m , 3 3 8
e c H T ( g e n d d c o m m n n ) grou n d, c o n f u s e d in d ic t io n a r ie s w it h n e c H T , 2 0 6 , 2 1 1 ,2 1 2 , 2 2 3 . S f f n e c H T
e T - ( s e n t c o n v t r ) b e f o re s u f f c o n ju g v b o id , 3 7 6 , 3 9 9
e r e T N - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) r e la t 2 d p i, 396 e r e T N A - f o r e r e T N - N A - r e la t d u r c o n j w i t h N A - ( f u t u r e a u x i l ) a.s p r e d i c a te 2 d p i, 3 9 6 e r e T N G - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t a f f i r m
2d
p i, 3 3 8 e r e T N U j i N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n d it 2 d p i, 3 4 6 e T i ( c o n j)
wh ile .
. .
s till.
. . , 493
505
S l.I.I U T ( O l ’ I U e T K - iiiiii|ii(Ziin'(l loiivir) rclai 2d sing
inasc, 396 e T N - iconjiigaicil convir) relai Isi pi, 396 - e T N - (pers inlerm ed) you , 80 eTNTA= whu h Ihe elc) has. 393 e T o y - iconjugaled convtr) relal 3d pi, 396 e r n e (gemld comm nn) top, forming com pound prep, 210. S ee also Tne e r p e - (caus inf) i/i o rd e r f o r . . . w , 493 forming cniily .slalcmcni. 151 as predicaie, 288 e r p e - , extending opi or jus<; clause or imper, 341 E T C - (conjugated convir) relal 2d sing fem. 396 GTUje, .synlax of, 488 e T c j- (conjugaled convir) relal 3d sing masc, 396 e y - (conjugated bs) condil 3d pi, 346 e y - (conjugaled convir) circ 3d pi, 396 e y - (conjugaled convir) foe 3d pi, 396 e y e - (conjugaled bs) opI affirm 3d pi. 338 e y ty A N - (conjugaled bs) condil 3d pi, 346 e<} ) 0 c 0 N (conj) a s long a s, 493 e u j - (vbl auxil) he a b le to, synlax of, 184 e u jc u n e (conj) i f (ever), 493 NTe (conjunclive) wilhin an e u jc u n e clau,se, 353 e u ju je . S ee u ju je e ty jc e for e< y jcn e (conj/inii all m arkr) then. 492 e u jj i .e - (conj) before circ su pposin g that. 493 forming eiiiily ,
506
I N D IiX
e= u)A N - (conjugn bs, prepersonal) conilii, 346 e q - (conjugaled bs) condil 3d sing masc, 346 e c j - (conjugaled convir) circ 3d sing masc, 396 e q - (conjugaled convir) foe 3d sing masc, 396 e q - invariable (conjugaled convir), form ing advbial m od, 425 - e q (pers suff) h ellm nlit, 85 - e q - (pers inlerm ed) h elhim lit, 80 e q e - (conjugaled bs) opi affirm 3d sing ma.sc, 338 e q e u j c u n e .so be it. 246 eqTcuN w h ere is . . . ? syniax of, 445 e qcyA N - (conjugaled bs) condil 3d sing masc 346 e z e y e s , 241, 245 G2 N - for e ^ p N - (prep) to, 209 e X N - for AJCN- (prep) w ithout, 202 e jc c u - for eJCN- (prep) upon, 209 e jc tu s for AJCtu= (prep) without, 202 e 't '- (conjugaled convir) relal 1st sing, 396 S. n u m e ra l six, 67
2 (leller), 14 H (conj) an d, o>, 145 before N T e - (conjunclive) unless, 493 H (inil all markr) .so . (m arking ironic question), 238 HAH A -. affirm correspondent to M nA T e-, M niT=, 336 e for T - 2 , 52 e , phonemic value of, 13 e e
in conelaiive com parison ;h.?/ a s . . .«> t o o ___ 505-507 forming eiitiiy siaienieni how. 151 in indireci discourse /loii-. that. 522 e H (masc gendd conini nn) p ro w , fro n t, fomiiiig; com binative advb, 206 com pound prep, 2 1 I non-combinalive advb, 223 e i H M for e i e p o y c A A i i M .leru.salem. 41
IN e iA H M
for
U R M EK
e ie p o y c A A H M
A L P H A U I i T l C A L
J eru sa lem , 41
O R D E R
KO) NA* reflex g e t 393 have, 389
Im n al I s p e lle d a s e i is f ile d under letter
e. syllabic and non-syllabic status of, 16 - ? (pers suff) Ume, 85 - I - (pers interm aJ) Um e. 80 - T - (pers Intermed) Ume, 80 I H A for i c p A H A Isra el, 41 IHC for i H c o y c Jesus, Josh u a, 41 Tc for I H c o y c Jesu s, Joshua, 41
A - (ait) the, 52 A - for N - , 21 AAAy (spec) any (at a ll), 63-64, 1 2 - 1 A and nom sent predicates. 260 A A iy N - . . . NiM all, 74 A iA y NIM a ll, 74 AiKT= (poss nn) coverin g(s) of. 138 AoinON (init an markr) w e ll then. 238
K - (pers pref dur) you ( a r e 78. 3 18 -K (pers sec suff) you , 88 -K (pers suff)>-oi/, 85 as direct object expressing reflexivity, 181 -ic (pers suff)^^!/, 85 - K - (pers intermed) yo u . 80. 83 - K - (pers intermed) you , 80 K A i n e p (conj) although. 493 KAiToi (conj) although, 493 KiAcuc (init att m arkr) fittin g ly , 238 KAMG (gendlss comm nn) M ack, syntax of, 114 ill attrib construction, 96 K iN (conj) even if, 493
M- (art) th e, 52 M- for N- (inf) bring, 21
I,
KAN e a j c u n e even if, 49 3 KAN e a j j c e - even if, 493 K iT A - . . . AN, N - , circ Conversion of, 424 K A T i e e (conj) ju s t a s. in correlative com parison, 4 9 3 , 5 0 5 -6 K iT A pos (prep) a ccordin g to, 2(K) Ke (determ pron) a n o th er on e, 51 K e - (art) an oth er, 51 K eeT (deienn pron) an oth er on e. 51 K6AAAY N - any other, 74 KGT (determ pron) an oth er on e, 51 KGTe (deierm pron) an oth er one, 51 KHTe (determ pron) another one, 51 K oyi (gendlss comm nn) sm all, syniax of,
114 in atiributive construction. 96 sem antic value in unmediaied attribu tive conslruciion, 101 K o y N - (bs of gendlss? com m nn) .small. 125 K oyN s (poss nn) hosom of, 138 K O y N T = (poss nn) hosom of, 138 K o y o y N = (poss nn) hosom of. 138
M - for N -, by assimilation, 21 MA (imper) g ive, 366 MA- (im per) give, 366 MA-, form ing affirm imper, 367 MAAB, M iiB e (spec) thirty. 67 MAB- (form ing spec) th irty an d, 67 M iA ic T i (conj) esp ecia lly i f 493 MAN- (bs of gendd comm nn) p la c e o f 109 MANA= (im per of tw A *) g ive . . . unto.
173, 366 M A pe- (jussive conjugation). 340, 341 conjugn bses M A pe-. M Ap=/M npTpe~, M n p rp e * , 340 extensions of, 341, 357 and imper, 340, 370 MApoK (inierj) won t you go! 241, 242, 340 MApoN (inierj) l e t ’s g o ! 241, 242, 340 MAyAA= (infl m o d ). . . alon e, 152, 154—5,
158 MAyAAT* (infl mod) , . . alon e, 152,
154-5,158 MAyATs (infl mod) . . . alon e, 152 MA-)--, form ing imper o f -f-- compound vb, 367 Me= (Conjugn bs, prepersonal) aor neg,
337 -M e (gendlss suff) high-quality. 112 M ereN oiT O (impers pred) m ay it not com e to p a s s (that . . . ). 487
M ereN oiT O (inierj) b y no m ean s! 245 M e e p e (prop nn) m idday, 132 MEN (conj), without correlaiive term. 233 M e p e - (vbl auxil) lo ve to. 184 M e p e -, Me* (conjugn bs) aor neg, 337 MepiT, M e p iT e (gendlss comm nn), syn tax of, 114
507
S E L E C T
M e u jA s ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id )
C O P T I C
nol know,
:i s p r e d i c a t e e x p r e s s i n g p o s s e s s i o n , 3 9 3 M N N C i- (p re p ) b e fo re :
2 5 0 , 381
M eu jA K ( i n i t a t t m a r k r ) p erh aps. 2 3 8 , 3 8 1 b e fo re n t g -
( c o n ju n c tiv e )
perhaps,
354
such-and-such, 3 8 1 ( i m p e r s p r e c l ) ii i s nol right.
in f
after . . . -ing,
250.
M N N C iN T A M N N C A T pe-
M e ? - ( fo rm in g g e n d ls s c o m m n n ), 11 2 ,
c o n s tr u c tio n s w ith C N iY - c n t g , 1 1 2
anioiinl lo. 2 6 0 is it the case that . . ?
MH (in it a tt m a r k r )
not the case t h a t. . . ? 2 5 0 M H r e N o i T O (im p e r s p r e d ) n\ay it not com e to pa.ss (th at I, 4 8 7 M H r e N o iT o (in te r j) h y no m eans! 2 4 5 MHnoTe (c o n j) lest, 4 9 .3 M H n c u c (c o n j) lest. 4 9 3 M H T , M H T e (s p e c ) ten, 6 7 M i o = (in te rj) g reetin gs to, 2 4 2 M M A T e (a d v b ) only, 1 5 8
MMT ( le tte r s e q u e n c e ) , m a n if e s tin g s y lla
M N T - (b s o f g e iid d c o m m n n ), 109
M NTA = ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id )
.s in g f e r n v o n
have,
M M tN M M O = ( i n f l m o d ) . 1 5 4 -5
s in g fem
385, 386
M o n c (in it
not
383
fifteen . 6 7 take, 3 6 6 a t t m a r k r ) h ardly.
238, 354
c ir c c o n v e r.s io n o f , 4 2 4
a t a ll events, 2 3 8 (m y)self. 1 5 2 b s ) not vet 1 s t s i n g ,
M O N O N ( in it a tt m a r k r )
M M N - fo r M N - ( f o r m in g d u r a n d e x is tin d ic s e n ts ) , 3 2 2 , 4 7 6
2 d s in g
(not y e t
c o n ju g a tio n ), 3 3 6
c o n j u g n b.se,s M r i A T e - , M n i T = , 3 .3 6 c o n v e rs io n s o f, 3 3 6
383
M M NTA = fo r M HTA= ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id )
M n e (iiile rj)
no.
241, 245
M n e - ( c o n j u g a t e d b s ) p a s t te ii.s e n e g 2 d
383
M M N T e - fo r M N T e - ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id )
s in g fe in , 3 3 4 M n e - , M n s ( c o n ju g n b s ) p a s t te n s e n e g ,
383
M M N T e - f o r M N T e - ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id )
not have, 3 8 3 ( p r e p ) . See n - , m m o = ( i n t e r j ) no, 2 4 1 , 2 4 5
M n p - (c o n ju g a te d b s ) p a s t te n s e n e g 2 d s in g fe m , 3 3 4 M n p - ( n e g a t o r o f m ip e r ) , 2 5 1, 3 6 8
othei-wise.
245
M N - (e x is t-in d ic n e g b s ) , 2 5 0 , 3 2 2 , 4 7 6 - / n m m a =, v a r n m -
( p re p ) , lin k in g
an d,
.3 3 4 M n e p - ( n e g a t o r o f i i n p e r ) , .3 6 8
c ir c c o n v e rs io n o f , 4 2 4
e n tity te r m s
not vet
fem , 3 3 6 M n iT e -
M M N T X s fo r m n t jl = ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id )
MMON fo r e - M M O N
336 M n A T e - ( c o n ju g a te d b s )
i n d i c s e n t s ) , .3 2 2 , 4 7 6
508
yo n do not have,
M N T e - ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id , p re n o m )
M H A T A - (c o n ju g a te d
e x p r e s s in g re Q e x iv ity , 1 7 6
not have,
not
383
M o y N M M o s ( in f l m o d ) . . .
M M N - fo r M N - ( f o r m in g d u r a n d e x is t-
not h are.
385,
M N T e - (c o n ju g a te d s u f f c o n ju g v b o id ) 2 d
M N T H ( .s p e c )
alon e, 1 5 2 (m y)self, 1 5 2 . . (my)self. 1 5 2 ,
do not have.
M N T e - ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id , p r e n o m )
MO (in ip e r)
M M A yA A s (in fl m o d ) . . .
383
386
a s r e s u m p tiv e m o rp h , 4 0 4
M M iN e M M O s ( in f l m o d ) . . .
not have.
M N T e - ( c o n ju g a te d s u f f c o n ju g v b o id ) 2 d
a f t e r o y N T e - ( h a v e ) , .3 8 3
not have,
ten and, 6 7 not have.
M N T - ( fo n iiiiig s p e c )
M N TS ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id b s )
have,
MMAy (a d v b )
m n
493
re d u c e d v o c a liz a tio n fo rm , 3 8 6
2 3 8 ,5 1 1
n e g a tio n is
MMO=
a fte r . . . -ing. a fter . -ing. 4 9 3 a fter . -ing, 4 9 3 a fter . . . -ing, 4 9 3
b le /n it/, 2 6 , 8 5 ( ta b le 6 n 2 )
123
MMON
493
M N N C iB T p e -
4 8 7 ,4 8 8
M e ? — ( in f)
fo e c o n v e rs io n , 4 5 7
N T e - (c o n ju n c tiv e )
M e u je N iM M ecycye
I N D liX
145, 201
M n p T p A - ( c o n j u g a t e d b s ) j u s s n e g 1 st s in g , 3 4 0 M n p T p e - , M n p r p e s (c o n ju g n b s ) ju s s neg, 340
IN
i
; r i ; i: k
A i . i ' i i A m r n c A L
M n p T p eN - (conjugated bs) juss iieg 1st pi, 340 M n p T p e c - (conjugated bs) juss neg 3d sing fein, 340 M n p T p e y - (conjugated bs) juss neg 3d pi, 340 M n p T p e q - (conjugated bs) juss neg 3d sing masc, 340 M n p u jc u n e, fonning periphrastic neg imper, 368, 369 M n c o n ill ca se, 493(37) Mncup (interj) no, 241, 245 M ncup- (negator of imper), 368 Mncup e - , form ing emotive neg imper, 368 Mncup e r p e - , r p e * (conjugn bs) form ing em otive juss neg, 340 M T (letter sctjuence), and m n t , 26 Mcu (imper) lake, 366 M tU N M M O = (infl mod) . . . (iny)self, 152 N - (art) ihe. 52 N= (poss art) m y (etc), 54 -N (pers suft) we/us, 85 - N - (pers intermed) w e/iis, 80 N, non-phonemic, 9 (table 1), 85n I, 188 Nassim ilation o f syllabic /n-/, 21 doublings ( n n , n n , etc), 22 om ission before o \ or e i, 22 N - (art) the, 52 N - (mark o f relationship). S ee n - / m m o = N - (negator), 250, 251 N - for E N - (conjugated convtr) circ 1st pi, 396 N - for N - N - , 22 N -, predicative. See n - / m m o = and Predicative n - / m m o = N - . , . e T M M A y (art) th ose, 57 n - / m m o = (prep) or n - (mark o f relation ship), 203. See a lso Predicative n- / mmo= in attributive construction o f nn, 96, 99, l(X), 102, 103. S ee a l w Attributive constructions o f the noun in com posite nn, 109, 112, 120, 125 in com pound advb, 217. S ee a lso Adverb in com pound prep, 2 1 1 ,2 1 2 . S ee also Preposition
o r d i
;r
in general relationship construction, 147. See a lso General relationship (Possessive) m arking dircct object, 171, 203. See a lso Direct object m arking incidental predication, 179, 203. See a lso Incidental predica tion; Predicative n - / m m o = m arking lexical expansion o f pers suff, 87 m arking partitive relationship, 2 0 3 . See a lso partitive relationship m arking predicative expansion o f direct object, 1 7 8 . See a lso Predicative expansion; Predicative n ~ / m m o = predicate m m o = expressing possession, 3 1 0 ,3 9 3
in prenom slate o f poss nn, 13 9 N= (conjugn bs, prepersonal) conjunctive conjugation. 3 5 1 -N (pers suff) we/us, 8 5 - N - (pers intermed) w e/iis, 8 0 NA, form ing suff conjug vboid, 3 7 6 approxim ately, 6 8 (determ pron) the one re la te d to, 5 4 NA- (future auxil) (he) goin g to, 1 8 4 . See a lso e p e - . . . n a -
N i-
N i-
contrasted with opt, 3 1 1 and generalization or potentiality, 3 1 1 periphrastic conjugation of, 4 2 7 as predicate, 3 1 1 N i - (poss art) m y, 5 4 N A - a pproxim ately, 68 NAS reflex, after vb (dativus ethicus), 1 8 1 , 364
N A A - ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id ) he g re a t, 376,
378 (determ pron) these, 56 NAei is g oin g ta c o m e , and n h y , 311 N A i (determ pron) th ese, 56 n a i a t = (suff conjug vboid) h lessed is , 2 4 2 ,3 7 8 NAMe enclitic (init att m arkr) truly, 238 N A N oyc it w ou ld he b etter, in contrar}.-to-fact condit, 499 N A N O y c before e p e - (circ) it is a g o o d thing t h a t . . . 426 NAUj islw ill he ah le to. tense value of, 184 N i2PM “ for NA2 PN - (prep) in the pre.sen ce of, 21 NAei
509
S E L E C T
C O P T I C
N r - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n ju n c t iv e 2 d s in g m a sc , 35 1
I N D E X
N e T M M iY (d e te rm p ro n )
N r - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n ju n c t iv e 2 d s in g
t iv e 2 d s in g m a s c , 3 5 1
to yo u , 8 5 ( t a b le they (are), 5 3 , 2 5 2
N e ( in f le c t e d p re p )
6 n 4)
Neq-
ihe,
54
N e q p - ( s u f f c o n ju g v b o id )
be i)leasant,
382
52
these, 5 8 com ing, s y n t a x o f , 1 6 8 m e a n in g is goin g to com e.
N H (d e te m i p ro n )
N e - ( s e n t c o n v t r ) p re t , 3 9 6
N H y ( s t a t iv e ) ( m )
N e - f o r e N e - ( in it a tl n ia r k r ) . 2 3 8
w it h fu t u re
N e = ( c o n ju g n b s ) c o n ju n c t iv e , d i s t i n g u is h e d f r o m
311
N e = p re t , 3 5 1
N e e ( c o n j)
N e s ( c o n v e r s io n b s , p r e p e r s o n a l) p re t , 3 9 6 N K = . . . A N . a m b ig u it y o f , 4 3 4 , 4 5 2
ju s t a s,
in c o r r e la t iv e c o m p a r i
so n , 4 9 3 , 5 0 5 -6
O how
e x c la m a t o r y
N e = N A - , e x p r e s s in g h y p o t h e t ic a l m e a n
Nee
like
N N i-
in g , 3 11
N e e i-
his,
( p o s s a rt)
N e , f o r m in g s u f f c o n ju g v b o id , 3 7 6 N e - (a rt)
21
N e q - f o r N q - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n ju n c
m a sc , 35 1
N e ( n e x u s p ro n )
Vfllir, th ose, 5 7
N G T M - fo r N G T N - (p o ss iir t )
. . . , 508
. . . . and p i fo rm o f n n ,
108
these, 5 6 N e e icne ( i n i t att m a r k e r ) then, N E i - f o r N i - ( a r t ) the, 5 8 n e t - ( a r t ) th ese, 5 6 ( d e t e rm p r o n )
N I - (a rt) 498
N iM
the, 5 8 w h o?
(sp e c )
6 3 -6 4 , 7 2 -7 4
r e q u e s t in g c o n t e n t o f d is c o u r s e o r c o g n i t io n , 5 1 2
so-an d-so.
N e K - ( p o s s a rt ) vo w /, 5 4 N e K - f o r N r - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n ju n c t iv e 2 d s in g m a s c , 3 5 1
73
. . N IM ( a r t )
an y, W
d ir e c t o b je c t s y n t a x o f , 1 7 1
N e = N A - , e x p r e s s in g h y p o t h e t ic a l m e a n
p o s it io n in a t t r ib u t iv e c o n s t r u c t io n s o f
in g , 3 1 !
n n ,9 6 ,9 9 ,
101, 102
N e N T f o r N - e N T - , a rt ic u la t e d r e la i, 4 1 1
N K A T i- .
. A N , c ir c c o n v e r s io n o f , 4 2 4
N e N T f o r N G - e N T - , i n c le f t s e n t , 4 f> 4
N K e - (a rt)
the other,
N e p A - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v ir
+
f u t u r e a u x il
A f o r N A - ) p r e l 2 d s in g f e m , 3 9 6
Nepe-
55
the others. S ee m n - / n m m a = ( p r e p ) . S ee m n - / n m m a *
N K O O Y e ( d e t e rm p r o n )
( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r ) p re t 2 d s in g
N K iM A s
fe m , 3 9 6
N N fo r N, 2 2
the,
N e p e - ( c o n v e r s io n b s , p re n o m ) p re t , 3 9 6
N N - (a rt)
N e p e - . . . A N , a m b ig u it y o f , 4 3 4 , 4 5 2
N N - fo r N - , 22
NepeNA-
N - N - , s im p l i f i e d to N - , 2 2
(c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r
+
fu tu re
a u x i l ) p re t 2 d s in g f e m , 3 9 6
338
a u x i l ) p re t 2 d s in g f e m , 3 9 6
N e c - ( p o s s a rt )
her,
the kings,
52
N N i - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n e g 1 s t s in g ,
N e p N i - ( c o n ju g a t e d c o n v t r - h f u t u r e
N e p p c u o Y fo r N p p c u o y
N N e - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n e g 2 d s in g 52
54
fe m , 3 3 8 N N e - , N N e = ( c o n ju g n b s ) o p t n e g , 3 3 8
N e c - f o r N c - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) c o n ju n c t iv e 3 d s in g f e m , 3 5 1
N N e i - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) o p t n e g 1 s t p i, 3 3 8
no,
N N o ( in t e r j )
N e T f o r N e — e T - , in c le f t s e n t , 4 6 4
N o y s ( d e t e rm p r o n )
and
N ETe
and
n e T e p e fo r N - e T e -
N -e re p e -,
an d
articulated relat,
N e re p e fo r N e - e r e -
246
241, 245
the on es re la te d to,
20, 54 4! I
and
N o y e c y N - b e fo re i n f
w ithout .
. -ing.
493
clefl sent, 4 6 4 (Conjugated convtr + future auxil) pret 2d pi,
- N o y T i 5 ( g e n d ls s s u f f )
1 12
N o y c u T, N o y c u TG
158
396
-N o y q e
N e - G T e p e - , in
N E T e T N i fo r N e T G T N - N A -
5 /0
hy n o m ea n s'
N N e c u jc u n e ( in t e r j)
N e T f o r N - e T - , a rt ic u la t e d r e la t , 4 1 1
N e Te
55
N M - ( p re p ) .
N o y re . See n N O y re
( g e n d ls s
high-quohiw single, .s y n t a x o f , suff) plea.sant, 1 1 2
IN
(iRI.I-K
M
I* I I M U
Nf)0 (gciuliss foinni nn) /»,?. I 14 in ;illribulive ciinslruclion ol nn, 96, 101 NnOYecy N - before inf without . . . -ing, 493 N c - (conjugnled bs) conjunctive 3d sing feni, 3 5 1 N C - (cimjugaled bs) conjunctive 3il sing fem, 351 N c i - , fonning com pound prep, 21? NciBHA (conj) unless, 493 N C i B H A J c e - But fo r , a part fro m the f a r t that, 493, 498 N ciB A A i= (prep) except, i f i i w ere not f o r . 213 N c e - (conjugaicd bs) conjunctive 3d pi, 351 N T - (pers siiff) Ume, 85 N T - (sent convlr) foc/relal, 396 N T - for e - N T - (circ + foe convtrs), 444, 447 N T i - (conjugated bs) conjunctive 1st sing, 3 5 1 instead o f T i p i - , 351, 357 N T is (mark o f appurtenance). 148, 204 in general relationship construction, 147 N T ip e - , N Tip= for T A p e -, t a p = (conjugn bs) future conjunctive 357 N T e - (conjugated bs) conjunctive 2d sing fem, 351 N T e - (conjugn bs, prenoin) conjunctive, 351 N T e - (conjunctive conjugation), 351-6 conjugn bs n t g - , n = , 351 after conj or init att markr, 352, 354 extension of, 352 fonning entity statem ent, 151, 354 and negation. 352 and tense, 3 5 1 ,5 2 5 ,5 2 8 usage, 352-6 N T e - (pers pref nom ) von (are), 79, 2.52 N T e - for N T N - (prep) in, 209 N T e -/N T i= (mark of appurtenance), 148, 204 NTepe- (conjugated bs) after, when, precursive 2d sing fem, 344 N T e p e - (precursive conjugation) after, when, 344-5, 348 conjugn b.s N T e p e - , N Tep=, 344 extension of, 345 usage. 344
T i c M
O K I ) HR
N T e p e N - (conjugated bs) after, when. precursive 1st pi, 344 NTepep- (conjugated b.s) after, when, precursive 2d sing fem, 344 N T eTN - (conjugated bs) conjunctive 2d pi, ,351 N TeTN - (pers pref nom) you (are), 79, 252 NTK- (pers pref nom) you (are), 79, 252 NTN - (conjugated bs) conjunctive 1st pi, 351 NTo (infl m od) y o u rself, 152, 153 N T o (pers indep) you , 11 NTO- (pers pref nom) you (are). 79, 252 NTo= (infl m od) ( \o tir )s e lfe lc , 152-5, 156 tJTOK(infl m od) you rself, 152. 153 NTOK (pers indep) yoK. 77 NTOK- (pers pref nom ) you (are). 79, 252 N T ooT s (prep), as predicate expressing possession. 393 NTOOY (infl mod) th em selves, 152, 153 N T o o y (pers indep) they/them , 11 N T oc (infl m od) h e r s e lf itself. 152, 153 NTOc (pers indep) sh e/h erlit, 11 NToq (conj) m o reo ver, 156 NToq (infl m od) him self/itself. 152, 153 NToq (pers indep) helhim lit, 11 and o y i as correspondents, 50 NTUJTN (infl m od) you rselves. 152, 153 NTUJTN (pers indep) yo u , 11 NTcuTN- (pers pref nom), 79, 252 N T q - (pers pref nom, dubious) helit (is), 1 9 . 252 N c j - (conjugated bs) conjunctive 3d sing m asc, 351 N q - (conjugated bs) conjunctive 3d sing m asc, 351 N2 HT (com binative advb). usage of. 207 N2 HTS (prep), as predicate expressing pos session, 393 N2 HT-THYTN, 85 (table 6n 7) n 6 i - (prep), m ediator o f postponed sub ject, 87, 202. S ee also Postponed subject resuming poss art. 87 5. phonemic value of, 13 5 C^ks), syllabic, U), 38 O N - be. 179, 185.260 - o (gendiss sufO g re a t, 112
5 //
S H I
liC
l
( O
O N ( a d v b ) , c o n s lilu e n i o f n o i i i s e i i l p a l-
l’ I K
IN D I
O N T c u c ( i n i l a tl m a r k r )
\n fa c i. 2 3 8 in fat i. 2 3 8
i.s not. o y N iM
s y lla b ic a n d n o n - s y lla b ic s t a lu s o l . ! 6
366
a s a llo p h o n e o f cu
(il).
2(1
ri^ht (lum tl).
r c d u t e d v o c a li/ a lio n lo r i\ i.
386
a n d n o m s e n i p re d ic a le s , 2 6 ( )
anil
O Y iJ T i^
r e q u e s t in g c o n le n t o f d is c o u r s e o r c o g n ilio n , 5 1 2
< > y iiT i=
c o iiju g v b o id ) o y N T e -.
See
o y in e -
See have
o y N T e - ( s iilf
o y t i T e - ( s u l f c o n ju g
v b o id )
and
have o y M T t ; - ( c o n ju g a lc il s u f I
have.
8 5 ( t a b le 6 n n .
385. 386
o y N T G - ( s u f f c o iiju g v b o id )
b s s O y N T C - , O Y N T i= / ( M ) M H T e - .
ihey/ihem , 8 0 som eonel-ih in g. 5 0
( M IM K T is , 3 8 3 , 3 K 5
( p e r s in le r m e d )
O Y ^ (d e t p r o n )
b s s , rc d iic c d p rc p e r s o n a l
woe.' 2 4 5 one. 6 7 - p re cisely one, 7 0 ( i n f l m o d ) on ly .
o y n t
( i n l e r j ) o / i,
d ir c c i o b jc c i s y n t a x o f , ,? 9 0 c ly in o lo g y o f , 3 8 3 , 152,
1 5 4 -5 5 ,
o y a a t s ( in f l m o d )
on ly .
. ,
152, 154
55.
158
Ditly
.
l o llo w c d b y M M i y . 3 8 3
p o s lp o iiL - d s u b jc c i w i l h , 3 8 8
.1 5 2
O Y A c y N ? e a n il s n n i l a i i'\ | m v s s n M is . e x p r e s s in g a i l i i i i i a l i o i i .
s u b jc c is o l , 3 8 4
/ I
ai\d t e n s e . 3 8 9
. I'| 5
iiy K c y b o M
-o y c ;. - o y i i iliiiiiiiiig €>Y< i ( ( I c l r i i i i | n iin )
M iinciinf lliim;.
50
( s u l I ( o n iiii:
1 11 .
1 71
. ( e - . .. )
he ahle (la).
n - . . . (e -
anti o w ae is
o y o e i N -/ N A .( in le r j) «l
. . ) h e ah ir (lo).
394
y o i N - / N i=
'
242, 244
L o iiv c r s io iis o f, 2 4 4 p c r ip lir a s li c le n s e s o f , 2 4 4 , 4 2 7
h in t
< > y ii| ' ( s p i‘i ) ( / / ( / H v
\ii (nitl \
.
o y n 6 o m , v a r io u s c o n s lr u c iio n s o f , 3 9 4 oyn6o m
i Iw fli.\nni t. ( v l i l . i i i K i l I wiinl 111, I S 4 c iy . v u ; = ( m i l h u iii . i l m i l i i b |
n -
394
s| H 'i ) c m -, 6 7
l l i s o l s i n i p l r l i a i l i o r t s ) , (>'i
< > y ( ; ' M - ( ' l ' ; i l ; iii \ i l |
512
L - x Ic iiM o n o l , 3 9 1
a n d iiid e h le d iie s s , 3 9 2
o y a t * ( in f l m o d )
S V IIIM K
=,
i- M iii| > o s ilio ii w it h . 3 8 7
158
ii> < i i ; -
n t
c o n v e r s io n s o f , 3 8 3
oya
iiy i a ;-
=/m
386
a s c o r r c s p o n d e n is , 5 0
o y a , O Y e i (sp e c )
iiy r r -
have.
3 8 3 -3 9 2
s e m a n lic a H y e m p t y d ir e c i o b je c i, 1 6 9
o y i n r -
m ii
c o iiju g v b o id ) 2 d s in g I c i i i 70
11- 12 )
t iy - A c : (c’D i i j )
in
o y N T s ( i; i( / o y N T = ( s u f f e o n ju g v b o it i b s )
1 2 -1 A
som elh in g -o r-olh ei. 7 3 O Y - ( a r t ) a, 5 0 O Y - ( s p e c ) one. 7 0 O Y - ■ ■ - n o y < J J t , a .single. - O Y ( p e r s s u f O ihem iihem .
e ic - , 47 7
Ig e iu lil c o m m n n )
have, 6 3 -6 4 ,
then' i.S'ilK ie
n o n c o n ib ln a liv c a d v b , 2 2 3
fo r o y O Y - 2 4
oyaa=
n,
322. 476
c o n lr a s le il w i l h
p h o n e m ie v a lu e o f , 1 5
n
llicre
6 9 , 109
m a n if e s lin g p h o n e m e s / o w / o r / w / , 16
o y i,
open .
O Y t i - / M N - ( e x is t h u lic b s )
126
NToq
b s)
o y N - , o y N N - ( b s o f s im p le f n ic lio n s ) ,
G re c o - C o p t ic p e r s o n a l n a m e s e n d in g in ,
and
lo r o y M - ( c x is l- iiid ic
o y ' r i - ( im p e r )
deem . . . ro he. 514
O Y ( l e l l e r se q u e n c e )
- O Y -
48 7
P ' l ' i l i c a l c n l n o in
322. 476
108
w luii?
iinl i>rtniillcil.
. s e iil, 2 9 4 ijy N -
- o o y e . p i e n d in g o f G r e c o - C o p t iL ' n n s .
O Y (sp e c )
i\
o y A i i y , < > ( . N A iiY -
O N T O C ( i n i t a ll m a r k r )
(ii)
il
i) y K e 5 e c T i
le m s , 2 7 3 , 2 7 4
o n = Jc e -
X
' 63
184 6 4 .7 2
74
oyoM
( d e le r m p r o n ) , 5 9
s e m a n t ic a lly c n ip ly d ire c t o b jc c I, 1 0 9 , 181
IN
(iKI
oyoN
( i i i l c r j ) \CA, 2 4 1 , 2 4 5
oyoN
NiM ( ilc lc n n p r o n )
I-K
AI
an y on e,
I MI AI l l - I K
6(1
i l i r e t 'l o b j c c i s y i i l a x o f , 171 o y o Y , z e fJ O Y . e x p re s s in g d c p re c a lio n ,
74 o y i i i - analyzed. 11 I o y n e T - , e e N n e T - analyzed, I 10 o y T e (conj) neiiher. nor, 145 o y T e for o>vi.e (conj) n o t, 145 o y o ) ( i n f ) IR5 lid vr iilnutily {(lone),
185, 3 3 6
o y t u » t i - ( b s o f .s i m p l e f r a c l i o n . s ) . 6 9 o y iU T , o Y tU T e fo r N o y tK T , N o y tU T e , 158 o y u j u ) ( g c n t i d t o i i i n i iin )
o rdin ary d a y
( ii \
n a m i n g d a y .s o f t h e w e e k ) , 1.33
lo, l i k e v b l a u x i l , hello, g oodh ye. 2 4 5
o y tD c y e O Y .X ii ( i n l c r j )
184
I I - ( a r l ) f /ic . 5 2
I
e x p a n d e d b y re la l c la u s e . 4 ! in p e r s o n a ! n a m e s . 1 2 6 n - . . . G T M M A y (a rl)
ihal.
57
w iih p r o p n n , 128
Ft-
(a rt)
d ie,
U s (p o ss a rl)
52
m y (etc),
.54
a n d g e n e ra l r e la lio iis b ip , 14 7 n i , r o r i n ii i p p e r s o n a l n a m e , 12 6
H i-
(d e le n n p ro n )
llie one re la te d lo,
54,
147 i T i - ( iiille ile d p o s s a rt) n i -
54
1), I I I
9n nA K i
niv,
in v a r ia b le (b s o f c o m m iin ) . 9 6 (la b ic
ond
n i l (d e le n n p ro n )
this,
56
e x p a n d e d b y e i r c o r r e l a l c l a u s e , 4 11 i i i i J c e - , in r e p o r l e d d i.s c o u r s e a n d c o g n ilio n , 5 1 4 i i i A i N ON, b e fo r e c ire c la u s e
m oreover,
493 no doiiht, 2 3 8 (ihiiosl w ou ld have, 4 9 8 n i . p i | > i ) = ( p r e p ) co n trary to. 2 0 0 i i i T j L i i K O H i i one who works, i / i the diakoniti, I I I i i i N r a ) i : ( iiiil a ll i n a r k i )
n A p io y K o y i i -
n A T t;, f o r m in g p e rs o n a l n a m e , n i(^ -
half'll,
I2 6
69
( g c n d d e o m n i im )
rear,
in c o in b i -
iia liv e a n d iio n - c o m b in a liv e a d v b , 206, 223 l i e ( g c n d d c o m m t i n ) ik y . I 'o n f i i . s e d i n d i e
AI,
O K D I K
lionaries wiili r u t . c. r in . and n F . T n e lop. 210. 211. 212. 2,’ ' lie (nexiis pron) invariable n e anaphoric preilicale. 282 anaphoric subjecl. 274 posilion in seni, 285, 438 as lexlual variaiil in iiianiiseripis, 418 wilh various non-nom seni pallenis, 285, 316, ,?64, 438 invariable n e an d variable n e / T e / N e . 53, 252 anaphoric, 272 calaphoric. 275 com poneni in clefi seni, 463 coinpoiieni in noin seni, 252 copular, 277, 278. 279 endophoric, 281, 284. 464, 470 vowel doubling bclore. 252 variable n e / r e / N e iinaphoric, 267. 273. 274 congnieiice In noni sent, 266, 269, 284 copular, 279 endophoric, 266. 2 8 1 exislenlial there i.v, 266, 462, 465. 471 n e — (art) the. 52 n e e I - (arl) thi.s, 56 n e i - for n i - (arl) the, 58 n e i - (an) this, 56 with prop nil, 128 neN T for n - e N T - , arliculaled relat, 4 1 1 n e N T for n e - e N T - , in cleft .sent. 464 n e p o for n p p o the king. 52 n e c H T bottom , in coinbinalive and noncoinbinalive advb, 206, 223 n e T for n - e r , arliculaled relal, 4 1 1 n e T for n e - e r . in cleft .sent, 464 n e T - invariable (bs of gendd conim nn) one w h o is ..I K ) in altributive constructions of nn, 96 (table 9n I) n G T e a n d n e x e p e for n - e x e - and n - G T g p e - , articulaled relal, 4 1 1 n e T e a n d n e x e p e for n e - e x e - an d n e - e r e p e - . in cleft sent, 464 n eT M M iy (detenu pnin) lh al one. 57 n e T N iN o y = , synlax of, 110 n e r n e (comm nn) lop. fonning com pound prep. 2 11 7iejci= See n e j c e -
513
S I M
(
t
( o r
I i<
I ■■ i ) i
i i e j c e - , n e J C . \ = ' ' ■ n i l c < 'i i | u g \ b o i d ) '■liiJ pN— (
llii\ n/ic. SX i'K('iliulC(l I n i c l ; i t i \ c c l.iii'.o . I I I
p o '^
I I M T ( s l a i i v c i ;;( / ( . ‘.N |||;|\ . i l , II I -
c u t)
IIP-
ihc.
K iS
‘' S
i i c i ^ i i >i , .1)1 m i l / i l i i
M in k
/(I
( ( I c l r i i i ) | i i ( i i i l (/;<
w iili
(iro|>
n il. 12 K
f i K C T ( c le ie im [ i r o n)
'I ■ 'iiri , I im) riiir'u - I I
MH I f n ,
pN'l'^
I'lliri TiK« - tan) ihi- min i nl'.n iln-
iiK t
II
■I'l’ l ' i m n *
p o s it io n s in s e iit , 3 8 0 , ! i l 7 n i l ( d e t e n u |>roii>
ihr ■’llin '
Mi when'
fonning ei\tit\ '•uitcinciit, l.^l in indireci clisci'iiisc. 522 for MnMi w l\en ’\ r i . 493 n N i for nNGYMA S jw il. 41 nN iK oii for iiiieY H iTiK O N xpiriniol. 41 nNOYTe (lo d . pioperized comm nn, 4!i, 127. I.V ) n o o y (prop m u w<^o.y, 132 n n i - , analyzed. 111 n n e T - . analyzed, 110 n p o c p o ® (prep) in a ccordan ce wnh. 2(iO n c T A io y (spec) ninety. 67 n C T A io y - (fonning spec) ninety anil. (il ncu= (delenn pron) //le one l eliitn l to. ,S4 ncuT (inf) run, syntax of, 168 nujGN, in personal nam es, 126 n ^ N - (vbl auxil) (do) f o r once. 184
\
and
p o y i / f h //.;/
I
-.K i.tv n l
pn) i’ll tj - ( \ I'l (111 I-\11 III \t I ill'). IS'' p'^o-^ I - (\ lil y ir c w t id o l fiinic. IK ^ p-^'oY o - (\ hi pKTM ) Iill'I nil lie 18 ' c - Ipcis pn-l d u n s h e 'll d ^ ) . 78. '1 8
- c (pers sec 'Milh h e r 'i t . 88 - c , (pers siiM i s h e d ii 'n 'it . 8 “i (pcis siill'i \ l n , l i r i I t , S5 - ( - (I'cmiltiiiuile personal nli|ccl iiuupli) li in ii lic r i il'll ii ii;. 82 - (pers iiiteriiieil) \l ic h e r , i t . 80. 8 ' - Z : - ( p e r s i n t e r n i e i l i she lierlil. 8 0 . 8 3 C A - ( c n n v p n i i e i i t in c o m p o i i i u l p r e p ) . 2 1 2 *‘ A B ii ( g e n d l s s c < 'm m iir i)
w i'ie,
I 14
s y n ta x o l ,
I A i c (g c ix lls s c o m m n n ) III
h eiiiiti/id .
p - ( in f )
the, do
\rvcn.
c i i y c j . T A ty tje ( sp e c )
s u p p lie s m i s s i n g n o in s e n t p r c d ir a ie .
\eM erdo\-. I ' 2 m ile , s y iiia .'c o f , 5 1 4
C A t| ( p r o p i m )
p - f o r N - , 21
c e (in tc rj) \rv . 2 4 1 . 2 4 5
yo n . 8 0 p A C T e ( p r o p i i n ) loniorro^r. 1 3 2 p A T = ( p o s s n n )fo o t of. f e e t of. 1 3 8
C P (sp ec)
p e - (b .s o f s im p le f r a c t io n '; ) , 6 9 , - p e - ( p e r s in t e r m e d ) v o ii. 8 0
- c c
( p e r s iiit e m ie d )
naine <>f.
l( ) 9
b s . 121
(b s o f g e n d ls s c o in m nii). pci.'.nn
rela ted to.
120
c e - ( p e r s p / e f iliir ) (p e rs s e c s iilD
si.xtv an d. (->1 llie\- (ore). 7 8 , them. 8 8
( p e r s s e c s i i f f ) \v )n . 8 8
-C M
( p e r s s e e s iilT )
CM AY (sp e c )
tw o.
ill n d v b \ T C p O M l i e . T M pf >M Il(^.
u\.
318
83
i i \ l y nnd.
-C K
CMAY
\e iir
they.
( p e r s i n l e n m 'd )
p er\o n
rela ted to. 120
■^14
67
( fo n iiiiig s p e c )
67
88
6 7 . 70
- C M X y (lu iin e ric iil
p M N - (b s o f g e n ilis s c o m m iin i.
p c j M n E (g c iu lil c o n in i n il)
-
C E T - (fo n n in g sp e c )
p e q - ( b s o f g e n d ls v c o i i i i n m i l , i i g c n i i i i l
pM-
c e
- c e -
I 38
67
- C i c g c j e ( f o r m i n g s p e c i 'c K ' / f , 6 7
C A -^ s j c e -
260
p e N - ( | x is s n i l )
nuikri sell
e r o f. I(W
52
e x p a n d e d b y p r e p o s it io n , I 8 ( ) . 3 1 2 . 5 2 8
- p -
I 14
: i l l r i h i i i i o n c o r i s t r i i c t i o i i o f n n . ‘)(i
C A M - (b s o l g e n d il c o m m n n ) p - (a rt)
11'
l’<'> i’f' (|>'<•/. 171. ISII pai (iliit all iiiMiki 1 Kii/. I ,/ ' (i'<'< n il I III, 'iilli Ilf I 'S p u j o p n i i - i\M i In \i i.h ,i |K^ f’oj p ii- (\ I'l pi II \i) In \ I ld
mITk) \el of Iw n
donhle, 1 1 f i - o pcur of. 70
-c ;n o o y < ;. - i
/II ". 67
w o f i Y c e ( f o r r n i n e S |K -c)
IN <■ N T ( -
G R I HK
A l . P H A B F n C AL Tipe-
> m o, 67, 70
I (). I o r . c o o y (sp e c )
( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) f u t u r e c o n ju n c t iv e
51 V, 6 7
2 d s in g f e m , 3 5 7
. ( - . ( in . , , o f one tim e . . . til aiunli e r lim e . . . , 4 9 3
c o n ,
ORDER
Io y -
( h '; o f p ro p n n ) , c o u n t in g i h i v s o f
-c o y
Ip c r s se c s u f f )
T i p e - ( f u t u r e c o n ju n c t iv e c o n ju g a t io n ) , 3 5 7 -8 c o n ju g n b s T A p e - , T j i p « , r a re v a r
ih e m o n t h , 13 4
N T A p e -, N TA p = , 3 5 7
Ihrin,
u sa g e , 3 5 8 , 5 0 3
firsi tUi\(iij ilie monlh o r vt-eek). 1 3 4 T s ( p o s s n n ) value oj. I3>< e p o s J c e - hear, s y n la x o f , 5 1 4 ( g e n d l.s s c o m in n n ) exeellcn i, s y n
c o y i lo r c o y - O Y A (p ro p n n )
T A p e T G T N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) f u t u r e c o n
c o y N
T A p i - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) f u t u r e c o n ju n c t iv e
c u 'T M c t ir r n
ju n c t iv e 2 d p i, 3 5 7
1 s t s in g , 3 5 7 re p la c e d b y
ta x o f , 1 14
sec
- c i| (p e rs
s u fO
- c c j p a r a d ig in .
S ee
hirnlherlillihem,
T B A (g e n d d c o m m
ad,
82
se x,
c fd y
fo r C T A y p o y
croxs. 4 1 crucify, 4 1
T , r in a l le l l e r o f i n f ; in p la c e o f e , 1 8 9 , 1 9 3 T , I 'o r iiiin g p e rs o n a l n a m e . 1 2 6
ihe,
52
. G T M M iy (a rt)
f -
(a n )
Ihe,
67
( n e x u s p ro n )
172
57
52
-T e
( e n ). s u f O m e.
p erh a p s. 2 3 8 (d o ) freq u en lly, 1 8 4 n n ) ten ih oiisan d, m yri
sh e/it (is), 5 3 , 2 5 2 . See a lso n e ( n e x u s p r o n ) T e - ( a r t ) Ihe, 5 2 T e - ( p e r s p r e f d u r ) yo u (are), 7 8 , 3 1 8 r e - ( p o s s n n ) haiid(s) of, 1 3 8 T e - f o r 2 T e - ( p o s s n n ) h e a n of, 1 3 8 T e - , T e = f o r T T e - , T T e « ( in O cau se . to g ive . . . , s y n t a x o f , 1 7 2 T e = f o r r r e * ( i n f ) cau se . . . to g iv e .
Te
106 fo r C T A y p o c
(a rt)
(p e rs s u f f )
you .
54
- T e -
( p c r s se e
88
T e e i (d e te rm p ro n )
-
r (p c rs s u f f ) / / H IP , 8 5 ( p e is . s u f f )
- T
l A, lo r iiiiiig
l/m e,
T e i-
p e rs o n a l n a m e , 1 2 6
T i -
I S I s in g , 8 3 . 3 5 1
( p o ss a rt)
-T A -
I. 8 3 ihi.s. 5 6
T e T f o r T e - e T - , in c le f t s e n t , 4 6 4 Te Te
apcc) fifty an d, ihis. 5 6
T x e i o y - ( f o r m in g
T il
here,
e e ( c o n j)
TA t T c
ee
likr»-i\e.
.so loo,
173
Te Te p e
fo r T - e T e -
and
TG Te
and
T e re p e
fo r T e —g t g -
and
T e - e T e p e - , i n c le f t s e n t , 4 6 4
g ive . . . iinlo,
ilun on e. 5 7 (a rc). 7 8 , .^18 - T E T N - ( p e r s in t e r m e d ) you , 8 0 , 8 3 T e T N X f o r T e T N - N A - y o / i w ill. 7 8 , 3 1 8 T H ( d e t e r m [ ir o n ) ihis one, 5 8 T e T M M i y ( d e t e rm p r o n )
507
in c o r r e la t iv e c o m p a r i
s o n , 5(1 6 T A M A * lo r
and
T - S T c p e - , a rt ic u la t e d r e la l, 4 1 1
67
and a d v b s, 2 1 5
TA I Te
215
T e r f o r T - e T - , a r t ic u la le d r e la t , 4 1 1
(K p c c ) / i/ i'v , 6 7
T A i (d e te n u p u m )
yo u w ill, 7 8 , 3 1 8 you w ill, 7 8 , 3 1 8 n e ( a d v b ) each y e a r .
TepN A Te p o M
54
T i e i ( d e t e rm p r o n )
318
T e N T f o r T - e N T - , a rt ic u la t e d r e la t , 4 1 1
T e p A 54
( p e r s in t e n n e d l
T ic io y
th is, 5 6 yo u w ill, 7 8 ,
T g N T f o r T e - 6 N T - , in c le f t s e n i. 4 6 4
ilie one re la le d to,
my.
f o r - t - - (a rt)
Te N A -
iiis l c i i c l o f T A p i , 3 5 1 , 3 5 7 n A - ( d e t e n u p r o ii)
( p e r s in t e r m e d )
T e i- (a rt)
85
T A - ( c o iiju g a le d b s ) , i. e . n t a - c o n ju n c t iv e
85
you , 8 3 ihis, 5 6 ihe, 5 8
r = ( jm s . s a rt ) m v - T
( c o n ju n c liv e ) ,
T A X A ( i n i t a tt m a r k r )
( p e n u lt im a t e p e rs o n a l o b je c t
c fd c
T -
-
T A T e , f o r m in g p e r s o n a l n f u n e , 1 2 6
w riie, d ir e c t o b je c t o f , 8 8 - c ' l i H e fem a le, e x p r e s s in g b io lo g ic a l
r -
t a
P e r s o n a l <;econd s u f
T A U j e - ( v b l a u x il)
m o rp h )
or
luin/ii. 88
f ix e s - c ( j-
-
n ta
357
s y n t a x o f,
T e T N - (p e rs p re f d u r) vo h
5 / 5
SF.LFCT
-T H (sp ec)
fir e ,
C O P T I C
67
T p e f - ( c o n j u g a te d b s ) t a u s i n f 1st s in g ,
T H p = (in fl m o d ) . . .
all.
1 5 2 , 1 5 4 -5 5 , 157
-T H y T N (p ers sec su ff) - T H y T N (p ers su ff)
i N D l i X
you.
359 T p e T G T N - ( c o n j u g a te d b s ) t a u s in 2 d p i.
88 v e rsu s - t n , 85
.3.59 T p e T N - ( c o n j u g a t e d b s ) c a u s in 2 d p i.
(la b le 6 n n . ^ 1 0 ) , 205 - T K (p ers se c su fQ y o u . 8 8
359
the olher, 5 5 T K G T ( d e l e r m p r o n ) llte olher one. 5 5 T K G T e ( d e l e r m p r o n ) ihe olher one. 5 5
T p o ( in f ) c a u s in f, a b s o lu te s ta te , 3 5 9
T M - (n e g a to r), 1 0 5 , 1 6 1 , 2 5 0 , 2 5 1 , 3 4 2
T c = f o r T c e s (in O
T K e - (a rt)
T M Mo ( in f)
cause . . . lo eal
T p p o M r ie fo r
year.
. . . . s y n ta x
o f, 8 8 , 172
T N - fo r 2 T N -T N
Tc o ( in O
(are). 7 8 , 3 | 8 hand(s) of, 1 3 8 ( p o s s n n ) hearl of, 1 3 8
(t)to =
give
you. .
.
( in O
cause . . . W give,
d ire c t
T T o ( in O
cause . . lo give, s y n t a x o f , Ihe one relaled lo.
8 0 , 83
iiniu,
172 54
T u j e N . f o r m i n g i i e r .s o n a l n a m e , 1 2 6
s y n ta x o f,
T j c o (in O
cause . . . lo lake,
s y n ta x o f, 8 8 ,
172
send (hllher),
T N N o o Y = ( in O
d ire c t o b je c t
In ilial y sp e lle d as o y is f ile d under leller
o f, 88 T N p o M n e fo r T e p o M n e fa d v b )
each
215
T o = fo r T T o * ( in O
cause . . lo give
.
. ,
o. y. s y l l a b i c a n d n o n - . s y l l a b i c s t a t u s o f , - y ( p e r s s u f O iheyllhem , v e r s u s - o y ,
hand(s) of, 1 3 8 hvv, d i r e c t o b j e c t o f 8 8 T O T S ( p o s s n n ) hand(s) o f 8 5 ( t a b l e 6 n T O T S ( c o n j ) Ihen. 4 9 2 T O y N - ( p o s s n n ) bo.sonx of, 1 3 8 T O Y < J J s ( |X ) s s n n ) hosom of. 1 3 8 T n e ( m a s c u l i n e g e n d d c o m m n n ) lop T O O T S (p o ss n n )
T o o y = ( in f)
85
7)
-y -y -
(a rt)
yN -
fo r o y N - (e x is l- in d ic b s ), 3 2 2 , 4 7 6
f o r m in g n o n c o m b in .itiv c a d v b ,
van
a, 50
( p e is in te r m e d )
Iheyllhem,
80
y N - fo r o y N - (e x is t- in d ic b s ), 3 2 2 , 4 7 6
and
yN Ti=
yN T E-
and
S ee
yNTA=.
c o n j v b o id )
o y N T e - (su ff
have
y N T e-.
c o n j v b o id )
fo rm in g c o m p o u n d p re p , 2 1 1 .2 1 2
T p - ( jx -rs p r c l d u r )
16
( la b le 6 n n . I 1 -1 2 )
s y n ta x o f, 17 2
S ee
o y N T e - (su ff
have
22^
78.
18
354
238
s i g n a l o f d i i e c t d i s c o u r s e , 1 3 7 . .5 2 3 cu
( c a n s iiifin iliv c c o n jiip iilio n ),
O ...,
t u ( in il a tt m a r k r )
T p A - ( f o i v ji i g n lc c l b s ) c a n s m l I s i M u g ,
T (’< -
s y n ta x o f,
T O )= ( d e t e n n p r o n )
173
year.
cau.se . . . lo drink,
o b je c t o f, 8 8
( ta b le 6 n n . 6 - 1 0 ) , 2 0 5 - T N - (p e rs in te r m e d )
cause . . . lo drink,
172
(p e rs su fO y o H . v e rsu s - t h y t n , 85
T N N A - f o r -f-N i=
each
(a d v b )
s y n ta x o f, 172
T N - ( p e r s p r e f d u r ) tt-e T N - (p o ss nn)
T epoM ne
215
(d)
a s a llo p h o n e o f o y
- c u (g e n d ls s su ff)
greal,
(u).
20
I 12
V5‘) (1 X
in jd vb ial ini pliiasc, 363; 4 9 3 ()nssim I ;iiisal .iiiil 11(111 ( ;iiisal mc;iiiings of, 359 I I’ liiiJii.iicd .
(}> f o i n ~ 2 . 5 2 (}), p h o n e m i c v a l u e o f , 13
V> ()
i i i i i |i i i > i i h '-c '- r p (
T p e = . 3 5 ‘)
X . p h o n c m i c v a l u e o f , 13
grcelini^s.
d i i i ’i i i> l> |ri i ' . \ i i i a x I lf . 3 6 0
x i i p e (in ie rj)
I c i 11)111)’ ( i i i i l y •.i;iR -iiiiM it, 151
x i i p e T e ( in tc rj)
.IS /'( 'iH ld ( i i i i i r n n i l . 1 6 2
x i p i c . in in tc r j x e x i p i c
he unlo,
iis.ijM - 111. U>() 6 3 Tpi -
( c o i i i i n ’r il c d h s ) c a n s m l 2 d s i n g I'c n i.
x ]^
245
grcclin t;\.
245
N-/N i=
f;ni< c
242
fo r x p iC T O C . x p H C T O c
c.u cllcni.
4 1
Chrisl.
IN xc
GREEK
C h risl, excel
fo r x p ic T O c , x p H C T O c
len t,
M . IMI m
41
u
; I II-A I. O K D I K hundred.
u je (sp e c )
67
c y H M , c y H M e ( g e n d ls s c o n in i n n ) . 1 1 4
x c u p i c ( c o n j)
i n a t t r ib u t iv e c o n s t r u c t io n s o f th e n n .
except when, b e f o re i n f w ilhoiil . . . x c u p i c T p e - except when, b e f o re t i r e
493
9 6 , 9 9 , lO l
493
c y H T ( s p e c ) fM 'o
493
hundred.
67
cti;hi.
- u j M H N , - u j M H N e ( f o r m in g s p e c ) 67
4 ' , p h o n e m ic v a lu e o f , 1 3 4 'ic , 4 'iT e
(sp e c )
- 4 'ic , - 4 'i'r e
c u M M O . u jM M c u ( g e n d ls s c o m m n n )
n in e ,f)l
eign , nine, fil
( f o r m in g s p e c )
fo r
sy n ta x o f, 1 1 4
o p M N i e n o o Y (a d v b )
th ree d a y s a g o .
132 u j - ( v b l a u x il) u ji*
he a b le to.
184
337 u jA N .
See
e p u j A N - ( c o n d it io n a l)
u j A N T s (p o ss n n )
nose of.
( c o n ju g a t e d b s )
u jiN T A -
138
until
lim ila liv e
until
lim ila liv e
1 s t s in g , 3 4 9 u j i N T e - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) 2 d s in g f e in , 3 4 9 u jA N T e -
three hundred. 6 7 three thousand, 6 7 U J M O Y N , c y M O y N e ( s p e c ) eigh t, 6 7 c y M T - , c y M N T - ( n u m e r ic a l a f f i x ) set o f th ree . . . . triple, 7 1 u j o ( g e n d ls s c o m m n n ) thou.sand, 6 7 q j o ( i n l e r j ) y es, 2 4 1 , 2 4 5 c y O M N T , u j o M T e (.sp e c ) th ree. 6 7 - u j o M T e ( f o n n in p S | t c c ) three. 6 7 u j o p n , u j o p n e ( g e n d ls s c o m m n n ) first. o p M N Tc y e (sp c c )
( c o n ju g n b s , p re p e r s o n a l) a o r a f f in n ,
( l i m i l a l i v e c o n ju g a lio n )
until.
c y M N T c y o (sp e c )
349
sy n ta x o f, 1 14
c o n ju g n b s u j a n t e - , u j a n t s , 3 4 9
u jo p n
e x t e n s io n o f , 3 4 9
u ntil
lim it ii-
l i v e 2 d p i, 3 4 9
c y o Y - (b s o f gendd c om m n n ), 1 0 9
until
lim it a t iv e
until
lim ila liv e
2 d s in g m a s c , 3 4 9 u j A N T N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s )
< ^ p n - ( v b l p r e e x i) u jp n N -
Is lp l. 3 4 9
'
u j A N T O Y - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s )
71
u ntil
l im it a t iv e
u j c u n e ( in O
I n c ip ie n t a c t io n ; N a r r a t iv e ;
until
lim ila liv e 3d
s in g f e m , 3 4 9
P e r ip h r a s t ic u jc u p n ( p r o p n n )
t g i N T c j - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s )
until
lim ila liv e
( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) I
c y it / p i
until
in v a r ia b le n e w it h , 2 8 5 lim ila liv e
S t s in g , 3 4 9
until.
m orning, 1 3 2 it is right, 4 8 7 —8
c y u je ( im p e r s p rc d )
3cl s n ig m a s c , 3 4 9 |-
(do) fir s t. 1 8 3 be. becom e. Sec E x is t e n c e ;
c y p n N - ( v b l p re e x t)
3 d p i, 3 4 9
u j a .n
origin al, fir s t, 71 (do) fir.st. 1 8 3 ( n u m e r ic a l a f f i x ) origin al, first,
u j p i i - ( n u m e r ic a l a f f i x )
u j i N T K - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s )
( c o n ju g a t e d b s )
f ir s t o f a ll.
238
u j A N T e T N - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s )
u jA N T c
M E N ( i n i l a ll m a r k r )
u j q e (sp e c )
seven ty.
67
seven ty an d. he a b le (to). 3 9 4
u j q e - ( f o r m in g s p e c )
493
op 6m 6om
(e -)
67
c y i p c - ( a o r i s i c o n ju g a t io n ) , 3 3 7 c o n ju g n b s c s u j i p e - , u ) i = / M c p e - ,
hc/it (is). him /it. 8 8 h e/him /it, 8 5
q - (p e rs p re f d u r)
7 8 , 3 l8
M e= , 337
-q
( p e r s se c s u f O
c o n v e r s i« n s o f , 3 3 7
-q
(p e rs s u f O
e x t e n s io n o f , 3 5 2
-q
in v a r ia b le ( | ie rs s u f O , f o r m in g
-q
p a ra d ig m , 8 5
-q
( p e i.s s u f O
m i i r k e i l f o r p a s t t e n s e , 3 4 8 ( t a b le
19 )
and te n se , 5 2 5 , 5 2 8 u j i p e - ( c o n ju g a t e d b s ) a o r 2 d s in g le m , 337
p e r ip h r a s t ic p rc n o m s t a t e , 8 7 , 1 3 ^
85
( p e n u lt im a t e | Te rso n a l o b je c t n i o r p li)
- q -
( p e r s in t e r m e d )
o p B H p - ( g e n d ls s p r e f i x ) / ( ’ //(.iM --, I |2 u j B p - ( g e n d ls s p r e f i x ) / ( ’/ / o ii’ , 1 1 2
hclhim /it.
- q -
hiinlherlitlthcin. 8 2 hclhiinlii.
8(). 8 3
517
S f -L E C T
C O P !
- q - (pers iruermecl) he/hint/it, 80. 83 —q - paradigm. See Personal inlermediaies - q c - (peiiuliimate personal object morph) liini/herlilllhem , 82 q T e y - . q T o y - (num erical affix) set o f fo u r, qu adru ple. 1 1
q T e y u ie {spec) f o u r hundred. 67 q T e y u jo (sp e c)/o » r thousand, 67 q T O . qToe, q T o o y (spec)/o»|-, 67 q T o y e n o o Y (advb) f o u r d a ys a^o, 132 Z (letter)
initial; in Greco-Coptic morphs, 40 misplacement and om ission of, 17 2 Ae, g Jie ey , (gendlss comm nn) /ast. syniax of, 114 ? A e io (interj) truly. 245 ?A eH GMnATG- before, 493 2AeH e r p e - before . . -ing, 493 ?AeH M nA Te- for ?AeH e - M n A T e hefore, 493 2 AK (gendlss comm nn) sober, syntax of, 114 ?AM- (bs of pendd comm nn), 109 (conj) a t the sam e tim e, 493 ?AMHN (interj) amen.' 24S 2 AMN- (bs o f gendd comm nn), 1()9 ?JlMoY (impers pred) how ^ o o d it w ould he if, 487, 499 before e p e - (circ), 15l(vil), 426 ?AnA 3 ?AnAO)C (init att markr) in short, 238 2 Arrc (impers pred) it is n ecessary. 487 2 A x e - for ^AgTN- (prep) w ith , 209 2 ATH* for 2 A2TM* (prep) with, 209 2 ATN- for (prep) w ith, 209 (sivc) mony. 63 M , 72- 74 Kir '^ij>TN- (prep) with. 209 lor 2 * t n - (prep) hrxulc, 209 •<>Bi>Yr ({icndil comm iin) left, in non-conihliiiitivc ailvhs. 223 y r (pcnilil eomni nn) m anner. See K JTA ee, N*?e, N e e n n i V>r, iwiV) fa ll, syntax of, 168 ■^f. V.- fin d , syntax of, 168 Vr e p o c before e p e - (circ) d isco verlu n derstan d that . . . . 426, 516 2 F.H- (art) (som e), 50 2 e N K f.- (art) other. 51
518
1C
I NlJK X
2C N K E y -
(an ) other, 51 ^ e N K o o y e (detcmi pron) others, 5 I 2 eN K o o y e n - others w h o are . 96 2 HKG (gendls.s cotnni nn) p o o r, syniax of, 114 2 HA (slalive) f ly , syntax of. I6H 2 H t (gendd comm nn) heart, in conibi/ia tive advb. 207 2 HTS (poss nn) belly of, 138 2 HT= (poss nn) fo re p a rt(s) of. 138 ?HY (stative) fa ll, syntax of. 168 2 HY e - fin d, syntax of, 168 21 - (prep) and. 145 2 iT M n T p e - becau se o f . . -ing, 493 2 > T o y e - for ^ iT o y w - (prep) b esid e. 209 ^ iT o y e N - for ?iT O Y N - (prep) beside. 209 2 ICUCUS (prep) on, paradigm of, 85 (tabic 6 n9) predicate expressing possession, 393 2 iJCN-/ 2 iJCcu= (prep) iipon, 209 predicate expression possession, 393 2 IJCU)- for 2 i-*cn-, 209 25Cao. 2 AAOI, 2 AACU (gendlss comm nn) old. syntax of, 114 (comm nn) m on sen an t/n ioitlservant, m anifesting tw o geiijers, 106 2 n e (.spec)/om-. 67 2 Me H2 0 0 Y, n e - L en t. 66 2 M e - (fonning spec) f o r ty an d, 67 2 M eNe (spec) eigh ty, 67 2 M e N e -. 2 MeNGT- (fonning spec) eig h ty an d, 67 ? M e T - (fonning sp e c )/o m - ond, 67 2 M n T p e - w hile . . -ing, 493 ? N - (poss nn) f a c e of, | 38 ? N - for e 2 p N - (prep) to, 209 2 N - for 2 e N - (art) (.w m e), 50 ?NA= (suff conj vboid and impers pred) it is pleasin g to, 379, 487 ? N e - (suff conj vboid and impers pred) it is p lea sin g to, 379, 487 2 N o y - form ing advb o f m anner . . . />■, 221
2 o e iN e , 2 o iN e (determ pron) som e. 50 2 o e iN e N - an d 2 o iN e n - som e who o re, 96
2 0 AO)c (rnit alt markr) a t txH, 238 - 2 0 0 YT (gendlss suff) iindom esticated. 112
IN
- ;'€ io ^ - r
niiilr,
i
; k i i :k
a
t
i mi
f . X ( ) n * s s i i i j i h i t i l o } ^ i c :i l S f x ,
a h i
, i k
v>uici)q
a i
o k d i r
nil the cciilra rv. 156
l()(>
^OIKiy (Llllljl ill .Stifw ( I S . 493 ;>(k;on (coiij) «.v loiit^ (is, 4*)3 •<><)TAN (coi/j) » he never. 493 (coiij) ii/ieii. 493 •^o i c lor v>i)T (gendd comm nn) pre.seiK e,
210 2 o y i T e (gendlss comm nn) fir.sl, syntax of, I 14 ? O Y 6 - (bs o f gencJd comm nn) exces.', r /, K)9 ^ o y c iT , g o v e iT e (gendlss comm nn) f i is l . syntax of, 1 14 2 0 YN (geiviW comm nn) inside, in com bi native and non-conibinative advbs, 206, 223 2 0 Y0 - (bs o f gendd comm nn) cxce.'is of, 109 ■<»pA= (poss nn) lo ic e (/, 138 2 PA1 u>i>. forming non-combinative advb, 206 er^T loplliollon i. foniiing combinative advb, 223 VPN- (poss nn) /(/cf (f, 138 2 p o y N - (poss nn) voice of. 138 2 p u jip e (comm nn) voh;i^ m anlyoiiiig w om an, m anifesting two genders, 106 2T e - (poss nn) h eorl of, 138 ?TH= (poss nn) heart o f 138 ■<>TH= (poss nn) lip of, 138 2T N - (poss nn) heart of. 138 ? T o o Y e (prop nn) daw n. 132 2 U) (iinpcrs pred) it is enough, 487 7 CU (inf! mod) 1st sing / too/ine too, 152 2 CU (inlerj) enough! 240, 245 2 CUCU= (inf! mod) . . . too, 152. 154-55, 156 ?cuA (inf) f ly . syntax of, 168 ? u ) c (conj) fj.v, 05 if. 493, 505 2 CUC e u j x e - o s if, 493, 505 ^cucTG (conj) so that, an d so , 493. 503 ? cu c T e e - before inf so as to. 493 T tu c T e e r p e - .to that. 493 •^cucTe N T e - (conjunctive), 493, 503 ? c u t for ?OT (gendd comm nn) pre.
(letter) as m onogram fo r/t + s/ (phonem es), 9 (table 1 n 5) phonem ic values of, 13 X iJc e , JCiJceeY, JCiJCeeYe (gendlss comm nn) h ostile, syntax of, 114 j c e - (conj) after direct object o f vb of cognition/nam ing, 513 forming entity statem ent, 151, 338 before m ain clause (not opt) becau se. 493 before prop nn, 129 after vb o f incomplete predication. 185, 338 before e p e - (opt) forming entity state m ent, 338 before e p e - (opt) or e p e - . . . N i expressing polite com m and, prohibi tion, wish, 338 expressing purpose/result, 338, 493 j c e - for JCN- (conj) or else. 145 x e - for jcu) G - talk abou t, refer to, 515 j c e - . . . AN not so that . . . (negatived purpose), 338 J c e - . . . PA p becau se, 493 jce= for TJce= (inf) cau se . . . to t<\kr . . . . syntax of, 172 Jc e e n e iJ iH becau se, 493 x e K - (inf) am ount to, 260 JCEKAC. See JceK i(A )c JceK i(A )c (i.e. jteKAC and JceK iA c) followed by N T e - (conjunctive), 355 forming entity statement, 151, 338 after vb o f incomplete predication, 185. 338 before e p e - (opt) forming entity statm ent, 338 before e p e - (opt) o r e p e - . . . N i expressing polite comm and, prohibi tion, wish, 338 expressing purpose/result, 338, 493 jceKA(A)c AN . . . not s o that . . . (nega tived purpose), 338 jceM H n o T e lest. 493 JCeMHncuc lesl. 493 JCGN- for T u je N - . form ing personal nam e, 126 -X.
5/9
s i
;l e ( - i
c o i
J te N - a n d j c i n - for JCN- (conj) Unking entity tenns o r el.te, 145 signal of interrogative w h eth eiiu i, 5 11 Jce po= for jctu e po= lell, 5 15 JCi- (inf) say, occurence of, 515 J C i N - (prep), followed by foe conversion, 457 JCiN- for JCN- (conj). S ee J c e N JCiN e- for JCiN- (prep) sin ce. 213 jC iN e p e - (prep + foe) a lre a d y . . . when. 493 JtiN N - for JCiN- (prep) sin ce. 213 JCiNTA- (prep + foe) w ir e , 493 JCN- (conj) linking entity term s o r else, 145 signal of interrogative wlieihcrlor. 5 1 I JCN- (poss nn) h ea d of, 138 j c o e i c (comni nn) lo rd /la d y, manifesting two genders, 106 jc o o c sa y things, 515 jc o o c J c e - say, direct object syntax of, 171,514 JCooY= (inf) .':end (ihilher), direct object syntax of, 88 JCOYT- (form ing spec) tw en ty and, 67 jc o y th (spec) rivenly-five, 67 JCoycUT, JCOYtOTe (spec) tw en ty, (il J c n - , telling time, 131 JCTie- (vbl auxil) have to. 184 j c n i - (vbl auxil) h ave to, 184 Jc n o NAS refl get, 393 Jtco (inf) sa y, tell, u tter, talk abou t, speak. 515
without direct object s a y things, 5 IS direct object syntax jcco m m o c j c e etc., 171,514
’ i i c
i n d i
;x
JCco= (poss nil) h ead of. 138 JCcocope (gcndiss coiniii iin) strung, syn lax of, I 14 6e (aclvb) tiny m ore, 215 6 e (coiij) then. 235 6e (detenu pron) an oth er on e. 51 6f .- (art) another. 51 6 1 N- (bs of gendd coiniTi n n ), 109 6 i c - h a lf a, 69 6 m - for 6 n - {inV ifind. 21 6 m 6 o m ( e - ) he a b le (to). .W4 6 n - (inf), before e p e - (foe) , 457. 516 6 n t c . before e p e - (circ) f in d out that. 426. 516 6 o o y = (int) m ake n arrow , direct object of, 88 d iscover/u n derstan d that .
for T-ei a n d t - i . 52 •f, phonemic value of, 13, |5 t . t e , t o y ( s p e c ) /i e, 67 t - (art) the, 58 "t-- (pers pref dur) I (am ), 78, 3 18 "t-- paradigm. See Personal prefixes of tlie durative sentence •fNAs . . unto, syntax of. 88, 173 ®- (art), zero article, 47. S ee d lso Zero arti cle; Zero article phrase -® (pers suff) I/m e 1st sing, 85. 89 (pers suff) you 2d sing fem. 85. 89 (pers intermed) you 2d sing fern, 80, 89 (pers intermed) 3d sing/pl in eT**-. See Bare e x -
Porta Linguarum Orientalium